CONTENTS.

No. 109.

I.—Abstract Journal of the Routes of Lieuts. A. Broome and A. Cunningham,

to the Sources of the Punjab Rivers, rede © ators ous

II.—On Lightning Conductors to Powder Magazines. By W. B. O’Shaugh-

nessy, M. D. Assistant Surgeon, Bengal Medical Service, .... sees

I1I1.—Memorandum on the Trade between the towns of Shikarpore and Canda-

har. By Lieut. J. Postans, Assistant Political Agent, Shikarpore, Sindh,

IV.—Memorandum on the City of Shikarpore, in Upper Sindh.. By Lieut. J.

Postans, Assistant Political Agent, Upper Sindh, - oS HES < 5

V.—Classical terminology of Natural History. By B. H. Hodgson, Esq., Resi-

dent af the Court of Nepal, eae, aletate wake » obi

VI.—Supplementary note to the Memoir on the Hodésum, vol. ix. pp. 694 and

783. By Lieut. Tickell, Political Assistant, Singbhoom, Sites SHeG

VII.—Proceedings of the Asiatic Society, seve eeee eoee

VIII.—On the Mines and Mineral Resources of Northern Afghanistan. By

Captain Drummond, 3rd Light Cavalry, communicated from the Political

Department, Government of India, .... srabehe aid ets Siapas

1X.—Opening of the Topes at the Caves of Kanari, near Bombay, and the Re-

lics found in them. By Dr. James Bird, pibte.2 Py ee a

X.—Note on a Copper Land Grant... By Jaya Chandra, sion Siers

No. 110.

I,—Abstract Journal of the Route of Lieut. A. Cunningham, Bengal Engi-

neers, to the Sources of the Punjab Rivers, =... aiaiate ale ee

I] —Extracts from Demi-Official Reports. By Capt. Arthur Conolly, on a Mis-

sion into Khorassan, communicated to the Editor from the Political

Secretariat, mils = ode eeuts Selere sis

III.—Despatch from Lieut. H. Bigge, Assistant Agent, detached to the Naga

Hills, to Capt, Jenkins, Agent to the Governor General N. E. Frontier,

communicated from the Political Secretariat of India to the Secretary

to the Asiatic Society, Soeaey OBit Sela o et

IV.—Note on the Brahooees. By Capt. Hart, Bombay Army, .... ij stu

V.—A Three Weeks Sail in search of Health—Province of Arracan—Kyok

Phyoo—Its Harbour—Productions—Capabilities—Geological features—

Visit to an active volcano. By Henry Harpur Spry, Esq. M.D., F.G.S. &c.,

Secretary to the Agricultural and Horticultural Society of India, eoee

Page.

105

116

129

136

138

iv Contents.

VI.—Description of some Ancient Gems and Seals from Bactria, the Punjab,

and India, wae otal olote’s views aaa

VII.—Mode of taking facsimiles of Coins. By Vincent Tregear, Esq., See

VIII.—Report on the Soda Soils of the Barramahal. By Capt. Campbell, As-

sistant Surveyor General, saat outiete ence ie

IX.—Report on the Kaolin Earth of Mysore. By Capt. J. Campbell, As-

sistant Surveyor General, ar ep aaa Sees

X.—Proceedings of the Asiatic Society, - i ey aloes Smale

No. 111.

I.—Of the early History of Sindh, from the ‘* Chuch Namuh,’”’ and other au-

thorities. By Lieut, Postans, Assistant Political Agent, Shikarpore, ....

II.—Geological Report on the Valley of the Spiti, and of the Route from Kot-

ghur. By Capt. Hutton, 37th Regiment N. I., Seiela sales os

I1I.—On the two wild species of Sheep inhabiting the Himalayan region, with

some brief remarks on the craniological character of Ovis, and its allies.

By B. H. Hodgson, Esq., Resident at the Court of Nepal,.... whats

IV.—On the Laws and Law-books of the Armenians. By Johannes Avdall, Esq.

M. A, S., &e. e eere @eee e@eee eeee

V.—On Tabular Returns of the N. W. Frontier Trade with Afganistan, ....

No. 112.

I.—Of the early History of Sindh, from the “ Chuch Namuh,” and other

authorities. By Lieut. Postans, Assistant Political Agent, Shikarpore,

( Concluded ). cate wees oes wees ee

11.—Notes on the manners and habits of the Toorkoman Tribes, with some

Geographical Notices of the Country they occupy. By Edward Stirling,

Esq. B. C. S. e@eee eeee sees e@ense e@eee

I1I.—Discovery of Coal in a new site. By W. Dunbar, Esq. Assistant Sur-

geon, 15th Irregular Cavalry, See ee alee eO%.

1V.—Succinct Review of the observations of the Tides in the Indian Archipe- |

lago, made during the year 1839, by order of his Excellency the Gover-

nor General of his Netherlandish Majesty’s possessions, 20th October

1838, No. 3, soe sao a cers see wees

V.—Journal kept while Travelling in Seistan. By Capt. Edward Conolly ..

VI.— Memoir on the Coal found at Kotah, &c. witha Note on the Anthracite of

Duntimnapilly, (H. H. the Nizam’s Dominions.) By W. Walker, Esq.

VII.—Extract from proceedings of the Numismatic Society of London, 1837-

1838, on the comparative Status of Circulating Media at different pe-

riods under the Bactrian and Indo-Scythian Kings, seve cose

No. 113.

I.—Report on the Island of Chedooba. By Edward P. Halsted, Esq. Com-

mander of Her Majesty’s Ship Childers, TAS SOUT Sid af ois

Page.

147

158

159

163

165

183.

198

230

235

291

267

290

300

302

319

341

345

349

Contents.

1l.—Memoranda on the Chulchulheera of the Hills, anc on some Lichens

from the Himalayas in the Collection of the Asiatic Society. By Henry

Piddington, Officiating Curator, Museum, Asiatic Society, .... Sood

III.--On the Topes of Darounta and Caves of Bahrabad. By the late Lieut.

Pigou, Engineers, eiels s056 slater eee Ac eivete

IV.—Report on Productions and Manufactures in the district of Hunumkoon-

dah, in the dominions of H. H. the Nizam of Hyderabad. By A. M.

Walker, Esq. M. D. Assistant Surgeon, communicated from the Poli-

tical Secretariat, Government of India, pris aitaie winiare sie sie

V.—Roree in Khyrpoor, its Population and Manufactures. By Captain G.

E. Westmacott, 37th Regiment Bengal Native Infantry, ols cietate

V1I.—Report of the Curator, (Henry Piddington, Esq.) of the Society’s

Museum for May, case eves eves eevee ee oe

No. 114.

I.—Report on Island of Chedooba. By Edward P. Halsted, Esq. Commander

of Her Majesty’s Sloop ‘Childers’ ( Concluded. ) oes core ooee

II.—Examination and analysis of a Soil brought from the Island of Chedoo-

ba, by Capt. Halsted, of H. M. S. Childers. By Henry Piddington,

Esq. officiating Curator, Museum Asiatic Society, aA a

11I.—Report on the Soils brought from Chedooba, by H. M. S. Childers, By

the Officiating Curator, Museum Asiatic Society, .... aig piv

I1V.—lIllustrations of the Genera of the Bovine. Part I. Siete of Bos

Bibos, and Bison, the individuals examined being the common Bull of

Nepal, the Gowri Gao of Nepal, and the Yak, oe ee ate Sg

V.—On the Geology, &c. &c. of Hunumkoondah (H. H. the Nizam’s Terri-

tory.) By Dr. Walker, Madras Army, ....

-VI.—Note and Tabular Statement N. W. Frontier,

VII.—On the Electro-type. By Charles Huffnagle, Esq. .. ne *

VILI.—Roree in Khyrpore; its Population and Manufactures. By Capt. G.

E. Westmacott, 37th Regiment Bengal N. I. (Cuncluded.) ....

1X.—Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. .. eee coos

377

381

386

393

415

419

436

447

419

471

476

478

479

D00

fen ge

5 oe!

Ce ero: a a “pile iNysn

ix pea sna

ae Ba A By eB:

race sa el ey coe

‘on Praag a Wega 2 ee a ay

dian agi tl oor

rb ghey '

ela inoue i EE litho

“becom Praleries, Pe fase “ .. Bs) z

“Se! Rasy 261 atastg as bap. avitaleqoL ati : croged a 9

seca gia on (ib eeaslandy db Moke gant 4 coipatt. dj {6 dio.

ig Jah (amity thie dvoar [ESE dex, we eben olbaiiad mt emai

be Riana, Ew. Borge beativk Beetaeacie pees, sh Ra

Pe a we por i Ae Fo |

Voce Sinipiile: eget Wide Yor 3 iy Pate By Gayt. ie weeds

y Hhbirsrined ast Ake MORES. ty, eB BSiolna An te

oh ge WRedua's Yes tong.) < OE Ww,

vt th. Racket Fagen Promgenisty: Oi ais ‘Seung my af

TRS: oe AAR eapiperediny, “Beagar et: Cts contig ole we

ae Merry tle Bains "nae a pore et | gee

; Se ; “a ae i, hia ies. tit % :

» at i}

{piles iin tae. Sale er iste, es sehen Re Side, sa a

es ee aS daa ys RR, Oa

; =

ag ——"r x

st ‘7

ea” ini Fr

= fs ae

es ry

Thor

ie «

+ eh OO

i ig

Pe aap

ae 5

a aS ee

F. C< Pay 4

Se oP

te ;

hie te

og. Mit att Bae,

in dd rh

Va a

wk) \

‘ { .e

ENTEN,

Page.

Abstract Journal of the Routes to

the Sources of the Punjab Rivers,

By Lieuts. A. Broome, and A.

Cunningham, .... Ai |

Ancient Gems and Seals, Description

of some, from Bactria, the Punjab

and India, Bato oo.0147

Brahooees. Note on, By Captain

Hart, Bombay Army, _.. «. 132

Chulchulheera of the Hills, Memo-

randa on the, and on some Lichens

from the Himalayas in the Collec-

tion of the Asiatic Society. By

Henry Piddington, Esq. Officiating

Curator, Museum Asiatic Socie-

ty. aie as shod elas Ore

Classical terminology of Natural His-

tory. B. H. Hodgson, Esq.

Resident at the Court of Nepal, .. 26

Coal found at Kotah, &c. Memoir on

the, witha Note on the Anthracite

of Duntinnapilly. (H. H. the Ni-

zam’s Dominions.) By W. Wal-

BER ES. wil aegis

Copper Land Grant.

Jaya Chandra, a .

Despatch from Lieut. H. Bigge, As-

sistant Agent, detached to the Na-

ga Hills, to Captain Jenkins, .. 196

Discovery of Coal in a new site. By

W. Dunbar, Esq. Assistant Sur-

geon, oth Irregular Cavalry, -- 300

Electrotype. On the, By Charles

Huffnagle, Esq, oe ee

Extracts from Demi-Official Reports,

on a Mission into Khorassan, com-

municated to the Editor from the

Political Secretariat. By Captain

Arthur Conolly, seiex LIG

Facsimiles of Coins. Mode of taking,

By Vincent Tregear, Esq. ae

Genera of the Bovine. Lllustra-

tions of the, Part I. Skeletons of Bos

Bibos, and Bison, the individuals

examined being the Common Bull

of Nepal, the Gowri Gao of Ne-

pal, and the Yak, oe on

Geology, &c. &c. of Hunumkoondah

(H. H. the Nizam’s Territory.)

On the, By Dr. Walker, Madras

meTY, 3 “5 386-471

History of Sindh, of the Early, from

the **Chuch Namuh”’ and other

authorities. By Lieut. Postans,

Assistant Political Agent, Shikar-

pore, eee Sea 183-267

_ Island of Chedooba. Report on the,

By Edward P. Halstead, Esq. com-

mander of Her Majesty’s Sloop

Childers «... ee 349-419

34]

Note on a, By

ReneS

449

Page.

Journal kept while Travelling in

Seistan. By Captain Edward Co-

nolly, =e ae Afirk mk)

Kaolin Earth of Mysore. Report on

the, By Captain J. Campbell,

Assistant Surveyor General, -. 163

Laws and Law-books of the Armeni-

ans. On the, By Johannes Avdall,

Esq. M. A. S., &c. ate Si

Lightning Conductors to Powder

Magazines. ‘On, By W. B.

O’Shaughnessy, M. D. Assistant

Surgeon, Bengal Medical Service, 6

Manners and Habits of the Torkoman

Tribes, with some Geographical

Notices of the country they occupy.

Notes onthe, By Edward Stirling,

Esq. B. C. S. “5 se »» 290

Memoir on the Hadésum. Supple-

mentary Note to the, By Lieut.

Tickell, Political Assistant, Sing-

bhoom, wares mes. OU

Mines and Mineral Resources of

Northern Afghanistan. On the, By

Captain Drummond, 3rd Light

Cavalry, Communicated from the

Political Department, Government

of India, aa ae ae

Note and Tabular Statement N. W.

Frontier, Se ae ae

Numismatic Society of London,

1837, 1838. Extract from Pro-

ceedings of the, on the comparative

status of circulating media at dif-

ferent periods, under the Bactrian

and Indo Scythian Kings, oe

Observations of the Tides in the In-

dian Archipelago, made during the

year 1839. Succinct Review of the,

By order of his Excellency the

Governor General of His Nether-

landish Majesty’s possessions, 20th

October 1838, No. 3... fdas

Proceedings of the Asiatic Socie-

ty, ae -- 381-165-500

Productions and Manufactures in the

district of Hunumkoondah, in the

dominions of H. H. the Nizam of

Hyderabad. Report on, By A.

M. Walker, Esq. M. D. Assistant

Surgeon. Communicated from the

Political Secretariat Government

Of India.” os. ee ar 2. 386

Report. of the Curator, (Henry

Piddington, Esq.) of the Society’s

Museum for Mav, _.... ee

Roree in Khyrpoor, its Population

and Manufactures, By Captain G.

E. Westmacott. 37th Regiment

Bengal Native Infantry. ..., 393-479

345

Viil

Route of the Journal of Lieut. A.

Cunningham, Bengal Engineers, to

the Sources of the Punjab Ri-

vers, See eee eile

Shikarpore, in Upper Sindh. Me-

morandum on the. By Lieut. J.

Postans, Assistant Political Agent,

Upper Sindh, ee ait

Soda Soils of the Barramahal. Ke-

port on the, By Captain Campbell,

Assistant Surveyor General, Ey

Soil brought from the Island of

Chedooba. Examination and ana-

lysis of a, By Henry Piddington,

Esq. officiating Curator, Museum

Asiatic Society, .... ees

Soils brought from Chedooba. Re-

port on the, By the Officiating

Curator, Museum Asiatic Society,

Species of sheep, On the two wild,

inhabiting the Himalayan region,

Index.

age.

105

159

436

447

Page.

with some brief remarks on_ the

craniological character of Ovis,

B. H. Hodgson, Esq. Re-

sident at the Court of Nepal, ....

Topes at the Caves of Kanari. Open-

ing of the, By Dr. James Bird, ..

Topes of Darounta, and Caves of Bah-

230

rabad. On the, By the late Lieut.

381

Pigou,. (Engineers.). . .. «wesy wsias

Trade between the Towns of Shikar-

pore and Candahar. Memoran-

dum on the, By Lieut. J. Postans,

Assistant Political Agent, Shikar-

pore, Sindh, che deiwa

Trade with Affghanistan on Tabular

Returns of the, N. W. Frontier, ..

Valley ofthe Spiti, and of the Route

from Kotghur. Geological Report

on the, By Captain Hutton, 37th

Regiment N. [. ee ee ee

257

198

JOURNAL

OF THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY.

Abstract Journal of the Routes of Lieutenants A. Broome and A.

CunNINGHAM, fo the sources of the Punjab rivers.

The object of the journey which we performed during the rainy

season of 1839, was to ascertain the sources of the

Bae oes: Punjab rivers ; and at the same time to collect eve-

ry kind of information that we thought might be useful and interesting

regarding the countries through which we were to pass.

The plan which we laid down for ourselves was to travel in com-

Proposed plan of pany northwards from Simla as far as Tandee on

Journey. the Chundra-bhaga river ; and there separating the

one to make a detour to the east, and return to Simla by the Spiti

river; the other to pursue a westerly course over the hills to Kashmeer.

The source of the Beeas river having been visited before by three

different travellers ; Moorcroft, Gerard, and Hender-

son, all of whom crossed the Sutluj at Bulaspoor,

and proceeded through the state of Mundee to Sooltanpoor, the capital

of Kooloo ; we determined to vary our route from theirs as much as we

were able; and with this view we crossed the Sutluj at Rampore on

the 19th of June, by a jhoola, or swinging rope, from which a loop is

suspended in which the passenger sits. On the 20th we crossed the

mountain spur separating the Koorpua Nullah from the Sutluj by the Gai

Ghatee, or Cow’s Pass, 7,093 feet in height, and descended through a

rich cultivation to the bank of the Koorpua Nullah, which we crossed

by a sanga, or spar laid across the stream on the 2Ist., and ascend-

ing the Chenahee Nullah we passed a water-fall of one hundred feet, and

No. 109. New Series, No. 25. A

Journal.

2 Journal of Lieut. A. Broome and Lieut. Cunningham [No. 109.

reached the village of Suroua, situated in a lovely little valley, where

we saw wheat as fine as any in England. Above the village, the valley

is a level meadow about three quarters of a mile long by half a mile

in breadth, surrounded on all sides by thick woods of walnut, chesnut,

apricot, peach, and cherry, with acacia, mimosa, cypress, cedar, and

every variety of pine : amongst which were white and red roses, jessa-

mine, a white flowering thorn like may, and a beautiful large iris, besides

wall-flowers, forget-me-not, strawberries and poleantus, with flow-

ers of all shades of red, brown, and yellow. There were three water-

falls at the head of the valley; the lowest and least pouring down in

one unbroken stream over the rock, which is naturally hollowed into a

deep recess, forming a very pretty, cool, and musical bower.

On the 24th of June we reached the top of the Pass at the head of

the Suroan Valley, called Chaol Ghaut, 10,170 feet high, where we

halted for the night. Snow was lying ina sheltered ravine on the

northern slope of the mountain, which is part of the lofty range forming

the shed-water between the Sutluj and Beeas rivers. Several of the

peaks in this range are 18,000 feet in height, and are covered with

perpetual snow. From this we descended over a clayey soil, made

dangerously slippery by incessant rain, to the village of Bédath, at the

junction of the two torrents which form the Teerthun river, along

whose banks we proceeded for three days to Larjee, where it joins the

Syneja river, and where about 100 yards lower down the united

streams fall into the Beeas river, just at that point where the Beeas

after running for a long course southward turns abruptly to the west

through a narrow gorge, the channel of the three united streams not

being so broad as that of any one of them. We were much surprized

to find that this remarkable junction of three large streams was not

esteemed holy. We rested in a large cave excavated in the variegated

marble rock by Munnee Ram, a former Wuzeer of Kooloo; who, we

were told used frequently to come to this place for many days together

to escape from the cares of state; but more likely he came to bathe at

the junction of the three rivers, for a more sterile and inhospitable

place could not be conceived. |

We then ascended the course of the Beeas river, which widened

after a few miles into a beautiful large valley ;

generally about half a mile across, and wooded

down to the water’s edge, with a broad winding stream variegated

Beeas river.

1841. ] to the sources of the Punjab rivers. 3

with many islands. We crossed the Gomuttee river, a considerable

tributary on the left bank of the Beeas, by a ricketty wooden bridge,

and passed over the Beeas itself upon inflated buffalo skins to the

fort of Bajowra, where the road from Mundee, by which Moorcroft,

Gerard, and Henderson had travelled joins the road from Rampoor.

On the evening of the 29th of June we reached Sooltanpoor, the

capital of Kooloo, and found lodgings ready for us in the house of the

former Wuzeer of Kooloo. On the following day we paid the Rajah a

visit of ceremony. He was the same Ajeet Singh whom Moorcroft

had seen ; but when we saw him he was completely at the mercy of the

Sikhs, who lorded it over him, even in his own Durbar.

The capital of Kooloo, Sooltanpoor, or as it is sometimes called

Rughoo Nathpoor, from the chief temple being dedicated to Rughoo-

nath, could never have been extensive, and it was then daily becoming

less. It is situated at the confluence of the Serbullee, a small stream,

with the Beeas river. It has but two streets, but they are paved with

boulder stones, as are likewise all the lanes. The houses are built

of stone and wood, but we saw none of any particular neatness. Goitre

was prevalent, diseases of the eye common, and extreme dirtiness

universal. The annual revenue was said to be 1,20,000 Rupees,

of which the Sikh Government seized 70,000.

We left Sooltanpoor on the 8rd of July; but instead of crossing

the river to the left bank, as Moorcroft did, by the two bridges imme-

diately above the town, we proceeded along the right bank. The

valley opened as we advanced, and the scenery became bold and

beautiful. The islands were numerous and well wooded; and the

banks were alternately gentle slopes covered with grass to the water’s

edge, and steep alluvial spurs overhanging the river, and covered with

apricots, peaches, apples, pears, figs, and grasses all growing wild ;

further on, were the pine-clad slopes of the mountains on each bank,

the nearest green, the more distant blue ; and beyond all, appeared the

lofty snowy peaks at the head of the river.

On the evening of the 4th of July we halted on a low bank, close to a

hot well, called Seeta Koond. The well was surrounded by a square

enclosure with a few stone figures of deities placed in the corners. The

temperature of the water was 104°. of Faht. the spring has probably

some connection with the hot wells at. Biseshta-moonh, on the opposite

4 Journal of Lieut. A. Broome and Lieut. Cunningham [No. 109.

bank of the river, which were visited by Moorcroft, who however does

not mention their temperature. In the morning we continued our

journey, and after passing through a forest of noble cedars we reached

the village of Booruwa. There the scenery was very picturesque. On

the left and to the front were snowy peaks; but to the right there

were steep cliffs of gneiss, resembling ‘‘castellated parapets,” as Moor-

croft described them twenty years ago. At two miles beyond this we

passed Kothee, the last village in the vale of the Beeas river, and

proceeded to a very pretty level spot of ground called Ralha, surround-

ed by high cliffs, and steep green slopes, and where the Beeas was so

narrow that one might have jumped across it. In the morning we

made a laborious ascent of two miles by an irregular flight of steps,

built about 25 or 380 years ago by a Brahmin, who had charge of

the custom house opposite the village of Koshee. The road was then

tolerably level for about a mile; after which it continued ascending

for two miles, crossing all the ravines on hard snow beds, which

even then, 7th of July, had not melted, until we reached the head

of the Pass, where from beneath an enormous block of mica slate,

the infant Beeas had its birth at a height of 12,941 feet. On the

top of this block we built a pile of stones, and in the midst erected

a slab on which we inscribed our initials. The crest of the Rotung-

joth, or pass, is a little higher than the mica slate block, or just 13,000

feet, from which it slopes gradually to the north for about a mile over a

hard bed of snow. ‘The heat and glare reflected from the snow were

intolerable, and our faces were completely blistered. From this the view

of the snowy peaks of Tartary, the land of undissolving snow, was

extensive and beautiful. Three thousand feet beneath us rolled the

Chundra river, which even there was a deep stream, 100 feet wide ;

and on all sides was dazzling snow, from the midst of which towered

the gigantic mountains,

Whose lofty peaks to distant realms in sight,

Present a Siva’s smile, a lotus white.

One of the peaks, about twenty miles higher up the river, appeared

like a mighty natural obelisk against the cloudless blue sky. It is call-

ed Indr-sar-deo-ka-than, or “‘ the abode of the supreme deity, Indra.”

The descent was steep and rugged for about three miles to the bank

of the Chundra river, which we crossed by a suspension bridge made of

1841. | to the sources of the Punjab rivers. 5

birchen twig rope, having a span of 106 feet, and a height of forty

feet above the stream. We halted at Koksur, the first village in Lahul,

and the highest on the bank of the Chundra, at an elevation of

10,053 feet. There was not even a bush to be seen as far as the

eye could reach, although the vegetation around the village was rich

and luxuriant, the whole ground being covered with strawberries,

dwarf irises, hyacinths, and pinks ; there was also one primrose in blos-

som on the 8th of July.

From Koksur we proceeded along the right bank of the Chundra for

five miles to the village of Tehling, where we saw on both sides of the

river a few poor withered looking yews; snow was lying in all the

gorges and ravines ; and even in the bed of the main stream there were

large masses forty and fifty feet thick on each side, which had only re-

cently been cut through by the current and undermined. In two days

we reached the village of Gooroo Guntall, twenty miles below Koksur,

at the junction of the Chundra and Bhaga rivers, whose united streams

form the Chundra-Bhaga, or Chenab river, the Sandabal of Ptolemy

the geographer. There we halted as the birchen bridge over the

Bhaga river had been swept away ; and on the following morning we

ascended the left bank of the Bhaga for about. four miles, and passing

through the large villages of Gwajun and Kardung, we reached a

wooden bridge, forty feet span and forty feet in height, by which we

crossed the stream, and then descended it for four miles to Tandee, the

chief village of Lahul, which is exactly opposite to Gooroo Guntall, the

village from which we had started in the morning. The only trees

about Tandee are yews and pollard willows. On the banks of the

Bhaga however there were pines; and we found plenty of wild goose-

berries of which we made very good puddings : some of these gooseber-

ries that we bottled with snow water remained perfectly good after a

journey to Simla, where they were cooked and eaten. We saw some

yellow roses too on the banks of the Bhaga, and some columbine near

Tandee. The crops consist of buck-wheat, common wheat, and barley ;

of which buck-wheat is by far the most common. The crops frequently

fail either through the backwardness of the warm season, or through

the early setting in of the long winter ; indeed for three years before

our arrival at Tandee there had been no good crops of wheat or barley.

The natives however attributed this failure to the displeasure of Provi-

6 Journal of Lieut. A. Broome & Lieut. Cunningham &c. [ No. 109.

dence on account of the conquest of the country by the Sikhs, and the

expulsion of the Raja of Ludakh.

At Tandee we heard of the death of Runjeet Singh; and it was

currently reported that we had been sent to take possession of the

country: this indeed we might easily have done, for our party mus-

tered about one hundred people; and the natives of Lahul are so

cowardly that Moorcroft relates they on one occasion, when invaded

by a small party, buried their swords and fled to the more inaccessible

parts of the mountains. Here we parted company on the morning of

the 15th of July; the one to ascend the Bhaga river and to return to

Simla by the Spiti river; and the other to follow the Chundrabhaga

and to proceed through Burmawur on the Boodhil river to Chumba,

and from thence to Kashmeer.

On Lightning Conductors to Powder Magazines. By W. B. O’SHauGH-

nessy, M. D. Assistant Surgeon, Bengal Medical Service.

The paper now published by Prof. O’Shaughnessy is in continuation of

his paper on Lightning Conductors, which appeared in No. 99 of this

Journal. The positions contained in that former essay having been ar-

raigned in a contemporary publication,* the Professor put forth a rejoinder

to the exceptions taken against his views and statements by the writers

above alluded to, and then placed his rejoinder in my hands for pub-

lication in this Journal, as a necessary sequel to his original essay. The

circumstances under which the paper now published was written, give

it of necessity a certain controversial tone, which I have felt myself bound

to account for, while laying before my readers a paper, without which the

essay on Lightning Conductors, already in their hands, would be incom-

plete. lacie Blecses 3 ty

To the Editor of the Calcutta Journal of Natural History, &c.

Illness and absence from Calcutta have prevented my sending an

earlier notice of the article which has appeared in your last number re-

lative to the attachment of lightning rods to Powder Magazines.

The only point in the article in question, which I feel myself called

upon to notice in your pages, is the attempt of your correspondent to

shew that I had falsely described the spear-head of the Britannia on

* Dr. M‘Clelland’s Quarterly “ Journal of Natural History.”

1841. ] On Lightning Conductors to Powder Magazines. 7

Government House, as having been partially fused by lightning, on the

occasion of the building being struck on the 29th of March 1838.

Your anonymous correspondent accuses me of such shameful falsehood,

on grounds which I shall take up in the order he gives them.

lst. That he examined the identical piece of iron, which he states

now forms the point of the spear on the Britannia, and that he could

observe no evidence of fusion.

As the marks of fusion I saw and described, were not larger than

the size of a grain of duck shot or a small pea, and as the iron (sup-

posing the piece to be identical, which I shall presently shew strong

reason for doubting) must have been exposed to the weather for two years

and ten months, an impartial writer should rather have concluded that.

the marks had been effaced by the exposure, than that I had stated

what was untrue.

Accordingly your correspondent asserts, secondly, that he obtained

testimony of the individual by whom the repairs were executed; who

gave negative evidence to any alteration having been made in the point.

In justice to myself, 1 am bound to protest against such evidence be-

ing for one moment attended to—“Anonymous” No. 1, charges me

with falsehood, and adduces the testimony of ‘‘ Anonymous” No. 2, to

corroborate his case—and this in a simple matter of fact. Opinions or

arguments are as strong in every respect, though expressed anonymous-

ly as when authenticated by the writer’s name. But on questions of

facts, personal testimony must ever preponderate. Why does not your

correspondent come forward in his own name ? His papers are high-

ly creditable to his abilities, and his testimony would then be of value

as to any fact he asserts.

But receiving the case on internal evidence alone, it might be that

no alteration was made in the point during the repairs; it might be that

the spear-head is the same as that struck, and nevertheless it is but the

natural consequence of the corrosion of an iron point by the influence

of climate, that the appearances I saw may have been entirely obli-

terated.

Thirdly. He accuses me of error in speaking of the spear-head, when

I should have called it the spear-point. This is not worth rejoinder.

Nothing but the mere spirit of hyper-criticism could condescend to

such trifling.

8 On Lightning Conductors to Powder Magazines. {No. 109.

Fourthly. He asserts that the lower portion of the wooden spear

shews no evidence of the lightning having passed through it. Neither

should it, as it never was touched.

The lightning first fell on the point, the concussion shivered the spear,

and the arm of the statue; from the point it struck the copper of the

dome, and thence by three divisions it entered the house, as described

in the accompanying report.

Fifthly. The writer states, ‘‘ there is no evidence of a direct or later-

al discharge on the spikes with which the head of the figure is cover-

ed.” These may or may not have been affected, there was no examination

made of the spikes at the time, as I had no fancy to climbing the scaf-

folding for the purpose, and as far as their having been struck or not

affects the question of the point, those who know the freaks and antics

which lightning displays in its course, will readily admit that one metallic

point may be struck close to another, without this being interfered with

in the least degree.

Lastly. He dwells emphatically on the circumstance that neither

Captain Fitzgerald nor his Assistant Mr. Barnes, the overseer, have in

any way publicly confirmed my statement, although they are both in

Calcutta, and could have been appealed to.

On this I have to observe, that the writer is (perhaps better than any

other person) aware of circumstances which rendered it difficult for

me to appeal to Capt. Fitzgerald or Mr. Barnes on this subject—nor

did I then, nor do I now, feel the necessity of such an appeal. I de-

scribed what I saw. My character for veracity must stand or fall

by the correctness of my statement ; had the gentleman alluded to, or

his assistant publicly contradicted me, it would still be a question with

every impartial man, which statement was to be believed implicitly ;

and most observers would probably conclude, that it was more likely

that the marks of fusion I described had escaped the attention of

these individuals, than that I had wilfully and falsely described that

which had no existence.

I contend, too, that it can never be admitted that a writer’s state-

ments are invalidated in the least degree by the silence of any persons

he refers to. The writer cannot force these persons forward in his

defence, and many reasons may exist, too deep for the world to pene-

trate, and too powerful to allow the parties to act with perfect candour,

7 NN eee

1841.] On Lightning Conductors to Powder Maguzines. 9

towards one with whom they may have been placed in disagreeable

relations. I speak of course generally, and solely with reference to the

hardship of being expected to force forward the testimony referred to.

Throughout his remarks, the writer attaches much more importance

to the question of the spear-point being struck or fused, than it in

reality deserves; but as he admits, (p. 492, last paragraph) that had

it been so struck, the fact would have been “ fatal to his pre-conceived

Opinion as to the course of the lightning on that occasion,” I am war-

ranted in adducing some further evidence in support of my statement.

On the morning after the accident, I was invited by Captain Fitzge-

rald to visit Government House, and offer him suggestions as to

the repairs required, and the re-arrangement of the conductors. I went

there in the evening and met Mr. Barnes, who shewed me the broken

articles, and the course of the explosion. Captain Fitzgerald I now

recollect was not present on that occasion, I wrote to Captain

Fitzgerald next day, and among other suggestions I especially dwelt on

the necessity of replacing the wooden spear by one of metal, con-

necting this with the copper of the dome, and this lastly by metallic

straps, with four additional conductors to be erected adjacent to the

dome. Captain Fitzgerald’s report, hereunto annexed, shews that my

suggestions were carried into effect. On this I have here one remark

to make. If this report be correct, if my suggestions have been

followed, if the metal spear has been erected, what becomes of your

correspondent’s assertions that the identical point has been replaced,

and that he has re-examined the lower part of the original spear.

If, on the other hand, the wooden spear has been replaced as it origi-

nally stood, then every impartial electrician will admit,* that the Go-

vernment House of Calcutta will in all probability be again, and at no

distant period, the scene of a similar casuality to that of the 29th of

March, 1838. In this case it is in truth provided with a snare for

every thunder-cloud that passes.

With reference to my plans, before the writer censures these he

should in fairness clearly and fully state what they are. This he does

not do, and for such a statement I refer to the Journal of the Asiatic

Society for 1839, in which my papers are published. If the Editor

* As Captain Fitzgerald does indirectly in his report. —W. B. O’S.

10 On Lightning Conductors to Powder Magazines. | No. 109.

of the “Calcutta Journal of Natural History,” desires to be impartial,

I claim from him the circulation of these papers to his: subscribers,

with additional notes with which I will supply him with pleasure,

as extra limites to his Journal. All expenses of printing, postage, &c.

I will. cheerfully defray. His subscribers will then see that I have

never opposed the attachment of conductors to Powder Magazines—

that I freely admitted their value, but contended that under such

peculiar circumstances, they should be erected in a greater number

than Mr. Daniell recommended, and at a certain distance from the

Magazine.

In conclusion, I have to acknowledge the kind exhortation of your

correspondent that I should conduct this discussion with moderation,

and that I should refrain from indulging in a spirit of injustice to Mr.

M‘Clelland and himself. . All this is very amiable in gentlemen who

are endeavouring to fix upon me an imputation of falsehood, and who

would hide from the world, that in consequence of the Griffith and

Wallich controversy, and of another public occurrence of some celebrity,

T have not for some time had the happiness of being numbered among

the friends of my commentators on this occasion. The remembrances

of past collisions has never yet mingled honey with a critic’s ink, the

strongest impulse of nature would, on the contrary, urge him to dip

his pen by preference in gall or acid. How far this feeling has oper-

ated on the present occasion, those who know the relative positions

of the parties can readily conclude; to others I shall commit my

arguments and facts, (if Dr. M‘Clelland will allow me to do so) in the

confidence that they will be dispassionately considered, and in the feel-

ing that if I fail, there is no disgrace in being worsted in a controversy

with an antagonist of Mr. Daniell’s deserved reputation.

I am Sir, with much respect,

CALCUTTA, Your obedient servant,

Ist March, 1841. W. B. O’SHavucunsssy, M. D.

Assistant Surgeon.

Ee ee

1841.] On Lightning Conductors to Powder Magazines. dl

Report by Captain FitzGERaxp on the accident by Lightning to Go-

vernment House, Calcutta.

To Captain SANDERs,

No. 568. Secretary, Military Board.

Sir,

I have the honor to report for the information of the

Military Board, that the Government House was struck by lightning

during the storm which occurred early this morning. The lightning

seems to have been attracted to the building by the iron at the

point of the spear attached to the figure of Britannia on the top of

the dome; after demolishing the spear, it pursued its course down the

external copper of the dome, without apparently doing any injury,

and forced its way into the ball room in three separate places. It has

left its traces on the ceiling and wall of the southern division of the

room, where it has injured one of the pier-glasses, and then passed out

at the adjoining window. Again, on the eastern side of the central di-

vision it has pursued a similar course, injuring a pier-glass, and again

passing out of the adjoining windows. On the western side of the central

division it has done the most injury, for after passing through the ceil-

ing it has broken one of the pier-glasses at its corner, then running

down into the marble hall, has escaped out of one of the windows, break-

ing in its exit, as the others also did, several panes of glass.

2nd. I requested Dr. O’Shaughnessy to inspect the effects of the

lightning, and he has expressed his surprize that so little comparative

injury has been caused by it. The sharp point of iron at the end of the

spear, and the studding of the shoulders of the statue with iron nails

(intended to prevent birds from sitting on it) has served in the first

instance to attract the lightning, and that it has never been struck be-

fore, he attributes to the protecting power of the four conductors,

which, however, he considers to be twice as far from each other as they

ought to be. |

3rd. In repairing the statue, he recommends that the spear should be

made of metal, and that it should be connected with one or more of

the corner conductors by means of a continuous metallic rod. It

would perhaps also be advisable, under the circumstances above men-

12 On Lightning Conductors to Powder Magazines. [No. 109.

tioned, to affix four more conductors to the house, to render it more

secure from a similar visitation.

4th. With the Board’s permission, I will, in rectifying the damage,

carry the improvements above suggested into effect.

I have, &c.

( Signed ) W. R. FirzGERaLp,

Fort WILLIAM, Civil Architect.

380th March, 1838.

Memorandum on the Trade between the Towns of Shikarpore and

Candahar.—By Lieut. J. Postans, Assistant Political Agent, Shi-

harpore, Sindh.

As it is of importance in connection with the prospects of trade

with the countries bordering on, or accessible by means of the river

Indus, to ascertain what return commodities may be looked from these

quarters, their value and quality as suitable to the European market,

I have availed myself of the arrival of the annual Kuffillahs at Shikar-

pore from Candahar, to obtain the following information on the various

articles composing the investments from the latter place, shewing the

return trade for English piece goods, metals, groceries, &c. transmitted

from the former.

I have ascertained, from good authority, that the market at Candahar

for European fabrics of the usual manufactures suitable to the habits

and tastes of the people of these countries, is at present unusually

brisk, and the demand far greater than the supply; moreover, that

there is every reason to believe from the increase of security to the

merchant, decrease of transit dues, impulse lately given to Candahar

as a mart for the N. W., and the influx of population, that this

demand will not be likely materially to decline. To the fabrics in

demand, profits derived, and other particulars, I will refer hereafter.

The insecure state of the Bolan Pass, has this year retarded the

arrival of the Caravans, and decreased their number. I shall quote

the following list of articles received by one :—

No. 1.— Turquoise Earth—mds. 14—price from four rupees to

twelve rupees per tb. This article is an important one in the trade to

1841. | Trade between Shikarpore & Candahar. 13

Shikarpore from Candahar, but it is doubtful if it would be adapted to

the European market. The mines are situated at Nishapfr near

Meshid, and the Persian Government has of late years placed agents

to prevent any large or valuable stones from being exported to Herat,

whence they find their way to Shikarpore via Candahar ; there is there-

fore a great scarcity of the large Turquoises, which are so much prized,

the smaller are sufficiently plentiful to be worn by all classes.

The stone is polished from its rough state by means of a vertical

wheel of baked clay, set in motion by the hand and moistened, the

value of the stone being entirely determined by the depth of its colour,

and absence of white flaws.

2.—Raw Silk (kokanee)—4 md. price rupees 9-9-0 per bb.

See memorandum already furnished on this article.

3.—Churus from Bokhara—5 mds.—price 3 annas per lb.

An intoxicating drug prepared from hemp seed (Bang), and used

in these countries for the same purposes as opium elsewhere.

4.— Gum from Candahar—46 mds.—3 lbs. per rupee.

This gum appears of the same description as that which is

known as “Gum Arabic,” and is in most extensive use for

dyeing, &c.

5.—Silk—Manufactured fabrics from Herat of various kinds—

pieces 1854: prices not fixed.

None of these would be adapted for the European Market, being

entirely manufactured to suit Asiatic tastes, and principally

used in the wealthier Sindee harems.

6.—Dried Fruits of various kinds, kismis—prunes, dried black

grapes, walnuts, dried apricots, almonds, and dates, in great

quantities: —prices not quoted, as not probably adapted for trade.

7.—Tinsel Thread for embroidery.—2 mds.—price | anna per tolah.

8.—Khund Seah, preparation from the sugar cane of Jellalabad—14

mds.—price 14 lbs. per rupee.

9.—Broken Copper and brass vessels—44 mds.—copper 1 rupee 8

annas per lb.—brass ] rupee 7 annas per lb. These are returned

to Shikarpore to be re-manufactured, for which they do not

apparently possess the means at Candahar.

10.—Rodung. Madder dye—40 mds.—price 8 rupees per md. This

is an important article in this trade, and brought down in con-

14 Trade between Shikarpore 3 Candahar. [No. 109.

siderable quantities. There aretwo descriptions called “ Rodung

hukree,” and ‘‘ Rodung phurreeah.” The latter is cultivated at

Candahar, is of a larger size, and valued at 16 rupees per md.,

or double that of the other.

11.—Saffron Bakooee—4 md.—per lb. 15 rupees. ‘“ Bakooee” so

called from its being produced at Bakwa, to the west of

Candahar.

12.— Safflower from Herat (quantity not known) price 37 rupees per

lb. about 10 boxes annually, of from 6 to 10 Ibs. per box.

13.—Gum Salop from Herat (quantity not known)—5 Rs. per lb.

Small quantities only of this article are brought down, but it

is in great request at Shikarpore.

14.—Sir Khisht, a species of manna, price 5 Rs. per lb ; from Herat,

used medicinally, and about 10 mds. imported annually.

15.—Musagh, dye from the walnut tree; Cabool—8 mds—l1}4 lb.

per rupee.

16.—Antimony from Beila in Lus—mds. 153—price 12 lb. per rupee.

An article in great demand, from the constant use made of it by

the natives of these countries. If adapted to the European

Market, it should find its way to Bombay via Soumeany and

Karrachee.

17.—Old paper 64 mds.—price 2 Ibs. per rupee. Sent to Shikar-

pore to be re-manufactured.

18.—Punvieer (not known)—20 mds.—9 Ibs. per rupee. Used me-

dicinally, and produced from some wild shrub in the hills.

19.—Podeneh—dried mint—6 mds.—5 rupees per maund.

20.—Hingozeh—Assafcetida—60 mds.—1l+ rupee per lb. This is

an important article of this trade, being produced abundantly

in Khorassan and the hilly country of Beloochistan.

21.—Carraway seeds from Khorassan (quantity not known)—2 lbs.

per rupee—about 70 or 80 mds. imported annually.

22.—Airmah, a very fine description of cotton from Herat, about

80 mds. imported annually—price 12 rupee per lb.; used in

embroidery, and highly prized. |

23.—Cochineal from Khorassan (quantity not known)—price 9

rupees per lb. The amount of annual import may be about

8 or 10 mds., and its price is occasionally from 18 to 20

1841. | Trade between Shikarpore & Candahar. 15

rupees per lb.; it is used in dyeing silks, and also brought to

Shikarpore from Bombay.

24.—Bhojgund (name not known) from Khorassan—price 14 to 15

rupees per md.; annually about 70 maunds; in great request,

and used as a dye to silks.

25.—Gooljileel (name not known) from Khorassan—price 15 rupees

per md. ; annually about 80 mds. ; used as a green dye to silks.

The following, though appertaining to Cutchee, are inserted here,

as they are products of that country, and imported into the Shikarpore

market :

26.—Alum from the hilly country of Cutchee, annually about 200

mds.—price 8 rupees per md.

27.—Khunzul, Colocynth, bitter apple, grows as a perfect weed all

over the plains of Cutchee, and to be purchased at Shikarpore

7 or 8 per one pice.

28.—Saltpetre can be manufactured in Cutchee and other parts of

the country in any quantity required; value at Shikarpore 6

rupees per md.

29.—Sulphur produced in the Murree and Boogtie hills, where are

mines which deserve attention; about 10 or 12 mds., are brought

annually to Shikarpore, where it is valued at 4 rupees per md.

30.—Khar, a kind of potash, produced by the incineration of the

Lye, or tamarisk, and other salt shrubs; it is in great use in

scouring, dyeing, &c. and worth 1 rupee per 14 md. at Shikar-

pore, 10 or 12,000 mds. are brought in yearly.

The prices of the above articles include all duties, and few of them

are exported beyond Khyrpore, or the Sindh territories. About four

_ Caravans arrive annually, and the profit on this branch of the trade

is about 10 per cent.

: The trade from Shikarpore to Candahar in British manufactures

_ consists principally of the articles hereafter enumerated, and the present

| profits, al} expences paid, are at least 50 per cent. between the two

_ places, notwithstanding the double rate of Camel hire, (52 rupees)

| consequent upon the demands of our troops. As the present state

of the Candahar market, however, may not be considered a fair cri-

terion, or average of the profits of the trade, I may mention, that these

16 Trade between Shikarpore & Candahar. [ No. 109.

are never less than from 15 to 20 per cent., the rate of Camel hire

being 20 rupees a Camel, carrying from 6 to 7 mds.

I learn that complaints have been lately made of the great inferio-

rity of the articles, particularly the want of stability in the colours of

the chintzes (printed cottons of all kinds come under this denomi-

nation) always in great demand.

In the following list of the fabrics above alluded: to, I have also

given the names by which they are known in these countries, with

samples of such as are not recognized :—

1.—“ Ulwan Makhootie,” red dyed Cotton Cloth.

2.—Cotton White.

3.—

4.—‘ Chuhulwel,” long cloth (of apparently very inferior des-

‘* Kessie,” partly coloured.

criptions).

5.— Chintz pukhtet,” (glazed Chintz. )

6.—“ Budul,” (printed cottons. )

7.— Madrapat,” bleached.

8,——__——— unbleached.

9.—“ Abrah,” (zebra) red and white.

10.— —, yellow.

11.—- , Chenay.

12.—“ Jamadanee.”

13.—“ Mulmul.”

14.—“ Juggernat Muslin.”

15.—“ Mukhmul,” (black velvet. )

16.—“ Patun,” bleached, species of sheeting cloth.

17,___———,, unbleached.

18.—‘* Mahoot” coloured (coarse broad cloth.)

19.— Khinkaubs.”

Memorandum on the city of Shikarpoor, in Upper Sindh. By Lreut.

J. Postans, Assistant Political Agent, Upper Sindh.

Shikarpore may be considered the most important town in the

Shikarpore—its country of Sindh in point of trade, population, and

position. influence. It is situated in Upper Sindh, or above

Sindh proper, at a distance of twenty-four miles NW. from the

Indus at Sukhur, about forty miles from the edge of the desert at

Rojhan, which separates Upper Sindh from Cutchee.

Shikarpore dates its origin to the year of the Hijira 1026, (a.p. 1617)

Origin. is an ill built dirty town, its walls in a state of

dilapidation and decay, the consequence of the total neglect and

apathy of the chiefs of the country to the improvement of their posses-

sions, further shewn in the neglect of the Sindh. A canal flows within

a mile of the city towards Larkhana, providing means of irrigation

to a large tract of country, and a temporary, but important water

communication from the Indus, during a few months of the year.

The houses in Shikarpore are built of unburnt brick, upper roomed,

Description of and some of those belonging to the wealthiest

the city. Sonears are of respectable size, and convenient. The

streets are narrow, confined, and dirty in the extreme; the great Bazar,

which is the centre of all trade and banking transactions, for which

Shikarpore is celebrated, extends for a distance of 800 yards, running

immediately through the centre of the city. It is, in common with the

Bazars of all towns in Sindh, protected from the oppressive heat by

mats stretched from the houses on either side ; this although it imparts

an appearance of coolness, occasions by the stagnation of air an insuf-

ferable, close, and evidently unwholesome atmosphere, evinced in the

sickly appearance of those who pass nearly the whole of their time in

the shops and counting houses. This Bazar is generally thronged with

people, and though there is little display of merchandize, the place

has the air of bustle and importance which it merits. The walls of

Shikarpore—also of unburnt brick—have been allowed to remain so

totally without repairs that they no longer deserve the name of a pro-

tection to the city; they enclose a space of 3831 yards in circum-

ference.

18 Memorandum on Shikarpore, in Upper Sindh. [No. 109.

There are eight gates. The suburbs of Shikarpore are very extensive,

and a great portion of the population calculated as

belonging to the city reside outside, particularly the

Mahomedans and labouring classes. With the exception of one toler-

Suburbs.

able Musjied on the southern side, Shikarpore possesses no building of

importance. :

By a census taken with considerable case during the preceding

month, the following is a return of the inhabitants of this city, including

the suburbs :—

Hinpoos.

Males, 9,494 ; 18,913 souls. Houses 3,686.

Females, 9,419

MaHOMEDANS.

Males, 4,556, 8,647 souls. Houses 1,806

Females, 4,091

In detail thus :—Hindoos divided according to professions—

Hindoos. Grain sellers, Je ie od i 64

Confectioners, a am Bid be. 56

Cotton sellers, aS ve Bs oF me 12

Soucars, bd be pS re 390

Shroffs, OM ee ee. te. 66

Cloth merchants, ae ad: te a8 65

Goldsmiths, as He eee ad 94

Dealers in Drugs, __... uo ie oe 32

Metal; “oo. vat H Re 17

———— Silk, # au ae ae 37

Enamel, ... bs: ny 5 ALS

Perfumes, ... oe 2 aK 11

Vegetable and Milk sellers, ... ae a 46

Dealers in dry fruit, ... BE i A 67

Do. salt and sundries, au Hts act 149

Ivory turners, eee 503 s ote 3

Total Hindoo Shops, 923*

—S

* The remainder of the Hindoos are composed of Krahmins, and those who are not

shopkeepers.

1841. ] Memorandum on Shikarpore, in Upper Sindh. 19

The Mahomedans divided according to trades, &c.—

Mahomedans. Weavers of coarse cloths, ... alt vy. al ooA

Dyers and washermen, ae a Wohih24s

Oil pressers, ... uae son aa ty 50

Weavers of mats, pe a aM cae 30

Tailors, iat WS. Re te SONS 00

Barbers, ee a pid oe e244

Shoemakers and workers in leather, ... Ln OOS

Ironmongers, ... “be ae oe, Sib A UPbe (0)

Embroiderers, a8 iy; $8, An 95

Lapidaries, ... is ihe ae hae) W164

Potters, ms Me ae Ne 3% L108

Cotton cleaners, Ac a i, Se totes Wal!

Butchers, ane zh de es nes 89

Carpenters, ... ae ds si sate DAG

Preparers of woollen mamids, Ly ae oe

Labourers, ... aoe lt ey Fh ONA GT

Musicians and singers, ee nt Sons PAGE

Cossids, se : iad Be one 83

Syuds and Moolahs, ... ope fg a7) S488

Cultivators, ... 10 Ms ah ne 2389

Gardeners, ... Ale Re 2 Le 47

Total, ae sled side ... 8,647

Independent of the above, there are altogether 1001 Affghans and

Affghans to Pattans in the city of Shikarpore, employed as

Pattans. cultivators, or for Police duties by the Government ;

they are of the following tribes. —Populzyge—2. Pishengee (Syuds) ; 3.

Bamkzye ; 4. Moorzye ; 5. Easakzye ; 6. Mogal ; 7. Lukoozye; 8. Doora-

nee; 9. Baber; 10. Oosteranee; 11. Monim; 12. Kakut; 13. Ghilzee;

14. Bureeh; 15. Burdarame ; 16. ; 17. Babee ; 18. Dureanee ;

19. Owan: 20. Prumee.

It will be seen from the above that the population of Shikarpore

Population of Ma- ™@Y be calculated at 29,700, say 30,000 souls, of

homedans and whom 9,647, say 10,000, or one-third, are Mahome-

Hindoos.

dans. In the above are also included many Hindoos,

who are employed in distant countries as agents from the Soucars.

20 Memorandum on Shikarpore, in Upper Sindh. [No. 109.

The Hindoos carry on all the trade, while the cultivation and arti-

Hindoo’s trade, 22 2S4!P of almost every denomination is in the hands

of the Mahomedans.

The dress of the Hindoos of Shikarpore varies little from that of

Condition andman- the same class in other parts of India, except in

ners of Hindoos. those who are servants of the native Governments,

as deputies or collectors of revenue, and these invariably adopt the

beard of Mahomed and costume of Sindh. On their habits of life and

religious observances, the Hindoos of this city, as indeed throughout

the whole of the Mahomedan countries westward of the Indus, indulge

in a degree of laxity, totally at variance with the strict rules by

which they generally profess to be regulated; they possess however

an unusual degree of influence at Shikarpore, and are too valuable

to the financial resourses of the country not to be permitted to

maintain it.

With the exception of the Moolahs and Syudhs, few of the Maho-

Condition of Ma- medans of this city are either wealthy or influential.

homedaus: The Affghan Zamindars who under that rule held

important possessions in the vicinity, and were men of note and

consideration, have been gradually stripped of their rights by the

Talpur chiefs, although in many cases the same were guaranteed to

them under promise held to be sacred; in consequence of this their

number has considerably decreased, and those who remain are poor,

and from the connections they have formed in the country have become

naturalized, and are no longer entitled to be called foreigners.

The country in the immediate vicinity of Shikarpore is low, and

Adjacent country admits freely of irrigation from the inundations of

and cultivation. the river Indus by means of smaller Nullahs, or

water courses leading from the Sindh Canal. Cultivation is extensively

carried on, and the gardens of Shikarpore are rich in all the fruits

peculiar to the country, though mangoes, neim, acacia, pipul, and

mulberry trees attain great size. The soil is a rich alluvial, and its

capabilities for production are no where better displayed than in the

Mogullee district (that in which Shikarpore is situated), owing to the

advantages in this respect (possessed by nearly the whole of upper

Sindh) being turned to due account, still comparatively speaking only a

limited portion of the land is brought under cultivation. Rice and

1841. | Memorandum on Shikarpore, in Upper Sindh. 21

Juwarree form the great ‘ Kurreef” or autumnal, and wheat the

Crops. “‘ Rubbee” or spring crop; the former are entirely

dependent on the inundations, which commence to be available for pur-

poses of cultivation about the middle of April, and continue until the

middle of September. The ‘“ Rubbee” crops are raised by means of

wells and bunds formed from the inundation.

The soil is so rich that no manure of any kind is used ; the inunda-

Soil. tions bringing with them a certain slimy matter,

which appears highly conducive to fertility, the ground is allowed to

remain fallow from the reaping of one crop in October, to the sowing

of another in April or May, and the same with the Rubbee lands ; this

rule appears to obtain all over the country.

Water is found at an average of about twenty feet from the surface,

and to a depth of sixty feet the finest description of sand is alone ob-

servable; with the alluvial soil is a superstrata ; a stone or rocky founda-

tion of any description is not to be seen.

All the approaches to Shikarpore are bad, from the country being sO

Roads. constantly intersected with water courses, and no

measures being taken to provide bridges, or repair the roads, which are

cut up by carts, and the constant traffic of camels, bullocks, &c.

A comparatively trifling outlay would obviate this, as also improve the

Sindh canal. Sindh canal, which, from having been allowed to

choak up at its mouth, and get generally into disrepair, is only navi-

gable from the end of April to the beginning of October, whereas it is

capable of affording an important means of water communication from

the Indus to Shikarpore, for at least nine months of the year.

Shikarpore being in the immediate route for the transmission of

Trade and influ- merchandize to Khorassan and countries to the NW.

are of money tran- by the Pass of the Bolan, has with Dera Ghaze

Bas Khan obtained the title of one of the gates of

Khorassan. Its influence is more immediately felt however in the bank-

ing transactions which by means of agents it carries on in every in-

termediate place beyond the Bolan Pass, from Quettah and Kelat to

Bokhara and Herat; as also in all places of mercantile importance in

Duties and im- India. Vexatious transit and other duties on goods

ports on trade. pursuing the Shikarpore route to Khorassan have

tended to turn much of its former trade, especially in European goods

22 _ Memorandum on Shikarpore, in Upper Sindh. [No. 109.

received from its port of Karachee, into the channel of communication

to the NW. by the way of Soomeanee, Beila, and Kelat, the more

direct, and at present by far the less expensive route. A revisal of

imposts,* together with a settlement of Cutchee, and the suppression of

the marauding system in that province and in the Bolan Pass, would

revive the trade of Shikarpore, and induce its merchants, who do not

want for energy, to purchase largely of such investments as might

be cheaply transmitted by means of the river Indus; with the ab-

sence of tolls on merchandize in transit, whether by water or land,

they would be sure of making a favourable market, coupled also with

the protection afforded them through the deserts of Cutchee, which they

could only formerly procure at an exorbitant amount of black mail to

every leader of a predatory band.

Shikarpore received from Karachee Bunder, Marwar, Mooltan,

Bhawulpore, Khyrpore, and Loodhiana, European

piece goods, raw silk, ivory, cochineal, spices of all

kinds, coarse cotton cloths, raw silk (China), kinkaubs, silks manufac-

tured, sugar-candy, cocoanut, metals, kiramee (or groceries), drugs of

_ Imports.

sorts, indigo, opium, saffron, and dyes of sorts. From Cutchee,

Khorassan, and the NW. raw silk (Toorkestan, ) fruits of sorts, madder,

turquoises, antimony, medicinal herbs, sulphur, alum, saffron, assafce-

tida, medicinal herbs and gums, cochineal, and horses.

The exports from Shikarpore are confined to the transmission of goods

to Khorassan through the Bolan, and a tolerable trade

with Cutchee, Bagh, Gundava, Katria, and Dadur.

They consist of indigo (the most important,) henna, metals of all

Exports.

kinds, country, coarse, and fine cloths, European piece goods (chintzes

&c.) Mooltanee coarse cloths, silks manufactured, groceries, and spices,

raw cotton, coarse sugar, opium, hemp seed, shields, embroidered horse

cloths, and dry grains. The various productions of these countries

and their prices in the Shikarpore market} have attracted the atten-~

tion of that energetic body, the Chamber of Commerce of Bombay, and

in the article of indigo alone there can be little doubt but that the

* See a list of export, import, and transit duties, based on articles of trade at Shikar-

pore (by the author) published inthe Bombay Government Gazettee of the 28th July.

+ A monthly price current of articles in the Shikarpore market is now published by

authority.

1841. | Memorandum on Shikarpore, in Upper Sindh. 23

produce of the Khyrpore, Bhawulpore, and the Punjab countries will

form a staple return commodity for merchandize to be transmitted

from the other Presidency; silk (raw), drugs, and dyes may also be

enumerated as well worthy of attention. The influence of the British

Government, and the protection it has already afforded to trade in

these countries have had their effect at Shikarpore, evinced in the

increasing revenue* and settlement there of influential traders from

Loodhiana, Amritsir, Bhawulpore, and other places.

The revenue of Shikarpore derivable from trade amounted last year

Peventetcomirade tO Rs...) (sec) (ace Todbei lice iacea 84,7865, 0.0

and lands.

Other tax and revenue for lands belonging to the

town, Bed REO SI COCUUE SEMEN WIESE | PISCE ataeePimekee) (OP oF: omen 1 ME @)

ib rmreacterotainety (0.02 OTT I eee OOTP S81! + OO

divided between the Khyrpore and Hyderabad chiefs, in the pro-

portion of ; ths to the former, and > ths to the latter. The lands and

villages forming the Shikarpore Pergunnah, amount to about six

talookehs, and about sixty villages, of which four talookehs and

twenty-three villages only belong to the Hyderabad government; the

revenue of the whole, deducting jahgirs, may be about two lacs

annually.

The government of the town is vested in two agents, or governors,

Government of the furnished by the Hyderabad and Khyrpore Ameers,

town. who have also the duty of the Police of the district,

and collection of the revenue.

The climate of Shikarpore is sultry, and the heat excessive from the

@hinate: middle of March until the end of August. There are

no periodical rains, though storms are generally looked for at the end

of June, or middle of July. If rain falls at that time, it continues for a

space of two or three days, but severe falls occur at the vernal equi-

noxes. The air is remarkably dry and clear. The low situation of the

town, coupled with its being surrounded by stagnant pools close to the

walls, and a large space of the adjacent. country for a considerable period

* The soucars report that the trade bas increased nearly one-third during the current

year,

24 Memorandum on Shikarpore, in Upper Sindh. | No. 109.

being completely under water, would warrant a supposition that this

place was exceedingly unhealthy ; yet it is not so except for a short

period from the middle to the end of September, during which the in-

undations are drying up, and ague in a mild form is prevalent. Exposure

to the sun of Sindh, whether Upper or‘ Lower, during the hot months is

invariably attended with dangerous effects, and for a certain period of

the year the natives themselves avoid it as much as possible. The hot

winds of Shikarpore lose much of their intensity, prevailing generally

from the southward, and passing over a considerable expanse of water ;

they continue however during the months of April, May, and June,

to blow till midnight. In the deserts N. and W. of Shikarpore, the

deadly simoom is often encountered.

The winds vary generally between W. and S. the former the prevail-

ing. The Easterly winds obtain for a short period during the autumnal,

and the Westerly during the vernal equinox. The former often pre-

cedes rain. Shikarpore is exempted from a great source of annoyance

experienced at Sukkur, Hyderabad, and all other places on the banks

of the river, from the Delta upwards, viz. sand storms. The cold

months may be said to commence in September, and last until the

middle of March. Frost and ice are not unusual, and vegetation

assumes all the appearance of winter in a northern climate. After a

fair experience of a year’s residence at Shikarpore, (the season of 1839

being considered an unhealthy one,) I conceive that with the precau-

tions considered necessary elsewhere, of good houses and due attention

to draining, troops might be cantoned at this place without any

greater disadvantages than are to be met with in most of our stations in

the interior of India. When it is considered that the officers and men

of a force stationed here during the most trying months of last year

were for nearly the whole period under canvas, or in mud huts, that

afforded even less shelter than a tent, and that the inundations were

allowed to reach in all directions within 200 yards of the camp, it is

only surprising that the disease and mortality where so inconsiderable.

I believe that out of a force of nearly 2000 men, the latter amounted

to under twelve cases. The mornings at Shikarpore are invariably

cold. :

Routes from Shikarpore to various places with which it carries on

Routes. trade, with the estimated distances.

1841. | Memorandum on Shikarpore, in Upper Sindh. 25

From Shikarpore to the North and East

To Mooltan, by way of Dehi Ahmil, on the river across the river to

Azrezpore.

i Mierpore.

a Subzulkote.

4 Khanepore.

a Ooch.

" Gullen Garrat, opening of the Ghaut or

, Sutledge.

55 Sooyabad.

MA Mooltan.

Estimated distances 215 koss; 23 stages fcr laden camels; occupies

from 23 to 26 days.

_ From Mooltan to Lahore, by way of Chichawntnee, across the

: Bendee Sheikh Morsa.

| : Seyud Walloo.

4 Jambia.

| 63 Munjee Baba Narmac Shah.

| 7 Surakpore.

| $s Lahore.

| Estimated distance from Mooltan to Lahore 140 koss; 15 stages,

_and occupies with laden camels about 18 days.

_ To Amristse from Lahore 25 koss; or 2 stages.

| From Amristse to Loodihana 40 koss ; or 4 stages.

From Shikarpore to Dera-Ghazee-Khan the route is by way of

Rogan Mittenkote and Dajil, estimated distance 170 koss ; 20 stages,

}

occupies 20 to 23 days.

| ere to Jaysulmere by way of Sukkur and Roree.

Oodenkote (Oodun ka kila. )

Dandioluk.

Gottaroo.

Chomdred.

Jaysulmere.

| * If these distances are compared with those laid down in the late maps of these

‘countries, it would appear that the koss was calculated at about one and half mile ;

but the idea of distances by the natives is generally very vague, and they calculate

more on the time occupied in a journey.

26 Memorandum on Shikarpore, in Upper Sindh. [No. 109.

Estimated distance 100 koss; 15 stages, and occupies from 15 to

18 days. From Jaysulmere to Palee by way of Porwin and Jodhpore

120 koss ; 16 stages, and occupies 16 to 19 days.

Shikarpore to the NW. to Dadur.

Janeedera.

Royhan (edge of the desert. )

Brushoree (across the desert.)

Kassimka Joke.

Bagh.

Meyassir.

Dadur.

90 koss; 14 stages, occupying from 7 to 10 days.

The routes above the Bolan Pass to Kelat, Kandahar, Cabool, &c.

Above the Bolan. are now too well known to require repetition.

From Shikarpore to the south to Karachee by way of Sehewan,

Shikarporeto Karachee, Lorkhana, distance 150 koss ; 29 stages,

ee occupying from 29 to 33 days; this road is imprac-

ticable from April or May to September as far as Sehewan, and the

river is the means of conveying merchandize.

Classical terminology of Natural History. By B. H. Honeson, Esq.,

Resident at the Court of Nepal. .

(To the Editor of the Bengal Asiatic Journal. )

SIR,

Although I think the prevalent humour of the day, which cannot

tolerate any other than Greek and Roman names of genera in Zoology, —

is, in good part, absurd and pedantic, yet as I am told that continued

non-compliance therewith on my part will be considered by most per- |

sons as a sort of excuse for past and future appropriations of my disco-

veries in this branch of science, as described in your Journal, I have now

the pleasure to transmit to you a series of classical substitutes for my

previous local designations. Many other new forms having originally

received from me classical appellations (for I am no exclusionist) need —

not be here noticed: of those that were priorily described by local —

names the following enumeration supplies, on the left hand, the new —

1841. | Classical terminology of Natural History. 27

classical substitute, and, on the right, opposite thereto, the old ver-

nacular term. A few explanations as well as dates are incorporated

with the enumeration.

NEPAL, I am, Sir,

February, 1841. Yours faithfully,

B. H. Hopeson.

1. Muscicapide Eurglaimine,

Simus (owoc) Raya

May 1836. Psarisoma, Sw. Crossodera, Gould, in May and Au-

gust 1837 respectively.

2. Meliphagide.

Alcopus (adkn et rouc) Sibia

See Jour. As. Society, January 1839.

3. Falconine,

Hyptiopus (umrwoc¢ et tovc) Baza

Journal December 1836, et May 1837.

4. Buccoine,

Comeris (komn et pic) Sasia

General structure of Picumnus, but three-toed, Analogue of Ap-

ternus et Chrysonotus in Piciane.

5. Sturnide Jeterine 2? Ampelide Leiotrichane ?

Heterornis (erepoc et opvic) Cutia

Nearly allied to Aplonis, a subsequent genus of Gould ; Journal

December 1836, and February 1837.

6. Charadriade.

Pseudops (wceevdoc et wip) Carvanaca

Has the Plover head (and structure generally) with a cultirostral

bill.

Journal, December 1836.

7. Musteline ad finem.

Mesobema (wecoc et Pra) Urve

Closely allied to Helictis, which however has Molars z and. is,

in fact, a Gulo.

28 Classical terminology of Natural History. [ No. 109.

8-10. Strigide, Aberrant group,

Etoglaux (asroc et yAavé) Huhua.

————-Subtypical group.

Mesomorpha (He¢0c et mopgon) Urrua

Meseidus (uecoe et eldoc Bulaca

Both from their strictly mediate structure between the most

typical and most untipycal forms. Transac. 1836, Journal,

May 1837.

11. Coccothraustine, .

Dermophrys (Sepya et oppvc) Munie.

12-13. Columbide Vinagine,

Rinopus (pic et Tove)

Diagnosis being derived from combination of bill and

feet belonging to different types.

Ditto, Ditto,

Romeris (poun et pic) Toria.

14. Sylviade ? Certhiade ? Melighagide ?

Polyodon (woAve et odwv) Yuhina :

A strange form. Axdropadus its analogue among Brachypods,

whilst it types the Honey-suckers among its own Sylvians.

Ducula.

Crateropodine.

Decurus (Seka et ovpn) Suya.

15. Saxicoline.

Polypeira (woXve et tapa) Dahila.

Trans. As. Soc. 1836. This form since styled Grillioora by

Sw., and Macrourus by Gould.

16. Merulide Crateropodine.

Anura (aAga privitiva et ovpn) Tesia

Since called Micrura by Gould. Journal Asiatic Society, Febru-

ary 1837.

17. Ampeline,

Prosorinia (wpocw et pic) Cochoa.

A typical ampeline form, though crested and not American,

stands between Ampelis and Casmarhynchus.

1841. | Classical terminology of Natural History. 29

18. Meropide,

Napophila (varoc et pvAoc) Bucia

This, or a very like form, since called Nyctiornis by Swainson ;

mine the prior appellation. Journal, June 1836. My bird is, in

no way or degree, a night brid.

19-20. Saxicoline ?

Chaitaris (yarn et pic) Miltava

Dimorpha (Ou et popon) Siphia

India Review, March 1837.

21. Pariane,

Temnoris (tevuw seco et pic) Suthora

The tiny stout bill is trincated and square at tip.

22-25. Leiotrichane ?

Proparus (quasi Parus) Minla.

Philacalyx (dteoc et kadv&) Mesia.

Calipyga (kaXoc et Tuyn) Bahila.

Nearly allied to Leiathrix proper.

Hemiparus (4 Tit) Siva.

Indian Review, April and May 1837.

26. Edoliane.

Creurgus(kpeovpyoc) Tenthaca.

Nearly allied to TYephrodornis and Nylaus, the last of which

genera is of more recent date than ours.

27-29. Cometes (kountnc) Chibia.

Melisseus (Bee-taker) Bhringa.

Dicrurus (Auct) Bhuchanga.

Indian Review November 1836, and January 1837.

30. Buccoide potius Yunxine,

Piculus (diminutive of Picus) Vivia

Journal, February 1837, nearly allied to Asthenurus.

Supplementary Note to the Memoir on the Hodésum, vol. ix. pp. 694 and

783. By Lieutenant Tick, Political Assistant, Singbhoom.

Through the kindness of Major Wilkinson, Resident at Burra Nag-

poor, I am enabled to correct a mis-statement I made in my Memoir

on the Ho Désum, in which speaking of the “ Surrawuks” I described

them as Bengallee Brahmins. They are, it appears, not Brahmins,

but Jains, or worshippers of Purusnath ; and are still scattered over

several parts of India. In former times there were many of them at a

place called Aring in Chutteesgurh, and some of their temples are

there extant to this day.

Major Wilkinson describes the existence in Burra Nagpoor of the

remains of a large city in the midst of the jungles on the banks of the

Mahanuddee, the name of which was Seirpoor.* It flourished in the

time of a race of Rajahs of the ‘‘ Ho Ho Bunsee” tribe. These were

Rajpoots, but the similarity of théir name to that of the Koles of

the present day (“‘ Ho”) is curious.

At Aring, Rajoo, and Dhunteree, Major Wilkinson fell in with

several inscriptions on stone, in a character unknown to any persons

in that quarter; and I trust he will be enabled to fulfil his present

intention of sending some of these inscriptions to the Museum of the

Asiatic Society ; where there is a probability of their being decyphered,

if facsimiles of them be published in this Journal.

Notr.—I hope to be favoured with the note of a tour recently made

by Major Ouseley through his Agency, in which mention is made of the

extensive ruins above alluded to, and an interesting statistical account

given of a region very little known, poy

* If I read it aright in his letter.

- Proceedings of the Asiatic Society.

(Wednesday Evening, 7th April, 1841.)

The Hon’ble H. T. Prinser, Esq., in the Chair.

The following gentlemen proposed at the Meeting of the 5th March last, were

balloted for, and duly elected : viz.—

F. Beaurort, Esq. C. S.

W. B. Jackson, Esq. C. S.

W. Masters, Esq, Head Teacher, La Martiniere.

The necessary communication of their election, and rules of the Society for

guidance, were ordered to be forwarded to the parties.

Library and Museum.

Cautley’s Report on the Central Doab Canal, Allahabad Mission Press, 1840

(2 copies), 2. ais oe aia a ie Ai Aon

Lardner’s Cabinet Cyclopedia—Biography: Lives of the British Admirals,

vol. 5th aa ae : os ee ae eal

History of the Mohammedan cine in Scuin, by P. de Gayangos, London,

1840, vol. Ist .. ar 60 56 oe ce oe ae I

Sleeman’s Report on the Depredations committed by the Thug Gangs of Upper

and Central India, from 1836 to 1841, Calcutta, 1840, He we Sa |

Madras Journal of Literature and Science, No. 28, July—September, 1840, .. 1

Edinburgh New Philosophical Journal, by Professor Jameson, No. 58, October

1840, ae re An oe ae =. 56 - I

London and Edinburgh Philosophical Magazine and Journal of Science, 3rd

series, No. 3, November 1840, sts ae iD ale care!

Yarrell’s History of British Birds, pt. 21st, London 1840, .. ee oe

Calcutta Monthly Journal and Repository of Intelligence for February 184], .. 1

Annals and Magazine of Natural History, No. 36, November 1840, .. do Il

Oriental Christian Spectator, February 1841, vol. ii. No. 2, Bombay, oo l

Lectures on the Religious Practices and Opinions of the Hindus, by H. H.

Wilson, Oxford 1840, oe : oe - oe ead

Proceedings of the aotanel Society of London, vol. ui. Nos. 69, 70, 71,

for 1840, <= oe ee oe a oe 56 o6 ob

Bulletin de la Société de Geographie, 2nd Série, Tome 13th, Paris 1840, ok

Géographie D’ Aboulfeda, Texte Arabe, 2nd Liv. Paris 1840, we mG. 24

Nieurve Proeve omal de Arabische, Letters en verdere schrijfteeke door Het

Gewoon Europeesche Karakter onderscheidenlijk uit te drukken, Voor-

gesteld door, H. E. Weijers Ze Leyden 1840, .. 50 50 aq Il

The following report was submitted by the Officiating Curator for the month of

March last :—

32 Asiatic Society. [No. 109.

‘H. W. Torrens, Esa.,

Secretary Asiatic Society.

«Sir,

‘I have to report for the month of March as follows :—

‘Geological, Paleontological, and Mineralogical Departments.—We continue to

catalogue and arrange here, at all spare times.

‘‘The Analytical Index to papers on these subjects in the volumes of the Researches,

Gleanings of Science, and Journal up to December 1840 is completed, and in the hands

of the printers. By means of it, future Curators and students canrefer backwards and

forwards to papers or collections with great facility.

‘In the Museum of Economic Geology, the collections in Class II (Iron) ; Class 1IT

(Tin); and Class 1V (Copper) ; are arranged. I annex to this a draft of the plan upon

which this part of the Museum should, I think, be arranged ; and it will be seen at a

glance that this system while it affords every convenience as to distinctness of classifi-

cation, allows of additions to any extent, without disturbing that which is already done,

and of every facility of reference for the student, visitors, and Curator, which are the

main requisites in a Museum. The Catalogue to Class III (Tin) is circulated here-

with, and I shall be glad to have the opinions and suggestions of Members upon this

subject. Class I (Coal) and the other classes are not yet arranged for want of cases.

‘ Mammalogical, Ornithological, Osteological, and Herpetological.—Nothing new

to report beyond the additions noticed below.

‘ Additions to the Museum have been as follows :—

Seven bottles Snakes and Lizards.

“Dr. Spry. coer Five ditto water, from various parts of the Bay of Bengal.

An owl, Strix ? Skeleton prepared for the Museum.

‘Mr. F. M. Boucuez.—A Monkey, Simnopithecus Entellus ?—Stuffed.

‘Lieut . TickELL.—Thirty-five Birds’ skins.

‘I am Sir,

‘ Your obedient servant,

‘ Museum, 31st March, 184). ‘H. PIpDINGTON,

‘ Officiating Curator, As. Soc. Museum.’

Plan of proposed Arrangement for the Museum of Economic Geology.

Chas Division. Marks. Nos.

at in Catalogue.

A. English C. 1 to

I. i B. Indian and Asiatic I. C. 1 to

Coal and Anthracites. C. Foreign European E. C 1 to

D. American Aa: 1 to

A. English I. 1 to

II. J B. Indian and Asiatic LI. 1 to

Iron ores, Smelting, &c. 1 C. Foreign European ee 1 to

D. American ae Ee 1 to

1841. | Asiatic Society. 33

‘cgi English AN 1 to

7 al J B, Indian and Asiatic en

Tinores, Flags, Smelting ~ C. Foreign European E.T.

&e. D. American Ag,

and so on, of as many classes as may be required, the marks and numbers being

always, where possible, painted on the specimens, and the Catalogues printed or

lithographed. 15 (aul ee

Mr. James Dopp, Assay Master of the Agra Bullion Department, having accepted

the offer of Rs. 600 for his collection of Minerals, the following correspondence

with Mr. Secretary Busney took place :-—

‘To G. A. Bususy, Esa.

‘ Secretary to Government, General Depariment.

‘Sir— With reference to my letters of dates quoted in the margin, I have the honor,

13th Nov. 1840; by direction of the Asiatic Society, to state, that Mr. Dopp,

18th Jan. 1841, Assay Master of the Agra Bullion Department, has a valuable

collection of minerals, which it is considered highly deserving of purchase, to be

placed in the Society’s Rooms for general reference. The collection in question

can be had for Rs. 600, and I am requested to submit the solicitation of the

Asiatic Society to be authorized to make the purchase, the means being placed

at the disposal of the Society, by a grant to that extent by the Government.

Asiatic Socrety’s Rooms, ‘IT have &c.

‘15th March 184. ‘H. Torrens, Sec. Asiatic Soc.

‘To H. Torrens, Esa.,

‘ Secretary to the Asiatic Society.

‘ Genl. Dept.

‘ Srrn—I am directed to acknowledge the receipt of your letter dated the 15th instant,

and in reply to inform you, that before the Right Honorable the Governor General in

Council can decide upon sanctioning the purchase of Mr. Dopp’s collection of minerals,

it would be satisfactory to His Lordship in Council to receive some general description

of the collection in question.

‘ CounciL CHAMBER, ‘I am, Sir,

‘24th March, 1841. ‘ Your obedient servant,

‘G. A. Busupy,

‘ Secretary to the Government of India.’

Ordered—That the Officiating Curator be requested to furnish the general descrip-

tion required, for submission to Government.

Read a letter from Mr. Secretary Bususy, of 10th February last, communicating

that the Government consider the authority under which the payment of Rs. 300

34 Asiatic Society. | No. 109.

per mensem is made to the Society for a Curator and the preparation of Specimens,

as a sanction and modification of the allowance previously made to it, and not as an

independent or additional assignment.

The Secretary brought to notice, for the opinion of the Meeting, the proposal made

to him for the support of the Asiatic Society of Bengal for enabling Mons. Cattery

of Macao, to print a Chinese Dictionary, French and English, now compiling by

him.

The meeting were of opinion, that as three Dictionaries in the Chinese language

were already in the Library of the Society’s Museum, it was not expedient to encourage

the patronage solicited, but that a few copies of the work after completion might be

purchased for the Library and presentation to the learned Societies in Europe, and

that a recommendation at the same time should be submitted to the Government for

the purchase by them of, say 25 or 30 copies for transmission to the Honorable the

Court of Directors for their Library, It was accordingly Resolved—That a com-

munication to the foregoing effect be made to Mons. Cattery, through Mr. Hurry.

The Secretary also submitted a proposal for printing WrLrorp’s Manuscript on

the Ancient Geography of India to complete the 22d vol. of the Transactions of the

Society, which proposal was negatived, on the consideration that though the paper

contained much matter to be of interest to the general reader, yet in the opinion of

the Society, the time had gone by forits publication ; productions of recent date from

other authors on the same subject, containing more correct and valuable information,

having superceded the object for which WiLrorp wrote, but that the Secretary was

at liberty to use the Manuscript as Editor of the Asiatic Journal, by printing extracts

of such portions of it as he considered desirable and useful for his object.

Read letter from Mr. Secretary Busuzy, of 30th December 1840, and enclosures. ’

‘To H. Torrens, Esa.

‘ No. 995. ‘ Secretary to the Asiatic Society.

‘ General Department.

‘Sir—I am directed by the Right Honorable the Governor General in Council to trans-

mit toyou theaccompanying copy of letter, No. 17 of 1840, from the Honorable the Court

of Directors in the Public Department, dated the 16th September, and to request that

the Society will enable the Government to carry into effect the wishes of the Honorable

Court in respect to all Zoological and Entomological collections deposited in their

Museum on the part of Government, or by persons conducting Missions on the part of

the Government, and will assist the Government in giving effect to the commands of the

Honorable Court in respect to future supplies to their Museum, as also in regard to

the immediate dispatch of Dr. HELFER’s and Captain PEmprrton’s Collections in

Tenasserim and Bootan.

‘I am also directed to transmit a copy of the list of the present contents of the

Honorable Court’s Museum as far as regards the Mammalia and Birds, that the So-

ciety may see the descriptions most desiderated.

1841. | Asiatic Society. 35

‘I am at the same time directed to request that the Asiatic Society will furnish this

Department with a copy of Dr. HELrsr’s original list of his Ornithological collec-

tions, forwarded to the Secretary to the Society from the Political Department, with

Mr. Secretary PrinseEp’s letter, dated the 24th October 1838.

‘I am, Sir,

‘CounciL CHAMBER, ‘ Your obedient servant,

‘30th December 1840. ‘G. A. Busuey,

‘ Secretary to Government of India.

‘No. 17 of 1840.

‘Our GoveRNorR GENERAL OF INDIA IN COUNCIL.

Public Dept.

‘Ist. The first of these letters refers to an application made by Masor Hay,

Reply to Paras. 48 and 49 ) through the Asiatic Society of Bengal to you, to

of letter from the Govern- : ? ‘

ment of India, dated ist | purchase a large collection of subjects of Natural History,

August 1859, ie: 26 \ formed chiefly in southern Africa, and of which you

To letter from the Secretary have justly remarked that it would be better adapted

to the Government of India, 5 3

dated 19th "Getuley 1839, J to the Museum of Europe than of India, we accordingly

Now! approve of your having declined the purchase.

Qnd. In your letter of the 19th January 1839, you inform us that the collections

made by Dr. Hetrer in the Tenasserim Provinces have been shipped on the

** Madagascar ;’’ a reference to the correspondence accompanying shews that this is

not exactly correct. The collections of Dr. Hetrer and of Mr. Assistant Surgeon

GrirFitus, which have been received by the ‘‘ Madagascar,’’ are exclusively Botani-

cal, and the other collections were deposited with the Asiatic Society.

‘3rd. We take this opportunity of expressing to you more fully our wishes on the

subject of collections of Natural History made in India, on account of, or under

the patronage, of the Government.

‘4th. In our letter of the 18th September 1839, No. 17, Paras. 8] to 87, we replied

to the applications which you made in August 1837, and in September 1838, on

behalf of the Asiatic Society of Bengal; and we signified our consent to the

monthly payment of 200 or 250 rupees to a qualified person to superintend the

Museum, with an allowance of 50 rupees a month for the cost of preparing and

preserving specimens besides the former allowance for the publication of Oriental

works.

‘5th. We now call your attention to several points respecting the relation in which

the Asiatic Society is placed towards the Company’s Museum in England in

consideration of this grant. It appears from the public correspondence, as well as

from the Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, that the collections made by

several Deputations and Missions on behalf of Government, which previous to the

date of our despatch above mentioned (18th September 1839) were provisionally

confided to the care of the Asiatic Society, have been detained in its custody nearly

two years, during which period no Zoological collections have been received in

our Museum from Bengal.

36 Asiatic Society. [ No. 109.

‘6th. We refer here especially to the public letter of Dr. J. W. He.rer to

Mr. Secretary PrinsEp, dated Calcutta 16th October 1838, and to a letter from Mr.

Secretary PrinsEp, dated Fort William, 24th October 1838, to the Secretary of the

Asiatic Society, and to the proceedings of the Asiatic Society of the 5th September,

10th October, and 14th November 1838, published in the Journal of the said Society,

also respecting collections made during Captain PEmBERToN’s Mission to Bootan,

&c. Proceedings of the Asiatic Society of 7th February 1838, Journal p. 90 to 168,

oth September 1838, p. 749.

‘7th. It is quite apparent that the detention of subjects of Natural History, in the

state in which they are usually brought from Missions or Deputations, the movements

of which are necessarily expeditious, must in the climate of India be highly injurious

to them, and may in many cases occasion their entire destruction; we notice this parti-

cularly with reference to the collections made by Dr. HeLFrer in Tenasserim, and

by Captain PeEmsBertTon during his Mission to Bootan, since both these are new

localities from which no specimens are as yet contained in our Museum.

‘8th. In order therefore to guard in future against similar detentions, and to secure an

early dispatch of any collections made on behalf of Government to our Museum, we

should wish you to require every naturalist or officer who may accompany any

Mission or Deputation on behalf of Government, to make at least a provisional report on

the nature and extent of his collections immediately on the return of the Mission, to

be forwarded to us without delay ; further, that whenever practicable, the same officer

who accompanied a Mission be instructed on the arrival of his collections to select from

his labors the most full and complete series for despatch to England for the Company’s

Museum by the earliest opportunity, and also to superintend in person the packing

and despatch, in order to secure as far as possible the safety of the same during

the voyage. In cases in which the collections may have been forwarded to the

Presidency before the return of the naturalist by whom they have been made, and when

any length of time may be expected to intervene before he can make a selection him-

self, we are of opinion that it may be expected of the Asiatic Society to make such

a selection as is above intimated, and to prepare the same for despatch to England.

‘9th. While these instructions apply chiefly to such collections as may be made in

future on account of Government, we are likewise desirous that the necessary steps

may be taken towards the immediate dispatch to our Museum of a series of the Mam-

malia and Birds collected by Dr. Hreurer in Tenasserim, as far as his collections

may have been preserved from the destructive effects of the climate, and of such sub-

jects as may be new to science we desire the supply of several individuals; at the same

time we direct that the entire of Dr. Hetrzer’s Entomological collection may be for-

warded to us, since from the locality which he visited, many valuable and interesting

subjects may be expected in this department particularly ; and since no copy of Dr.

He xrer’s list of his Ornithological collections, which according to a letter from Mr.

Secretary PrinsEp, dated Fort William 24th October 1838, was forwarded to the

Secretary of the Asiatic Society, has been found in our records, we direct that this list

be transmitted to us with all possible expedition. The directions which we have now

given respecting Dr. Hetrer’s collections in Tenasserim, apply also to such collec-

tions in Zoology as may have been made during Captain PEMBERTON’s Mission on

account of Government to Bootan.

1841. | Asiatic Society. 37

general explanatory remarks, the object of which is to secure to our Museum in

England, with every proper degree of economy respecting freight and packing expen-

ses, the most valuable and interesting results of scientific Deputations and Missions on

behalf of Government ; we therefore repeat the recommendation, that on the return of

any Mission to Calcutta the naturalist who may have made any collection, or a proper

person to be appointed by you, be employed to prepare a single specimen, well

preserved, of the more common Mammalia and Birds, such as are well known and des-

cribed; of those that are rare, and especially of the newly discovered ones, several indi-

viduals, To afford the naturalist some assistance in this selection, we will supply a

simple list of the present contents of our Museum as far as regards the Mammalia

and Birds. By the plan thus recommended we shall become acquainted with the

zoological productions of regions newly visited, and thus obtain materials for ‘‘ Local

Faunas,”’ of which several instructiveseries already exist in our Museum. Ofall Ento-

mological collections we require that the entire result of any Deputation on behalf of

Government be forwarded to our Museum, since these cannot be preserved in India

under the disadvantages of imperfect cabinets, moisture, and general destructive

effects of the climate; and being comprised in smaller space, their transmission is

not expensive. ‘These instructions will apply to all public collections made pre-

vious to the Mission of Dr. HELFER to Tenasserim, should any such be still detained

in the hands of individuals, or remain deposited in the Botanic Garden of Calcutta,

or in charge of the Asiatic Society.

‘Weare, &c.

‘ Lonpon. (Signed) W. B. Bay ey,

‘ 16th September, 1840. oo Grorce Lyatt,

99 W. ASTELL,

a H. Linpsay,

5 J. L. LusHineton,

ms JoHn MasTERMAN,

We J. W. Hoge,

ey J. THORNHILL,

95 N. B. EpmMonsToneg,

Bs R. CampBELL,

: W. WicRam,

* JoHN SHEPHERD,

y F. WarDEN.

(True Copy, ) G. A. Bususy,

‘ Secretary to Government of India.’

38 Asiatic Society. [No. 109.

List of Mammalia contained in the Museum of the East India

Company.

Good Specimens of all QuADRUMANA are Desiderata in the Museum.

ORDO I.—PRIMATES.

TRIBUS QUADRUMANA.

Genus Hylobates, oe o° sie “e oe Iiliger.

1 Hylobates syndactylus, ae ae oe -- Raffles, Sumatra.

2 ——-—— Hoolook, ss ate a a Harl. Assam.

Genus Semnopithecus, .. a “a oe oe Fr. Cur.

1 Semnopithecus melalophus, o- a eo. ne Sumatra.

2 ——_——_ cristatus, oF a - a Raff. id.

3 ——_———-——- femoralis, a aie ie na id.

4 ——__—__-——_ Pyrrhus, Be sa ce ae id.

5 ——_——_-——— maurus, aie ats Sie ale id.

6 ——_--——_—-—. Fntellus, ete is ie ae Madras.

Genus PRESBYTES.

1 Presbytes mitrata. Eschsch, oe zis ‘ite sa Voy. Kotzebue.

Semn. ? fascicularis, .. a ans SH Raf. Sumatra.

Semn. comatus, 6 oe 515 ate a Desm, Mamm.

Genus CERCOPITHECUS,

] Cercopithecus Johnii, .. we at sie sis Madras.

Genus Macacus. Lacep.

1 Macacus Sinicus, a 50 aA ae ote Java.

2 ——_——-cynomolgus, .. ee .. + ee Linn. Siam.

3 ————\Silenus, . .«- 20 as ae AC

A ____—_-_ nemesirinus, |... ale ae oie «e Sumatra.

5 esa MVeNSIS,, os 6 ate ais ate ae M‘ Clelland.

LEMURID&.

* Genus Tarsius, oe ae So ed oe Storr.

1 Tarsius Bancanus, oie She ae a5 40 Banea.

Genus Nycticebus, o° oe oe oe 56 Geoff.

1 Nycticebus Javanicus, a0 ae oe ag Java.

2 — tardigradus, ee oe oe os Siam.

GENus Lemur.

1 Lemur ruber,

* * Galeopithecide,

Genus Galeopithecus,

1 Galeopithecus variegatus, ve ae te Ae Java, &c.

—-1841.] Asiatic Society. 39

TRIBUS CHEIROPTERA.

Specimens of all CHEIROPTERA are desired, both skins, and especially entire subjects, in Spirits.

Genus Megaderma, oe oe oe ce on Geof.

1 Megaderma Lyra, os oe os os ee Java.

Genus Rhinolophus, .. oe es oe 40 Geoff.

1 Rhinolophus affinis, aie ee oe ve oe Java.

2 -— minor, oe ai ae Ar A id.

3 -— nobilis, te ote oie ae 20 id.

oe Jarvatus, a Eh Ba e: id.

0 -—— vulgaris, .. 56 ee oe oe ad.

6 -—— deformis, .. aye a6 AG oe ad.

7-— insignis, .. a “° Se 56 id.

8 -— - Dukhunensis, Se AP 34 ae Dukhun,

Genus Nycteris, Le Ws fe Be ars Geoff.

i Nycteris Javanica, 56 ore oe oe ee Geoff. Java.

Genus Nycticejus, ae a fe ae =. Raffinesque.

1 Nycticejus Temmenckii, a Sis ar ate Horsf. Java.

1 Vespertilio adversus, .. sis ot and ake Horsf. Java.

2 — Hardwickui, Bo aie Ne So Be id.

3 —————tralatitius, .. nis ae a sie 3 id.

4 ——___——_ imbricatus,.. be die oe oie 4s id.

9) —— pictus, 5+ Ste a a 5c Linn. id.

Genus Molossus, aie Se +e Se on Geof.

1 Molossus tenuis, oe Ye a6 ae sie Java.

——— dilatatus, are S6 ore 50 ore id.

*Genus Cheiromeles, .. aC ae a6 35 Horsf.

1 Cheiromeles torquatus, .. s5 SC sie ae id, Java.

Genus Macroglossus, .. oe le ee - Fr. Cuv.

1 Macroglossus rostratus, ee ee oe oe Java.

2 mee Ee nanus, eo ee oo ee ee Siam.

GEeNus PTEROPUS.

1 Pteropus edulis. re 8 Je 50 oe Java, &c.

2 ———— Edwardsii, (Medius auctor), .. oe 36 Dukhun.

3 ———— Assamensis, .. ie o 5 ae aie Assam.

4 ——-—— poliocephalus, oe oe oe oe Siam.

5 ———— marginatus, .. 56 <e oe oe Siam,

1 Pteropus (Pachysoma titthecheilum, .. ic) oe Sava.

40 Asiatic Society. [No 109.

ORDO II.—FER 4.

* Felide.

: ae ss Byam: Genus Hyena, Briss, &c.

a ve Nt Se ] Hyena vulgaris, ee bu Dukhun.

desirable.

Gents FEtIs.

1 Felis Tigris,

Ae Linn. Dukhun.

2 —— Leopardus, Dukhun.

3 ——Pardus, .. = Les Java, &c.

The smaller species ( 4 —— Chaus, .. be nei ee Bhat

of Felis: several rare | 2 —— ai ee es os Sha

. ; —— Javanensis, = Hi :

page td eR i 7 —— Sumatrana, Sumatra.

l 8 —— Bengalensis, a Bengal.

Genus Prionodon, Horsf. Linsany, Tem.

Prionodon. 1 Prionodon gracile, os Horsf. Java.

? Indian species. Genus Lutra, .. Lin.

1 Lutra Leptonyx, Horsf. Java.-

HERE 2 2 -- Nair, -. Fr. Cuv. Dukhun.

Genus Mustela,.. os Linn.

Desideratum. 1 Mustela flavigula, Hardwickii, Bengal.

Genus Mangusta, oe Olivier.

Several new species ( 1 Mangusta Javanica, Horsf. Java.

are found near the 3 —-—— grisea, Bierp gr. Desm. Dukhun.

3 ———— Pharaonis, .. xe Madras.

Himalayas. [

4 ———— Auropunetata, Hodgs. Assam.

GENus VIVERRA.

1 Viverra Zibetha, RY a5

( Linn. Sumatra.

Viverra : Zibetha, Ci- 2

- Rasse, Horsf. Java, &c.

vetta, any new species 2 x 3- Indica, ote ae Geoff. Dukhun.

4 - Civetta, ~o Siam.

Genus Paradoxurus. .. F, Cuv.

Paradoxurus, seve-

Fae liaaiananenien ¢ } Paradoxurus typus, .. i Java, §c.

Genus Arctictis. Actides Valencienna. Temm.

1 Arctictis Binturong, .. Sumatra.

Genus Canis.

1 Canis familiaris, var. .. ve Dukhun.

( 2 pallipes, ae oe Sykes, id.

The smaller species 3 aureus, 5 i Linn. id.

of Canis. 4 4 Kokree, sie, aa rare Sykes, id.

[ 9) rutilans, Temm. Java.

1841.]

Desideratum.

Prochilus one good

specimen.

Gulo.

Arctonyx.

Sorex.

Tupaia.

Antelope. The new

discovered species

From the Himalayas.

M. moschiferus, Des.

Common.

Desiderat.

| M. Crassicaudata.

la al

_ Asiatic Society.

** URSIDZ.

Genus Ailurus,

1 Ailurus fulgens,

Genus Prochilus,

1 Prochilus ursinus,

Genus Helaretos Ursus aurt.

1 Helaretos Malayanus,

Genus Gulo, ..

1 Gulo orientalis,

Genus Mydaus,

1 Mydaus collaris,

Arctonyx collaris, aG

2 ——_-—— meliceps,

** TALPID.

Genus Sorex,

1 Sorex Indicus,

2 Sonerattii, oe

**** Genus Tupaia,

1 Tupaia Javanica, fe

2 - ferruginea, oe

ORDO III. UNGULATA.

Genus Antilope,

1 Antilope picta,.. 30

2 ———— Bennettii, ele

3 ———— Cervicapra, ..

4 ———— Hodgsonii, ..

9 ———— Thar, Hs

Genus Moschus, oe

1 Moschus moschiferus, ..

2 ———— Javanicus, ..

3 ———— Memima,

Genus Cervus, ..

1 Cervus equinus, AG

2 Duvancelii, eh

3 Muntjak, ate

4 porcinus, oe

Genus Tapirus.

1 Tapirus Malayanus.

Genus Manis, ..

1 Manis Javanica, aie

crassicaudata, ..

nes F. Cuw.

ae F.C. Nepautl.

os Tlig.

-° Iilig. Dukhun.

Horsf.

Horsf. Sumatra.

ah Storr.

Horsf. Java.

F. Cuv.

Sy Bengal.

FF. Cuv.

ie id. Java,

me Linn.

a Geof.

Geoff.

Rag.

Aforsf. Java.

as Raff. Sumatra.

ere Pallas,

ae Dukhun.

oe Sykes.

id.

oe Bengal.

HHodgs. id.

Linn.

46 Nepal.

Java.

oe Bengal.

36 Linn.

bie Rusa Sumatra.

-- Cuv. Horns. India.

ate Java, Dukhun.

Assam.

Linn.

‘ Derm. Java.

ave Griff, Dukhun,

42 Asiatic Society. [No. 109.

ORDOIV. GLIRES.

( Genus Sciurus, ae ae Linn.

| 1 Sciurus maximus, oe es Schr. Madras.

| 2 - Elphinstoni .. os Sykes, Dukhun.

3 ——- Leschenaultii, .. te Derm. Sumatra.

F ; | 4 — - bicolor, ie a Sparr. Java.

mee eee of wee 0 ———- giganteus, eis .. M‘Clelland, Assam.

urus are desirable. ; :

6 - nigrovittatus, .. oe Horsf. Java.

7 ———- Finlaysonii, .. de Horsf. Siam.

8 - affinis, she ate Raff. Sumatra.

| 9 - tenuis, ae a Horsf. Siam.

il 10 ———- Plantani, “6 ve Lyung. Java.

( 1] ———- Palmarum, 5 aes Briss. Dukhun.

' 12 ——- bivittatus, an .. F&. Cw. Sumatra.

| 13 - insignis, cot A F. Cuv. Java.

Wewderut, K 14 ———- hippurus, és oe Geoff. Assam.

« 15 - Lokriah, “< “6 Hodg. id.

| 16 - Lokrioides, .. 56 Hodg. id.

37 - M‘Clellandii, .. 0 Horsf. id.

f Genus Pteromys, a hs A Geoff.

] Pteromys Petaurista, .. ee Desm. Bengal.

2 ——-—— nitidus, 40 re Siam.

Desiderat. 4 3 eee Diardin | Se ee Java.

| 4 ——-— genibarbis, .. a id.

| 5 ——-—— lepidus . 4 id.

Genus Lepus, .. we ee Linn.

Sei ioh, | 1 Lepus nigricollis, _ a F. Cuv. Dukhun.

Genus Hystrix, “ Se Linn.

; 1 Hystrix leucurus, oe me Sykes.

DONUET EN: | ae Mus, .. as m . a

1 Mus giganteus, es ve Bengal.

: 2 ——setifer, .. ate Se Horsf. Java.

Cy ests able. i 3 —— decumanoides, ee se Temm. Bengal.

4 ——vindicus, .. ae a3 Siam.

ORDO V.

Fam. Haticorip&.

Genus HALIcoRE.

1 Halicore Dugong, oF Raff. Sumatra.

1841.]

Asiatic Society. 43

AVES.

ORDO I. RAPTORES. It.

Fam. II. VuLtrurip#,

SUBFAM Xxx.

Good Specimens of all the Raptores are desiderata, excepting a few of the most com-

Common.

mon species.

GeENus VULTUR.

1 Vultur Indicus, re 56 Lath, Dukhun.

2 ——_——_-——_ Ponticerianus, Sc Lath, id.

3 ——_——_—— Bengalensis,.. ee Gmel. id.

4 —————— leuconotus, .. ate Bengal.

Subfam. xxxxx.

Genus NEOPHRON, Sav.

1 Neophron Perenopterus, .. oe Dukhun.

FAM. III. FALCONIDA.

Subfam. X. Aquilina.

GENUS PANDION, Sav.

1 Pandion Ichthyetus, ac ve Java.

Genus Hati#etTUus, Sav.

1 Hahezétus Ponticerianus, -- Java, Sumatra, &c.

2 — dimidiatus, .. bes Sumatra.

3 ————- albicilla, a ae Raff. Sumatra.

4 — Macei, Me 5G Assam.

Genus Limnetus, VIGORs.

1 Limnetus Horsfieldii, .. at Java.

GrENus AQUILA.

1 Aquila bifasciata, ae a6 Dukhun.

2 Vindhiana ?

3 pennata, AS -- FF, pennata, Briss.

GENUS SPIZAETUS, VIEILLOT.

1 Spizaetus rufitinctus, ae -- M‘Clelland, Assam.

2 ———— cristatellus? .. ae Madras.

Genus Hamatornis, Vic.

1 Hematornis Bacha, ie nie Java, Sumatra.

2— - undulatus, .. ae Vig. Nipal.

44 Asiatic Society. _[No. 109.

xx. Subfam Accipitrina,

GENUS ACCIPITER.

1 Accipiter Dukhunensis, Nes Sykes, Dukhun.

2 ——_—— fringillarius, ve oe Sumatra,

r3 ———— Soloensis, ae Horsf. Java.

Genus Astur Avct.

1 Astur Hyder, ore .- Sykes, Dukhun.

xxx Subfam Falconina.

Genus Hierax, Vigors.

1 Hierax cerulescens, os on Java.

Genus Fatco.

1 Falco peregrinus, ec rs Bengal.

2 —— Tinnunculus, is re Java.

3 —— interstinctus, -.» M‘Clelland, Assam, Madras.

Good Specimens gene- d 4 —— severus, 3 is Horsf. Java.

rally are desiderata.

») —— Chiquera, An ae Lath, Dukhun.

xxxx. Subfam Buteonina.

Genus Cikcus.

Circus pallidus, vs ae Sykes, Dukhun.

variegatus, ae se Sykes, Dukhun.

melanoleucus, an ae Assam.

| 1

| 3

| Xxxxx. Subfam Milvina.

| Genus Mitvus.

1 Milvus Govindo, ae oe Sykes, Dukhun.

GeEnus Exanus, Sav.

L1 Elanus melanopterus, we ve Java, Siam, &c.

FAM: IV. STRIGIDA,

x Subfam Nocturnina.

Genus Noctua, Sav.

1 Noctua Indica, .. ae ay Dukhun.

2 hixsuta ls. os ae Sumatra.

xx. Subfam Bubonina.

Genus Kerrupa, LEsson.

1 Ketupa Leschenaultii, .. ee Siam.

2 Ceylonensis, se ee / Java.

1841. | Asiatic Society.

xxx. Subfam Assionina.

Genus Otvs, Cov.

1 Otus Bengalensis,

Frauhl. Dukhun,

2 —— Orientalis, ete Horsf. Java.

3 —— Lempige, 5 : Horsf. id.

4 —— rufescens, aXe Horsf. id.

xxxx.—Subfam Strigide.

GENus STRIX.

1 Strix Javanica, ate 55 Horsf. Java.

2 —— badia, ae ote Fforsf. id.

3) a Selo puto, oe ee Horsf. id.

Pagodarum, Temm.

4 —— castanoptera, ae Horsf. id.

ORDO II.—INSESSORES.

Tribus, 1.—Fissirostres.

Fam. 1.—Meropide.

Genus Merops, Linn.

ae Tasdaied ee 1 Merops Javanicus, oe Horsf. Java.

Savignii, Temm,

2 ——_-—— Adansonii, .. oe Sumatra.

3 ——— urica, ora Horsf. Java.

4 ——-—— viridis, Linn.

GENus Nycriomis, SwAINSON.

Particularly. e» oe J Nyctiomis Athertonii, .. Ae Assam.

| Fam: II, Hirunide.

Genus CYPSELUS.

1 Cypselus comatus, oe oe Siam.

2 ———— affinis, Hard and Gray, Dukhun.

Desiderat. .. a 3 ———— Klecho, 50 a5 Horsf. Java.

longipennis, Temm.

4 ———-—_-._- - Ac Sumatra.

Genus HIRuNDOo.

1 Hirundo esculenta, te Java.

2 ———— fuciphaga, Bis . ad.

| 3 lr ro cr ra aE filifera, ee eo Dukhun.

‘ 4 ———— Sewan, - os Sykes, id.

eee < 5 ———— concolor, ie ae Sykes, id:

6 ———— erythropygia, ee Sykes, id.

7 ———— berevirostris, »- M‘Clelland, Assam.

L 8 ————- brevicaudata, ore M‘Clelland, id.

46 Asiatic Society. [ No. 109.

Fam: III. Caprimulgide.

GENUS CAPRIMULGUS.

1 Caprimulgus affinis, .. ye Horsf. Java.

2 ——_——-——. macrourus, Ne Horsf. id.

Desiderat. bees 3 ——_——_-——_ asiaticus, .. - Madras.

4 ————_-——- monticulus, be Frank, Dukhun,

0 Caprimulgus Mahrattensis, ae Sykes, Dukhun.

GENus PopDaRGus.

Podargus, Conti- }

nental species. .... 1 Podargus Javensis, a5 s Horsf. Java.

Fam. IV. Todide.

Genus Euryuaimus, Horsr.

1 Eurylaimus Horsfieldii SS Temm, Java.

Desiderat. { 2— — ochromalus, ae Raff. Sumatra.

3 — lunatus, a Gould, Assam.

Genus Eourystomus Vieitu (Coloris Cuv.)

Common. { Euryetomus Orientalis. ke Java.

Fam. V. Halcyonide.

Genus DaceEto, Lracu.

Indian species. ! Dacelo pulchella, be rs Horsf. Java.

Genus Hatcyon, Swalins.

1 Halcyon leucocephalus, zie Java.

‘ 2 ——_——-——- coromandelicus, .. id.

Most of these are 3 ——————-chlorocephalus, .. id.

common. New species 4 —— Saceren. os ar id.

desirable. | 5— onmicolor,.. 7 id.

1 6 ——-— albicapillus, * Sumatra.

f 7 Smyrnensis, B60 are Dukhun.

GENUS ALCEDO.

Alcedo all the Con- 1 Alcedorudis, ae se Linn. Dukhun.

tinental species. {| 2— Bengalensis, es Geml. id.

s 3 — Meninting, we Horsf. Java.

| 4———— Bin, ais Horsf. id.

5 Desiderat. ie a Guttata, Gould, Siam, Bengal.

Genus Cryx.

1 Ceyx tridactyla es oe Java.

Tribus II. Dentirostres,

Fam. I. Muscicapide.

Genus MuscIPETA.

rapecnt oe cites { 1 Muscipeta ss . oe Stephens, —_—

2 ——--—— Paradisii, te id. |

1841.]

Asiatic

Genus Puanicornis, Swaltns.

Society.

ig 1 Phenicornis flammea,

Desiderata,

Muscicapa general- |

ly desirable.

Desiderata,

Cryptolopha—parti- \

cularly.

Common.

Common. (

Additional common

species !

fe ge Deed aN

4) ee

PRO EN

Gees ees

peregrina, oe

princeps,

elegans, a

curvirostris, ee

affinis,

Genus MuscicaPa.

1 Muscicapa Indigo, 50 ee Horsf. Java.

2— Bangumas, .. Horsf. id.

3 — obscura, ;

hirundina, es \ Hor oe

4 — melanops, .. Gould, Dukhun.

o— Poonensis, .. oe Sykes, id.

6 —— ceeruleocephala, ote id.

7— picata, 56 és Sykes, id.

$8 ———_-—— capitalis, -» M‘Clelland, Assam.

9— cerulea, 56 Sumatra.

Genus Rurpipura, Vicors.

1 Rhipidura Javanica, re . Java.

2— fuscoventris, Dukhun.

3— albipunctata,

Java, Assam.

id.

Gould, Assam.

M‘Cleliand, id.

Assam.

Dukhun,

Genus CrYPTOLOPHA, SWAINSON.

1 Cryptolopha poiocephala.

FAM. II. LANIADA.

xx. Subfam: Dicrurine, Swains.

Genus Artamus,

1 Artamus leucorhynckus,

Genus Diermus,

1 Dicrurus forficatus, oe

2 ———— cinereus, ote

3 ———— Malabaricus,

4 ———_-—— Balicassius,

) ———— grandis, an

6 ———— Rangoonensis,

7 ———— eneus,

Viewlot. Ocypterus, Cuv.

Java.

Viewllot.

Java.

Horsf. id.

id.

Dukhun.

Gould, Assam.

Gould, id.

Viell. id.

Desiderat. dood {

Other Continental

species desirable....

Desiderat. see

Particularly. eee

Desiderat.

Common Desiderat. {

Asiatic Society. [ No. 109.

Genus Tricopnorus. TEmm.

1 Tricophorus barbatus, 5 Java.

2— flaveolus, ae Gould, Assam.

xxx. Subfam. Laniane. Swains.

Genus Hypsiretss, Vicors.

1 Hypsipetes Ganesa, a Sykes, Dukhun.

2— psaroides, ee Gould.

Qe M‘Clellandii, Assam.

4 ———_-—— gracilis, sis td.

Genus Cotuurio, Vicors.

1 Collurio Bentet, ate Horsf. Java.

2 ——-——. Hardwickii, oe Vig. Dukhun.

3 ———— erythronotus, oe id.

4 ———— Schach, a5 id.

0 ———— Lathora, ig id.

Genus Lanius, Aucrt.

1 Lanius rufus, He oie Sumaira.

2 virgatus, ee Temm. id.

3 muscicapoides, ee Dukhun.

4 undularis ? os Dukhun.

xxxx. Subfam Thamnophilina.

Genus VANGA.

1 Vanga coronata, -. Vigors, Sumatra.

xxxxx. Subfam Ceblepyrine, Swains.

Genus Gravcauus, Cuv.

Graucalus Papuensis, ' 25 Java, Dukhun.

——-—— maculosus, M‘Cleliand, Assam.

Genus Cresteryris, Cuv. Campernaca, VIEILL.

Ceblepyris fimbriatus, .. Temm. Java, Dukhun.

—— canus, ea Dukhun.

———— striga, a Horsf. Java.

1841.]

All thespecies of Pit-

ta are Desiderata.

Desiderat.

Desiderat. Sree

Common.

eee0

All these species are

rare and Desiderata.

Desiderat.

Common.

Asiatic Society.

FAM III. MERULIDA.

x. Subfam Myiotherina, Swains.

Genus Pitta, TEmm.

1 Pitta cyanura, os

2 —— gigas, oe oe

3 —— thoracina, Ae oe

4 —— brachyuara, ar

o— ee

Genus Cincius, Becust.

1 Cinclus Asiaticus, re

Java.

Temm. Sumatra.

Madras.

Sumatra.

Swains.

xx. Subfam Meruline.

GeNus Myopnonus, TEmnM.

1 Myophonus glacuinus, oe

2 -—— metallicus, Sc

3 ——-— Temminckii, oe

Genus CincLosomaA, VIG.

1 Cinclosoma strigatum.

GENUS TURDUS.

1 Turdus Saularis, ate

2 amenus, ae

3 macrurus, 30)

4 vividis, oe

9) concolor, ele

6 vacuis, 56

7 ophiocephalus, ve

8 perspicellatus, ee

9 albicollis, ate

10 pecilopterus, So

11 ——— melanocephalus, oe

12 cyanotus,

13 erythrogaster, oe

Grenus Ixos, TEMM.

1 Ixos cucullatus,

2 melanocephalus, ee

3 —— chrysorheus, oe

4 —— Cafer, Boolbool, sie

9 —— Psidii, ara

6 —— Finlanysonii, oe

7 —— Jocosus, Sc

Temm. Java.

Java.

Gould, Bengal.

Dukhun.

Java.

Horsf. Java.

Horsf. id.

id.

Sumatra.

Royle, Bengal.

ad.

Sumatra.

Jard. and Selly, Bengal ?

Gould, id.

Hooded Th. Lath, Bengal.

Bengal.

Java.

Dukhun.

Java.

Sumatra.

Dukhun.

50 Asiatic’ Society. | [ No. 109.

8 Ixos fulicatus, ae Dukhun.

9 —— bimaculatus, “ Java.

10 —— dispar, oe Java.

GENUS GARRULAX, LrEss. IANTHOCIN GLD.

1 Garrulax gularis, .. M‘Clelland, Assam.

Species of Garrulaz, 2 ——-—- pectoralis, <n Gould, id.

eek or Lanthocinit. 3 ———— lunaris .. M‘Clelland, Assam.

ould, are very desir- :

able. ait —— albogularis, ae Gould, Bengal.

3° ———— leucolophus, oe id.

GENUs GEOCICHLA.

1 Geocichla rubecola, a Bengal.

GENUS ZOOTHERA, VIGORS.

Rare and very desirable. 1 Zoothera monticula, a Bengal.

xxx. Subfam Oriolina.

GENUS ORIoLus, AvcT,

1 Oriolus Chinensis, ore Linn. Java.

2 Xanthonotus, oe Horsf. Java.

3 melanocephalus, a Siam, &c.

4 ——— Galbula, ate Linn. Dukhun.

Particularly. .... { 9) Kundii, oe Sykes, Dukhun.

6 Trailliz, «- Gould, Cent., Assam

GEeNus IRENA, HorsrF.

1 Irena Puella, F. Cuv. Puella Lath, Java, Siam.

XXxx. Subfam Cossyphina.

Grenus TIMALIA, HorspF.

‘¢ 1 Timalia pileata, -- Horsf. Java, &c.

| 2 ? gularis, te Horsf. Java.

Species of Timalia 3 ——— Malcolmi, a5 Sykes, Dukhun.

generally desirable. \ Somervillii, - Sykes, id.

| 5 ——— Chatarea, Ne Frankl. id.

L 6 ——— hypoleuca, -- Frankl. Madras.

REXX.

GENUS PETROCINELA, VIGORS.

1 Petrocinela Pandu, ae Sykes, Dukhun.

Desiderata. siaieie 2 —— Malab, oa Sykes, id.

3 — cinchlorhyncha, ee id.

Fam IV. Sylviade.

Subfam x.

Genus Iona, Horsr.

1 Tora scapularis, a Java, Siam,

Additional species? 2 —— Typhia,

3 ——meliceps, a6 Dukhun.

~—=1841.] Asiatic Society. ay

Subfam xx.

GENUS BRACHYPTERY, HoRsr.

if 1 Brachypterye montana, AG Horsf. Java.

_ Several India species ; 2——___—? sepiaria, os ad.

eee ied re 3 Subfam axx-/Sylviana.

very desirable. Grnus SYLVIA.

| ! 1 Sylvia Javanica, ee Prinia, Java.

ee montana, si Prinia, Java.

: 3 Sylvia Rama, -- Sykes, Dukhun.

la { 4 Sylviella, Sykes, id.

GrENus PRINIA.

: - 1 Prinia familiaris, a Horsf. Java.

Mouas panel 2 --—— socialis, a Sykes, Dukhun.

pe 3 inornata, et Sykes, id.

Gen. Zosterops, Vig. and Horsf. see below.

GENUS ORTHOTOMUsS, HoRSsF.

1 Orthotomus sepium, fe Horsf. Java.

Deside rata. | 2 Benetti, Se Sykes, Dukhun.

3 ————— Lingoo, ae Sykes, id.

xxxx. Subfam Motacillina.

Genus MorTaciuLa, AUCT.

1 Motacilla variegata, .. Stephens, Dukhun.

2 ———— Dukhunensis, ae Sykes, id.

GENUS BupyTEs, Cuv.

] Budytes flava (Mat flava, ) .- Java, Sumatra.

2 ———— citreola (Mat. cit.) a Dukhun.,

3 ———— melanocephala, 56 Sykes, id.

4 ——_—— Beema, te Sykes, id.

Genus ENiIcurus, TEMM.

, : 1 Enicurus coronatus, a6 Temm. Java.

Species of Enicurus

desired. seb ls { De velatus, ale Temm. id.

3 ———— maculatus, ate Gould, Bengal.

Grnus ANTHUS, BECHSTEIN.

1 Anthus agilis, -- Sykes, Dukhun.

2 ——_——_——_-? oO Sumatra.

GEenus MrcGaLurus, Horsr.

Continental species ? ‘ 1 Megalurs palustris, ve Horsf. Java.

2 — ? ruficeps, we Sykes, Dukhun.

Xxxxxx Subfam Saxicolina.

GENUS SAXICOLA, BECHSTEIN.

C 1 Saxicola caprata. ae Java, &c.

| 2 ———— Rubicola, -- Lemm. Dukhun.

i by é : — aieaes aks Sykes, id.

———— bicolor, oe Sykes, id.

1 o ———— erythropygia, le Sykes, id.

6 ———— olivea, . M‘Clelland, Assam.

Asiatic Society. [No. 169.

GENUS PH@NIcURA, JARD AND SELBY.

Desiderata. ae

tal species 2

Additional Continen- \

Several other In-

dian species are indi-

cated.

Genus Melanochlora.

Particularly.

Leiothrix is a very

interesting Genus and

all Indian species are

Desiderata.

Common. cece

Species of Mirafra

desired.

1 Phenicura atrata, Jard. and Selby, Dukhun.

2— frontalis, Gould. Cent. Bengal.

3 — ceruleocephala, -- Gould. Cent. id.

4 — leucocephala, e. Gould. Cent. id.

9) —— Reevesii, Gray, Assam.

GENUS ZOSTEROPS, VIGORS AND Horsr.

Zosterops Maderaspatanus, =i Java.

FAM V. PIPRIDA.

GeENus PARus, LINN.

1 Parus atriceps, me Horfs. Java.

2 —— xanthogenus, — Vig. Gld. Cent. Dukhun.

Gild. Cent. Bengal.

Gid. Cent. id.

a ee id.

3 —— erythrocephalus,

4 —— monticolus, ais

Fy ask dates

Genus MELANOCHLORA, Less. Parus. Laf. McCLELLAND.

1 Melanochlora flavocristata, Be Assam.

Parus flavocristatus, Lafr.

GENUS CALYPTOMENA, RAFF.

1 Calyptomen, viridis. > «=©>—»- Raffi. Sumatra.

GENUS LEIOTHRIX, SWAINSON.

1 Liothrix lepida,

3 ———— ornata, Bo

ee ‘Clelland, Assam.

M‘Clelland, id.

— signata, ; Ae

Tribus 111. Conirostres, Cru.

I. FAM. FRINGILLIDA.

xx. Subfam Alaudina.

GENUS EMBERIZA, LINN.

1 Emberiza cristata, - Vigors, Dukhun.

2 ———— subcristata, ae Sykes, id.

3 ———— malanocephala, Sykes, id.

4 a Cia, ee ee ee Bengal.

Genus ALAUDA, LINN.

1 Alauda Gulgula, -. Frankl. Dukhun.

2 SS Deva, eo ee Sykes, id. /

GENUS LINARIA.

1 Linaria Amandava, ae ais Java.

GENus MrirAFra, HoRsrF.

1 Mirafra Javanica, Horsf. Java.

2 ——_—— phenicura, .. Frankl. Dukhun.

.. M‘Clelland, Assam.

M‘Clelland, id.

3 ———— Assamica,

4 ——_——. flavelicollis,

1841.]

Desiderat. ae |

Desiderat.

Desideratum.

eevee

Several other spe-

cies of Pastor are in-

dicated and a com-

plete series is very

much wanted,

Asiatic Society. is

xxx. Subfam Carduelina.

GENUS CARDUELIS, Briss.

1 Carduelis caniceps,

2 ——-—— spinoides,

GENUS PLOocEovs, Cuv.

1 Ploceus Philippensis,

3 ———— Mangar,

Gould, Cent. Bengal.

a id. id.

i Java.

sa Horsf. id.

xxxx. Subfam Passernia.

GENUS FRINGILLA.

1 Fringilla punctularia,

—— striata,

3 — oryzivora,

4 —___ Maja, So0C

> — crucigera,

6 ———— Rhodopepla,

7 ——-— montana?

GENUS PASSER, AUCT.

1 Passer domesticus,

Genus LoncHuRA, SYKES.

1 Lonchura misoria,

2 ——_—— Cheet,

3 ——_—— leuconota,

4 ——-—— sphura,

) ———— melanocephala,

-- Lcep. Linn. Java.

Aes Ls. Linn. id.

Ha id.

6 eo id.

“i Temm. Dukhun.

eee Gld. Cent. Bengal.

Sumatra.

Briss, Dukhun.

oe Dukhun.

ore Sykes, id.

<0 Sykes, id.

aa Java.

-- M‘Clelland, Assam.

II. FAM STURNIDA.

xx. Subfam Sturnina.

GENus SturRNus, LINN.

1 Sturnus vulgaris,

GENUS LAMPROTORNIS.

1 Lamprotornis, oe

spulopterus,

ae ees

GENus Pastor, TEMM.

1 Pastor griseus,

2 ——— Mahrattensis,

3 capensis, a

4 tricolor,

5 tristis, aie

6 roseus,

7 Pagodarusu, -

8 cristatellus,

9 —-—— leucocephalus,

a China.

Cantor, Java.

Gild. Cent. Assam.

ae Horsf. Java.

-- Sykes, Dukhun.

P. Jalla Horsf. Java.

Ae Horsf. id.

Gracula Linn. Dukhun.

-- Lemm. Dukhun, &c.

sie Temm. id.

Ill. FAM CORVID&E.

xx. Subfam Corvina.

Genus Pica, Briss.

, { 1 Pica erythrorhyncha, Gmil. Linn. China.

Magpie. * 2 —— caudata, i Briss Ray, &¢c. Sumatra.

Genus Denprocitta, Gou.p.

1 Dendrocitta Sinensis,

Desiderata. sees 2 ree eee MnGa, ie ae

3 —- leucogastra, oy Gid. Madras.

4 —_—_—-—— frontalis, an M‘Cld. Assam.

Genus Kirra, Kuut.

1 Kitta venatorius.

Genus Corvus, Auct.

( 1 Corvus Corone, s Sumatra.

su : Be ite splendens, ye Dukhun.

Additional species. 4 per ae a ei

ty 4 Enca, ae Horsf. Java.

xxx. Subfam Coracina.

Genus Coractias, Linn.

1 Coracias indica, are Linn. Sumatra.

Oe ion { 2. —_——- affinis, .. McClelid. Assam.

Genus Gracuta, Auct. Eutases Cov.

1 Gracula religiosa, se Auct, Java, &c.

Genus Crypstrina, VIEILL.

Other species of Crypsirina? 1 Crypsirina, Se Java.

Genus Garrutus, Briss.

1 Garrulus lanceolatus, site Gld. China.

2 — bispecularis, ee Gid. Bengal.

Genus Freaitus, Coracia Briss, Gray, Gu. Cuv.

1 Fregilus graculus, oe ee Sumatra.

IV. FAM BUCERIDA.

Genus Buceros.

fi 1 Buceros Rhinoceros, aise Linn. Sumatra.

2 ——— undulatus, aici Shaw, Java.

Several recently dis- 3 ——— Malabaricus, bee Lath, id.

Pa it SP ies 4 ——— cavetus? Homrai, Hodgson, Sumatra.

5 ——-— gingeanus, eves eoes Madras, &c.

V. FAM LOXIADA, 1GORS.

Genus Parapoxornis, Goutp, Procrerep. Zoou. Soc.

Particularly. 1 Paradoxornis flavirostris, a Gould, Assam.

b+ Asiatic Society. [ No. 109.

1841. | Asiatic Society.

TRIBUS

IV.

II. FAM PSITTACIDA.

x. Subfam Psittacina.

Genus Psittacus.

All the species of this { 1 Psittacus sulphureus,

Genus. 2 ———— ornatus,

ma Sumatra.

Sumatra.

Xxxx. Subfam. Paleonuniy,

Genus Patcornis, Vicors.

( 1 Paleornis Pondicerianus,

| 2— torquatus, ‘sc.

me BF Pal i o& ——~—— flavitorquis,

‘pecies of Paleor- :

nis generally desired. < 4ST eae

———— melanorhy :

6 ———— schisticeps,

Q 7 ———— erythiocephalus,

Java, &c.

oe Sumatra.

ae Shaw.

34 Java.

Sykes, Dukhun.

a0 Bengal.

aye China.

XXxxx. Subfam Psittaculina, Vigors.

Genus Psirracuta, Kuut.

Additional species. 1 Psittaculina Galguila,

Java.

III. FAM PICIDA.

Genus Bucco.

1 Bucco Javensis,

( 2 roseicollis,

3 ——— Philippensis,

australis,

versciolor,

de Mainas,

Lathamii,

caniceps,

corvinus,

grandis,

cyanops,

Additional species

desirable ? melee

| 9

Genus Picus.

1 Picus leucogaster,

( 2 pulverulentus,

| 3 ——— dimideatus,

4 Goensis,

Pes miniatus,

6 puniceus,

7 ——~—analis,

8 poicilolophus,

A complete series of 9 badius,

the Continental species 10 Mahrattensis,

of Picus desirable, | ll nuchalis,

12 squamatus,

13 ——— hyperythrus,

| 14 brunifrons,

15 ——— Himalayanus,

16 strenuus,

17 occipitalis,

a ——— Nepalensis,

Cert Macei,

ais Horsf. Java.

- id.

50 Horsf.

ae Raff. Sumatra.

ae Temm. Sumatra.

Ste id.

are Dukhun.

oH id.

ote Sumatra,

se Cuv. Assam.

a5 Temm. Java.

ae Temm. id.

ee Temm. id,

50 Lath, id.

ole Gmel. id.

oe Horsf. id.

oe Temm. id.

oe Temm id.

nye Raffi. Sumatra.

ee Lath. Dukhun.

ale Wagler, Bengal.

a Gould, Bengal.

oe Gou.d, Bengal.

°° Gould, Bengal.

ee Jardin, Bengal.

ore Gould, Assam.

ws Gould, Cent. id.

-» Gray and Hard. id.

oe id.

Additional species?

Other species of Sitta

are recorded.

Desideratum.

All the Indian species.

Centropus and Phe-

nicophaus.

Desideratum. ate {

——

Asiatic Society.

[No. 109. .

Pedibus Tridactylis.

Genus Curysonotus, Swalns.

1 Picus Chrysonotus, °

tiga, 5

Genus Yunx, Linn.

1 Yunx torquilla,

z Grant, Assam.

: Horsf. Java.

ae Linn. Assam, &c.

IV. FAM CERTHIADA.

Genus Urpupa, Avcr.

Upupa minor, ee

Genus TicuopRoMA.

Shaw, Dukhun.

1 Tichodroma erythroptera, aa China.

GeENus Sitta, LInn.

1 Sitta frontalis, Ze Horsf. Java.

V. FAM. CUCULIDA.

Genus Coccyzus, VIEILL.

1 Coccyzus chrysogaster,

Genus Leptosomus.

1 Leptosomus Afer,

Genus Enpynamis, Vic.

1 Endynamis orientalis,

Genus Cucutus, Avucrt.

1 Cuculus fugax,

2 ———— flavus,

3 ———— canorus,

4 ———— Pravata,

9 ———— lugubris,

6 ——-—— xanthorhynchus,

7 ———— basalis,

8 ——_—— Nepalensis,

9 ——_—— Indicus,

Genus Centropus, ILuia.

1 Centropus lepidus,

2 ——-—— Philippensis,

ae Java.

e¥ Dukhun.

AND HorsrF.

ae Java, &c.

-. Horsf. Java, &c.

as Gmel. id.

oe id,

te Linn. id. —

a Horsf. id,

aie Horsf. id.

Horsf. id.

ae Gould, Bengal.

. Horsf. Java, Assam.

ae Cuv. id. id.

Genus PuenicorHaus. VIEILL.

1 Phenicophaus Rouverdin,

2 ——_—_—-—— lucidus,

3 ——_——-——- tristis,

Genus Trocon, Liyn.

] Trogon Duvanceli,

2 Hodgsonii,

a Java.

oe Vig. Sumatra.

re Lesson, Assam.

ore Temm. Sumatra.

Gould, Assam.

1841.)

Indian species gene-

rally. |

Desiderata. cease {

Desiderata. Selele {

Desiderata. 5000 {

Desiderata. eis {

Additional species of

Arachnotheri Diceum

Chloropsis and Poma-

torhinus particularly

desirable.

}

Species of Vinago

Ptilinopus and Colum-<

ba are Desirable.

Asiatic Society. 57

Tribus Tenuirostres, Cuv. Fam. Cinnyride.

Genus Cinnyris, Cuv. Nectarrina Inui.

1 Cinnyris lepida, ae Java, &c.

2 ———— pectoralis, ate Horsf. Java.

3 ———— eximia, Horsf. id.

4 ——-—— currucaria, Linn. Dukhun.

9 ———— Vigorsii, Sykes, id,

6 ———— minima, b6 Sykes, id.

7 ———— Mahrattensis, Shaw, id.

8 ———— concolor, Sykes, id.

Siam.

9 ——_—— Peronii,

10 ——-—— Assamensis,

1] ———— Labecula,

Genus ARACHNOTHERA, TEMM.

1 Arachnothera inornata,

-» M‘Clelland, Assam.

M‘ Clelland, id.

Temm. Java.

2 longirostria, oe id.

Genus Dicaus, Cuv.

1 Diceum cruentatum, Java.

2 ———— erythronotum, oe Assam.

FAM. MELIPHUGIDG.

Genus CHLOROPSIs.

2 Chloropsis Cochinchinensis, Java, &c.

2 ———— chrysogaster, M‘Clelland, Assam.

Genus PomatoruINus, Horsr.

1 Pomatorhinus montanus, .- Horsf. Java, Assam.

2 ——_————. Horsfieldii, oe Sykes, Dukhun,

3 ————-——- ery throginys, Gould, Bengal.

ORDO III.—Rasorss, ILLicgr.

1 Fam Columbide.

Genus VinaGo, Cuv.

1 Vinago veruans, ee

Java, &c.

GENus PTILINoPUs, SWAINs.

1 Ptilinopus Elphinstonii, -. Sykes, Dukhun.

Genus CotumsBa, LINN.

1 Columba alba, Linn. i Prine tae.

Columba titorulis, ..

2 ——_—— melanocephala, ae Gm. id.

3 ———— tigrina, Temm. id.

4 ————- risoria, Linn. id.

5 ———— Bantamensis, 50 Sparm. td.

6 .——--—— bitorquata, Temm. id.

7 ———— Javanica, Temm. id.

8 ——-—— Amboinensis, as Linn. td.

g ——-—— enea, Linn. id.

10 ———— Jamboo, Gmel. Sumatra.

11 Aleena, Sykes, Dukhun.

12 humiles, id.

13 enas, id.

14 cambagixus, id.

Desideratum.

Other Indian species ?

Desiderat.

All the continental

species.

Additional species. «»

A complete series of |

the Genera of this fa-<

mily desirable,

Asiatic Society. [No. 109.

ll. FAM PHASIANIDA.

Genus Pavo, Linn.

1 Pavo cristatus,

2 muticus, ae

Linn. Dukhun.

Temm. Java.

Genus PotypLectron, TEM.

1 Polyplectron bicalcaratus, Sumatra,

GeEeNus LopHopHorus, TEMM.

1 Lophophorus Impeyanus, Bengal.

Genus Gat.us, Briss.

1 Gallus furcatus,

2 Bankiva, Temm. id-

3 Soneratii, oe Dukhun.

4 giganteus, os id.

5 domesticus, id.

Genus EvuPLocomus.

1 Euplocomus erythrophthalmus, .. Sumatra.

2 —-——-——- ignitus, -. Lemm. Sumatra.

GENUS PHASIANDS,

1 Phasianus albocristatus, China.

Assam.

China.

2 ——_—— leucomelanos,

3 ——-—— Pucrasia, ee

Genus Areus, TEMM.

] Argus giganteus, ee Temm. Sumatra.

Genus TRAGOPAN, Cuv.

1 Tragopan cornutus, Se Bengal.

GreNus NumMIDa.

1 Numida Meleagris, -» Domestic in Dukhun.

III. FAM TETRAONID A.

Genus CRYPTONYX.

I Cryptonyx cristatus, oe Sumatra.

2 ———— ocellatus, oe id.

Genus Corurnix, Cuv.

1 Coturnix sinensis, Java.

2 ———— dactylisonans, Dukhun.

3 ———— textilus, 0 id. @

4 ———— Argoondah, Sykes, Dukhun. —

9 ———— Pentah, Fe Sykes, id.

6 ———— erythrorhyncha, Sykes, td.

Genus Perpix, Briss.

1 Perdix Javanica, as Horsf. Java.

2 personata, cn Horsf. id.

3 curvirostris, be Pee Sumatra. —

4 ——- picta, Jard and Selby, Dukhun. —

9) oculea, he {

6 Chukur, Bengal.

Temm. Java,

“ a

1841. ] Asiatic Society. 59

Genus FRANCOLINvS.

1 Francolinus spadiceus, Dukhun.

2 -—— Pontecerianus, By 2 id.

3—- — cruentus, Bengal.

Genus PTEROCLES.

1 Pterocles quadricinctus, .- Lemm. Dukhun.

2 ———— exustus, ae Temm. Dukhun.

Genus Hemipopius, TEMM.

1 Hemipodius Luzoniensis, oe Java.

2 -——— pugnax, ee Dukhun.

3 —- Dussumier, Pic Temm. id.

4—- Taigoor, ob Sykes, id.

IV. FAM STRUTHIOMDA.

Genus OT1s, LINN.

Desideratum. Seer { 1 Otis nigriceps, we Gould, Dukhun.

2 —-- fulva, Ae Sykes, id.

ORDO IV. GRALLATORES.

I. Fam Gruide.

Genus Grus, PALLAs.

1 Grus cinerea, .. ae ae Bengal.

Il. FAM ARDEIDG.,

GreNnus ARDEA.

| Ardea cinerea, -« Linn. var. Java:

2 ——- purpurea, .. os Linn, id.

| 3 ——- Egretta, we Gmel. Java, Dukhun.

4 ——- Garzetta, ate Linn. id. id.

o ——- russata, 25 sc Temm. Java.

6 ——- Malaccensis, a Gmel. id.

Good specimens of } 7 ——- speciosa, ge nae Horsf. id.

the GeneraGrus, Ardea 8 ——- Sinensis oe id.

and Ciconia desired. ?

9 ——- flavicollis, .. aS Lath. id.

10 ——- Javanica, “ id.

1] ——- cinnamomea, ae Gmel. id.

| 12 ——- Caboga, . Pemn. Dukhun.

13 ——- Grayii, : Sykes, td.

| 14 ——- gularis, ve te Siam.

Genus Botaorus, Briss.

1 Botaurus stellaris, We Bengal.

Genus Nycrticorax, STEPHENS.

1 Nycticorax Europzus,

Genus CIconia.

Ciconia Argala(Adjutant,) 1 Ciconia capillatta,

a good specimen desired! 2 - lencocephala,

Java, Dukhun.

Temm. Java.

Java.

60 Asiatie Society. [No. 109.

GENUS PHENICOPTERUS.

1 Phenicopterus ruber, ee Linn. Siam.

Genus Mycteria, Linn.

1 Mycteria australis, ae Bengal.

Genus PLatTaLzea, LINN.

1 Platalea leucorodia, oe Linn. Dukhun.

Genus ANASTORNUs, ILLIGER.

1 Anastornus typus, oe Linn. Dukhun.

Genus Tantatus, Linn.

1 Tantalus leucocephalus, ve Lath. Dukhun,

Genus Isis, Laczp.

1 Ibis religiosa, aa oe Cuv. Dukhun.

2 —— ignea, =f ae id.

3 —— papillosa, 6 ae Temm. id.

4 —— falcinella, mie ae Temm. id.

III. FAM SCOLOPACIDS.

Genus Nomenivs, Briss.

Desiderata. 1 Numenius Phcoepus, ne Java.

Genus Totanus, BECHSTEIN.

( 1 Totanus affinis, o's Horsf. Java.

I 2 ——-— hypoleucos, ae Temm., id.

| 3 ——-— acuminatus, sis Horsf. id.

J ; 4 ——-— tenurostris, wa Horsf. id.

AS Ot Cau ) 9 ——-— Damacensis, oe Horsf. id.

| 6 ——-— Glottis, Big Bechst. id.

i 7 ——-— ochropus, a Temm. Dukhun.

l 8 ——-— Glareola, ae Temm. id.

Genus Limosa, Briss.

( 1 Limosa melanura, ae Java.

1 2 —-— Terek, oe Temm. id.

Desiderata. ceoed 3 ——-— Horsfieldii, a Sykes, Dukhun.

| 4——-— Glottoides, } Sykes, 54

L Totanus Glottoides, Gould.

Genus Sco.topax, LINN.

1 Scolopax saturata, . oe Horsf. Java.

Genus GaLuinaGo, Ray.

gees uit F Gal { 1 Gallinago media, ls Java, Dukhun.

linago. eialaie 2 —-—— minima, ee Dukhun.

Genus RuyncHZza, Cov.

1 Rhynchza orientalis, ee Horsf. Java.

Desideratum. «+s. { ee DICLa, ish Gray, Dukhun.

Genus PELIpNA, Cvuv. .

Desideratum. 1 Pelidna Temminckui, eo Stephens, Dukhun.

Genus Trinea, LINN.

Desideratum. 1 Tringa subarquata, ds Temm, Java.

Other Continental

Desideratum. {

Continental species.

Indian species gene-

Aseries of Indian Na-

‘tatores generally desir-

Asiatic Society. 61

GENus Srepsizas, ILLIGER.

1 Strepsila collaris, «> Lemm. Sumatra,

IV. FAM RALLIDA.

Genus Parra, Linn.

1 Parra superciliosa, oe Horsf. Java.

2 Sinensis, ee Gmel. Dukhun.

GENus GLaREOLA, Briss.

1 Glareola orientalis, oe Leach, Java.

Genus Ratuus, Linn.

1 Rallus gularis, ele Horsf. Java.

2 ——— fuceus, ote Linn. id.

3 ——— A kool, Ee Sykes, Dukhun.

Genus GALLINULA, Briss.

1 Gallinula lugubris, oe Horsf. Java.

2 ——_—— chloropus, a id.

3 ———— Javanica, Horsf. Java, Dukhun.

4 ———— superciliosa, oe Temm. Java.

Genus PorpuyRio, Briss.

1 Porphyrio smaragdinus, 20 Java, Dukhun.

Genus Futica.

1 Fulica atra, Linn. Java, Dukhun.

V. FAM CHARADRIADAE.

Genus VANENLUS, Briss.

1 Vanellus melanogaster, <s Java.

2 ———— tricolor, Sc Horsf. id.

3 ———— Goénsis, ate Steph. Dukhun.

4 —-—.——— bilobus, le ad.

GENUS CHARADRIUS.

1 Charadrius cantiarius, oe Lath. Java.

2 ——— pluvialis, oe Linn. id.

3 ———— Asiaticus, ae Gmel. id.

4 —_—_—— pusillus, ae Horsf. id.

9 ———— Phillippensis, os Lath. Dukhun.

Genus Cursorivus, Latu.

1 Cursorius Asiaticus, oe Lath. Dukhun.

Genus Himantopus, Ray.

1 Himantopus melanopterus, oe Java, &c.

Genus AiDICcNEMUS, Cuv.

1 Addicnemus crepitans, ee Dukhun.

ORDO V. NATATORES.

I Fam Anatide, Leach.

Genus PLEctTROPTERUS, LEACH.

1 Plectropterus melanotos, oe Dukhun.

Genus ANSER, Briss.

1 Anser Girra, A Dukhun.

Asiatie Society. [ No. 109.

Genus Taporna, LEACH.

1 Tadorna rutila, a Steph. Dukhun.

Genus Anas, AvucT.

1 Anas strepera, ee Linn. Dukhun.

Genus RHYNCHAPSIS.

1 Rhynchapsis viresceus, ee: Dukhun.

Genus MareEca.

1 Mareca pecilorhyncha, — ee Steph. Dukhun.

2 ——_—— fistularis, ae id.

3 ———— Ardsuro, ee Sykes, id.

4 ———— Arcuata, ae Cuv. Java.

GENUS QUERQUEDULA.

1 Querquedula Circia, ae Dukhun.

Genus Mereus, LINN.

1 Mergus Merganser, ue Bengal.

Il. FAM. COLYMBIDS.

Genus Popiceps, LatH.

1 Podiceps minor, “e Java.

2 — Philippensis, oe Dukhun.

III. FAM ALCAD.

GENus APTENODYTES, Forst.

] Aptenodytes, -- Southern Ocean.

IV. FAM PELECANIDA4:—Leacu.._

Genus PELECANUS.

1 Pelecanus onocrotalus, Ac Java.

2 ———-— Javanicus, 5. Horsf. id.

Genus PHatacrocorax, Briss.

1 Phalacrocorax Javanicus, BA Java.

GENus SuLA, Briss.

1 Sula communis. ele Siam.

Genus TacuyPETEs, VIEILL.

1 Tachypetes Aquilus, oa Siam.

Genus Puasrton, Linn.

} Phaéton ethereus,

Genus Protus, Linn.

1 Plotus melanogaster, Gml. Java, Dukhun.

V. LARIDA—LeEacn.

Genus Sterna, Linn. |

1 Sterna minuta, a Linn. Java.

2 — Javanica, oe Horsf. id.

1841. | Asiatic Society. 63

3 Sterna media, oe Horsf. id.

4 ——— grisea, a Horsf. id.

9) affinis, are Horsf. id.

6 ——— acuticauda, ae Gray, Dukhun.

7 ——— similis, AG Gray, Dukhun.

g ——— Seena? an Sykes, Dukhun.

Genus DiomepEa, Linn.

Diomedea exulans.

2 ——— fuliginosa.

Genus Proceviaria, Avct.

l Procellaria Capensis,

| ——— xquinoctialis.

Remarks.

In the preceding list, subjects of which specimens are particularly desirable have

been indicated in the margin: of these several specimens will be useful. The more

common species have also been indicated, and of these a single specimen, in good con-

dition, especially in an extensive series or to complete a local Fanna, will be sufficient.

The Court’s wishes respecting collections for the Company’s Museum have been ge-

nerally expressed in the public letter; a few explanatory remarks are now added. The

list exhibits a general view of the present contents of the Company’s Museum in

Mammalia and Birds, and its chief object is to direct Naturalists in India to the disco-

very of new species, and to the supply of such as are still wanting in the Museum.

Respecting Mammalia generally, it may be observed that specimens of all the smaller

species in good condition will be desirable; but the Court particularly recommend a

very close and persevering search respecting the family of Chiroptera or Bats. The

list contains only a small number of Indian Bats, and the Court are most anxious to ob-

tain a large addition of subjects of this family to complete that series. Very few of

the Bats of Continental India have as yet been collected, and a general, careful,

zealous search is strongly requested and recommended.

Of the family of Quadrumana, a general supply of good specimens will also be de-

sirable, especially of the Genera Hylobates, Semnopithecus, Macacus; also of the allied

Genera Lemur, Tarsius, and Galeopithecus. Among the Fere the smaller species of

Felis, Mustela, Mangusta, Viverra, Arictitis (or Ictides,) Canis, Ailurus, Arctonyx, &c.

are requested ; and of the larger species good specimens only of rare or newly discover-

ed subjects. These remarks also apply to the order of the Ungulata, and among these,

especially to the Genera Antilope, Moschus, Cervus, &c. Of the order of Glires or

Rodentia, which are generally small, the Court will be glad to receive series as com-

plete as possible of the species of all the genera, namely, Sciurus, Pteromys, Le-

pus, Mus, &c. &c.

Respecting Birds, the Court would direct particular attention to those Genera which

are marked in this list. Several of these have only recently been discovered, and they

are of great value and interest in science: additional specimens will be very welcome,

and also new species of these, or of previously known Genera.

6+ Asiatie Society. [ No. 109.

The Officiating Curator having been requested to furnish his Report on the fore-

going papers, submitted the following :—

H. W. Torrens, Esa.

Secretary, Asiatic Society.

SIR,

In obedience to the desire of the Committee of Papers, confirmed by the Society

at its meeting of the oth instant, I have the honour to submit my report on the

matters relative to the Museum, forming the subject of the letter of the Honorable

the Court of Directors, No. 17 of 1840, under date 16th September, 1840, and that

of the Society to the Government of India, General Department, transmitting the

former to you, date 3lst December 1840. For more distinct explanation, it may

be convenient to state what these matters are :—

I.—The relation in which the Society now stands towards the Honorable the

Court.

I1.—Inquiry for various collections assumed to have been detained at the Society’s

rooms: especially those of Dr. HELFER and Capt. PEMBERTON.

III.—The assistance which may be afforded by the Society to facilitate the early

dispatch of collections made by Government Officers.

IV.—Assistance which may be afforded by the Society towards the completion

of the Honorable Court’s Museum.

The feeling of the Society, and my own views on this head, are, I submit,

I. The relation in which the fully expressed by the Resolution which I had the

Society now stands towards

the Honorable the Court. \

honor to propose, and which was unanimously carried

at the January meeting of 1841, (see Journal No. 105,

p- 943,) and which for ready reference, I copy here.

“The Officiating Curator reported, that a considerable number of duplicate

specimens, principally of birds, &c. were available for transmission to Europe ; and

he moved,—that as many specimens of great interest to Naturalists might be collected,

prepared and sent to England ata small expence, it was worthy the attention of

the Society, whether such might not be prepared and sent to the Honorable the

Court of Directors, as due to them from the Society.”

The Society therein adopting this resolution, has fully testified its earnest

desire to acknowledge, in every possible way which can tend to the general advance-

ment of science, the liberal assistance which the Honorable the Court has been

pleased to extend to it. I may also here, perhaps, refer to my report for the past

month, (approved by the Society), in which, after proposing a second dispatch of

duplicates to the Honorable the Court, I have ventured further to suggest to their

Curator, how we can mutually assist each other, as follows :—

‘¢T may suggest here, that we point out to the Curator of the Museum of the Honor-

able the Court of Directors the great facility with which, if approved of by the Court,

he might procure in exchange for such specimens as he already possesses, some of the

many which we require for the Museum of Economic Geology. It is scarcely possi-

ble to send home askin of a bird, a skeleton, or ascull from India, for which some

duplicate may not be obtained in exchange, which would be of utility to us here.”

1841. | Asiatic Society« 65

II.—Inquiry for various collections supposed to have been detained at the Society’s

Rooms, especially those of Dr. HeLFer and Capt. PEMBERTON.

My report on Dr. Henrer’s collection will I trust have satisfactorily shewn that,

with respect to them, the Society is exonerated from all blame. I omitted in it

to refer to the Entomological part. On careful inquiry, I find that no collection of

insects was, at any time, deposited at the Society’s Rooms by Dr. HEtrsr. Speci-

mens of the moth cocoon, &c. of the Assam silk worms, were only presented by him to

illustrate his paper on that subject.

With reference to Capt. PEMBERTON’s collection, you will not fail to remark,

that the collections referred to in those passages of the proceedings quoted in the

Honourable the Court’s letter, are collections placed ‘in deposit’? only, and conse-

quently, I shall infer, held by the Society at the disposition of the depositor, who evi-

dently by his letter, at p. 749 of the Journal, is there disposing of them; since he

says, that ‘under instructions from Government he presents to the Society 140 spe-

cimens of birds, a selection from the Bootan collection, &c.”’

Further: The collections deposited by Captain PemseRToN were packed at the

Museum, and in February 1840 sent to the Marine Board, for shipment to England, in

four cases. Upon reference to Mr. GREENLAW, who has kindly referred to the agents

of the Shepherdess, the vessel on which the cases were shipped, I learn that she did not

arrive in England till the month of December; the Honourable Court’s letter, it will

be observed, bears date the 16th September 1840.

This is what I have been able to ascertain from the assistants and taxidermists

at the Museum, and from Capt. Pemperton’s official letter; in addition to which

I may state, that from the description of the assistants, the four cases were about equal

to half or three-quarters of a ton of measurement. Mr. GrEENLAW has no knowledge

of their size, as freight was to be paid at home.

I have referred to Dr. McCLeLitanp, who has furnished me with Mr. GRrEEN-

LAw’s receipt, but he has not replied to my official letter, of which copy is hereto an-

nexed. He however informs me in a private note as follows :—

“* The duplicates only, as far as I recollect of the Bootan collection, were sent to the

Court of Directors. A complete series was kept with the Society, particularly of

the insects; the rest I forwarded myself through the Government on the part of the

Bootan deputation.”’

There is some discrepancy here, which I cannot reconcile with Capt. PEMBER-

Ton’s letter quoted above ; but as my knowledge stops at this point, I must leave

‘it for your consideration.

| Of the imsects, there are none in the Society’s collection noted as from the

Bootan deputation. The assistants state, that they have no recollection of any

collection having been received at the Museum for the Society as from Capt.

Pemserton, or from the Bootan deputation; nor can I find any in their book,

which however, is not very carefully kept. The insects referred to by Dr.

‘McCLe.tanp, may possibly be those which have no donor’s names annexed to

them in our cases. On my assuming charge of the Museum, I found a tin box of

insects in the taxidermists’ room, of which they were taking great care, and their

account of it was, that Capt. PEMBERTON had brought two such boxes to the

‘Museum; one of which they packed, and he himself sent it away, for the Court

66 Asiatic Society. [No. 109.

of Directors; leaving the other under their care as his private property. This

box has recently (February) been sent, under your directions, to Mrs. PEMBERTON.

My report of February also mentions, that in that month I had received from Col.

Mac eop two boxes, being Geological Specimens collected by Capt. PEMBERTON

on his Bootan Mission; but without any catalogue. On these you will doubtless

take the orders of Government. Dr. McCLELLanp in his note mentions the collections

of the Assam Deputation. On reference to Dr. Wa.ticu, he informs me that he has

reported on this subject to Government.

My report of February last also states, what had been found to be the sad con-

dition of the three cases forwarded from Umballa by Mr. Cxiark, and just received

at the Museum, where I had recognised the collection as being that made by

Sir ALEXANDER Burnes during his mission to Scinde. You will doubtless take

the orders of Government on this collection also. The Society is thus, I trust com-

pletely acquitted of any negligence or detention of any collection which has come

into its hands of late years.

III.—The assistance which may be afforded by the Society to facilitate the early des-

patch of collections made by Government Officers.

It appears from the foregoing statements, that the Society, in the case of Dr.

HELrer’s and Capt. Pemperton’s collections have, really in every respect forestalled

the wishes of the Honourable Court, by assisting as far as possible in the early

dispatch of them. It is unnecessary here to refer again to its resolution, as already

quoted at par. 2, when speaking of the relations in which it stands towards the Ho-

nourable the Court.

IV.—The assistance which may be afforded by the Society towards the completion

of the Court’s Museum.

In reference to this matter, the Society has also done itself the honour to forestall

in some respect the views of the Right Honourable the Governor General in Council,

by its resolution and by our first dispatch of duplicates of birds andsnakes, and of Lieut.

Hurtron’s valuable Geological series from the Himalaya and Spiti Valley. If desired,

it might employ a few taxidermists at the expence of Government, who could be sent

at a small expence with gentlemen desirous of contributing to the knowledge of Indian

Natural History, and under zealous amateurs, many of whom are now deterred by

their want of knowledge, or want of time, or the expence, much might doubtless be

done.

I may be excused in remarking in conclusion that it is clear that, in relation to

the Natural Sciences, as in every thing else, if India had all that she requires from

Europe, and Europe all that she wants from India, both must be immeasurably bene- —

fitted. In nothing then, surely, can a scientific body like the Asiatic Society, be

more honourably employed than in promoting even the smallest fraction of such an

exchange; and in nothing could it, in its sphere, more effectually confer lasting

benefit on India.

I have the honour to be,

Sir,

CaLcurta, Your’s obediently,

Asiatic Society's Rooms, H. PIDDINGTON,

18th March, 1841. Acting Curator, As. Soc. Museum. —

1841. ] Asiatic Society. 67

Copy of a Letter to Dr. McCLELLAND referred to in the foregoing Report.

Dear Sir,

A dispatch having been received by the Government of India from the Honourable

_ the Court of Directors, in which, referring to Proceedings of the Asiatic Society for

_ February, September, October, and November, 1838, they state, that it would appear

_ that collections of Natural History have been detained at the Society’s Rooms since

_ those epochs, I have been desired to furnish a report thereon.

2. They refer more particularly to Dr. HELFER’s and Captain PEMBERTON’s col-

lections. Of the first of these, (Dr. HELFrrr’s,) I have been able to render a full

account, quite exonerating the Society or its officers from any blame.

3. Of the second: we have in the Proceedings reference to three collections, mostly

birds, deposited by Capt. PEMBERTON, and at p. 749, (Journal 1838,) that 145 birds

were presented by him ‘‘ under instructions from Government.’’ It appears, moreover,

by the books, that on the 29th February 1840, four cases which the Messrs. BoucHEZ

state to have been packed and marked here for the Honourable the Court, were sent

_ to the Marine Board for shipment, but they have no receipt for them.

4. I am therefore desired to request from you, on the part of the Society, the best

information you can afford us as to these, or any other Government collections of

Natural History, which may have been received or sent out while you were in

charge of the Society’s Museum ; with any documents or receipts which may enable

us to explain to the full satisfaction of Government, what has become of them.

Iam Sir, &c.

Calcutta, H. PIppINGTON,

As, Socy. Rooms, 12th March, 1841. Actg. Curator, As. Socy. Museum.

No. 806. To Dr. J. McCLELLAND,

Curator, Asiatic Society’s Museum.

SIR,

With reference to your letter dated 29th ultimo, I am directed by the Marine

Board to inform you of the shipment on the Shepherdess, Capt. Bicaar, of the 4

boxes containing Natural Curiosities for England, to the address of the Honourable

the Court of Directors, at the rate of £ 5-5 per ton of 50 cubic feet; freight payable

in England on due delivery of the boxes.

I have the honor to be,

Fort William, Sir,

MarinE Boarb OFrFicz, Your most obedient Servant,

The Sth March, 1840. C. B. GREENLAW,

Secretary.

Resolved—That Mr. Prppincton’s report be forwarded to the Government, and

that attention be particularly directed to the three points suggested in paragraphs 10,

41, and 13, by the Officiating Curator for the consideration of Government, and

more particularly for the employment of taxidermists at its expence to accom-

pany gentlemen desirous of contributing to the knowledge of Indian Natural

History, but now deterred from doing so, for want of knowledge, or want of time, or

_ the expence.

68 Asiatic Society. [ No. 109.

Read the following letter of 24th March last from Mr. Secretary Busnzy :—

No. 433. ‘To H. Torrens, Esa.

‘ Secretary to the Asiatic Society.

“General Department.

« Sig;

‘I am directed to acknowledge the receipt of your letter and its enclosure of the 8th

instant, and to acquaint you for the information of the Asiatic Society, that the Report

of the Officiating Curator of the Society’s Museum on the Specimens brought out

by Capt. TREMENHEERE, and deposited with the Society for the basis of a Museum of

Economic Geology, will be transmitted to the Hon’ble the Court of Directors by the

next Overland Mail.

‘2d. I am desired to take this opportunity for forwarding to the Asiatic Society the

accompanying three specimens of rock from the head of the Pass at the Gurrah Ghat,

near Mhow, on the Bombay and Agra road, together with a copy of the letter from

Captain J. H. Smyru, Officiating Superintendent of the Road, transmitting the speci-

mens to the Military Board.

‘3d. In respect to the Society’s Museum of Economic Geology, the contributions

will be obtained gradually by such aids as the Hon’ble the Court of Directors may be

enabled to procure, or be pleased to sanction, and by the assistance of private indivi-

duals interested in this department of practical science, and by donation or inter-

changes with other Societies.

‘4th. The influence and correspondence of the Asiatic Society will progressively ac-

complish these objects.

‘Sth. The Military Board will be instructed to direct the attention of the executive

Officers of public works and roads, to the purposes of the institution of a Museum of

Economic Geology, and to cause collections to be made of specimens, and descriptive

lists to be sent to them, from which in communication with the Curator of the Society,

the valuable and useful parts will be selected for transmission to the Museum at the

least possible expence, and in most cases it is hoped, by a proper arrangement, without

any charge in excess of the ordinary carriage that would be employed for other

public uses,

‘Fort WILLIAM, ‘I have the honor to be,

*24th March, 1841. ‘Sir,

‘Your most obedient Servant,

‘G. A. Bususy,

‘Secretary to the Government of Bengal.

‘No. 148. ‘To Masor De Bupg,

‘Secretary to the Military Board, Fort William.

‘Sir,

‘You will receive by Dak banghy, three specimens of the soil at the head of the Pass

at Ghurra Ghat, forwarded to me by Captain KELLNER, superintending the road from

(1841.] Asiatic Society. 69

Dewass to Ackberpore. No. 1 abounds in detached masses eight feet below the surface ;

: No. 2 in blocks four to six feet in diameter at the surface, and bedded two to three feet

‘in No. 3, which latter is the prevailing stone at the pass, as far as the excavation has

“as yet been carried.

* ‘I have &c.

(Signed) ‘J. W. SmytH, Captain,

Offig. Supt. of the Agra and Bombay Road.

‘16th February, 1841.§ (True Copy, )

| (Signed) ‘M. Mac.teop, Captain,

! ‘ Assist. Offg. Secy. Military Board.

_ ©SEEPREE

| (True Copy.)

(Signed) ‘G. A. Bususy,

- ‘ Secretary to the Government of Bengal.’

With reference to the three specimens of rock received with the foregoing letter,

read the following report from the Officiating Curator of 5th April, 1841, a copy

_ of which was communicated to the Government through Mr. Secretary Busupy :—

‘H. W. Torrens, Esa.

‘Secretary, Asiatic Society.

‘Sir,

‘Ihave to acknowledge receipt of the three specimens of Stone forwarded by Capt.

KELLNER, through the Military Board, fromthe Passat Ghurra Ghaut, and to say that

they are

** No. 1. Hornblende Slate (or Basaltic Hornblende. )

‘No. 2, Argillaceous Sandstone, with veins of mica, having a metallic appearance.

‘No. 3. Felspar Prophyry.

‘I beg to suggest, that if a good series of specimens through the whole line of

road, with a plan and elevation, and as many barometrical elevations of the heights

of passes, &c. as possible, could be procured, it would be a great addition to our

| geological knowledge; as we have but very few sections crossing from the NNE.

| to the SSW. from the valley of the Ganges towards that of the Nurbudda.

_ ‘I further suggest, that a copy of Capt. TRemENHEERE’s Memoir be sent to Capt.

| Kevuyer, and indeed to all officers in charge of road-making duties.

_are for the present placed in the Museum of Economic Geology.

| ‘€MusrEum,

The specimens

| ‘I am, Sir,

| ‘5th April, 1841. ‘ Your obedient servant,

‘H. Pippineton,

‘Of. Curator, As. Soc. Museum.

With reference to the 3rd paragraph of Mr. Busuey’s letter, a question having

_ been suggested as to the proprietorship of the Museum of Economic Geo-

| logy, the Meeting were of opinion, that as it was not likely that the Government

| would ever recall it, that the Asiatic Society be considered virtually the proprietor.

* Specimen too small to determine to which variety belonging.

70 Asiatic Society. [No. 109.

Read the following letter, No. 822, from Mr. Secretary Mappock : —

To H. Torrens, Esa.

No. 822. Secretary to the Asiatic Society.

Political Department.

Sir,

I am directed by the Governor General in Council to forward to you the accom-

panying copy of a calculation by Lieut. Bicce, of the heights of the principal

villages visited by him in the Naga Hills, for such notice as the Society may deem

it to merit.

I have the honor to be,

Fort Wi ttiam, Sir,

29th March, 1841. Your most obedient servant,

T, H. Mappock,

Secy. to the Govt. of India.

No, 11. To Captain Jenxrns,

Agent to the Gov. Gen. N. E. Frontier.

Sir,

Having by the Dak of yesterday received the Tables necessary to enable me to

calculate the approximate height of the various points, which have been taken by

Thermometrical observations, I have the honor to forward the same, and am

happy to find that they prove nearly correct, when compared with those of yourself

and Captain PemperTon.

ist. Observation, camp Semoor river below the Prephamah, 2nd February, 1841.

Thermo. in the shade, .... 480.

Water boils, © eseeee 208, approx. height 2,116 feet.

2nd February.

2nd. Observ. at wells on 8. E. of village of Prephamah,

Thermo. in shade,......+2 56°

Water boils, reeesecs 206, approx. height 3,235 feet.

2nd February.

3rd. Observ. at village of Geroophamah.

Thermo. in shade,....... «, »665°.

Water boils, coseceee 20%, approx. height 4,340 feet.

3rd February.

ist. Observation at village of Sassamah.

Thermo. in shade,.....++2 59°

Water boils, reveseee 204, approx. height 4,362 feet.

1841. | Asiatic Society. 71

4th February, 1841.

ist. Observation camp opposite Ronomah in valley.

Thermo. in shade,........ 484°.

Water boils, eoveesee 205, approx. height 3,729 feet.

5th February, 1841.

ist. Observation top of the pass to the Jolah river.

Thermo. in shade below the 4640

pass on W. side,...ec.- ny

Ditto, Ditto, at top, -.. .. 583°.

Water boils, ....0+..+00+ 201, approx. height 5,959 feet.

5th February.

2nd. Observation camp on Jalla river.

Thermo. in shade,...... ce ©6462.

Water boils, eoeseeee 203, approx. height 4,729 feet.

6th February.

ist. Observation at pass of Ronomah or Paplongurge.

Thermo. in shade, ...... « BG,

Water boils, soeceeee 2011, approx. height 5,733 feet.

2nd. Observation camp below village.

Thermo. in shade,.......- 50°.

Water boils, A Abs Aa - 204, approx. height 4,283 feet.

7th February.

ist. Observation summit of pass over great range.

Thermo. in shade,........ 474°.

Water boils, veooecece 2011, approx. height 5,615 feet.

2nd. Observation camp below the pass, N. side.

Thermo. in shade,......+2 560»

Water boils, sosccese 2054, approx. height 3,513 feet.

3rd. Observation village of Jyramah.

Thermo. in shade,,.....2. 684°.

Water boils, soeeesee 209, approx. height 1,650 feet.

8th February.

ist. Observation below cane bridge over Kooki river.

Thermo. in shade,....... » 585°,

Water boils, sooeeee, 211, approx. height 536 feet.

2nd. Observation summit of Sumigooding.

Thermo. at bottom in shade, 584°.

Ditto to top, .. ditto, ...... 704°.

— Waterboils, .escocssceee 2072, approx. height 1,911 feet.

_ From the last observation it will be seen, as I have not the report of Captain

Pemperton at hand to refer to the others from, that by my calculations the top of

72 Asiatic Society. [ No. 109.

the village of Sumigooding, stated by that officer from Barometrical observation, to

be 196 feet above the level of the sea, is made 49 feet less, a very trifling difference,

and one on that account highly satisfactory to me, for the correctness of the others

as well as of the instrument, and I hope the same may prove equally so to yourself

and Government.

I have, &c. &c.

Camp SuMEEGOODING, (Signed ) T. BiccE,

13th February, 1841. Asst. Agent Gov. Gen.

(True copy,)

(Signed) F. JENKINS,

Gov. Gen, Agent.

(True copy)

(Signed) T. H. Mappocx,

Secy. to Govt. of India.

The Secretary submitted to the inspection of the Meeting several drawings of

fishes of the Indus, of the late Dr. Lorn’s collection.

The Secretary submitted a Sinde Vocabulary by Lieut. Eastwick. Ordered to

be referred to the Committee of Papers.

Dr. H. H. Spry submitted in the name and on behalf of Capt. Jenxrns,

Commissioner in Assam, a series of Geological and Mineralogical specimens

illustrative of the Grognostic features of the county of Cornwall, with the following

note to the Secretary :—

‘¢ This collection, extensive as it is, is only a part of what Capt. Jenkins designs

for the Museum; and it has occurred to him, as well as to myself, that the con-

tribution now made will not be an unacceptable accession to the Museum of

Economic Geology, so lately formed through the exertions of Capt. TREMENHEERE.”

Read a letter from Lieut. A. Cunnincuam, of Engineers, of 25th March 1841,

offering for purchase to add to the cabinet of coins of the Asiatic Society of

Bengal sixty-five Roman coins and fifteen Greek coins, sent from the Mediterranean,

for Rupees 50.

Lieut. CunninGuamM writes, ‘‘ amongst the Greek coins are two of Melite, the

other being Carthaginian and Greek-Egyptian coins of the Ptolemies. The

Roman coins, are of all ages ; several of them being coins of princes of whom

the Society’s cabinet possesses no specimens, such as Decentius, Lucilla, Faustina,

Constantine, with the wolf suckling Romulus and Remus, &c. &c.’’ Lieut. Cun-

NINGHAM also offered a series of the Kashmeer coins, twelve coins of twelve

Rajahs for 12 rupees, and to collect some few other series of coins which would be

interesting and useful.

It was resolved to purchase the coins from Lieut. CunnincuaM, and to avail of

his services for the collection of other series, the thanks of the Society at the

same time being voted to that Officer.

1841. ] Asiatic Society. 73

Read a letter from Capt. A. Troyer of Paris, of 15th October 1840, from which

the following are extracts :—

“< Whatever the future result of operations in Syria may be, they have prevented

the Asiatic Society of Paris to dispatch to Calcutta a box full of Books, among

which is the Sanscrit text, and my French translation of the first 6 books of the

Rajatarangini.

«We have not yet received the number of your Journal which contains the

account of the most interesting discovery you have made on a gem from the Frontier

of Seistan, at the ancient Boonaka. It tends greatly to prove the great antiquity of

Buddhism, which antiquity seems to gain from day to day.

‘© T am now about to complete the English translation of the whole Daxpistan,

which the late Capt. Snzz had begun, but left unfinished. I intend to have the

work printed in Paris for the Translation Fund Committee of London, and hope to

have the pleasure of sending you a copy in about a year.

Read Dr. Srry’s note on his tour to the Eastward.

Read letter from Capt. R. Suorrrespe of 22nd March 1841, with a perpetual

Time Table constructed by him, by ‘‘ the help of which,’’ says the author, ‘‘ may

be found in less than half a minute the week, or day of any date for thousands

of years, past or future.”’

Read a letter from Lieut. Posrans, dated 2ist March 1841 ; containing his report

on a certain branch of the Trade of Shikarpore.

Read aletter from Capt. Harr of 15th March 1841, containing an account by him

of the Brahooees.

It was communicated to the meeting by the Secretary, that the foregoing four

papers would be published in early numbers of the Journal by him.

Read a letter from Mr. Kinney of Bonn, who has been selected by Professor

Lassen to act as Agent for the Society, containing among other matter, the offer of

his services in the disposal of the Society’s Oriental Publications.

Dr. Hezeriin was of opinion, that before dispatching the books for sale to

Bonn their prices should be reduced, as without such reduction, he was of opinion

that it would be useless to send the works, as the Oriental Scholars of Germany

would not purchase at prices which he considered to be exorbitant. On this pro-

posal Dr. Hazerwin was requested to submit a list of the Publications he would

suggest to be sent to Bonn for sale, with a scale of reduction in their prices he

would recommend, for the consideration of the Committee of Papers.

On the motion also of Dr. Hazzrttn, in consequence of the death of Professor

Frank, who was an Honorary Member of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, that that

compliment be paid to Professor Ewaup, of Hanover, one of the best Oriental-

istsin Germany, It was resolved—That the Doctor submit, formally, a proposition

to this effect, likewise for the consideration of the Committee of Papers.

The Secretary submitted a Doguerotype, presented by Dr. Rourn, for which, as

well as for all other presentations and contributions in Books, Natural subjects, &c.

the thanks of the Society were accorded.

On the Mines and Mineral Resources of Northern Afghanistan. By Capt. DrumMonpD, 3rd Light

Cavalry, communicated from the Political Department, Government of India.

[Copper Mining district in the Ghilzie territory, South East of Cabool.]

From the valley of Dobundee, which communicates with the plain of Lagur in the direction of

Koorrum, to the district of Moosge, about 14 miles south east of Cabool, and again from Moosge to

Derbund and Rojan in the direction of Fezeen, is an elevated and rugged mountain tract highly

metalliferous.

Geology of the District.—The formations of this mineral district are composed principally of Horn-

blende rock, and Hornblende Gneiss, Primary Limestone, and Mica Slate. The hornblende rocks

are generally speaking of a fissile character, the limestones again are hard, compact, occasionally

slaty, and from their feeble effervescence when tried with nitric acid, seem to contain a portion of

magnesia, and may accordingly be referred to the dolomite species. The strike or direction of the

strata, as may be oberved from the sequel, is nearly N. East and S. West, dipping at a considerable

inclination to the N. West.

Conforming with the hornblende rocks of Dobundee is a calcareous sandstone formation with

subordinate beds of slate clay enclosing their seams of coal. This sandstone is soft and friable, and

must be distinguished again from another sandstone also calcareous, and of a still softer character.

The latter formation is of very recent origin, and has taken place subsequent to the upheavement

of the primary and metalliferous rocks, as may be well observed in the vicinity of Koh i Aeenuk,

where it occurs in the form of sand-hill—the sandstone strata are horizontal, the primary again are

all highly inclined, and sometimes even vertical.

What the upheaving rocks may be I am yet ignorant, but believe they will be found to be grani-

tic, and if so, they must be of a much more modern geological era than similar rocks in England,

from the position of the sandstone of Dobundee, which is evidently a tertiary deposit containing

lignite coal. A section from the passes in the mountains of the Hindoo Kosh to the Indus would

be extremely interesting in a scientific point of view, and convey no doubt an accurate idea of the

structure of the country, but this however would form a separate branch of inquiry of itself, and is

not of immediate importance to the present research, which has reference only to mining and

metallurgy.

When I lately had occasion to bring the mineral resources of the Himalaya mountains before

practical men and capitalists in London, the voluminous Geological Report of the able and intelli-

gent officer, the late Captain Herbert, was never read by them. All that they cared about was that

portion of it which related to the metalliferous minerals and means of working them; and what

chiefly attracted their attention was, his account of the seven localities where copper was produced

in the Provinces of Gurhwal and Kumaon.

In an economical point of view, therefore, t e first thing to attend to in a district where metals are

known to exist, is its probable productiveness ; and for this purpose a very close and minute

examination of every rock, ravine, and valley is necessary to discover if metallic veins, or indica-

tions of veins abound. I have found these appearances in all the following localities :—

Views and indications of Copper, old Excavations, §c.—At Moosye in the pass of Shadkhanee in

the limestone range, on the right bank of the Sagur river, and to the west of the village of

Kuttasung, I found purple copper ore in very small quantity cropping out to the surface.

In the pass of Silawat to the east of Kuttasung, I found copper pyrites in greater quantity

crepping out there. On the crest of the same pass, or rather a short distance from it to the eastward,

indications of the metal appear in that quarter also, and seem to point either to grey copper, or to

the vitreous sulphuret. The strike of the stratais about N. E. by E., and S. W. by W., dipping at

an angle of 65° to the N. W. by N. Beyond this also, and still further to the Eastward, specimens

containing purple copper ore in small quantity have been brought me lately from Kohi Chaghgye. :

Again near the base of the same range, and within a short distance of the village of Kuttasung, are

three old excavations, blocked up with stones and rubbish. Two of these I have been attempting to

1841.] On the Mineral resources, c. of Northern Afghanistan. 75

clear out lately with the intention of reporting on them hereafter. The ore is the purple variety,

and I also found indications of the vitreous strike of the strata N. N. E. and S. S. W. dip 65:

W. N. W.

On entering the Pass of Silawat, there is a ravine to the Westward, where a spring with a few trees

may be discerned. About a couple of hundred yards above this spring is another old excavation,

blocked up like the former, the declivity of the mountain is here very great ; strike of the strata N.

E. and S. W. dipping about 62° to the N. W. are copper pyrites, in a hard quartzose matrix,

wall of the vein soft and slaty, and covered with the blue and green stains of copper. Here the

limestone assumes a slaty structure and then verges into a micaceous rock, from which I conjec-

ture that the ore at a greater depth will make (as the term in Cornwall is) to mica slate. The decay-

ed and withered splinters of this slaty limestone, at first sight have much the appearance of clay

slate—Kast of this again I found another excavation in a micaceous rock, evidently a continuation

of the last mentioned, the direction of the strata the same, and dipping in the same quarter at a

high angle, ore copper pyrites. In the same line I have traced this deposit to another locality

a short distance off.

On the Eastern, or left hand side of the road going up the Silawat Pass, is another old excavation

blocked up like the rest. Strike of the strata W. S. W. and dipping about 65° N. N. W.

I saw stains of copper here, but observed no further trace of the metal at the time I visited the

spot; a specimen of vitreous ore has however been brought to me since, which is reported to be

from that quarter. Higher up the hill, and on the same side of the road, is another excavation, where

I found indications of vitreous ore. Strike of the strata about N. E. by E. and S. W. by W.

dipping about 65: to the N. W. by N.

| About a quarter of a mile to the Eastward of the last mentioned, there is a singular deposit. A

_ -yein or bed of iron ore, upwards of 30 feet in breadth, containing another vein of a mixture of iron

: and grey copper in a space about two feet wide. This mixture of copper and iron has been worked

to the extent of a few feet, but the difficulty of separating the copper from so large a proportion of

iron, was no doubt too difficult an operation for the ancient miners to be attended with profit, and

| must have been abandoned accordingly. Strike of the strata here N. E. andS. W. dip 75° N. W.

_ From the direction of the strata, and the external character of this iron ore, it must I think be con-

| nected underneath with a great bed of iron ore nearly 40 feet in width, which I discovered in the

Silawat Pass. The ore is massive, and is of a steel grey colour; sometimes it gives a blackish streak,

| and then it affects the magnet considerably, showing the presence of the protoxide. The great mass

however gives a red streak, and below the surface will no doubt be found a well-defined bed of

specular iron ore,

To the west of the crest of the Silawat Pass, and near the summit of the range, which I suppose

| must be about 1200 feet above the level of the plain of Moosye, are some extensive excavations.

The general strike of the stratification here is about N. N. E. and S. S. W.—in some places it is

nearly perpendicular, or dipping at a great angle to the W. N. W.; one of these excavations at first

appeared to me like an open working, having the form of a perpendicular chasm in the mountain,

the depth of which I measured upwards of 40 feet, and varying from 3} to 83 feet wide, at the

deepest part the measurement was 7 feet and three quarters.

From further observation, however, I am inclined to suspect that this excavation, but es pecially

others of a far deeper and more extensive character at Koh i Aeenuk and Seestungee, occupied

originally the spaces of galleries, or levels, and that these have fallen in since, either from having

\been shaken by an earthquake, as the wreck and ruin presented by some of them would seem to

indicate, or what appears probable, the action of water from the melting of snow at the surface,

percolating by the walls or sides of the veins, has in process of time gradually loosened that portion

of the ground which was left as a protection for the levels, and these levels having been driven

along veins that preserve their course with the direction of the strata, which are nearly perpendi-

‘cular, will account for the chasm-like appearance they now exhibit.

76 On the Mineral resources, Sc. of Northern Afghanistan. [No. 109.

The system of mining which has been pursued here, differs materially from our improved modern

methods. Instead of taking up a more convenient position for commencing operations lower

down the brow of the mountain, and driving a gallery for a considerable distance, perhaps through

barren ground, so as to reach the vein at a proper depth, and which opening is made at the same

time to act as a drain, the plan adopted by the ancient miners seems to have been the making of a

small entrance, about 3 feet wide, and 4 feet high upon the vein itself, and having gone down upon

it at once in a sloping direction, until a certain depth was attained, they pursued a horizontal

course, and stripped the roof of ore in their progress. This inattention to drainage has answered

so long as the ore could be followed without the occurrence of water, but suspect even thenin some

places, they must have felt inconvenience from the water caused by the melting of the snow in

spring. I do not believe from the appearance of the galleries which are still remaining, that timber

was much used, if employed at all for supporting them. The structure of the rocks in most places

being of a compact character, and the great dryness that prevailed, may have enabled the miners

to work to a considerable extent without that aid. In excavating the ore and opening ground, these

people seem to have used a sharp-pointed well-tempered instrument, as may be observed by the

marks of their work on the walls of the galleries, particularly at the mine of Seestungee.

As the most important point to ascertain is the appearance of the deposits of ore at a considerable

depth, the width of the veins, &c. I have been particularly desirous of penetrating so far under

ground as to arrive at the different spots where the ancient miners left off working. In some

instances I got so far, that I believed I should soon accomplish that object, but I have invariably

had my progress arrested by large masses of rock, stones, and rubbish which have fallen in. A

native of Moosye lately brought me intelligence of some deep excavations which have been

discovered on the eastern side of the Silawat Pass. Upon asking him why he had not taken a light

to examine the interior, and see if they were more perfect than those I had already discovered, he

gave me to understand, that like the rest of his countrymen, he had superstitious misgivings in

regard to the exploring of those old and abandoned excavations, and was further deterred by

observing the skin of a snake at the entrance of one of the galleries. The dread of meeting reptiles

of this kind in these deserted mines, is one of the reasons why the people are so ignorant about

them. The same individual told me, that often as he had hunted over those mountains from his

earliest youth, he had not the least idea that the excavations were so numerous, only a few had

been observed, or were known to the neighbourhood until I commenced my researches.

On crossing from the Moosye range to the mountains of Baghgye, I obtained some rich specimens ~

—— OO Te, l

of vitreous and purple copper ore in different places, and also copper pyrites, but did not observe

any regular vein, except one of copper pyrites in hornblende gneiss, which is about 10 inches wide;

this is very poor at the surface, but may however at some depth turn out rich. At Kotil i Dushtuk,

I picked up a good number of stones containing copper pyrites in a hornblende gneiss formation,

running N. E. and S. W. and dipping about 55° N. W.

This rock is very dark in some places from the prevalence of the hornblende, in others it has a

yellow weathered appearance, and so much disintegrated, that I had not an opportunity of examin-

ing the locality well; there are quantities of rock, green-stained from copper. 1n one place where it

was more compact, I obtained specimens from some strings or small veins of copper pyrites, in a

quartz matrix, evidently connected with a larger vein, and from the abundant indications at the

surface, I suspect that a considerable deposit must exist underneath. From Dundhanee in the

direction of Jowhar to the south of Rotili Dushtuk, specimens of green-stained rock have been

brought me lately, and said to be in still greater abundance.

To the south of the Baghgye range is the great mine of Koh i Aeenuk, which I have already men-

tioned, all in a state of ruin and dilapidation. Purple copper ore crops out to the surface ; and the

excavations, as well as a quantity of slag and vestiges of ancient houses that remain, show what a

productive mine this must have been in former days. The dreary and desolate aspect of the spot,

with a solitary hut and a few squalid inmates, afford a melancholy contrast to the throng of industry

which must have been witnessed here in better and more prosperous times. About a mile West of

}

———EEE

1841.] On the Mineral resources, &c. of Northern Afghanistan. 77

Aeenuk is the mine of Seestungee, which I have also mentioned, and which is in a similar condition

with the former. In this mine there is a chamber, one side of which is covered with sulphate of

copper ; the chamber is about 18 feet in length, 12 in breadth, and 10 in height,—and the end of it is

blocked up with stones and rubbish. Some of the excavations here are so large, that they have more

the appearance of caverns than mining galleries. A short distance from this, on the road to Kohi

Aeenuk, I observed near the summit of a limestone rock several veins of spar carrying copper ore,

principally copper pyrites ; one of these is about 11 inches wide ; between this again and Aeenuk, there

is another spot where the green-stained indications of copper appear abundantly, showing, that the

metal exists there likewise.

East of Aeenuk, in the mountains of Acoorookhail, I found a vein of solid copper pyrites about an

inch thick in hornblende gneiss; at Essurtungee on each side of the torrent, I observed copper ore

in many places, though I was not fortunate enough in finding a regular vein, whole cliffs of the

rocks however are covered with the indications of copper. The richest specimens of red oxide of

copper and native copper in my possession, were brought to me by a native, and said to be from the

hills of Goorgee Mydan, not far from Acoorookhail. Of the locality, however, from whence they

were procured I am doubtful, as the native alluded to was indebted to another for the specimens.

I opened the ground in one place to the extent of several feet, and though a few indications of the

metal appeared, many circumstances rendered it evident, that they had not been procured from that

exact spot, and that a further search was necessary.

At Derbund, in Tungee Khooshk, ina gneiss and mica slate formation, I observed abundant

green stains of copper. At Kila Ataye, there are several veins of quartzose spar carrying purple

ore, one of which I measured about a foot in breadth, the rock is mica slate, and contiguous to

limestone. In Cornwall the richest deposits I was told generally occur at the junction of the clay

slate with the granite; and in this mineral tract, I believe the most productive will be found at the

point of contact of the limestones with other rocks.

At Tezeen, I discovered small veins or strings of rich ore ramifying in different directions, and

forming a kind of net-work in a limestone rock. I saw no decided course of ore of any bulk, but

what there is of it, is very rich, being composed of the vitreous and red oxide varieties, and native

copper. The chief of Tezeen, Iam told, found a mass of the latter close by his house on one occasion,

and so large, that a copper vessel was manufactured from it. This must have been brought down

by the mountain stream, and most probably from the quarter I have mentioned.

In a ravine at Khoondurra, between Seestungee and Dobundee, I obtained some specimens of

copper ore in small quantity, but did not discover any vein, though a closer search may yet

suceeed from the indications of the metal in that quarter.

At Dobundee, on entering the valley, I found at Shinkye, on the right bank of the rivulet,

specimens of red oxide and grey copper, but discovered no regular vein at the time. In a ravine

named Lahazour, about half a mile from Shinkye, I observed in a hornblende formation an outcrop

of grey, vitreous, and red oxide of copper accompanying a vein of spar principally calcareous.

Beyond this in another ravine named Zerazour, there is a thin vein of rich copper ore similar to the

preceding—formation still hornblende; the strike of the stratification in this direction, is nearly

N. E. and S. W. dipping about 65: to the N. W.

In the ravine of Chinarkhail, I found a vein* of copper pyrites cropping out in small quantity, and

higher up at Chenar, less than a quarter of a mile from thence, I found a vein of grey copper,

about 7 inches wide, with a considerable proportion of iron; this vein bends a good deal in conse-

quence of the twisting of the strata, the general direction of which is about N. E. and S. W. dipping

upwards of 60° to the N. W. The formations here are all hornblende.

* When I use the term of vein it is to convey my meaning in more familiar language, at the

Same time the Cornish phrase lode, which signifies a course of ore, would, properly speaking, be

more correct. All the lodes in this country are what would technically be termed beds of ore

conforming with the strata, and not veins, which are rents or fissures traversing the strata, and filled

up with mineral substances.

78 On the Mineral resources, &c. of Northern Afghanistan. [No. 109.

In the ravine of Jerobaee there is a ferruginous looking vein, containing vitreous ore, and also grey

copper, the latter has a large proportion of iron, and is found about 5 or 6 yards apart from the

former. On the opposite side of the ravine I found indications of the metal also, and beyond this in

the same line, I found similar indications in a small ravine adjoining, and believe these to be all one

and the same deposit connected underneath. The strike of the strata here is N. E. and S. W., all

highly inclined. About 300 yards to the N. W. of these localities is another out-crop of copper ore,

with a good deal of the same ferruginous appearance; this seems to bend towards the others,

running nearly East and West, but is a distinct deposit in my opinion, and unconnected with them ;

these veins are all found in hornblende.

During my survey of Dobundee, I observed several rolled masses of a dark coloured iron ore

brought down by the river. This ore yielded a blackish streak, and affected the magnet, but did

not attract iron filings. What I observed was evidently derived from the surface of abed of iron ore.

In the Chenar ravine, about a couple of hundred yards from the vein of grey copper, which I have

described, I obtained a few fragments of magnetic iron ore which powerfully attracted the filings, but

saw no trace of a regular deposit in that quarter. These facts, however, render it not improbable

that a bed of magnetic iron ore may exist in the neighbourhood ; having not yet completed my exa-

mination of that part of the district, I regret I cannot speak decidedly on this subject.

Extent of the District, §c.—With regard to the extent of this mineral tract, Tezeen is the

furthest point to the Eastward, where I have found copper ore, and specimens of copper pyrites

have been brought me from Wurduk to the Westward. Specimens of purple ore have been sent

me from Spega to the South, and I have traced the metal as far North as the hills about Cabool.

The most promising veins I have discovered are those of Derbund and Dobundee,—of the old

mines, Koh i Aecenuk holds out the best prospects. I have reason to believe that more veins equally,

if not more favorable, may yet be found, when every rock is sufficiently investigated. A perfect

examination of this kind, is of great importance, for the two-fold object of showing the external signs

of the productiveness of the strata, and guiding the miner at once to the most desirable points for

experimental operations. From the number of natives I have been employing to search for me

throughout the district, and who well understand now what is wanted, I feel confident that if this

plan were continued for a short time longer, not a spot would remain unexplored. Specimens have

been lately brought me from new veins in Derbund, as well as from Rojan, and Sungdurra on the

southern side of Koh i Kubeer, the most elevated of the mountains in that quarter of the country.

In my former Report, I mentioned that I had discovered the richer varieties of copper ore,

namely the purple and vitreous sulphurets, the former containing 60 per cent of metal, and the

latter about 80—I have now the satisfaction of adding to these the red oxide containing 90 per

cent, and native copper. As far as the character of the ore is concerned then, it is of the first

quality. Ofcourse what I allude to is the pure mineral unadulterated by the matrix. What the ore

in mass will produce should the mines be opened, can only be determined when that takes place 3

but it will I think, yield about the same as the Chilian, namely, between 20 and 30 percent. The

average of the ore of Cornwall is between 8 and 9 per cent, and, as I stated in the Report alluded to,

it is this difference in the quality of the ore, that enables the Copiapo Mining Company to dispose of

their ore in England at a profit, notwithstanding the vast distance of transport. The ore is brought

down on the backs of mules from the heights of the Cordilleras to the seaport for £3 per ton,

shipped from thence to Swansea in Wales for £5 per ton, when it is finally smelted, and the produce

exported abundantly (no doubt to India) as English copper.

Mineral Prospects of the District.—In respect to the capabilities of this mineral district no one can

take upon himself to form an estimate of what is underneath the surface, until practical trials are

made, but, if we base our calculations on the most reasonable probabilities, there is every expecta

tion that these trials will prove eminently successful.

By the foregoing details it is apparent, in the first place, from the number of veins and indications

of them which have been discovered, that the whole of the strata are highly metalliferous.

Secondly, the quality of the ore is excellent, and the richest varieties are to be found.

1841.] On the Mineral resources, c. of Northern Afghanistan. 79

Thirdly, it is evident, from the extent of the excavations of Koh i Aeenuk, Seestungee, and

Moosye, as well as the quantity of slag still remaining at the former place, that the people who

worked these mines, must, in following the ore to a considerable depth, have found it increasing, or

at any rate not diminishing in quantity.

Lastly, we may reasonably infer, that these people, by confining their operations to so few loca-

lities, found the work sufficiently plentiful and lucrative to give them employment, without being

under the necessity of opening new ground, and this will account for so much being left untouched.

The mines also must have been abandoned in consequence of some political convulsion or foreign

invasion.

Facilities for working the Mines.

Of the means of drainage, I may say, that in general there is no want of declivity of

ground for obtaining adits-—the term adit is a technical one in

mining, used to denote a gallery or passage which acts at the

same time asadrain. In an economical point of view, this is of great importance, as

the system of working by a succession of galleries above the adit-level in some mines,

or having to go but a short distance under it in others, is attended with much less

outlay than when the reverse is the case, and mechanical power must be had recourse

to, for raising the water from a considerable depth to the drain. In the Gwennap

Means of Drainage.

mines in Cornwall, for instance, where the deepest shaft is about 1700 feet below the

surface, there are no less than seventeen steam engines, some of which are of enormous

size, and these, with a water wheel 42 feet in diameter, are employed night and day

in pumping the water, and raising ore and rubbish from the mines. In the Moosye

ridge, the principal mines are situated about the summit of the mountain; at Kohi

Aeenuk again, which is but a small hill in comparison, there appears to be abundance

of room for bringing in an adit under all the old workings, but at Seestungee, this

would not be managed so easily. The whole of this metalliferous tract, however, is so

much more elevated and mountainous than the mineral ground of Cornwall, that the

unwatering of the mines could be effected with greater facility, and at much less

expence.

Small streams for washing, cleaning the ore, &c. are often wanting in these mountains,

but this defect may be remedied wherever springs may be

observable, by piercing the slopes with karezes, and obtaining

the necessary quantity of water. At Derbund, there isa small

stream which passes close by the veins of purple ore I have described. The river of

Sogur pursues its course along the base of the range at Moosye, where the mines are

situated ; the rivulets of Dobundee, Tezeen, Chuckeree, &c. at all seasons of the year

have a sufficient supply for moving machinery, whilst mountain torrents, such as those

of Esourtungee and Jerobaee, possess I think sufficient water, considering the great-

ness of their fall, for turning stamping mills, and crushing apparatus of that descrip-

tion.

The pine forests which stretch from the Sufued Koh to the Southward, will afford

a permanent supply of wood for timbering the mines, and charcoal

for the smelting furnaces. The same carriage which would convey

the ore to the fuel, would bring back timber for the mines. The furnaces best adapted

Falls of water for ma-

chinery, &c.

Supply of Timber.

_ for this country, are not the reverberatory ones of Swansea, where coal is the fuel, but

80 On the Mineral resources, &c. of Northern Afghanistan. [No. 109.

the blast furnaces of Sweden, where charcoal is employed. It will be a matter for

future consideration, whether the most desirable site for these would be in the direc-

tion of Spega and Hazardurukht, or of Tezeen. The former will have the advantage

of being better situated for labourers, whilst the latter, by being near the Cabool river,

will have the convenience of raft carriage to the Indus.

Mining operations may be commenced in this country without incurring much ex-

pence in road-making at the outset. At present the roads are

only tracks, but they answer camels, and the mountains afford

pasture for the maintenance of these useful animals. Mules,

ponies, &c. are also used for carriage, and the neighbouring district of Koorrum is

famous for its breed of the former. Roads for wheeled carriage may in process of time

be made, as improvement advances, and this will create a great saving in transport

throughout the country generally. An excellent one might be cut from Cabool to

Dobundee, by the plain of Sogur, and no doubt the same could be continued to the

banks of the Indus by the valley of Koorrum; guns at any rate have already been

taken by that route. As soon as this road is surveyed and repaired, and political ob-

stacles are removed, the circuitous route by the Khyber Pass will be forsaken for this

shorter and safer line of communication with Hindoostan; meanwhile as far as the

mines are concerned, the most economical method would be to purchase a certain

number of camels, the transport management could then be conducted at a moderate

expence, and occasion very little trouble.

The occupations of these mountain tribes are partly agricultural, but chiefly

Habits and character of Pastoral and commercial. Those who have flocks of sheep

the people. migrate from place to place according to the season of

the year, whilst those who have camels, engage in trading speculations, and in

hiring out their camels for transporting wood, charcoal, &c. to Cabool, salt from

Kalabagh and Malgeen, iron from Bajour and Foormool, and merchandise to and

from Peshawur, and various other quarters.

I regret to add, there is another class that I call the predatory, which the poverty

of the people, the distracted state of the country, insecurity of property, &c.

appear to have brought into existence, and gangs of these banditti have been

infesting the country to the no small detriment of the industrious merchant. The

different tribes which contain this class within them, are the following :—

State of roads and '

means of transport.

AGYUMZYES .ceeccccccecccceccccsscsccese Rob by night.

MUMINOZyeS sccosecccccesecerevccesese Ditto ditto.

Ahmedzyes of Spega ...e.s0+ eeecevece.ee Highwaymen by day.

Kurrookhails .ccescccses. cocscececsseees Ditto by day and night.

Khivazuks ccscsecsccceccecceceseesccee Rob by night principally.

Ooreakhails ...-.cccsccccecesccccccseere Ditto ditto.

Ootkhails. .esecccccesevcccccecseceseeee Thieves by day principally.

These molest the country between Ghuznee and Jelallabad—some rob chiefly

by night, break into houses, annoy an encampment, &c. others steal in broad day-

light, in the bazar of Cabool even, and are famous for their dexterity in pilfering ;

whilst others again come down from the mountains in force, attack a cafila, and

return immediately with the property they have captured.

1841.] On the Mineral resources, Sc. of Northern Afghanistan. 81

It need not be supposed, however, that because a portion of the people have

hitherto been leading this lawless life, that the hope of establishing useful works,

even in the secret haunts of these robbers, is by any means impracticable. It

must be remembered, likewise, that a revolution has taken place in the country,

and that during the last year, the constant political excitement which was kept

up, of itself produced much of this evil. Formidable as the state of affairs may seem,

the difficulty of uprooting the evil is much more in appearance than inreality. There

is indeed a regular system of robbery carried on, which must be systematically dealt

with, to be effectually put down. This I believe may be accomplished without le-

velling a single fort, ravaging an acre of ground, or spilling one drop of blood. The

Ghilzyes of that district, are about the finest race of people I have seen in Afghanis-

tan, and the predatory portion, though wild, are far from being intractable. But

they have been long living without the pale of the laws, in a country distracted and

torn with feuds and dissensions, without any security of property ; the strong ever op-

pressing the weak, and have in a great measure been brought by circumstances

into this lawless mode of life. Give them, however, but constant employment, with

good wages and regular payment; encourage a spirit of industry, both by precept and

example; let strict justice be dealt out to them without respect of persons ; and we shall

shortly see their swords changed into ploughshares, industry take place of licentious-

ness, and these people be converted into peaceable and useful subjects. A firm, but just

and liberal hand, in my opinion, might mould them into any thing.

During the late disturbances, it was often remarked to me, what a detestable race these

Afghans were; that a man could not stir a few yards from his house or his tent, without

the risk of assassination ; and that three times the amount of military force was scarcely

sufficient to keep this unruly country in order; and yet, I have gone with but a few fol-

lowers into the midst of them, have wandered amongst the wildest and most desperate

characters, often without a sword at my side or a pistol in my belt; and even during

the very crisis alluded to, when I returned to Cabool, I did so entirely in opposition

_to my own views and inclination, and only in accordance with an express order

to that effect.

Since I commenced this research, I have made a point of living with the people, and

I am of opinion, that in any attempt to develop the resources of a country, an acquaint-

ance with the character of the inhabitants is a matter of serious consideration. The

_ result of my observations are these: that if we take advantage of the keen commercial

spirit of this nation, and direct its energies into the many useful channels which may

be opened to them ; if the conciliatory policy be steadily persisted in, all gloomy suspi-

cions as to our future intentions removed, and the Afghans become persuaded that we are

really their friends;—there is no quarter of the east where British influence will more

_ rapidly take root, and British power be more readily consolidated—whether the nature

of the climate, the wide field for European improvement, or the freedom from pre-

judice on the part of the people be considered.

It is not easy to say exactly, what the rate of payment for labour would be in those

Rate of payment for la- mountains, when order is completely restored, and a new

bour, &c. state of things brought about; but there can be no doubt of

this, that it will be moderate. *

* Osman Khan, who is a considerable landed proprietor himself, and experienced, is of opinion

that only one-third of the available land of Afghanistan is under cultivation,

82 On the Mineral resources, &c. of Northern Afghanistan. [No. 109. °

Osman Khan informs me, that during Dost Mahomed’s time, he used to hire able-

bodied labourers for cutting canals, and reclaiming waste land at Balabagh, at

the rate of two annas per day ; but that now he hires them for about three annas. The

rate which at present exists in Cabool is a forced one, the result of a combination of

circumstances, which can only last for a limited period until things find their proper

level.

The Jajee tribe, and other industrious mountaineers, are all robust and stout-looking ~

people, and during the winter travel as far as Peshawur for employment, which they

would not be induced to do if work were afforded them at home. There are few points —

in the country more favorably situated for a command of good workmen than the min-

ing district under discussion.

As the price of labour, however, is directly affected by the price of food, it will be a

matter of great importance for the successful working of the mines, that the arable land

in their vicinity be properly attended to. If the mountains bear witness to an extent of

industry unknown to their present ill-fated occupants, the state of agricultural affairs

in the adjoining fertile plain of Mogur, bears equal evidence of a former state of great

prosperity, and points, in a significant manner, to the withering effects of Afghan mis-

rule. The remains of ancient canals and water courses, the quantity of available land —

now lying waste, or in a low state of cultivation, the wretched condition of the people,

and their inability to procure the necessary means of cultivating the soil, all show how |

much might be done by the application of capital, as well to the labours of the field, as.

to the dormant mineral resources of the country. !

In conclusion, the following facts I would submit, may be considered as fully esta:

blished, viz. : |

Decided indications of abundance of copper, and of the richest varieties of ore. Wood

in abundance, for timbering the mines, and for charcoal.

Water as a moving power for impelling machinery, thus obviating the expence of

steam, camels, mules, &c. for carriage. .

A hardy and able-bodied population on the spot, anxious to be employed as work-

men.

Here therefore are the means for the production of this metal, and apparently to any

required extent. It now only remains, that the inquiries | have had the honour of com=

mencing, should be followed up ; arrangements made for the suppression of the prepa-

tory system; the providing an adequate capital for working the mines on scientific

principles; and adopting such measures as will facilitate the transit of metallic pro=

duce to water carriage on the one hand, and the different marts in the interior on the

other.

Iron of Northern Afghanistan.

As no mining operations can be carriec on without a command of well-fabricated —

iron, the state of the manufacture of this indispensable metal becomes a primary

consideration, in any attempt to render the mineral resources of an uncivilized coun-

try available; and certainly if any thing be required to show the abject state of the

arts in this quarter of the globe, the iron trade and manufacture may be quoted as an

instance.

The iron of Bajour, which is produced from magnetic iron sand, is not only in use

throughout the northern districts of Afghanistan; but from its superior quality, is

1841.] On the Mineral resources, §c. of Northern Afghanistan. 838

likewise in great demand in the Punjaub. It sells in Cashmeer, for three times

the price of the common iron of that country, and it is used in Candahar for the

fabrication of matchlocks.

Were an improvement in the manufacture to take place, iron might no doubt be

obtained equal to the Swedish—the best description in Europe. It was my intention to

visit the district of Bajour at this time; but having been prevented from accomplish-

ing my object, I am dependent on what information I have picked up hastily from

merchants and others, who have been in the habit of visiting it, for the purpose of

purchasing iron. The supply of iron, however, which the mountains in that direction

afford, must be perfectly inexhaustible, from the intelligence I have derived, as to the

_ immense quantity of this iron sand, which is annually washed down from their

_ deposits. *

_ A sample of the sand was brought to me sometime ago, and taken from the bed of

the stream at once, without being sifted and prepared for smelting. On applying the

| magnet, the ore was immediately taken up, and the quartzose and other strong particles

/ remained. I then placed a small quantity of iron filings in contact with the ore, and

| the mutual attraction of the filings with the crystals of ore, was easily recognized with

| the assistance of the magnifier. It is described as occurring in great abundance in

the mountain streams of Deer, Belour, and Mydan, which fall into the river of

| Punjcora, that ultimately joins the Cabool river below Peshawur.

The methods of reduction in this country, appear to be the same with those

' employed in different parts of India; and the manufacture in the Himalaya mountains,

already described by Capt. Herbert, is equally applicable to that of Bajour.

It is evident, that whatever quantity of the ore is submitted for reduction, a small

| proportional part of the iron contained in the ore is brought to the state of use-

ful iron. In the first process, a very crude mass of iron and scoria is produced ;

_ this crude mass is then submitted to the fire by a blacksmith, and after an incredible

| sacrifice of labour, a piece of malleable iron, fit for ordinary purposes, is at last pro-

duced, which, as may well be supposed, is any thing but the purest.

A more rude and inefficient system of smelting could not be devised, nor must

}it be understood from the simplicity of the management, that the processes are

| economical—they are the most expensive which could possibly be employed. It

would be absurd to suppose that a refractory metal like iron, can ever be properly or

economically fabricated by means of a great expenditure of manual labour, to

the neglect of a mechanical power, such as a plentiful stream of water can afford,

and which is to be obtained abundantly in the district that yields the sand I have

described. So long as the miserable air bags, and a common blacksmith’s sledge

hammer are used for that purpose, iron inferior in quality, very deficient in quantity,

| and at an extravagant price, must be the necessary consequence.

| But Afghan inexperience and mismanagement does not stop here. The crude

iron is not converted into malleable on the spot, where charcoal abounds and

_| labour is exceedingly cheap; but is transported slag and all, to Cabool, for instance,

_|where both charcoal and labour are exceedingly dear. Again, in working up this

| * Should there be a proportion of titanum combined with this ore, I imagine it will be trifling.

When I submit a supplementary Report, with the chemical analysis of different ores, this will be ex-

a7 The colour of the iron sand is dark black.

}

84 On the Mineral resources, Sc. of Northern Afghanistan. [No. 109.

crude iron into malleable, one-third is lost, so that the unfortunate purchaser has

not only to pay for an expensive and ill-manufactured article in the first place,

and for the difference in the price of labour and charcoal, pointed out in the second,

but for the carriage of a large proportion of dross. *

The cost of the transport of a Ahwrwar of iron, (13 Hindoostanee maunds,) in Dost

Mahomed’s time, was about Rs. 15 from the Punjcor ariver to Kooner, and from

thence to Cabool Rs. 10, making in all Rs. 25. At present, the hire will I am told,

be about Rs. 35; but for the sake of example, let Rs. 30 be looked upon as the ex-

pence of conveying a Ahurwar of iron from the Punjcora river to Cabool. A hundred

khurwars of this iron are said to be about the quantity annually consumed in Cabool,

in the time of Dost Mahomed; lately the demand has greatly increased. Taking this

quantity only, however, as the estimate, we have at the rate of Rs. 30 per khurwar,

an expence of Rs. 3000 for carriage; but to render the iron fit for use, one-third is

lost, so that an expence of Rs. 1,000 is every year incurred in Cabool, for the con-

veyance of slag. The information I have been able to gather respecting the probable

quantity annually produced in Bajour is so vague and contradictory, that I do not

feel justified in carrying out this calculation farther. Ata guess, I believe it must be

about a thousand khurwars ; but be this as it may, there is no doubt that the saving,

effected by a well manufactured article in the mere transport alone, would in a short

time cover the expence of erecting an iron work upon the Swedish principle.

As a set-off to the practical difficulties inseparable from establishing works of this

kind in a new and uncivilized country, the advantages which the manufacture of

Bajour would possess over that of Sweden, would be these :—

First. The difference in the price of labour, the wages of a workman being about

2 annas per day, according to the present rate ; whilst labour in Sweden, though mode- —

rate, varies from 6d. to ls. per day. Allowing, however, that the price of labour 4

should rise in Bajour, and that able-bodied workmen received from to 2 to 4 annas

per day, still the rate would be considerably less than the Swedish. |

Secondly. The circumstance of mining being commuted for the easy process of —

collecting and washing the sand, would occasion a great saving of expence; women

and children are employed in this operation.+

Thirdly. The forests are described as being of great extent, and close by the locali-

ties where the iron sand is collected, and the charcoal used, is made from oak (quer- _

cus beloot,) which is the best adapted for that purpose. This will give the manufac- —

ture of Bajour a decided superiority over that of Sweden, where the light charcoal of —

the pine only is used, oak and hard wood being scarce in that country—the charcoal

moreover is transported in sledges during the winter, a distance frequently of 30 miles —

to the furnaces,

I shall here offer a few observations on the subject of the iron in Northern India,

for the purpose of showing, that if an improvement be called for there, the argu-

ment applies with still greater force to the remoter regions in this quarter.

* The iron is sold in the shape of bricks of different sizes. In making a trial the other day of one ~ |

of these, which weighed one seer of Cabool, (equal to six seers of Hindoostan,) I obtained out of 16

parts, 10 of iron fit for use.

+ The iron sand is brought down annually by the melting of the snow in spring, and in such vast

quantity, that for one iron work at any rate, the supply is ample without having recourse to mining”

1841.] Onthe Mineral resources, 3c. of Northern Afghanistan. 85

_ It is commonly imagined in India, that because English iron is brought out as

ballast, and landed on the coast for little more than the price it costs in England,

that an improvement in the native manufacture would therefore be attended with

difficulty. But however much this may apply to the coast, the case is altered

when English iron is transported into the interior. It then becomes enhanced in

price, and from this cause, as well as the inferior materials of which it is composed, the

demand is limited, whilst the native manufacture continues active under all the

disadvantages of the most wretched system of smelting, and which, as I have already

remarked, is in fact, the most expensive that could be employed. *

All the iron of England, (with the exception of what is produced at Ulverstone

in Lancashire,) is made from clay iron stone, which yields about 30 per cent. of

metal, and the fuel used being coal, the sulphur combined with the latter deteriorates

the iron, and soft or malleable iron cannot be produced equal to the article that is

afforded by richer ores, and charcoal smelting. In the Northern Provinces of

Hindoostan we have the richest iron-ores, namely, the magnetic, and also the different

varieties of the red oxide, such as the specular, red hematite, &c. and these will

yield from 50 to 65, or perhaps 70 per cent. of metal, which is all in favour of the

saving of fuel and general economy.f

At Ulverstone in Lancashire, iron is manufactured from red hematite ore, yielding

sometimes 50, and sometimes 60 per cent. of metal; the fuel is oak charcoal, and a

superior iron is produced, which is of great tenacity, and much used for drawing into

wire ; steel also is made from it for secondary purposes.

During my inspection of these works some years ago, I was closely questioned by

one of the iron masters as to the prospects of establishing an iron work in the Hima-

laya mountains: for example, I was asked about the nature of the ore, and if a suffi-

cient supply of charcoal was to be had, if water as a moving power was abundant,

labour cheap, and if water carriage was procurable, &c. &e. To which I replied, that

amongst different varieties of rich ore, the red hematite, the same he had at his

works, existed also in that quarter; that charcoal was to be had on the spot, for the

price only of cutting the wood and preparing it, as the forests were interminable ; that

labour was about 3d. or 4d. a day; streams capable of turning any machinery

abounded, and water carriage was within a tangible distance of the base of the

mountains ; that the disadvantages at present, were owing to the want of proper com-

mercial roads from the mines to the plains, which nevertheless might be made by

following the course of the principal rivers, as indeed had been done partially in one

case, for the sake of pilgrims. I then rallied him about the anxiety he seemed to evince

in the matter, and asked him if he was afraid of my running in opposition to him so far

off as India, and moreover 1,000 miles in the interior; to which he replied, ‘‘ Why to

tell you the truth, we send out a quantity of iron to India.”’

Now whether the iron of Ulverstone be used in Calcutta for the manufacture of

suspension bridges, I am not at this moment aware ; but when I left Kumaon two years

* According to Mr. McCuntocn, three-tenths of British iron are used as cast iron, and prin-

cipally consumed in the United Kingdom, the other seven-tenths are converted into wrought iron.

+ Some of these iron mines are situated near the plains, some are higher up, and the copper

mines higher up still. The principal iron mine is at Khetsari, in the broad and fertile valley of

| the Ramgunga.

a a

86 On the Mineral resources, dc. of Northern Afghanistan. [No. 109.

ago, thirteen of these bridges* had been erected, in a province abounding with iron

mines, and inexhaustible forests, and with reference to which, a celebrated mining

engineer, in corresponding with me upon the subject, makes the following remark: ‘It -

strikes me, that if an iron work is begun in the Himalayas, iron can be afforded to

India at a rate lower than the present to a great degree, and at the same time afford a

large profit per ton.”’

In the district of Bajour, an iron work upon the small scale, and similar to the

Swedish, might be erected with every reasonable prospect of advantage. When

water power can be procured, and a steady supply certain, the saving will be great,+

as compared with the application of steam power; a substantial wheel can be erected

at a small expence, for working blowing apparatus capable of giving blast to two

furnaces; commencing in the first place with one, in order to learn by experiment

the suitable charges of iron ore, charcoal, and limestone ; and to find that very little

iron is mixed with the scoria, which comes off constantly from the iron at the

bottom of the furnace.

Should an improvement of this kind take place in the Bajour manufacture, iron

of a much better quality, in much greater quantity, and at a reduced expence,

might be afforded to the whole of those countries situated between Ghuznee and

Lahore ; from the excellence of the materials, no foreign iron can ever compete

with it, and superior steel may also be obtained from it. No iron manufactured with

coal can ever be converted into steel, owing to the presence of sulphur in the coal.

It is in consequence of this, that the great mass of steel in England is made from

Swedish iron, and the cast steel for the superior cutlery of Sheffield, is from the

iron of the mines of Dannemora, the ore of which, (massive magnetic, ) differs from

all the others in Sweden, on account of its purity; and the iron sells on that account

for about double the price of common Swedish iron. The other ores of that country

are, I understand, principally magnetic ; but more or less contaminated with sulphur,

and had they not the advantage of charcoal smelting, the iron they produced would

not sell at the high price which is obtained for it.

The prices of crude iron in Cabool in time of Dost Mahomed Khan, and since

then, have been the following :—

In Dost Mahomed’s time. Latterly.

Cabool Rupees. Cabool Rupees.

Bajour iron per md..f 8 oe be iid “s 12

Foormool ditto ditto, 6 ae ee sé aA 9

* The transport of the last of these bridges, which was put up at Jula Ghaut on the Kali Gogra

river, amounted to Rs. 80 per ton. This reminds me of a story that is told in the neighbourhood of

Loch Earn, in Perthshire. In asmall glen on the Northern side of the lake, a building was erected

about a century ago, when there were no good carriage roads in that part of the world, as is the case

at present. The lime used on the occasion, was brought on the backs of horses from a considerable

distance in Fifeshire, and it was left for the succeeding generation to discover that an excellent bed

of limestone existed in the same glen; but this was not all, for the house itself was built of

limestone.

+ Perhaps the finest example that could be quoted of the effect of water power in saving

manual labour, is at Turton near Bolton, where there is an iron wheel at a cotton mill, upon the

spider arm construction, overshot, sixty feet in diameter, and ten feet broad in the awes or buckets.

From this wheel, the power is taken for moving all the spinning machinery within the mill, which

is reckoned equal to 50,000 cotton spindles, or the work of 50,000 people.

J The maund of Cabool is equal to 8 seers of Cabool. The seer of Cabool, is equal to 6 seers

of Hindoostan. :

1841.] On the Mineral resources, 3c. of Northern Afghanistan. 87

The iron of Foormool is from the country of the Wuzeereas, in the direction of

Kaneegcorrum. It was my intention to have visited this district after surveying

Bajour , for though the iron is much inferior to that of Bajour, it is very abundant,

and extensively used for implements of husbandry, horse-shoes, cannon balls, &c.

The specimens of ore which have been brought to me, and reported to be from that

quarter, are clay iron stone, andI believe this to be ore, from the fact of coal

existing in that vicinity.

Should a foundry for cast iron be eventually required in Afghanistan, the iron in

the Wuzeeree country will be well adapted for the casting of shot, shells, engine

cylinders, pumps, &c. ; whilst for bars, rods, fire-arms, &c. the superior iron of

-Bajour will always be preferred.* .

Thave mentioned the existence of iron ore in the copper district which has been

described. The Moosye iron is not conveniently situated for fuel to render it of im-

‘mediate importance. A specimen, however, of iron ore has been brought to me from

-Huryoob in the Jajee country, which borders on that district. The ore is of an iron-

grey colour, and gives a red streak, but does not affect the magnet. It is re-

ported to be in great quantity, and the country is described as being covered with

: jungle. Should the copper mines in the course of time be worked on a great scale,

and the consumption of iron proportionate, mines of the latter metal will also be

worked there, for the sake of the demand in that neighbourhood, and of Cabool.

In concluding these imperfect notices on the subject of the copper and iron deposits

of this country, I would beg to observe, that in directing attention to the former

metal, I do so, not only on account of the demand of it for coinage, and the

ready market it meets with from its extensive use for domestic purposes throughout

the countries to the west of the Indus, but from the known demand for it to the east

of that river likewise.

| Should gold or silver mines be discovered in these regions, and there is nothing

unlikely in the idea that they may, the probability is, that they will always, as far as

‘intrinsic value is concerned, occupy a very inferior scale of importance to the copper

! repositories.

| Ifit be a common saying in South America, (the richest country in the world for

the precious metals, ) that ‘‘a copper mine is a fortune, a silver mine scarcely pays it-

‘self, but a gold mine is ruin,’’ we may readily conclude, that in this quarter of

| Asia, where there is such an extensive consumption ef the former, the observation is

still more likely to become applicable.

| But valuable as these repositories of copper may prove, they again need not be ex-

pected to equal the results which may be anticipated eventually from working the

great stores of iron to be met with in Afghanistan.

| By rendering the copper available, however, for which there is such a great mar-

ket, a fresh demand is provided for the iron, and an improvement in the manufacture

* There is another iron produced in another locality in the Wuzeeree country, from which steel

ismade. Theore Ihave not yetseen, but it must be from a different formation to the one which

| contains the clay iron stone. I shall adverted to this in my supplementary report.

88 On the Mineral resources, Sc. of Northern Afghanistan. | No. 109.

of the latter will not only directly aid the working of all metallic veins which may be

found, but become the basis of various superstructures, and when its more general

use is inducedby a deduction in price, civilization and improvement will rapidly

extend.

It is commonly supposed in this, as in other barbarous countries, that Russia must

be rich, since gold mines are reported to be there. But the gold, the platina, and

other metallic produce of the Urals, are well known to be far inferior in financial im-

portance to the iron, and if in the Uralian chain, the activity and enterprise of the

Muscovite can fabricate annually the large quantity of 7,400,000 pood, (132,000

tons) of iron, what may not British energy and industry effect, when they come to be

applied to the vast deposits of iron, and the deep and endless forests of the Indian

Caucasus and Himalaya.*

Remarks on other Mineral Productions of Northern Afghanistan.

I proceed now to offer a few observations on the other mineral productions of this

country, and I may here mention, that the plan I have been pursuing hitherto, has

been to employ the natives themselves to search in all directions, and bring me

every kind of mineral which has the appearance of an ore. The exciting a spirit of

inquiry in this way, although it has been expensive to myself, is by far the most

expeditious method of enabling one to arrive ultimately at a general knowledge

of what the country may possess. During the previous year, the political ferment

that existed thwarted my success very much ; but now that these troubles have

ceased, and the attention of the people is withdrawn from them, the fruits of this

plan, if followed up, will become much more apparent. Nothing can exceed the

avidity withw hich the Afghans enter upon what to them is so novel a pursuit ; and

the laborious, and ardent manner in which they traverse the most rugged rocks,

and most unfrequented places, when stimulated by an appeal to their interests. It

is my rule to pay them well, when I have any thing like proof that they have

worked hard, even though they have been unsuccessful ; and, on the other hand,

if successful, they are sure of a handsome reward.

Of the valuable mineral coal, there are three directions in which lignite coal is

Coal. found in the northern districts of Afghanistan.

The first formation is along the line of the Indus, the most promising locality of

which appears to be near Kaneegoorum in the Wuzeeree territory.

Parallel to this, is a second outcrop of coal in the Ghilzye territory, which I dis-

covered lately at Dobundee, and whilst I have been writing this paper, specimens

have béen brought me from Hissaruk.

The third formation is in the Huzarah country ; specimens of this have been

brought me from the vicinity of Syghan. |

* According to a pamphlet published in 1825, by Mr. H. J. Prescort, for the removal of the

high duty on foreign iron, it is stated: ‘The quantity of iron exported from Stockholm in the year

1822 and also in 1824 was 36,000 tons. Sweden in general exports perhaps 100, or 102,000 tons.”

1841.] On the Mineral resources, 5c. of Northern Afghanistan. 89

All of these deposits of coal are of the lignite species ; the mineral is of a velvet

black colour, and approaching to jet or pitch coal. The Kaneegoorum coal burns

freely ; and with much flame and smoke ; the Hissaruk is rich-looking, crumbles into

angular fragments, and particles of it, as well as that of Dobundee, which I have

tried in the flame of a candle, burned well, considering that they were obtained from

the surface. What I have as yet discovered at Dobundee is in very thin seams, pul-

verulent, and resembling coal-dust more than anything else. The Syghan coal ig-

nites with great difficulty, and the flame, which is very slight, has a greenish tinge.

Underneath the surface, this character may be expected to alter considerably for the

better.

Although this coal is of a subsequent geological date to the mineral we are accus-

tomed to use in England, which belongs to what is technically termed the ‘‘ indepen-

dent coal formation,’ it by no means follows, that profitable beds of it may not be

discovered, and in time create a great change in the comfort and commercial pros-

perity of many parts of this kingdom, where wood is extremely scarce. Coal of this

description is extensively used in many parts of Europe, andis frequently of excellent

quality.* It is mined in the island of Veglia for the use of the Trieste steamers.

Twenty-eight beds of it are wrought about Toulon and Marseilles. At Colognet here

is a bed of it 30 feet thick ; the mines of Styria, and of Buda in Hungary, are famous

for their immense supplies of this fuel ; great beds of it are worked in Switzerland,

in the valleys of the Po, the Danube, and other quarters of the continent.

It will readily be acknowledged, therefore, that although the coal deposits of this

country belong to a more recent geological period than that of the independent

coal formation, it would be an unphilosophical conclusion te Suppose on that ac-

count, that they may not exercise the happiest influence on the welfare of its inha-

bitants. To the Huzareh, the possession of this substance, if found in sufficient

quantities, would prove most inv2luable. It would enable him to work with every

advantage his abundant mines of iron, copper, and lead ; and in a country with so

rigorous aclimate, and so destitute of fuel, it would be to him the most useful produc-

tion. Should profitable beds of the mineral be discovered in the direction of Dobun-

dee, there is a level road from it to Cabool, by the plain of Sagur ; and how far the for-

mation may be traced along the Ghilzye tract is yet unknown.

Lastly, the coal of the Wuzeeree territory may turn out of importance, as well for

the working of the extensive iron mines in that quarter, as for steam navigation

on the Indus.

Amidst the numerous samples of ores which have come under my observation,

the gold which is brought down by the streams from the mountains

Gold, &c.

above Lughman and Kooner, is all that I have as yet seen, which

I can pronounce upon as pertaining to the precious metals. It is stated to be found

likewise in streams from the Kohi Baba range, in the country of the Huzarehs, and

* At a single establishment in Wales, there are 13 large blast iron furnaces at work, and it is

_ estimated that their consumption of fuel is 400,000 tons of coal per annum. Works like these con-

vey an idea of the stupendous industry of England.

90 On the Mineral resources, c. of Northern Afghanistan. [No. 109.

also in some of the streams of Kohistan ; but [ have not yet received specimens from

these districts ; the report however, is nat at all improbable, and I believe myself it

will be found all along the line of greatest elevation of the Hindoo Kosh and Indian

Caucasus.

Whether this gold occurs originally in a disseminated state throughout the strata

from which it is detached, or whether there exist distinct repositories of the metal,

and in connection with some of the beds of iron, which from the iron sand that

accompanies the gold must be intersected by the streams, is a subject for future

inquiry. To the best of my recollection, all the gold brought to London by the

Brazilian Mining Company is found accompanying iron, whether in the alluvial

deposits from which it is washed, or the mines where it is worked.

Specimens without number have been brought to me from various parts of the

country, supposed by the golden hue of the one, and the silvery whiteness of the

other, to belong to the precious metals. In none, however, have I been able to re-

cognise any thing beyond the sulphuret of iron under different forms, and a compound

perhaps of sulphur, arsenic, and iron. There are some specimens, however, respecting

which I am not quite certain, and these I shall transmit for chemical examination,

Having nothing but my blowpipe apparatus to depend upon, when any doubt exists

as to the constitutions of a mineral, it is desirable that they should be subjected

to the test of analysis. On one occasion I tried a specimen from a deposit in

Dobundee, (the ore externally has the appearance of an ore of silver,) and I saw a

small head which appeared not unlike impure silver, but since then I have repeated ~

the trial freyuently without coming to any satisfactory result. The fragment of a

mineral, however, which is submitted to the action of the blowpipe is so very minute,

being no larger than a grain uf pepper, that I should not wish these attempts to be

considered final. Argentiferous arsenical iron is worked in Germany as an ore of sil-

ver, and should that metal be discovered in this country, it will probably be found

in combination with some of these ores, or what is still more likely, with some of

the numerous veins of lead which are to be met with.

Amongst all the specimens of iron pyrites, which have been brought to me, I |

have seen nothing that could be termed curiferous. Latterly, I have heard several

reports of the existence of silver, but the Afghans are so addicted to the marvellous,

and so easily imposed upon by designing alchymists, that I would never attach the

smallest credit to them, unless a specimen of the mineral be produced. By all acs

counts, the Huzareh country must be the richest in minerals of any other in Af-

ghanistan, from the number of old mines said to be there, and the remains of ancient

cities in their neighbourhood, which would seem to indicate, that its mineral wealth

in former times had been the cause of attraction, Whether silver may exist amongst

these mines, is a point to be ascertained.

A story was told me lately by Aga Hoossain, a merchant of Herat, that at Mough

in the Eimough or Eimouk country, there is an inscription in the Hebrew character,

on a large black slab, to the effect, that in the days of king Jumshed, (1274 years

ago,) the following mines were discovered :— i

1841.] On the Mineral resources, &c. of Northern Afghanistan. 91

3 of Silver, 1 of Copper,

1 of Lapis Lazuli, 2 of Lead,

3 of Iron, 1 of Sulphur.

I doubt the genuineness of the whole story, but there is I believe no doubt of the

fact, that old mines do exist there, and what they are, is yet to be ascertained. My

informant says that he saw a number of old grinding stones in a stream close by the

mines, which are believed to have been used by the ancients for crushing ore. It is

reported also among some of the Huzarehs, that a number of golden vessels were

discovered once in some of the old mines of their country, and there is a tradition of

gold mines having been worked, but that the vein or veins are now lost. To tales

like these I attach no importance, further than as a stimulus to, and a necessity for,

investigation. I believe, moreover, from the specimens of iron, lead, copper, sulphur,

and coal, which have been brought to me from thence, that the whole of that country

is a rich mineral tract, and if the precious metals do exist there, as they are generally

found in small quantity, it must be remembered, that their discovery is not likely to

take place all at once, but to be the work probably of time and patient inquiry. A

speck of gold in a piece of quartz may point to a deposit of that metal ; or an acci-

dental circumstance, (such as a Populzye chief related to me the other day, ) may

lead to the discovery of silver: namely, that many years ago small particles of it

had been observed in a stone on which a fire had been lighted.

A specimen of cinnabar, (sulphuret of mercury,) was brought to me once by a

villager, who said he had found it in the neighbourhood of Sultanpore near Jelalla-

bad; but as I did not find any traces of it in the rocks in that vicinity, the probabi-

lity is, it may have been dropped there by accident. Cinnabar is a rich ore of quick-

silver, it is a production of Thibet, and if it be ever found in this country, it will

more likely be discovered in the direction of the Kohi Baba range than elsewhere.

I lately heard also of a very heavy red coloured stone, which is used by the natives

in that quarter as a pigment, and sent for a specimen of it, but the individual I com-

missioned has not yet arrived. A person who was returning from that country the

other day with a collection of specimens, was unfortunately robbed of every thing he

had. Were the Huzarehs any other people, I should conclude from the description

of the mineral that was given, and their manner of using it, that it was cinnabar, but

they are such a perfectly rude and ignorant race, that I fear it will be found to be

simply the red oxide of iron. Should gold dust be ever collected on the great scale |

or veins of the precious metals be discovered and worked in this country, a mine of

quicksilver would be of great importance for the necessary amalgamation works ;

but this is at present a very vague speculation.

Ihave mentioned the existence of copper in the Ghilzye and Huzareh territories,

Copper. specimens also from Bagour have come under my notice.*

Lead seems to abound in the Huzareh districts, in Ghorabund of Kohistan, and in

Lead. Wurduk. The lead of the former two is of an excellent

quality, the latter is inferior, and of a harsher character. The ore is the sul-

* The price of lead in Cabool in time of Dost Mahomed Khan was Rs. 14 per Cabool seer, at pre.

Sent its sells for Rs. 3.

92 On the Mineral resources, &c. of Northern Afghanistan. [ No. 109.

phuret of lead, and that which I have seen from the Huzareh country, occurs in the

form of the carbonate likewise. Lead is also stated to be found in Bungesh, and a

specimen of it from the Sufued Koh has been brought me lately.

With regard to antimony, I find that what is sold in the bazar of Cabool as such

Antimony. is a sulphuret of lead. Occasionally, perhaps, a proportion of anti-

mony may be combined with it, forming what is called the sulphuret of lead

and antimony.

I could not convince a vender of antimony, upon one occasion, that what he

brought me as pure specimen of that mineral, was not so in reality, until I sub-

mitted a fragment of it to the action of the blowpipe, and on disengaging the sul-

phur, showed him what excellent lead was produced. Having at the time a small

piece of massive sulphuret of antimony in my possession, and which, to the eye of

the antimony dealer presented very much the same external character as his own,

I then placed a fragment of it in the flame of the blowpipe, and the antimony imme-

diately melted, and was absorbed by the charcoal, giving off the white fumes pecu-

liar to it, and no trace of lead was observed.

That antimony, however, exists in this country, is beyond a doubt. It is mentioned

in the report of the late Dr. Lorp on Ghorabund as occurring in that district, and

I myself saw in the possession of an officer, a mass of pure antimony, which was

found in the neighbourhood of Quetta.

Graphite, or plumbago, is a production of this country. I have a specimen of it,

Plumbago. reported to be from the vicinity of Kohi Daumun.

Specimens of sulphur have been brought me from the Huzareh country, and it is

reported as occurring there in vast quantity. Saltpetre is produced —

abundantly from the soil. Rock salt I observed in the hills near Jelal-

labad by the Soorkhao river, but in too small quantity to be worth working ; a sample

of it from Altamoor also has been sent me, but I do not suppose it is in sufficient

abundance there, to be of any consequence. Marble occurs at Mydan, and pro-

bably in many other places, but this and gypsum, and minerals of that sort, it will be

time enough to direct attention to, when the country has made sufficient progress in

the arts, to render them objects of value for economical purposes.

The most important minerals of Northern Afghanistan, are the following :—

Iron. This mineral is found in many parts of the country, particularly in the

Huzareh, the Ghilzye, the Bajour, and the Wuzeeree territories. *

Lead is found in the Huzareh districts, in Wurduk, and in Kohistan.

Copper is found in the Huzareh, the Ghilzye, and Bajour territories.

Sulphur, &c.

* In Captain HERBERT’s report on the minerals of the Himalaya, published in the 18th volume of

the Asiatic Researches, he makes the following observation in his account of the lead mines :—“A

singular fact is, that the ore and reduced metal sell by weight for the same price at Kalsi, the near-

est town. I could not learn the reason of this, but suppose that the produce of sulphur pays the ex-

pence of reducing the ore.” When I read this, I suspected there might be a portion of the ore,

known to be argentiferous; but it is evident that the purest is selected at Kalsi as at Cabool, and

sold under the general term of soormd, ox antimony.

1841.] On the Mineral resources, 5c. of Northern Afghanistan. 93

Gold is found in several streams north of the Cabool river.

Coal is found in the Huzareh, the Ghilzye, and the Wuzeeree districts.

Sulphur is found in the Huzareh districts.

Here then are materials for commencing the work of civilization in this rude and

barbarous region, giving a stimulus to its commerce, increasing its revenues, and

affording employment to its indigent, but hardy and industriously inclined popula-

tion.

A remark has been made, that ‘‘ the mountains in this world no doubt abound in

mines, but that the people must be enlightened before they can be worked.’’ And

in what way might I ask, is this period of enlightenment to be brought about? Are

these great mineral repositories intended to lie idle in the meantime, to form mere-

ly the subject of a scientific theme, and furnish a few specimens for the cabinets of

the curious—or, are they designed by an unerring Hand for the great moral end, not

only of administering to the immediate wants of the people, but in their very extrac-

tion to be the means of exercising their energies, mental as well as physical,

improving their habits, and thereby contributing effectually to raise them from the

brutal condition into which they have fallen ?*

Let this nation be taught the practical manual arts, so as to enable them to turn

the productions of their country to account,--let the hand of the Afghan, under the

eye of the European, unlock that wealth which is intended for his use,—then may we

expect to see therays of civilization break in upon the moral and intellectual gloom

which pervades this darkened land.

*In a casual conversation I had lately with the intelligent Barukzye chief Ihave alluded to

(Oosmen Khan) he observed :—“ If the feeling of the English people towards this country be as you

describe it, and its various resources receive that attention which it is out of the power of my own

countrymen, from their poverty and ignorance to bestow on them, then not only will Cabool become

happy and contented, but surrounding nations, on seeing the prosperity of Cabool, will desire of

‘themselves to come under the protection of the English.”

Opening of the Topes at the Caves of Kanari, near Bombay, and the

relics found in them. By Dr. James Birp.

The Caves of Kanari, situated on the island of Salsette, and two

miles beyond the village of Tulsi, are distant twenty miles from the

fort of Bombay, and six from Tannah. The made road from Bombay

conducts the visitor as far as the village of Vihar, four miles north of

which is the mountain where the caves are excavated. They have

been described by several travellers, and are noticed, in a. D. 399,

by the Buddhist priest and pilgrim ‘‘ EKa-Hian,” who visited the seats

of his religion in India, and whose travels have been translated by 3

M. Remusat. The cavern temple is described by him to consist of —

five stories, each story containing numerous chambers or cells, cut

out of the solid rock, and tenanted by Arhats; a description which

answers very closely to the circumstances of the Kanari excavations,

which rise from the base to the summit of the mountain in six stories,

and are connected to each other by steps cut in the solid rock. The

kingdom in which they are situated is said to be distant from ~

Kia-shi or Varanasi, two hundred yojans to the south, and is called —

Ta-thsen Dach-chin.

Immediately in front of the large arched cave, and on a ledge of the

mountain, some thirty or forty feet below, there are several small ~

Thopas, or monumental receptacles for the bones of a Buddha, or

Rahat, built of cut stone at the base. These were once of a pyramidal

shape, but are now much dilapidated, and appear like a heap of

stones. Several years ago I thought of opening some of them, in

expectation of obtaining coins or other relics; but found no favorable

opportunity until lately, when several lengthened visits, in company

with Doctor Heddle, gave me the desired means of doing so. The

success of General Ventura, M. Court, and others, in their search after

relics from the ¢opes of the Punjab and Kabul, gave me additional

Pee ES Pe Sas

hope that I should find something worthy of the labour, and I am glad

to report, that these expectations have not been disappointed.

The largest of the topes selected for examination, appeared to have

been one time between twelve or sixteen feet in height. It was much di-

1841. ] Opening of the Topes at the Caves of Kanari. 95

lapidated, and was penetrated from above to the base, which was built of

cut stone. After digging to the level of the ground and clearing away the

materials, the workmen came to a circular stone, hollow in the centre,

and covered at the top by a piece of gypsum. This contained two

small copper urns, in one of which were some ashes mixed with a ruby,

a pearl, small pieces of gold, and a small gold box, containing a piece

of cloth; in the other a silver box and some ashes were found. Two

copper-plates containing legible inscriptions, in the Lath, or Cave cha-

racter ; accompanied the urns, and these, as far as I have yet been

able to decypher them, inform us, that the persons buried here were of

the Buddhist faith. The smaller of the copper-plates bears an inscrip-

tion in two lines, the last part of which contains the Buddhist

creed inscribed on the base of the Buddha image from Tirhut, and on

the stone extracted from the Zope of Sarnath, near Benares; an

excellent commentary on which will be found in Mr. Prinsep’s Journal

for March and April 1835. The last part of the Kanari inscription,

and the copper-plate of which I have now the honor of laying before

the members of your Society, corresponds very closely with the text of

the inscription from Tirhut. The original in the Lath character stands

thus :

Yé dhaurm4 hetu prabhavaé, tésham hétu Tathagata suvacha Téshaéncha

yo nirodha évam Vadi Mahé Suwanna:

which transferred to Devanagri

AaaS MATA ete: | Baas facta ws

aTet ASTSAUs

‘mnay be translated :—‘‘ Whatever meritorious acts proceed from cause, of

these the source Yathdgata (Buddha) has declared; the opposing

: principle of these the great One of exalted birth, has also demonstrated.’

| The only difference between the text of the present inscription and

| the one from Tirhut, is thelast word Suwanna, the Pali for Suvarna in-

stead of Sramana; and which means the golden one, or one of an exalted

| birth or tribe, and is here evidently an appellative of Bhuddha. In the

appendix to Mr. B. H. Hodgson’s quotations in proof of his sketch of

96 Opening of the Topes at the Caves of Kanari. [No. 109.

Buddhism, one of the principal attributes of Adi Buddha is quaurat

Suvarna-warnata. The above sentence, as Mr. Hodgson remarks,

contains the confessio fedei of the Buddhaist, and is in the mouth of every

one at Kathmandu. The discovery of it at Kanari confirms an opinion

long prevalent, that the cave temples of Western India are exclusively

Bauddha, and seems to strengthen the theory regarding the origin of

the Déhgopes of Kanari, Manikyala, and Afghanistan, that they are

Bauddha Mausolea, built over the remains of persons of this faith,

either of a royal or priestly character. Little doubt can exist of the

ashes found in the two copper urns being those of the persons buried,

one of whom, according to the larger copper inscription, was the chief

of the great Vihar, or large arched temple at Kanari. The object of

these monuments was, as Mr. Prinsep says, twofold: a memorial of the

dead, and in honour of the deity, of which the enshrined saint was only

a portion, and as legitimately entitled to be worshipped as the source

from which he had emanated, and to which, according to their creed, he

could after a life of virtuous penance and abstraction return. The

monuments in the Punjab and Cabul appear to be consecrated tombs

of a race of princes, who were of the Buddhaist faith; whose coins

are inscribed on one side with Greek letters, and the other with those

of Bactrian Pal, and whose tribe is called Khoranon. They were a

Grzco-Indo-Scythic race, mentioned by Marco Polo, and called by him

Karaunas, a tribe of robbers who scoured the country, and plundered

every thing within their reach.*

I abstain now from offering any remarks on the general prevalence

of the Buddhaist faith on this side of India, or its connexion with the

worship of the sun, as my only object is to bring to notice the relics

found at Kanari, and their similarity to those discovered in the

Punjab.

* Travels of Marco Polo by Marsden, page 86.

gundgnesyzsay

TART MAUPGA

Aya ELT ZF

fa afan aa an fran

Hanan hor 343);

Ma ATLA AA

EA WALI TRIS

iatrqareetparaT

FFGAYIARW

})

XXVIIL

J XKAGL: srexryegesrs nanan LLY AL qn TATTR RISE BEY

TAA AM ABFA ATA RATATAT AAT ALAM TT HATA ASA TN ATRIA Ty

AG QeLannT Usp A syyregy gr yyy ayy es avd

Pan oraan ergy Taga y aaa ly

Ananhoy 3x5 28 yyia5yz Gat eASaVu gayers mgsFeS.

Ma ALTA RA AH AAAI A TTS TAT AT MST GMAT TT Bae

CA WAL y yaTyhaFs HAT Gy SVS WALEEN F 97H

fdas ena muausretarrannrcan ia

TIBAGIWLwF AY Q BF ONAL WLALBAL BE anew Gayy

Se ef eae a AT I eR eR eT RTT ATT Ta AT EH

ASU GFS ECE Be Fru =A ICHSLAL A’ Qutoyysrlsazf

mrasahenmagatray aarey athe aq Wage: a wey were AT

mrdagrnre-SrkE guyiay MEX OD er MEAL Yay

WUT ag: Aa TAS TAT MATAAIT AS: Magan ay

yh wad DEn¥z a3" AERA Ta REA LAF Fry ay Bde =

Bhrraressy am qa: maga: fat ara wt PUaTe:

1841. | Opening of the Topes at the Caves of Kanarz. 97

Literal Translation.

Salutation to Sarvagna, (a Jine or Boud’dha, or deified sage peculiar

to those sects. )

This was founded in the year of the reign of the Trukudaka line

about 100 years at Bardhamanu,* 54 on the north, and 85 at Maha

Behar, by Pushya Burma, whose habitation was in the northern forest

of the conquered Taromi, and who, by his personal beauty, was possess-

ed of a Buddhistical appearance as a Chaitya,{ in honor of the most

powerful, very wise, and superior Bhagavana Sakya, Muni, whose acts

were wonderful, and who was the son of Sdrad’dhati, for the purpose of

his studying and practising with firm devotion the famous Boud’dha

religion, the duty of a learned man.

So long as the revolving waves wherein the Makara{ are swimming

at night, the milky water of the Kshéra Samudra, (sea of milk,) the

Meru with its abundant gold and the forest of mangoe—the deep

rivers continuing to flow with their clean streams will endure, so long

this deed of Pushya, which contributes to the advancement of devotion,

is durable.

Nort.—I have most unwillingly kept back Dr. Bird’s paper for many weeks, in-

tending to publish it together with a notice of the late Lt. Pigou’s Discoveries at

Buhurabad near Jullalabad, on the frontier of Afghanistan. I thought the almost

simultaneous examination of a set of topes situated close to a set of caves, giving si-

milar results nearly at places so distant as Buhurabad and Kanari, worthy of being

placed in juxta-position, as of interest to the investigator of Boodhist antiquities. I

am extremely sorry that great delay in the preparation of a simple lithograph to

accompany the Buhurabad paper should have caused the suppression of this inter-

esting paper for solong atime. Having heard a few days ago from Dr. Bird, with

the promise of a translation of the inscription on the two copper plates dug from

the Dehgop at Kanari, copy of which accompanied his paper, I determined on pub-

lishing the reading of one of them (subject to correction by Dr. Bird) as given by

Pundit Kamalakanta Vidyalanka, and the literal translation of that reading, which

I owe to a native gentleman of much learning and intelligence, Baboo Neelratna

Holdar of Calcutta. The inscription is numbered xxviii. (and so copied erroneously

into the lithograph,) in a work shortly, I am happy to say, about to appear on the

Excavations in Western India, originated by Mr. Wathen, well known asa Sanscrit

scholar, and carried on by Dr. Bird.

* This country is also mentioned in the 25th sloka of the Pratapa Rudra inscription,

vide Asiatic Journal, No 82, 1838, page 906.

t Place of religious worship. This, if the word druma be added to it, means a sacred

tree.

i A horned fish, or a fabulous animal.

Note on a Copper Land Grant, by Java CHANDRA.

The copper plate whence the accompanying reading in modern Sanscrit character |

and translation are taken, was found near Fyzabad in the Oude, and a facsimile of it

was forwarded to me by Lieut. Col. Caulfield, then Resident at Lucknow. The land

grants of the donor, Raja Jaya Chandra, are not uncommon. In the first volume of |

the Transactions of the Asiatic Society there is a notice by the late Mr. Colebrooke,

(p- 444,) of a grant by this Raja, which is however described at second-hand :

“* Without having seen the original,’”’ says Mr. Colebrooke, “no opinion can be

offered as to the probable genuineness of this monument ; (date s. 1220, a. p. 1164)

the inscription is however consistent with chronology ; for Jaya Chandra, who is des-

cribed in the Ayeen Acberi as Supreme monarch of India, having the seat of his empire

at Canouj, is there mentioned as the ally of Shehabuddin in the war with Prithair

Raja, or Pithora, about the year of the Hejira 588, or a. p. 1192; twenty-eight

years after the date of this grant.”’

The date of the grant now published is s. 1243, or a. p. 1187, twenty-three

years subsequent to that of the same monarch noted by Mr. Colebrooke, and

only six years prior to the death of the ill-fated donor, which occurred a. p. 1193.

With him expired the dynasty of the Rahtore princes of Canouj.

The genealogy, as given in the grant now before us, differs only in the name of the

first ancestor mentioned from that found in Mr. Colebrooke’s grant. The name

is there Sripala, here Yasovigra, but the identity of the monarch, known under

these different appellations, has been already ascertained, and admitted by the

highest authorities, (As. Soc. Jour. vol. iii. p- 339).

The phraseology of this grant is not different from those of J aya Chandra, which

have been already discovered: the anathema against the resumers of land granted

in free tenure is remarkable for its peculiar bitterness. The plate, judging from

the facsimile, must be in high preservation, and the date it gives is valuable, as

bearing corroborative testimony to the accuracy of chronological data.

Bier | AAweaes aqus ausqseae: | devw:

Tea @ fara: Sadeq gi AMAA far aq a eA

WaATaTE Teaarare | aTaitcaeatfag YrCateaT aTTEAAT

aatfaqe Leqerc: | aeqaiweawagsguratati farsi 1a

ATMCARMCINTS Bafta 7 11 aM aaacfa

e Aas feratgancautatac wget

qU | datereacmarafaattanstagd | sha arte

qufausqaadalfamauriaa 1 ate ar faafaalert

AIMASET AAA ha ufcaraaatfuaez | waTeRq ea farsi

eeafeseat wife sqadtwameerfe: | aeaTeAST

1841. Note on a Copper Land Grant. 99

agai afa fadtgqetafufasra faattaag: | aat

fitaanamigfaa: wafer: metieet afacar: qq uf<

a) aera feqawaTTagy agaaa Wet Haq Als

UEAATAHATZAA GSA TSTCA aH AAT afa aTATE

qaifea: Re: wturfgs quad} ale facta: c

aeatesiaa = fasit aaa TS af aIea ATG ATI SAAT at

| wigtsagaqul waa wat at atifsieds cfs dgcaty

Ta: aHAVT ERATURE: TH feq asitay atau: |

aqrTraacaarTH uta ast <a qq UUIAST |) aahs

faqaaeiaa ATACR: quifafeanyqerafas Seal |

UATATTA SA BATTEN TATA AIAHSTATTNAYT TAT

wl aa qaTHAUafatadaaria weraatta afaafua

awarfa | ae fafaanizaamisita nqiaafaats UF

wa agifa i afeigurgg faa fragrance

qearcfanifeaa | aria warafaas wife HARTA

awa wast I eae Aa PRAT ZA ASAT TATA: fia

HATATATAT WH Yaa ETAATCTAT | ears” fae

ate Pager AATHAT: | aardaae as aaa saa:

| urferan: T

THA AT eH aafe nama aqraaerfaraia: wealga

SAAT mag faaRUIaeaTaTT eS | Sarat sea wrage

Ferrey at ference CUT Re eTE Ta EMA WAAC Tg ea

AE: WUT: || Va Caeatisgam dafaaqe: wy WA

wzica | warfecrqacasacacHaresaciasys isa

Saar gy feaer aT aeR eT TT AATCAN ETC AST

Crm PITTA CTCH AT eT TAMA TATTRTS la

UCAAZICAHASIUTTAIH WaT WHATS vk

ufa asafa acufa Us qaifuafa fafaufaaifaart

araeafa sitattfare TK ZI UAT VLA AIT ET

TIsafVUs aaITT ucaATesacsa via aaqafa acuta

usaaifutfa = fafaufagrfaarcaraenfa | oAfasaze

100 Note on a Copper Land Grant. [ No. 109.

SAMI TALATA UCH ASTCA ABILIMfatisy WWasse ux

aaiesacraufa agqufa acufa caaarfusta faf vata

aifaac argeafa sassawsx sat fawdt 1 wats

waa aaTaataatednt fafea qarerqutataty

TAT JIT afeagufed WAteTe Varafa aiaifa

arene fara faaeat fara: ufa ga afcquraaat

HTC TATA aera feyeararareata Fuararfeuta

a fafea ae AaaT | aaratc fafaqraia: ara wa a

aeaamat: waaac: waiafac afafarea faa:

ayaa a fenifrsuqara tat acTeaT: Wess TT

aig faze: _seetareeze: Faweanteugfaagreaaa a

wqeut Bate atfa Wawa weeatfas cfafed sianat

efq Wea UR ye AMI © GT AGE WAU

vata area fafuarragaata aqaya faquutanata

cay fafacazaazaagae aya Ufa ‘quegrataty

ufa waa ST WHAT faysasrqsiaacit TIA JST

fasta wqcaada ufaar a fast Beat ararfasat cweaa

zy quan fagga U

aurfareraea FATA TA ACTS HY SHAT ETS AL ATA

aITZIATgITaaTeeUAa far anata WBA ASIA sae

UTHAMNCLII MCIBAasH Ags weTH aaa

aVaCa coat wa aareraaraacacat faarafataaarta

aa eRe aT a awa acer fara far START II

yf a: afagetia ay yf weeefa i wat at eae

sary faa xadatfaaty i sia Agreed SI FATT aTaIX

UT. II | affargraea fastfa meTAAT TCT I! afeawawel

fw aa aafa wfaz: ASA VARA W AAT ATH

ada 1 astra yaT Trisha: amcitefa: | ae wea AT

ufirearea A ACT WAR) UT Wess Al Cia ag

aT \a fagtat fanfantearfirgta: ae wsafa | ASTATAT

aeau aqIaTaa w Wai aifeaziaa ufaaTT a qata

- 1841.] Note on a Copper Land Grant. 101

aifceitereey seaqlzetfed: | aeuTeary aaa

qaqauteu: | 4 fai faufararsaae farqeaa | fan

‘farfad xia goed wattfaa i aatafaaafad aqui

favaarnaaraayerfasateitan: WUT as gaa

ATO | wer: TET TERRI eT RATA aE eaTfa, Te

aera warranty | fader faarfaaria

Al aa ATL: TAISEN I

—$—$—$———

| Literal Translation, by Pundit Saropawa Prasapu.

_. 1. May the embrace of Lakshmi, (* * * * * * * and Vaikuntha, )

contribute to your prosperity !

2. The Rajas who were descended from the lunar line having de-

parted for heaven, one, named Yasévigraha, by his natural spirits was

as the sun himself.

3. His son was Mahi Chandra, who extended his fame as beams of

the moon across the sea.

4. His son was Chandra Deva, who was exceedingly given to justice,

who invaded the whole circle of his enemies, and dispelled the darkness

of the gallant warriors. He, by the power of his arms, gained the king-

dom of Gddhipoora, where all sorts of insurrections have been quelled

by his power.

| 6. He, ( Chandra Deva, ) who protected the sacred places of Kashi,

(Benarus,) Kushikotsava Késhald, (Oude,) and Indrasthdna, possessing

them, who constantly gave gold equal to the weight of his body to the

Bradhmanas ; made the Vasumati, (earth, ) renowned by the hundreds

and hundreds of tédés.*

6. His son Madanapdla, who was like the moon in his line, and the

-crest-jewel of all the Rajas, was glorious! By the water of his anoint-

“ment, all the filth of the Kaliyiziga has been washed away.

|| *A religious ceremony, i. e. giving gold or silver to the Brahmanas, equal to the

weight of the donor’s body ; the ceremony is in these days often practised by weighments

against grains, or precious merchandise. It is supposed to be efficacious in awarding

evil, and was constantly had recourse to by Maharaja Runjeet Sing, (Lahore, ) in his

last illness, (Ty

102 Note on a Copper Land Grant. [No. 109.

7. At the time of his expedition for conquests, when the earth was

as it were crumbling under the over-passing of his furious elephants,

as well as his mighty army, the mouth of Sesha,* smeared with blood

gushing from the palate pierced by the pressure with his head jewel, »

was for sometime bent down even to his breast.

8. From him was born Gobinda Chundra, like the moon rising from

the sea, who by his arms, long and like the creeping plant, kept the

newly, acquired kingdom—stubborn as the elephant in confinement ; nay,

who granted a great many cows yielding sweet milk.

9. His elephants, rivals to that of Jndra, having sought in vain in

the three quarters of the world for elephants, capable of bearing their

burdens, came at last in the quarter of Jndra, (east,) and wandered

there-along.f

10. From him was born Raja Vijaya Chandra, who like Surapatz,

(Indra,) cut off the Pukshus of all the Bhibhrit}. He at his easy con-

quest of the world, has extinguished the heat of the earth by the abun-

dant tears of * * * * *

11. His renown challenging the three regions of creation des-

cribed by eminent poets, and which reached as far as the Vishnu

loka, (region of Vishnu,) has been ever the terror of Vali Raja.§

12. The earth, at the expedition of Vijaya Chandra to conquer the

whole world crushed by his furious elephants, ascended, as it were,

in the dust caused by his numerous army, to solicit refuge from

Prajapati, ( Brahma.)

13. From him who was possessed of wondrous power, sprung one

named Jaya Chandra, the lord of all Rajas, who was as the Narayana

himself, born only for the deliverance of the world; and whom the

Rajas humbling themselves ceased from contemplating hostilities with,

and putting a stop to their designs, submitted to.

14. At the preparation of his warlike affairs, the Phanindra (the

chief of serpents, ) wearied with falling down and again rising from the

hard shell of the Kurma,|| under the pressure of his elephants the ichor —

from whose temples dropped into the streams, running from the

* The chief of serpents, supporting the earth on his head.

t+ With the view of finding there the rival elephants of Indra.

{ The word paksha means when relating to Indra the “‘ peaks of mountains ;’’ and

‘¢ allies’? when referring to the Raja. The word Bhubhrit has also a double meaning,

‘the mountain” and “ the (other) Rajas.”’

§ Vali Raja, v. the Srimat Bhagavata.

|| The tortoise supposed to reside underneath the earth.

1841. | Note on a Copper Land Grant. 103

shaking hills, and panting from his thousand hoods with impatience,

would without sustenance have fainted, and died.

He, the glorious Jaya Chandra, whose feet were adored by the cir-

cle of Rajas, and who was like Vachaspata* in discussing on various

Vidyds, (sciences, ) the lord of the three Rajas: viz., Aswapati, Goyapati,

and Narapati, very rich, king of kings, learned and superior to all, and

who was devoted to the feet of (his father) Vijaya Chandra, who also

was like Vachaspati in discussing, &c. and devoted to (the feet of his

father) Govinda Chandra, who also was, &c. and devoted to the feet

of (his father) Madanapdla, who also was, &c. and devoted to the feet

of (his father) Chandra Deva, who was also very learned, king of kings,

&c. &c. and who gained the kingdom of Kanyakubja by the power

of his arms. That proclaims and orders to all the inhabitants of

_Kemali, the village situated at Ashureshapattand, to all the rajas,

princes, ministers, priests, attendants, chiefs of assemblies, warriors,

_(akshapdlalikas ) physicians, and servants, who were occasionally to

attend to the female apartments, superintendents of elephants, horses,

‘mines, cows, &c.

_ Be it known to all of you, that this day, the seventh day of the moon,

‘in the month of Ashddha of Samvatsara 12438, we, for promoting the

‘virtue and fame of our parents and ourselves, having performed

ablution in the Ganga at Benares,—satisfied as usual, the Gods,

‘Mumnis, men, together with deceased ancestors, with offerings of water,

‘adored him whose fervid beams dispel darkness, worshipped him who

"wears the crescent on his forehead (Shiva), and Vasudeva (Vishna),

offered oblations to Hutashana (Fire) with Payashat and performed

Achamana with water, then granted with water in hand to Alonga

Ouda Rayuta, who belonged to the Bharaddaja line, and was possessed

of three Provaras, viz. Bharadddja, Angirasa, and Varhaspatya, and

-\who was the son of Indra Rayuta, and grandson of Atala Rayuta

with a Sdshna, (grant) village above-mentioned (Kemali) which was

enriched with water and earth, with mines of iron and salts, with

_ ponds full of fishes, with caves and fertile farms, mountains and

forests, with gardens of modhu and mango trees, and which extends

as far as T’rinayuthi, and the four boundaries of which were undispu-

table. It is ever to be enjoyed so long as the sun and moon will

endure. Its revenues, as settled, or are to be settled, are duly to be

discharged by the tenants.

* The Guru of the Gods.

t+ Rice boiled with milk and sugar.

104 Note on a Copper Land Grant. [No. 109.

Slokas.—He who grants lands, and he who accepts, both of those

virtuous reside in heaven.

O, Purandara, (Indra.) Sankha (shell) houses, ensign of ranks,

(chattah) fine horses and elephants, are gained by granting lands.

He who grants lands lives 60,000 years in heaven; but he who

confiscates, or resumes, or allows others to do so, is doomed to hell for

a like period.

The earth has been enjoyed by many kings, as Sdgara Raja, and

others, and he who rules it in his turn is the sole enjoyer of its fruits.

He who resumes lands granted by himself or others, is to become a

dung fly and to live therein with his ancestors.

The resumer of lands ean never be free from sins, though he grants

a thousand tanks, a crore of cows, and performs a hundred vajapeya

(a sacrifice. ) :

Those who resume lands granted by others, will become black

serpents in the desert of the forest of the Vindhya mountain. No poison

is of itself utter poison ; but to deprive a Brahman of his property is

indeed poison, because the former can kill one alone, but the latter the —

whole of a man’s descendants.

Sovereignty is unstable like the wind ; worldly pleasures are in the

first instance desirable. The life of man is as a dew-drop on the

grape, but, alas! virtue is the only friend who accompanies him into

the next world.

But what generous man will resume the grants made by Rajas, who

have gone before him, and whose gifts are like wreaths of flowers :

spreading the fragrance of a good name and of a reputation for wealth

and virtue ?

Lineage of Jayachandra.

Yashovigraha.

Mahichandra.

Chandra Deva.

Madanapala.

Gobindachandra.

Vij woh unuane

Jayachandra,

the donor.

{

JOURNAL

OF THE

ASLATIC SOCIETY.

Abstract Journal of the Route of Lieutenant A. Cunningham, Bengal

Engineers, to the Sources of the Punjab Rivers.

From Tandee on the Chundra Bhaga river, where I parted with Lieut-

enant Broome, I continued my way ‘along the right bank of the river,

with the proud consciousness that I was the first European who had ever

visited that part of the Chundra Bhaga. Onthe 16th of July, 1839, at

sixteen miles below Tandee, I crossed the river by a wooden bridge

called Rocha, or the ‘ Great’ Bridge, 85 feet long and 43 feet above the

stream, to the left bank, where ! once more came upon fir trees which

I had not seen fora week: After a walk of twomiles over a dusty bad

pathway, I had to climb a steep hill on which the celebrated temple of

Triloknath is situated. On the road I passed a Hindoo Pilgrim, a Gosains

who had come from Sunam in the protected Sikh States, having visited

Jwala Mookhee near Kangra, and the various hot wells at the head of the

’ Parbuttee river.

The temple, which is situated at one end of the village of Goonda, is

square, and is surmounted by the érzsool or trident of Siva, who is Trilok-

nath, or, The Lord of the three worlds, Heaven, Earth, and Hell. There

was an open Court to the front with a two-storied verandah of wood ;

the pillars, architectraves, and rails being all richly carved. In the mid-

dle of the Court there wasa block of stone about 6 feet square by 5

feet high, on the top of which was growing the sacred plant T'oolsee, or

Basil. The figure of Triloknath was of white marble, about two feet

No. 110. New Senrtes, No. 26. — P

106 Sources of the Punjab Rivers. [No. 110.

high, with six arms ; on its head there was placed a small squatted Bud-

dhistical looking figure which the attendant Brahmin declared to be of

Anna Pooroos, probably meaning Anna Purna, the beneficent form of

Parvati, the wife of Siva. In the Court there were many tall poles

surmounted by cow’s tails and pieces of cloth, placed there as offerings,

by Tibetan Buddhists as well as by Brahminical Hindoos.

The village of Toonda in which the Temple of Triloknath is situated,

had been overwhelmed in snow in the preceding year, 1838, when all

the houses which had not been bonded with wood, had fallen down, and

killed the inhabitants. The Rana or Chief of Toonda Triloknath is

under the anthority of the Rajah of Chumba, to which state the lower por-

tion of Lahul belongs.

The province of Lahul embraces the sie breadth of the Chundra

and Bhaga rivers, and extends down their united streams called the

Chundra Bhaga ina W. N. W. direction to about ten miles below Tri-

loknath. It is divided into two unequal parts; the larger belonging to

the state of Kooloo, and the smaller to Chumba. In the former there

were 108 villages, containing 740 houses, and 3,764 inhabitants.

The revenue of the province is derived from two different sources; a

house tax, and a duty on the carriage of merchandize. Under the Rajah’s

administration each house was taxed at 10 and 12 rupees, but the Sikh

Government increased the tax to twenty rupees per house, by which they

raised the collections from 5,000 to 10,000 rupees per annum, the houses

of the priests and poorer labourers being exempted from taxation. The

rates of toll were at the same time adjusted by Zurawur Singh, the go-

vernor of Ladakh, the duty upon each carriage sheep being raised from

half an anna (or three farthings) to four annas, (or six pence.) This was

considered very oppressive by the people, but asa sheep can carry 8 and

10 seers, or one fourth of a man’s load, the fair and natural rate of duty

would be to charge one fourth of the duty levied upon each man; and

Zurawur Singh did no more, for a man is charged one rupee. On a pony

which carries from 60 to 70 seers, or double the load of a man, the duty

levied is likewise double or two rupees per pony.

The grain raised in Lahul is all consumed in the country; and as

there are no natural productions, the house tax is paid by the inhabitants

from the joint Stock, obtained by hiring themselves as porters between

the states in the lower hills of the Punjab and Ladakh; the porters who

bring goods from Kooloo, Mundee and Chumba being changed at Tandee

for natives of the province itself, who receive 6 rupees cash, for the jour-

ney to Ladakh. The hire of a pony to Ladakh is 12 rupees.

, 4 “

iam a bohas

ee ea, fee) tee eS ee, | Carn

1841,] Sources of the Punjab Rivers. 107

The articles taken to Ladakh are :—wheat and rice from Chumba ; Tron

and Opium from Mundee ; coarse white cottons, and Benares brocades of

the worst quality from Kooloo; with goats skins dyed red, chiefly ma-

nufactured at Bissowlee and Noorpoor in the Punjab—in exchange for

which the following articles are brought to Tandee to be sold to the

merchants of the neighbouring states. Shawl Wool; Bang, or Hemp

prepared for smoking; silver in wedges, each wedge called Yamoo,

weighing 180 rupees or 44 lbs. avoirdupois ; Borax, native of Ladakh ;

Salt, manufactured at some Salt lakes beyond Ladakh; and Tea, brought

from Yarkund.

For the two previous years, however, but little trade has passed through

Lahul, on account of the seizure of Ladakh by the Jummoo family, who

have established a high road through their own territory of Jummoo,

which throws all the duties upon the traffic into their power. The route

runs from Jummoo, through Chinénee and Bhudurivar, both in Forster’s

route to Kishtwar, and thence to Chutogurh and Ladakh. The whole

of these places,’and consequently the entire route, are in the possession

either of Gulab Singh or of his brother, Dheean Singh.

The consequence of this change in the direction of the commerce had

been so prejudicial to Lahul, that about 500 people had emigrated to

other countries ; and many more would have followed them had they

not been stopped at the Custom houses established on all the passes

leading from Lahul. Another consequence of this interruption of the

traffic had been that very little or no Salt had come to Lahul, for the

two preceding years ; and of this the people complained bitterly, as well

as of the loss of their hire as porters between the lower hills of the

Punjab and Ladakh, Many of them were literally starving, having

nothing to eat, except grass, willow leaves, and strawberries. Even the

attendant Brahmin of the holy temple of Triloknath was glad to get the

remains of my Mahomedan Munshi’s dinner.

There are four passes leading from Lahul into Chumba, all of which

were described as equally bad. Of these the Dogee Pass leads from the

village of Ruppoo, about 8 miles below Tandee, over the snow, and down

the course of the Boodhil river to Burmdwar. The other passes lead

from Triloknath. The upper one is called the Bugga Pass and leads

direct to Burmawar ; the lower is the Humguree Pass, and is very little

used, and the middle is the Kalee Joth, or Pass of Kalee Débee, which

I chose.

On the 18th of July, I quitted Triloknath, and on the following

evening reached the foot of the Kalee Débee Pass, so named from a

108 Sources of the Punjab Rivers. [No. 110.

black conical peak to the South, dedicated to Kalee Débee. The place

was called Hoolyas, in Sanskrit Hoolyasaca, and was merely a resting

place at the foot of the pass; there I shot some snow pheasants and

Alpine Hares. Ona the following morning I began the ascent of the pass

up steep banks of loose angular masses of rock, and over sloping snow

beds, down which fragments of rock came bounding and dashing along

with a crash like the rattling of continued and numerous file-firing. The

porter who carried my iron tentpegs was struck on the knee by one of

these stones, and hurled before my eyes down the sloping indurated snow.

Luckily the snow bed terminated in a fork between two mounds of

broken fragments of rock, and there the man’s further progress was

stopped, and his life saved. He was lame however for three weeks after-

wards. The crest of the pass was a narrow ridge not more than ten and

twelve feet wide, covered with soft and newly fallen snow. There I

spread my cloak and found by my thermometer that the height was

15,700 feet. In the middle of the ridge there were two sinall slabs erect

and smeared with vermilion, near which were numerous sticks covered

with rags. For a few minutes I hada splendid view of the green hills

of Chumba smiling in the distance. A thick haze then descended and

obscured even the terrific gulph below, and I commenced the descent

without seeing where I was to halt for the night. A goat was sacrificed

by my servants to the Goddess Kalee, and to that they attributed my

safety as well as their own. The descent was 5,000 feet to the spot

were I halted, at the head of the Nye river, one of the principal tributa-

ries of the Ravee.

On the 2lst of July, I continued my journey, following the course of

the Nye river for seven miles to the village of Loondee, below which

I crossed the river and halted at the Dhurmsala, or traveller’s house,

The next day I reached Burgaon, a large village on the left bank of the

Nye, and was much cheered with the sight of a mulberry tree; and there

I got some good wheat flour, some excellent milk, and fine honey. On

the 24th I passed through Footahun, below which the Nye and Boodhil

rivers join the Ravee, to Poolnee; and ascending the Boodhil river for

five miles I crossed it by a very respectable wooden bridge, 68 feet in

length and 98 feet above the river, with a railing, knee high, on each side,

There I saw wild grapes and mulberries just beginning to ripen—and

continuing my journey for an ascent of 1,500 feet, I reached Burmawar, sg

or Vermmawura, the ancient Capital of the Verma family of Chumba,

7,015 feet above the sea. The spot was a beautiful one; but the severity

of the winter had no doubt led to its being abandoned as a capital for

1841.] Sources of the Punjab Rivers. 109

several centuries. The tall spires of the stone temples, and the profusely

- carved wooden temples were completely shaded by cedar and walnut

trees. One Cedar was 20 feet in circumference. There were numerous

stone pillars, tradition said 84, dedicated to Siva; and a large brazen

bull, the size of life, under a wooden shed, besides several travellers’

houses. The figures in the temples were of brass and exceedingly well

executed, all bespeaking a very ancient origin. I copied three Sanscrit

inscriptions from the brazen figures, recording the names and families

of the donors.

On the 29th of July, 1 left Burmawur,and at four miles reached the

village of Khunn, opposite Tootahun, where the Nye and Boodhil rivers

join the Ravee. From thence the road descended for 1,500 feet to the

Ravee, which was rushing between steep cliffs of black clay slate; I

erossed it by a birchen rope bridge 1163 feet span and 60 feet above the

water: the points of suspension were at different heights, and the fall

of the curve in the middle was 20 feet, which made the ascent and des-

cent extremely difficult and dangerous. From the bridge, I had to

scramble amongst loose stones, and up steep banks for an ascent of 2,000

feet in a distance of two miles, when I reached Woolas, on the left bank

of the Ravee, opposite Khunn and Tootahun, at the junction of the

three rivers, which I was surprised to find was not considered holy. The

three streams were about equal in s'ze; but the Boodhil is the one held

in most esteem, as one of its sources is in the holy lake of Munnee

Muleés—its other principal source is from the Dogee Pass, on the road

from Tandee to Burmawur. The Nye River has its principal source in

the Kalee Débee Pass ; but a considerable feeder called the Raim River,

joins it from the Bugga Pass. The Ravee itself rises in Kooloo from the

Bungall Mountain, and runs in a N. W. direction to Woolas, where it

is joined by the Nye and Boodhil.

From Woolas, [ followed what is called the royal road, or that used by

the Rajahs of Chumba when they make their pilgrimages to Munna

Muhe’s. It was one day’s journey out of the way, but as it ascended the

higher spires of the mountains, I chose it for the sake of the more exten-

sive view, which I should obtain, and for the sake of the survey, which

I was making. In three days, I reached Chaitraree, where was a temple

to Sugget Débee. The figure was of brass with four arms; and on the

pedestal was an inscription, recording the donor’s name, which I copied.

On the next day, I reached Bussoo, and on the following day Mahila;

and on the 4th of August, I crossed the Ranee by a birchen rope bridge

of 169 feet long, stretching from an isolated rock onthe bank to the Cliff

—

110 Sources of the Punjab Rivers. [No. 110.

opposite, and reached Chumba, the Capital of the state of the same name.

Chumba, or Chumpapoora, the Capital of Chumba is situated on a

level peice of ground on the right bank of the Ravee, at an elevation

of 3,015 feet. There is a tradition that the river formerly covered the

Chaugaun or plain of Chumba; which is certainly correct, for the plain

is formed of large boulders of slate and granite, mingled with rich earth

above, and with coarse sand below. There are nine good temples in

Chumba; none of them, however of such beautiful workmanship as those

at Burmawar. The Rajah’s Palace is an extensive building, but it can-

not boast of any beauty. The houses are not different from those usually

seen in the hills ; and 1 was altogether much disappointed with Chumba,

Of seventeen purgunnahs, through which I passed I have a detailed

account of all the different villages, amounting to 258, containing 1,672

houses, and 8,849 inhabitants. These seventeen Purgunnahs form about

one-eighth of the whole country ; which must, therefore contain, with the

addition of 800 houses, and 7,000 inhabitants in Chumba town, 14,176

houses, and 77,792 inhabitants. The villages on the lower course of the

Ravee are however much larger than those upon the higher streams, and

I am therefore inclined to rate the population at nearly 100,000; of

whom perhaps 10,000 may be exempt from paying the house tax—the

remainder, 90,000, living in 12,500 houses, will give a revenue of 2,50,000

rupees, if taxed as usual at 20 rupees per house.

The trade through Chumba, formerly considerable, is now very little,

owing to the opening of the new route, through Jummao; Customs are,

however, collected at Bhudewar, which forms the North Western boun-

dary of Chumba, and through which merchants occasionally pass, and

merchants who come to Chumba, sometimes carry goods by the Sajh

Pass and Chutegurh to Ladakh ; but the traffic is comparatively trifling ;

and I do not therefore value the amount of Customs collected at more

than 50,000 Rs. yearly, making a total revenue of 3 lakhs of rupees, or

£30,000.

There are no natural productions exported from Chumba, save rice and

wheat to Ladakh ; and the manufactures are considerable: the principal

are thick woollens called Burmawur, manufactured in pieces eleven yards

long, and fifteen inches wide, in all the colder parts of Chumba. Some

are carried to Kooloo for sale, and I have seen a few pieces at Simla.

Coarse Alwans, or Shawl Cloths, are made in the town of Chumba from

Ladakh Wool, but they are all used inthe country.

The men wear a long sleeved white woollen cloak, fastened round the

waist with a black woollen rope; and on the head a peculiar peaked cap

1841.] Sources of the Punjab Rivers. lil

of thick white woollen; the women wear the same cloak, only black,

with a white rope round the waist; and a small scul] cap on the head

—the men’s dress is a very picturesque one.

From theRajah’s Pundit I obtained a long list of the Rajahs of Chumba,

beginning with Brahma of course, and descending through the Surajvansa

to Sumitra, after whom the list appears to be less apocryphal. The earlier

Rajahs are said to have resided in Burmawar.

On the 11th of August I quitted Chumba, crossing the Ravee immedi-

ately above the town by a birchen rope suspension bridge, of 187 feet

span ; and with much difficulty made my way to the village of Kurédh.

One of my porters in crossing the small stream, now swollen by rain, lost

his footing and was drowned. Onthe 13th I reached the summit of the

pass of Chuarhoo, 8,041 feet high, from which I saw the plains of the Pun-

jab indistinctly through the clouds. In the evening I reached the large

Village of Chuarhee, where I halted. On the following day I made a

fatiguing march of 43 miles to Jajeree, on the bank of the Chukkee River,

over several high ridges of stiff gravelly conglomerate, alternating in

strata with sandstone. Thenext day I crossed the Chukkee River with

some difficulty, by swimming. It was 200 feet across and about 5 feet

deep in the middle, and the rounded boulders at the bottom afforded no

footing whatever ; after alittle ascent and descent I came upon a large

open plain, which I crossed to Noorpoor.,

Noorpoor is a fine flourishing city, 1,924 feet in height, built upon a

narrow ridge of a sandstone rock, curving to the North; the houses are

chiefly of squared stone ; and the main street runs over the solid rock.

The city was founded upwards of two hundred years ago by the celebrated

Noor Jehan, the beautiful empress, who established a number of Kash-

merians init. In 1839 there were said to be 7,000 Kashmerians in Noor-

poor, who were chiefly employed inthe manufacture of Shawls. I saw

many of the Shawls, which were decidedly inferior to the real Kashme-

rian Shawls, this was attributed to the difficulty of getting the finest wool.

The Noorpoor shawls are however of very fair workmanship, and they are

brought in great numbers to Simla, Delhi, Lucknow, Benares, and Cal-

cutta.

On the 18thof August I left Noorpoor, and crossing the Chukkee

River, I reached Puthankot in the plains of the Punjab at an elevation of

1,205 feet above the sea. Fromthence I passed through Shujanpoor, a

good sized straggling town, and crossing the Umritsir and Lahore Canal

near its head, I reached the bank of the Ravee, which was nearly a mile

in width. The passage was made in about an hour by boat, and I halted

112 Sources of the Punjab Rivers. [No. 110.

at a large straggling town called Ruttooa, from that passing through

Heeranugur, Chungee Marhee, Mudwar Harmunder, Rarha, and Pullee,

I reached the bank of the Tohi, the Jummoo River which was rushing

along deep and red, having been swollen by heavy rain in the lower hills.

There I was detained until the evening, as no boatman even with a bribe

would venture his boat in the rapid current. At Jummoo I oceupied an

upper room in a gateway prepared for reception by Golab Singh’s

eldest son, Oodhum Singh, who was lately killed at Lahore.

The town of Jummoo is about the same size as Noorpoor, but it con-

tains fewer inhabitants, as there are no two storied houses in it. A few

Shawls are manufactured at Jummoo, but they are made to order and not

for general sale. Rajah Oodhum Singh treated me kindly enough; but

my servants were watched, and 1 was unable to procure any information

of value, I therefore quitted Junmoo as quickly as possible, and crossed

the Chenab river 10 miles below Aknoor, near where Taimoor had crossed

it. The main stream was 920 yards wide, rolling swiftly on with a

strong current. There were besides six other channels, some of them

breast deep, and all having arapid stream ; and beyond these was the

river Tohi, which, rising in the Rutun Punjall mountains, flows by

Rajaoree, and joins the Chenab above Wazeerabad. It must have been

between this river and the Chenabthat Alexander had pitched his camp

about the same season of the year; for Arrian says, ‘The flat country is

also often overflowed by rains in summer, insomuch that the River

Acesines, having at that season laid all the adjacent plains under water,

Alexander’s army was forced to decamp from its banks, and pitch their

tents at a great distance.’

The Tohi, frequently also called Toh, is, I have no doubt, the Tutapus

of Arrian, a great river, which falls into the Acesines, for the Tohi of

Rajavree runs in a direct line upwards of 80 miles, and where I crossed it

near Mumaivur, at the same season in which Alexander had seen ity it

was a great river running deep and red. It was full of quicksands, and

the passage was dangerous as well as tedious. Onthe 3rd of September

I reached Bheembur, at the foot of the mountains on the Royal Mogul

road to Kashmere.

On the 5th I proceeded to scale, what Bermier called that ‘ frightful

wall of the world,’ the ‘Adi Duk’ or first range of mountains. On the

top of the pass I saw a gibbet with two cages containing the skull of

Thums and his nephew, the chiefs of Poonch, who had for a long time

resisted the encroahments of the Jummoo family. A price was set upon

their heads by Goolab Singh, but from their known bravery noone dared

1841.] Sources of the Punjab Rivers. 113

attack them openly ; and they were at last killed, while asleep, and their

heads carried to Goolab Singh, who ordered them to be suspended on the

crest of the Bheembur pass. The next day I crossed the ‘ Kumaon

Gosha’ mountains, or ‘ sharp ridged bow,’ the 1ange being narrow at the

top and bent at each end like a bow. Thence passing through

the Serais of Noshehra, Inayutpoora, Chungez, and Muradpoor, IL

reached Rajaoree on the 8th of September. The Rajah was very atten-

tive and communicative, and I received much interesting information

from him. I also procured a history of the country, and some orders

by Aurungzebe, and Nadir Shah; besides a copy of a grant of the

Rajaoree territory, by Bahadoor Shah; since then the territory has been

seized bit by bit by the Jummoo family, until only a small circle of 20

miles diameter now remains to the present Rajah.

In the grant given by Bahadoor Shah, the revenue of Rajasore is

stated to be 77,/7,960 dams, equivalent to 27,799 Rupees, which with

the Customs collected, must have been increased to 50,000 rupees. The

territory now is about one fourth of what it was at that time, A. D. 1708,

and the Customs have nearly ceased, as the Sikhs give free passes for

all their own merchandize ; the present revenue cannot therefore be

more than 10,000 rupees, which was the sum stated to me by many res-

pectable natives.

The chief crops in Rajaoree were rice and maize; the maize invari-

ably occupies the higher grounds, and the rice fields the level alluvial

formations along the river; these were kept constantly flooded by streams

conducted along the hill sides from the neighbouring torrents. Height

of the city, 2,800 feet.

The hills between Bheembur and Rutun Punjall are all of a coarse

greyish sandstone, alternating with loose gravelly conglomerates near

Bheembur, and gradually changing into a siliceous state in the Rutun

Punjall range,—at the foot of which there are large blocks of conglo-

merate in compact masses cemented firmly together.

I left Rajaoree on the 10th of September, and after an easy march of

eight miles over a stony road, I reached Thunna;—from whence to the

crest of the Rutun Punjall the road was good, but steep. The crest

of the pass, 1 found to be 7,350 feet in height; from whence there was

a noble and extensive view, over the low hills of Rajaoree, of the distant

plains of the Punjab. From thence the descent was through a thickly

wooded forest of walnut, elm, horse chesnut, and pine trees to the bank

of the Bahramgulla river, which I crossed by a bridge, and proceeding

up one of its tributaries, I halted at Chundee-murg. Rain had fallen

heavily for some days previously, and the small stream had swept away

114 Sources af the Punjab Rivers. [No. 110.

all its bridges, so that I had some difficulty in making the numerous

crossings, which the road took. One of my goats was swept away by

the rapidity of the current. The ascent of the Peer Panjall was ex-

tremely steep, but the road was good and wide, having been repaired by

order of the Sikh Government. My thermometer gave 11,224 feet as the ©

height of the crest of Peer Punjall Pass. From thence the road was a

gradual descent for 23 miles to the Serai Aliabad, built by Ali Murdan .

Khan; height 9,812 feet. A little below Aliabad the road was narrow,

but quite safe, a parapet wall having been built on its outer edge over- —

hanging the torrent below. The place is called Lala Ghulam, after a

slave who superinten¢ed the work, and whom Ali Murdan is said to have

afterwards sacrificed and buried there. Beyond that, the road was good —

and broad, occasionally ascending and descending to an open piece of

ground, called Doojan, below which I crossed the torrent and proceeded —

along a level pathway to the Serai of Heerpoor. The next day I~

passed through Shoopyen, and crossed the Shoopyen river, reached —

Ramoo ke Serai, where I halted ; and the next day, 15th of September,

I entered Kashmere city, having been three months and two days from

Simla.

The city of Kashmere is situated on both sides of the river Behut, at —

an elevation of 5,046 feet above the sea. Iam aware that Baron Hugel —

made the height 6,300 feet, but Jacquemont calls it 5,246, and Moor- ;

croft says, that the general level of the valley is about 5,000 feet. It is :

of an irregular shape, the greater part being on the right bank of the ©

river; about one fourth of the houses are deserted ; but the city must —

still contain about 80,000 inhabitants.

state, however, that I have a list of all the villages in the valley; a

minute account of all the passes, including those which are used only

The information which I have collected regarding Kashmere is not yet —

completely arranged, so that I cannot give any general results. I may —

(

for contraband trade ; the history of the Shawl Wool from its first start- —

ing from Radakh and Khantan (or Changtang) to its arrival in Kash- —

mere, where it is spun into thread, dyed, and woven into Shawls. I have

besides ten or twelve specimens of Kashmerian songs translated into

English verse; and a very good collection of the coins of the Hindoo

Rajahs of Kashmere preceding the Mussulman conquest.

Additions made to the Geography.

T will conclude with stating the additions, which the joint travels of

Lieutenant Broome and myself have made to the Geography of the

Alpine Punjab, '

1841.] Sources of the Punjab Rivers. 115

Of the Suiluj.

1. The whole course of the Spiti river, one of the principal branches

of the Sutluj, has been surveyed by Lieut. Broome.

Of the Beeas.

2. The whole course of the Teerthun river, one of the principal feeders

of the Beeas, has been jointly surveyed as well as the Beeas river itself,

from its source to its junction of the Teerthun river, in addition to which,

the mountain course of the Chukkee river has been laid down by Lieut.

Cunningham.

Of the Ravee.

3. The whole course of the Nye river, with a portion of the Boodhil

river, and also of the upper Ravee, with the further course of the

Ravee, after the junction of the Nye and Boodhil rivers as far as Chumba,

have been surveyed by Lieutenant Cunningham,

Of the Chenab.

4. The whole course of the Bhaga river, has been surveyed by

Lieutenant Broome; the source of the Chundra by the same officer,

and the greater part of its course jointly by Lieutenants Broome and

Cunningham ; and the course of the joint stream of the Chundra Bhaga,

as far as Triloknath, by Lieutenant Cunningham. The greater part of

the course of the Tohi river, a principal feeder of the Chenab, has like-

wise been surveyed by the same officer.

Of the Thelum.

The Shoopyen river, which rises in the Peer Punjall, has been surveyed

by Lieutenant Cunningham.

Of the Indus.

The source of the Yunam Choo, or Yunam river, a large tributary of

the Indus, has been laid down by Lieutenant Broome,

(Signed) ALExanper CUNNINGHAM.

Ist Lreutenant of Engineers.

Lucknow, 8th February, 1841.

fF onbeok]

Extracts from Demi-Oficial Reports.—By Capt. Artuur Conotiy

on a Mission into Khorasan, (communicated to the Editor from the

Political Secretariat.)

The Huzarah and Eimauk Country which we traversed between

Bameean and Meimunna, consists of high unwooded mountains, covered

with grass and various shrubs and herbs which serve for spring and

Summer pasture, and winter fodder, and vallies at different elevations,

in the highest of which is grown only the naked Thibetan i and in —

the lowest barley, wheat, and millet.

The Huzarah portion is the coldest and poorest, and the natives with

difficulty eke out a living from its natural resources ; living in small

villages of low huts where they herd during the long winter season ~

under one roof with their cows and sheep, and using as fuel small —

dry shrubs and the dung of their cattle. An idea of their privations may —

be formed from the fact that the most of the people do not use salt,

There is none in their own country, and as they cannot afford the price

which would remunerate importers of this heavy article from Tartary and .

Afghanistan, they have learned to do without it. Their best bread is con- 7

sequently very tasteless to a stranger. %

But the Huzarahs are not allowed to enjoy even their limited means

of existence in peace, for the Oosbegs make occasional inroads upon —

their dwelling places, and sweep away whole villages into slavery, leav- —

ing fertile spots desolate. Their neighbours, but religious enemies, the

Eimauks, also carry off as many of them as they can, from time to time, con-

quer or kidnap, and the chiefs of their own race, steal each other's sub- |

jects in their petty wars, exporting all they can thus obtain, through

Toorkish merchants with whom they have understanding.

We found the Huzarah people unblushing beggars and thieves, but

they are mild mannered and industrious, and sigh for the protection ~

of a settled government. Were this given to them, their condition

would soon improve in every way. Their chiefs are ‘ barbarians of the

rudest stamp, without any of the barbarous virtues.’ They reside in small

mud forts, exact as much as they can from all who come within their reach,

and form occasional combinations for the defence or attack of each

other. The Eimauks differ chiefly from the Huzarahs in being of a more

nomade habit, the chiefs consult their dignity and safety, by dwelling

in mud forts, but the people reside nearly the whole year in the dry

stick and felt tents whichare used by the Toorkmans. The chiefs, like

1841.] Extracts from Demi-Official Reparts. 117

the Huzarah meers, have their feuds, which continually break them up

into parties against each other. The people are bolder than the long

oppressed Huzarahs, and will get together to attack travellers whom

they would rather only attempt to rob privately.

The Soldiers of both tribes are cavalry, mounted chiefly on small ac-

tive horses of native breed, though some ride horses imported from Toor-

kistan. Their arms are swords, and matchlocks, the last weapon furnished

with a prong for a rest. There are clans of military repute among

both people. Their strengthlies in the poorness and natural difficulty

of their country, but the last defence is I imagine greatly overrated.

Parts of the interior are described as much more steep than that which

we traversed, but this portion, which is the most important, as being

on the high road to Herat, is by no means so inaccessible as it has been

represented.

Neither among Huzarahs or Kimauks is money current, and sheep form

the prime standard of barter with the traders who come among them from

Afghanistan, and Tartary. These Merchants establish a friendly under-

standing with chiefs of different districts, to whose forts they repair and

open shop, giving their hosts 25 yards of Kerbus, or coarse narrow cotton

cloth, for the value of each sheep received in barter ; and being furnished

till their bargains are concluded, with straw for their beasts, and

generally bread for themselves and their people. Traders from Herat,

Candahar and Cabul bring their checked turbans, coarse cotton cloths

and chintzes, tobacco, felt, and carpet dyes, iron spades, and plough ends,

molasses and afew raisins. Toorkish Merchants bring similar articles

from their own country, with a little rice, cotton, and salt, occasionally

horses, which they prefer to exchange for slaves.

The articles which the Huzurahs and Kimauks bring to market, are men

and women, small black oxen, cows, and sheep, clarified butter, some

woven wollens for clothing, gram sacks and carpet bags, felts for

horse clothing, and patterned carpets, all made from the produce of their

flocks, for they export no raw wool. They also furnish lead and sulphur,

and the EKimauks especially speak of copper and silver minesas existing

in their mountains, but they do not work them.

Agha Hoossein,a Native of Herat, who had long traded among the

the Huzarah, and Eimauk clans, occupying our route between Bameean

and the border of Meimunna, negotiated our passage with a safe guard

the whole way for 1,200 Rupees, and we marched with him from Bameean

on the 23rd September 1840, escorted by 80 Huzarahs under a son of

Meer Sadik Beg, a leading chief in the district of Deb Nangre. Our road

118 Extracts from Demi-O ficial Reports. [No. 110.

took us in 3 marches over spurs from the main ridge of Hindoo Koosh

(Koh-I-Baba) to the fertile and well inhabited valley of Yaikobung,

which has the breadth of from 4 to 3a mile, in a length of 15 miles, and is

well watered by a clezn trout stream from the famed ‘ Bendemir,’ which

ffows on to Bulkh.

We slept the first might in the cold damp valley of Shebbertoo, which,

according to the boiling point of a Thermometer,is about 10,500 feet above

the level of the sea. The mercury at sunset stood at 37°; in the course

of the next 2 of an hour it fell to freezing point,in fact before sun rise next

morning it was down at 10°. The residents say that they have 5 months

winter, which commences late, but is every rigorous, and the deep snow

which falls, is not all off the ground two months after the vernal equinox.

The rest of the march brought us to the valley of Fuor Behar, about 2,100

feet lower than Shebbertoo, where the barley crop was not all ripe.

and the Thermometer showed about 11 degrees difference of temperature.

The third took us 8 miles down the valley of Yaikobung, 1,100 feet still

lower, where the people had just got in their crops of fine wheat.

The present chief of Yaikobung is Meer Mohib, a vulgar and coarse

man. He put Shah Shoojah’s letter to his head, and came to pay his

respects tous as the bearers of it, when we gave him a suitable pre-

sent. Having taken leave, he sent to beg for my furred cloak, and on

my giving his messenger a note which would procure him one from

Bameean, he sent to say that he must have my girdle shawl and 1,000

rupees, and he would permit us to depart. We were too many to be

thus bullied here, therefore replying that the Meer seemed to ‘misun-

derstand our condition, we marched away at once without his daring

to interrupt us.

West of Yaikobung, the main ridge of Hindoo Koosh sweeps round

to the northward, after which turning westward again, it forms the

northern boundary of the hills which slope down to the right side of

the Heriroad valley. Our fourth march took us by a very steep defile

across this ridge, from the base of which we descended through a deep

valley, about 5 miles westward, to the fountain head of the Heriroad a

clear pool of gently bubbling springs, where the boiling point shewed

an elevation of 9,500 feet, 1,100 higher than the bed of the stream “ee

ing northward from Yaikobung.

We followed the course of the Herat river, in its clear, quick wan-

derings through different breaks of the limestone valley, which forms its

bed, for four marches, the first taking us to the head quarters of Meer

Sadik Beg in Dab Yungee. This chief, who is a vulgar but well

1841.] Extracts from Demi-Offcial Reports. 119

disposed man, treated us very hospitably, neither he or his sons read

the Shah’s letter, but having heard it perused, he stuck it in the top of

his turban, and declared that he was His Majesty’s servant to do any

thing that lay within his limited ability. We remarked that the chief

service His Majesty required from the Huzarah Meer was to keep

their people loyally quiet, to which Sadik Beg replied, that he should be

truly glad to be quiet, both on the king’s and his own account, if some

of his Huzarah neighbours and Kimauks, would only let him.

We expected to have found awaiting us near this post the Eimauk

escort which our guide had engaged from Mahomed Areem Beg, the

Atalik of the Feroozkohee clan; -but we found that in the interim the

Atalik had been persuaded to march with an Himauk Army against

Hussun Sirdar, a powerful chief of the Dah Koondie Huzarahs, and

that we must in prudence await instructions from him, or an end of

the war. This Sadik Beg said would not last long, as the Kimauks

had gone in such numbers, that they would not keep the field for the

want of provisions, and the danger he most feared for us, was, our meet-

ing some of these returning troops ere we gotthe Ataliks safeguard.

Our guide therefore went off to the head quarters of the latter chief

and finding there one of his sons, persuaded him to come to our

camp. The young Eimauk chief arrived at night, and nothing

would induce him to go beyond my Meerzas tent.

The Huzarahs, he said, were his sworn enemies, and were capable

of any atrocity, why should he put himself within their reach in the

dark. Next morning he went up to the fact on Sadik Beg send.

ing him a solemn oath of friendship, and they presently came in a

cordial manner together to consult with us about the onward march.

The son of the Atalik said that he would give an answer in his fa-

ther’s name to any Eimauks who might come across our road, and as

he appeared to be an unvapouring person, he resolved to proceed with him

at once. Sadik Beg accompanied us one march witha large body of

horse, as he had heard that a party of Huzarahs, from another near

Chiefship, had marched to intercept us, turning back at the end of his

district, between which and the EKimauk border a few miles of the valley

are left waste. Our reported enemy, the Chief of Sal, met us here with

100 horse, and said that he had ridden to our assistance, on the intelli-

gence that Hussan Khan of the Tymunnee Eimauks had occupied the

road ahead, with the intention of plundering us. We understood this

to be a demand for a present, so adding to our thanks a Cashmere

{

‘

120 Extracts from Demi-Official Reports. [No. 110.

shawl, we marched on, receiving from our way side acquaintance a parting

caution to put no trust in any Eimauk.

We safely concluded this day’s march of 12 miles, which brought us

among a quite different people. In point of personal appearance the

advantage was certainly on the side of the Eimauks, who though living

closely after the nomade fashion of Toorkmans and Oosbegs, have

the features rather of Darians then Tartars. The Feroorcokehs indeed

claim descent from a Colony, which was exported from Feroorkoh,

in the Persian province of Mazenderan. We encamped upon the right

bank of the Henrood, among people of this clan, half a mile off on

the other side of the river was the fort of Dowlut Yar, surrounded by

villages of Tymunnee tents, to which we learned that Hussan Khan

had returned the day before, apparently without having entertained any

idea of barring our road.

The war, we learned, was ended. It had its origin inan act of vio-

lence committed 9 years before upon the very Agha Hossein attending us

as guide, then travelling with a stock of goods from Herat to Cabool, who

was plundered by the former chief of Dowlut Yar, for preferring the

quarters of our host the Ferozkohee Atalik. The latter Chief not being

able with his domestic means to force a restitution of the goods taken

from his protégé, allowed Agha Hossein to call upon his Huzarah friends

for succour, and the leading chief of Deh Koondee, Hussan Sirdar,

glad to indulge a national dislike while defending a commercial pri-

vilege which it concerned every Chief, whether Eimauk or Hazarah, to

uphold, came with sucha large force that he took the lead in the opera-

tions against Dowlut Yar, having captured and utterly rased the

fort; after killing its Chief and his eldest son, he gave the old man’s,

wife to his own brother, and took his daughter to himself, returning

home only, when he had captured another fort nearer the border, and

placed a party of his own men therein. Agha Hossein got all his goods

that could be recovered, and so retired. But now the Atulik regretted

the loss of Kimauk reputation to which he had been accessory, so he

countenanced a stratagem by which the border fort was recaptured, and

having helped to rebuild that of Doulut Yar, brought back the old chief’s

second son, the presént Hussan Khan, to inherit it. The latter had just

before our coming persuaded most of the Eimauk Chiefs, including his fa-

ther’s first adversary the Atalik, to make on attack upon Hussan Sirdar of

Deh Koondee, for the cleansing of their national reputation. The quarrel

was accommodated in a way to make the Eimauks appear superior, by the

1841.] Extracts from Demi-Official Reports. . 121

Deh Koondee Sirdar’s restoring the arms which he had taken from Hussan

Khan’s father and engaging to give 2 or 3 daughters to the heir and his

relatives, to close the blood account.

Agha Hossein our guide, who thought it well to remove all ill blood

from Hussan Khan’s heart for the excusable share that he had in the past

disasters, went to Dowlut Yar, with a koran, on which he declared before

witnesses that he absolved. the chief from. all obligations to repair his-

former losses, and called upon him to say in the same solemn way that by-

gones should be bygones. The Chief consented, and accepted a present

which we sent witha letter to his address from Shah Shoojah, but his

manner on both occasions was so sullen that our guide resolved to give

him the least possible opportunity of doing us an injury.

The Atalik arrived in our camp next morning, and speaking with con-.

fidence about our road forward, sent us on with a small escort under his

brother and son, while he went to get back from Hussan Khan a horse

stolen from our pickets which had been traced to Dowlut Yar. When

we had got 2 miles down the valley we were met by 60 horsemen, who.

called out to-us to.stop and pay zucat.. The Atalik’s. brother riding a head,

and explaining that we were envoys.on the King’s affairs, and not traders,

our waylayer replied that we had paid our way to others, and why not to

him. ‘ They are guests of the Atalik’ exclaimed his brother, ‘and ‘by God

and the Prophet they shall not give a needle or-a Chillum of tobacco.’

‘Then by God and the Prophet we will take it’, rejoined the robber; where-

upon he ranged some of his men in line to face us-and caused others to

dismount upon.a rock behind and to set their guns in rest. We lost no

time in getting ready for defence, but the Atalik’s brother riding out

between our fronts, called a parley, and drew a line which neither party

was to pass till peace or war had been decided on. Three quarters of an.

hour was consumed in debate, which was thrice broken by demonstration of’

attack and by the end of this time 30 or 40 men of the same tribe had col-.

Jected on foot from a rear encampment,with the evident intention of making:

arush at our baggage in the event of our becoming engaged in front,

We had despatched several messengers to bring up our host, and just:

at the affair had assumed its worst look, a. cry was raised that he was

coming. Looking back, we could see horsemen pouring out like bees,

from the tents surrounding Dowlut Yar, and all hastening in our

direction, but while our Eimauk escort exclaimed that the Atalik was

coming in force to the rescue, our opponents cried out in scorn that

Hussan Khan was coming to help them to plunder us, and each party,.

122 Extracts from Demi-Official Reports. [No. 110.

raised a shout for the supposed reinforcement. After about 10 minutes —

of the most intense anxiety during which we and our opponents, as if. ;

by mutual agreement, waited to see whose conjecture was right, we were —

relieved by the arrival of the Atalik, who galloping up ahead to us at —

the utmost speed, exclaimed that he had brought Hussan Khan to our .

defence. The announced ally was not long in following with 300 men, —

and our enemies were made to understand that they must abandon ~

all idea of attacking us. Hussan Khan declaring that we were envoy’s

recommended to him by the Shah whose slave he was, and that he would

allow no one to molest us. It seemed pretty clear that the Atalik had

wrought this loyal zeal in Hussan Khan’s mind, and probably, from the

delay which had occurred, that he had not found the task easy ; but ’twas

not a time to scrutinize very particularly the motives which had brought us

a defender, so we gave Hussan Khan the politest credit for his professions,

and at evening sent hima handsome shawl from the Atalik’s fort, witha

promise that we would not fail to represent his conduct to the Shah.

We arrived that evening without further adventure, at Badgah in ~

Cheghehezan, a fort in the Herirood valley which is the family seat of —

the Feroozkohee Atalik, and we shewed our appreciation of the ser- —

vice which this chief had rendered us by giving a very handsome present

to him, besides gifts according to their degrees to his brother and other —

relations. 5 Oi

We were detained 4 days at Badgah, first in consequence of the Atalik’s

indisposition, and then in order to get rid of a neighbouring chief con-

nected with him, Kurar Beg of Surusghar, who threatened to attack us —

in our very camp near the Atalik’s fort unless we paid him black mail, —

his right to demand this, he said, lying simply in his power to enforce

its payment. After causing us several alarms, Kurar Beg listened to the

remonstrances of the Atalik, the aid of our host being necessary to

protect him from another more powerful chief whose son he had mur-

dered in his own house, and he came to pay usa visit, attended by 200

followers.

We now left the Herirood valley, ascending 3 miles through the hills

onits northern side to a ridge running parallel with it, and proceeding 8

miles further to the northward over an undulating down to the summit

of the main ridge of Hindoo Koosh, which we crossed by the easy pass of

Shategh iGhilmee. It is not higher to the eye. than the ridge first

noted, and there are higher looking masses to the northward, but our

guides said that it rose again both east and westward, and their defini-

1841.) Extracts from Demi-Official Reports. 123

tion need not be disputed, for the springs on oneside of this trunk

flow to the Herirood, and on the other towards Tartary. We descended

from it to a deep and rapid brook called the Tungan; which led us 4

miles down with the cultivated valley of Ghilmce to the mouth ofa deep

and close pass called the Derah i Khurgoosh, or the Hare’s defile, where

the boiling point shewed an elevation of 5,200 feet, about 400 feet lower

than our last station in the valley ef the Herirood.

Friday 9th October. Quitting camp at 9, 15, we followed the brook

Tungan into the Hare’s defile, commanding the road at the second of

3angles. In the first 500 yards, was a brick wall with holes built up

like a screen upon a not easily attainable portion of the rock, which we

were told was anciently erected to help the collection of transit duty.

We next went 13-1 miles between bare perpendicular mountains of lime-

stone, the defile running in acute zigzags which for the most part were

not more than 50 or 60 yards long, and having but breadth enough for a

path, and for the brook which we were continually obliged to cross.

Burnes, I see, states that after crossing the Dundan Shikan, he travelled on

northward to Khoollum between frequently precipitous rocks which rose

on either side to the height of 300 feet and obscured all stars at

night, except those of the zenith. I am afraid of exaggerating the

height of the cliffs between which our road here lay by guessing

at their height in feet, so will only say that their precipitous elevation

made our horsemen look like pigmies as they filed along their bases

in the bed. After this very narrow portion, the defile widened to the

breadth of 50 yards, but it presently contracted again to that of thirty,

which may be stated as the average width of its onward windings for

nearly 5 miles, where the Tungan discharged itself into the river Moor-

ghaub, which came from the east, ina bed of good width, through a simi-

lar deep pass. After creeping along the bottom of the defile for the

first 23 hours of our march, we ascended some way up the side of the

left mountain, and followed the bends for the next hour and a quarter

by a narrow path worn uponits slightly sloping edge, a tangled thicket ©

now occupying all the spare bed of the stream, to which we descended

again 4 mile before its junction with the Moorghaub. The Tungan is

a deep brook before its entrance into the Hare’s defile. In spring, what

with the increase of its waters from melted snow, and and their coms

pression between the sharp turnings of the narrow defile, there is no

passage from side to side, except such as is afforded for a footman by

means of a spear laid across its rocky banks. The distances noted

afford a very imperfect description of the quantity of ground that must

124 Extracts from Demi-Official Reports. [No. 110. ;

‘be traversed by a traveller through this defile. An idea of its windings

may be formed from the facts, that our baggage ponies were nearly 4

hours creeping along a distance for which my observations afford a direct

line of 6} miles, and that the portion of our road which lay in the bed,

‘crossed the stream 34 times. q

What is called the Derah i Khurgoosh ends at the junction of the

Tungan with the Moorghaub, but the narrowness and difficulty of the pass

continues for a mile further down the left bank of the latterstream, —

which we forded where the water was up to our ponies’ shoulders, run-

ning at the rate of, I should imagine, 34 miles per hour. A steep road, —

which laden ponies take, ascended a little above the entrance of Derah ©

i Khurgoosh, which comes down again just below the junction of the —

two streams,

Afterward the pass opens out into a warm litte valley of 250 yards —

width, called Taitak, or under the mountain, at the end of which we

halted near some Eimauk tents, Hence we turned off northerly from ©

the Moorghaub, and ascending by a moderate steep pass to the top —

of the hills enclosing its right side, proceeded on a gentle rise over

an undulating surface that gained to a small grassy vale lying at ‘

the foot of a higher pass. Here we had an unpleasant scene with

the greedy relatives of the Atalik accompanying us, who announcing —

their intention to take leave, demanded presents extravagantly above any —

claims that they could prefer for reward, and by their united clamour —

hindered all endeavours to moderate their claims made by our host,

to whom alone were we strictly bound to give any thing. After I had —

gone out of the way to satisfy these beggars, they went off as if they —

were the party robbed, and I have no doubt that they incited the attack ’

which was made upon us the next day. ;

October 11th. Quitting camp at 10, we ascended } mile up a rocky

pass to the spring head of Misree, which waters a small grassy level in the

enclosure of the pass where we found an EKimauk encampment. The pass

‘upward from this little platform was steepish, though on an equal ascent, _

and the path was tiring, lying over small loose fragments of slaty lime- —

stone which had fallen from the shelving bases of the decomposed cliffs on —

eachside. The defile above the spring gradually narrowed in an ascent of 4

about 13-3 miles, which our loaden ponies were 40 minutes accomplishing, —

toa point at which the steep rocks, enclosing it almost met, leaving a short y

passage through which 3 horsemen could ride abreast. Our foremost. b

riders had nearly reached this point when a number of armed men

rising with shouts from their ambuscade above it and on either side

1841.] Extracts from Demi-Official Reports. 125

of us, began with one accord to pelt stones at us and to fire their guns,

those who were on our flanks also loosennig pieces of rock which came

bounding down the shingle bank with force enough to bear away any

thing occupying the path. Fortunately the cafila was far enough be-

hind to avoid the first of the attack, and we retreated to an open part of

the pass, where, making ourselves masters of the shelving bank on each

side, we entered into negotiation with our assailants ahead. After much

time had been lost in parley, our aggressors agreed to take a few pieces

of chintz and 40 rupees (as we had no more goods) and invited us to

advance, but we had scarcely reached the old point, when our envoy sent

with the cloths and cash agreed to, came running down to us stripped and

beaten; andthe attack upon us was renewed. Our skirmishers having kept

the shelving flanks, we had not to retreat far, and having briefly con-

sulted on turning again, we decided that there was nothing for it but to

force our way, so advancing with our best musquet men on foot, while

those left with the cafila followed in close order, firing over our heads

at the cliffs above, we in less than 10 minutes made ourselves masters of

the narrow passage, from which our enemies retreated over the hills.

Some of our men and horses were severely bruised by the stones which

were raised upon us during this push, but 20 boxes were broken, and the

only gun shot wound that could be found was in the cloak of one of my

Hindoostanee servants. I am happy to believe that none of our

cowardly enemies were killed or seriously wounded, for we found no

dead men on the rocks taken, and they retreated too fast to carry off any

who were much disabled. "

We were 40 minutes more ascending to the summit of the pass, but

the defile was comparatively open above the narrow passage, the rocks

On each side being low and rounded. We here took leave of the Atalik

who had come after us on hearing that we were attacked. I believe him

to be about the best man in his country.

We rested at evening in the small valley of Hushtumee, where we

found officers collecting the tax of one sheep in forty for the Walee of

Meimunna. Our next two marches were over the mountains of the

Hindoo Koosh, from which we made a steep descent, leaving the mouth

of the defile by which they are entered nearly 6 miles S. E. of Meimunna,

to which we proceeded through a fertile valley bounded by low and round

earthy hills, the stream which we had followed from the foot of the

mountains irrigating countless vineyards and gardens, the walls and trees

of which concealed the town till we were inside it.

126 Extracts fron Demi-Official Reports. [No. 110,

Somes miles before reaching Meimunna we observed a sign that we were

approaching a slave mart, for an old man who rode out from a small en-

campment to offer his horse tous for sale, said that he would take a

young male slave and a pony for it. We told him that we were

not men sellers, and asked him if he was not ashamed to deal in the

Khulk’Oollah. (God’s Creatures.) He replied that he could only do

as every body round him did, but that he did not require the actual

slave, only the value of one, shewing that men are herea standard of

barter as sheep are among the Huzarahs. MHerattees, this old broker

said, were comparatively speaking a drug in the market, owing to the

quantity that the vuzeer of that city had exported. Huzarahs were so so,

and the only captives that would now fetch a good price, were the young

men and girls of Roum and (zlleg. an MS. ) or other real Kuzzilbashees.

Mirrab Khan was out upon his annual battu when we arrived, but

his brother gave us excellent lodging, where our people and horses

were daily provided with every thing that could be desired. The Walee

returned on the 4th day of our detention, and courteously visited us the next

morning, when after presenting to him Shah Shoojah’s letter and a dress

of honor, I quite won his heart by giving him a double barrelled percussion

gun, he being passionately addicted to field sports. Wewent the next

day to return his visit, and the following is my note of the interview.

Mirrab Khan bade us frankly welcome, and ordered in breakfast of

bread, fruit and salted cream tea, of which we partook together, our

servants carrying off parcels of fine green tea imported from Yarkund,

and large loaves of Russian refined sugar, which were set before us

upon large platters of dried fruits, as the host’s offering.

I] could not obtain certain accounts of Mirrab Khan’s revenue, for he

keeps no regular dufter. My Meerza witnessed this irregularity for years,

and used to remonstrate with Mirrab Khan about it, when the chief

would reply that it was not the Oosbeg way to take particular account

of what came and went, asaying confirmed by report of the laxity,

which prevails in the financial department of Khiva, and even in that

of the more formally organized government of Bokhara. Mirrab Khan

expected to be furnished with means for all his expenses by his Dewan

Beggee, who was able to do this without murmuring, after getting in’

half of the Walee’s due from the inferior officers, through whore hands

it came. I have roughly calculated the Walee’s annual expenses at 10,000

tillas, or 80,000 Caubul rupees, which supposing my preceding conjec-

ture right, would give him a fair revenue of a lakh, and a half of

1841.] Extracts fron Demi-Official Reports. 127

rupees, but this might be increased very greatly, ifany thing like system

were introduced into his government. It is said at Meimunna that

Ahmud Shah imposed a tax of one toman upon each of 360 ploughs, be-

longing to as many villages in this district, then registered under Au-

milders, for the support of Hajee Khan’s Mehman Khanah. Those

ploughs were understood to be used for the cultivation of lands watered

by natural streams, (there are no kuhreezes in this country), and some-

thing more than 3 times their produce was said to be raised from

Daimee land or soil watered by the heavens. If we allow 15 khurwars

for the crop of one plough, we have 5,400 khurwars for the stream

lands; 3 times this for the rain crops would be 17,200 khurwars and the

total 22,600 Ditto. The country is certainly now better populated and

cultivated then it was at the beginning of the Doorannee monarchy, so

a guess may be made at the least amount of its agricultural produce, but

I cannot pretend to determine this. Much again is exported from this pro-

vince to the Eimauks and Huzarahs, and, latterly, to Herat. In cheap

times a khurwar, or 100 muns, of wheat is sold for a ducat; we only geta

third of this quantity for the same money.

We made 5 marches to the southward of west, via Alma, Keisu and

Charshumbel from Meimunna tothe rise of the Moorghaub encamping on

its bank at the fort of Karoul Khaneh’s a few miles below the fort of Bala

Moorghaub which we did not see. In view upon our left during these 5

marches was the northermost ridge of the Hindoo Koosh mountains from

which we descended behind Meimunna. Our road lay upon easy rises and

_ falls through hills of a light clayey soil, enclosing many well watered

vallies and glens, in which is cultivated wheat, barley, millet, sesame, flax

and cotton ; vineyards and gardens flourish about the villages at the chief og

which brisk little fairs are held twice a week for the convenience of the

country round. It isa fruitful country which only requires more inhabi-

tants, and I learn that the districts on towards Herat, as well as those under

the mountains eastward of Meimunna, are of similar character.

We found our road to Karoul Khazeh safe, but vigilantly watched by

patrolling parties detached by the Walee of Meimunna, the Jemsheiddee

tribe, and the Soonnee Huzarahs of Killah. Several cofilas passed us,

going to Bokhara with merchandize, or to Meimunna for grain, and we met

single Toorkmauns riding horses to Meimunna which they designed to

exchange there for slaves. Onthe 4th March, when we had passed the

ruined fort of Kaornach, anciently the Jemsheeddee border mark, we

were met by a young chief of the latter tribe, who thinking that our in

fluence might avail him at Herat, complained that he had been driven

128 Extracts from Demi-Official Reports.. [No. 110.

from his home by Mahommud Zeman Khan, his more powerful rival of

the same clan, who on sending a party of those who had followed him,

-to cultivate land near Nerochok had fairly seized their crops, driven off

their cattle and sold 25 persons tothe Toorkmauns.. This confirmed the

statement which we had heard at Meimunna, and which we soon ceased

to doubt that the Soonnee religion is no longer a safeguard aguainst cap-

tivity. Every defenceless person who can be used for labor is carried:

off to the insatiable markets of Tartary. We-were followed by a small

cafila of slaves from Meimunna consisting of Sheah Huzarahs and Soon-

nee Eimauks, of all ages fiom 5. to 30.

We forded the Moorghaub at Karoul Khaneh, and our onward march.

lay along or near its left bank for 8 marches to Merve. The first took

us past the rather imposing, but desolate mud fort and citadel of Meroc-

hak. Many mud pillars, which were formerly used by watchers of

_ crops, yet stand among the weedy bushes that have overrun the chief

portion of this now deserted valley, and the land retains many traces of

the industry with which it used to be irrigated. In parts high weeds.

have sprung up thickly where flood water from the Moorghaub has been

allowed to settle, and its stagnaiion in those marshes is doubtless the

chief cause of the malaria which makes this district uninhabitable during

the heat of summer. The next wide break of the Moorghaub valley

below abroad belt of low dry hills which bound Merochak, forms the

head of the division called Punjdeh extending 20 miles down to a point

where the stream of Kooshk joins the/Moorghaub, which although it con-

tains weedy vegetation in standing water on one side, is well inhabited

by Tookmauns, who are evidently in a flourishing condition. They

breed many horses which they profitably export ; and they find pasture:

for large flocks of sheep, and herds of camels in their range of the valley

parts of which they cultivate with jewaree wheat and barley.

These Toorkmauns area colony of the Ersauree tribe from the banks.

of the Oxus, divided into 4 clans, called Oolle Zuppeh, Kureh Shughsee,

and Chunghee which they estimate in round numbers at 500 tents each.

At Punjdeh we laid in 5 days’ dry provisions for ourselves and horses,

there being no encampments upon our road or along the Moorghaub to

Yellatoon. The right of the valley, which the river favors, is for nearly all

through bounded by a well defined line of low hills. The left, near which

our road lay, was sided by hillocks and undulations than positive hills. On —

the 24 March we first observed sand lying upon the hillas if drifted by

northerly winds from the desert, and athird of our-onward way lay,

over loose beds of sand that covered portions of the hard white clay soil,

1841.] Despatch from Lieut. H. Bigge. 129

which forms the proper surface of the country as far as Merve. The bank

of the Moorghaub upon which we halted each night, was thickly fringed

with Tamarisk bushes. The water of the river was very muddy, flowing

ly with eddies at the rate of one anda quarter mile per hour, and having

many dangerous quicksands. We very nearly lost a man who rode his

horses a little way in todrink. Though we met no tents we saw vast flocks

of sheep which are sent thus far from Merve to pasture with a few shep-

herds and dogs. Wecarried chopped straw upon our horses, being ac-

customed to it, but there was no want of grass on the way for the native

horses of our fellow travellers who had not gone to this expense. The

road is by no means difficult abounding as it does in grass, wood and water,

and it was evidently well travelled formerly.

Our third march brought us to a very fine caravansary of burned

bricks, containing accommodation for many men and beasts, which is ;

attributed to Abdoolah Khan of Bokhara a philanthropist who has the

credit of all good works in these countries, as Alle Merdun Khan does in

Affghanistan. Close to it is a mausoleum sacred to the memory of some

Imaum forgotten.

Despatch from Lieut. H. Bigge, Assistant Agent, detached to the

Naga Hills, to Capt. Jenkins, Agent Governor General, N.E.

Frontier, communicated from ihe Political Secretariat of India to

the Secretary to the Asiatic Society.

I have the honor to report my arrival at this Post, (Demalpore) where

I am happy to state large supplies of grain, &c. &c., are now daily

arriving for the use of the troops about toaccompany me to the Naga

hills.

Having been prevented, from the total want of population on the road

between Rangalao Ghur and Kasirangah, of Mehal Morung, from pass-

ing up that line of country, I crossed to the north bank of the Burram-

pooter at Bishnath, and passing through the villages of Baghmaree,

Rangsalli, Goopore, and Kolah Barri inthe Luckimpore district, crossed

the Maguli Island to Dehingeahgong, and so through Deergong to Ca-

charri Hath, where I fell in with the detachment of the Assam Lt. Inf.

which Captain Hannay had sent off, to await my orders at Nogorah.

From Cacharri Hath I passed to the Dhunseri river at Golah ghaut,

where I was glad to find that the greatest portion of the supplies of

rice, &c. dispatched by me from Nogong, had all arrived safely, and

130 Despatch from Lieut. H. Bigge. [No. 110.

that a large portion had been sent forward; the remainder was speedily

transferred to smaller boats, and is now close at hand, having been brought

by water toa small river called Daopani, one march on this side Hir

Pathor, (Bor Phalong of Captain Pemberton’s maps) and from whence a

path through the forests had been previously cleared to the nearest point

to this.

From a demi-official letter, received at Golah ghaut from Captain Han-

nay, I was led to believe that large supplies had been collected for the

use of his detachment at Nagorah, but in this there must have been some

mistake, as the Jemadar in command informs me, that, but very little rice

has been collected, and not much more may be expected at present.

Never having previously relied on any other arrangements than those

I made when at Nogong, but little, if any delay will result from this

‘circumstance ; and the detachtaent was ordered to leave Nagorah on the

Ist instant at latest, and will, probably, should the keavy rains we have

had not detain them, arrive here on the 5th or 6th instant.

IT remained 3 or 4 days at Golah ghaut, superintending my arrangements,

and was present at a sort of fair, held there, on the arrival of a fleet of

boats, laden with cotton from the Lotah Nagah Hills on the Dogong river,

which falls into the Dhunsini a short way above ; about 70 of the Nagas

came down, with twoof their sykeats, many of them understanding the

Assamese language, and were engaged the whole day in bartering their

cotton, for salt, dried fish, dogs, fowls, and ducks, with a few brass tings,

of which they seem very fond, suspending them one below the other from

holes bored in the ear.

The general average of prices was about

G Seer or maltese... lee te ese » 4 to 5of Cotton.

7 Dog Se. 2%. bjs Fea ae 5b Selene Se aes (they eat this animal.)

a Mowlor Wels sect ces co ons 13 to 2.

On visiting their camp a little above the ghaut, I found several of them

lying on the ground, intoxicated from the effects of a most disgusting sort

of spirituous liquor they make from rice, and which they drink hot; they

are avery sullen race, and it was with some diffculty I could get any re-

plies to the few questions I asked them.

Regarding the madder, with which the hair on their spears was dyed,

I tried a long time to gain scme correct information, but in vain, the

Sykeah told me, they had none in their own hiils, but what they used was

brought to them by the 4dor Nagas, a tribe I have not yet heard of,

but believe it will be found to mean the Amgamees, of whom they

seemed to stand much in dread, and from whom they said they received

1841.] Despatch from Lieut. H, Bigge. 13]

a large portion of the cotton, they brought down for sale, acting, it

would appear from this, more as merchants\than the actual growers.

The country of these Abors, they descr as being due south from

their hills, but they said distant 2 months’ journey, an obvious error, as

such a distance would take them far to the south of Munnipore. As the

name of this tribe was also made use of by the Rengmah Nagas (inha-

biting the hill between those of the makers of Nagong and the Dhunsiri)

T may hereafter be able perhaps to make myself better acquainted with

their position, though this tribe also seem to fear them fully as much as

the Lotahs.

In appearance, the Lotah Nagas are of a short, though stout build, and

some of them by no means ill-locking; they wear no more clothing

than their brethren of other parts, and are alike filthy in their persons

and habits, and have a pompous mode of addressing one, which might in

some cases be interpreted as insolent. I shewed them some clasp knives,

T took down with me for the purpose, at which they laughed, and sneer:

ingly remarked, ‘ of what use were they ? Naga requires only a dhan,

and his spears ; such things are of no use or value tous:’ before quitting

this race, I may as well observe that they carry away about 12 or 1,300

maunds of salt annually, in exchange for cotton, so that their trade may

be deemed equal to near 10,000 mds. of cotton in all.

There are several merchants, chiefly Kyahs, from Marwar, established

at Golah ghaut, besides Musselmans from Goalpara, but so little trade is

there for any thing besides cotton, that I was unable to procurea brass

pot of any sort ; woollens and every other descriptions of cloth are alike

unsought for, their stock in trade being composed entirely of salt.

A large quantity of iron being found and manufactured in the neigh-

borhood of Golah ghaut, the Nagas obtain their dhans chiefly from hence,

the price of which appeared to me very high, being 4 as. each, and the

iron fetching as muchas 8 Rs. per maund, unwrought; the quantity an-

nually manufactured, I was unable to ascertain.

Leaving Golah ghaut in company with Mr. Herring who had joined me

from Bishnath, by appointment, we passed through a long belt of dense

forest to the Nambur Nuddie, about 10 miles, for the purpose of visiting

together the salt springs, and lime stone rocks, which are found on its.

banks. The camp was formed for the night ona small sand bank, round

which the riverran, and in the centre of which was the salt spring, or,

called by the natives, on account of the heat, the Jucung poong or hot:

springs,

132 Despatch from Lieut. H. ~Bigge. [No. 110.

The water from this spring is beautifully clear, and of a temperature

of 11039 in the well, to 113° in the sand, as determined by most accurate

observation, from a first rate thermometer obtained from London, for

such purposes :—this wasat 3h. 33m. p. m., the temperature of the air being

595° at the time, repeating the observations the next morning at 7. A.M,

when the atmosphere was at 43°. I found no difference in the temperature

of the water.

The water when drank appeared to me to contain but very little salt, and

flavored rather of sulphur than any thingelse; the spring is a very abun-

dant one, and would nearly suffice to turna water wheel, but is so little

elevated above the level rain, that arise of only two feet would be suf-

ficient to swamp it, while from the water marks on the trees, it was ob-

vious that the whole was submerged in the rains from 7 to 8 feet.

The neighbourhood of the spring was every where trodden down by ele-

phants, buffaloes, deer, &c. which animals resort there in great numbers

to drink the waters, through my own elephant, ponies, &c. refused to

taste it; in the centre of the spring there isa depth of about 1 foot of wa-

ter, below which the feet or hand might easily be passed through a thin

bed of sand, composed entirely of quartz to a bed of large pebbles ofa

similar nature, and it was resting the thermometer on the latter bed that

the greatest heat 1133° was obtained.

This spring is situated about 14 or 32 of amile from the Dhunsiri, but

in spite of this, I fear the returns would not be worth any persons while

establishing a manufactory of salt, as he must Jeave the place in May, and

could not expect to return till November, which would be the earliest date

at which these forests could become habitable after the rains.

I boiled a large quantity of water, about 2 gallons, till it was reduced to

2 of a quart, which was afterwards evaporated at Bor Pathor, but not

more than a tea-spoon full of salt was obtained, a very poor return,

I should suppose, though the salt was to the taste extremely good.

The morning after I reached this spring, as the distance to Bor Pathor,

was but short, Mr. Herring and myself proceeded through the forest,

along the banks of the Nambur Nuddie, to visit the other springs, and

also the limestone beds, distant by the watch 12 hours, in a S. W. direc-

tion. A short way below the springs, in a small stream, running from

them, on which the water was pleasantly warm. Mr. Herring’s dis-

covered some trees, which struck us both as being tea, though I am un-

certain as to the fact, but have sent specimens of the leaves, flowers,

and fruits, through Capt. Vetch, to be examined by Dr. Arnott and “Mr.

1841] Despatch from Lieut. H. Bigge. 133

Watkins, as in the event of their proving genuine, would greatly enhance

the value of the springs and quarries.

The salt springs which are 3 in number are situated 250 yards to the

north of the Nambur Nuddie, in a small circular space, surrounded by

forest, but are neither so hot or apparently so strong of brine as that

we first saw. The temperature being as follows.

Mm onechanes +... se ckatee BE ey oe 64° air.

15 RESO Cn A Re ar ae ag Bee cae Re PS Pe ae 95° water.

BERT ME TIOMIG, Te! slop cy alone sey 6) babud aleil aye PERSE NCS RRUCEO tines foo,

The difference between the larger and smaller springs being doubt-

less caused by a small stream of water flowing into it.

In the time of the Assam Rajahs, it appears, these salt springs were

regularly worked, and the water dammed up for the purpose, as the re-

mains of the parts which formed the dams are visible in the stream,

which falls into the well, as also in that which carries off the water.

The limestone, of which I send specimens, is found in the bed of

the Nambur Nuddie, close to the salt spring, where it appears at the

clay; as also in the smali stream above mentioned, which runs through

the larger spring about 200 yards further up, and beyond which, about

14 a mile, is found pipe-clay, some detached pieces of which I saw,

but had not time, on a second visit to these wells, to reach the beds.

1t is a curious fact perhaps, that a large quantity of small fish, inhabit

the larger of these wells, and it was a subject of much regret, that I was

unable to procure any, as specimens, as it could not but have been sa-

tisfactory to ascertain, what description of fish these were, which delighted

in such a temperature and in such water.

The only drawback to the effectually working these spring, and lime-

beds, for acertain number of months during the year, appears to be the

want of conveyance to the Dhunsiri river, and I think it might be worth

the experiment of making an outlay, on the part of Government, of 2

or 300 rupees to effect the same, either by cutting a road through the

forest, or by erecting Batahs (or dams) in the river, so as to allow of

its becoming navigable for small boats, which might easily be dragged

over the slight falls when empty, and as easily taken down when laden,

a practice much in use on the Dying river of Cachar,as you have had

opportunity of observing.

Should such a proposition meet with the approbation of Government,

I believe Mr. Herring would be happy to devote a considerable degree

of attention and minor expense, so as to render these wells far more

valuable than they otherwise can become, by sinking shafts at a little

134 Despatch from Lieut. H. Bigge. [No. TIC.

distance from the present springs, witha view of procuring a purer sup-

ply of salt water, for the purposes of manufacture, and would also work the

lime stone in conjunction with the salt, but without this aid, situated as

these productions are, in the midst of an uninhabited forest, and not

within 8 miles of any. population, I fear there is not inducement,

sufficient torender it worth his while attempting it, or incurring the

expense which must necessarily attend such an undertaking.

I may here observe that these forests abound with the finest Vahor

Trees 1 have ever seen, a wood, which, though from its weight and ex-

treme hardness, is perhaps not adapted for all purposes, is most admir-

ably'so for beams, posts, &c. where great strength and durability Is

required, and might be very advantageously used in all Government build-

ings where obtainable.

I left Bar Pathor after seeing all my supplies well offin boats on the

28th ultimo, reaching the mouth of the Duopani Nuddi on that day, the |

Hurrioghan Mookh on the 29th, the Debopani Mookh on the 30th, and i

arriving here on the afternoon of the 3lst, the road running along the |

line of the Dhunsiri, though straightened in many of the turnings for

38 miles through the densest forests, the last 10 miles being up the bed

of the Dhunsiri itself.

Through all the desolate jungles that I have hitherto travelled, and

they are not a few, I never met with one so completely abandoned by life

as this; no animal of any kind was seen, nor was a bird heard from

morning till night, the death-like silence being only broken by the heavy

fall of the Otengah fruit, these trees composing the entire forest or nearly

so. The marks of the river left on the trees was every where visible from

1 to9 feet in height, forbidding all idea of making this line, that of

communication with this post, save during the cold season, and that

too at a late period from the number of impassable swamps, which every-

where intervene, and render all attempts at rendering the present path

any shorter, or much more practicable than it is, alike unavailing.

Fodder for cattle, especially elephants, is remarkably scarce, my men

finding the greatest difficulty in obtaining the smallest supply, and that

too of a very poor description.

The vast number of trees, which are sunk in the river and on the sands,

render the navigation for boats almost impossible, beyond the Daopani,

unless perhaps during the rains, and even then, itis not without the

greatest care, that boats can proceed, either up, or still more so, down

the river; a very large one last year was swamped close to Bor Pathor,

while passing down empty, being entangled in a large tree, one of

1841.] Despatch from Lieut. H. Bigge. : 135

the men being drowned, and the rest with difficulty saved, the boat

being lost.

Such being the state of the country on the North side, it will be neces-

sary to open a better communication, than at present exists towards

Mohong Dezooah, and for that purpose, I intend engaging a large number

of coolies, if possible, from Tuli Ram Senaputti’s country, to construct

aregular road from Mohong Dezooah to this part, unless a better site

can be shortly discoverved, clearing away the jungle, and if he will agree

to it, locating 10 or 15 families of Meekirs, at this place who snall be

kept up for the purpose of clearing the roads, &c. for the future.

Should he agree, I shall further propose, that the revenue of these

persons shall be for the present defrayed by government, either by a

"direct payment to the ryotts themselves, of the amount demandable from

them by the Senaputti, or in case of their objecting, a trifle more, or by

crediting him that amount from the annual tribute paid-by him to govern-

ment in ivory.

Should I be able during my present expedition to reduce the Nagah

chiefs to any state of order, it would be desirable further, to try and

settle a few of these men in the neighbourhood, on the East bank of

the Dhunsiri, allowing them to occupy any lands they choose, exempt

entirely from all rent or taxation, until such time as matters shall be so

changed, as to seem to call for fresh arrangements; as however this is

mere speculation, | shall pursue it no further at present.

While at Bar Pathor I was visited, on invitation, by the Phokun or

chief of the Rengmah tribe of Nagas before mentioned, who complained

of the loss he had sustained, together with his tribe, by the abolition of

the former establishment of Kuthees, or, I might call them, supercargoes,

who were formerly the medium of communication between this race and

the merchants, in all their dealings, through whom all orders, and commu-

nications to the Nagas passed, begging their restoration, together with

_ the small quantity of lands, &c. which these persons enjoyed as a remu-

neration for their services. f

From the short conversation I had with the Phokun, he was anxious

not to stay, ofaccount of some religous festival which commenced 2 days

afterwards ; he stated that the lands and pykes were bestowed on his

grandfather and father, for services done in the time of the insurrection

of the Muttacks or Moamarriah tribe,in preserving the property,&c. of the

then Bor Gohain of Assam; that he had applied to Mr. Scott, on the sub-

ject, at Gowhattee in person, and had received assurance that his claims

should be considered as good, but that now the whole lands have been

136 Note on the Brahooees. [No. 110.

taxed, the kutkees abolished, and that his authority and rank have fallen

so low, that scarcely his own tribe acknowledge him.

I regret that Iam not acquainted with the reasons,on which the arrange-

ments now in force were adopted, sufficiently, to enable me to enter into

a full detail of the case, but you may be able from what 1 have stated, to

refer to the documents, I have now with me, and form an opinion, whe-

ther on payment of a small tribute in ivory, which they are, I was informed

ready, and willing to pay, the remission to the extent required might

not safely be effected.

The Phokun further expressed a desire to be taken under protection

from the attacks of the Lotah tribe of Nagas,with whom there has been an

enmity existing for a long time, and he asserts, though 1 fear without any

direct proof (he promised to produce witnesses before me at this place to

depose to the fact), of the village called Beloo, not far from Mohong Dezo-

oah, having been attacked by a party of Lotahs from the village of Tagdie,

last year, and one man and a child murdered. On this subject I shall

again address you when the evidence shall have been adduced, but may

observe that the trade of the Lotah Nagas being completely in the power

of the Principal Assistant Commissioner of Seebpore, some injunctions

might be conveyed to the Naga Hazarri of that tribe holding him respon-

sible for any repetition of such acts.

Looking at the map of this country, you may observe that the inclina-

tion of the lime formation of the Nambur Nuddie will exactly, or within

a trifle, correct the points at which it has also been found at the Falls of

the Jumoonah, near Mohong Dezooah at Langolar, spelt ‘ Lowrung’ in

Captain Pemberton’s Map onthe Kopili, and so on towards Sylhet, not

improbably forming one long line of similar formation throughout.

Note on the Brahooees.—By Cart. Hart, Bombay Army.

These tribes are the descendants of ‘Braho,’ a Bulooche, who emi-

grated, about the second century of the Hejira from Aleppo to Mukran :

some years after his countrymen had settled there, We fixed his

abode at Koliva, a few days journey to the westward of Kelot which

city was then inhabited by the Tajuks, over whom ruled a Hakim from

Herat, the seat of sovereignty. These Tajuks were a turbulent and

overbearing race, noted for their hatred to the yoke of Herat. Several

of their Hakims had been slain in popular commotious, and at. length

the part was considered of such danger, that a newly appointed governor

1841.] Note on the Brahooees. | 137

exacted an oath from the heads of the tribe, that they would not destroy

him by the sword or poison, before he ventured to enter the city. On the

strength of his fancied security, he harassed the people by his exactions,

and his death was in consequence decided on. To adhere to the letter of

their bond while the spirit was evaded, five hundred of the Tajuks baked

cakes of bread, in which they mixed up stones and cotton with the dough.

These they concealed under their garments, and attended the Hakim’s

Durbar. A dispute soon arose between him and one of the landholders,

and the passions of the assembly being excited, they stood up of one

accord, and«slew him by blows with the cakes. They then determined

on choosing a Governor for themselves, and ‘ Braho,’ whose countless

flocks and herds entitled him to consideration in the country, was solicited

to take up his residence in Kelat as their Lord and Master, he declined

complying with their request, on the plea of prefering a life in the wilds

to the confinement of a city, but offered his youngest son ‘ Kumbur’ to

their notice, as one for whom he had not made any provision, and who

was therefore free from those ties which bound his brethren to their

homes. After much urging, ‘ Kumbur’ consented to become their Chief,

the Tajuks stipulating to furnish him with eighty horse as a body guard,

to build a house, and supply him with every necessary of life. Aftera

few years, ‘Kumbur’ forced the several tribes of Moguls and Baloochees

in the neighbourhood of Kelat to acknowledge his supremacy, and in

process of time the whole of Mukran and Northern Kunchee was ruled

over by his descendants.

‘ Braho’ had seven sons :

1 Meerun, from whom are descended the Meeranees.

2 Simael 9 er Simalanees.

3 Roden ah ra Rodenees.

4 Peerak 5 ig Peerkanees.

5 Yug a 7; Yugur Menguls.

6 Khadr "5 oY, Khidranees.

7 Kumbur ie 5 Kumburanees.

These are the real_Brahoee tribes, but many others subject to them, are

now included in that appeliation.

138 Notice of Arracan. [No. 110.

They are,

; 5a hee Place of, \3 3 :

Tribe. Subdivision. Bigin. abode. Ss s Present Chief. Remarks.

an8

Saraban.... Reisanee ..../Mogul ....|Kuhnuk ..| 30( Asn Khan. The Sarabans, or

ahomed those of ‘ the right

Shahwanee ../Bulooche ..|/Moostoong.| 1,00( Kia: handheld Tnaine

Surpurra ..../Mogul ..../Kurdugan..|12,00(|Syud Khan. |and Jagheers from

Ronee .. Syuds......|/Tepulinjee .| 2,00¢{SherMahamed|the Kelat Khans

ahome 3 = on whose authori-

“Shahee .. Mogul .... Hikes -| 1,006 esa é ty icy considered’

: usht <i - oll Buksh. [themselves depen-

Koord.....--- A net be Dowlut 40( dant. =

; In u-

Lahree .... § looche .. } Nagao...... Loll Buen The Jhalabans,

| or those of ‘the

Rind ........|Bulooche ..|Makron....}12,00¢ } Bulooche left hand’ were

Khan.

‘ Zumeendars who

va hone yielded by slight

Meer Baker, |°Vedience to their

Jhalaban .. Zahree ....--|Mogul ....|Gatt........| 3,000 ;

ruler, their lands

Mengul ...... Bind ....-.|Nall......+.| 2,000}PraheemKhan|being hereditary.

Mohowed 2, Maaul Kohpoosht .|30,000

Hoosainee BS oy # ane OR DOOSAE alah) They respective-

porsaniay ec(E TINE csccoc (MUO —osceen! » GOO) mUnTeN. ly ee ae

ugur Men- on the right an

Pe el : a Brahooee ..|Nooshky ..| 1,000|Ahmud Khan.!7,% in the Durbar.

‘Mughee......|Bulooche § //y7),2"4 73 |19,000|Ahmud Khan.

A three weeks sail in search of Health— Province of Arracan—Kyck Phyoo.

—Its Harbour, Productions, Capabilities, Geological features, Visit to an

active volcano. By Henry Harpur Spry, M.D., F.G.S8., &c., Secretary

to the Agricultural and Horticultural Society of India.

Circumstances rendering it necessary that I should have recourse to a

little relaxation, in consequence of a severe attack of illness, I determined

to take advantage of the sailing of the H.C.S. Amherst, to the coast of

Arracan, on the 19th of last month (Feb. 1841) to secure a passage in

her and visit the port of Kyok Phyoo, at Ramree. The ship left Calcutta,

in tow of the Ganges, Government Steamer, and reached the Sand

Heads at the close of the third day. Thence we proceeded under sail, and

at the expiration of four days, dropt anchor in the picturesque, and most

spacious harbour of Kyok Phyoo. We were there in exactly a week from

Calcutta. The cruize from the Sand Heads across tg the coast of Arracan,

was a most delightful one. The wind was gentle, and the sea so smooth,

that out of a party of 400 sepoys and camp followers who were on board,

only two that I am aware of, underwent the miseries usually attendant on

a sea voyage when undertaken for the first time.

On the morning early, of the day preceding the one on which we ar-

rived, land was visible, and the entire day was spent in coasting along the

1841.] A Visit to Kyok Phyoo: 139

mountainous, rugged, but thickly wooded islands, called the Bolongas or

broken islands. As night closed in, the anchor was dropt about a league

outside the harbour of Kyok Phyoo.

There are two or three ‘dangers’ in the passage way, and it becomes

therefore desirable, that day-light should exist while steering through

the harbour. On one occasion, however, the Captain of the Amherst stood

in on a bright moon-light night and took up his right position with

out the occurrence of any accident, With the exception of the rocks

here alluded to, the entrance of the harbour is deep and spacious.

I confess, as we sailed in, early the next morning, the general appear-

ance of the harbour and scenery surrounding it, created a most favorable

impression. ‘The first object which attracted my attention was the Saddle

Island. Itstands on the south side of the entrance of the outer har-

bour, (there are, as it were, two harbours) is about three quarters of a

mile, or a mile in circumference, and hasa peak of. about 120 or 150

feet inheight. Onit, a neat bungalow has been built by the present

Marine Assistant, Captain Brown. Here it has become the fashion of

late, for parties of pleasure to resort, to pass the day in the agreeable

occupation of shell picking, coral gathering, bathing, ship sighting,

or if it suits them better, drawing, reading, or geologizing, while the

health inspiring breeze of the sea is blowing on their frames.

As the ship sails along, new and striking peculiarities claim the obser-

ver’s attention, and some of the earliest of these, are, the cantonment bun-

galows of the officers which stud the beach at irregular intervals, for a dis-

tance of three miles as far as ‘Sandy Point;’ this forms the northern pro-

montory of the inner harbour, and on it stands a two 12-pound battery,

with an appropriate flag staff, under the designation of ‘ Fort Dalhousie.’

On the land a little elevated above the sea shore, and about a hundred

yards from the pebbly and sandy beach, with nothing to impede the cur-

rent of the refreshing sea breeze as it comes off the ocean, are seen those

cottages on piles, known as bungalows, overhung and shaded by the lofty

Dipterocarpi; the bank on which they stand is of yellow sand, and along

the beach at sunset, or in the morning, the valetudinarian may gallop

without intermission on the active sure footed pony of the province for

three good miles, and court the healthful breeze. A small thatched

bathing house stands conspicuous. It is the resort, every morning, of

the lovers of bathing, who delight to wrestle with the waves and luxuriate

in the sea.

Kyok Phyoo has not reached that pitch of celebrity yet, as to call

for the erection of bathing machines, but no beach in the world is

140 The Harbour and its Beauties. [No. 110.

better adapted for them, if the taste of the public should ever turn

that way. |

The groups of large islands, covered with deep rich foliage, which

form the harbour of Kyok Phyoo, rise abruptly from the sea, and

afford water beside them so deep that ships can sail in safety. The

hills are clothed to the top in dense and luxuriant vegetation, while the

peaks of some run upto heights that are computed to extend to 7 or

800 feet.

The harbour of Kyok Phyoo, as I have before remarked, is extreme-

ly picturesque, and in its conformation and capabilities, reminds me for-

cibly of the one at Trincomalee—Like the latter, it is divided into

what may be termed an outer and aninner harbour. The outer one being

more of a roadsted than the inner, which is sheltered by the point of land

on which the flag staff stands, and is safe for ships in all weathers. The

harbour and roadsted, with the contiguous extensive deep bay, known as

Fletcher Hayes’ Straits, which stretches away amidst a series of many

beautifully grouped islands between the eastern side of Ramree and the

main, constitute an anchorage that Iam assured would afford safe shelter

for the shipping of the whole world.

With all these new and engaging features before me, it was with no

ordinary feelings of delight that I stept on shore to investigate and ex-

amine for myself. I found that a great and most beneficial change

had been wrought of late in the physical condition and aspect of the

station of Kyok Phyoo. The dense low jungle which formerly choked the

cantonment grounds, had, through the active exertions of the local au-

thorities, been effectually removed, as had the brush-wood and most of

the timber trees which grew on a contiguous low belt of sandstone hil-

locks, which formed the south western boundary of the station. Drains

for the outlet of accumulated water had also been cut, and temporary

bridges erected. The last it may be expected will shortly be superseded

by more becoming brick ones, as the materials, I was informed, had long

been lying accumulated on the ground,

The salubrity of the place has by these measures been much impro-

ved, and the first intimation almost which I received on landing, was

the gratifying assurance, that during the whole period of service (two

years) that the regiment then on the islandon duty had passed, not

one death had occurred among the officers, or, (I believe I am correct

in this) any one of them been obliged to leave it from sickness. One

great and powerfui complaint still exists against Kyok Phyoo as a regi-

mental station. The Hindoostanee soldiers suffer dreadfully from

1841.] The Statien—its Salubrity. 141

sickness. I was curious to learn, if possible, the cause of this, and the

explanations which were offered me, in a great measure satisfactorily

account, I think, for so unfortunate and much to be regretted an occur-

rence. The Arracanese or Mugs, as they are usually called, invari-

ably (there is no exception to the practice that I could learn) build

their dwellings on piles, so that the floor of the room is not only elevated

a distance of two or more feet above the surface of the ground, but a

current of air passes freely underneath it. At the jail, which is a series

of spacious well continued erections, the system of the country has been

followed, and the prisoners are housed in a number of large dwellings within

a strong stockade. It is left for regimental sepoys to be experimented on,

to test the value of Mug wisdom, by doing without piles and hutting the

unfortunates in the manner now in use. To the men instead of being

hutted as the people of the province are, and indeed as the transported

felons are, (for Arracan is a penal settlement and Kyok Phyoo has a party

of above three hundred convicts stationed at it,) are compelled to live in

low or unraised huts, which are built in a series of lines forming streets,

and in such a damp locality, that I (although it was then far advanced in

the month of February) sprung a couple of snipe out of the grass, within a

yard of these abodes.

After strong, and I believe repeated representation, not only on the

part of the duly constituted medical authorities, whose business it is

to watch over such duties, but by the chief Military authority

also, I am told that the Military Board sanctioned the formation of

raised boardings or matchauns within the huts, so as to enable the

sepoys to sleep off the ground. But this is not enough. Whatever

dampness or exhalation is emitted from the soil (and that something

noxious does transude the practice of building, which the genius of

the people has suggested, proves) is still pent up by the mat walls which

reach the ground and exclude the free circulation of air underneath,

an observance which, as I have just remarked, is deemed essential to the

preservation of health. Common humanity dictates the measure, and a

State characterized for its considerate attention to its army, ought without

hesitation to hasten to remove a grievance so fully calculated to produce

the suffering and disasterous consequences which are now experienced.

There is another and [ think not sufficiently regarded cause operative of

the suffering which the sepoys undergo from sickness, a portion of

the men, in the Volunteer regiments are Mahomedans. They are pro-

verbial for their careless extravagance. ‘ A Mahomedan (said Ameer-ul-

omrah the second son, and for some time minister of Mahommed Ali the

142 The Wood Oil Trees. [No. 110.

former Nabab of the Carnatic) was like a seive—much of what was

poured in went through; while a Hindoo was like a sponge which re-

tained all, but on pressure gave back, as required, what it had absorbed.’

And so at Kyok Phyoo. The Mahomedan sepoys to gratify their habits

of debauchery, borrow from their more thrifty Hindoo brethren who stint

themselves of the common necessaries of life to gratify their saving propen-

sities, and rather than purchase good sound, but expensive food pinch

themselves with half meals of the worst description. The Hindoo

sepoys of the 65th regiment brought away with them, I was assured by the ©

officers, on their return to Calcutta upwards of 40,000 rupees which they

had saved during their two years and half tour in the Province.

Leaving this painful subject for others of a more pleasing kind, I hasten

to complete my observations regarding the site of the Cantonment of Kyok

Phyoo. The soil is almost entirely sand, but yet much vegetation till

recently abounded and even now the many lofty Dipterocarpi speak plainly

of the adaptability of the ground to produce rich and luxuriant growths.

These Dipterocarpi early attracted my attention. They are the trees,

whence that (to the London market at least) novel article of commerce,

known as the Gurjun or wood oil, is obtained. On examining into the

process by which this most valuable product is obtained, I found that

the practice was to cut a large notch something of the form of a rude arch

into one side of the tree near its root, a depth of three or four inches,

with the base sunk from the external edge inwardly to make it cup-like,

soas to hold the oil. A fire is then kindled in the aperture for a few

minutes, by which means, it appears, the sap vessels are stimulated, and

the oil once set an oozing flows gradually down, drop by drop, till

the cup-like hollow at the bottom of the notch becomes filled, when it

is dished up, and set aside for use; successive supplies are for a long time

in this manner obtained.

An abundance of these trees are to be seen in every direction

about Kyok Phyoo, and I am told are equally plentiful on the island

of Cheduba and elsewhere throughout the line of coast. While on

the subject of these trees I cannot omit mentioning a circumstance

connected with the produce from them, which although of somewhat

a private nature, is yet of sufficient peculiarity to merit recital. More than

two years ago, when in correspondence with Dr. Royle, I procured eight

sarge casks full of the wood oil and shipped it for London to be sold in

the London market and its value fairly tested. I knew that the Portu-

gnese in the days of their early career in India had all dealt largely in

the article, for Bolt in his ‘ Considerations of India,’ particularly alludes

1841.] lis Antiquity as an Article of Commerce. 143

toit. I knew moreover that for time out of mind the people of the Pro-

vince of Arracan and of Burmah in general, had used it for all sorts of

work ; that moreover Roxburgh alludes to it, and that in fact it was an

article well known in India. What was my surprise at finding from

Dr. Royle that so ignorant were, and still are, the authorities at the

London Custom House of the nature of this substance, that they positively

deny that it is a raw material, and will consequently only admit it as a

‘ Manufactured article’, which entails the payment of a duty that the oil

itself would never sell for. In his recently published work on the

productive resources of India, Dr. Royle has pointedly alluded to this

lamentable ignorance on the part of the London Custom House authorities

of some of the products of India.

To return to remarks on the station. The bazar is clean and well ar-

ranged. Beside the various roads young timber trees have been planted.

These are notin the most flourishing condition. It may surprise some

to be told that after so recently denuding the soil of the jungle, that trees

should again be planted, but arborescent avenues would be a great

ornament, serve to keep down temperature, and not to promote sickness.

Many of those now planted are dead and it will be many years before any

will assume a commanding appearance.

The people are decidedly superior in physical conformation to the

Bengallees. They are an athletic and intelligent race. Their agricul-

tural and mechanical appliances show it, and in their dealings with the

Europeans they evince an independence of character that surprises a

person accustomed to the manners of the obsequious Asiatic.

The harbour abounds with fish, and I was particularly struck at the ease

and facility with which a daily supply was obtained for breakfast.

Half an hour before the usual time for eating the meal the word was passed

for ‘ Mutchee mar.’ At which command the boatmen took the net and

proceeding to the beech threw in the lines, and in ten minutes three or

four fine mullet were presented to the cook.

Besides these mullet, the pomfret are noted for their high flavour, and

the oysters are of an excellent kind. At certain seasons, at the close of

the rainy months, innumerable boats go off to Combermere Bay, an ex-

tensive but somewhat shallow roadsted, contiguous to Kyok Phyoo har-

bour, and here fish for the polynemous, the sounds of which they cure in

large quantities, and sell to the China junks which annually pay a visit to

the coast for the purpose of trading for these and other articles. It is the

opinion of a gentleman, who has had opportunities of making abundant en-

quiries, that the fishing for isinglass might be conducted to a great extent.

144 Fish, Isinglass, Salt, Edible Birds’ Nests. [No. 110.

Only the day before I arrived, a Chinaman, (the only one indeed who lives

at Kyok Phyoo) who acts as agent for his countrymen who trade on the

coast, bought up five maunds (400 lbs) of these fish sounds for about 25

rupeesa maund.

A small rock, known as the Pagoda Rock, at the mouth of the harbour,

furnishes the edible birds’ nests in small quantities, and the government

derives an income from it as well as from wood oil, wax and honey. In

the year 1835-36, the collections of revenue on account of the edible

birds’ nest found at the island of Ramaee stood at 106 rupees and that

for the whole Province at 4160 rupees in the Government books, while

the collections on occount of form of wood oil was 17 rupees—eath oil

162 rupees—bees wax and honey 660 rupees. The nests the China junks

carry off. Such are the chief productions of the harbour. Many other

fish of course abound, but the pomfret, the mullet, the becktee, and the

oyster stand foremost.

I must now allude to another subject, and that is one of considerable

importance. I allude to the manufacture of salt. The water of the har-

bour at Kyok Phyoo containsa much larger quantity of saline matter

than that in the Sunderbunds. On’comparison it will be seen, I believe, that

the one holds near 20 per cent more saline matter in solution than the other.

The government has already taken advantage of this circumstance, and

has caused Golahs to be erected, whereat they store salt, which the people

of the Province are but too happy tosupply at 4 annas a maund. The

manufacture is solely by solar evaporation, and the preparation is of the

finest quality. Such opportunities must demand greater attention, and.

a few vears more will probably see this superior article, superseding

almost to utter extinction, the dirty earthy article which is now obtained

from the Sunderbunds.*

One of my earliest enquiries, after landing at the picturesque station of

Kyok Phyoo, was, to enquire into the progress made in the recent coal

discovery.t I found that the principal locality here alluded to, was not on

the island of Ramree itself, but on a rock off the island about a mile,

know by the name of ‘ the Cap Island,’ but that minute traces of it had

been found at a point of the main island which is nearest in contiguity

* My friend and correspondent alludes to the Salt as sold in the bazaar: it is

perfectly white, and pure when first made, but the process of removal, and weighing

dirties it in some degree and the adulteration by the retail dealer brings on the earthy

look he alludes to ; 7, not 4, As. is the price given.—H. T.

+ I beg here to state that what is here stated regarding the coal localities at Kyok

Phyoo was reported by me to the Secretary of the coal Committee and has since appear-

ed in Dr, McCleland’s Journal.

1841.] The Coal Localities. 145

to this rock. The specimens, which I brought away will afford good

average pieces of coal and its immediate connected formations.

I took an early opportunity of availing myself of the kind offer of

Mr. Brown, the Marine Assistant to the Commissioner of the pro-

vince, and Col. Hervey, to whose exertions this interesting dis-

covery I believe belongs, to visit the Cap Island and examine the

formation. I found it partaking, as might be expected, when the general

character of the line of coast is taken into consideration, of all the

characters which denote active volcanic agency.—The rock itself is in

great part make up of sand-stone, but so distorted are the strata by the

upheaving force, that in places they appear at an acute angle, and even ver-

tical, while they are so appositely placed as to convey the idea, that at

this point some confined force had here found an outlet, and split the

incumbent bed. The rock runs up to a peak.

On one face of the rock a thick deposit of marly earth is seen, and on it

an abundance of vegetation thrives. Atthe seaward point of the rock,

and barely above high water mark, the coal is found. The sand-stone

strata here, though not so highly distorted as in the more central part,

is still at an acute angle. It is intersected by a bed of fatty marl of abouta

foot in thickness, and amidst its substance, and sometimes in a shaly depo-

sit, the lumps of coal are found. I say lumps foras yet no continuous seam

of coal has been discovered, but all is yet in its infancy, for, besides

scratching the surface soil for a few inches, nothing has been done to test

the extent of the formation.

I confess, when I look at the position of the place, Isee no immediate

prospect of a supply of coals; and taking the difficulties of keeping out the

water into consideration, (even supposing that a continuous seam was

found) with the great dip of the strata, nothing but an outlay for machinery

could fairly test it.

Leaving the Cap island, the next locality that I visited, was the point

of land on the island of Ramree, most contiguous to the Cap island.

From the direction of the outcropping coal strata at the Cap island, it

was inferred that similar indications might be found at the point of land

now adverted to, and a close search being made, a formation identical with

that at the Cap island was found with thin traces of coal. The dip

here is equally great with that at the Cap island, and would require a

shaft to be sunk, through the intervening sandstone stratum, to enable

the searcher to ascertain if a bed of coal of any consistence did exist.

When I came away Captain Lumsden, the Principal Assistant, was

sinking two pits ata part of the island, some little way, perhaps half a

146 The Coal Localities. [No. 110.

mile, from the spot where the indications of coal were observed, and the

laborers had got perhaps ten feet;* but no effectual effort is likely to be

made, nor indeed, is it possible under existing circumstances, for it ap-

pears that no expense is permitted to be incurred, while of machinery—

not even a whim for raising the rubbish or water is erected.

Every disposition exists on the part of those in authority at Kyok

Phyoo, to carry out the investigation, but they say, and say justly, that they

have no funds placed at their disposal for doing so, and, out of their own

pocket, it is too much to expect that they should defray the charges. The

consequence is, the poor laborers are left to go unpaid, and great dissa-

tisfaction is felt accordingly.

To leave this subject, After visiting the localities now mentioned, a

proposal was made to sail across the harbour to the eastern point of the

island, and proceed to the summit of a lofty hill which stood about three

mile sinland, and on which is the cone of an active voleano. The suggestion

was immediately acceded to, and at four o’clock in the afternoon our

party began to ascend the rugged path which conducted to this interest-

ing object. I had heard that two or three other Europeans had already

visited the crater, and that at the close of last year it was emitting smoke

and ashes. Our companions were several boatmen, and each man, more

from habit than singularity, carried, the never failing accompaniment of

a mug adhow, which is a large powerful knife in shape about the size

of a regulation sword broken of in the middle.

After various humorous adventures, in the midst of the dense jungle, and

traversing the crater ofa small dried up volcano, we succeeded in reaching

the anxiously sought hill,and when we reached the top,most amply reward,

ed we were. Never did I behold a more delightful piece of scenery. Tha

view commanded the whole of the northern portion of the island, and

that extensively sheltered anchoring ground, before alluded to, under the

name of Fletcher Hayes’ Straits.

But to the immediate objects of our visit. The cone was beautifully

formed of the erupted mud, and covered to the very brink of the centre

with thick verdant grass. Out of it grew luxuriant Casuarina trees. And

here I cannot avoid mentioning a very remarkable circumstance connected

with the appearance of these trees. Nowhere, asfaras I could learn, do

they appear, except on the cones of the volcanos, of which there are

several, to be found on the island of Ramree. More than once when hid

: “i ‘he since heard from Captain Lumsden that the work has been abandoned as

opeless.

1841.] Description of some Ancient Gems and Seals, &c. 147

amidst the dense foliage of the forest, and at a loss in what direction

to turn, we sought an open space and searched for the Casuarina trees,

and in this manner were attracted to the desired spot. On the edge of the

crater and about the sides of the cone amidst the grass, I picked up shells,

(helix ?) pieces of indurated clay, quartz, and clay intersected with

spar. They all go to show the character of the disrupted material

The edge of the crater was most uniform, and its diameter was about

twelve feet. Its interior was filled with warm liquid mud, and on plunging

down a rod, it passed on for about eight feet, and then struck in a thick

plastic substance. After examining it in all directions, and satisfying

Our curiosity to the utmost, we hastened to return, and at length succeeded

in reaching the boats, highly gratified and delighted at the success of our

adventure, and the interesting novelty which it had unfolded to us.

I left Kyok Phyoo much pleased with the peculiar and many various

features which it presents, and returned to Calcutta after an absence of

three weeks, much improved in health by the excursion.

Description of some Ancient Gems and Seals from Bactria, the

Punjab and India.

1. GRECIAN.

Whether it is, that the collection and study of ancient gems and seals,

is less interesting in itself than the study of coins, or that it leads to less

immediate and satisfactory results, lam unable to say; but perhaps both

of these reasons may have combined to render the one less attractive than

the other. But whether from one or from both of these causes the effect

has been the almost total neglect of this study in India; although the

specimens scattered amongst the numerous individual collections must

now be valuable, as well as easily accessible. Someof these I have col-

lected together in the accompanying plate, in the hope that others may be

induced to make public what they may have stored up in their cabi-

nets.

The earliest notice of an ancient gem procured in India, of which I am

aware, is in Vincent’s Ancient Commerce, vol. 2, p. 760, where he makes

mention of ‘ an emerald belonging to the Archbishop of York, engraved

with a Medusa’s head, of Grecian sculpture, and brought from Benares.’

And in the Trans. of the Royal Asiatic Society vol. 3, page 139, there is an

engraving of ‘ an ancient Hindu intaglio,’ with a long rambling description,

by Colonel Tod. The gem itself is a beautiful one, representing Hercules

148 Description of some Ancient Gems and Seals, &c. (No. 110.

naked, his head diademed, leaning his left hand on his club, and holding

out in his right hand a little figure of victory, which is extending a

wreath towards the hero; to the right are two Sanscrit letters, one above

the other, in the same position, and apparently of the same age, as those

we see on the coins of the Guptas, forming the word Aja; which is pro-

bably only a monogramatic contraction for Ajaya, the invincible, a very

appropriate epithet for the ever victorious Hercules.

T have no doubt that many other notices of ancient gems procured in

India may be found with a little search ; but I have neither the time to

look for them, nor the ability to elucidate them, should my search be

successful ; and I therefore trust that the brief remarks, which I am

about to make, may be received with indulgence.

No. 1. Brown translucent agate, procured at Benares. Bare and

bearded head of Hercules to the left, his hair short and curling ; his great

strength shown by his short brawny neck; and his club placed behind

his head. Thisseal is of beautiful workmanship, and in exceedingly

bold relief and the engraved parts are highly polished.

No. 2. In Colonel Stacy’s collection, purchased, I believe, at Delhi. It

represents Omphale standing, inclined to the left,"and bearing the club

and lion’s skin belonging to Hercules ; she having given him her distaff

and bright colored robe in exchange for them. The engraving of this

gem is well-done, but it is not in my opinion at all equal to the other—

and yet her air of fancied strength assumed with the spoils of the Ne- —

mean lion, and the hero’s club, is capital ; and the making her grasp

the club with both hands, displays at once both the woman’s weakness,

and the nice observation of the artist.

As these gems represent mythological persons of ancient Greece, they

must have been brought into India from the North West, and as many

gems are yearly discovered in ancient Bactria, I have little doubt that these,

and indeed all gems purchased in India which bear Grecian subjects,

must have come originally from ancient Bactria, the seat of the nearest

Grecian colony, and where we know, from the beauty of the earlier Bac-

trian coins, that the arts must have flourished in the greatest perfection.

If these gems then owe their origin to Bactria, it is not improbable that

the two just described may have been engraved during the long and pros-

perous reign of Euthedymus, all of whose gold and. silver coins, yet dis-

covered, bear the figure of Hercules; for it is but natural to suppose, that

a Prince, who for so long a time exhibited this deified hero upon his coins,

would likewise have had the head, the figure, and even the history of the

= ee ee ee eee ee ee

Plate

GENS and SEALS

pale

| a

ee 3} Zaz m3 |

eee ec ee =O Ee ee ee eee

Cunmnghanry hel, . X. Archer lbh. (

He lee fare al

alg aa A

“azuiae

Fos 25 alm opera a al Con em ety EH nT fom Name lm cen

a eS Rs aie

heal fx ies

7" si ram Wer a, a

ee ah

A ,

hs , 3 ve Sina ihe fia

= i BA due) 7

‘4 parnaes! Ly: :

ee a i

ee Pat ee ‘

, 2 woes remy eta A

ri ‘ » gol i

ee Lan me

e Bie e mat ie) Pealy vrai

a ol A

b bs

‘ rs

i a

a H

Ay }

o '

¢ A rt

aaa “quantal

i “te

1841.] Description of some Ancient Gems and Seals, &c. 149

same personage engraved upon his seals.* Suchat least is my opinion,

which is greatly strengthened by the beauty and depth of the engraving,

and by the peculiar mode of representing the short curly hair, which is

the very same style that we see upon the tetradrachms of Kuthydemus.

No. 3. A red cornelian, much worn and slightly fractured below,

having a bare youthful head to the left, with a scarcely perceptible beard

and long curling hair, with the chlamys fastened upon his shoulder. The

execution of this seal is very beautiful; and the relief is bold, deep and

highly polished. It was procured at Lucknow, but I am not sure that it

may not. owe its origin to modern Kurope; the antique chlamys, however,

gives it a delightful claim to be considered ancient, which the beauty of

its workmanship makes me unwilling to dispute.

No. 4. A small red cornelian, purchased at Amritsir. Its execution is

very inferior, and shows that it must belong to a declining period of the

arts in Bactria. It represents Mercury half turned to the left, with his

chlamys or short cloak over his shoulders, his caduceus in his left hand,

and an undecided object in his right hand.

No. 5. A Suliméni, or light brown translucent agate, having a middle

Jayer of milkwhite chalcedony, from Benares. It is of excellent make,

but is very much worn, only a few strokes of along inscription being now

visible. Onit are represented two standing figures, male and female.

The female to the left is clothed to the feet, her head is surmounted by a

basket, and encircled by a halo—she holds in her left hand a cornucopia,

and in her right a torch, under which is an undecided ‘object, resembling

a bird. To the right the male figure is clothed to the knees,—his head

dress is surmounted by a pair of wings, and his head encircled by a halo:

he holds a trident in his left hand, and his right hand is raised towards

the cornucopia held by the female figure. Between the two figures is

a pitcher, and over them an indistinct object.

The two figures on this gem are, I believe, from their peculiar emblems

and attributes, Osiris and Isis, or the Sun and Moon, as deified by the

Egyptians. Though the worship of these divinities was popular enough

in Jater Rome, yet I think it was never so amongst the Greeks, and more

especially not amongst the distant Greeks of Bactria; wherefore I am

* Since writing the above, I have received from Capt. Hay, impressions of two cop-

per coins of Demetrins, both of which have the head of Hercules bare and bearded as

on this seal, and with the club behind the head. I am therefore inclined to believe

that the bare and bearded head on the copper coins of Euthydemus is that of Hercules.

The discovery of these coins of Demetrius bearing precisely the same type as the seal,

in my opinion almost confirms the correctness of what I haye advanced as to the period

when this may have been executed.

150 Description of some Ancient Gems and Seals, &c. [No. 110,

led to suppose that this stone may have been engraved in Egypt during

the fostering and happy government of the earlier Ptolemies.

No. 6. A red cornelian, of barbarous execution: Two standing figures,

male and female, with a cross between them, the male figure holding up

a wreath in his left hand. Though this is probably the work of modern

days imitated from an antique, yet many seals of equally barbarous work-

manship are yearly found in ancient Bactria, all of which most probably

belong to the latest period of the Grecian dominion in that country.

No. 7. A white cornelian of milky hue, very thick and round, having

a hole pierced from the top to the bottom. It represents a male figure

standing to the front, his face turned to the right, he is clad in the Indian

dhott, and wears the sacred thread across his breast ; flames spring from

the top of his head, which is encircled by a halo. In his right hand he

holds a trident, and in his left hand, which is placed on his hip, he carries

a lota, or drinking vessel; and a loose robe, or chadr hangs over his left

arm. Legend to the left in Bactrian Pali characters PANY which

is probably some compound of jas (Sanskrit YW) fame; suchas

Jasvatisa (for IM al) ‘of the renowned.’

This beautiful gem came from Cabool : the execution is good, and the

design graceful ; the position of the body is easy and unrestrained ; the

limbs are free, and the outline of the figure and the folds of the drapery

are naturally and simply expressed. The figure is the same as that we

find on the coins of the Indo-Scythian Kadphises, excepting that the

face is turned ina contrary direction. The Indian dhotz, and the sacred

powta of the superior castes are so distinct on this gem, that I cannot hesi-

tate in ascribing its origin to India, and in assigning it to the period

when the Indo-Seythian Kadphises reigned over the Punjab and Cabool.

In execution this seal is decidedly equal, if not superior, to the finest gold

coins of Kadphises, and I cannot therefore be far wrong in attributing its

age to the reign of that Prince, who must have flourished before Kaner-

ka; for the money of the latter became the type of several series of the

Indian coins down to so late a period as the Mahomedan invasion: while

the coins of Kadphises were not imitated except by his immediate succes

sors, who may have issued the barbarous gold coins with a man and bull —

on the reverse, (see Figs. 45, pl. 38, vol. 4, J. A.S, of Bengal.)

On a few gold specimens, and on all the copper coins of Kadphises, the

figure which we see on this gem, is represented standing before a bull, and

not alone, as on the commoner gold coins of that Prince; and this is also

the way in which the Deity is placed on the gold and copper coins of the

1841.] Description of some Ancient Gems and Seals, §c. 151

unknown prince, noticed above as being one of the successors of Kadphises.

On those coins we invariably find the legend OCPO. which is no doubt

the name of the figure; and consequently we may pretty safely take this

word OCPO to be the equivalent of the Bactrian Pali legend of the gem.

Now Professor Lassen has happily explained Ofro, by Ugra, a name of

Siva, of whom indeed the trident and the sacred bull Mundt, are peculiar

and unmistakeable attributes: and hence it follows that the figure on

the seal must be that of the God Siva.

No. 8. A Cameo, in the collection of Sir Alex. Burnes, of most admir-

able workmanship, in bold and beautiful relief. It represents a half length

of Silenus to the right; his head bald and bearded, and bound with a

wreath of vine leaves; with a flat nose, sparkling eye, and laughing, all

betokening the merry companion of Bacchus. He is holding up his left

hand before his face with the fore-finger, and little finger raised, and in

his right hand he is carrying his drinking can in a sloping direction.

A thyrsus is placed behind him, and his robe is thrown over his right

arm.

In this exquisite little gem Silenus appears, cup in hand, telling some

humorous story, replete with the wine-inspired wit, broad fun, and

shrewd pithy remarks for which he was celebrated : the sly expression of

his face is excellent; and his jolly corpulent figure reminds us at once

of ‘ laughter holding both his sides ;’? while the sloping way in which he

holds his cup shows either that it is empty, or that he is so tipsy, and so

taken up with his story, which he is impressing with the action of his

left hand more earnestly upon his hearers, as not to know that he is

losing his wine; or we may suppose that, having drained the cup, he

is exclaiming ‘ Papaiapcex !—what a sweet taste it has !’

_ The exceeding beauty of this exquisite little Cameo of the Grecian

Falstaff, proves that it must have been engraved at a time when the arts in

Bactria were in the very highest perfection ; and consequently during the

earliest period of the Bactrian power: and I think it highly probable

that this gem may have been executed during the reign of Agathocles,

whose coins usually exhibit devises belonging to the worship of Bacchus ;

and no doubt upon his seals and gems there were represented stories

and figures emblematic of the same worship.

The coins of Agathocles, are, in my opinion, the most beautiful of the

Bactrian series as works of art, and therefore I am inclined to place him

before Euthydemus and Demetrius in the list of Bactrian Princes; and

to assign him the country of the Parapamisades as his kingdom, Nysa

or Dionysopalis for his capital, in which ‘ City of Dionysus’ I suppose

152 Description of some Ancient Gems and Seals, &c. [No. 110.

that this beautiful Cameo of Silenus was engraved, at the same time that

the Bacchic coins of Agathocles were united ; that is about 240 B.C.

No. 9. A red cornelian, in the collection of Sir Alex. Burnes. It is

of coarse execution, although its design is good; and is probably only a

copy of a better gem.

No. 10. Likewise in the collection of Sir Alex. Burnes; this seal is

of very inferior execution ; the subject is similar to that of the coins of

the Grecian colony of Falisci in Italy.

2. SASSANIAN.

No. 11. A red cornelian, from Amritsir, very thick, and with a hole

near the top for suspension ; the two streamers to the right are just the

same as those that we see upon the Sassanian coins.

Nos. 12 and 13. These were sent to Mr. Prinsep by a gentleman re-

siding in Persia; on No. 13 there is a Pehlvi inscription, but I am not

able to offer any thing myself regarding its interpretation.

No. 14. In the possession of Colonel Stacy.

3. HINbDUv.

In the Journal of the Bengal Asiatic Society for 1837, at page 968

Mr. Prinsep says—‘ General Ventura has also brought down with him some

beautiful specimens of seals of the same age, which I shall take an early

opportunity of engraving and describing.’ Unfortunately this opportunity

was lost by Mr. Prinsep’s sudden illness. He had however sent mean

impression of the principal seal referred to, (No.15) which I will now

describe.

No. 15. A plain thin cornelian, bearing a beautiful female head to the

right, the hair plaited in two braids over the fore part of the head, and

gathered into a large bow at the back, where it is tied by a ribbon, the

ends of which float behind. Her shoulder is covered by a robe, from

the midst of which her right hand appears, holding a lotus flower before

her face. Inscription below in ancient Sanscrit, Késava-Ddsasya, (Seal)

of Kesava-Das, the servant of Vishnu.

At what period this lovely gem was engraved can only be ascertained

approximately by an examination of the forms of the Sanskrit characters ;

oh a oe oe

of which the letters & and d, and the inflected vowels are similar to those ~

found in the inscription recording the repairs of the bridge near Iinagurh,

which we know must be subsequent to Asoka, or after B.C. 200; while

the s and sy are of a later period, and similar to those found in the in- —

criptions of the Gupta family, which, in my opinion, cannot be later than

A.D, 400. The peculiar formation of the sy, I consider to be one of the

“er |

1841.]. Description of some Ancient Gems and Seals, 5c. 158i

best tests for ascertaining the age of a Sanskrit inscription, and therefore:

I feel inclined to believe that this seal is of the age of the Guptas. If

the name may be considered as a titledeclaratory of the religion of the

owner of the seal, we shall have a direct proof that. Késava Dds (the

servant of Vishnu) was of the Braminical faith ; which, coupled with

the probable age which I have already assigned to this seal, would fix.

the period of its execution to the reign of one of the earlier Vaishnava

Guptas, and before the date of the Saiva Skanda Gupta. In the same

way, taking the name as a deelaration of the faith of Késava Das, we have

a clue to the owner of the beautiful face engraved upon this seal, who.

can be no other than Sa? or Lakshmi, the consort of Vishnu, and the

goddess of wealth, beauty, and prosperity, who is usually represented

with alotus in her hand. It is even possible that this seal may have be-

longed to Chandra Gupta himself; for the small copper coins of that

Prince (vide vol. 5. pl. 38. Fig. 13 and 14. J.A.S. of Bengal) bear a

similar bust with the hand raised before the face, and holding a lotus

blossom ; beneath which isthe Prince’s name. This remarkable coinci-

dence of subject between the seal and the coins, coupled with the simi-

larity of the characters of the inscription to. those of the age of the Guptas,

still further strengthens the opinion which I have expressed above, that

this seal was engraved during the reign of one of the earlier Vaishnava

Guptas, towards the end of the fourth century after Christ.

The lithographer has completely failed in copying my sketch of this

beautiful seal: for, instead of a frowning elderly lady, the original re-

presents a young and lovely girl with a gentle smile upon her face. In

beauty and excellence of workmanship this gem rivals the finest coins

of the Bactrian Mint ; the face is exquisitely delineated, and the position

of the hand peeping out from the loose robe or Hindu chadr, is graceful

| andeasy. Unfortunately on the gold coins of the Guptas there are no

| busts with which we may compare the delicate engraving of this seal; in

| my opinion, however, it is far superior to many of the Guptacoins, and

| is perhaps even superior to the best of them ; with the small copper coins

| No just comparison can be made, for they are few in number, andare all

| deficient in preservation.

No. 16. A brooch set round with turquoises, presented to Mr. James.

| Prinsep by General Ventura. The engraving is from a rough pen-

| and-ink sketch by Mr. Prinsep—Below the head is an inscription

| inancient Sanskrit, Siz Kodbharasya ‘(Seal) of Sri Kodbhara, the

| upholder or supporter of the fortress’. The initial Sr? of this seal, which

| is of a later formthan we find in the Gupta inscriptions, proves that

| v

154 Description of some Ancient Gems and Seals, &c. [No. 110.

it must have been engraved subsequent to A. D. 450, the latest period

which 1 can assign to any of the Gupta family.

No. 17. Likewise in the collection of General Ventura, there is a

head upon this seal, but notso beautifully executed as that upon No.

15. Theinscription, in ancient Sanskrit, is 4j7ta Vermmasya, (seal) of

Ajita Vermma. From the forms ofthe characters Ishould say that this

seal was of the age of the Guptas.

No. 18. A red cornelian, in the possession of Mr. B. Elliott of Patna.

This sealis very neatly engraved, and is no doubt as old as the most

flourishing period of the Guptas, and perhaps evenolder. The legend

of this seal will be found engraved as No. 15, pl. 56, vol. 6. J. A. S. of

Bengal, where Mr. Prinsep reads it as Sri Lokandvasya, (seal) of Sti Loka-

nava, or, the boatman of the world: but on the sealing-wax impression,

which I have now before me, the legend is clearly Sri Loka-chhdvasya,

(seal) of Sri Loka-chhava, or the ornament of the world; from ofa

beauty or splendor.

No. 19. A chalcedonic agate, or Sulimdént, from Ujain, in the cabinet

of the late Mr. James Prinsep. It is published in theJ.A.S.of Ben-

gal, vol 6. pl. 36, Fig. 23, where Mr. Prinsep reads the inscription as

Sri Vati-khuddasya. ‘(Seal) of Sri Vati-khudd.’*

No. 20. A small agate, having the letters cut through an upper layer

of milk white chalcedony. It was originally in Colonel Stacy’s col-

lection, and is evidently only a fragment, for on the left side marks

of the cutting tools are still quite plain, while the other sides are polished.

The left side is likewise perpendicular while the other sides are

sloping towards the face of the seai. The remaining letters in ancient

Sanskrit are........ ttasya. © (Seal) of. .ec.s. (Da) tta.

No. 21. In the possession of General Court. It is an oblong seal,

with a recumbent animal above the inscriptions, which is in ancient

Sanskrit, and reads Trva-datusya. ‘(Seal) of Tiva Datta,’ or, the giver

of wisdom.

No. 22. A copper seal, originally in the collection of Colonel Suaegh

having a Bull butting to the left, with an ancient Sanskrit inscription

on two sides, which is probably Amogha-bhutasa. ‘ (Seal) of Amogha-

bhuta’, or the mortal without vanity, that is, the humble individual.

Now this the very title which Rajah Kunanda takes on his silver and cop-

* Of the same age as this seal is another small oval one from Peshdwur, (brought

to my notice by “Dr. Chapman) bearing the legend Sri Kshatrapasya ‘ (seal) of Sri -

Kshatrapa’ or the fortunate satrap.

1841.] Description of some Ancient Gems and Seals, 5c. 158

per coins (see Nos. 2, 3,4 and 7, vol. 7. pl. 32, J. A. 8. of Bengal) the

whole inscription being Amogha-bhutasa-maharajasa-rajnya-Kunandasa,

(coin) of the humble individual, the great king of kings, Kunanda. In

the same way we find that the title of Aprati-ratha, or the invincible-

in-his-chariot, which is applied in the Allahabad inscription to Samudra

Gupta, is repeated upon his coins :—and I have no doubt therefore that the

epithet of Amogha-bhuta on this seal refers to Kunanda, and that the seal

is of the same age asthe coins. But on the coins the legends are in

two different characters, of one common language; the legend of the

obverse being in Indian Pali; thus proving that these two characters were in

contemporaneous use, andlikewise from the occurrence of the Indian Pali

on the odverse, or principal side of the coin, showing clearly that Kunanda

was a native of India proper, and not of India beyond the Indus where the

Bactrian Pali characters prevailed. ‘The same fact indeed may be gathered

from the use of /ndian Pali only on the seal. But that he possessed terri-

tory upon the banks of the Indus is undeniably attested by the use of

the Bactrian Pali upon his coins, and by the localities in which they

have been discovered, some of which are to the westward of the Indus,

even as faras Kabul. Such being the extent of his territory, it now

only remains to ascertain at what period a prince named Kunanda reign-

ed over Northern India and the Punjab. In the first place then we

know by the shape of the letter mthat this seal must be anterior to the

period of the Guptas, and the same may be said for the coins, on which

also we have the additional evidence from the forms of the hand n,

that Kunanda cannot be later than Asoka. The occurrence of Bactrian

Pali on his coins is likewise in favor of this early date, for that charac-

ter appears to have fallen into disuse towards the close of the second

century after Christ, or perhaps a quarter of a century later, when the

followers of the Brahminical faith, with the assistance of the Agniculas

(whom I believe to have been the fire worshipping Sussanians) had gain-

ed the ascendancy in India over the votaries of Buddha. The use of

the Pali termination Sa, for the Sanskrit Sya, proves that Kunanda was

a Buddhist, and this is still further confirmed by his title, which whe-

ther it be read as Amogha-bhuta, the humble mortal, or as Amdéya-bhuta,

the guileless mortal, which is perhaps the preferable reading, is in strict

accordance with the professed meekness and lowliness of a zealous

Buddhist, and is at the same time utterly at variance with the grandiloquent

titles assumed by the arrogant Brahmanists. We have thus deduced

that Kunanda, who ruled over Northern India even beyond the river

Indus, was a Buddhist Prince, and that he flourished certainly not later

156 Description of some Ancient Gems and Seals, &e. [No. 110.

than the reign of Asoka. Now it is almost certain that the successors

of Asoka were driven out of the country upon the Kabul river by the

Bactrian Greeks under Demetrius the son of Kuthydemus, and it is

quite certain that from the period of the war between Eucratides and

Demetrius ‘ King of the Indians,’ until the decay of the Indo-Scythian

power about A. D. 220, no Hindu Prince ruled over the territory on the

banks of the Indus. We have thus two distinct proofs that Kunanda

cannot have flourished later than the era of Asoka, and since we cannot

identify him with that prince whose other name was Piya-dasi, we must

look earlier in the list for some king whose recorded history will agree >

with the deductions made from our examination of his seal and coins.

The name given in the Grecian authors to Asoka’s father is Amitrochates,

which can only be the corruption of some title assumed by Bindusara,

but notwithstanding the near coincidence of sound which Amitro-chates

bears to Amaya-bhuta or Amogha-bhuta, it is quite impossible to identi-

fy them, as the first was a Brahmanist, while Kunanda, as we have

shown, was a Buddist. It is equally impossible to identify him with

the Brahminical Chandra Gupta Maurya; but amongst his immediate

predecessors, the nine Nandas, the only difficulty seems to be with

which of them he is to be identified. This is however a matter of little

consequence, as the elder Nanda Mahapadma, and his eight sons reign-

ed conjointly for one hundred years previous to the accession of Chan-

dra Gupta, in about B.C.312. Thenine Nandas were therefore contem-

poraries of Alexander the Great.

Of the first Nanda Mahapadma it is said inthe Vishnu and Bhdgavut

Puranas ‘he will bring the whole earth under one umbrella, his rule

being irresistible’ He was therefore a powerful monarch. That he

was a Buddhist however, I cannot affirm; although the following pas-

sage from Wilson’s translation of the Mudra Rakshasa, would seem to

countenance the opinion that the Prince and even his councillors were

of that faith. See Hindu Theatre, vol.2 pp. 159 60, where Chanakya the

Brahman says,

There is a fellow of my studies, deep

In planetary influence and policy,

The Brahman Induserma ; him I sent,

When first I vowed the death of Nanda, hither ;

And here repairing as a Bauddha mendicant,

He speedily contrived to form acquaintance

And friendship with the royal councillors,

Above them all does Rakshasa repose

In him implicit confidence.

It is hardly possible that King Nanda and his councillors would have

admitted a Bauddha mendicant to their friendship, had they been Brah-

1841.] Description of some Ancient Gems and Seals, &c: 157

manists; for there can scarcely have been less pollution toa Hindu in

the friendship than inthe contact of a Buddhist. The Bhaganat Pura-

na also says that Nanda and his successors were ‘ Sudras, void of piety.’

The Vishna Purana adds that he was avaricious; and they both agree in

stating that a Brahman was the chief agent in destroying the nine

Nandas. Avarice and want of piety are the usual sins attributed to any

Prince who neither respects nor entertains the Brahmans ; and such sins

would of course be committed by every Buddhist King ; who like Asoka

would have turned out all the Brahmans supported at the royal expense

and have entertained Buddhist priests in their place. 1 cannot there-

fore help suspecting that as a Brahman was the chief conspirator

against the Nandas itis more probable that the rebellion was only a re-

ligious struggle for political ascendancy, in which the Brahman Kautilya

succeeded in establishing the authority of his own caste and religion

under thenew King Chandra Gupta; than that it was a justifiable up-

rising of the people, occasioned by the avarice and tyranny of Nanda.

Nanda himself was called Mahapadma ; his wife was called Sumanda ;

and his eight sons, according to the Vishnu and Bhaganat Puranas, were

‘ Sumalya and others.’ To one of these nameless princes then I would

attribute this seal, if not to the elder Nanda Mahapadma himself, to

whom the coins almost certainly belong :—for it appears from the Rajah

Taringini that the younger or junior Rajas were not allowed the pri-

vilege of coining in their own names; and therefore the eight sons of

Nanda, who reigned conjointly with their father can scarcely have

struck any coins :—but whether the seal belongs tothe father or to one

of his sons, its age is not affected by the uncertainty ; and we may there-

fore consider it as old at least as the time of Alexander the Great.

No. 23. Copper.—This seal cannot I think be more than three hun-

dred years old, and perhaps not even so much. The inscription in. mo-

dern Devanagari is Sri Hara Deva-jt sahadya pardmanda. The fortunate

Hara Deva, the companion of happiness.

ALEXANDER CUNNINGHAM.

Note.—A gem identical with No. 2 of the plate supplied me by Lt. Cunningham

is noted by Bayer (the first investigator of Bactrian history) as No. 37 in the splen-

did collection of gems belonging to Martin Von Ebermayer, a wealthy merchant of

Nuremburg, which he illustrated in a very erudite work under the following title :—

* Gemmarum Affabre Sculptarum Thesaurus, quem suis sumptibus haud exiguis, nec

parvo studio collegit lo. Mart. ab Ebermayer.’ The engravings of the collection which

accompany the letter press are exceedingly well executed : a copy of the work (Fol.

ed. prin.) is in my possession and now lies before me, ‘The design, from Bayer’s note

upon it, would appear to have been a favorite one ; he speaks of two other gems (Thes.

antiq. Greec.) not dissimilar, which Angustin held to represent not Omphale but Jole,

but he afterwards abandoned that opinion, and declared the figure (as did also Begero

PylsBw

Mode of taking facsimiles of coins. —By VINCENT TREGEAR, Esa.

The coin is placed between two dices of lead, and the whole com-

pressed, either by a lever or screw, till the coin is well indented into the

lead, from which latter impressions, the wax ones are made, and, being

in relief, are of course far better than if taken from the coin itself.

To form the dice, a piece of plank, about one-third of an inch thick,

is bored though with a centre bit somewhat smaller than the coin to be

copied, it is then cut into halves, to facilitate the removal of the lead which

is cast into it, the mould being placed in a piece of smooth wood, or still

better, on a piece of dry brick rubbed very smooth. The bottom of the

dice may not be smooth at first but will be so after a few castings have

heated the brick, or it may be heated on the fire while the lead is melting.

The best mould is a brass ring, the hole being bored or turned slightly

conical then by merely raising it the lead falls out ; it should be laid on

a piece of brass nicely polished, which will give the lead a bright smooth

face. A screw press is the best, but a simple lever will answer every pur-

pose; care being taken to keep all level that the coin may sink equally

into the lead, and the pressure must be removed when the edges of the lead

meet or nearly so, according to the thickness of the coin. There is very

little danger of injuring the coin, the lead being the softer metal, but if

from any cause, the relief, for instance, on one side falling opposite a

hollow or plain surface on the other, there should be a chance of deform-

ing it, the best plan is to take each side separately, the opposite one

being imbedded in sealing wax.

To obtain a perfect impression from the leaden dice they should be

heated, which is most conveniently done by meltinga small quantity of

sealing wax* and leaving the dice on it while the wax for the impression

Thes. Palat’?) to be none but Omphale, ‘ accuratiore carminis Ovidiani consideratione

inductus, ‘ as Bayerinforms us. He himself is cautious as to giving a decisive opi-

nion, saying in his description of the gem, ‘IOLE, nisi potius OMPHALE, amasia

HERCULIS, cujus eaclavam, et leoninum integuinentum jocose oblatum gestat.? The

identity of the design could not be more satisfactorily proved than by the ‘ jocose obla-

tum’ of Bayer, compared with Lt. Cunningham’s similar expression. This instance of

the discovery in the East ofthe duplicates of gems of Grecian origin extant in the

West is not the only one which 1 shall shortly have it in my power to eite, pre-

senting more remarkable features than those of mere identity.

A gem (No, 4, Tab. VI.) of the Ebermayer collection is also nearly identical with

No. 9, of the plate before us. It represents with better execution, a crow seated on,

instead of beside (as in No. 9), alow shrub, in exactly the same attitude as in our

gem. ‘This may represent the crow, Bayer suggests, sacred-to Apollo, ‘nisi rectius

censuit (1 c.19) Gronovius, quod sit corniz ab ilice predicens decantata Virgilio.’

The attitude and expression of the bird fully favour the ingenious suggestion, but it is

singular to find a passage in the’ Bucolics Ed. IX. illustrated on a gem from Aff=

ghanistan.

* This wax can be used to heat several seals with.

1841.] Report on the Soda Soils of the Barramahal. 159

is preparing, for the latter an argued lamp is the best as it does not dis-

colour wax,a quantity must be dropped ona card sufficient to form the

seal, and then the whole re-heated and the warm lead pressed down while

the wax is very hot, but not so long as any air bubbles continue to rise’

and it would be better to mix the wax with a thin bit of stick, drawing it

somewhat towards the centre; the lead should not be removed until the

wax is quite hard, and then, if the operation has been carefully performed

the impression will be found as perfect as the coin itself. 1 have found

the common hard yellow wax of the bazaar to take the most legible

impression and would recommend the use of it in preference to any

other colour.

I beg to suggest that the Society make a collection of such impres-

sions, which would be valuable as a means of reference, particularly in

the case of such coins as are taken from the country. They should not

be shut up in a cabinet, but placed in frames, formed of a thick plank

bored with holes of a fit size and covered with a glass front fitting close

to the surface of the wood—the metal of the coin might be indicated,

as in engravings, by its initial letter placed between the impressions ; and

the legend written above it, the whole classed and arranged in chronolo-

gical order as far as possible. For the sake of uniformity the Society

might decide on a particular coloured wax to be used in all impressions

made for their collection, and the cards used should be left uncut, to be

subsequently fitted to the holes in the frames which, of course, would

be all of one size.

The Society would thus have the benefit of a large collection without

any expense, and I have no doubt that every one who has a collection

would gladly take the little trouble required to furnish copies of his coins.

I must repeat there is no danger of harming most coins, as my friend

Capt. Cunningham and myself have subjected our owa to the ordeal

without injury.

Report on the Soda Soils of the Barramahal. By Captain Camp-

BELL, AssISTANT Surveyor GENERAL.

Soda soils are very common in the principal plain of the Baramahal in

the Salem District, which is bounded on the North by the Hills of

Congoondy, on the East by the Jawaudy Hills, on the South by the

abrupt break in the levels at the Topoor Ghaut, and on the west by the

hills of Roycottah.

In extent they are generally not more than about 3 a mile square; the

160 Report on the Soda Soils of the Barramahai. [No. 110.

soil is sandy and incapable of supporting vegetation, no herb growing om

them, but a scanty scrubby grass. In general they lay upon a bed of

Kunkur, which is sometimes, as near Paulcode, of considerable depth.

These beds of soda soil are well known to the natives, who call them

in Tamul, Chour Munno—and extract the soda for the purpose of fluxing

powdered white quartz to make bangles with. ‘The Dhobees also collect

the earth, and by lixivating it make a solution of soda which they use in

washing clothes by adding quick lime, to make the solution caustic. But.

so ignorant are they in general of the principle of the mode of use, that

they often convey the earth sometimes fifty miles, not being aware that.

the labour of carriage might be decreased by extracting the salt.

The Bangle makers extract the impure soda by mixing the earth with

water in a pit, and allowing it to settle, the solution is then drawn off,

and evaporated by sprinkling it on cowdung spread upon the surface of a

granite rock. When the cake has become about half an inch in thick-

ness, it is taken off and is broken into pieces, in which state it is called

Chour Billah and is stored in houses for use, sometimes to the amount of

400 maunds.

The Chour Billah is sold at the rate of 173 Rupees per ton, and con-

tains 23 per cent. of insoluble matter, the soluble part being in greatest

part all carbonate of soda with a little vegetable and extractive matter,

and some muriate and sulphate of soda in small quantity. A solution of

it will not crystallize in consequence of the extractive matter, and the

natives are quite ignorant of the mode of crystallizing it, and do not

even know that it contains a salt.

In Bengal soda soils are also found, but according to Dr. O’Shaughnessy,.

(Manual of Chemistry, page 227) it contains 15 per cent. of sulphate of

soda, which salt being more soluble in hot than cold water cannot be se-

parated by crystallization from the carbonate, and the product of these

soils in Bengal cannot therefore be applied to any useful purpose unless

the very expensive process of decomposing the sulphate by fusion in a

furnace is resorted to.

Being engaged in an extensive chemical examination of the minerals

of this district in which pure carbonate of soda is required in consider-

able quantity as a flux, and as the price of the salt as vended in retail at

Madras is very great, it has occurred to me to endeavour to supply the

want from the mineral resources of the country.

I have found by experiment that a very pure carbonate of soda may be

separated from the crude soda, which the soils of Barramahal yield by

simply charring the Chour Billah, or the residue, after evaporating to dry-

1841.] Report on the Soda Soils of the Barramahal. 161

ness in a gentle heat, by which the extractive and vegetable matters are

converted into charcoal, and can then be simply extracted by filtering, and

the solution will then crystallize on evaporating to a pellicle. The first

crystallization gives a tolerably pure soda, coloured a little by the impuri-

ties, but after crystallizing 3 or 4 times the crystals are beautifully white

and transparent, and after six crystallizations, the salt is so pure as hardly

to give any precipitate with nitrate of silver or nitrate of barytes after

supersaturation with nitric acid, denoting thereby the nearly total absence

of any muriate or sulphate.

In England great quantities of carbonate of soda are required in glass

making, soap making and dyeing. This was formerly prepared from the

Spanish Barilla, which contains, according to Dr. Ure, muriate and sul-

phate of soda, lime and abumina, and only at most 24 per cent. of soda.

A large quantity was also made from kelp prepared in the Scottish Isles,

but this is no longer manufactured, as it has been found that in conse-

quence of the cheap price of sulphuric acid, soda can be manufactured by

decomposing the muriate of soda (common salt) at a price which remu-

nerates the manufacturer.

In this operation the muriate is first decomposed by heating it in leaden

vessels with sulphuric acid, by which the muriatic gas is driven off and

which is condensed and allowed to run to waste as of no value, the demand

in the arts for muriatic acid being very small. The resulting sulphate of

sodais then mixed with charcoal and some lime, and is roasted by a

powerful heat in a reverberatory furnace by which itis partly decomposed

and formed into sulphurate of soda, which by further heat and stirring is

again decomposed and the sulphur volatilized andan impure mixture of

carbonate of soda ashes, and charcoal results, which is called in trade

‘black balls,’ and is an article of commerce.

This impure product is then further purified by solution in water, fil-

tering, and evaporation to dryness without crystallizing, in which state it

is called ‘ Soda Ash’ and is used by the glass blowers.

The salt is still very impure, being mixed with sulphate and muriate of

Soda, and does not contain its full equivalent of carbonic acid, being in

fact a mixture of caustic and carbonate of soda.

For the makers of plate glass who require a very pure carbonate of soda

as a flux, to prevent the chance of the glass being discoloured, the soda

ash is mixed with sawdust, and is again fused in a powerful furnace, by

which it is fully carbonized and rendered capable of crystallizing. It is

then dissolved in water, and is crystallized once for the use of the plate

glass makers, and six or seven times for the use of apothecaries. In the

162 Report on the Soda Soils of the Barramahal. [No. 110.

latter state it is sold for 10 pence per pound retail or 52 per cent wholesale.

In this state I have found by experiment that the article is exactly the

same as the product before described, and the two are therefore equally

valuable. ,

For the plate glass makers the necessity of having the flux pure is

so great, that the expensive process of decomposing common salt by

pearlash (carbonate of potash) is sometimes resorted to and the result-

ing muriate of potash being a little crystallizable, the carbonate of soda is

separated by evaporation and crystallization.

The cost of manufacture from the Indian mineral soda cannot be

ascertained but by extensive experiment, but as it will be seen that

the process I have described, is very much the same as that in

making saltpetre, the inference, that the expense will be nearly the

same in both manufactures, may be allowed, and as saltpetre is made for

2 Rupees per maund, therefore it would seem that nearly pure carbonate

of soda can be manufactured in South India for less than 5 Rupees per

cent.

As the soils which yield this product, are now quite unproductive, and

the time required for the manufacture is during the dry weather when

theryots are unemployed, the agricultural produce cannot be affected

while the revenue will be certainly increased.

While the cotton trade of Sonth India is so rapidly increasing, an

article for export which will serve the purpose of dead weight for ballast_

ing the ships will be much required, and as carbonate of soda is not

affected by exposure to air or damp, it may be packed in bags and will

be useful for the purpose.

As these soils are of limited extent, and as the manufacture cannot be

carried on during the whole year, therefore the produce must always be

limited, and the introduction of the article into the markets of England,

cannot affect the present market price, because the quantity yielded in

India can only take the place of a certain quantity now produced by the

manufacturers of England, and the price will always therefore be regulated

by that at which the English manufacturers can afford to sell.

eS ee

On the introduction of the Indian Soda to the market of England the — |

manufacturers will doubtlessly endeavour to prevent its sale by endea-

vouring to undersell it, even going so far as to sell their own manufac-

ture at a loss, but as it has been shewn that the Indian Soda can

be made for little more than 10 shillings per cent., it would seem im_

possible that the endeavour to exclude it from the English markets

could be successful.

Fe41. | Report on the Kaolin Earth of Mysore. 163

I have been unable to procure certain information regarding the price

at which the inferior kinds of impure Soda are sold in England, but

when the expensive and laborious process as above described, is con-

sidered, it seems almost impossible that any product can be made

at so cheap a rate, as that procured by the simple manipulation required

for the mineral salt. ;

I have endeavoured by sending to England samples through a com-

mercial gentleman to make this report more complete, by being able to

state the value of the article on certain grounds, but have been un-

successful, the point appearing to depend in great measure on the im-

port duty which will be charged in England By the present regula-

tions, natural alkali imported from places within the limits of the Ho-

norable Company’s charter pays a duty of 2 shillings per cent. but to

ascertain the point it appears to be necessary to ship a few tons, and

then try by experiment at what rate of duty the article will be admitted.

I am aware that some yearsago attempts had been made to introduce

Indian Soda into the English market, but which failed in consequence

of the opposition of the English manufacturers, but I submit, that the soils

now pointed out, yielding by single crystallization a pure Soda, were not

before known, and in consequence, in the former experiments to which

I refer, it became necessary to fuse the salt for the purpose of purifying

it, which expensive process of course prevented a successful competi-

tion with the manufacturers of England.

Report on the Kaolin Earth of Mysore.—By Carr. J. CAMPBELL,

Assistant Surveyor General.

A great portion of the level surface of the table land of Mysore, is

formed of a red ferruginous arenaceous earth, resembling much some of the

softer varieties of the upper red sandstones of England.

This formation, which may be called for convenience ‘ Red Marle,’ is

superposed upon acontinuous bed of hornblendic granite, and is con-

nected with it by a graduation, both in structure and composition,

through an interposed layer of white kaolin earth which is found be-

_ tween the two.

The kaolin is in some places several feet in thickness, and is generally

Tey ‘ . .

of a pure white colour, and soft greasy feel, and is sometimes mixed

with a fine quartoze sand in small quantity.

This kaolin is mentioned by Dr. Heyne, who mistook it for pipeclay.

164 Report on the Kaolin Earth of Mysore. --[No. 110.

The extent of this bed of kaolin I have not had an opportunity of

ascertaining, but I know that it is found from Bangalore as far north as

Nundydreog.

That this kaolin is fitted for the manufacture of the finer kinds of

pottery and porcelain I have been able to ascertain by direct experiment,

in consequeuce of the laborious process, and, to an individual, expensive

apparatus required to grind it down to an impalpable powder, by stones

of hornstone under water: but from its mineralogical characters I

believe there can be little doubt of its being of finer quality than many

kinds in England.

My attention was called to the mineral in consequence of being en-

gaged in researches on the fusibility of the rocks and minerals of the

Salem district, generally called igneous, m which it was necessary to

expose them to avery high degree of heat, in a wind furnace sufficiently

powerful to fuse cast steel, and for which I could procure no crucibles

at a sufficiently cheap rate, and 1 have found this kaolin, when mixed

with an equal quantity of finely pounded quartz, to fully answer the pur-

pose of affording crucibles and covers, upon which the most intense heat

has hardly any effect, the outside being only slightly glazed by the alkali

of the fuel, and the crucible being very slightly softened. They are

also much superior to those called Hessian, in not cracking, unless by very

extreme changes of temperature.

In Calcutta, there are probably many manufactories carried on in the

fusion of metals, &c. where this earth would be of great value, and it

might even be useful in the manufacture of fire bricks, for lining furnaces,

&c.,. if the carriage by land for 200 miles would not render them too

expensive.

At Madras, at the mint for making mufles and crucibles, at the Gun

Carriage manufactory, and in several other manufacturing depots, this

kaolin might be useful; and a manufacture of the articles might be

either established at Bangalore, or the earth itself might be transported.

Coarse Chinaware is an article of import from China, and plates of this

ware are purchased in considerable quantities by some of the Natives at

4 annas each, while it is reasonable to suppose that these articles might be

manufactured in Mysore at a cheap rate, without the necessity of any

very expensive machinery being required..

1841.] [[ 165 J

Proceedings of the Asiatic Society, Wednesday Evening, 5th May, 184.

Tue Honoraste Sir E. Ryan in THE Cuatr.

Library Museum.—Calcutta Monthly Journal for March, 1841,

Agata. Liesl ataidy « copies Pr ee AN Ree Se pe een ae Ena ET Pp.

The Christian Observer, for May, 1841, New Series, Vol. 2d, No. 17, P

Annals and Magazine of Natural History, Dec. 1840, No. 37, ...... P.

Ochterlony’s Mineralogical Report upon a portion of the Districts

of Nellore, Cuddapah and Guntoor. Madras, 1841,.............. Ps

Samlede Afghandlinger, of R. K. Rask. Kobenhaon, 1838, Tredie

errs .”. sioa). veh leven Stand Bie oF pit ai he Blo aiende dieters ole ban 1

At the meeting of the 7th of April last it was resolved to i to the

eommittee of papers (with reference to the offer of Mr. H. B. Koing,

Bookseller at Bonn, to be entrusted with the sale of the Society’s

Oriental works) to consider the prices of those works and to reduce

them to a scale suitable to the means of the scholars and students of

Germany. Dr. Heberlin submitted the following list exhibiting the

rates at which he suggested the books should be priced, viz.

Mahabharata, with contents. ..... ds: ce tots tds crated Rs. 40

Large paper, ditto ditto ......+... ie ete ghee siaiipl este oh y teat gO

Slatrrwanesd 52. feels. dence Bo ciehad hee cabetewasy ofeyeis att sith S

Rajah Tarangini............ erhichis atid ager ate’ als tont Thy oe

MR RIEE DIS) 21. fino late) ie, wtala dolmie draw scoeedl oppie'bye\i avesl ag 9

DMRS SS, ie siisi'el 83h) ale Laide ote cole Feber the ied, a. le » &

SG 7g a 2 or A ee ee aie OT hae

RANI RDS cPISEAY, DLM ‘stata Os Saleidle Mole vwralelnkye ai aieyay dh eheseonteg NS

emery EUDIIE Ciciales gr ae bie ein’ Wh f stete dapayell tore aie ald oth dodo 951)

MRD INYZR oe, 65 25.2 )cle oa CEE ofa Oba - hn show «wile sities: i &

Anis ul Musharrahin ............. deel wclenteieache Ae » oO

Sharaya ool Islam ...... tid A ENERO «citi cine hie Ames

Tibetan Grammar....... Shatiice aie cen tetneh spss HIVEE anaes « » &

CALC HLOMATN 4.025) alah Hiss, Pape w ti0i wiareiaid Soin aie Sioa mw aes 6 i LO

BUCSCATENES .. 0s vo 0 ctcte Hy Ase ela Wee tiga Cra « ove «5 pene) (W

Ordered that the reduced taka be adopted and the list printed_in the

Journal of the Asiatic Society for guidance, that Mr. Koing’s services be

accepted and a selection of the Oriental Books be made and forwarded to

him by the first favorable opportunity, with suitable instructions, as well

as regards the disposal of the books as of the funds which may from

thi

166 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society, &c. [No. 110.

time to time accrue in his hands as sales are effected.

Read the following Report submitted by the Officiating Curator for the

month of April last.

H. Torrens, Esq., Secretary Asiatic Society.

Sir.—My report on the Museum, for the month of April, isas follows :

Geological, Mineralogical and Paleontological Department.—We continue

to arrange and catalogue here at all spare times. Amongst the collections

lately arranged are Capt. Hutton’s valuable geological series, the fruits

of his journey to the Spiti valley, tothe expenses of which the Society

I think contributed very liberally. The duplicates of this collection

have been sent home to the Court of Directors, but we are sadly in

want of the catalogue to it, were it only that of the localities. You

have I believe addressed Capt: H. on this subject.

We have, at last, obtained the first of onr printed catalogues from

the press, and as completed copies will be placed in the cases, a part

of the Palceontolovical collections are labelled, and of these also we shall

soon have printed catalogues. Our Index, which is wanted at every turn,

has not yet appeared.

Osteological Department.—We have here at length been able to place

all our small skeletons in two neat glass cases. The large, ske letons have

been supported by side bars to the upright supports as suggested by

the Hou’ble the President, and all the skeletons have labels. We have

added here the skeleton of Mr. Ewbank’s Leopard, as reported in my

last.

Museum of Economic Geology.—The Catalogue and arrangement of

the copper series is completed.

Mammological Department.—Reptiles, Fishes.—Nothing new to report.

Ornithological Depariment.—We have here added nine new specimens,

mounted, eight of which are part of Lieut. Tickell’s collection, and one

Taleo is from Mr. White of Midnapore.

Presentations this month have been the Gud Faleo, stuffed and mount-

ed, from C. P. White, Esq., Midnapore.

I am, Sir, your’s, very obediently,

H. PippincTon,

Officiating Curator, Asiatic Society’s Museum.

Museum, 30th April, 1841. |

With reference tothe want of a Catalogue of Captain Hutton’s valuable

Geological Collections of the Spiti Valley, noticed by Mr. Piddington in his

1841.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society, &¢. 167

Report, it was resolved that a communication be made to that Officer for

furnishing one.

The Secretary reports the receipt of a letter dated the 20th April last,

from Lieut. W. I. E. Boys of the 6th Light Cavalry, offering a large collec-

tion of objects of Natural History, ‘ which in making had occupied almost

his sole attention for the last seven years.’

‘The Collection,’ writes Lieut. Boys, ‘ has been made and the objects

prepared only by myself, and I believe myself warranted in saying that

nothing superior has ever been made in that line, as no expense has

been spared. It consists of upwards of 350 species of Birds, the whole

collected within 50 miles of Mhow Malwa, and of upwards of 200 while

glass bottles containing every variety of Snakes, Scorpions, Centipedes

and other reptiles, together with the fishes of different parts of India, in

spirits, a quantity of Alligators and Gavialis, Boas, &c, several species

of the River Turtle and Tortoises, and a superb collection of Insects.’

The whole Lieut. Boys’ offers for Rs. 6,000, a sum much below their

real value.

It was resolved that before coming to any final decision on Lieut.

Boys’ offer, that that O icer be requested to furnish a descriptive Cata-

logue of the collections referred to.

Read a Letter from Lt. A. Cunningham of Engineers, dated 29th April

last, advising the dispatch of coins purchased from him by the Secretary

for presentation to the Cabinet of the Asiatic Society. Lt. Cunningham

adds, ‘I have decided upon publishing as complete a work upon our

Indian coins as can be made. It will take some months to complete the

plates, but I have already done three of them. The Ist Vol. will contain

the coins of the Bactro-Grecian, Indo-Grecian, Indo-Parthian, and Indo-

Scythian Princes of Bactriana, Ariana and the Punjab. It will contain

20 Plates and about 150 pages of letter press, or perhaps 200 pages, and

will I hope be ready by the Ist January next. The title of the work

will be ‘ Coins of Alexander’s successors in the East.’

In another letter that Officer also writes:—

‘I have just read the only one of all my Kashmeerian coins which had

hitherto baffled me. Sri Foramd (na). Now Toramana was the Zuvardja

(or Cesar) in A.D. 450, and was imprisoned by his elder brother (the

Augustus) for coining money in his own name; and here we have the

identical coins that caused Toramdna’s imprisonment and also a decided

proof of the truth of the Kashmeerian history. I have the coins of 14

Rajahs, and of six Moosulman Kings, making a series of 20 Kings, the

most numerous of any Indian sovereignty that has yet been discovered.’

168 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society, &c. [No. 110.

The Secretary informed the meeting of Lt. Cunningham’s having de-

clared hitnself a convert to the identification of the supposed Mayas, held

by several authorities to have been one of the early Bactrian Monarchs,

with Demetrius, a position originally suggested, and maintained at some

length, by the Secretary, in No. of the Journal of the Asiatic Society.

Read the following Letters, viz. From the Secretary, Political Depart-

ment, Government of India, No. 1077, dated the 26th April 1841, transmit-

ting a Report by Mr. Asst. Surg. Walker, on the Geology and Manufac-

tures of the Hunum Koondah district of the Nizam’s Dominions, for

such notice as the subject may merit.

N.B.—Specimen of produce, as Indigo, &c. &c. from the province in

question, have been since received, and will be submitted to the Society at

their next meeting, with the Curator’s report upon the objects to be

submitted.

From‘Mr. C. P. White of Midnapore, of 19th April 1841, sending a

specimen in Ornithology for the Society’s Museum.

From Mr. R. Clarke, Hony. Secy. Royal Asiatic Society, London, dated

7th November 1840, acknowledging the receipt of the Journal for No-

vember and December 1839, and the Mahabharata, Vol. IV.

Read a letter from Major Thoresby, Jyepore, 5th April 1841, apprizing

the dispatch of the stone at the gorge of the Teoree Ghat near Buerath,

bearing the Palee Inscription in ancient characters, a copy of which was

taken and forwarded to the Asiatic Society by Capt. Burt. Also some

specimens of ores of the mines in the Khetree hills.

The Secretary submitted to the meeting, presented by Robert Torrens

Esq., the Magistrate of the 24-Pergunnahs, a quantity of coins of the

Mussulman Kings of Bengal, found by a Gang of convicts employed on

the Roads at Howrah. The coins, as read by the Hon. H. T. Prinsep,

Esq., are as follows :

N.B.—Q, and R. stand for obverse and reverse of the coins.

No. 1. O. Alwasik bu tueed ul Rhuman abooul Moojahid Secunder

Shah ibn Ulyas Shah ussooltan.

R. Yumeen ul Khuleefut [ahi Nasir ameer ul moomuneen,

Oun ul islam oo ul moosulimeen; Khuladu Moolkuhoo.

(Circular legend not legible.)

No. 2. QO. Ulsooltan ul adil, Ghums ood dunya oo ood deen, Aboo ul

Moozuffur, Ilyas Shah ussooltan, _

R. Sekunder oosanee Yumeen ul Khuleefut, Ameer ul Moo-

muneen,

1841.]

No.

No,

. 10.

19.

Proceedings of the Asiatic Society, &c. 169

. (broken) Ussooltan ul adil, Aboo Moozufur Secunder Shah,

Ibn Ulyas, Shah ussooltan.

. Yumeen Khuleefut Ilahi, Nasir, Ameer ulmoomuneen,

Oun il [slam oo ul mooslumeen.

Aboo u! moojabid Secunder Shah, Ibn Ilyas Shah ul Ben-

gallee.

. Nasir, Ameer ul moomuneer, Oun ul Islam oo ul moos-

lumeen.

. Julal oodunya oo uddeen, aboo ulmoozufur Mahomed

Shah.

. Nasir, Ameer ul moomuneen QOun ul islam 00 ul moosulmeen

Ditto to No. 5.

Ditto to No. 2.

. Mahomed Shah. (Togra).

. The Kulma or profession of faith,

( Ditto) Mahomed Shah.

. Syfooddunya oo ooddeen, aboo ul moojanid Khoosro Shah,

Ibn Azim Shah, Ibn Secunder Shah, Ibn Ulyas Shah,

ussooltan.

. Nasir, &c. &c. &e.

» Shah ul Azim aboo ul Moojahid Secunder Shah, Ibn Ulyas.

. Ullah Nasir, Ameer ul moomuneen, Oun ul Islam.

. Julal ooddunya oo ooldeen, Aboo ul Moozufur Mahomed

Shah ussoo!tan.

. Nasir 00 Islam oo ul moosulmeen, Khuluda Moolkaoo !

(Too much defaced and chiseled to be legible. )

. Ulyas oodunya oo oodeen uboo ul moozufur Azim Shah,

Ibn Secunder Shah, [bn Ulyas Shah usooltan,

» Nasir, &c. (as before. )

. Sooltan ul adil Julal oldunya oo ooddeen aboo ul mujahid

Mahomed shah! khuladu moolkuhoo !

. Nasir ameer ul moomuneen, Oun ul Islam oo ulmooslimeen.

(Togra like No. 8: nearly wlegible. )

(Ditto to No. 14.)

. Ghyas ooddunya, oo oodeen, ul mulik Azim, Shah oos

soltan.

. Nasir, ameer ul moomuneen, Oun ul islam oo ul moosul-

meen.

Ghyas ooddunya 00 oolden, aboo ul moozufur Azim Shah,

Ibn Secander Shah, ibn shums ooddeen.

170 Proceedings of the Asiatic Sociély, §¢. [No. 110.

No. 20. (Ditto to No, 14.) !

No. 21. O. Ul mowukul bu taced ul Ruhman, Ghums ooddunya, oo

ooddeen, Malik Yoozbuk ussooltan.

R. Nasir, &c. &e.

No. 22. O. Ul mooyud bu deen ul Ruhman Ghums oodunya oo ood-

deen, Aboo ul moozufur Mahomed Shah Ulyas.

R. Nasir Ameer, &c. &e.

No. 23. (Ditto to No. 14.)

No. 24. (Ditto to No. 14. ) .

No. 25. O. Syfood dunya oo ooddeen, Aboo ul moozufur Khoosroo

Shah, Ibn Aeezim Shah, Ibn Secunder Shah, Ulyas shah

ulsooltan. :

R. Nasir, &c. &c.

No. 26. (Ditto to No. 5.)

No. 27. 0. (Dittoto No. 2.)

R. (defaced by chiseling.)

No. 28. ©. Ul Mooyud bu taced ul Ruhman.

R. Nasir ooddeen aboo ul moojahid Mahomed Shah ussooltan

No. 29. O. Aboo ul Moojahid Sekunder Shah, Ibn ulyas Shah,

usoooltan. !

R. Ulla nasir Khuleefut Ameer ul Moosulmeen oun ool Is-

lam, 00 ul Moosulmeen, Khuluda Moolkuhoo.

No. 30. ( Ditto to No. 5.)

No. 31. O. Ula ooddunya ooooddeen Aboo ul Moozufur Mahomed

Shah.

R. The Kulma. |

(The Toghra of this coin is more legible than usual.)

Of the above numbers 8, 9, 16, 23 and 31 appear to be of Mahomed Shah

afterwards King of Hindostan, who reigned A. H. 627 to 634 (A. D. 1229

to 1236.)

Numbers 2, 7, 22 and 27 areof Ulyas or Ilias Shah, who reigned from

A. H. 744 to 760 (A. D. 1343 to 1358.)

Numbers I, 3, 4, 11 and 29 are coins of Secunder Shah son of Ulyas

Shah, who reigned from A. H. 760 to 769 (A. D. 1358 to 1367.)

Numbers 14, 17, 18, 19, 20, 23 and 24 are of Azim Shah, son of Secunder

Shah, who reigned from A. H. 769 to 775 (A. D. 1367 to 1373.)

Numbers 10 and 25 are of Syfood deen (Khoosroo Shah) son of Azim.

Shah, who reigned from 775 to 785 (A. D. 1373 to 1383.)

Numbers 5, 6, 12, 15, 26 and 30 are of Mahomed Shah, who reigned

from A. H. 794 to 812 (A. D. 1392 to 1409.)

earn erunceesc:weees ee

1841.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society, &. 171

The coin No. 21, bearing the title of Ghyas ood-deen Malik Yoozbuk

would appear to belong to the king, whoin the list of Pathan Monarchs

of Bengal (Prinsep’s Useful Tables) is noted as Ikhtiar ood-deen Malik

Foozbuk. the only king who bears this remarkable name. The thanks

of the Society were offered to Mr. Torrens for his valuable contribution,

which will be deposited in the cabinet of numismatology.

Also an old coin forwarded by Capt. Hannyngton, picked up in the

district of Manbhoom ; doubts were entertained as to the real nature of

the so called coin. It is of pewter; the marks, or characters unintelli-

gible. Further enquiry will be made on the subject, as, if it be indeed a

coin, the discovery is singular, and may be ultimately highly valuable.

Read Mr. Secretary Bushby’s Letter, No. 888, dated the 14th April

1811, in reply to the communication of the 12th idem, with the offici-

ating Curator’s report on the two specimens of rock, of which the follow-

ing is a copy: |

To H. Torrens, Esaq., Secy. to the Asiatic Society.

Sir,—In reply to your letter and its enclosure of the 12th instant, I

am directed to acquaint you that the Military Board will be requested

to instruct the Superintendent of the Agra and Bombay road, to

endeavour to procure the specimens and information suggested by the

Officiating Curator of the Asiatic Society’s Museum.

2d. The Right Honorable the Governor approves of Mr. Pidding-

ton’s proposition to supply all officers engaged in the Survey and Con-

struction of roads with a copy of Capt. Tremenheere’s Memoir.

lam, Sir, your obedient] servant,

G. W. Busupsy,

Secretary to the Govt. of Bengal.

Fort William, 14th April, 1841.

The officiating Curator submits the following report of 17th April

1841, on the collection of minerals tendered for purchase to the Asiatic

Society by Mr. Dodd.

To H. Torrens, Esq., Secretary Asiatic Society.

Sir,—With reference to the letter of Mr. Secretary Bushby on the

subject of the collection of minera!s tendered for purchase to the Asiatic

Society by Mr. Dodd, I have the honor to report that in consequence of

that gentleman’s having failed as yet to transmit me his catalogue I have

been obligedto make a rough one of the collection which has occasioned

delay in furnishing the report.

The collection consists of cbout 890 specimensin all; of which about

180. may be genera and the remainder species and duplicates. The ac-

172 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society, §e. [No. 110.

knowledged genera of minerals being about 360 in number; Mr. Dodd’s

collection comprises thus about one half of the whole and generally of

the most useful.for reference.

With this collection and those in the Society’s cabinet, we should be

able to from anearly perfect series, which is in this country a great scien-

tific desideratum, for but few have the time, or the knowledge required to

enter upon a chemical examination of a mineral, and comparison with

the specimens of a well arranged cabinet will in very many cases ob-

viate the necessity of this. The duplicates also will not be useless if (as

suggested I think in one of my previous reports) they be used in the for-

mation of § Cabinets of Instruction’ for the Hindoo, Medical and other

Colleges and public establishments, whenever it may be thought proper

to furnish them with such.

As far as I am acquainted with the prices of such things at home—

though in this respect my knowledge is very limited, I should judge that

the price askedis not excessive, and we may possibly obtain it at a cheaper

rate.

I have the honor to remain,

Sir, your obedient servant,

H. Pippineron.

Assistant Curator Asiatic Society.

Museum, 17th April, 1841.

Resolved that acopy of Mr. Piddington’s report be submitted for the

information of Government, in replyto Mr. Bushby’s Letter No. 270 of

the 24th March 1841.

Read a letter from Captain F. Jenkins, of Ist April 1841, requesting

to be supplied with extra Copies of Lt. Tickell’s papers on the ‘ Ho’

language for comparison with the numerous languages current within the

valley of Gowhatti, and to trace the dialects connected with the Tibetan

stock, and the Shan branch. Captain Jenkins writes, ‘ that the most distinct

language in all this Frontier seems to be the Garrow, as its compound

and polysyllabice character appears to separate it entirely from the Eastern

languages, and yet it does not appear to have the least connection with

the Hindu family of languages. The Garrows are isolated from all their

neighbours in regard to languages, their country is but a small one;

whence they come and how they remain in so small a space, are very

interesting questions ; and with them as with any others on this Frontier,

the languages are likely to be entirely lost before any philologists arise to

determine whence they spring. Captain Jenkins concludes his communi-

cation with some account of the Rajahs of Cachar.

1841.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society, &c. 173

Read a Letter from D. F. McLeod, Esq. of Jubbulpore, of 31st March

184], also requesting to be supplied with Lt. Tickell’s papers on the ‘ Ho’

language. ‘ Not,’ writes Mr, Macleod,‘ from mere curiosity, but because

being closely connected with Hill Tribes and greatly interested in them,

I would anxiously seize upon any means of instituting a comparison

between the language of our Gonds and the Hill people of other parts,

and facilitating to myself or others, an insight into the rudiments of their

still unknown. tongue. And being not without hope of hereafter seeing

one day a mission established amongst these people, I should wish much

to have by me for distribution one or more copies of a brochure so

admirably calculated to elicit a further enquiry.’

‘With reference to his (Lt. Tickell’s) most admirable paper on Ho-dés,

I would mention as it may be of use, that Kols still abound in Rewah, in

our Lohadgpur mahals, and are even found at Jubbulpore and Seoni.

Hence I should be disposed to presume that the term ‘ K6l’ was intro-

duced by the invaders from Ruhitas, which, as far as I can call to mind,

not having his paper with me, was not Tickell’s impression on the subject.’

With reference to the two foregoing Letters, it was moved by Dr.

Heeberlin, that they contained matters worthy of interesting enquiry and

that some one of the Members composing the Committee of Papers

should be requested to prosecute the enquiry to elicit information on the

points alluded to by Capt. Jenkins and Mr. Macleod.

Resolved that Dr. Heeberlin’s services be requested in aid of undertak-

ing the task of prosecuting such enquiry in conjunction with Baboo

Prosonocoomar Tagore.

Read a Letter from Major Burlton of the 14th April, 1841, with a col-

lection of Bactrian Coins as a loan for the Suciety’s museum. Major

Burlton further offered the duplicates of this collection to the Society,

for which courtesy as well as for his kindness in allowing the collection

to be laid before the meeting, the Secretary was directed to address that

officer with the expression of the thanks of the Society. ‘The coins con-

sisted of some silver Menanders (drach.) in excellent preservation, one

of the rude silver coins usually believed to be of Kuthydemus struck at

a provincial mint, and the rest copper coins chiefly Azes and Kadphises.

The barbarous provincial type of silver coin is ascertained to be of the

time of Euthydemus, (authority—Lieutenant Cunningham) and is found

in, or at any rate comes from, the Bokhara country.

Read a Letter and enclosure from Dr. H. H. Spry of the Sth May, 1841,

of which the following is a copy.

174 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society, &c. [No. 110.

My Dear Torrens,—I have been honored by Dr. Wm. Edwards,

whose celebrity as the author of more than one important Physiological

work must be well known to you, with a communication relative to the

establishment of a ‘ Socié/é Ethnologique’ at Paris, of which I feel proud

in having an opportunity of submitting an outline tothe notice of the

Asiatic Society of Bengal.

My distinguished friend desires to call my attention to a subject which

he says he has close at his heart. He has reminded me of the fact, that

he has established at Paris an Ethnological Society. It is composed of

distinguished and able members, and is going on remarkably well. He

then goes on to say, that his wish is to have some of the most eminent

scientific men an Calcutta named as members of the Society. He desires

that the names may be limited to four or five.

Directions for travellers have been drawn up ard published compri-

sing every point in Ethnology. A few copies have been forwarded and

Inow do myself the pleasure of placing acouple at the disposal of the

Society.

Dr. Edwards alludes tothree things that he is solicitous about. The

possession of drawings, principally outlines, with very little shade, of the

best characterized heads of the Indian races; men and women. If by

any possibility casts could be taken, another great benefit would be con-

ferred, and lastly, skulls, which Dr, Edwards hopes may without great di-

fficulty be collected. If cases die in hospital, and opportunities occur

for possessing the skull, he wishes much that a drawing of the Indian

front, of the natural size, should be made in order to arrive at an accurate

knowledge of the relation which existed betwen the skull and the fea-

tures.

Dr. Edwards asks as a favor if he could be put in possession of any draw-

ings of Indian races ;—for them, he says, the Ethnological Society of

Paris would feel deeply grateful.

1 send you these outlines, with the hope, that by giving publicity to the

objects and intentions of the Ethnological Society at Paris, through so

scientific a body as the Asiatic Society, assistance may be rendered the

physiologists of Paris in the pursuit in which they are engaged

You will see the particulars more in detail in the two accompanying

brochures of general Instructions, which perhaps you will oblige me by

laying before the Meeting of the Society to-night.

1841.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society, Sc. 175

Société Ethnologique.

INSTRUCTION Ge/NE’RALE ADRESSEE AUX VOYAGEURS, ETc.

§ 1.

DES CARACTERES PHYSIQUES.

Le point le plus important de l’éthnologie, c’est la connaissance du

type: on ne Saurait en avoir une idée suffisante sans le dessin.

1° Il faut donc dessiner les portraits de ceux que l’on veut faire con-

naitre ; et avoir soin, pour en donner une idée complete, de représenter

la téte de deux maniéres: de face et de profil.

2° Il convient aussi de faire une esquisse de tout le corps, et d’en Lien

étudier les proportions, pour savoir sielles ne présentent pas quelques

particularités, Il faut surtout faire attention a la longueur du buste re-

lativement aux membres supérieurs et inférieurs ; au creux des reins et

a la saillie de la partie scus-jacente, comme dans le Négre, Je Hottentot,

ete.

3° Il serait bon de prendre la mesure de la hauteur du corps, et d’éva-

Iner sa force au dynamométre d’une maniére approximative, si l’on n’a

pas cet instrument. |

1l est extrémement important d’avoir le portrait de homme et de la

femme, car leurs types tendent a différer d’autant plus quon s’éléve d’ a-

vantage dans l’échelle des races.

4° Toutes les fois qu’on pourra se procurer les crdnes des naturels du

pays, on n’en laissera pas échapper l’occasion, et on cherchera de méme

a obtenir des naturels qu’ils se laissent mouler leur buste.

Il y a toujours chez une nation plusieurs races; il faut done chercher

a distinguer les types purs duproduit des mélanges.

DE LA LINGUISTIQUE.

Le point le plus important aprés, les caractéres physiques, c’est la

langue. Il est évident que si l’ididme est cultivé, il y aurades gramma,

maires et des dictionnaires, qu’il sera indispensable de se procurer, s’ ils

sont raresen Kurope. Si ces ouvrages n’ existent pas, il faudra y sup-

péer en formant deux vocabulaires; l’un bref, ’autre plus étendu, selon

le temps dont on pourra disposer. L’un contiendra les noms des objets

sensibles, des idées abstraites mais usuelles; l’autre les différentes par-

ties du discours.

En second lieu, il conviendrait de faire une ébauche de grammaire ; de

176 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society, §c. [No. 110.

s’occuper d’ abord du verbe, en prenant les trois temps fondamentaux, le

présent, le passé et le futur, avec les modifications des personnes et du

nombre; puis du substantif, avec les variations du cas et du nombre; de

faire connaitre |’ accord de V’adjectif avec le substantif; les pronoms, les

propositions avec un on plusieurs régimes, et les adverbes joints a un

verbe. Sil’ on pouvait indiquer les rapports de la langue avec d’autres

ididmes qui !ui sont affiliés, ce serait un renseignement fort utile. Quel

est le mode de numération en usage P

§ LIT.

DE LA VIE INDIVIDUELLE ET DE FAMILLE.

Pour donner une idée des meeurs relatives 4 individu et 4 la famille,

il convient de prendre homme 4 sa naissance et dele suivre jusqu’ a la

mort, en faisant connaitre les actes solennels qui s’y rapportent. Ainsi,

quant a la naissance, il y a peu de nations qui n’en marquent l’époque par

quelque cérémonie ; il faudrait la faire connattre ; indiquer le lieu ou Von

dépose l’enfant ; décrire la maniére de le porter, de le vétir, de le nourrir,

de lui apprendre 4 marcher et 4 parler. Si V’on exercait quelque com-

pression sur la téte ou quelque autre partie du corps, il serait bon den

faire mention,

Quand Venfant sait marcher ou parler, quelle est son éducation domesti-

que ; car il n’y a pas de peuple qui n’apprenne aux enfans ce qu’ils doi-

vent savoir dans la suite.

Lorsque l’ individu del’ un ou de |’ autre sexe est arrivé a la puberté,

y a-t-il quelque cérémonie qui le constate, et quelles sont ses occupations

jusqu’ ace qu’ilse marie ? Informez-vous avec soin de ce qui vous avec

soin de ce quiconcerne le choix d’une femme; a4 quelles conditions on

Vaccorde, et décrivez les cérémonies du mariage. Si dans cette union

il y a pluralité de femmes ou d’ hommes, comment vivent-ils entre eux ?

Quelles sont leurs intrigues pour favoriser leurs fils ou leurs filles, et

quelle en est la conséquence pour le sort de ces derniers ? Quelle est

Vautorité du pére ou dela mére? Quel est le degré de respect filial des

enfans et quels sont en général les sentimens de famille ?

Faites connaitre le régime alimentaire des différens membres de la

société, suivant leur sexe et leur Age en indiquant: 1° les alimens; 2°

Ja maniére de les préparer; 3° les personnes qui les. apprétent.

Quels sont les vétemens du peuple, suivant la fortune, le rand, le sexe

et l yage de chaque individu ?

Ktudiez les malacties auxquelles les deux sexes sont sujets aux diverses

époques de la vie; et les différences qui ont lieu 4 cet égard entre less natu-

1841.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society, &c. 177

rels du pays et les étrangers ; les rapports de ces maladies avec le climat

et la maniére de vivre; les soins que les parens, les amis et les médecins

donnent aux malades.

Quel est le genre d’ occupation de ’ homme et dela femme? Quel est

leur Age moyen, et le terme extréme auquel ils arrivent ?

Quelles sont les cérémonies qui accompagnent ou qui suivent la mort,

telles l’ enterrement, le deuil, ect.

Ces cérémonies different-elles pour le mari etla femme? Quel est le

sort du survivant et des enfans ?

§ IV.

DE LA VIE SOCIALE

Comme les arts ne se développent guére que par des causes sociales,

nouns devons ies examiner ici.

1° Habitations, edifices, voies publiques, etc.

Le moyen le plus sir et le plus court de donner une idée exacte d’une

habitation, c’est d’en faire le dessin; en marquant par écrit les matéri-

aux dontonsert. Il enestde méme de tout édifice, ainsi que des meu-

bles ou des ornemens.

Tl convient de faire connaitre les différentes maniéres d’orienter les

maisons et les édifices, de les grouper peur former les villages, les

bourgs, les villes, ainsi que la maniére de les fortifier et de les distribuer

dans le pays. JDites si les rues sont pavées ou non et comment on fait les

chemins.

Faites connaiire tous les autres genres de constructions, tels que les

vaisseaux et les bateaux, les ports et les chantiers, les arsenaux, etc. Don-

nez une idée convenable des canaux, des jardins publics, ect.

2° Agriculture.

Enumerez les plantes qui servent 4 l’alimentation, telles que les lég-

umes, les grains as fruits; puis a la médecine, a l’habillement, a la

teinture et aux autres arts. Décrivez la maiére de les cultiver, en fisant

une attention particulicre aux amendemens (ou substances minérales

gu’on ajoute au sol), aux engrais (ou substances organiques qu’on y

méle) aux moyens de travaillerla terre avec les instrumens aratoires, aux

procédés d’irrigation. Dessinez les diverses races d’animaux domestiques,

donnez leurs caractéres distinctifs et l’usage qu’on en fait.

3° Tissage, fabrication de vétemens, ete.

' Faites connaitre la mani’parer les différens tissus écrus ou les pellet-

eries servant a lére de fore, habillement et aux autres usages domestiques.

178 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society, &c. [No. 110.

4° Teinture..

Donnez une idée suffisante de la maniére de préparer les couleurs et de

les appliquer.

5° Art de travailler le bots et les métauzx.

Marquez le degré auquel les naturels sont arrivés dans ces arts. Indi-

quez les autres métiers exercés dans le pays.

6° Professions. Arts libéraun.

Distinguez les diverses ciasses de marchands et de négocians, les hom-

mes de loi et les médecins, ainsi que leur genre d’études et leur maniére

d’epercer leur profession.

Y a-t-il des peintres, des sculpteurs, des architectes, des ingénieurs, des

peétes, des orateurs et des savans ?

Notez le point auquel sont parvenus les arts et les sciences. Rapportez,

autant que possible, quelques productions qui puissent nous donner une

idée dela maniere dont ils sont cultivés.

7° Education publique.

II serait trés utile d’énumréer les diverses espéces d’écoles publiques, le

nombre de ceux qui les fréquentent comparé a celui de la population en

dge de les suivre; décrire le genre de leurs études, et de faire connaitre

les facilités ou les obstacles que rencontrent les obstacles que rencontrent

les éléves lorsqu’ils arrivent a l’exercice de leur profession.

8° Hiablissemens de bienfarsance.

Décrivez tous les établissemens de ce genre: hdpitaux, hospices, mai-

sons de préts, institutions pour les aveugles, sourds-muets, etc.

Indiquez les bibli ques et le genre d’ouvrages quipubliquess’y trouvent,

tels que manuscrits, livres, gravures, cartes, etc.

9° Droit public et privé.

Un objet d’une haute importance serait d’étudier la constitution de

V’état, la hiérarchie des pouvoirs, les droits respectifs des gouvernans et

des gouvernés; de faire ressortir les divers rangs de la société; et de nous

apprendre s’il y a des propriétés communes ou particnliéres, leur degré de

securité, et leur mode de transmission par héritage, par vente, par dona-

tion, etc.

Comment régle-t-on les discussions qui s’élévent 4 leur égard ?

Punit-on les attentats contre les personnes et contre les propriétés ?

Quels sont les crimes et les délits dont on s’occupe, les tribunaux qui en

prennent connaissance, et dans quelle proportion se trouvent les criminels

et les délinquans par rapport a la population.

1841.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society, &c. 179

Comment asseoit-on et léve-t-on les contributions ? Quel est le rapport

entre l’impot et la perception ?

10° Relations sociales.

Les rapports de la société méritent une attention particuliére. II serait

bon de connaitre les relations qui subsistent entre les naturels du pays et

de constater s’il y a de Ja douceur ou de la dureté, dela probité ou de la

mauvaise foi, de la sécurité ou du danger dans les liaisons.

Les sociétés des hommes et des femmes sont-elles séparées ou mélées >

Les sociéte’s des hommes et des femmes sons elles séparées out mélées ?

De quelle maniére recoit-on les visites ; et qu’ offret-on en pareil cas ?

Donne-t-on souvent des repas ; et qui les compose ?

Quels sont les amusemens. publics, les différentes espéces de chasse et

de péche ? Comment les naturels voyagent-ils dans leurs pays, et. se

déplacent-ils souvent ?

Il sera bon de constater la facilité ou la difficulte que l’on rencontre a

gagner sa vie, le nombre ou la proportion des indigens ; la population

respective des deux sexes, etc.; le rapport de la mortalité aux naissances.

S’il n’y a pas de documens statistiques directs, il faudrait donner les

meilleures preuvcs de l’augmentation, de la diminution ou de l'état sta-

tionnaire de la population; le nombre des mariés, det célibataires, des.

enfans légitimes et naturels, ete.

§ V..

DES PAPPORTS DES NATURELS AVEC LES PEUPLES ETRANGERS..

1° Instetutions militariese.

Dessinez les armes, si elles ont quelque chose de particulier.

Faites connattre la maniére dont on léve les armées ; et dites si elles

sont permanentes ou non.

Quels en sont les grades, les exercises, la discipline: ?

Quelles sont en général les causes de guerre ?

Faites savoir s’il y a quelque cérémonie par laquelle on la déclare, ow si

on la fait 4 l’improviste ?

Quel est le genre de stratégie et de tactique suivi ?

Quels sont les rapports entre la cavalerie et l’infanterie, ou enfin entre

less différentes armes? Il faudrait dire encore s’il y a un droit des gens

relatif 4 la guerre et au maintien de la paix ; comment on régle les allian-

ces offensives et défensives ; comment on traite les ennemis pris a la

guerre ; sion les massacre, ou s’ils sont prisonniers ou esclaves; et dans

ces deux cas, quel est leur sort pendant qu’on les conduit aumarché et:

quelle est leur destinée dans la suite.

180 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society, &c. [No. 110,

2° Commerce.

Donnez un tableau aussi complet que possible des denrées que le pays

fournit aux indigénes et aux peuples étrangers, et de celles qu’il en recoit.

Faites connaitre les moyens de transport et les échanges soit en monnaie,

soit en nature. _ Quels sont les établissemens qui peuvent faciliter le com-

merce, tels que bourse, banque, ete. Dites le nombre d’étrangers qui

péenétrent dans le pays, et la maniére dont ils y sont traités et comment

ils en peuvent sortir P

Quels sont les pays étrangers que les naturels visitent et les moyens de

communication ?

§ VI.

DE LA RELIGION,

Quelle est l’idée que les habitants du pays se forment de Dieu et des

étres qwils regardent comme supérieurs 4 ’humanite ?

Dites ce qu’ils pensent d’une vie future, de la distribution des peines et

des récompenses.

Cherchez 4 connaitre les antres dogmes religieux.

Quelles sont les formes du culte, les différentes pratiques et céremonies

TEMELEUEES | 2

Jusqu’ & quel point le peuple croit-il aux dogmes ; et comment pratique- :

t-ils les devoirs prescrits ?

Entrez dans quelques détails sur la hiérarchie, les droits et Vinfluence

du clergé ou de ceux qui representent les prétres; et faites connaitre

Vaction morale de Ja religion sure le peuple.

Décrivez les superstitions et la maniére dont elles agissent sur les

s0ciétés.

§ VII.

DES RAPPORTS DU PEUPLE AVEC LES CONDITIONS EXTERIEURES.

1° Sol.

La terre est-elle plane ou montueuse ? Quelles sont les riviére, les lacs,

les marais, les marécages ; et quelle est lanature géologique du terrain ?

L’eau estelle contenue dans le lit des fleuves, ou déborde-t-elle ? Y a-t-il

de eau et des terres salées? Dans quelle étendue se trouve la partie

boisée ?

Indiquez-nous le degré de fertilité de la terre ; et dans quelle propor-

tion se trouvent les parties productives avec les parties stériles. Donnez

une indication des objects utiles, nuisibles ou curieux qui peuvent exister

dans les régnes organique ou inorganique.

;

1841.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society, &e. 181

2° Climat.

Faites connattre :

1° du jour.

1° La température, :

¢ PS trot moyenne 2° du mois.

1° 2 2° La pression barometrique s.

et extreme }3° du trimestre.

3° La quantité de pluie, :

4° de l’annce.

mois.

2° Les jours ee pie par trimestre,

d’orage

année,

3° L’intensité de lumiére solaire comparée a la lumiére diffuse (a

Yombre) ; succession et variation des saisons.

§ VITI.

DES TRADITIONS HISTORIQUES, REVOLUTIONS POLITIQUES ET ANTIQUITIES.

Il faudra rechercher d’abord quels sont chez un peuple les souvenirs

qu’il a conservés de son origine et de ses affinités avec d’autres peuples;

quelles sont les révolutions qu'il a éprouvées dans sa langue ou dans ses

maceurs, dans les arts et dans les sciences, dans sa richesse, sa puissance

ou son gouvernement, pardes causes internes ou des invasions étrangeéres.

Quelles sont les sources od I’on peut puiser Jes instruction demandées ?

Sont-ce des documens historiques ou des monumens de [’arts? Dans le

premier cas, ces documens sont-ils consignés dans des poemes ou dans des

Ouvrages purement historiques? 11 serait fort heureux de pouvoir en

donner une idée,

Dans le second cas, il sera nécessaire de donner un dessin et une des-

cription pour les parties qui l’exigent, des édifices monnaies dont on peut

tirer quelque fruit pour Ja solution des questions proposées,

Cherchez dans les traditions mythologiques tout ce qui se rapporte &

Vhistoire du pays.

Quelles sont les opinions des naturels sur la cosmogonie; quel est leur

systeme de chronologie; et jusqu’a quelle époque remonte-t-elle ?

NV.B.—The Secretary begs to recommend the above ‘Instructions’ to

the attention of members of the Society, whose position throws them into

communications with any of the tribes and races in Central India, or on the

frontiers whose distinctive characteristics are so strongly pronounced, as

is generally the case with those semi-barbarous people. The considera-

tion of thes septs with reference to the several attributes as noted by

Dr. Edwards, would form a highly interesting and useful study. The

Secretary has been fortunate enough to recover among some papers, re-

cently sent to the Society’s rooms, an essay on the principles of Ethno-

logy by Dr. Woods, a corresponding member of the Parisian Ethnological

182 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society, §¢e. [No T1

Society. This is placed at the disposal of the Editor of the Journal of

the Asiatic Society, for early publication.

With reference to the request of Dr. Edwards of Paris, ‘ for Heads of

the Indian races’ to serve as aid to his studies in Ethnology, the Secretary

suggested a collection of Grant’s ‘ Heads,’ should be forwarded, but Dr..

Spry had already anticipated him, and it was resolved to refer the Letter

to Professor O’Shaughnessy to ascertain if ‘ Casts’. were not available:

from the native modeller in his employ.

The Secretary informed the meeting that a ‘ Circular,’ by desire of the

Governor General, has been issued by Dr. Pearson, for contributions of

subjects of Natural History for enriching the Barrackpore Menagerie,

the Zoological Society and the East India Company’s Museum.

The Secretary noticed that a Sanscrit work was laid by Baboo.

Sooruj Narain Roy before the Society. It was resolved that it be re-

ferred to Dr. Heberlin for examination, and report of the merits of the

publication in question.

For the presentations and contributions, the thanks of the Society were

accorded.

JOURNAL

OF THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY.

Of the early History of Sindh, from the “ Chuch Namuh” and other

authorities. By Linut. Postans, Assist. Pol. Agent, Shikarpore.

[My able correspondent, Lieut. Postans, has been for some time persever-

ingly employed in tracing out whatever material is available in Sindh, for

the purpose of throwing light upon its early history. A book called the

Chuch Namuh,” is the principal authority to which he has had recourse in

preparing the historical sketch, which he has enabled me to have the satisfac-

tion of publishing. Both he and Capt. Hart (2d Grenadiers, Bombay army)

who has been turning his attention to similar pursuits, despair of discover-

ing any more authentic work bearing upon the early history of Sindh, and

agree in describing the modern Sindhees as so illiterate and apathetic, as

neither to have the will, nor the power to further their researches. I still,

however, do not despair of the recovery of other, authorities, as the country

becomes better known to us.

In the mean time, Lieut. Postans has ably and successfully availed himself

of all the material at his disposal, which, dating from the Mussulman in-

roads, may be fairly considered as authentic. The short notice of the

history of Sindh before that period, to be found in the works of Mussulman

authors, must be necessarily in many respects of a traditional character,

and we indeed find, that the Chuch Namuh does not attempt to do more than’

describe the revolution which destroyed the ancient Sindian dynasty in

the century immediately preceding the Islamite invasion. The use of the

modern Persian name Bruhmanabad, as applied to a city in the days of

Chuch, gives sufficient proof of the loose manner in which the Mussulman

historian collected his material ; he was perhaps, in the spirit of a genuine

Moslem, careless of all respecting the infidel inhabitants of the land, which was

not in some way immediately connected with the advent of his own people.

No. 111. New Series, No. 27.

184 Of the early History of Sindh. [ No. 111.

We are not the less bound to acknowledge our obligations to Lieut.

Postans, for having undertaken the task of laying, compendiously, before an

English reader, the first historical notice of Sindh, which has I believe appear-

ed unconnected with the history of other lands and peoples. | ae

CHAPTER I.

Sindh—its situation—climate—name whence derived—early history—ca-

pital Alor—extent of territory—rule of the Hahees—appearance of the

first Brahmin Chuch—his reign and death—his son Dahir—account of his

rule until the Mahomedan invasion.

Sindh is one of the sixty-one climates of the world; it is situated

Sindh, itssitu. 1n the five first climates, belonging chiefly to the second,

ee ee and is in the same region as the holy cities of Mecca

graphy. and Medina. The river of Sindh rises in the mountains

of Cashmeer; another joins it from the mountains of Cabool in Mool-

tan ; it is met by the river Sehoon, and thus proceeds to the sea. Its water

is clear, bright, and cool during the hot season ; in the language of the

country, it is called Mehran. Al) the rivers of Sindh flow towards the

south, where they empty themselves into the sea, (such as the waters of |

Peelab, Chenab, Lahore, Sultanpoor, and Bajuwarrah.) The climate

Climate. of Sindh is delightful ; its mornings and evenings cool,

the country to the north hot, whilst that to the south is cold. Its

inhabitants intelligent, and of large stature. Szndh is so called from

Name whence de- Svdh, the brother of Hind, the son of Noah, whose

rived. descendants from one generation to another ruled in

that country; from them also sprang numerous tribes, such as the

Nubeteh, the men of Tak, and the tribe of Moomeed, who governed

Early History. and possessed it by turns; no record remains of these,

and its history commences with the last of the dynasty of the Rahees,

or Rajahs, whose capital city and seat of government was Alor,

Capital Alor. Alor is described as a large, flourishing, and populous

city, situated on the banks of the river Mehran, possessing large

edifices; its gardens highly cultivated, producing every kind of tree

and fruit, where travellers had all their wants supplied.

This territory extended to the east as far as Cashmeer and Kunog ;

Extent of Ter- west to Mukran and the sea; south to the territories

specu of the ports of Surat and Deo; and to the north to

= ree

1841. | Of the early History of Sindh. 185

Kandahar, Seestan, and the mountains of Soolleemany, Girwan, and

Rynakan. The first Rahee mentioned, is Rahee Dewahey ; he was a

Rule of the POWerful prince, possessing absolute authority over the

Rahees. territory of Sindh, as above-mentioned, and formed al-

liances with many of the rulers in Hind; at his death, he was

succeeded by his son Rahee Siheersin ; he by his son Rahee Sahursee ;

and he by his son Fahee Stheersin the 2nd. During this reign,

the king of Persia, Ueem Roz, sent a force by the road of Kirman

to Mukran and Reech, which countries they laid waste, and Rahee

Siheersin, in trying to repel this invasion, was defeated, and he

himself killed by an arrow through the neck ; his troops fled to Alor,

and his son Rahee Sahee was seated upon the throne. During the

Rahee Sahee’s reign, the Brahmin Chuch, (who afterwards possessed

The Brahmin the country, and bequeathed it to his son,) made his

Chuch. appearance. It is related, that Rahee Sahee’s minis-

ter Ram Rao, was a man of such capability, and so well directed

the affairs of state, that the Aahee himself seldom interfered with them,

but passed the greatest part of his time in the sensual enjoyments of

his harem. Accident brought Ram Rao and the Brahmin Chuch

together; the latter is described as having been a very talented and

eloquent man, well versed in all the learning of the Hindoos. Ram

Fao appreciating his abilities made him his deputy, and on one occa-

sion sent him on some affairs, which required the Rahee’s attention,

to the door of the harem: the sanctity of Chuch’s priestly office

admitted of his being allowed to enter the private apartments

without the formality of a curtain between him and its inmates,

and so great was his personal beauty, that the Ranee became

enamoured of him at first sight; she afterwards made Chuch ac-

quainted with her passion, but he declined her overtures, on the

score of his being a Brahmin, and as such, incapable of treachery to

the Rahee, whose confidence he had gained. But an opportunity soon

presented itself to the Ranee’for the accomplishment of her designs.

The talents of Chuch had given him almost universal sway over the

affairs of government, and the minister Ram Rao was no longer

thought of; in the mean time the Rahee became dangerously ill, and

the Ranee formed a plot, by which, in the event of the Rahee’s death,

Chuch should succeed to the throne of Sindh. She caused a proclama-

186 Of the early History of Sindh. [ No. ‘ag

tion to be issued in the name of the Rahkee, for a general assembly of

all ranks and classes, and placed the throne in the public hall of au-

dience. When the people were assembled, they were informed that the

Rahee’s health prevented his then being present, or any longer attend-

ing to the affairs of his country, but that he had given his signet, and

delegated absolute authority to the Brahmin Chuch, whom they were

to obey as his deputy. Chuch was thus vested with power, and his

ability secured him the obedience of the subjects ; the Rahee afterwards

died, leaving no children; Chuch married the Ranee, and by universal

consent was placed upon the throne. The government of five preced-

ing Rahees occupied 137 years. Chuch was the first Brahmin who

Reign of Chuch, Tuled. Many of the relations of the deceased Rahee, who

until his death. possessed claims to the government of the country, were

inveigled by the Ranee into the palace, and murdered. Chuch opened

the doors of his treasury, and by his bounty secured the good offices of

the soldiers, and of his subjects generally. He had scarcely however

imagined himself secure on the throne, when Rana Mihrut Chittooree,

heading the remainder of the relations of Rahee Sahee, came with an

army from Joudpoor and Chittoor to assert their claims to the throne. —

The Ranee urged Chuch to prepare to defend his possessions ; he again

propitiated the troops by large presents in money, and prepared to

meet Rana Mihrut. The forces drew up for battle, in the vicinity

of Alor, but Rana Mihrut advancing in front of his host, challenged

Chuch to single combat, as the most merciful way of settling a dis-

pute, in which the two chiefs only were immediately concerned. The

result of the combat was decided to be final as to all claims of ter-

ritory ; and whoever fell, his country was to pass to the possession

of the victor. Chuch consented to this; the two chiefs advanced in

front of their armies; Chuch directing his servant to bring his

horse slowly after him, mounted quickly, and treacherously slew

Rana Mihrut with one blow of his sword. The troops of the latter

witnessing the fall of their leader, fled in dismay ; Chuch pursued

and killed many of the fugitives; he then returned with great pomp to.

Alor, the houses and bazars of which city were ornamented upon the

occasion. His authority was now established, and he became a power-

ful king. After a reign of 40 years he died, leaving two sons ; the eldest

Dahir, and the younger Dihir ; he had also one daughter. His eldest

1841. ] Of the early History of Sindh. 187

son Dahir succeeded to the throne, and his brother Dihir was ap-

Dahir,the son of | pointed governor of Burhamanabad. He made a tour

Chuch—his reign. of his dominions, and after a treaty of peace with the

governor of Airman, returned to Alor. When he had for some time

occupied himself in adjusting and arranging the affairs of his country,

he consulted the astrologers as to his future fate, and that of his do-

minions ; they told him that neither in his own, nor in his brother’s ho-

roscopes could they discover any evil sign, but that in his sister’s it

was written, that whomsoever she married, should possess the country

of Sindh ; this sorely perplexed Dahir, who finding the thought of

his losing power and empire too intolerable to bear, determined to

confound the fates, and avert the evil threatened, by marrying his

own sister ; his subjects and those about him tried in vain to dissuade

him from so unnatural a proceeding, but his superstition was insur-

mountable, and with all the forms of his religion he married her.*

When his brother Dzhir heard this, he was sorely incensed, and

wrote a letter full of bitter reproaches to Dahir, for the disgrace

which he had brought upon his family, adjuring him to make all the

reparation in his power, by breaking off so unholy an alliance.

Dahir’s infatuation would not admit of this, and he excused himself by

assuring his brother, that beyond the mere ceremonies of marriage he

had committed no sin.t Diéhir determined to punish his brother, and

with this intent collected a large force at Burhamanabad, with which

he marched upon Alor, and encamped under the walls of the city ;

through the intervention of the mother, peace was concluded between the

brothers, and Dihir died shortly afterwards of small pox, in the city of

Alor. Dahir proceeded to Burhamanabad, and having appointed

another deputy to govern it returned to Alor, where he busied himself

in completing the fortifications, which his father Chuch had begun. His

* Capt. Hart in a letter tome quoted, in No. 108 (p. 1216 of vol. 1x. Asiatic

Society’s Jour.) mentions the remains of an ancient city in Upper Sindh, called by the

country people ‘“‘ Dumb-i-Dilora-Shah,’’ traditionally said to have been destroyed on

account of the king having married his sister. He referred me then to the *“* Chuch

Namuh.’’ The tradition refers doubtless to the ‘‘ Alor,’’ of the history, making it how-

ever the name of the king instead of the city, and to the story of Dahir. (Ty

f It is but just to add, that in all the manuscripts from which this sketch is com-

piled, Dahir is particularly represented as not having added the crime of incest to his

other follies.

188 Of the early History of Sindh. [No. LIT.

dominions were prosperous, and his sovereignty firmly established ; he

made a tour to the East as far as Cashmeer, upon the boundaries of

which country he planted two trees as memorials of his journey. The

flourishing state of the country, and the growing power of Dahir,

excited the envy of the Rajahs of Hind, and they instigated and sup-

ported Runmul, governor of Kunooj, in collecting a large force to

descend upon Sindh. Runmul marched to the neighbourhood of Alor ;

Dahir called in the assistance of Arab mercenaries, and sought advice

as to the best method of repelling the invasion, from Mahamed Ullafee,

who directed him to dig a ditch in front of his army, one furlong in

length, and to cover it over with grass, &c. Mahomed Ullafee at the

head of about 5000 men, Arabs and Sindians, made a night attack upon

the enemy’s camp, then feigning a retreat, led them to the ditch, into

which they fell, and were for the greatest part slaughtered ; he took

many prisoners, (80,000 men and 50 elephants.) After this victory the

power of Dahir was more than ever firmly established; he ruled

with pride and prosperity for twenty-five years, when his kingdom

began to decline.

CHAPTER IL.

Reason of sending the army of the Faithful to Sinmdh—Buzeel killed—Bin

Cassim appointed to command the army—arrives at Deebul —takes that

place as well as Nierunkote—the governor of Moostan surrenders—Hijjaj

Bin Sookufie urges Bin Cassim to attack Alor—the tribe of Chunch proffers

their allegiance—the fort of Rawur taken.

The king of Ceylon, Serundeep, sent some servants to the Khalif of

pga a sending Bagdad, (Abdool Mulk,) with presents of female

Faithful to Sindh. _—_ slaves, and other merchandize; the boat which con-

veyed them, was driven into the port of Deebul, (now called Tattah

and Lahuny,) where they were attacked and robbed by a predatory

tribe, (the Nukamrehs,) some were killed, the rest imprisoned. When

the news of this outrage reached Hijaj Bin Yusuf Sookufie, minister

of Abdool Mulk, he instigated that prince to send an army to Sindh,

to retaliate upon the infidels, and to release the faithful; at the same

time he wrote a letter to the Rajah Dahir, for some explanation of

the circumstances. Dahir disclaimed any participation in the affair,

1841.] Of the early History of Sindh. 189

or any authority over the robbers who had committed it. Hijjaj gained

the Khalif’s permission to send an officer named Buzeel to Mukran,

where he was instructed to levy troops, and attack Sindh. Dahir

Buzeel killed. sent his son Jaiseh, who defeated Buzeel’s forces,

killed him, and took many prisoners. In the mean time the Khalif

H.92a.p.710. died, and was succeeded by his son Wulleed, (Bin Ab-

doul Mulk) ; Hijjaj urged him to renew the war, and to send a force

under Mahomed Bin Cassim, (a cousin of Hijjaj,) to release the faith-

ful, and punish the unbelievers, as his father, the former Ahalif, had

Bin Cassimappoint- intended to have done. The Khalif Waulleed gave

ed to command the

army. the necessary orders to Hijjaj for the preparation

and equipment of a force from the public treasury. In one month he

collected an army of 15,000 men, 6,000 of whom were horse, 6000

mounted on camels, and 3,000 foot, with 30,000 dinars for expenses ;

five catapultas for levelling forts were dispatched in boats. Bin Cassim

Arrives at Deebul. marched, and arrived at the fort of Deehul, to conquer

Sindh, in the year 92 u. (A. pv. 710.) Jaiseh, the son of Dahir, was

at that time governor of the fort of Merunkote,* and sent intelligence

of the arrival of the Mahomedan army to his father at Alor; Dahir

asked advice of the Ullafees, (a tribe which he had sheltered after an

outrage which they had committed on some of the deputies of Hijaj);

they counselled him to avoid meeting the powerful army of Bin Cas-

Takes Deebul. stm, and to entrench himself in the fort of Alor. Bin

Cassim took the fort of Deebul, in which was a large Hindoo temple, so

sacred,{ that it was supposed to act as a talisman, and to prevent the

capture of the fort. Bz Cassim threw it down with a catapulta, des-

troyed the temples of the idolaters, building musjeeds on their sites, re-

leased the prisoners of the Faithful who were confined there, and putting

his material on board boats, proceeded to Mierunkote. After a diffi-

cult journey of seven days, the roads being blockaded by the Sindians,

and the troops of Bin Cassim’s army suffering much from drought,

owing to the river not swelling,t the army of the Faithful arrived

before the fort of Mierunkote, the governor of which was Swmnee,

who had succeeded the son of Dahir (Jaiseh,) in consequence of the

* Near the modern city of Hyderabad, see Capt. McMurdo’s paper on Sindh,

+ Hence its name from the Hindoo, for a temple, Deebul or Deewul.

~The Mahomedan army joined in prayer for relief from this calamity ; their

supplications were answered by a plentiful fall of rain and a swell of the river.

190 Of the early History of Sindh. [ No. 111.

latter being sent to the more important command of Burhamanabad.

The Mahomedans began to suffer much from want of supplies, but

after a short siege, the governor Swmmnee surren-

dered the keys of the fort on condition of quarter

to the garrison. Bin Cassim entered the fort, destroyed the temples,

built musjeeds and minarets in their stead, and appointed keepers and

mouzzins to the same ; he left magistrates to preserve his authority at

Neirunkote, and taking the governor Sumnee with him, proceeded

onwards. This last wrote to the governor of the fort of Moostan,

Bucherim Chunder, advising him to submit to the invaders, as they

were too powerful to oppose. Bucherim’s fidelity however was un-

shaken, but after a week’s siege, he was obliged to abandon the

es ao aoe 4 fort, and flee to Seem, of which place Boodeh was

governor. Bin Cassim took possession of the fort

of Moostan, and having made arrangements for its government, pro-

ceeded to Seem, where he found Bucherim Chunder and Boodeh

prepared to oppose him. The infidels failed in a night attack upon

the camp of the Faithful; and Kakeh, Boodeh’s father, foreseeing that

the time was arrived when the country of Sindh must submit to

the Mahomedan arms, came to Bin Cassim to intreat for quarter for

his son, and the whole garrison of Seem—it was granted. Bin Cassim

took possession of Seem, and leaving Abdool Mulk to settle the affairs

of that place, pursued his march, daily adding fresh conquests to the

arms of the Faithful; he took the forts of Buhultoor, Kundabuh, (2?

Gundava,) and Mussaloj, from all of which he exacted tribute, leaving

troops to retain the new possessions thus acquired. At this time a

Takes Neirunkote.

HG ee BE letter reached Bin Cassim from Hiyjaj, ordering him

Caps to attack to Netrunkote, to cross the river, and prepare to

expel the Rajah Dahir from the capital of the

country Alor. The large and powerful tribe of Chuch proffered

obedience to Bin Cassim; it is also related that they embraced

Islamism, and were the first inhabitants of Sindh who did so. In

obedience to the instructions of Hijjaj, Bin Cassim proceeded to the

fort of Rawur, which he summoned to surrender ; the governor Mokeh

Bin Bussayeh made a feint to resist, being afraid of the wrath of

Dahir, but ultimately surrendered the fort, and with the garrison

promised obedience to Bin Cassim.

1841.] Of the early History of Sindh. 191

CHAPTER III.

Dahir alarmed at the successes which attend Bin Cassim, exerts himself to

prevent his crossing the Meheran—the Mahomedans suffer from famine—

Dahir offers terms—not accepted—Hijjaj sends horses and supplies to Bin

Cassim, who passes the river—Dahir’s consternation—comes out from Alor

with a large army—account of his death, and the defeat of his forces—

the Mahomedans enter the capital Alor.

The successes which attended the army of Bin Cassim, began to

Dahir alarmed at ‘e'tify the Rajah Daher for the safety of his capital

oe of Bin and dominions, and he foresaw that if the Ma-

homedans effected the passage of the river, the fate

of his sovereignty was sealed. He collected an army of the Koordans,

Opposes the passage and arriving at the opposite bank, employed him-

ere anon. self in obstructing the passage of Bin Cassim ;

this duty he afterwards delegated to Jah Humeen, and he himself

returned to Alor. Jah Humeen performed his part so well, aided

by the Rajah’s son, Jaisch, (who cut off the supplies of the Ma-

homedans,) that these latter began to suffer all the misery and

Bin Cassim’s army horrors of a famine; they were driven to slay their

suffers from famine. gown horses for food ; coupled with this, Chund Ram

Haleh, the former governor of Secoostan, heading some insurgents,

seized that fort from a small party of horse, who were left to govern its

garrison. Bin Cassim, however, immediately dispatched Muzhub

Bin Abdul with 1000 horse and 2000 infantry, who regained the

fort, and took Chund Ram prisoner. Dahir thinking these mis-

Dahir offers terms, fortunes would soon dispirit the Moslems, wrote

but not accepted. to Bin Cassim, assuring him, that if he wished

to withdraw his forces, he might do so in security; the latter

answered, that he had no intention of retiring, until he had taken

the capital Alor, and subjected Simdh and its dependencies to

the Mahomedan rule. The intelligence of the difficulties encoun-

tered by Bin Cassim, and the loss of the passes, reaching Hyjay,

Hijjaj finds supplies he dispatched 1,000 others, with fresh supplies to

ee Bin Cassim, urging him to lose no time in crossing

the river, as the overthrow of Dahir was the first and most important

step; on receiving this, Bin Cassim proceeded to Juhum, where with

192 Of the early History of Sindh. [No. 111.

the assistance of Mokeh Bin Bussayeh, he collected some boats, and

filling them with sand and stones, commenced a bridge for the passage

of his army; it was under many difficulties and obstructions at length

Bin Cassim crosses COMpleted ; the first detachment of the Faithful pass-

et ee Sola ed the river under a shower of arrows from the infi-

position. dels, who were collected in strength on the opposite

bank; but these being driven back, the whole of the army of Bin

Cassim passed without further molestation. It is reported that Dahir’s

Dahir’s consternation. Tage on receiving the intelligence was so great,

that he killed the messenger who was the bearer of it.

Bin Cassim now exhorted his soldiers to firmness : “the river was

in their rear, and the enemy in front, still if any were faint-hearted

amongst them, then was the time-to quit the army, and return to their

own country.” There were only three of the whole host who did so.

Bin Cassim having thus secured the co-operation of his troops, pro-

ceeded onwards to Jeyoor, near which place he first caught a glimpse of

Dahir’s forces; he detached Muhuzzin Bin Sabit Kiessee with 2,000

men, and Mahomed Zyad ul Huddee with 1,000, to oppose them.

In the mean time, Dahir called Mahomed Haris Ullafee to him, and

said : “ I have protected and promoted you ; now is the time to requite

my kindness, and to shew yourself worthy of my confidence.” Mahomed

Haris excused himself by saying, that he could not oppose the Mos-

lems without being a renegade to the faith he professed. Dahir therefore

deputed his son Jazsch to lead his army against Bin Cassim ; he did

so, but was defeated with great slaughter, and Bin Cassim advanced

upon Alor, which he besieged.

On the 10th of the month Ramzan, in the year ninety-three Hejira,

Dahir comes out from Leajah Dahir determined to make one bold stroke

Alor with alarge army. for his crown and kingdom; came out from the

city of Alor with an immense army; they say he had 30,000

infantry in advance of his cavalry and elephants; he himself seated

on an elephant, the howdah of which was richly ornamented,

passed to the right and left, animating the soldiers, and disposing

his battalions in order of battle; seated in the same howdah

were two beautiful female slaves, one administered wine, the other

pan and beetle-nut to him. The battle which ensued is described as

1841. ] Of the early History of Sindh. 193

terrific, lasting from morn till night. Bim Cassim himself fought as a

common soldier with his troops, performing deeds of valour ; but the

day was decided in favour of the faithful. In consequence of the latter

throwing fireworks amongst the Rajah’s elephants the howdahs took

fire, and the infuriated beasts rushed madly through their own troops,

trampling down all before them until they arrived at the river,

into the muddy banks of which they plunged. Dahir’s elephant was

amongst them, and the Mahomedans profiting by the confusion, threw

; showers of arrows, one of which struck Dahir in the

Dahir’s death and

the defeat” of his neck, and killed him; his elephant sunk into the

Ta mud ; and the Brahmins who were behind the howdah,

took the body of the Rajah and buried it there. The infidels fled in

all directions, and the carnage which ensued was dreadful; all the

approaches to the citadel of Alor were most carefully blocked up, and

the Brahmins and two female slaves fell into the hands of an officer of

Bin Cassim’s army, named Keiss, to whom they detailed the particulars

of Dahir’s death, and begged for quarter. eiss took them to Bin

Cassim ; the body of Dahir was found in the mud of the river, and the

head was severed from the body, and stuck upon a spear. That night

the Moslems occupied themselves in prayers and thanksgivings for

the victory they had gained. The next morning Bin Cassim caused

the head of Dahir, together with the two slaves, to be placed over one

of the gates of the city. Dahir’s wife, Ladee, seeing this, threw herself

from the walls, and the garrison being no longer able to offer any oppo-

Mahomedans enter “ition, opened the gates of the fort. The army of the

Alor 934. (a.p.711.) faithful entered and took possession of Alor on

Friday, the 11th of Ramzan, in the 98rd year of the Hejtra. Dahir

ruled 33 years, and the rule of the Brahmins embraces a period of 92

years.

194 Of the early History of Sindh. [No. 111.

CHAPTER IV.

The tribe of Soommah and others pay homage to Bin Cassim—the rebellion

of the sons of Dahir—governors appointed to the principal cities and

provinces of Sindh—Bin Cassim extends his conquest as far east as Cash-

meer—the story of his death—deputies of the Kings of Ghuznein, Ghoor,

and Delhi, govern in some of the provinces of Sindh—origin and rule of the

tribe of Soomrah—Nasir-ud-deen Kibajeh—his rule and death.

The whole of the rich booty of Alor, including the treasury and

crown jewels fo Dahir, were collected and placed in charge of Keiss,

to convey to the Khalif at Sham. The Khalif honoured and pro-

moted Kezss, and wrote letters of approbation to Bin Cassim urging

him at the same time to extend his conquest still further, until the

whole of the countries which were dependencies of Sindh, should be

subjugated and form part of the Khalif’s territories.

After the defeat and death of Dahir, the men of Soommah came

with music and dancing to pay homage to Bin

Men of Soommah

and others payhom- Cyssim; he asked the reason of this, and they told

age to Bin Cassim.

him that it was their custom thus to greet a vic-

torious chief. The Lohanas, Battis, men of Suhateh, Koosejeh, Haleh,

&c. led on by Ally Mahomed Bin Abdool Ruhmun WSulleetee, with

Rebellion of thesons head and feet bare, also proffered their allegiance.

of Dahir. In the meantime the sons of Dahir entrenched them-

selves in the fort of Sikunder, where they determined to offer opposition

to Bin Cassim. Burhamanabad having previously been taken, and its tax

and tribute settled, Bam Cassim marched to besiege the fort of Sckunder,

and to quell the rebellion of the sons of Dahir, (Jaisch, Toofic, and

Wukeeah); he reduced this place, and although the sons of Dahir were

sometime before they would believe the death of their father, (even abu-

sing their mother, who was sent to assure them of it, by calling her

a har, traitress, and one in league with the “ slayers of cows,”) a sor-

ceress assured them that he was dead, whereupon they surrendered.

The capital city Alor, with all the principal provinces and cities

of the country of Sindh having thus fallen to the Mahomedan arms,

Governors appoin- governors were appointed to the following places:

ye Uhnuf Bin Keiss to Alor, with Moossie Bin

Yakoob as Cazy; to Burhamanabad, Widah Bin Ameed ; and to

1841. | _ Of the early History of Sindh. 195

Rawur, Tobeh Darus. Bin Cassim then proceeded towards Mooltan,

and on the road, at the fort of Baheeah, Kulsur Bin Chunder made

obedience to him; after that, the fort of Swkkeh was taken, and Utbeh

Bin Tumhee left there as governor. Mooltan, with all its strongholds

and dependencies fell to Bin Cassim, who appointed Khuzzaneh Bin

Abdool Mulk to the fort of Mehpoor, Dawood Bin Nusserpoor to

Mooltan, and proceeded to Debalpoor ; at this time he is reported to

have had 50,000 horse and foot under his banners, independent of the

regular army with which he invaded the country. Having taken posses-

| sion of the countries to the east as far as Cashmeer

Bin Cassim conquers i

as far as thecountry and Kunnogj, he returned, having placed trustworthy

ease governors and servants in all those places. At the time

that Kezss was deputed to convey the treasure and booty captured at Alor,

Story of hisdeath. with the prisoners to the Khalif of Sham, amongst the

latter were two daughters of Dahir.* The Khalif consigned them to his

harem until they should recover from the fatigues of travel, and be prepar-

ed for his service ; their beauty was very great, and the Khalif was about

to consign one to his bed, when she informed him that Bin Cassim,

flushed with victory, had robbed them both of their virginity, and had

kept them in his harem for three days; the Khalif’s wrath at this

knew no bounds, and he wrote an order with his own hand, informing

his servants to seize Bin Cassim, to sow him up in a raw cow’s hide,

and send him to Bagdad. This order reached the chief at Hadapoor,

and he desired the servants to obey the order of their tyrannical

master; they did so, and in three days the brave Bin Cassim sunk

under the torture. Tis body was conveyed to the Khalif, who ex-

ultingly shewed it to the two women, as a proof of his absolute power ;

and of the full measure of revenge which he had taken upon the

innocent Bin Cassim. They confessed that the accusation was totally

false ; that they were solely actuated by revenge for the murder of

their father, and the destruction of his kingdom. The wretched Khalif

too late saw the injustice he had committed, and suffered the most

poignant remorse; he caused the two women to be tied to horses, and

dragged to death through the streets of Bagdad. Bin Cassim was

buried at Damascus. At the time of Bin Cassim’s death, Bin Keiss

* Gispul Deo and Sooing Deo.

196 Of the early History of Sindh. [No. 111].

was governor of Alor, the other places being governed, as before-men-

Deputies from the tioned; five other governors, deputies of the Khalif

ee Oo en eT) eras Oomhae, governed Sindh successively, with

little or no alteration in the state of affairs, until in the year 133 u.

the power over that country passed to the Khalifs of the dynasty of Beni

Abbas. The period of the rule of the deputies of the Khalifs of Bent Oomhae

in Sindh, embraces a period of 40 years from its conquest in 93 to 133

H. (a. D. 750.) ‘

Sindh continued to be a dependency of the Khalifs of the tribe of

Beni Abbas, who sent many deputies to govern the country: The

only circumstance noted as worthy of observation throughout their

rule, is, that one of the governors named Zwumun, who arrived from

Bagdad, brought with him many Arabs, residents of Samrah, who

remained in Sindh, and in the course of time, produced the powerful

tribe called the Soomrahs. In the year u. 416 (4. pv. 1025,) Sooltan

Mahmood Ghuzney sent deputies to the country of Sindh, thus

terminating the sovereignty of the tribe of Beni Abbas, after a period

of 283 years. The men of Soomrah had for a period of nearly 100

years been powerful zumindars; but as they continued to pay tax and

tribute, they will be hereafter treated of as rulers.

The deputies of the kings of Ghuzneiny, Ghoor, and Delhi, possessed

Deputies of the many of the provinces of Sindh, and sent governors

kings of Ghuznein, 4 {

Ghoor, and Dehli, to them from the time of Sooltan Mahmood Ghuzei-

ben Sua ny, until a man named Soomrah, of that tribe, during

the reign of Sooltan Abool Rusheed Ghuznein, was by the Soomrahs

placed upon the throne, about 446 u. (1054 a. p.) and ruled indepen-

dently. According to some writers, this tribe were originally Arabs, from

a place called Samrah ; they became zumindars in Sindh, of some power,

and after the departure of the tribe of Benz Abbas, their numbers in-

creased ; whilst the deputies of the kings of Guzneiny, Ghoor, and Dehli

possessed portions of the country, the Soomrahs ruled independently.

According to the author of the Muntukhib-ul- Tuwareek, Sooltan

Origin andruleof the Abool Rusheed being of weak intellect, neglected

GD EE ie dominions, and the men of Sindh threw off his

allegiance; and in the year 445 um. (1053 a. pb.) placed a man

of the tribe of Soomrah, named Soomrah, on the throne. He mar-

ried the daughter of Sad, a zumindar, by whom he had Bahoon-

1841. | Of the early History of Sindh. 197

kur, who succeeded his father, and died in the year 461 Hw. (a. D.

1068 ;) he left a son, Deodah, who ruled for 24 years, and died in the

year 485 nu. (1092 a. pv.) After him Sunkahar reigned 15 years;

Huneef 36 years ; Onmur 46 ; Deodah II. 14 years; Pustoo 33 ; Kezreh

: 16; Mahomeed Toor 15; Kuhereh (unknown,) Deodah III. 14; Tahee

: 24; Juneesur 18; Bahoonkur Il. 15; Huffeef 18; Deodah IV. 25;

Oomur Soomrah 35; Bahoonkur Ill. 10; Humeel succeeded him; and

being a tyrant and oppressor, was the cause of the downfall of the

Soomrah dynasty. But according to others, this tribe was in Sindh

altogether 550 years, as zwmindars and rulers, and their overthrow

by the men of Soomah was occasioned by the tyrannies of the gover-

nor Humeel, in the year of the Hejira 752 (a. pv.

Nasir-ud-deen Ku- f ’

bajeh, his rule and 1351,) when their dynasty ceased.* Previous to this

= period, Nasir-ud-deen Kubajeh who was deputed at

the time of Shums-ud-deen Ooltumsh of Delhi, governor of Sindh,

| about the year 610 nH. (a. p. 1213,) declared himself independent. A

_ force under Jhingiz Khan invaded the country. Nasir-ad-deen not

| being prepared to oppose them, entrenched himself in the fort of

| Mooltan, where he was besieged for forty days ; but the besiegers were

| obliged to return unsuccessful. Many of the great men of Khorassan,

Ghoor, and Ghuznein fleeing from the oppression of Jinghiz Khan,

came to Nasir-ud-deen at Mooltan.

In the year 611 w. (1214 a. pv.) Mulck Khan Khuljee made an

incursion upon Seeostan. Nasir-ud-deen marched to oppose him; the

army of Mulck Khuljee was defeated, and he himself killed.

In the year 622 u. (1225 a. pv.) Shums-ud-deen took an army to

_Oochch, to overthrow Nasir-ud-deen, who had entrenched himself at

| Bukkur ; to this place Shums-ud-deen detached Nizam-ul-Moolk ; but

Hisdeath. Nasir-ud-deen in attempting to escape from Bukkur, took

boat, which foundering in a storm, he was drowned.

* The rule of the tribe of Soomrah in Sindh is far from being clearly made ; but in

_the manuscripts consulted in this sketch, the authors confess their want of authentic

_Yecord, and Meer Massoom, after a very unsatisfactory account, closes it by saying :

_ ‘Tf any of my friends know more on this subject, let them publish it; I have said all

| I can upon the matter.’? Nor is the author of the Soofut-al-Kiram more explicit;

| (vide his contradictory statements) ; but it is generally received, that from the date of

Sending Nasir-ud-deen to Sindh, until the rule of the Soomas, (about 200 years, ) Sindh

_ Was annexed to Delhi.

( To be Continued.)

198

Geological Report on the Valley of the Spiti, and of the Route from

Kotghur. By Capt, Hutton, 37th N. I.

[The paper now published, completes a series of notes of a journey to

the Spiti Valley, undertaken on account of the Asiatic Society, by Capt.

Hutton, 37th Regt. N. I. It was with those which have already appeared

placed at the disposal of the Editor of this Journal by the Committee of

Papers. The results of the author’s geological observations have induced

the adoption of theories, upon which the Editor is only competent to

remark in so far as the identification of the opinions of a publisher is

concerned with those of any writer, to whom he is enabled to offer a

medium of communicating bis views to the public.

In the belief that hardly any novel theory could be broached, which

would be unproductive of good results, (ifnot by its intrinsic merits, at any

rate by the consequence of the discussion it might excite,) the Editor has

great pleasure in giving publicity to this paper, for the views contained in

which the author is alone answerable. ] (Ty

The valley of the Sutledge is that portion of the western Himalya which, —

as its name implies, forms the tract of country through which the river —

Sutledge flows.

The term valley is however scarcely applicable to it, since it is strictly |

speaking nothing more than a deep and rugged mountain glen, of more than

_ ordinary sternness and magnificence, often affording from the abrupt rise |

of its rocky sides, a mere channel for the roaring torrent which winds its |

irresistible and headlong course along its sheltered bed. |

On either side rise high and snow-clad peaks, forming along the river’s |

course two mighty walls, whose dark and furrowed sides proclaim the |

constant warfare which is waged by frost and heat alternately. |

Villages are numerous along the river’s course, sometimes placed near |

the water’s level, at others raised high above it on the mountain’s side, |

surrounded by their cultivation cut in steppes, and sheltered by the stern |

and frowning cliffs which raise their hoary summit far above it. |

In the lower part of the valley, commencing from Rampore downwards, |

to below Kotgurh, vast beds of rolled and water-worn stones are seen ac-

cumulated on the river’s banks, and rising high above the water’s present |

level. Such deposits evidently owe their origin to the eddies or back wa- |

ters of some far mightier stream than that exhibited by the Sutledge in the

present day, even at its greatest height, and must undoubtedly have been |

formed by the rush of water attendant on the outburst of some enormous |

lake or lakes in the higher portions of the hills.

1841. ] Capt. Hutton’s Geological Report. 199

These deposits extend in many places along both banks of the river, and

appear to have been formerly one solid mass of debris, which as the wa-

ters gradually disappeared, have become divided by the current of the

stream.

These are for the most part situated at those places where the Sutledge

takes a rapid turn, and have been evidently thrown up within the elbow by

the eddies, or back waters.

On the surface of these broad and flat alluvial deposits, now flourishes

an abundant cultivation, consisting of barley, wheat, rice, tobacco, pop-

pies, &c. which being situated high above the river’s level, are irrigated

by the minor streams, which are furnished from the heights above them.

_ Higher up the river’s course the valley narrows, and forming in many

parts a mural cliff on either bank, gives a mere passage to the foaming

stream, which rushes with a hoarse and deafening roar over the boulders

which obstruct its progress, and dash its waters in muddy waves on

high. Some hundred feet above the stream the hills are clothed with

dense and stately woods of oaks and various sorts of pines, among

which the “ Ree,” producing the edible seed called by the people “ Neoza,”’

is in great abundance. Above the belt of wood, are seen to rise

huge rocky spires, along the rugged line of mountains, bare of all

vegetation, and crowned by everlasting snows. From these snow-clad

| heights are furnished numerous streams, which rushing downwards in

a sheet of foam, furrow the mountains sides with minor glens, and join

| the Sutledge as it rolls along below. Now and then the forests cease,

‘and wide grassy tracts succeed, affording pasture to multitudes of goats

and sheep; while here and there the whole hill side has slipped away,

jand left a mural height of precipitous and crumbling rocks, which are

jannually precipitated into the depths below by the expansive powers of

|the frost and snow.

, The general features presented by the Geology of these hills, may be

_ briefly and summarily comprised in the following observations :—

The main or central range of the Himalya or true snowy mountains,

runs in a general direction from East-South-East to West-North-West,

: sending off branches or spurs in every direction, intersected or divided

everywhere by deep and precipitous valleys, whose narrow bed or bottom

almost invariably serves as the channel of some mountain torrent or

tivulet, whose waters are supplied from the snowy heights above. Where

the sides of these valleys are of sufficient elevation to retain the snow

throughout the year, these rivulets receive a neverfailing supply of

water ; but, on the other hand, if the enclosing walls are of moderate

‘ medium elevation, the vallies are often dry for several months together.

)

200 Capt. Hutton’s Geological Report. [No. 111.

The vallies, it must be borne in mind, are not to be attributed, as

some have contended, to the gradual wear and tear of the weather,

and the streams which now drain through them, but have been formed

by the convulsive uprise and disruption of the lofty mountains which

form their sides; the glen or valley being thus a mere ravine or trough

lying between them, and furnishing often just room sufficient for the

passage of an insignificant stream.

The existence of the valley is not therefore to be attributed to the

abrations caused by the constant action of the waters; but, on the

other hand, the presence of the rivers and streams within them is entirely

owing to the configuration of the mountains, which furnishing on the

heights vast beds of snow, are ever sending down supplies, which naturally

gather in the hollow troughs below, and gradually wind their way to

form a junction with some larger stream, which in its turn seeks

out the noble rivers of the plains.

It would therefore appear, that the existence of these hill streams is

altogether owing to the previous formation of the vallies by the uprise

of mountain ridges, the intervention of a glen or khud being the natural

consequence of disruption in a range, or the sudden alteration of direction

of the upheaving power, thus often causing ranges to intersect or to

run parallel with each other. Thus the vallies are in no wise the con-

sequence of the unceasing action of the streams, which now find a fitting

channel in their depths.

In the present day, these glens usually communicate or open into some

other, and the waters gradually escape, but doubtiess time has been

when their enclosing barriers were continuous, and numerous lakes

were formed, until the weight of waters accumulated from the melting

of the snows, burst through the rocky walls and so escaped. This is

indeed a fact and no wild theory, for the people of different parts of

the hills still hold traditions of such events. Dr. Gerard, I think it is,

who mentions, that the natives informed him the valley of the Buspa

was once closed at the lower extremity, and contained a lake, traces of

which may still be seen along the banks of the present stream. A

similar lake once occupied the glen in which the town of Soongnum

now stands, and thick alluvial deposits containing rounded pebbles may

still be seen in some of the higher parts of it; from the lower portion |

they have been swept away by the out-rush of the waters.

Of this, however, I shall speak again hereafter. The dip of the strata |

is, as might be expected in such a vast and often confused assemblage

of mountains, excessively variable ; and although previous travellers have |

uniformly insisted much on a N.E. dip, it will be quite as often found

1841. | Capt. Hutton’s Geological Report. 201

to lie in an opposite direction. The prevailing inclination of the strata

may therefore be said to be N.E. or 8. W. It is, however, remarkable that

the latter dip, although perceptible on both sides of the snowy range,

is more prevalent on the northern than on the southern side. _It has also

been pointed out as matter of astonishment, that while one aspect of the

mountains presents a gradual and shelving face, rich in soils and forest

scenery, the opposite exposure is, on the contrary, found to present a bare

and often mural cliff. This, however, is no just cause for astonishment,

as the circumstance where it occurs is simply owing to the outcrop of

the strata being on the precipitous side, while the dip of the other forms a

more shelving slope. But this circumstance is by no means confined to

any one direction in particular, for the outcrop of strata is no more preva-

lent on the northern than on the southern or any other exposure. It may,

however, be taken as a general feature in all mountains, that while the

dip or inclined position of the strata gives on the one face a shelving sur-

face for the growth of plants, the other face or outcrop must necessarily be

rugged and nearly barren, as furnishing by its precipitousness no resting

place for soils. In this respect the Himalya does not differ from other

mountain ranges. Travellers, however, having no knowledge of geology,

and witnessing these facts, have sought to solve the problem by bringing to

their aid supposed peculiarities of soil, of aspect, or of climate.

Viewed at a distance from the plains of India, these hills appear to

form one long continuous chain or ridge, entirely clothed with everlasting

snows, and this line has been designated by way of pre-eminence or dis-

tinction, by the name of the “snowy range,” or “region of perpetual

snows.” Arrived within the mountains, and perched aloft upon the sum-

mit of some portion of this mighty range, the traveller is surprised to find

that what he had been led to consider one continuous field of snow, is no-

thing more than a vast assemblage of scattered and far distant peaks, ap-

proximated apparently by the distance at which they were wont to be

viewed into one wide-extending line, and forming component parts of the

same snow-clad range.

He is surprised to find the greater portion of that line to be absolutely

devoid of snow during several months of the year, except within the deep

and sheltered glens, to which the rays of the summer sun can only pene-

trate for a few short hours during each day, and where frost resumes its

Sway the moment his beams are withdrawn or intercepted by some tower-

ing peak.

Far beyond the ridge which he has hitherto been accustomed to dis-

tinguish as the snowy range, he now beholds gigantic and frowning

masses clothed in the winter garment, rising often in isolated peaks to

202 Capt. Hutton’s Geological Report. [No. 111.

an elevation exceeding that of the main or central chain on which he

stands.

Around him, far and wide, he beholds these rugged and awe-inspiring

peaks rising pre-eminently grand amidst the sea of mountains by which

he is surrounded, and he now first learns that the line of snow he has

witnessed from the plains, is the wintery sheet which envelopes these

often widely separated masses, but which to the eye of the far-off observer,

have become blended by the distance into one long line of continuous

snowy peaks.

The central range, and all the hills, with the exception of these loftiest

peaks and some deep secluded glens, usually lose the sheet of snows

during the period that the monsoon is raging in the plains. It is at this

season that the snows send down the greatest supplies of water to the

rivers, commencing about the end of May and continuing till September,

when the frosts again arrest the dissolving snows, and the mountains once

more put on the pure and dazzling robes of winter, and continue thus

enveloped in one sheet of snows until the approach of summer again re-

lieves them.

No sooner has the wintery garment disappeared, than a fine rich sward

at once springs up, almost as if by magic, so rapid is the vegetation in

these high tracts,—affording abundant pasture to the flocks and herds,

which then range over them to the height of 15,000 feet above the sea.

This smiling and verdant state of things is, however, unhappily of short

duration, appearing like the transient gleam of sunshine that often precedes

the fiercest storm, yielding in the space of two short months to the

drifting whirlwind and wreaths of snow, that soon enshroud the whole in

cold and dreary solitude.

Journeying from Kotgurh, in the lower hills, towards the Spiti valley,

the geological formations which came under my observation from that

station to the frontiers of Tartary, were exclusively of the primary class.

Commencing at Kotgurh, and crossing the brow of the hill above

Kaypoo, we find strata of mica and hornblende schists, jutting up through

the surface, interspersed with veins and nodules of quartz.

These veins are often found to contain iron disseminated in small thin

scales resembling mica, and in such cases the quartz is generally in a state

of decomposition. This ore pays no duty to Government, and the mines,

if indeed such they can be called, are seldom worked, being so unproduc-

tive, that out of 14 lbs. weight of the rough ore only 2 lbs. of iron, and

that impure, can be procured.

Veins and masses of coarse primitive calc spar or carbonate of lime are

also seen to accompany the mica slate. These rocks continue, with an

cya theses: ‘walt )

winia grimiee SIE Tas | re hash bee rE Lae i

“

aia er thie HE.

ard elias

¢ ay

; “a Bota Set

fers (AP Bs

toe Reese + ure wi pre). bt

ty nity

dg ne betes : ere: ae ms hii eure

al.

pili eck wu J

ae j i

hey \ in

Wty He

—, 4) hay fc

7 P

hoe

fie rs pradit ub ae inte bagrvciloing

ve seein +3 with koghted bt Phe: ks ie bi

i ro a anlaie an emngifal omy Poles Ot MB: . bs

: aha a

le An shedatian. ue ie Bae gt Sie: tifighs tbs Gps

jen x Oe teins Boligost a Peay ee a

Peery ty sty Par ecise ais rae! me a thence! ars), Sen

nae

we fo rablevt a

SONS

if e is daa 23 bas ‘ Te Tay dee Bie i rt 4 1A oy Aneta

os Cy rr , argh 4 rare fn” saber eee

wed we hea they

aaine iy) Sapte Te “he ‘teh at tigi Ae poitemis'r:

‘

——

1841.] Capt. Hutton’s Geological Report. 203

occasional bed of porphyritic gneiss, until we reach Rampore, half a mile

beyond which a fine white granular quartz occurs, underlying mica slate.

These strata dip strongly tothe N. E., and are seen on either side of the

river, by which they appear to have been transversely divided, the lower

end dipping down on the right bank, while the upper portion forms a high

mountain on the left.

I say these strata have been apparently divided by the Sutledge, which

now flows through them, because such in reality has not been the case;

but the bed of the river lying through them, is entirely attributable to the

disruption of the strata at this point having formed a fitting channel for

the waters to escape through to the plains.

(See plate )—Fi«. 1.

1. 1. Mica Slate. 2.2. Granular Quartz. 3. Bed of Sutledge.

The surface of this quartz rock takes a yellowish rusty hue when

exposed to the weather, but when freshly fractured, it is of a pure white,

somewhat resembling Carrara marble in appearance, but of a coarser

texture.

Onwards from Rampore, the mica schist is seen in several varieties,

sometimes appearing to be composed entirely of mica, at others containing

a predominance of quartz; in these cases the strata are either soft and

crumbling, from the mica scaling off, or very hard and flinty, from the

quantity of quartz.

Silvery mica passing into chlorite schist is abundant near Goura, and from

its soapy and decomposing nature, the whole rock has in many places slipt

away altogether, leaving a constantly decomposing cliff, from which in wet

weather large masses are constantly falling.

Further on, the mica is seen to contain numerous small crystals of

hornblende, which cause it to pass gradually into hornblende schists.

Garnets of small size occur occasionally imbedded in the mica, which

also contains masses of white quartz, in which beautiful crystals of cyanite

are interspersed, varying in shade from pale sea green to bright blue.

The characteristic rocks, however, from Kotgurh to Sarahun are mica

and hornblende slates, frequently alternating with each other, and imbed-

ding blocks of porphyritic gneiss and white quartz.

From Sarahun the gneiss begins to shew itself as the prevailing rock,

and occurs both common, red, and porphyritic ;—mica slate and hornblende

are also frequent, and when they come in contact, the mica often becomes

jet black.

204 Capt. Hutton’s Geological Report. [No. 111.

A few miles from Sarahun, on the right bank of the river, an interesting

appearance presents itself in the disposition of the strata. The dip which

up to this point has been pretty uniformly to the N. E., now gradually rises,

and preserving fora short distance a nearly horizontal position, at last lifts it-

self abruptly, and dips back again to the S. W. at the same angle of about 45°.

From this disposition of the strata it becomes evident, that they have

been lifted or upheaved at both ends, from the horizontal position they

once had, by some volcanic force. The lowest strata exposed to view

at this spot are on the right bank of the river, nearly even with the water,

and form a complete arch immediately under those strata which dip to

the N. E. I annex a slight sketch made on the spot, which will serve to

show the position of the rocks, better than a description. (See plate )—Fte. 2.

Beyond this, as we approach Traada, a fine white granite is observed,

containing large scales or crystals of mica, and farther on still, about

Nachar, white felspar becomes abundant, imbedding the same mica crystals,

and forming the first division of the granite of some geological writers.

Quartz also occasionally entered into its composition and formed true

granite, with which were found hornblende and mica slates, porphyritic and

granitic gneiss. In some instances where the hornblende and granite were

in contact, the mica of the latter rock assumed a black and glossy appear-

ance, producing a variety of granite of some beauty.

Proceeding from Nachar, the road passes over formations similar to those

already mentioned, and a few miles lead down to the Sutledge, which is

crossed by a good broad Sangho. At this point the rocks rise abruptly in ‘

huge masses on either side, confining the river to narrower limits, and

affording a mere passage for its waters.

These rocks are of gneiss, and the stratification which previously had

often been indistinctly discernible, now ceased altogether, and the beds

presented a shattered and amorphous mass,—a circumstance by no means

of rare occurrence among this class of rocks.

From the sangho to Chergong the road still continues along the bank of

the river over beds of boulders and broken rocks of every size, consisting

of granite, gneiss, mica, and hornblende slates. Here too cyanite again

occurred in quartz, and crystals of crysoberyl (?) in granite.

From Chergong to Meeroo the strata of gneiss are often laid bare by

the descent of streams from the snows above, and the dip is seen falling

to the N. E. at about the usual angle of 45°. Beyond this place occur thick

beds of mica slate, containing garnets in profusion, and often, from the de-

composition of the rock, the whole road is strewed with garnets of various

sizes. Beneath this bed occurs one of white quartz rock, which is seen

rising from the edge of the Sutledge to about 3,000 feet in thickness.

————e—O—r Or ee = > error eee oe eres

——

\ RS ge ee ee ee ee

DES tee =- :

pe get

((\\

WN TO

N \

3 : oh

" 4 «\ \ : \

Ath

~<SS

{

~_— >

- p Ady

{

. ae

; ALES

pies

ZEEE

ELSA

ioe,

Strata of Gnetssy Mica State,

1841. | Capt. Hutton’s Geological Report. 205

Near Chini, the mica slate contains occasional small crystals of cyanite,

and sometimes passes into chlorite slate.

A short distance from Chini, the whole hill side has slipped down

into the Sutledge, from the action of frost and snow, and the cliff now

towers up from the banks of the river, presenting a sheer and perpendi-

cular wall of between six and seven thousand feet in height. This

vast mass is composed throughout of gneiss, and the road, which is a

mere scaffolding, passes along the face of it, at 4,000 feet above the

Sutledge, which is seen foaming below.

From this to the village of Leepee, the formation is pretty nearly the

same, consisting of granite, gneiss, hornblende, mica, and quartz.

The granite about Punggee, Rarung, and Junggee, contains a large pro-

portion of hornblende, and at Rarung it is also seen to assume a brick red

colour, often traversed with veins of quartz, both red, amber, and white.

The red granite appears only in masses imbedded in a yellowish variety,

which is the true rock, and which towards Leepee gives place to gneiss and

mica slate. Above the last mentioned rock commences the first bed of

argillaceous slates, which continues interstratified with greywacke schists

to the top of Roonung Pass. The alternations of these strata are frequent,

sometimes the one and sometimes the other rock prevailing in thickness.

These beds are evidently the first indication of the transition, or lowest

secondary formation of geologists, and extending across or through the

Roonung Pass, downwards to Soongnum, they are seen to support strata of

compact greywacke, and beds of quartzose rock, apparently analogous to

and holding the place of the old red sandstone of Europe.

The town of Soongnum stands in a valley immediately between the

Roonung Pass in its front and the Hungrung Pass in its rear. In front,

the range of hills which form the right side of the Rushkoolung valley

are composed of an argillaceous series, consisting of clay stones and grey-

wacke slates, of different textures and degrees of induration, and dipping

to the S.W. The strata in the rear of the town, forming the left bank, dip,

on the contrary, to the N. E. and are composed of greywacke slates, com-

pact greywacke, old red sandstone, and a superior stratum of limestone

and greywacke. These towards the summit of the range gradually change

their dip, and rise up again to the S.W., the whole being surmounted by a

bed of dark blue secondary limestone, containing portions of clay and

silee. This formation extends along both sides of the Rushkoolung val-

ley, even to the Manerung Pass above Manes in Spiti, a distance of about

seventeen miles. About seven miles from Soongnum, copper veins occur

in their strata of white guartz rock, and veinous quartz, lying occasionally

between, or ramifying through, the greywacke and old red sandstone. The

206 Capt. Hutton’s Geological Report. [No. 111.

last mentioned rock varies much im colour and in texture, the lowest stra-

tum being white, and scarcely distinguishable from quartz rock, but chang-

ing gradually to a faint tinge of pink, becoming deeper as it passes up-

wards, until its colour is of a dull purplish hue.

These strata are sometimes separated by a very thin layer of soft

whitish marl. The crest of the Hungrung Pass is 14,837 feet above the

level of the sea, and is composed of dark blue limestone. The range on

which this Pass is situated divides Kunawur from Hungrung,—a district

inhabited by Tartars, who are subject to Bussaher.

Descending from the Pass to the village of Hungo, the road passes over

numerous alternations of blue limestone and greywacke slates, resting upon

white quartz, which lower down gradually passes into a greenish variety

of the same rock.

These strata all dip to the S.W., and are probably an outcrop of those

which run in a N.E. direction from behind Soongnum, and thus shew the

effects of what may be termed a double wpheavement, or lifting of the same

strata at two different points. The lofty granitic peaks which tower up to

the right of the Pass, at once shew that they have been instrumental in

forming the S.W. dip, and it is more than probable that the same rock

might be discovered also protruding through the strata on the opposite

exposure.

The following partly imaginary section of Hungrung, may serve to ex-

plain my meaning :—

(See plate )—F te. 3.

Supposed Section of Hungrung Mountain.

Strata of greywacke slates are met with for a few miles after leaving

Hungo; but they disappear as we approach Leeo, or vather, from the

great descent of the road, they are left far above, while the base of the

mountain is found to be a dark coloured gneiss, traversed and inter-

sected in every direction by veins of white quartz.

Leeo stands in a kind of basin, surrounded on all sides by lofty hills

of granite and the same dark gneiss; but the lower parts of them are

overlaid by strata of the secondary series, consisting chiefly of greywacke

and shales. On the sides of the surrounding hills exist strong indications

of the former presence of a lake, in the lines of water-worn stones

and pebbles that now rest many hundred feet above the river Lee.

These appearances were long since pointed out by Dr. Gerard, who

though knowing nothing of geology, was at once forcibly struck with

ail

eee

WUT

WIGAE) Geen? OFIYM?) ~ YoY Fe RAD INGE Sf “ap NAIA ne OUMARSAMWNNT fo 1 AALS 5 GR

“AUOBSAIMIUT PINE LE OUO{S7177 pvt pyrombeag fo (BP ADE Tue

EG EA EAU GN EAL NU A/a es PYF 07 DAE) Fr W207 9 OOS wyrai herr Ta

SSS

, ty = SSses

+ SS ~

2S S se ‘

3 4°. WES

ai ‘ z _ : ~ me ~

5 G x Bee ~

AGVIIFLL AY

ete eee Ne

ses

sibs

elie

1841. ] Capt. Hutton’s Geological Report. 207

the conviction, that nothing but the former presence of deep waters

could account for the phenomena here so plainly exposed to view.

In his conjectures on this head, that enterprisimg and unwearying

traveller was undoubtedly correct.

In the bed of the Lee, where it is crossed by a wooden sangho, a thick

bed of white quartz rock is seen dipping to the S.W., and as we mount

the hill in the direction of Chungo, beds of boulders, and disjointed masses

of granite, gneiss, and mica slates hurled from above, are passed over, now in

many places overlying the secondary shales.

At the village of Chungo, which is the last on the left bank of the Lee,

‘under the government of Bussaher, the most decided indications of the

“former presence of a deep lake again occur. To the eastward of the

| level patch on which the village and its cultivation stands, rise three lofty

and rugged mountains, whose shattered sides present sections of the same

strata as those noticed at Leeo: namely, deep beds of dark gneiss and

mica slates intersected by granitic and quartz veins of various thickness ;

these strata dip down towards the west, and as they approach the village,

| are lost beneath the vast accumulations of alluvial soils, which here, as at

| Leeo, mark the former presence of deep and tranquil waters.

| To the southward these deposits consist almost entirely of thick beds

of clays, sands, and boulders of every size, rising high above the level of

the village; while to the NNE. are again presented the same alluvial

deposits of a greater thickness, and accompanied in addition by a deep

) and extensive bed of a pure white and friable gypsum. This bed is per-

| haps a most valuable discovery in a geological point of view, as tending

_to show the nature of the waters from which it was precipitated, This thick

gypseous bed is overlaid by the sands, clays, and boulders, which have

already been noticed. At the fort of Skialkur, on the opposite or right bank

of the river, about 33 miles from the village of Chungo, this gypsum is like-

wise seen overlying the transition series of alternating shales and sandstones.

_ These deposits are now at the height of 2,000 to 2,500 feet above the

‘present level of the river’s course, or at an elevation of 12,000 to 12,500

feet above the level of the sea.

: The three mountain peaks of gneiss, which rise up to the eastward of

€hungo, are divided from each other by narrow glens, through which

‘streams flow down to join the sea, between which and the base of these

‘mountains, the whole alluvial deposits have been swept away, and the pre-

‘sent cultivated plain of Chungo is therefore situated far below the surround-

‘ing alluvium, which rises like walls on either side of it.

As we proceed from Chungo towards Spiti, the road lies at first over the

alluvial accumulations above-mentioned, for two or three miles, when from

208 Capt. Hutton's Geological Report. [Not 1

the abrupt nature of the primary rocks that are hence met with, they

cease to exist, except far below where a wide and shelving plain lies along

the river’s side, and which is entirely composed of them. From the point

where the road leaves them behind, for a distance of six miles, the strata

are again of mica, slate, and gneiss, varied with the same carious veins of

granite and quartz as those of Leeo and Chungo. At this point the moun-

tains are separated by a rapid river called the Paratee, which runs down

from Chinese Tartary and joins the Spiti near Skialkur. Here the primary

series may be said to disappear, and the Spiti road crossing the Paratee by

a natural bridge of stone, which is formed of several large masses of gneiss

fallen from above, and wedged firmly together over the stream, brings the

traveller at once upon the secondary class. The lowest strata are there-

fore just perceptible where the waters cut their way through, and we thus

catch a glimpse of the gneiss of the opposite bank, above which occurs a

talcose schist, white quartz rock, and clay slate, dipping to the S. W. Above

these are alluvial deposits similar to those of Chungo, and extending for a

mile or two inland from the river, forming a flattened plain, on which stands

‘‘ Kewrick,” the first village of Chinese Tartary. Here again a portion of

the deposit has been swept away by a descending stream, exactly as at

Chungo. It is worthy of remark, that all these alluvial deposits are the

deepest and most extensive when the surrounding hills have the most

gradual slope, and where they retire so as to form recesses; while on the

contrary, as might be expected, where the dip of the strata is rapid or

acute, scarcely any trace is left of the former existence of a lake, because

the deposit has been swept away by the outrush of the escaping waters.

These accumulations are likewise the most extensive at the lower end of

the Spiti valley, where alone the gypsum 1s to be found. To this fact I would

beg to call special attention, as it will be hereafter alluded to, and prove of

some importance in the explanation of these dilwzal and alluvial deposits.

From Kewrick the road runs over hills, which are entirely of the secon-

dary class, being frequent alternations of the same rocks, as greywacke and

claystones, limestones, and sandstones, and in one or two instances a trap

of greenstone is also seen, both stratified and amorphous.

From Kewrick to the village of Larree, which is the first inhabited plage

in Spiti, we travel first for four miles over the edges of strata of clay slates'and

accumulations of debris. From the decomposing state of these strata, |

caused the effects of weather and a portion of alum, which causes them to |

scale off in soft flakes, the whole of the hills on either side of the Spiti river |

have a charred and blackened aspect, which combined with their arid and |

barren nature, gives a sad and melancholy appearance to the country, by |

no means cheering to the weary traveller. |

1841. ] Capt. Hutton’s Geological Report. 209

The dip of the strata is now uniformly to the S. W., and generally at an

angle of 45°, though here and there they rise abruptly to a nearly vertical

position, denoting an excess of the upheaving forces from below. As we

approach Larree after crossing the Gew river, the bed of which is of grey-

wacke slate, wecome upon a thick stratum of pure white quartz rock, which

appears to be a continuation of the same rock which was seen at Leeo on

the opposite side of the range ; in contact with this, and immediately rest-

ing upon it, is another bed of siliceous rock, which passes gradually into

thin strata of flinty slate. Upon this rests clay slate, which then alternates

frequently with greywacke and sandstones, Further on we perceive masses

of gypseous breccia formed of angular fragments of argillaceous schists, encrusted

or cemented together by gypsum. This rock, if it be entitled to the name,

owes its origin to the same waters which deposited the gypsum beds of

Chungo and Skialkur; it is found overlying the edges of the true strata

from which it has been formed, and occurs in rude and mis-shapen masses.

To this breccia I would also call attention, as serving to shew a change in

the waters of the lake, or at all events a decrease in the proportion of

their saline properties. Farther on still, and nearly opposite the village of

Somra, a stratum of trap is seen to occur between shales above and sand-

stone below ; it is conformable to the true strata with which it is clearly in-

terstratified, not causing any dislocation of the series. Beyond Larree, how-

ever, the same rock occurs again, in one place interstratified with grey-

wacke and dark blue limestone, at another running up vertically in an

amorphous mass through the strata, which it first dislocates and then over-

lies. In this case, the strata on either side of the Spiti dip to the S. W.,

while the rocks through which the trap has more immediately passed or

been injected, are thrown boldly and abruptly from the usual course to the

westward. The strata on the opposite side of the river are at the same-

time raised from the angle of 45° nearly to a horizontal position, and af-

ter some twisting of the strata, again with apparent difficulty regain their

wonted S. W. dip. Here it is evident that the trap in question has been

the molten vein whose struggles to burst upwards through the superin-

cumbent weight of strata has been the agent which has thrown them

into their present inclined positions, and in its upward course has first be-

‘come partially interstratified with those which possessed the least indura-

tion or means of resistance, and then finally, as it burst through all obsta-

cles, flowed over them in a broad sheet of molten matter, which as it cooled

assumed the present solid and compact texture.

Of such having been the fact, we observe proof in the vein ‘of vertical

trap acting as a support, or upright as it were, from which the strata

now incline and dip downwards.

210 Capt. Hutton’s Geological Report. [No. 111.

As, however, trap is known to possess, “ in a general sense, the univer-

sal common character of being unstratified, and posterior to the rocks

with which it is connected,’* it becomes necessary in here stating, that

it is conformable to and interstratified with those of the secondary series,

to offer a few theoretical remarks on the probable means by which this

partial stratification has been produced.

The interstratification of this rock, where it occurs, is of very inconsider-

able extent, when compared with that of those with which it is associa-

ted, possessing by no means the wide and almost universal range of the —

primary and secondary series, but being on the contrary, “in a great

measure limited to particular spots, more or less extensive, and to be, if

separately considered, partial and independent productions.’ +

Let us then suppose that these secondary strata were once (which in fact

they really were) horizontal deposits from the waters, which it is generally

supposed were instrumental to the formation of the series to which they

belong.

We shall thus perceive them to have been deep unconsolidated masses of

sands, covered by muddy layers, which we now term shales. The strug-

gles of the molten matter to procure access to the surface would, from the

heat and pressure engendered by its upward course, have the effect of

vitrifying and indurating the sands through which it forced a passage,

and of converting them into strata of sandstone, while the shale or

muddy deposit next in succession being lighter and less massive than —

the stream of trap, would probably rise and yield a passage between

itself and the sandstone for the molten matter to form a stratum, some-—

what in the same manner as oil would give place to a stream of water

if injected through a tube or aperture below it.

The muddy deposit, however, being hardened by contact with the lava

and by the general pressure of the uprising strata, would burst as the

sandstone had already done, and yield a passage to the trap, which

flowed through and overspread them at the surface. |

Should it be contended that the outburst of a stream of Java such as

that I have described the trap to have been, would have expended

itself in a shower of ashes or cinders, rather than have assumed the

stratiform structure it now exhibits, I would remind the reader that

the secondary rocks are supposed to have been deposited in the bosom

of a tranquil water, and that that water formed either extensive lakes or

portions of the sea.

* + McCulloch’s Geology,

;

‘ ¢

‘

+ *

—

_— ©

wkd, es

————————

1841. ] Capt. Hutton’s Geological Report. 211

The upheaving Java current had therefore not only the weight of

“the superimposed deposits, but the pressure likewise of an enormous

_ volume of water. It becomes more than probable, therefore, that this

aqueous pressure would effectually check the tendency to produce cinders

_ and ashes, and thus as the stream poured upwards through the deposits and

came in contact with the waters, the molten matter would extend itself

along the bottom of the lake, and thus overlie the secondary strata,

as in the present instance.

| For farther information on this subject, I would refer the reader to

| De la Beche’s Geological Manual, where will be found some very just

and apposite remarks on the point in question.

| “ It being by no means probable,” he says, “that the density of sea

| water beneath any depth which we can reasonably assign to the ocean,

| would be such as to render it of greater specific gravity than liquid

| lava ejected from a volcanic rent, situated beneath the sea, it would

‘follow that so long as the lava continued in a state of fusion, it would

arrange itself horizontally beneath the fluid of inferior specific gravity.”

The question then arises, how long a body of lava in fusion would

‘remain fluid beneath the waters of the sea? The particles of water

in contact with the incandescent Java would become greatly heated,

and consequently, from their decreased specific gravity, would immediately

rise: their places being supplied from above by particles of greater

density and less temperature. Thus a cooling process would be esta-

blished on the upper surface of the lava, rendering it solid.

Now as the particles of fluid lava would be prevented from moving up-

wards by the solid matter above, pressed down by its own gravity and the

superincumbent water, they would escape-laterally, where not only the

cooling process would be less rapid, from the well-known difficulty of heat-

ed water moving otherwise than perpendicularly upwards, but where also

the power of the fluid lava to escape resistance would be greatest.

(See plate )—Fic. 4. Let a be a volcanic rent, through which liquid lava is

propelled upwards in the direction d f: the lava being of greater specific

_ gravity than the water b / e c it would tend to arrange itself horizontally in

_ the directions db dc The surface 6 d c having become solid, the Java would

escape from the sides b and c, spreading in a sheet or tabular mass around;

and this effect would continue so long as the propelling power at a was

sufficient to overcome the resistance opposed to the progress of the lava,

or until the termination of the eruption, if that should first happen.”’*

This clearly stated theoretic problem may now be successfully reduced to

practice, and will correctly and exactly apply to the phenomenon under

* De la Beche’s Geological Manual, p. 125.

212 Capt. Hutton’s Geological Report. [No. 111.

consideration. The truth therefore of De la Beche’s proposition will be at

once established.

(See plate )—F ic. 5. Let us suppose these now inclined strata to be in their

original horizontal position, and 2 and 3 forming beds of unconsolidated

sandy and muddy deposits beneath the waters of the lake or sea ac ¢ h.

Then a a aa, &c. is a vein of Java or molten trap, which in its endea-

vours to find vent, upraises and bursts through the solid primary series

denoted at 1.

By the heat and pressure thus engendered, the /ava indurates the sand at

2, and converting it into sandstone, breaks through it also, and is thus

brought in contact with the muddy deposits represented at 3. This deposit

being of a specific gravity inferior to the stream of Java, is naturally dis-

placed and forced to contract and furnish room for a stratum of trap

at aaa.

The heat and pressure, however, continuing, speedily and almost on

the instant, converts the muddy deposit into shale or slate clay. And

the lava current bursting through it and the superior stratum of limestone,

comes at length to the surface, and in contact with the waters. Here

then commences the facts detailed theoretically by De la Beche, as already

quoted, and the. stratum of trap spread over the surface of the now inclined

and consolidated strata of deposits; while the waters of the lake or sea

being displaced by the upheavement, effected an escape through the

various channels afforded by the disruption of the uprising strata.

It may possibly be objected that the occurrence of a compact stratum

of limestone above the shale, and in contact with the trap, will at once

invalidate the theory here proposed, from its being a known fact, that

when heat is applied to calcareous matter, the carbonic acid is cv

off, and the remaining ime rendered infusible.

I shall endeavour therefore to obviate such an objection, by quoting and

establishing a theory long since propounded by Dr. Hutton, which at the

time of its proposition was looked upon as an ingenious, but perfectly un-

tenable, doctrine.

‘“‘ He had asserted that calcareous rocks, like every other, had been sub-

jected to the action of heat. But it was well known that when heat was

applied to this class of rocks the carbonic acid was driven off in the shape

of gas, and the remaining quicklime become infusible. Dr. Hutton in-

deed had answered this by suggesting, that the pressure of the superincum-

bent ocean was sufficient to confine the carbonic acid, and to cause it to

act as a flux on the quicklime. His theory, however ingenious, was so

abundantly gratuitous, that it by no means satisfied even his own disciples.

After Dr. Hutton’s death, Sir James Hall ascertained by numerous experi-

‘

SSS \\

SR \

SSS Rn QO)

CAN

= SA

SS SSO

Ss Rt

SSSA RRRRRR RR

mA SN

TEAS

PTT

TEA

CLIT #)

yy HH} Ne

\\ ()

(YO

NAY Ann

SS A

VE CEN

AAR Ys

\S —

Voss

WSs

Sos

aN os

BY S25 2S

SEED

SSS,

roo

aemas

SSSR

Y oS

CSS

aRRseste

Port

rite

oes

<x<> >

SERS

rit

aude

hig: 5

\ ry

\\ VEE

aaa

\ 228

ae oe EM et

Y 4 andkly hepa nas neat ntedbighaty

ation: or iG) ike Sieh iat agi we

ee or acon UR

ahh a tye n> i. abt t UF Ct PERE ee hedhe Fe, RPS Sls ee ae

? ; 4

ay rh, ai

q a es eta git

" 1

bis ~

’

os '

) “a ey

. ~ ~ — A ON te

' U d ee ~ : © Gn i rail Bt at 6h) OT

1841. | Capt. Hutton’s Geological Report. 213

ments that carbonate of lime might readily be fused when exposed to

heat, if it were at the same time under a pressure not greater than Dr. Hut-

ton’s theory required, or about’a mile and a half of'sea.’’*

Now it is easily perceptible, that the result of these experiments is in

exact accordance with the effects which the theory here proposed would

give rise to.

We have supposed that the present solid strata were once soft and

aqueous deposits beneath a vast depth of waters ; we thus perceive a beau-

tiful and conclusive illustration of Dr. Hutton’s theory in the fact, that

when the heat generated by the pressure and condensation from below

acted on the superior calcareous stratum at 4, that very stratum was

then actually subject to the pressure of the superincumbent waters at 4

C E H, which by preventing the escape of the carbonic acid gas, and causing

it to act as.a flux upon the guicklime, converted the stratum, as Dr. Hutton

had suggested, inte the compact state which it now exhibits.

As theoretic speculations, however just, and however much in accordance

with the phenomena observable, they may prove to be, may nevertheless

be deemed misplaced in a paper of this kind, I shall leave the subject for

a more fitting occasion, and now pass on to a consideration of the remain-

ing facts exhibited in the strata of the Spiti valley.

From Kewrick to the village of Leedung, the strata may be said to be

“of the same descriptions, namely, talcose schist, quartz rock, greywacke slates,

clay slates, sandstone shales and trap, all except the last alternating fre-

quently with each other.

A precise description of each rock belongs rather to the department of

the mineralogists than to that of the geologists, and I therefore content

myself with pointing out the series rather than individual species, in order

that I may hasten on to the theory which the appearances presented

suggest.

Passing therefore from Larree via Pokh to the fort of Dunkur, we find

the strata to consist of the same alternations of rocks as those already

mentioned ; but at this latter spot the appearances denote astruggle for the

direction of the dip, which merits some attention. The range of hills run-

ning along the right bank of the Spiti opposite to Dunkur have a N. W.

by W., and S. E. and by E. direction, and at four miles below the fort the

strata dip uniformly to the S. W. From that point, however, or near the

village of Maness, it would seem that an upheavement had taken place

through or along the centre of the range, causing the superior strata to

assume a pent or roof-like appearance, throwing them on one side with

* Journal of Science, p. 4.

214 Copt. Hutton’s Geological Report. [ No. 111.

an acute dip to the N. E., while the opposite side preserved the S. W. di-

rection at a less acute angle. In such cases where a section is obtained

by a water course, the strata forming the*heart or interior of the range

are seen twisted in every grotesque direction. These strata consist of

thick beds of argillaceous schists and sandstones, and what strikes one as

singular in their disposition is, that the upheavement has had the effect of

throwing the outcrop of the sandstone, or superior stratum dipping to the

S.W., higher than the portion which falls to the N.E. Thus the joining

of the strata is not at the summit of the range, but the rocks of the N.E.

side are seen lying against those of the opposite direction, whose upper

edge, or outcrop, juts out above them. (See plate )—Fic. 6.

Passing on from Dunkur we come to the Lingtee river, which joins the

Spiti.

Here again a double upheavement of the strata appears to have taken

i ee

place, which will be better understood by a reference to the annexed sketch, 2

and which may serve as an example in all similar cases. (See plate )—F te. 7.

On the right bank of the Spiti, the strata fall acutely to the river in a

N. E. direction, as already pointed out, while on the left bank, although

they at first dip to the same direction, they are seen first gradually to rise

to a nearly horizontal position, and then to dip backwards again to the S.

W. This occurs on the left bank ofthe Spiti and the right bank of the i

Lingtee at the point where the two rivers meet.

On the left of the Lingtee the strata first dip to the N. E., and then after ©

many extraordinary twists and contortions, yield, as it were reluctantly, to

the contrary dip, which turns them back to their old and proper direction ©

of S.W.

In all these cases it will be found that the rocks are rent asunder, and

the disruption now forms deep khuds or glens, through which at present a

stream or river descends.

About six miles from Dunkur stands the village of Leedung, where the ~

strata consist, in an ascending order, of greywacke and clay slates, dark

blue limestone shales, limestone and sandstone, repeated in many alterna-

tions.

Leedung stands at the height of 12,037 feet above the sea, and the strata

just mentioned rise precipitously above it to the height of from 3,000 to

6,000 feet more, or to 15,000 and 18,000 feet above the sea. The highest

stratum here appeared to be of sandstone, resting upon shale.

To the N.E. of this village rises a Pass, which has an elevation of

15,247 feet, and here along its summit, where the streams which descend

fig: 6.

SAN

PH =

BNE

Sal} “|

tl, ey

NN): ==

N \, Us =

X ~—' ert) | =

Se pessee tet Seer!

: abe sigsciao=

ail

eae? op iuelte niger

BP pick oat whens x

ip hee” troaet

' a. salot vn “a a sia. %

L the: hii ony

chin +

- “1 ‘ ~

rata thoes of din by

relayianiy nega

\ Phi

. a.

a “6% bap ay

Baia: be he na uti: ee Ve

‘ y

a ¢

souegh gi

A, y

VB. The frectse niure of these Stratw ts undeterred frouy the inyreassibelity of jerocering cccess to then, but

‘they ogytecer to comstst f Contorted Shotes arc limestones Surnrveuntid by Sandstone’...

Vo.7 Bed of Suite Rwer. 2 verivedl Strate, 33.3. Beds of debris a7 a FT aginenées Srow AD OVE.

; mee ee, a i >

pelos: Sheen be Sie eG i gern ot

— -

1 ? 4 =, Ore ta

: i ’ ¥ per Sr ris

Seattle oe ee See eg beneath. ged eitingad ly mpeg

Maes

he fon ft nt a pag

1841. | Capt. Hutton’s Geological Report. 215

from the snows have worn numerous channels through the loose and

decomposing shales, occur the fossils which were long ago discovered by

Dr. Gerard. These consist of various species of ammonites, belemnites,

_orthoceratites arca, and some others; but all partaking of the same

_ decomposing nature as the shales in which they occur, so that it is next to

: impossible to procure a perfect specimen, or to prevent its falling to pieces

if obtained.

The limestones which here alternate in the series,-are sometimes wholly

composed of shells, and are of a dark grey colour, while at the height of

14,712 feet occurs a bed of a whitish grey colour, and almost free from

shells, but imbedding large rounded masses of various sizes, which when

broken are found to be composed wholly of the dark shell limestone

already mentioned.

Among these hills there is great confusion in the direction of the dip,

the strata sometimes inclining to the S.W. or N. E., while at others they

are N.N.W., and to almost every point of the compass. These masses

_are, however, generally limited tc small extent, and appear like fragments

torn from the true or main direction by the force of the upheaving agent.

These strata extend along the range for many miles farther up the valley,

but no fossils were apparent at any place, except on the heights above

Leedung and Larra. They exist, however, in the form of shell limestone

along the range immediately leading from the lake Chummorareel ; but at

this season the whole range lay so deeply buried in snow, that the route

‘was impracticable, and I was obliged reluctantly to quit the fossil site, not

half satisfied with its investigation.

From the nature of the rocks in this part of the valley, and the reports

of those who have visited lake Chummorareel, I should feel strongly

inclined to believe that it is situated among the Las clays. Puttee Ram,

the Tartar wuzeer, who has often visited the spot, assured me that the

lake was surrounded by high hills composed of earth of various colours,

red, yellow, blue, &c. and that the country around was all of similar clays,

and not composed of rocks like the lower parts of Spiti, although some-

times above the hills of clay, large masses of stone were also found.

Such a description, all rough though it be, would lead one to expect the

Lias beds resting on the red marle, and surmounted by the sandstone series

above the oolite. The subject, I am sorry to think, must thus far remain

obscure, until some more fortunate traveller shall venture upon those

Interesting scenes.

From this slight sketch it will be seen that the geological series from

Kotgurh to the neighbourhood of Soongnum, in Kunawur, is that of the

| primary class; while thence, to the head of the Spiti valley, we find,

| 2D

216 Capt. Hutton’s Geological Report. [ No. 111.

with slight interruption, the transition or lowest secondary series con- —

taining fossil exuviz of marine Mollusca.

From the point of junction of the Spiti and Sutledge to the head of

the Spiti valley, we find every thing indicating the former presence of

an extensive lake. These indications consist in beds of friable or earthy

gypsum, clays, sand, and rolled pebbles now left high in horizontal strata

above the course of the river at the present day.

These accumulations are also seen to be the thickest and most extensive

at the lower end of the valley, where the mountains form recesses, and

where the slope is the most gradual. We find the gypseous beds alone at

the lower end, and we also find them growing thinner and dying out as —

they approach the higher and narrower part of the valley, until at last

their presence is only to be traced in the incrustations of other rocks.

The clays and sands which have been deposited upon these beds are, on

the other hand, universal throughout the valley wherever they could

find a resting place, and they pass on after the gypsum has ceased up to the ©

higher portion of Spiti, where at length they yield to pebdles and boulders.

J have called attention to these facts, because I shall presently show by

what means such an arrangement has taken place. |

It will, however, first be necessary to state the theory which these ap-

pearances suggest, and then to show how the phenomena presented to our

view, are in accordance with that theory.

Theory of the Spiti Valley.

We have already seen that the valley bears every appearance of having

been at some remote period the bed of an extensive lake, which at length,

by the accumulations of its waters, and its enormous pressure upon the

rocky barriers which confined it at the lower extremity of the valley, burst

forth with irresistible power and devastating effects down into the district

of Kunawur. I shall endeavour to trace in detail the circumstances which

may have led to this outburst of the Spiti waters.

The first formation of such a lake may have occurred from one of three

distinct causes, namely :—

First. If we allow the existence of these vast mountains previous to the

flood, the lake may have accumulated in the bosom of the valley from the

melting of antediluvian snows, and thus, (suppossing the Mosaic narrative

to be correct,) it will be seen, that although originally composed of fresh

waters, it must have changed its nature and become salt at the period of

its submersion by the deluge; and again in after years, when that deluge

1841.] Capt. Hutton’s Geological Report. 217

had subsided, it would have gradually regained its freshness, and parted

“with its saline properties by the constant accession of streams from the

‘beds of snow surrounding it.

Secondly. If these mountain ranges were formed at no remoter period

than that assigned to the subsidence of the Mosaic deluge, the lake may have

been formed simply by the accumulation of the snow streams from the

‘heights above, since that last grand catastrophe.

And, Thirdly. Ifsuppose these mountains to have been upheaved by sub-

| marine volcanic agency during the convulsions attendant on the subsidence of

the deluge, we may assign the origin of the lake to the enclosing or retaining

| of the oceanic waters, as the ranges rose upwards from beneath the waves.

I shall presently speak of the most probable of these three causes, and

in the mean time taking for granted the former existence of the lake, pro-

| ceed to show by what means it has disappeared.

The walls of the valley, then, we must suppose to have been at one pe-

riod continuous, without an outlet; thus forming an extensive basin con

taining a lake of water, which from its vast expanse and magnitude, might

have been almost termed an inland sea.

| The surrounding barriers of this lake rearing their heads aloft to an ele-

| vation of from 16,000 to 20,000 feet and upwards above the level of the

| present sea, were then, as they still continue to be, the never-failing

| receptacles of eternal snows, which furnished streams of ever-running

_ waters, all emptying themselves into the broad lake beneath.

_ This constant increase would of course in a litle time cause the waters to

| rise, and overflow that portion of their bounds which attained the least

elevation, and accordingly we find it actually to have been so at the con-

| fluence of the present stream with the river Sutledge.

| This overflowing would at first proceed quietly, and with a gently exert-

ed force; but as the action of the never-ceasing stream gradually carved a

deeper channel over the rock, a greater body of water would flow down,

bursting through and tearing away blocks of increasing magnitude, until

_ its weight and constant action having loosened and undermined the bank,

| the massive barrier which had hitherto sustained this enormous weight,

| now weakened by the repeated loss of its various supports and out-posts as

_ it were, would at length give way before the overpowering pressure of

| the waters, and yield them a passage to the vales below.

Bursting with headlong fury through this, its long sought aperture,

what devastation must have attended the downward passage of such a bo-

dy of water! Huge fragments of rocks, together with the soils and pro-

| ductions of whole districts through which the torrent rushed, must have

| been swept off before it, and have been deposited at various distances from

218 Capt. Hutton’s Geological Report. [ No. 111.

their original sites, where combining with other soils, they would form

strata peculiar to those situations.

It is probable that these sudden overwhelmings of the district now call-

ed Kunawur, may have happened more than once, both from this and from

other lakes; for although the Spiti lake had burst through its rocky bar-

riers and found an outlet for the superabundant waters, it would merely

have expended itself to a level with the opening it had made, at which

point it would again remain until the accumulating supplies from the

snow-clad peaks above, and the never-ceasing flow and action of the

waters upon the already ruptured rocks, should again have brought

about a similar outpouring of its waves, and thus would the lake gradual-

ly sink by the same never-failing means, from level to level, until its

whole body of waters was expended, and so leave those trickling and ap-

parently insignificant snow streams which had ultimately caused its expul-

sion from the valley, not only to usurp its former bed, but to form by

their united waters the present river Spiti.

From these facts a question naturally arises, as to the probable source

from whence the vast beds of marine exuvie found in the higher portions

of this valley have been derived, and the answer to it must entirely de-

pend upon the origin we assign to the lake itself. That is, if these moun-

taims and the lake were in existence before the Mosaic deluge took place,

it will follow, that the quality of the waters must have undergone a change

from fresh to salt by the influx of the ocean, and it might on this account

be contended by some that the marine shells rising with the waters, were

here left living when that ocean again subsided to its proper bed; that

as from that period the waters of the lake would gradually part with their

saline properties, as the snows around continued to pour down their limpid

streams, causing the lake again to resume its pristine freshness, it becomes

evident that those marine animals, exclusively formed and adapted for an

existence in salt waters, could only have survived there for a short time,

and would then have been deposited in one vast accumulation. But had

this been the case, the exuviz must have belonged to species still existing

in the seas, whereas we find them all to be the spoils of extinct animals ; and

again, kad such been the case, they would have been imbedded in strata of

the tertiary formation, whereas, we find them in those of the secondary de-

posits, which are referrible to a period long antecedent to the Mosaic flood.

Thus, we must at once abandon this first position.

Secondly. If we suppose that the lake was formed at and by the deluge,

and afterwards by the constant accession of snow water became fresh,—

the effect, as regards the marine deposits, will still be the same; and con-

sequently this second supposition must be abandoned likewise.

1841. | Capt. Hutton’s Geological Report. 219

_ As it is therefore evident that the presence of the fossils can be attributed

to neither of these sources, we are at once led to the conclusion, that the

vast ranges of the Himalyan mountains were not in existence previous to the

Mosaic deluge, but that the rocks and strata which they now exhibit were

at that time horizontal, and forming part of the bed of the antediluvian

ocean. Of this I shall adduce positive geological proof in the sequel.

The fossils therefore which are found imbedded in these higher tracts,

did not become extinct at the deluge, but at a period long previous to that

great event, when the secondary formations in which they occur were de-

posited, and which period though hitherto passed by unnoticed by writers

on geology, is nevertheless clearly pointed out by the sacred historian.

In order more satisfactorily to ascertain the causes by which animals

once living in the depths of ocean have been left imbedded in rocks now

towering to a height of more than 16,000 feet above its present level, and

at a distance of many hundred miles from it, it will be necessary to skim

lightly over the events which have occurred on the surface of our globe

from the time of its creation, “ until that last catastrophe to which these

mountains owe their existence, ‘‘ Geologists,” says Cuvier, “have hitherto

assigned but two revolutions to account for the phenomena which the strata

of the earth now exhibit, namely, the creation, and the deluge, which he rightly

thinks are insufficient, although he erroneously pronounces them to have

Nor is it surprising that he should have deemed them in-

adequate to account for such phenomena, since the first of these periods

been numerous.

was no revolution at all, but occurred before the vegetable and animal races,

whose remains constitute the chief phenomena of our strata, were created,

and therefore it could have been in no wise instrumental either to their

destruction or deposition. It is, moreover evident, that this first revolution

of geologists could in reality be no revolution, but a creation! A revolution

must imply the overthrow or upsetting of an already established order of

things ; while here in this first period we know that there was no overthrow,

but a setting in order of things which had not as yet existed; therefore it was

a creation, or calling into being an order of things which subsequently in af-

ter years was to be overthrown through the disobedience of created beings.

The separation therefore of land and sea, by which our earth was first

called into existence, can be looked upon as only a creation, and such indeed

it is termed by the sacred historian, for he tells us that in the beginning

the materials from which our land was to be formed were called into being,

and that on the third day, the interim being occupied in perfecting other

arrangements all tending towards its welfare, the earth was separated

from the waters, and its existence commenced. ‘True, the record mentions

two and only two distinct revolutions, but the Mosaic, equally with the

220 Capt. Hutton’s Geological Report. [No. 111.

mineral geologist, has disregarded and passed over the first of them which

occurred, not during but subsequent to the Creation, when man first trans-

gressed the commandment of his Maker, and drew down, in consequence,

the curse of an offended God upon the earth and its productions. Thus it

would appear, that geologists are right in referring the fossil exuviz of the

secondary strata to a revolution long prior to that of the deluge, and they

have only erred in not assigning to it the actual period pointed out by

the record.

The second revolution, or deluge, is too clearly marked, and its consequen-

ces too obvious to escape the notice of any one; but the historian enters

into no details of the means by which the first was effected, although he

clearly points out the effect of it. This difference in the seeming impor-

tance of the two revolutions may have arisen from the fact that the first

did not, like the second, involve the loss of life to the human race, and there-

fore the record is content to point it out merely by its effects, leaving us

at liberty to infer the causes.

Asserting therefore, with the inspired historian, that our planet, toge-

ther with all its goodly furnishing of vegetable and animal life was: creat-

ed and finished in the space of six days, each of the same duration as

these of our present computation, and that on the sixth and last day the ©

progenitors of the human race were also created, and were consequent-

ly contemporaneous with the whole animal kingdom, as constituted before y

the fall, 1 shall endeavour to point out the period when, in my opinion,

the marine animals, whose exuvie are imbedded in the secondary strata

of the Spiti valley, ceased to exist.

Within the limits, however, which it is found necessary to assign to the

present paper, it cannot be expected that I should much enlarge upon the

time at which, or the causes by which this first great change in the tem-

perature of our earth occurred, and I shall therefore pass it over with

a slight allusion only, and with the less regret, since I hope at no distance

of time to lay before the Society a theory of the changes which have

taken place on the surface of the earth, from creation to the present time.

If in succeeding ages a writer were to state that the various countries —

of our present earth had suddenly undergone a great change for the worse

in the prolificness and character of their vegetation, would not our poste-

rity justly look upon it as an indication of a well marked revolution and

change of temperature?

And would they not naturally seek for a corresponding change and loss

in the genera and species of the animate classes?

Assuredly they might reasonably do so ; then why do not we, who havea

parallel case presented to us in the pages of Holy Writ, seek for traces of

1841.] Capt. Hutton’s Geologica: Report. 221

that loss of animal life which must ever be a consequence of any great

| change or loss in the temperature and vegetation of the earth ?

) Such a revolution, although no details are given of its operations, is

: clearly implied in the effects which are recorded in this simple language of

Scripture :— ,

| «“ And unto Adam, he said, Because thou hast hearkened unto the voice

of thy wife, and hast eaten of the tree of which I commanded thee, saying

thou shalt not eat of it:—Cursed is the ground for thy sake ;—in sorrow

shalt thou eat of it all the days of thy life;—thorns also and thistles

| shall it bring forth to thee ; and thou shalt eat the herb of the field. In

the sweat of thy face* shalt thou eat bread, until thou return unto the

eround; for out of it wast thou taken; for dust thou art, and unto

dust shalt thou return.”

That earth which had hitherto profusely yielded, freely and gratuitously,

its choicest productions, now shrinking beneath the frown of Him, before

whose wrath all nature trembles, refused to supply even the common ne-

" cessaries of life, unless wooed into compliance by the sweat of man’s brow,

| and the toil and labour of his hands.

' Can a more convincing proof be required of a change of temperature,

and of the first great revolution on the earth?

Or, can it be thought necessary to assign to the fossils of the secondary

| strata a more remote period than this, in all probability, the first few

months of man’s existence upon the globe?+

| Should such proof be required, it may at once be derived from the charac-

| ter of the fossil flora of the earth’s strata, which although now abundantly

| found in northern latitudes, is wholly of a tropical form, and consequently

|| the temperature of those countries must undoubtedly have been much

higher formerly than at present.

It is unnecessary to enlarge here upon the several means which were

instrumental to this change, and enough has been said to show, that to

this epoch I would refer the extinction, and imbedding in the secondary

deposits of the exuvie now under consideration, and it therefore only

remains to state, that these marine formations as they are termed, remained

in the bosom of the deep until the period of the second revolution or

| Mosaic deluge, when the mountains in which they now occur were up-

| raised, for the purpose of throwing back the waters from the surface of the

earth into their proper beds; to serve as agents, from their accumulations

* That is—‘‘ by labour.”’

| t 1 am well aware, that many will object to this, that man did not exist upon the

_ earth until long after the period here spoken of; but I shall be able hereafter to give

| proof that such doctrine is not only unfounded, but actually opposed to facts.

228, Capt. Hutton’s Geological Report. [ No. 111.

of snow, in reducing still more the temperature of the earth, and in fur-

nishing those supplies to the rivers and streams, which are so essential

to the welfare of organised creation; and, lastly, perhaps it may be added,

to stand forth with their imbedded fossils as eternal and convincing monu-

ments of man’s fall and punishment, and of the truths so simply stated

in the Scriptures.

My own opinions lead me to conclude, that when the waters of the

ocean had risen over, and, as in the beginning again enclosed the earth in

its cold embrace, and had effected the punitory offices for which it was

permitted to transgress its bound, the lofty mountain ranges which now

adorn the surface of our earth were successively upheaved through the

agency of submarine volcanic powers, forming in the depths of ocean vast

indentations or depressions, corresponding in magnitude to the masses

which were upheaved upon the opposite surface, and into which depressions .

or vacuities, by the laws of nature still in force, the waters would have

rushed or risen, forced down as they were by the pressure of the superin-

cumbent atmosphere, and thus as each successive upheavement took

place, the waters being drawn downwards would have again retired from

the surface of the earth, into the place appointed to receive them; the

same as on that third creative day when, as recorded in the Scriptures,

they were commanded “to gather themselves together, that the dry land

might appear.”

Nor does this theory of submarine upheavements appear to be unsup-

ported by the opinions of able geologists, for we find in the words of Dr.

Buckland, “that trachyte and lava being ejected through apertures in

granite, prove that the source of volcanic fires is wholly unconnected

with the pseudo-volcanic results of the combustion of coal, bitumen, or

sulphur, in stratified formations, and is sEATED DEEP BENEATH THE PRIMARY

ROCKS. *

Among the vast mountain ranges which were then upheaved, the Hima-

lya stands pre-eminent, and as it rose towering upwards from beneath the

waters of the deluge, the lake in question, and doubtless many more, may

have been borne on high enclosed among its loftiest ridges. If such were

the case, its waters which at first were salt, would afterwards have be-

come fresh, from the cause already stated. Or if no such lake were borne

aloft, then must it have accumulated in after times from the snows above,

until bursting through the barriers of gneiss, which had hitherto confined

it, the valley would have been left nearly as we find it in the present day.

The solution of the problem must therefore be sought for in the strata |

and appearances which the valley now exhibits.

* For an illustration of this, see Fig. 5.

1841.] Capt. Hutton’s Geological Report. 223

Those phenomena and appearances have already been stated, and it

therefore now only remains to show, that they are precisely in accordance

with the theory proposed, and prove it to be correct.

When the vast ranges of the Himalya burst upward through the watery

shroud which had hitherto enclosed the earth, the lofty ridges which sur-

rounded the lake became at once the eternal reservoirs of everlasting snows,

from which numerous streams descended, as in the present day.

The waters of the lake itself were salt, being taken from the ocean, and

they gradually yielded to the streams which descended from the heights,

until they became first brackish, and finally fresh.

The largest body of water which was supplied from the snows was that

of the Spiti river, and to its current are partly attributable the appearances

of the present valley.

Let us then look well to the mode of operation.

The Jake was salt or marine; its waters after the agitation caused by the

upheavement had ceased became tranquil, and as their nature began imme-

diately to undergo a change from the influx of the snow streams, a deposit

from its waters commenced. That deposit I hold to be the bed of fri-

able or earthy gypsum.

The reason why it occurs at the lower end of the lake is this :—The

downward rush of the Spiti waters from the heights of the Paralassa range,

caused a strong current to advance far onwards into the valley, where it

became less and less rapid, till it died away, or was checked by the body

of water below.

Thus we may at once perceive, that while the fresh waters usurped the

upper portion of the valley, the middle and lower parts were occupied

by brackish and salt waters respectively—a circumstance that may be fully

understood by observing the confluence of a large river with a gulf or

any part of the sea. The river is fresh, the junction brackish, and the

ocean salt.

The gypsum or sulphate of lime would therefore naturally be pre-

cipitated in the greatest quantities at the lower end of the valley, where

the waters were the saltest, and the bed would gradually become thinner

as it advanced into the intermediate part where the lake was brackish, and

it would be wanting altogether in the upper part where the waters were

fresh. This is precisely the fact, for the upper end or head of the Spiti val-

ley is free from the gypsedus deposit, while towards the middle we find the

rocks often incrusted with it, or forming with fragments of shale and other

| rocks a gypseous breccia, which becomes less crystalline as it advances to the

lower end of the district, where it yields to the thick beds or deposit of

friable gypsum. :

224 Capt. Hutton’s Geological Report. [No. 111,

While this deposit was precipitating from the changing waters of the lake,

the streams from the snows were bringing in large quantities of fine allu-

vial particles, such as sands and clays, and water-worn stones of various size.

These were deposited above the gypsum of the lower end of the valley, and

passing on after that had ceased, reached to the upper end of Spiti. This

too, is seen to be the fact, for the beds of clay are found not only covering

the gypsum to a great depth, but also occupying its place at the upper ex-

tremity of the district.

At the same time, the waters carried onwards an uniform solution of —

clays, which they precipitated throughout the valley, the heavier stones —

and boulders were forming beds at the points where the streams fell into —

the lake. A reference to the annexed section will show the order and dis- —

position of the various deposits which this valley contains, and serve to —

illustrate the foregoing remarks :—

(See plate) Fie. 8.

Section of the Spite Valley.

Let 3. 3. represent the fall or present line of descent of the river Spiti

from Leedung 12,037 feet, to Chungo 9897 feet above the sea.

It will be at once apparent that the waters of the lake must have had —

an increasing depth towards the lower end of the district, and that they —

were fresh about A ;— brackish about B;—and salt at C. The gypswm was ;

therefore deposited at the lower end, and is represented as lying within j

the triangle 2. 2. 3.

At the same time, above this marine formation a thick stratum of alluvial —

deposits took place, forming a fresh water formation throughout the valley, —

as represented within 1.1. 2. 2.

The height at 1. on the left hand is 12,037 feet at the village of Leedung, q

and the corresponding elevation at 1. on the right hand is the height of the —

aqueous deposit about Chungreezing above Chungo, which is also 12,037

feet, thus beautifully exhibiting the line of the former surface of the —

alluvium.

Above this the waters rose and filled the valley, till they procured egress _

at the lower end, beyond Leeo.

Thus from the appearance of the district we gather, that it has once been ’

the bed of an extensive marine lake, whose waters having at length burst —

through their barriers, have escaped by the channel of the Sutledge.

This fact I consider to be indisputable, and it leads at once to a satis-_ 4

factory explanation of the origin of the deep alluvial deposits of clays, —

Section of the Spite Valley

Loy g

Mint

27 Former Levd at Aiwiun: COMSISTLILG or Clays, Scstds and febbles..

2.2. former Level of Deluvicum’/ or Merine Fotavaticn! consisting oe Stiable: Creyyrs haat

3.3. Present Fadl or line) of level of the/ Sul. hiver froze, a eecliciry 72, O34 Ste - to CHust1-go Gage ee.

4. Leedung Pass 1524 i] feci Above the Sea anal site OS Marine crise

1841.] Capt. Hutton’s Geological Report. 225

sands, and pebbles now seen in the lower parts of the valley of the Sutledge,

to which allusion has been made in the commencement of this paper.

Having now, I trust, satisfactorily showed how the theory proposed, and

the facts observable, are in accordance, it only remains, before bringing

the subject to a close, to take a brief and rapid glance at the geological

formations of the lower hills from Kotgurh to the foot of the mountains.

Taking that station, therefore, again as a starting point, and proceeding

towards Simla, we find the formation to consist principally of mica and

clay slates, the one constantly fading into the other, and occurring in

frequent alternations.—Quartz veins are numerously interspersed in the

beds of mica, which is sometimes of a soft and scaly nature, containing but

little guartz,—at others hard and compact, exhibiting little trace of the mica.

The mountain of Huttoo, which rises near Nagkunda to the height of

10,656 feet of elevation above the sea, is composed of mica slate and

gneiss, while its summit exhibits some rugged peaks of granite jutting

upwards through the strata.

The soils which occur from Kotgurh to Simla, are formed chiefly from

the decomposition of the clay and mica slates, with the addition often of a

rich vegetable mould.

Descending from Simla towards Subathoo, the primitive formations

again yield to the secondary series, exhibiting dark blue limestones and

many alternations of slate clay of different colours ; dull-greenish, yellow-

ish, and purple. The latter is also seen as the poste or matrix of a quartz-

ose breccia composed of angular fragments of white quartz.

Around Subathoo the change becomes the most decided, and the strata

_are there seen in perfection, consisting of the usual thick beds of clays and

marles, varied with veins of gypsum, and resting on a red marie, apparently

analogous to the red marle of England. The strata are here often upheaved

‘nearly to a verticle position, and thick beds of shell limestone* are found

jalternating with thinner strata of compact limestones, containing castes of

bivalve shells, similar to the ‘ Venus angularis” of the European strata.

Large specimens of Ostre also occur, as well as compact strata, almost

entirely composed of small species of the fresh-water genera, Melania and

Poludina.

The presence of these last prove again, beyond a doubt, that fresh water

must have occupied eventually the basins in which the marine strata of

the secondary series were deposited, and leads to the supposition, that

nearly the same causes were instrumental to the formation of that series,

as we have just shown to have been conducive to the deposition of the

diluxium and alluvium of the Spiti valley.

* Strata composed almost entirely of shells.

226 Capt. Hutton’s Geological Report. [No. 111.

Above these various alternations we find the dolite, with its strata of

sandstones. |

Captain P. Gerard of the Invalids, informed me that his brother, the late

Dr. Gerard, had once discovered some Ammonites in the valley below Suba-

thoo, but although I procured and fractured several of the dark rounded

balls in which they often occur, I was not fortunate enough to meet with

a specimen of the shell.

About eight miles from Subathoo, in an easterly direction, are rocks

of a greyish limestone, rismg above the lias and oolitic formation. Im-

mediately underlying this are several strata separated by layers of flints

of various forms, and imposed upon these, the limestone is first of all

stratified and dipping in the same direction, namely, to the S. W.; but

the superior portion of the beds rises in shattered and amorphous masses,

giving a picturesque and beautiful appearance to the range. This lime- —

stone is quarried and used for economical purposes; it is of two kinds,

one being of a pale dirty white or greyish colour, and is the stone from —

which the lime is procured, the other being darker and harder, emitting a —

strong sulphurous foetid smell when fractured. This latter is little used, 4

and appears to hold the lighter coloured variety imbedded in it im large {

masses.

The geological position of this limestone, coupled with the remarkable —

occurrence of layers of rounded and kidney-shaped flints, leads to the —

supposition, that it may be analogous to the chalk formation of Europe, z

and if so, it will follow, that the vast ranges of the Himalya, so long —

Supposed to exhibit strata of gneiss and mica schists alone, will be found —

. to present formations entirely analogous to those of other mountainous —

countries, even from the granite upwards to the alluvium, at present in q

course of deposition and accumulation.

The range on which Subathoo stands, exhibits another example of the —

effects of what I have termed a double upheavement. :

Seen from the dak bungalow of Chamier, the outcrop of the sandstone —

strata is seen dipping towards the N. Eastward, while the same rocks —

from which they have been torn, dip on the Chamier side of the Glen, —

towards the S. Westward. oa

But the N. Easterly dip is not the true direction, for we see again on the

opposite side of the same range, that the strata dip likewise to the S. W.

Therefore, the deep valley or glen between the Subathoo and Chamier 7.

ranges is the line of disruption of the strata, causing them, as it were, q

to dip outward on either hand.

From Subathoo downwards to the foot of the hills, the strata belong —

to the lias formation, and gradually fade away until they yield at

1841. | Capt. Hutton’s Geological Report. 227

length to the sandstones of the tertiary series, in which, at various places

from Nahn to Buddee, the fossil exuvize of extinct quadrupeds are found.

This, although but a faint and meagre outline of the geology of

the noble ranges of the western Himalaya, is nevertheless sufficient to

point out the formations which occur from the base of the mountains

to Spiti and Ludak, and is as much as could be done in a hasty tour

over so extensive a field. I shall now, therefore, draw this somewhat

lengthy paper to a close, by alluding to the means by which the im-

bedded exuvie of these formations have been brought to light in these

latter days.

I have already stated, that the fall of man is the true period to which

the loss of the fossil marine Mollusca of the Spiti and Subathoo fields

is to be referred.

At the time of their extinction, the secondary strata in which they

are imbedded were under course of deposition in horizontal beds, beneath

the bosom of a tranquil water, and thus they remained for a period of

many years after.

The increasing depravity of the human race, once more called down the

vengeance of an offended God, and brought about the second and last grand

revolution which the earth has experienced, namely, the Mosaic deluge.

That catastrophe was the means by which the destruction of the large

terrestial mammalia of the tertiary strata was effected.

When, therefore, the waters had performed the punitory offices for which

they were allowed to transgress their bounds, the mountains of the Hima-

lya were caused, among others, to rise upwards by some vast volcanic

or upheaving agent, in order to throw back the ocean from the earth, and

gather it again into the place appointed to receive it.

By that upheavement the primary series of the Snowy Range was thrust

aloft in torn and ragged spires, while the secondary strata of Spiti and

Subathoo then first rose upwards from their horizontal plane to the in-

clined position which they now possess. Consequent on the uprise of this

secondary series was also that of the tertiary beds, and thus we find one

single geological revolution to be the sole agent in upheaving the strata of

three widely distinct and separate formations.

The Snowy Range or true Himalya, is composed entirely of rocks belong-

ing to the primary series, while to the north and south of it are found rest-

ing on its sides, strata of the secondary formationsd isposed at high angles

from the horizon, and usually rich in the exuvize of marine and lacustrine

Mollusca ; while ont he southern exposure, forming the base of the hills,

and resting on the secondary rocks, occur the tertiary or diluvian beds,

which the successful researches of Messrs. Falconer, Durand, and others, in

228 Capt. Hution’s Geological Report. [No. 111.

the present day, have proved to be so rich in the exuviz of the now ex-

tinct forms which once inhabited these countries. Whether this last series

occurs also on the northern side, is a point for future investigation ; but as

fossil bones are sometimes brought down by native travellers from the

Tartar hills beyond Almorah, it would seem that similar phenomena are

to be expected there.

The inclined position both of the secondary and tertiary series, is clear-

ly attributable to the outbreak of the primary rocks from beneath or

through them and furnishes to the inquiring mind, a sure and beautiful

guide by which the period when these vast mountain ranges first rose

upwards to adorn our earth, may be satisfactorily and positively deter-

mined. The conclusion, therefore, to be drawn from the facts observable

in these strata, are all strictly in accordance with the rules of geological

reasoning, and I shall therefore now bring the subject to a close, by endea-

vouring to show the reasoning and existing facts to be in unison, and thus

fix the period to which must be referred the stupendous and never-fading

monuments of Almighty power, exhibited in the vast upheavements of the

Himalyan range.

It is a fact accepted and admitted by geology as indisputable, that

where one series of rocks having a horizontal position is found to rest

upon another whose strata are inclined, it amounts to positive certainty,

that the deposition of the former took place subsequent to the upheaving of

the latter ; and vice versé, where both series are found, the one resting on

the other at high angles with the horizon, that the deposition of the supe-

rior strata took place previous to the upheavement of those by which they

are supported. .

Resting on the primary rocks of the Snowy Range, we find on either side

the strata of the secondary series thrown into an inclined position by the

upheavement of the granite and its usual accompaniments of gneiss and mica

slates, proving by their inclined position, according to the above reasoning,

that they were deposited previous to the outburst of the former through them.

Again we perceive, that resting on the secondary rocks the tertiary or

diluvial strata of the Siwalik range have also an inclined position, conse-

quent on the upheavement of the primary and secondary series, and there-

fore, that they too, by a parity of reasoning, were deposited previous to the

upheavement of the two former.

Now the ¢ertiary or diluvial strata containing the fossil exuvize of extinct

terrestrial Mammalia are clearly attributable to the effects of the last great

revolution which our earth has undergone, and consequently, we derive from

the phenomena, presented to our notice in the various formations of the

Himalyan mountains, sure and decided data for determining the period of

enn) le He to

dithat

wire ya ‘Re enh had } heen permitted. to «

# tal Steeped the basta dg aa} & iG ;

eae = ‘antl wi

Timnalyé and

AP, h ig ee ints from

Bet Pua Fur “+ ane i te Anpere ‘2

| aud alec to si: eral:

BB e, A vantaiting

pha ihe. POH be Bream

e ve | ey ay wafer: - a ater

ight

be ois

fee ae

4 ry ciety: and” the ; ba Po het

a thy 0 ¥ ft post § serious. Sid et! :

> We Rie, i

ESS ey SEY) my

Toad . : a | : Ee 4 ~ gmt OUD fo awranrtyyy ee

a; | spiteilers hunmuess mn pups fig a nipiiae hunpthooes cays fa "erysen wamnjans ale asm Boor

— Oe Kn Ge wang hapwumng gy fo giaviamomgeln mpg c1ey frmanrnis BALL 2k JO PUPAE MARBUT

eh . . ge: &: 2 Ge

1841. ] Capt. Hutton’s Geological Report. 229

their first upheavement, which period the facts adduced enable us to as-

sign to the first subsidence of the waters of the Moasic deluge.—(See plate )

Fic. 9.)

We may suppose, therefore, that when the ocean had been permitted to

transgress its bounds, and had again enveloped the earth as in the time be-

fore the third creative day, or separation of land and water ; and had by its

devastating effects fulfilled to the utmost the dreadful doom assigned to all

organised creation, the vast and imposing ranges of the Himalya and

other mountains were caused to burst upwards by volcanic agents from

below, as a means of throwing back the waters from the earth into those

bounds appointed to receive them, and also to furnish, by their subsequent

accumulations of everlasting snows, a never-failing reservoir from which

the rivers of the plains were to be supplied with waters to fertilize the

soil; which plains, had the mountains been of inferior elevation, would for

ever have remained barren and desolate, except during the prevalence of

the periodical monsoon ; for it is apparent, that in the hot climates of the

eastern world, no snows could have rested upon mountains of a lesser alti-

tude sufficiently long to afford a never-failing supply of waters for irriga-

tion.

Thus, even in the ordering of a mountain range, and the furnishing of

wintery snows, is the wisdom and unvarying goodness of the Great First

Cause, made manifest to the minds of his inquiring creatures. .

To enter at length into the means by which these revolutions took place,

and the reasons why they were allowed, belongs more properly to a sys-

tem or theory of geology than to a paper professing to be merely an out-

line of the geological formations of a limited district.

I shall, therefore, for the present, leave the question in this imperfect

form with less regret, since I purpose ere long, (should circumstances be-

friend me,) to lay before the Society and the Public a theory, which I

would fain believe worthy of their most serious and attentive consideration.

CaNnDAHAR,

19th July, 1840.

230

On the two wild species of Sheep inhabiting the Himalayan region,

with some brief remarks on the craniological character of Ovis, and

its allies. —By B. H. Hoveson, Esq. Resident at the Court of Nepal.

The great paucity of unquestionably wild species of the genus Ovis

now found throughout the habitable globe, is a fact that has been em-

ployed to cast a speculative doubt upon my announcement (Catalogue

of 1832 and 1838,) of two species in the single region of the Hima-

laya; and the cireumstance of my not having been able therefore to

give as full and satisfactory an account of the second species as I long

ago gave of the first, (see Journal for September, 1835,) from living

specimens, has tended to confirm the above mentioned doubt. I am

still unpossessed of similar valuable materials for the illusrtation of

this second species, having never been able to procure the animal alive,

nor even to obtain a perfect suite of the spoils of a grown male. I

have horns, however, of the mature ram, and sculls and skins of others,

varying from one to two years in age; and from these, not inadequate

materials, I purpose now to furnish a specific character of the Ammon-

like, as well as (for the sake of comparison, ) of the Musmon-like animal,

together with craniological sketches and details relative to both; such

as will suffice, I hope, to place beyond further question, the existence

of two entirely distinct, new, and peculiar breeds of Sheep in a state of

nature in the Himalaya ; where indeed, from the unparalleled elevation

and extent of the mountains, it need be no rational matter of surprise

that they exist.

Ovis Ammonoides, Nob.—Large wild sheep, with massive strictly

trigonal sub-compressed horns, deeper than broad at the base, presenting

a flat surface vertically to the front, and cultrated edge beneath, insert-

ed not in contact on the crest of the frontals, remote from the orbits,

directed backwards and outwards with a bold circular sweep: the flat-

tened points being again subrecurved outwards and the whole surface

covered with numerous heavy complete wrinkles: the forehead flat and

broad: the nose scarcely arched, and much attenuated to a fine small

muzzle: the ears short, pointed, and striated: the tail short and deer-

like, and the limbs fine and elevated: the vesture composed of close,

thick, more or less porrect, brittle piles of medial uniform length, con-

cealing a scanty fleece: no beard nor mane: general colour dull slaty

1841. | Two wild species of Sheep in the Himalayas. 231

blue, paled on the surface, and more or less tinted with rufous: dorsal

ridge dark and embrowned : lips, chin, belly, and insides of limbs near

it, dull hoary: limbs externally, below the central flexures, rufescent

hoary: snout to base of tail seventy to seventy-two inches: mean

height forty-two: head straight to crest of frontals, fourteen : tail with

the hair, eight: ears, six: horns, along the curve, forty.

Females smaller, with much smaller, compressed (?) nearly straight .

horns. Young, with the colours deeper and more sordid. Vulgo,

Banbhéra and Bhaaral.

Ovis Nahoor, Nob. Medial sized wild Sheep, with moderate, subtrigo-

nal, uncompressed horns, presenting a rounded surface obliquely to the

front, and a cultrated edge to the rear, inserted nearly in contact on the

crest of the frontals, less remote from the orbits, and directed upwards

and outwards with a semicircular sweep; the rounded points being

again recurved backwards and inwards, and the general surface va-

guely marked with infrequent rugze : forehead broad and flat : chaffron

arched : muzzle less attenuated : ears erect, short, and striated, and tail

_ short and deer-like, as in the last: vesture or fur also similar, without

beard or mane : general colour dull slaty blue, paled on the surface, and

more or less tinted there with brownish or fawn: head below, and belly

and insides of the limbs near it, yellowish white: face, or nose rather,

fronts of the intire limbs, a connecting band along the flanks, whole

chest and tip of the tail, black: no disk on the buttocks: their mere

margin and that of the tail, paled. Snout to rump sixty inches : mean

height thirty-six : head, as before, eleven: tail with the hair seven and

three quarters; ears five and three quarters: horns along the curve,

twenty-four. Females smaller, with small straightish, suberect, de-

pressed horns, directed upwards chiefly, and with the dark marks on

the limbs and chest less extended than in the male ; frequently the chest

is wholly unmarked. Young, with the colours deeper and more sordid ;

the marks still less extended, and wanting wholly on the chest and

flanks. Vulgo Nahoor of the Nepalese.

N. B. Since the Prince of Musignano has published his account of the

Musmon, it has become quite evident that our Mdhodr cannot be

identified with that species; and though the vaguer accounts of the

Asiatic Argali render a like confident judgment in regard to the inde-

pendence thereon of Ammonoides difficult of attainment, yet all

234 Two wild spécies of Sheep in the Himalayas. [(No. 111.

the now generally recognised diagnostics of the groups of the Boyde,

(Taurus, Bubalus, &c.) or who are ignorant of the shadowy nature

of the existing marks of discrimination between Antelope, Ovis, and

Capra, will, I apprehend, refuse to adopt the now suggested more

enlarged application of Cuvier’s principles. Either those principles

are false, or this larger application of them is as legitimate as it is

requisite. On these principles, (as on others,) Cervus and Ovis re-"

present the extremes, and Antelopa and Capra the means: but there

is a regular graduation from Cervus to Antelopa, from it to Capra,

and from it again to Ovis; in such wise, however, that the two former

fall naturally into one great group, and the two latter into another,

Cervus and Ovis being the typical forms. And I may add as a proof

how useful the new diagnosis now proposed is, and how harmonious

in practice with other and admitted criterea, that, measured by this

_.Standard, our Hemitragus (the Jharal) is as clearly a caprine form

as Ogilvy’s Kemas (the Ghoral) is an antelopine one. Thus too the

affinity of the Musks and Muntjacs to Cervus, however apparently

anomalous they seem to be, is rendered palpably evident, and the

soundness of our diagnosis consequently further corroborated.

With regard to Ovis and Capra, inter-se, Cuvier’s ‘forehead concave’ BH

for the latter, and ‘ forehead convex’ for the former genus, are clearly

erroneous marks; but those sometime since suggested by me, of

‘males odorous,’ and ‘ males not odorous,’ as respectively characteris-

tic of Capra and Ovis, I find confirmed by every day’s experience :

nor is this discriminative sign dependent, as supposed, on season in

any degree, nor even on age after the animal has reached about four

months, so soon is the odour developed in Capra.

Nipal, March, 1841. H. B. Hopeson.

Lixplanation of the Illustrations.

I.—1. 2. Front view of the horns and sculls of our two species of

Sheep, to prove their distinctness.

II].—Sketch of Ovis Nahoor.

II].—Lateral outline view of two sculls, designed to exhibit the

characteristic form in Cervus and Antelope (1) on the one hand,

and in Ovis and Capra (2) on the other: and I may add, that

the animals having been females, and not specially selected, the

distinction contended for is thus shown to be peculiarly valid.

—.

Plate I. | Plate II. |

———

Pit iia: EEN \

239

On the Laws and Law-books of the Armenians. By JoHaNnnes

Avpaut, Esa., M. A. 8. &e.

[This paper, Mr. Avdall informs me, was drawn up at the instance of Mr. J. C. C. Sutherland,

who having referred to the author for information on the recognized sources of Armenian law, was

answered by the production of this erudite paper. It contains a very clear exposition of a subject

wholly unknown to general students, and mooting points of historical as well as legal interest. ]

An account of the first enactment of laws, instituted in Armenia, by

the Armenian king Valarsaces, a descendant of the Arsacide, is re-

corded in the historical work of Moses Chorenensis,:a Latin translation

of which, with the Armenian text, was published at London, in the

year 1735, by the two brothers, William and George Whiston. This

Armenian historian, of venerable antiquity, enumerates in a successive

and proper order, the rules and regulations enacted by Valarsaces, both -

for the guidance of the inmates of the royal palace, and of the citizens

in general. “ tee ophtiw fifi Suumunnl- fh wart [d-u-

feopSpyesg he foprafututtoar[? Furig fe qpouutiung eyes

2, pruscfcarts unis puanupugl ug Sipe Gurls wopepny fe uy ens

anfac. pbuby, pwt qelrg Plug ; he gly Plug apron b]

ppunpu,purgfis npuyea glotucurins he fas peur pungfusgis

aff’ huspfr ang Fh. ofa Phopt ple pAustray | i Fry peunypas-

pup efurppy ofusuts pup hupyoac[d-Furt fe uri fats

anu LE buy » op i= 2htn[d-Fut fe founqunqac[d-Fuits fhe

LFtusy uy Ten Tp » & ap fits dusts uypunopl : = E

7. “Legésque quasdam de aula sua posuit, quibus exeundi et intrandi,

consiliorum, et epularum atque oblectamentarum tempora distribuit.

Ampliorem dignitatem atque honorem civibus, quam rusticis haberi

_ jubet ; Rusticis, ut cives, tanquam principes, colant, imperat ; Civibus,

ne se erga rusticos superbé gerant, sed fraternam inter se vitam

degant, honesté institutam, et ab invidia remotam, unde tranquillitas

vitae et securitas, alidque ejusdem generis sint oritura.” £76. 11.

Cap. vi1.—From the foregoing facts it is evident that Valarsaces had

236 On the Laws and Law-books of the Armemians. [No. 111.

given a code of laws for the guidance of the Armenians. To have

orally delivered these laws, without committing them to writing, was

certainly unbecoming the enlightened and civilised reign of Valarsaces.

But, of all the laws enacted by this king, one is repeatedly quoted by

Moses of Chorene, which shall be mentioned below.

Laws enacted during the reign of the Arsacide, first by Valarsaces

the Parthian, and afterwards by others.

In the foregoing chapter Moses Chorenensis writes thus about

Valarsaces:—“ [pe .putigf paged atip aconkpo ,

yunnzues Paphos udbbbe gah wn. hep ay "bY ps

ple (ap poulbp yayuFadl frog Qanquipzurh «)

Junie py win quauu pully fs yaplsiie Zu2-

unb‘ifg yb. ft dap Uapft 1a Siistulr ny y op E wpunu,p ye

Suspotuny » vi ‘Louw [d-nqyad q2b iu wij Suit-

Epa peck paso dinhg onwtdfii , be mndhury

hupybpag yuppatincum yb. dha qunmp fin ape fits

ap yoskp Up2eys yas an pep of Sandip [du

pucopne[d-fut : Ge Fol. myo juju Sfuk Lk wn.

juny opk tp ‘ft dbp Upgubacilring, day oppeny

plunh by py uppuyfi, fnfoutiopy. foley [Fug uen-

poe[d-Futh he /2 “yy acum pug he gut pug quay fr

hoqdiate tue ify age ft Funutyacf[d ft 3 *s

‘“‘Caetertium quum multos filios haberet, parum utile esse ratus, ut cuncti

ad Nisibim manerent, in provinciam eos Hastensem dimisit, et ad

Zoram, quae fines ejus contingit, trans Taronem sitam; illisque uni-

versa ea oppida attribuit et stipendia insuper de gaza regia singulis

statuit; at ex filiis suis, natu solium maximum, Arsaces ei nomen

erat, imperio destinatum. Deinceps inde consuetudo Arsacidarum

fiuit, ut unus de filiis cum rege habitaret, regni successor futurus,

ceeterique filii ac filiae in regionem Hastensem ad_possessiones

suas abirent.” Artavazd the First, moreover, conferred on the Ar-

menian princes, possession of the provinces of Aliovit and Arberany.

1841. | On the Laws and Law-books of the Armenians. 237

oe Canute gecgah, Geypepe frp bk gpape ‘pf

PD hotm hE Wop lprtiay Amiel "fimo

quits uppachf op fr oF wud Ga Lumung y Sut-

| Gr pa unmnestadfils dinfig he modhurg , pum opfisulf TT

geulutrurgis op fr haqdaria 2, cpuntrlifiy ° pula als

| fue ngus nonnull njls 1/3 cml, [Fwy u-

ots Ghruy gi ypupun ‘ft ellen [F fh appayps” Fs

_ 21. “Is fratribus suis ac sororibus possessiones in provinciis Alu-

_ hotensi et Arberanensi dedit, regefimque eis vectigal attribuit, quod

ex provinciae ejus oppidis redibat, propriumque ipsis stipendium in-

| super statuit, de more cognatorum, qui in regione Hastensi habitabant,

ut honoratiores essent, atque aded ad regeam dignitatem propits ac-

cederent quam Arsacidae caeteri; lege tantim sanxit, ne Araratam,

quae erat regia habitatio, incolerent.”—Zib. 1. Cap. xx1.—Sdanatruk

also sent the daughters of Abgarus to that part of the country, about

| which Moses of Chorene says:——“ Qunibtsunyh queul wuts

| Ueqgupor dint ug apf peg Jue yuig DY FSut

| nk‘ : 44 E° 32. ‘Sed omnem Abgari stirpem, praeter puellas,

ferro sustulit, quas, ex oppido eductas, in provincia Hastenia collocavit.”

, Lib. u. Cap. xxxi1.—Following this example, Artavazd the Second, sent

the other princes to those provinces. “ ZyayudSE (4 spuspus-

| unny quadb tus jt fy pup fep 4 TE Ughafua,

kh Unefpuing, , als lf peuwl Fought Juygeupem hr

fuyncusu up,puryfr Leg uffrusjts gSfpurt (geqeuyp

pep) yn SE thofuatiopy prep gh opel is euyp bp F

_ $58. “Artavazdes omnes fratres suos ab Araraté in Aluotam et Ar-

_beraniam provincias pepulit, ut ne Araratam ac possessiones regias

incolerent. Tiranum modo secum retinuit, regni successorem, cum

- sibi non esset filius.” Lid. u. Cap. uvii1—The royal descendants

_ having permanently settled in these parts of the country, began to

238 On the Laws and Law-books of the Armenians. [No. 111.

increase and multiply, and after the lapse of several years, the number

of their offspring became very considerable, so much so, that an appeal

was made by them to Tiran the First, touching the insufficiency of

the provinces allotted for their habitation, to contain such an in- ‘a

creased and increasing number of inhabitants. Moses of Chorene says:

“ [ee F-ffuy wn Gus furlfoug nj fepy une fits Upe- 3

gurljacil ag ap Eft fr fonds 2, unfrupg ; aul « 5

plug apSajbris hg qd-umnutig [ofa gh toleg Ey

anges armas ley hu 27 p a TTT te wp ,pusyhr ; [dk i

wnt yg nyt bey EF WE , as lis achlun fp pfu Sh-

pul y sy Samumnunnlr ay fof. ns 7 Funutigor[d§

i Lingus y fay gop achfits Sucuuwp nos &y Jfu-

prute » gap pet abby pum din pp wf d-nefs Ye

of cuts apy peuqaedp fr Dogar Ebay fr pucuonts

Ughad af bh WYaplputin:” Fs 59. “Caeterim brevi

tempore interjecto ad eum gens sua Arsacidarum venit, quae Has-

tenios tractus havitavit, dicens, ‘‘ profer nobis haereditatis fines, —

quae arctae sunt, cim simus admodum multiplicati.” Ille verd eorum

nonnullos in Aluotam et Arberaniam provincias migrare jussit ; _

cumque ii ad regem acrits clamarent, regionem eam ipsos nimis

coarctare, Tiranus, nihil annuens, Edicto sanxit daturum se eis hae- ;

reditatem aliam nullam; quam tenebant, aequaliter inter se divi- —

derent. Quam cum pro hominum numero partiti essent, incolis minimé ~

sufficere Hastenia reperta est, ac propterea multi eorum in provincias —

Aluotam et Arberaniam commigrarunt.” Lib 1. Cap. rrx.—Imme- ~

diately after the death of Khosrow the Great, when Ardashir, king of

Persia, made an aggression on Armenia and conquered the country, he —

extended his royal munificence and support to these descendants of the —

Armenian kings. For the said venerated historian says: “* Jrufp ©

Upeermenf globoljum.e pe papiplr aay quzluupsSu |

1841. | On the Laws and Law-books of the Armenians. 239

Zusyny ifr VL ums fits Suunuolp » to gi

gulacufutr (quip,pusjape fut) que tne uy boys yi [Fu-

Sinfrp he. mnt fo,p apa Efua 2° f+ 74. Tum Artasires

Armeniae terram egregié ornavit, atque in antiquum statum restituit.

Arsacidas ab regno et domicilio Araratensi pulsos, in eundem locum

reduxit, et eadem eis, quae prits habuerant, stipendia statuit.” Lzb.

uw. Cap. LXXIv.

Of the Satraps of Armenia.

History also tells us, that there were specific laws extant for the

guidance of the Satraps of Armenia. Faustus of Byzantium, who wrote

an Armenian history in the fourth century, alludes to the existence of

certain laws, which seem to have obtained in Armenia only during the

reign of Khosrow the Little. “‘ Posterior to this,” says Faustus, “‘ the

Persians were incessant in waging wars with the king Khosrow. Laws

were, in consequence, enacted by the king for the guidance of the

Armenian satraps, grandees, chiefs, and lords, whose number was very

considerable, and on whom it was made obligatory to remain near to

their royal master, and none of them were permitted to accompany

the expedition against the king of Persia. This measure was adopted

by Khosrow, from a want of confidence in the sincerity of the attach-

ment of the nobles of his court. The terror of the disloyalty of Databi

had seized upon his mind, and he apprehended the occurrence of a

similar event in his own country.” Faustus. Lib. 11. Cap. vii.

Laws enacted during the reign of the Bagratide.

Of the laws enacted during the days of the Bagratian kings, no

record has been preserved in the annals of the Armenian historians.

But, from ancient Armenian manuscripts, found at Lemberg or Leopolis,

a city in Poland, it is ascertained that the Armenians, who emigrated

in the eleventh century from the thickly populated city of Ani,* and

other provinces of Armenia to that part of Europe, had carried with

them the code of laws by which they were guided in their own

* Ani was a most magnificent and populous city in Armenia towards the close of

the tenth century, and contained one thousand and one churches! See my History of

Armenia, vol. 11. p. 92. It is nothing now, but a heap of ruins.

240 On the Laws and Law-books of the Armenians. [No. 111.

country. This code of laws was translated into Latin in the year

1548, by order of Sigismund the First, king of Poland. It is greatly

to be regretted that not a single copy of this Latin translation of the

Armenian code of laws has made its way to British India. It is,

however, consolatory to learn, that this translation is to this day

preserved in the library of the Armenian College at Venice. Sigis-

mund writes thus in the preface to that code of laws: ‘ Although we

have to this day sheltered and protected the Polish Armenians, our

subjects, under their own Armenian privileges and laws, by which our

predecessors had acknowledged and governed them, but on the occur-

rence of dissensions and disputes between them and the citizens, it was

thought necessary to have that law-book of theirs, which was written in

the Armenian language, and which was only understood by themselves,

translated by them into Latin, and presented to us in that form, so that

every cause of suspicion and collusion should be removed, and that we

should, by the help of the members of our council, make judicious

inquiries into its contents, and, by a slight alteration, confirm the

same.” After writing thus far, he mentions the name of Johannes,

the Bagratian king, and cites his mandate in the following manner:

“ Johannes, by the grace of God, king of Armenia, during the days

of his auspicious reign enjoined, not to open courts of judicature

on Sundays—not to borrow money—not to prefer claims against

debtors; and made other similar enactments for the observance of

Sundays.” After this he adds: “ It is enjoined by the Armenian king

Theodosius, (perhaps Ashot,) of happy and blessed memory, and

other orthodox Armenian kings and princes, to render justice and equity

to all—to cities, towns, villages,” et hoc genus omne. These quota-

tions are corroborative of the existence of laws and law-books in

Armenia, during the reign of the Bagratide.

Of the succession of Kings.

Although after the subversion of the kingdom of the Bagratidz, we

meet with a specimen of the law of succession in the commencement

of the code of Mechithar Ghosh,* yet it is evident. that this law was in

* Mechithar Ghosh flourished in Armenia towards the close of the twelfth, and the

begianing of the thirteenth century. Besides his code of laws, he is known to be the

author of several other valuable works in the Armenian language. Ghosh is the cor-

1841. | On the Laws and Law-books of the Armenians. 241

force in Armenia during the reign of the Bagratian kings, with some

slight variations. In the days of the Arsacide the crown devolved

from son to son in a lineal succession; but the law of the Bagratidz

confers the right of succession upon brothers. There are also some

other laws, of which I shall furnish the reader with an extract:

‘«* Although,” says this legislator, “ the crown by right devolves upon

the first-born, yet the most eminent for his wisdom is to succeed to the

throne. So long as the king’s brothers survive him, his sons are

debarred from a succession to the throne. But, on the extinction

or demise of the brothers, then the crown devolves upon the king’s

sons. Should the king leave a daughter surviving him, she is to

be invested with the title of nobility, and is, together with her hus-

band, entitled to one-half of a share of a brother. And, on the demise

of kings, if there be a son from the son, and a son from the daughter,

the son’s son is to succeed to the throne, but not the daughter’s. And

so long as there may be descendants of the son, the daughter’s children

are debarred from succession, at which any attempt made by the latter

is unlawful and unjust. For, it was in this manner that our king

Abgarus enacted laws for the succession to the throne of Persia. And

the patriarch Noah apportioned to the sons and the daughter, the

regions of the southward, as women also rule over those parts.” —

Then the legislator describes the manner in which the succession is to

descend when there be only a daughter, but no son surviving the king.

Or, if there be no heir to the king, then the right of succession devolves

on his kinsmen, one of whom only is to reside at the royal palace near

the king, and the rest are to be domiciled at a distance, according to

the custom prevalent among the former kings of Armenia. All this is

written by Mechithar Ghosh, in the commencement of the second chap-

ter of his code of laws. By the last quotation, the legislator means to

allude to that usage of the kings of the Arsacide, of which mention

was made above. The law of succession was not, however, kept invio-

late during the reign of the Bagratide, among whom there were

ruption of the Persian word Kana 9S corresponding with punpia or, PUypy or vulgo

pouul in Armenian. This appellative cognomen was added to the Christian

name of the Armenian legislator, in consequence of his having very little or no beard.

By this distinguishing appellation he is invariably mentioned throughout the works

of his cotemporaneous writers, and in the page of our national history.

242 On the Laws and Law-books of the Armenians. [No. 111.

found some pretenders and upstarts, who created disturbances by dis-

puting the right of succession. The collision of Atshot with his bro-

ther Johannes, is a remarkable instance of this dispute.* But, during

the reign of the Arsacide, the whole of the royal descendants, with the

exception of Sdndtraik, adhered to this law of succession.

Some other items of the Laws of the Bagratide.

Taxes are alluded to in the second chapter of the code of Mechithar

Ghosh, who treats of the royal courts of judicature, and of those

subordinate thereto: ‘‘ Kings and princes,” says this legislator,

“ought justly to impose taxes on lands and nations, and not to exact

more than what is tolerated or allowed by immemorial usages. They will

have to render an account of their stewardship to the great God. They

were appointed for the preservation and welfare of the country, but

not to entail ruin and misery upon the people placed under their

government. The imposition of taxes ought to be in the following.

manner: one-fifth of the produce of cultivated lands is to be given to

the state. Lands, gardens, and orchards, purchased by the people, are

not to be subjected to this tribute. | Watermills and houses are in like

manner to enjoy this exemption. The inhabitants are to be taxed for

the trade in which they are respectively engaged, and the commodities

which they offer for sale. Christians are considered exempt from a

poll tax, which is only to be imposed upon unbelievers. Irrigated

lands are subjected to a tribute of one-fifth of their produce, and

affranchised or quit lands are subject to the payment of tithes. Be-

cause the right of kings and princes extends only to earth, but not to

water, affranchised lands, orchards, and gardens, are also exempt from

taxation. In like manner, of the seven days in the week, one is to be

devoted to the royal service. To demand from labourers more than this,

is a great injustice. No specific tax is to be imposed upon oxen,

besides that of one-fifth alluded to above. A pound of butter is only

to be levied upon each cow. Pasture-grounds are exempt from the tax

which is imposed upon cattle that graze therein. The sheep are to be

tithed in their lambkins, which can be exchanged with the sheep ad

libitum. Horses, mules, and asses, are not to be taxed, because by the

* Vide my History of Armenia, vol. 11. p. 109.

1841. | On the Laws and Law-books of the Armenians. 243

help of these animals essential services are rendered to the government

of the country.”

From the same chapter of the code of Mechithar Ghosh, we shall

quote what relates to the administration and law of precedence of the

ancients. “ It is unjust in princes to impose a tax upon believers, be-

cause the unbelievers are alone to be taxed. It is proper to exact tribute

from the latter, but not from the former, as it is done by the Georgians

to those placed under their subjection. When a tract of land is grant-

ed by the crown to an Armenian nobleman,—if a fort be raised on it by

the latter in accordance with the royal consent, or if a village be con-

structed thereon, or if ruined buildings be repaired thereon,—then, and in

that case, the same tract of land is to devolve on him and his heirs in

perpetuity. The land so granted is by no means to be alienated from

him without a very serious and heinous offence. And, after the death

of the person or persons on whom that land is conferred, the gift is to

devolve on his, her, or their, descendants by order of the king. In like

manner, nobles are to be next to princes, according to the seniority or

priority of the latter, and citizens and peasants ought to be subordinate

to nobles.—Forests cleared, and ruined places repaired or rebuilt, are to

be the undisputed and inalienable property of the enterprising persons

at whose expense the works were performed, and are to devolve on

their children in perpetuity after their death. On the construction of a

city or fort, should there be a deficiency of money in the public trea-

sury, it is incumbent on the people to render their general support

towards the completion of the building. Citizens are to enjoy the honor

of precedence to villagers, and inhabitants of villages should precede

in rank the farmers and husbandmen. This law of precedence is, in

like manner, to obtain among the denizens of forts and villages. These

_ have been the usual and invariable practices among the ancient kings of

Armenia.” The concluding portion of this quotation alludes to the

usages prevalent in our country during the reign of Valarsaces, as stated

above.

Courts of Judicature, and Codes of Laws in Armenia.

In our national history mention is made of the institution of courts

of judicature by Valarsaces, during the days of the Arsacide, as it ap-

pears from the testimony of Moses of Chorene, while speaking of the

244 On the Laws and Law-books of the Armenians. [No. 111.

public acts of this monarch. Peecupupu fr unuils mp, pate

th, fpwcuopupe h piuqupu he jue $f 7

‘¢ Judices in .aulé regia, judices in oppidis villisque statuit.” Zvb.

i. Cap. vu. Where there are judges, there must of necessity be courts

of judicature, in which judges and arbiters hear causes, and administer

justice by the employment of officers and subordinates, without whom $ |

judicial affairs cannot be properly managed and conducted. But, that

there were actually courts of judicature in existence in Armenia, we

have conclusive and satisfactory evidence in the work of that ancient

historian, Bhenkg he uuu, few be f_pupurtshiep

muilig nub <turluitinekg, fe Suwtinepy Sapulpa.

[F-Fushg he paula, und SL ui. Wig -gpunutifits con spear.

gpncgug diuml- utp, Mitsu arty. ap fr uli Scrlpusts

gunna [dE ( ‘eofuspupocEt) uypenpurgusnne Gt tie D3

“Quibus adhuc devicis at provinciis, atque etiam rebus sigillatim

domesticis, publicisque controversiis, ac foederibus, scripta extant apud

nos innumera historiarum volumina, ac praecipué dum successio mansit

libera.” ZLib. 1. Cap. 11. It is evident that such codes of laws and

instruments regarding which disputes and differences might have na-

turally arisen, by the lapse of several years, among heirs, coheirs, and

legatees, were carefully kept in courts of judicature, conformably to the

order of the government of the country. This has been the common and

invariable practice of civilized nations, in all ages and in all countries.

We have also incontrovertible proofs of the existence of law-books in

Armenia during the reign of the Bagratide, in the Latin translation of

the code complied and prepared under the auspices of the Armenian

king, Johannes the Bagratian, of which mention was made above.

The classification of the chapters of this code is preceded by this sen-

tence :—‘* The Armenian kings lay down this model of justice for the

guidance of their judges.”—Then follow, in separate chapters, laws

respecting the adjustment of disputes arising from wills—laws enacted

for the settlement of differences among married parties—and laws in- |

tended for the correction of offenders and the punishment of criminals.

In the face of all these evidences, one cannot but be greatly astonish-

ed in reading the introduction to the code of Mechithar Ghosh, where-

1841. | On the Laws and Law-books of the Armenians. 245

in he frequently alludes to a total absence of laws and law-books

among the Armenians, and to the consequent necessity of his collect-

ing data, and embodying them in the form of a code of laws! In the

second chapter of his law-book, the heading of which is, ‘‘ Why were

we disposed to compile this book, or what incentives induced us to

resolve on framing this code?” Mechithar Ghosh furnishes the reader

with a statement of his reasons for so doing, of which the following is

an extract :— ‘‘ That we have often been accused not only by unbeliev-

ers, but by Christians also, of a total absence of law-books, based

upon the principles of evangelical laws. That lest, from the non-ex-

istence of a written law, the Armenians should apply or appeal to un-

believers for justice. That many, on various occasions, ignorantly

distort the true meaning of laws, and it is for their information and

correction that we were induced to compose this code of laws. Not

content with this alone, we caused this code to be placed in courts of

judicature, as a record intended for occasional and necessary reference.

That being destitute of written laws, our predecessors were unable to

make references, but, on the removal of this want, we shall now avail

: ourselves of this record, and be able to afford a proof to unbelievers of

the existence of written laws amongst us, by which they will be silen-

ced, and obliged to desist from heaping on us accusations for the appa-

rent want of a code. We were for a very considerable time subjected

to the keenest reproaches of our countrymen and strangers for the ab-

sence of a law-book, and their censures proved as a spur to us in

undertaking the preparation of a code of laws....I was also seized with

astonishment at the apathetic indifference displayed by our ancestors

in not supplying this desideratum. ” |

These remarks were written by Mechithar Ghosh, towards the close

of the twelfth century, at which period, as stated above, he flourished

in Armenia in the character of an Armenian lawgiver, and erudite

author. But, as the numerous Armenian families that first quitted

_ Armenia emigrated to Poland in the middle of the eleventh century,

it is very probable that these emigrants carried with them their own

_law-book, which it was impossible for Mechithar Ghosh to meet with

in Armenia. The Armenian colonists in Poland being in possession of

a law-book of their own, were guided by it in all their civil and judi-

| cial affairs, as stated above. Yet, upon all this, considering the laws al-

luded to by him, relative to the prerogatives of kings and the rights of

princes, we are led to conclude that Mechithar Ghosh was at least

possessed of some fragments of the laws of the kings of the ancient

Bagratide and Arsacidz, otherwise he would have candidly declared

that the code was entirely his own production. This carries with

it its own improbability. And it is not injudicious to adopt this con-

clusion from the perusal of the second chapter of the prefatory ob-

servations of his law-book, in which he says :—“ This string of laws

will perhaps be considered an object of ridicule by those in whose

hands it may chance to fall! They will assimilate us in their mind’s

eye to those who, in a fit of delusion, dream of kingdoms and of —

royal splendour and glory; but no sooner they are awakened from

their illusive and enchanting dreams, than they see nothing but the

mere shadow of what their heated imagination had portrayed in glow-

ing colours! But, let them remember that I am not ignorant of the —

vanity and transitoriness of all earthly kingdoms! Of this we have ~

a most singular and striking proof in the rise, progress, and annihi-

lation of our own kingdom. The past has vanished for ever—the —

present is a mere tantalising nonentity—the future I can scarcely hope .

to see! Yet, these distressing circumstances and melancholy reflec- —

tions will not be permitted to cool my ardor in prosecuting the task a

of framing a complete code of laws, conformable to the wants and

present state of the nation, from the conviction, that the utility s

of ray production will be generally acknowledged and duly appreci-

ated. In attempting to publish and promulgate this work, I must .

crave the kind indulgence of unbiassed observers; and, in so doing,

I stand fully prepared to be visited with the censures of hasty and

fastidious critics, for such errors and imperfections as may be found in

this production of mine. Yet I still entertain a hope, that they will

consider me worthy of credit for good intentions, though they may not

be disposed to extend to me their pardon for the defects of my work.”

From these observations of Mechithar Ghosh it is to be inferred, that

the laws contained in his book were not bond fidé his sole production,

but a compilation from those framed by ancient Armenian law-givers.

In preparing this article on the laws and law-books of the Armenians,

I have availed myself of Inchichian’s “ Antiquities of Armenia,” a

work published at Venice in 1835, and replete with deep research and

246 On the Laws and Law-books of the Armenians. [No. 111. 4

\ of

T..

1841.] On the Laws and Law-books of the Armenians. 247

most valuable information. If the Mechitharistic Society* of Venice

be disposed to publish a correct edition of the code of Mechithar Ghosh,

and of the book of laws prepared under the auspices of the Armenian

king, Johannes the Bagratian,—authentic copies of which are preserv-

ed in the extensive library of that learned body,—they will certainly

confer a very heavy obligation on their countrymen generally, but

more particularly on the Armenians located within the pale of the go-

vernment of British India. An approved and unexceptionable edition

of these two statute-books of the Armenians, cannot but be most

servicable to the judges of the Sudder Dewany Adawlut, who will be

entirely guided by them as by an unerring criterion in their decisions

on causes and questions arising from hereditary gifts and testamentary

bequests of the Armenians residing under the jurisdiction of the

Mofussil courts. But in the absence of printed Armenian law-books,

questions of succession to property, in cases in which the litigants were

known to be Armenians, have been invariably referred in writing by

the judges of the Company’s courts to such of the Armenian bishops

as happened to sojourn or itinerate in this part of British India, during

the period of their triennial or septennial episcopal visitation, which

they performed in accordance with the written and acknowledged

authority with which they were respectively invested by the pontificate

of Etchmiatchin,} near Erevan, in the province of Ararat, the arch-

bishoprick{ of Julpha in Ispahan, and the patriarchate of Jerusalem, §

* This veteran Society was established in the year 1717, and its members have been

_ pre-eminently successful in the revival and cultivation of the classical literature of

_ Armenia, by the publication of numerous philosophical, philological, and scientific

works of sterling merit. The members of this Society lead a strictly monastic life.

| The following lines are extracted from the life of its zealous and patriotic founder :—

6 Pbtwenwbe ayy pun enjnpfit

Cf th “fons habs»

Buppuyna. (thu Yopunmugery

Ubbltapay ferpryanybsnfia =”

_ ©Fuit hoe monasterium totum tempore Mechithar Petri ex Sebaste I. Abbatis

/extructum. A. D, 1746.”

Tt ’h hen [Fre qhhnuwpobeb upy bpp Sif :

£ Bu nwybappzepwea Lae quae =

§ 7b Qusnphupqwpatsby pneu Sup =

248 On the Laws and Law-books of the Armenians. [[No. 11}.

to which each or any of them individually belonged. Sometimes, in

the absence of Armenian bishops, the officiating Clergy attached to the

Armenian church of Calcutta have also been consulted on questions

of inheritance, or testamentary bequests. The exposition of the

Armenian law or usage, furnished by these episcopal and clerical

dignitaries of the Armenian church, in accordance with the specific

queries put to them, has, almost in all instances, guided the judges of

the Company’s courts, either in determining similar questions pending

sub judice, or in pronouncing their decisions in cases of the above men-

tioned description. The Company’s courts, so far as my information ex-

tends, pursue the practice sanctioned by the precedents alluded to above.

In connection with the subject of Armenian laws and law-books, I

think it necessary to add, that in June 1838, I was requested by my

highly esteemed and deeply lamented friend, Mr. James Prinsep, to pass

my Opinion on a certain Armenian code of laws in manuscript, which

accompanied his letter, for my perusal and consideration. I cheerfully

undertook the task intrusted to me, and instantly put him in posses-

sion of my opinion in a letter, of which the following is a copy :—

To James Prinser, Esq.

My pear Mr. Prinsep,

I have received your note of vesterday’s date, together with a

manuscript volume in the Armenian language, and hasten to put you

in possession of my candid opinion on the same.

The book in question is a code of laws, both civil and ecclesiastical,

written or transcribed in the Haican era 1135, corresponding with the

year of our Lord 1686, partly by a priest named Alexianus, and partly

by a bishop named Jacob, native of Ghrim, and pupil of another

bishop named George, of thesee of Ezinka. The transcription thereof —

was made at the desire of another bishop named Thomas, and inscribed

to Stephanus, the supreme patriarch of the Aluans. The work is based

on Mosaic laws, and the materials of which it is composed are derived

from the Old and New Testaments, and from other ancient records.

Mechithar Ghosh, who flourished in Armenia between the close of |

the twelfth and the beginning of the thirteenth century, and who

is eminently distinguished in the page of our national history for

his unrivalled attainments, is known to have been the author or

1841.] On the Laws and Law-books of the Armenians. 249

fod

originator of a code of Armenian laws, which was then generally used

in the courts of judicature of our country. History also tells us that

another code of laws was in existence in Armenia, so far back as the year

of Christ 1046, written or prepared under the auspices of the Armenian

king, Johannes Bagratian. The latter has been in general use among

the numerous Armenian population of Poland, where a transcript of it

is preserved, with a Latin translation; but the text or original work is

not to be found. As neither of these law-books has found its way to

India, I am unable to say whether the volume you have sent me is a

transcript of the one or the other, for the name of the author or legis-

lator has unfortunately not been inserted therein. I am, however,

inclined to think it to be a compilation from both, but cannot take it

upon myself to say, whether it is one of established legal reputation in

Armenia. It is greatly to be regretted that the code of Mechithar

Ghosh has never been printed or published to this day. This, under

existing circumstances, is certainly a very serious evil to the Armenians

living under the jurisdiction of our Zillah courts.

The following is a translation of a portion of the Chapter on Inherit-

ance :-—

“ Chapter CIV.—Of the division of Property.

*‘ Conformably to the rule of division, property must be equally di-

vided in the following manner: that is to say, the whole of the property

to be considered as one drachma, and the drachma as six oboli. If there

be a son and a daughter in the family, the property must be thus divid-

ed: that is to say, two and a half oboli to the brother, two and a half

oboli to the sister, and one obolus to the mother. But, if there be two

sisters, and both of them married, the two sisters are to be looked upon in

the light of one brother. Two and a half oboli to be given to the brother,

two and a half oboli to the two sisters, and one obolus to the mother.”

From this it will appear, that the wife or mother is entitled to one-

sixth of the property bequeathed by the father or husband. This cus-

tom or usage, so far as my information extends, does to this day obtain

among the Armenians residing in the various parts of Persia and

Turkey. It is difficult for me to ascertain whether the Armenians living

under the rule of Russia,* are equally guided or influenced bythis usage.

* A code of laws, bearing the affix of the imperial fiat, was concocted and

published in 1836, for the guidance of the Armenians living in Ararat, one of the

provinces of Armenia which is now under the sway of Russia. <A copy of this code of

250 On the Laws and Law-books of the Armenians. [No. 111.

Herewith I return you the manuscript volume, with the contents of

which I have already been made acquainted, by the kindness of its

former owner.* Another copy of this work, though not so elegantly

written, was in the possession of onef of the Armenian priests of

Calcutta; but in consequence of his death, it was, together with his

other books, sent to his son at Ispahan in January last. Should you

require an English translation of any other portion of the work, I

shall feel most happy to furnish you with it.t

Believe me to be,

CaLcuTta, Your’s very truly,

26th June, 1838. JOHANNES AVDALL.

laws in manuscript having been sent to.me from Madras, I instantly put it into the

press, and published a sufficient number of copies thereof for the numerous Armenians

living in different parts of British India. The contents of this code are, however,

inapplicable and scarcely of any use or benefit to my expatriated countrymen, scattered

throughout this portion of the globe. Driven as we are from our country by Moslem

despotism and unrelenting persecution—bereft as we are of our national glory and in-

dependence—wandering as we are on the surface of the globe like the scattered

children of Israel, but partially domiciled here, under the fostering and paternal care

of the British Government, I trust I shall not be taxed with presumption in expressing

a wish, that a string of laws, well adapted and suited to the circumstances and general

condition of the Armenians settled in this country, framed and concocted by the

wisdom of the Legislative Council, be passed and promulgated by the Supreme

Government of British India, with the view of promoting and securing the welfare of

the children of their adoption. In asking this boon, I rest assured that it will be

conceded to us by the illustrious and philanthropic head of our government.

* The former owner of this law-book was the late Right Rev. Harithetin Vardapiet

Urenqu Bwpnc[shu Ywppungbn of the fraternity of the Armenian Con-

vent of Julpha in Ispahan. In the year 1824, while residing at Sydabad —

with his brother, the late patriotic Manasacin Vardon, the Rev. gentleman was

applied to in writing by Mr. G. C. Master, first judge of the Provincial Court for the

division of Dacca, to state his opinion on a certain question of inheritance, arising

from the will of a certain opulent Armenian inhabitant of that place. In complying

with Mr. Master’s request, this dignitary of the Armenian church availed himself

of the contents of this very law-book. His opinion on the subject is justly and appro-

priately prefaced by these words—‘‘ All laws of justice, either civil or ecclesiastical,

in all Christian nations, have their origin from the Holy Seriptures.’”? The judges,

I am credibly informed, were guided by his opinion in pronouncing their decisions.

Hence, it is evident, that the book in question was considered by the judges as a suffi-

cient authority. On the death of Haruthéun Vardapiet, the book alluded to be-

came the property of his brother, Mr. Manasacan Vardon, on whose demise it devolved

on his eldest son, and is now in the possession of his youngest son, Mr. S. M. Vardon.

+ The late Rev. Ter Marcar Ter Carapiet, Swigaegbuy Upewhpon Si

Vapzap Sp qupuujbotut formerly vicar of the Armenian church of Calcutta,

of happy and blessed memory.

{ The utility of piecemeal extracts from these manuscript Armenian law-books,

will be temporary and confined to a few only. As several of the Armenian residents

in the Mofussil, have a large and extensive property in lands and taliks, would it not

be advisable for them to adopt measures for printing at the Armenian press in Venice the

code of Mechithar Ghosh, and the law-book of the Armenian king, Johannes Bagra-

tian? Let them come forward and supply the sine gud non, and the long-desired object

will be speedily and satisfactorily consummated.

251

On Tabular Returns of the N. W. Frontier Trade nith Afghanistan.

[Profiting by the scope and character of this Journal, and following

the system of the Society after which it is named, the Editor has

not hesitated in publishing the following Tables, and the remarks upon

them, as containing most valuable notice of a subject interesting to all

in India. The information compendiously given in the above, was the

result of private perquisitions, made at the instance of the writer of

this note: it may be relied on as strictly accurate. The allusion to

disadvantages opposed to traders from Cabool is only made, in order

to show how great must the contrary advantage be, and how strong

the impulse to trade, when, (as the writer believes to be the case,)

they have now been removed by recent arrangements. | ry

Exports.

British Manufactures and Island Produce.

The statement (No. 1,) embracing the trade of the year 1840,

(from January to December,) in British manufactures and Island

produce cannot, it is to be regretted, be pronounced thoroughly

accurate, inasmuch as it is derived from data which is presumed

to be imperfect. However, the quantity of each staple therein

exhibited as having been exported to Cabool across our North-west

Frontier, during the period under review, is, there is every reason

to believe, by no means exaggerated ; on the contrary, it may be

said to fal] far short of what actually found its way to the Northern

marts, via Delhi, which is the great entrepéot of the extensive com-

merce of our North-western Provinces and Central Asia.

The correctness of the staples of trade given in the statement

can be vouched for, and it will be observed, that cloths form the

chief. Of the several descriptions of linen the most prized and

sought after, is long-cloth, ( Luttah, ) the unbleached being preferred

to the bleached; the Cabool merchants having discovered that our

method of bleaching rots the thread, and abstracts a year’s wear

at least from the cloth ; besides it enables them the more readily

to dye it blue, their favourite colour.

Of all the export staples, British linen is said to give the greatest

return, yielding a nett profit of nearly 100 per cent. on the outlay,

252 On Tabular Returns of [ No. 111.

and to meet with the most ready sale, the merchants from Khiva,

Bokhara, Khorassan, Samarcand, Lodauk, &c. &c. buying it up with

avidity.

Our broad cloths, too, are eagerly sought after, (sombre colours

are preferred to gay,) and immense quantities are said to be ex-

ported from Bombay. It is only the coarser quality that is inquired

after here. The same remark applies to Birmingham and Sheffield |

ware, cutlery, &c. which is very much admired and prized ; especially

when contrasted with the miserable wares of Russia, specimens of

which, when contrasted with the rudest workmanship of the Delhi

artificers, have shown the comparison to be greatly to the prejudice

of the former.

The next article in point of importance is metal, (lead, copper &c. :

the former in pigs, and the latter in sheets,) and of this it need only {

be said, that the demand for the Northern marts is greater than

the supply here, z. e. the surplus supply—the home consumption

being enormous.

Island produce, of which the several kinds of spices compose .

the principal export staple, (black pepper is the chief item,) will q

always exercise a very important influence on the Cabool trade ; q

for, although not strictly coming under the term ‘‘ necessary,’ the

customs and habits of Asiatics render the consumption of Island —

produce, spices, beetlenuts, pigments, &c. a matter of course.

The trade, as will be seen in Island produce, has been tolerably

brisk during the past year ; but it would have been considerably more —

so, were it not for customs’ restrictions.

Almost all articles of Island produce are subjected to port duties ;

* Spices, beetlenuts, when imported seaward into Calcutta, and there-

logwood, _ pepper, ‘ Eee

long pepper and its fore, agreeably to the liberal principle allowed by

eariealed minla., y

is See aceon Eee Government, ought not again to be taxed any

iain, an eae where within the Company’s territories. This,

lead. however, is not, and cannot be done, inasmuch as

most of the produce of the Islands is also liable to the payment

of inland customs’ duties ; that is, they (vide margin*) are borne on

the tariff, which regulates the levy of duty in the inland cus-

toms’ houses.

1841.4 the N. W. Frontier Trade with Afghanistan. 253

__ A Cabool merchant, (to give an example,) purchases at Calcutta 10

-maunds of black pepper, which he is told is sea-imported, and therefore

not liable to further interference any where within the Company’s

territories. He brings this pepper to the North-west frontier line

of customs unaccompanied by a vowannah, when, as a matter of

course, it is seized. The owner urges that he purchased it at Calcutta

as a sea-import, and the customs’ officer demands proof, which is not

forthcoming, The consequence is, that the goods are detained, and

the case is reported to the Sudder office, which is often distant a

‘hundred miles from the scene of action. The merchant defending

the case urges the same plea, and the native appraiser, who cannot

‘possibly know the difference, is asked his opinion as to whether the

article is sea-imported, or country produce. In nine cases out of ten he

‘declares it to be the latter, when the custom collector desirous of

discriminating between zeal to Government and justice to the trader,

determines upon sending samples of the goods to the custom master

at Calcutta: meanwhile, the merchant is told that his property

‘must remain under attachment, or he must deposit a sufficient sum

of money to meet a demand for single duty. ‘This latter alternative

me gladly accepts, considering any sacrifice better than further detent-

ion, which usually swells out to fifteen or twenty days.

The samples are, in due course, submitted to the English appraiser

‘in Calcutta, who, possibly knowing nothing of country produce, or

at least of the particular produce in question, pronounces the samples

‘to be sea-imported ; consequently, the inland custom collector re-

‘solves to release the pepper ; but the owner is no where to be found,

and his money remains in deposit for three months, when, according

to the rules of the department, it reverts to Government.

| Subsequently the owner on his return trip to the provinces calls to

know the fate of his money, and he is told that although the pepper

was proved to have been sea-imported, the duty was carried to credit,

‘as he did not claim it within the prescribed period of three months.

The above will shew, without further comments, how materially

this branch of commerce is retarded, (and without help) by the

frontier customs.*

* [ have reason to believe, that this inconvenience is in course of remedy.

254 On Tabular Returns of [No. 111. my

Country Produce.

Statement No. 3, exhibits this section of the Cabool trade during —

the year 1840, and as it is compiled from authentic documents, there —

can be no doubt of its accuracy. Want of time has not allowed of a —

comparison with the exports of previous years, but there are the most |

ample grounds for asserting, that the past has more than quadrupled in

quantity and value the exports of former years. |

Statements No. 5 and 7, shew the exports during January and —

February 1841, which have also been abstracted from the custom-house

registers. A marked improvement will be observed in these, especial- _

ly as regards the chief staples, cloths and shoes, more than double of the :

former, and quintuple of the latter, having been exported during these ©

two months than during the whole of last year. Indigo, which also —

occupies a prominent station, I have reserved for particular notice —

hereafter.

Statement No. 10, gives the exports of the past month, (March ;

1841); this is not included with Nos. 5 and 7, with the view of ©

mentioning that measures were taken in February last at all the

custom posts stretching along the outer frontier line, which extends —

from Kalsie in the Deyrah Dhoon to Goverdhun on the Eastern —

boundary of the Bhurtpore territory, for the registry not only of all

country, but British and foreign produce exported to, and imported —

from, Cabool; and that, therefore, means are obtained for the faithful —

record of the operations of each month, and in each article.

From this statement it will be seen, that 92,401 pieces of cloth —

(linen, silk, and brocades,) valued at Rs. 1,82,064 were carried across —

the frontier in March, which was considerably more than any other

period, and gives evidence of the increasing demand for the productions

of British India.

Cloth being the principal staple of commerce in country produce, it

may be necessary to state what descriptions of cloth are most desired. _

The most valuable, and consequently the least in quantity, are kim-

khaubs and doputtas, (coloured,) both of which are manufactured at

Benares, and yield unusually large returns on re-sale at Cabool. The

largest in quantity, but least in value, are Furruckabad chintzes, and

Dooab muslins, ghingams, doosooties, and garhas, also Dinapore

muslins. These latter are preferred to the indigenous cloth of the

1841. ] the N. W. Frontier Trade with Afghanistun. 255

north, as possessing a finer and stronger texture, being mostly woven

with English and country thread.

Country shoes, which it will be perceived are exported in large

quantities, are manufactured chiefly about, and exported entirely

from, Delhi. Indigo, regarding which a distinct notice was reserved,

possesses the distinguishing feature of being the only article of

trade contained in the statements, which is not conveyed directly

by the Cabool (Vélati) merchants. It is in the first instance

consigned by the Delhi merchants to Amnritsir, from whence it

finds its way to Cabool. That which is exported across our customs’

frontier, is raised at Koorjah in the Alligurh district ; but the quantity

stated in the statements, is perhaps not one-half of what will be

- found in the Cabool market, as large quantities have within the

last few years been grown in the protected Seikh states* which are

beyond our line, and from thence imported into the Punjab, and

countries contiguous to it.

There was at first room for doubting the fact, that indigo really

found a market at Cabool to the extent alleged, and close inquiry

was therefore instituted of the Cabool merchants; the result has

proved the correctness of the original information, and the re-

moval of all doubt on this important question may truly be deemed

of paramount interest, both to the European who embarks his capital

in raising indigo, and the exporter, who will be, in a great measure,

rendered independent of the fluctuations of the European market, by

the wide field of enterprize opened to him in the vast countries of

the north; where, as I have before observed, the beautiful and

permanent dye of indigo will always supersede every other, from its

being the favourite colour, and applied to the commonest wearing

apparel. However, this refers more to a prospective, than a present

benefit.

Indigo produced by a European, whether from its superior qua-

lity, the result of superior machinery and larger outlay, or enhanced

price, cannot for a time compete with the inferior and cheaper material

_ produced by the native manufacturer, for reasons obvious to those

* Munny Majra in Sirhind, a small principality among the states, produces it most

extensively, and of the best quality.

256 On Tabular Returns of [No. 111.

acquainted with the purposes to which indigo is applied,* and the low

The process of manu- ebb to which the monetary relations of the mass

facture could not fail to uJ ;

produce other than the Of the people of the north were reduced, immedi-

erie tca sy al ately previous to the influx of British enterprise

Tae Gn ier and British capital. When the operation of these

mii Serpe OY SPee and powerful, and hitherto never-failing propellants to

Id a very dingy co- ; t :

lour ane ee that prosperity shall have come into full play, it may

manutacture uro- : N i

peans. The hee es reasonably be hoped that articles, whether indi-

i holesale } .

eid eis itouthinieety genous to Europe or Asia, of European manufac-

meee ture, will beconsumed in preference to those which

are produced from the rude and primitive machinery of India.

The other articles of export in country produce, with the exception

of Gotah kenarre, scarcely merit particular mention, as they are so

trifling ; but it may be reasonably expected, that as the productions of

British India become better known, they will be appreciated, there-

fore more extensively consumed. Already the use of lac is being

understood, and I am aware of several merchants having carried

samples of it with them, that they might regulate the supply by the

demand.

Gotah kenaree, (gold and silver tissues,) will, I am assured, in

time be extensively sought after. The chief—possibly only—places

of manufacture are Lucknow and Delhi; the latter especially.t It —

is impossible to ascertain precisely the quantity exported, as from —

its great value, every expedient is resorted to, and it is said successfully, —

to smuggle it.

As pertinent to this subject, it is worthy of remark, that in 1837,

several camel loads of spurious lace were stopped, which were crossing —

the line, packed in bundles bearing the manufacturing mark of —

Moscow. It had been brought from Cabool, and had been sent to the —

* There are yet other reasons which militate against the purchase by

Afghans of indigo manufactured in the European method, the principal of

which is the compact pressure given by us to the article. This renders

necessary the employment of “machinery to grind down the dye before

the colouring matter can be properly extracted, whereas the friable, uncom-

pact nature of the indigenously manufactured article, admits of its ready

solution in water. }

+ Benares has also, I think, an extensive manufacture of this article.

1841.] the N. W. Frontier Trade with Afghanistan. 257

provinces, with the view of ascertaining whether sale would be ob-

tained for it; since that period no attempt has since been made to

force the manufactures of Russia into our markets.

Imports.

Previously to the opening of the Cabool trade by the result of

recent political events, exports were greatly disproportioned to im-

ports; the dangers of the route, and other obvious causes, rendering

it most unsafe to convey foreign and valuable articles, which could

tempt the cupidity of the lawless hordes, inhabiting the countries

through which the route lay. The imports were, in consequence,

converted into specie, and not, as now, paid for in kind: so that the

advantage all lay on the side of Cabool.

In the statements of import trade, only such articles as yield

a duty to the British Government are shewn. Of these, the chief

is assafcetida, which always meets with ready sale in our provinces.

There is perhaps no country in the world where assafcetida is more

commonly used than in Hindoostan.

Saffron is in less common use ; the price placing it beyond the means

of any but the rich, and a preference being given to that which is

brought from Calcutta, imported from the Persian Gulph in Arab ships.

Besides the duty-paying staples, fruits, sarsaparilla, salopmisry,

lapis lazuli, medicinal drugs, opium, and churrus, comprize the

import trade of Cabool. In the margin* is appended a note, shew-

ing the number of camel loads

BUUEVAISINGS, \eackicleavctsctessiesessse L/G+ Camel loads.

Pistachio Nuts, .ccceccecesee 182 cesseecee ditto. Of fruit, amounting to 4,000,

MP OMINGWAS i csnesotcresericessces: LOO2., \assicvrees) GIttOs which crossed our frontier

Khobaunies, ..0.0. ssereereere Bll Sereconee ditto. : ;

“DESIRE ecoeeeqcocsoscogeocoanogucn, LU sinadoacs ditto. from November 1838 to April

MPCPPANALCS,\agsscoscacce--: G05 svoconase ditto. ]J839. The operations of this

REESITHUS i tebevthscccinccssnantiars ., 24) \ ateiecsians ditto, ° i

res

ERIC SIM ee co crsescsccccessscecs| CR) savseseset GILLO, period are shewn in preference

Almonds, wecsesseses 379 sess ditto. to any other, as being the least

MAIMININISGM ties gaze ccesesiccsecsisse) 1s OO) lrselcsinee ditto. favourable, in consequence of

SME csivatcaccsacss cevece, LOD sovcovove GIELO, th “iG i z

Bee eccsvccesseveet 6 VE: cessssane ditto. € military preparations in pro-

gress at that period, by which

$900 the trade was partially check-

Fruit is only imported in the cold season.

ed ; so that there was a falling

off of nearly one-fourth in the imports of previous years, and one.

tenth of those of 1840.

258 On Tabular Returns of [ No. 111.

Mooltan, Bahawalpore, and Soorutgurh, and Bhutneer, (in the Beka.

neer states,) mark the route followed by the Kajfilas before they enter _

the British possessions. From Bhutneer they come to Sirsa, in the q

Bhutty territory ; whence travelling by Ranea, Hansie, and Rhotuck,

they enter Delhi, and then diverge to the several marts of the —

provinces. |

The reason assigned for the Kajfilas congregating at Delhi is, that —

by doing so, they avoid the heavy duties imposed at every customs —

chowkey, which they would have to pass in their progress through :

Bekaneer, Lohanee, Kanounie, and other foreign states.

The nature of these duties will be judged from the eae me-

morandum. :

At Soorutghur, per camel load of fruit, pays a tax of .. 12annas. —

At Bhutneer, the same, ay at ag .. 12 annas.

Total, Rs. 1 8

This amount of duty is paid by the Cabool merchants to the Beka. ©

neer state, and it is computed that in good average years a revenue

Of rupees 12,000 is derived from this source ; which, at 12 annas per —

camel load, would shew the average number of camel loads of fruit im- j

ported every season into our territories to be 16,000. This tax is levied _

without distinction as to the quality of the fruit, all paying alike, and

when two camels are lightly laden, from their being young or weak, q

they pay the tax of one proper camel load.

At Naheir, in the Bhekaneer states, an additional duty

is levied of, per camel load, Ap £: .. Ks. | Sa |

And at Buhadera, also in the Bekaneer a a further a

duty of, percamelload, .. .. «s+ 210 70

Making a Total of Bs. 3 15 0

which, added to the duties levied at Lohanee, Kanounie, &c. aver- _

aging 1-8 per camel load, shew an aggregate of rupees 5-7 per camel —

load, which the merchants would have to pay in addition to the tax

paid at Soorutgurh and Bhutneer, were they to enter our territories —

by any other route than Sirsa and Delhi. Of course, no reference

is made to the route running through the Khyber Pass, the Punjab, —

Ferozepore and Loodianah, as the Cabool merchants would at all

risks avoid it. .

1841.] the N. W. Frontier Trade with Afghanistan. 259

It now remains to offer a few brief general observations, premising

as to the character of the Cabool merchants, that they are remarkable

for probity and straight-forward dealing, combined with caution

and great tact in the art of buying and selling, and that it is so high

in the provinces, that credit to any amount is given to them without

hesitation. Indeed a striking resemblance in this respect may be

traced between them and that remarkable tribe the Brinjarruhs.

After disposing of most of their import wares at Delhi, the mer-

chants proceed to the lower provinces, furnished with bills of exchange

from the Delhi merchants on their agents at Cawnpore, Allahabad,

Benares, Calcutta, &c. and having laid in a stock of goods suited to the

Cabool markets they return to Delhi, and forming a Kajila, retrace

their way back to Cabool by the same route* they come. They use no

other carriage but camels until they reach Allahabad, at which place

they leave them, and convey any goods they may have purchased in

the lower provinces on hackeries.

Mention was not made in the proper place, that besides the trade

carried on bona fide by the Cabool merchants, which the statements

appended are intended to shew, immense quantities of every kind of

goods obtainable at Delhi are consigned to Cabool by the Delhi mer-

chants, through their agents at Amritsir, and advantage is taken of

convoys proceeding to Cabool to despatch large consignments.

As a proof of the growing importance of the Cabool trade, it

may be mentioned, that an insurance office (Native) has been opened

in Delhi, which will assure goods to any amount and value to

Cabool.

The regeneration of the town of Sirsa has greatly contributed

to the convenience and security of the Cabool merchants. The

opening of the navigation of the Indus, and the predominance

given thereby to Ferozepore, has certainly abstracted in some measure

from the importance of Sirsa, as a grand emporium of traffic. Yet it

will always be deemed a valuable point d’appuz to the northern trade,

especially as the superintendent of the Bhutty territory can protect

the traders from exactions and vexatious delays on the part of our sub-

ordinate customs’ officers.

% * They usually make trips in the year one and a half.

260 On Tabular Returns of [No. 111.

In conclusion it may be noticed, that the Cabool merchants being

totally ignorant of our laws, especially customs, are shamefully imposed

upon by a set of law people, who, under the pretence of instructing

them how to avoid rendering themselves amenable to our courts, prey .

upon them in every possible way. It would therefore be very desir-

able, if the authorities at Delhi were required to direct attention to

the interests of the northern trade.* |

I am happy to inform you, that since I last wrote, an enterprizing

merchant of Delhi, who was formerly an inhabitant of Peshawur

and removed to Hindostan with Governor Elphinstone’s mission,

despatched a small consignment of goods (vide margin) to Yarkund via j

Subathoo and Lodauk, with the view of ascertain-—

Indigo, khimkhaubs, . -

doputtas and long- ing whether our exports could not be thrown into—

ok Pettey China by way of Yarkund, which is I believe situa-

ted directly on the borders of it. He seems to be

very sanguine of success; as he considers that the superiority of our

manufactures will always secure for them the preference over those

of Russia, with which alone the Yarkund market is now supplied. }

In a few days I will submit a statement of trade for April, in which |

I hope to be able to exhibit three or four new exports. Until October

or November, however, the trade altogether will be very slack. 4

* Attention has, I believe, been directed to this point.

1841.)

Names of Articles.

British Manuracturss, &c.

| Chintzes,

MV elvéts, °».

| Broad cloths, .

| Birmingham & Sheffield-ware cutlery, & &e.

. Glass-ware,...

| Gun flints, ... a aos sel

| Lead, Pewter, &c. . 5 are

Copper, Ned :

Alum, ye

| White lead,..

Total,

Sea ImportaAtTIoNs.

| Species, Drugs, &c.

| Logwood, :

| Beetle nuts,

| Brimstone, ...

Quicksilver,

Red lead.

| Vermillion, ..

| Sandal wood,

Red earth,

otal,” oi. ox bate

Grand total,

No. 1.

the N. W. Frontier Trade with Afghanistan.

— | a

| Statement of Goods exported from and via Delhi to Cabool, during the year

_ 1840, the same being British Manufactured and Sea Imported via Calcutta.

i i i i nS

Quantity. nes Remarks.

Rupees. BS

...{80,000 pieces,!3,15,000 | <6

..,25,000 ditto, | 80,000 | -& >

400 ditto, | 60,000 Bio

. not known, | 50,000 aS

ditto, A OOM ta

ditto, 15,000 | ..2 b>

ditto, 10,000 | 3a

ditto, {1,20,000| £2

ditto, 25,000 | & &

ditto, 20,000 | -

..100 maunds, | 8,000 | & &

ara lin Shae)

.. 7,48, 000 2.8

.../3,300maunds,| 70,000 | ¢

.../2,000 ditto, 20,000 | sa

.| 500 10,000 | 2s

500 ditto, 8,000 |“) &

30 ditto, 5,000. ty Sp

200 ditto, | 15,000] 3%

50 ditto, 6,000| 8&8

200 ditto, 3,000 | 84

200 ditto, 1,000 | 25

..|1,88,000 | .23

..|8,86,000 s

261

262 On Tabular Returns of | [No. 111. ;

IND 22.

Statement of Goods imported from Cabool across the N. W. Frontier, during the —

year 1840. The same being liable to the Custom Tax. |

Names of Articles. Quantity. Value. Amount of Duty.

MDS. S. CH. RS. AS. P RS.) Ase 1

Assafetida, .. ../1,652 38 2 /|1,44,971 3 9 14,496 15 5

Zeerah, Cummin, ..| 1,346 16 8 10,275 5 6 770 11 3

Zaftron, Saffron, 33 24 995 5 O 99 8 6

Gum-mastic, ... << 6.31 0 671 6 O 50). A6y)

Sumbhoor or Furs...| 118% pairs. 224 11 8 14. AO

—

——

dGtal, co .csccantiieot stan, bo 14 15,428 13 6

No. 3.

Statement of Goods exported to Cabool across the N. W. Frontier, during the—

year 1840. The same being Country produce, and liable to the Custom Tax.

Names of Articles. Quantity. Value. Amount of Duty.

RS. 2ASs P. RS. AS. P. =

Cloth, ....es+eeeee/26,826 pieces 45,525 1 O 1,572" O32 2

Cocoanut oil, ....../20 maunds 280 0 0 20 15 11 EE

a resi oy 1,633 pieces $9,087 12 0| 2,886 5 4) gp |

Verdigrease, .....-./70 seers 6 chks. 36.1853 SHORE IS 4

Fides, <..\p sleieleaeiela, «287 218 0.9 1014 5} “&

Gotah or lace,......{/595 tolahs 1,312 5 O 65 910) « 4

Leather Stockings,..|100 pairs 300 0 0O 15 0 0 2

Amber, eccsce ee (43 tolahs 129 0 O 910 9 =

Cocoanuts, 72 < »/0«+5 12,300 92 0 O 4 9 8 a

Embroidered Goods,|64 pieces 785 2 0O 58 14 1

Wax Candles, .. ..|/2 mds. 10 seers 180 0 O 18 0 0 $

Tron vessels, ....++(6 mds. 75 0 0 7 820 5 "

Beetle nuts, country,|26 mds. 35 seers 215 0 0 16 ia a ‘a

Sugar, brown,....../2 mds. 124 seers D4 84/0 1 206 a 5

Large Hooka snakes, |2 20 0 O 18 0 ¢ 4

Till (Oil seeds,) ..{31 mds, 20 seers 63 0 0 411 7 9 a

Shoes, ...cecneeeee (474 pairs 1,340 13 0 78 1 6 kit M

Mirzapoor Carpets, .|247 827 0 9 62 0 @ om

Old Brass, ..s.....+/|2 mds. 10 seers 101 4 0 10/2" ye e

Tron, ....2% «esees\%i mds. 30 seers 43 10 0 4 5 10 ae)

Ballchud, Spikenard,|1 maund 10 0 O 012 0 ©

Red Lead, country,|30 seers 12 0 O Li Bine =

Vermillion,do......+/6 seers 36 0 0 3.9 8) “a

Nutmegs, do. ....../6 seers 36 0 O $9 8 36m

Red Sandal-wood, ../11 seers 110 O 0 111 oso

Tuj, (Cassia,)......«/231 seers 20 9 O 0 8 3| S2

Sulphur, ......+./122 seers een) 1 & O ie x

Doosooty Cloth, ../2 seers 1 2 0 01°35 e—

Indigo, voce ce ee /1,989m, 19s. 8c.) 2,18,116 9 11) 10,905 13 9 o 2

Gum, ».sc00 o.000-/19 mds. 20 seers] 136) 30 10 3 10 oe

ee —_— $$ — __ | ———$________ =

Total,' 3,08,985 14 11! 15,578 8 7 A.

Total Imports and Exports, ....... 4,66,123 1410 31,007 6 1

1841.] the N. W. Frontier Trade with Afghanistan. 268

No. 4.

Statement of Goods imported from Cabool across the N. W. Frontier, during the

month of January 1841, the same being liable to the Custom Tax.

} : Amount of

Names of Articles. Quantity. Value. Duty.

a rs nn ee |e RN ES NT | A NN Se | epee ene ff center Sea

Rs. As. Ps.\ Rs. As. Ps.

Assafoetida, ...|700 mds. 9 seers.) 39,861 2 0) 3,996 0 O

Sumbhoor or Furs,|/180 pairs, ...| 133 10 0 16 10 11

ee a 70 mds. 23 seers.| 2,752 14 0; 217 5 7

Guns, eas santos ae ae 207.030 4 0 0

es | ee ee

Total, ...|42,267 10 0| 4,234 0 6

No. 5.

Statement of Goods, exported to Cabool across the N. W. Frontier, during the

month of January 1841, the same being Country produce, and lable to the

Custom Tacx.

Names of Articles.| Quantity. Value.

OS ns SO ee | ed En SEE Ses | ence

Rs. As. Ps.| Rs. As. Ps.

Cloths, ... ,-.(987 pieces, ...| 1,076 8 10 26 14 8

ee ig ditto, ...) 49612 to] a7 4:2

Lac, shell and stick, |20 seers, oe 4 0 0 R322

Iron goods, ./9 mds. 23 seers, 88 0 0 &§ 8 0

Brown sugar, __ ...|35 seers, sig 4 6 0 0 3 6

Wax candles, ...(2 mds. 10 seers,, 180 0 0 18-00

igdico, ... ...|207m. 8sr. 6ch.| 22,728 15 5| 1,186 7 4

Shoes, sie ...{1,498 pairs, ...| 858 12 0 43 8 4

Total cwcl 25,437 17) 1) 1271 4 3}

Total Imports and Exports, ... 67,705 1 1] 5,505 1 9

These two statements are derived from the Custom House Registers, and

can be therefore relied on.

264 On Tabular Returns of [ No. 111.

No. 6.

Statement of Goods, imported from Cabool and the N. W. Frontier, during the

month of February, 1841, the same being liable to the Custom Tax.

Tetne Amount of

Names of Articles. Quantity. Duty.

6 tS OS SS | en

en | a ne | nr

Rs. dAs> Ps.\ Rs. - As. Ps.

‘Assafocetida, ...(L1] mds. 20 seers.| 1,150 0 O| 115 0 0

ai a swf) 1,150 0 "O) Taso we

No. 7.

Statement of Goods, exported to Cabool across the N. W. Frontier, during fhe

month of February, 1841, the same being Country produce, and lable to the

Custom Tax.

; Amount of

Names of Articles. Quantity. Value. Duty:

iscAsoPs.| , dis: As Pe

Cloth, oe 166,495 pieces,...| 89,052 510) 2,226 10 3

Kimkhab or Bro- \ 91 pieces, ...) 2,384 0 0; 175 011

cades, .. =

Hides, of: (30 = eet 150 0 0 7-8-0

Benares Dooputtas, 9 pieces, aii 139 3 0 107 8

Wax candles, ...(2 mds. 30 seers, 220 0 0 22.0.0

Tron goods, ao-(o MmauiTds.) (ll... 30 0 0 3.0 0

Shoes, ae 0s ODO DAU es « aoe 506 4 0 25 5 0

Mirzapoor CLES, 1 md. 15 seers, 4140 air) Live

Iron wire, .|2 seers, e 112 0 0:4 2080

Tobacco, ... .|1 md. 20 seers, TSylo 0 6 0

Lac, shell and stick, 2 mds. 11 srs. 8 ce. 18 4 3 111 4

Embroidered belts, 8 36 0 0 2 Tkwi2

Indigo, ... ..|424 m. 37, srs. 2c. 46,798 511) 2,389 14 5

Total, 1,39,33415 0} 4,817 14 5

————

Total Imports and Exports. .-{1,40,484 15 0} 4,932 14 5

These two Statements are derived from the Custom House Registers, and

can therefore be relied on.

Cloth pieces, silk Q

: Benares doputtas

(Ditto including

1841. ] the N. W. Frontier Trade with Afghanistan. 265

No. 8.

Statement of Goods, exported to Cabool across the N. W. Frontier, during the

month of March, 1841, the same being British manufactured.

Names of Articles, Quantity. Value. Pemaks’

a loth ; diss As. Ps:

on t n Nee, Es

ar Rae 5,256 pieces, 25,859 0 0

No. 9.

Statement of Goods imported from Cabool across the N. W. Frontier, during the

month of March 1841, the same being liable to the Custom Tacx.

a i a

Names of Articles.| Quantity. Value. Amount of duty.j Remarks.

Mads. Seers. Rs. As. Bs. Rs. As: Ps

Assafetida. .. ..| 100 23 9,087 8 O 905 12 0O|

No. 10.

Statement of Goods exported to Cabool across the N. W. Frontier, during the

month of March, 1841, the same being Country produce, and liable to the Cus-

tom Tax.

Names of Articles. Quantity. Value. Amount of duty. | Remarks.

_—

ee eee | ee — Se

dts. As. Ps.| Rs. Ass) Ps;

and cotton. § 91,419 pieces 1,60,808 4 0 2,695 12 3

“and brocades, Se. 982 do. 21,259 10 3 1,593 10 8

Indigo, soeeeeee/397 mds, 271 sr} 43,838 5 4 9,191 14 7

‘Gotah kenaree, 428 tolahs 1,087 9 6 54 6 41

\ eq veeeees. {176 pairs 382 8 0 19) (D0

1des, Bisi=vellsle -|140 8% O O A Si (2

Ivory, eeeseeee(35 SETS 87 8 O GHD a0

Verdigrease, ‘we ccees (20 59 6 0 5 15 0

Cocoanuts, ......../1000 40 0 0 22-0 0

Cassia, Beets) eee ./7 mds. 245 0 O on 42070

‘Sugar, seceeeee/Z do, 20 seers 20 0 0 OQ

| Mite! bo... oe : 9°37,909) ah) 46.580) 10° 9

Total Imports and i :

Exports, “he Siri : ae - {286,996 11 1] 7,486 6 9

Pedsh linen. Bee) hose eseoe aaa a ets ernie

266

Note to Mr. Vincent TrecEar’s Process of taking casts of Coins.

vide No. 110,

I must not omit to observe, that the above process cannot be applied

to all coins indiscriminately. Copper and brass coins are sometimes so

much oxidated as to be unable to bear any pressure, and therefore would

be broken if put in the press ; those of gold or silver are seldom endanger-

ed ; but still the operator must use a little discretion. Care must also be

taken not to continue the pressure further than is required for the per-

fect copy of the coin, as after the latter has sunk to the full depth of

the relief, a lateral extension takes place, which will injure it, as I have

found by experience.

JOURNAL

OF THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY.

Of the early History of Sindh, from the ‘““Chuch Namuh” and other

authorities. By Lieut. Postrans, Assist. Pol. Agent, Shikarpore.

[Concluded from p. 197.]

CHAPTER V.

Origin of the tribe of Soommah—rule of the Jams—invasion of Sindh by

Shah Beg Urghoon —and downfall of the Soommah dynasty.

The tribe of Soommah, they say, belonged to the tribe of Uhrumeh

Origin of the tribe Bin Issam Bin Ubbi Jahal, and according to Meer

earnest. Massoom, embraced Islamism ; and were obedient

to Bin Cassim when he arrived in Sindh, in the year 92 u. Uhkrumeh

traced his origin, as connected with Jamsheed, hence it is supposed

their governors styled themselves Jams. Others again trace the origin

of this tribe to Sam, the son of Noah, from which they derive their

name Sammahs, or Soommais.

They were zumeendars in Sindh of some importance, and on the

downfall of the Soomrah dynasty, assumed the reins of government, with

the title of Jam. Their capital city was Zattah.

Reigns of the Jams. The first of this family mentioned is

Jam Oonur,

who was, by the consent of the tribe of Soommah, proclaimed go-

vernor. Mulck Ruttun, one of the deputies of the kings of Turkey

threatened Seeostan; Oonur defeated him, and after a reign of three

years and six months died.

Jam Joonur Bin Babeenah

succeeded his brother in the government of the country. He ap-

pointed his brother and relations to various posts in his dominions ;

No. 112. New Serins, No. 28. 21

268 Of the early History of Sindh. [ No. 112.

his rule was established in Sindh until Sooltan Ullahul-deen sent his —

own brothers, Uglugh Shah and Tartar Khan, to subdue him. Before ‘

the arrival of this army, Jam Joonur was seized with quinsy and —

died ; he reigned thirteen or fourteen years. Ullahul-deen’s army :

reached Bukkur, took that fort, and then proceeded to Seeostan.

Jam Kajee Bin Jam Joonur |

succeeded his father, but was deposed by Jam Khier-ud-deen Bin —

Jam Tumachee, who with his father had been taken to Delhi, as —

a prisoner, by Ullahul-deen, in his descent upon Bukkur. He was

just and good; he reigned some years and died. |

Jam Babeenar.

After the death of Jam Khier-ud-deen, Jam Babeenar was, by the

consent of the nobles, seated upon the throne. During his reign, Sooltan

Feeroz Shah, who had conquered Hindostan and Gogjrat, turned an

ambitious eye towards Sindh, and marched to take possession of that |

country.

Jam Babeenar prepared to oppose him, and after a campaign of three

months, the rainy season coming on, and the Shah's army beginning to

suffer from the violence of the weather, and myriads of musquitoes, :

was obliged to fall back upon Goojrat. ]

After the rains he again attempted Sindh ; the war was furious, but

the Shah was at length successful. Babeenar was taken to Delhi,

where he distinguished himself in the service of Shah Feeroz, who

honoured him and restored him to the kingdom of Sindh. He died

after a rule of fifteen years. :

Jam Tumachee

succeeded his brother; he was arich andindolent man. After a reign

of thirteen years, passed in luxury and pleasure, he died of the plague.

Jam Sullahudeen. :

In the beginning of this reign, the dwellers in the desert disturbed

the frontiers of his dominions; he punished them, and reigned for aa

period of eleven years and some months; when he died.

Jam Nizam-ud-deen |

succeeded his father. He was occupied in sensual enjoyments, and |

neglected his dominions. i

1841. | Of the early History of Sindh. 269

The nobles conspired against him, drove him from the throne, and

placed Jam Alee Sheer upon it in his stead. He fled towards Goojrat,

and died upon the road.

Jam Alli Sheer Bin Tumachee

was just, bountiful, and learned ; he strengthened his power in Sindh,

and the country prospered under his rule; but at length he gave

way to luxury and ease. It was his practice to take his exercise on

moonlight nights, and the rebellious noblés, Szkunder Kirun and

Futteh Khan, (sons of Yuwmachee,) who were living in the desert,

formed a plot, in which they were joined by some of the disaffected in

the city of Tattah, to way-lay Ali Sheer and murder him. On the

night of Joomah, the 13th of the month, Jam Alli Sheer, as usual,

took boat and proceeded on the river; when he was about to return to

the city, these men rushed upon him with naked swords and slew him

and his attendants, placing Jam Kirun on the throne. Alli Sheer .

reigned seven years.

Jam Kirun Bin Jam Tumachee.

This man did not conciliate the nobles of the city, many of whom he

imprisoned and punished. He was afterwards murdered at the instiga-

tion of Futteh Khan and Bin Sikunder Khan, who usurped the tron.

Jam Futteh Khan

ruled with justice, and was renowned for his bravery and magnani-

mity. He reigned for fifteen years and some months, when he died ;

he bequeathed the throne to his brother Jam Tughluk Bin Sikunder

Khan.

Jam Tughluk, styled Jam Tughluk Shah.

He passed much of his time in hunting and traversing his domi-

nions. The Beloochees in the neighbourhood of Bukker broke into

rebellion, which Tughluk put down. He reigned for twenty-eight

years, and died.

Jam Sikunder, son of Futteh Khan, and nephew of Tughluk Shah.

In the beginning of this reign a man named Moobarik, a connection

of Zughluk Shal’s, tried to usurp the sovereignty of the country,

i styling himself Jam Moobarik ; but was deposed by the nobles, after

a reign of three days. Sikunder died after a reign of eighteen

months.

270 Of the early History of Sindh. [ No. 112.

Jam Raeduch.

After the death of Sikunder, this man came with a large force to

Tattah, disclaiming any intention of seizing the throne, but to offer

protection to the Mussulmans, promising allegiance to whomsoever they

should elect as Jam; not finding a fit person, they elected Raeduch

himself to the sovereignty. In eighteen months he subdued the whole

of Sindh to his authority. When he had reigned for a period of eight

years and a half, Jam Sunjin usurped the sovereignty, and killed Jam

Raeduch by putting poison in his wine cup.

Jam Sunjin

was a prince noted for his beauty and pleasing deportment. It

was foretold him by a holy Durwesh that he should govern Sindh ;

and on the death of Jam Raeduch, he was universally elected to

the throne. The country flourished under his rule, and was more

prosperous than it had ever been under his predecessors. The soldiers

and subjects were happy and at peace; he encouraged learned and

holy men, and once a week gave alms to the poor. He reigned eight

years, and died.

Jam Nizam-uddeen, better known as Jam Nundeh.

Tn the year 866 Hu. 1461 a. p. on the 25th of the month Rubeh

866 u. 1461 4. pv. Ul-wwul ascended the throne; he was well received

by all classes, and became a powerful ruler. He was on terms of

great intimacy with Sooltan Hassan Lankar, of Mooltan. At the

end of this reign, Shah Beg Urghoon sent a large army from Kan-

dahar, which laid waste most of the places of Chundookeh and Sun-

deecheh. Jam Nundeh prepared and dispatched a force to oppose

this invasion ; the forces met at Dureh Rowul, (known as Julogeer,)

where a great battle was fought, in which the brother of Shah Beg

was killed, and his troops defeated. They fled to Kandahar, nor

did they again molest Sindh during the time of Jam Nundeh. He —

passed the rest of his life in the society of Moolahs, and died

after a reign of forty-eight years. The country was at his death

torn with dissensions and rebellion.

Jam Feeroz.

After the death of Jam Nundeh, his son Jam Feeroz was a minor,

and Jam Sullahudeen, the grandson of Jam Sunjur, wished to usurp

1841. | Of the early History of Sindh. O71

the throne, but was prevented by Durya Khan, a relative and prime

minister of Jam Feeroz, aided by Sirhung Khan. The nobles of

Tattah, with one consent, placed Jam Feeroz upon the throne of his

father. Jam Sullahudeen fled to Sooltan Muzuffir of Goojrat, who

was his kinsman, and favoured his pretensions to the government of

Sindh. Jam Feeroz being young and inexperienced, neglected his

affairs, and his court was composed of the gay and licentious. He

passed most of his time in the harem, patronizing dancing girls and

jesters. Durya Khan disgusted at his conduct, left the court, and

went to his yhageer at Kahan. The affairs of the country, were spee-

dily in a state of utter confusion, and the nobles of Zattah finding no

longer any safety for the lives and property of themselves or families,

wrote to the usurper, Swllahudeen, to come and seize the throne.

Sullahudeen shewed the letter which contained this intimation to

Muzuffur Khan, who dispatched a force with the former, with which

he marched, took Yattah, and proclaimed himself Jam. Jam Feeroz

repenting of his errors, fled with his mother to Durya Khan at Kahan,

who levied troops from the tribes of Belooch, and other men of the

desert; these joined with the armies of Bukkur and Seeostan, suc-

ceeded in expelling Sullahudeen, and once more placed Feeroz upon

the throne of Yattah, where he remained for some years, until the

country of Sindh was invaded by Shah Beg Urghoon, 926 u. 1519, a.v.

926 H. 1519 a. D. from which may be dated the termination of the

Termination of the :

Soommah dynasty. Soommah dynasty in the government of that country.

272 Of the early History of Sindh. [| No. 112.

CHAPTER VI.

Shah Beg Urghoon—His origin—Death of his father, Ameer Zulnoon—becomes

governor of Kandahar—Baber Shah expels him from Kandahar—he con-

quers Yattah, and becomes master of Sindh—Reinstates Jam Feeroz as

governor of Yattah—Sullahudeen attempts to take Tattah, is defeated—

his death—revolt of the Dhareejas—punishment of that tribe—drives the

Syuds from Bukker—massacre of the Beloochees—death of Shah Beg Urghoon.

Shah Beg Urghoon was the son of Zulnoon Urghoon, Bin Meer

Shah Beg Urghoon fassan Bussein, a noble in the service of Sooltan

Ses Sage Hussein Mirza, of Khorassan, who gave him the

government of the countries of Ghoor and Zameendawur. He had some

difficulty in bringing the unruly inhabitants of the desert and the tribes

of Hizareh to his authority ; but after a war of about four years with these

people, he completely subdued them ; and Sooltan Hussein Mirza was

so much pleased with his conduct, that he added the country of Kan-

dahar, and the provinces of Shal, Sitoonuk, and Urghoon, to his rule.

His power increasing, Sooltan Hussein Mirza became jealous, and

summoned Ameer Zulnoon to his presence, where he detained him

under trifling excuses for some time. During his stay at that court, he

formed a firm friendship with Budeh Ul Zerman Mirza, a noble,

and relative of the king. Being at length disgusted with the

delays and subterfuges used to detain him, he effected his escape

to Kandahar, where he proclaimed himself independent. He was

here joined by Budeh Ul Zuman Mirza, who had quarrelled with

the king, (Sooltan Hussein.) Ameer Zulnoon married his daughter,

thus strengthening the bonds of amity between them. After some time

peace was concluded between these two chiefs and Sooltan Hussein

Mirza. Ameer Zulnoon met his death in attempting to resist an

Teer Anes invasion under Mahomed Khan Shibanee Uzbeck.

Zulnoon. He left two sons, Shah Beg and Mahomed Mukim ;

the former by the consent of the nobles, succeeded his father as

Shah Beg governor 8°VEFHOF of Kandahar ; he confirmed all the appoint-

of Kandahar. ments held under his father Ameer Zulnoon, was

wise, brave, and generous, patronizing learned men.

When Mahomed Khan Shibanee had conquered Khorassan he me-

ditated an attack upon Kandahar, but. Shak Beg sent ambassadors

1841. | Of the early History of Sindh. 273

to him, with letters of submission and presents; he struck his image

upon the coin, and begged permission himself to wait upon him. Maho-

med Khan waived this ceremony, and being pleased with the conduct

of Shah Beg and his brother, honoured their ambassadors, and dismissed

them with dresses of honour, horses, tents, &c. for the two princes.

In the year 923 H., 1517 a.p. Baber Shah came from Cabool

993 u., 1BI7 av. and Ghuznein, to conquer eopahar E the brothers

were overpowered, and driven from their country,

their father’s treasury was pillaged, and a daughter of Mahomed

Mukim (Shah Begum, she married Kassim Kokeh, who was killed in

the wars of the Uzbecks) was taken to Cabool. Baber Shah left his

brother, Sooltan Nasir-ud-deen, as governor of Kandahar. The bro-

thers afterwards collected a large force, and retook Kandahar. (About

this time Mahomed Mukim died.) Baber Shah, however, continued

to invade Shah Beg’s country, who was at length obliged to abandon

Pn ent! 2 the possession of it, and having for some time

gle Beh Heg from contemplated the conquest of Sindh, even as far

back as the time of Jam Mundeh, he prepared

an army, and in the year 926 H. 1519 a.p., on the 11th of the

month Mohurrum, crossed the river opposite Zatiah. The army of

Jam Feeroz under Durya Khan was routed, the latter taken, and Tattah

fell to the arms of Shah Beg. He permitted his troops to pillage the

city for nine days, the inhabitants being exposed to the licentiousness

of the soldiery during that period ; on the intercession of Hafiz Maho-

med Shurreef it was stopped.

Jam Feeroz leaving his family in Tattah fled to Peerar, whence he

sent messages of submission to Shah Beg; this latter not only treated

_ him with the greatest kindness, but after settling the affairs of Tattah

| Reinstates Jam Fee. 2PPoimted him its governor, placing one-half of the

ee sovemor of whole province of Sindh, viz. from Lukie, (which

| is near Sehwan,) to Tattah under his dominion ;

| from Lukie higher up, he delegated to his own servants.

When he had settled the affairs of Tattah he proceeded to Stemer,

| Sulahudeen attempts but the usurper Swllahudeen, (who had before driven

— Jam Feeroz from the throne,) having collected a

| large force, threatened Tattah. Shah Beg sent a body of troops under

his son Mirza Shah Hussein to reinforce Jam Feeroz.

274 Of the early History of Sindh. [ No. 112.

Sullahudeen retreated but was pursued, and his troops overthrown ;

mieetterenthiad his son, Hybut Khan, being killed. This affliction

death: rendered the father desperate, and he also met his

death in the same campaign, in an attack upon the Moghuls.

At this time Sooltan Mahmoud Khan, governor of Bukkur, wrote

to Shah Beg, who had taken up his residence at Baghbanan, that the

Pevollliof-the tribe of Dharegas were in a state of rebellion, re-

areca. fusing to pay their taxes, and ill-treating the servants

of Shah Beg, who were sent to collect them; and that but for the

fidelity of the Syauds, who had assisted Mahmoud Khan in repelling their

attacks, Bukkur must have fallen into the power of those insurgents.

Shah Beg on hearing this, came himself to the neighbourhood of

Bukkur, where he ordered the Dareejas to be punished.

Mahmoud Khan with the cruelty for which he was remarkable, cut off

Punishment of the heads of about 50 of these people and threw them

Tan from the walls of the fort, as a warning to the others.

The Syuds, who for many years possessed great power in Bukkur,

excited the jealousy of Shah Beg. He removed them from the fort of

Drives the Syuds Bukkur to a place outside the walls, called Lohurry.

Hie areayilese Shah Beg himself visited the fort, and directed a

wall to be erected round it, with bricks from the ruins of Alor.

The buildings in the vicinity of Bukkur belonging to the Turks and

men of Soommah he also destroyed, employing the materials for the

same purpose. At that time the fort was surrounded by water.

Having settled the affairs of Bukkur, Shah Beg turned his attention

to the tribe of Beeloochees, who were in rebellion ; this he quelled by a

Massacre of the general slaughter of the tribe wherever they could

ta be found. In forty-two towns and villages these

people were put to the sword.

Shah Beg after this contemplated extending his power to Goojrat ;

but hearing that Baber Shah had occupied Kooshab, intending to con-

quer Hindostan, he became thoughtful, and assured his followers that

he was convinced, Baber Shah would not let him retain the conquest |

of Sindh, but would drive him and his family from all their posses-

sions. <A settled melancholy took possession of Shah Beg, and on the

eau of Sees Beg 28th of the month Shuban, in the year 928 uw. 1521

rghoon, 9: H. ; p :

oa a. A. D. he died, after a stormy reign in Sindh of two

1841. ] Of the early History of Sindh. 275

years. His remains were taken to Bukkur, and thence to Mecca,

where his son, Shah Hussein, erected a dome over them.

CHAPTER VII.

Mirza Shah Hussein Urghoon succeeded his father Shah Beg—conquers Mool-

tan—gives that country to Baber Shah—marches to Kutch—defeats

Kungar—Humayun Padshah comes to Sindh—appoints Yad Gar Nasir

to the fort of Bukkur—Shah Hussein brings Yad Gar over to his -inter-

ests—Peace proclaimed between Shah Hussein and Humayun—The

latter leaves Sindh—Yad Gar quits Bukkur—Sindh again reverts to

Shah Hussein—he protects Kamran Mirza—death of the latter, and affec-

tion of his wife---death of Mirza Shah Hussein---and termination of the

dynasty of Urghoon.

Mirza Shah Hussein Urghoon succeeded his father Shah Beg in

MirzaShah Hussein the government of Sindh. His first act was to

succeeds his father. expel Jam Feroz, who had rebelled, from the

government of Tattah. This latter collected a large force, but was

completely overthrown, and fled to Goojrat, where he died.

Shah Hussein acknowledged fealty to the power of Delhi, and

caused the oration delivered on the installation of a prince (khootbeh) to

be read in the name of Baber Shah, instead of his own. He took up

his residence at Tughlukabad, near Tattah. Some rebellious amongst

the tribes of the Beloochees at Oobareh and men of Dihir being put

down by the sword, Shah Hussein turned his attention to the con-

: quest of Mooltan. In the year 931 u. 1524 a. p. he reached the fort

| of Sewrae, which he took and destroyed. He then

proceeded to the fort of Moos, near Kootab, the

| governor of which, Sheikh Rohillah, proffered submission ; 500 horse,

under Mohib-i-Tukhan, were dispatched in advance to Mooltan,

and Shah Hussein followed to Oocheh. ‘This fort he besieged, and

_ although the troops of Mahmood Lankar, governor of Mooltan, made a

| brave resistance, the fort was taken, and a general massacre followed.

931 nH. 1524 a. p.

‘At the intercession of some holy men the slaughter was stayed,

| but the fort was levelled to the ground, and the gates and other mate-

tials placed in boats and conveyed to Bukkur. When Mahmood

| 2M

276 Of the early Eistory of Sindh. ~ [No. 112.

Lankar heard of the fall of Oocheh, he marched to attack Shah Hus-

sein, but shortly after met his death by poison. He was succeeded by

his son, Hussein Lankar, who was a minor.

Mirzah Shah Hussein closely besieged the fort of Mooltan; the

Takes the fort of Mooltan. siege lasted for a year, and is described as

having been attended with all the horrors of famine; one ox’s head sold

in Mooltan for 100 tankah, one maund of wheat 100 tankah. The

inhabitants principally subsisted upon the skins of oxen ; dogs and cats

were esteemed as great delicacies in Mooltan, as hulwah (sweetmeat).

Many of the wretched inhabitants threw themselves from the walls

and sought protection from Mirza Shah Hussein.

At length the fort was taken, a general massacre ensued of all

males from the age of seven to seventy, and lasted twelve days. When

the rage of Shah Hussein had somewhat abated, he stayed this inhu-

man slaughter, and spared the lives of the survivors.

Hussein Lankar, the prince of Mooltan, was captured, and after a

stay of ten months, during which period he employed himself in strip-

ping all the nobles and followers of Mahmood Lankar of their property,

and imprisoning others, Mirza Shah Hussein returned to Bukkur,

leaving Khajee Shumsudeen and Dost Meer at Khor with 200 horse, 100

infantry, and 100 artillery to garrison Mooltan. He had only arrived

at Bukkur a short time, however, when he received intelligence of the

revolt of the governor of Mooltan, who had gone over to Baber Shah ; :

Gives Mooltanto Ba. Ut being at the same time apprised of an attack in

ber Shah. another quarter of his dominions, at Tattah, he —

preferred presenting the country of Mooltan to Baber Shah, ashe

found its government more than he could manage. The nobles of ~

Tattah on the arrival of Mirza Shah Hussein at Bukkur, had in- —

formed him that Kungar was collecting a force to attack Tattah. 7

On receiving this intelligence, he immediately proceeded to that —

place, and before the arrival of Kungar, marched

to attack him. When he arrived near the country

of Kutch, hig army suffered much for want of grain; but Kaungar’s

army shortly after was overthrown, and the country pillaged by

Shah Hussein of flocks, herds, and property of every description,

and the inhabitants of every city, town, and village put to the

sword.

Marches to Kutch

1841. ] Of the early History of Sindh. 277

In the year 947 w. 1540 a. v., Humayun Padshah, attended by

Mahmoud Kamran Mirza, being driven out of Hind

Humayun comes to

Sindh, 947 u. 1540, by Sheer Khan, came to Lahore with the intention

oe of making an incursion upon Sindh, on the 13th of

Ramazan. In the above year he halted with his force at Paburloo, in

the neighbourhood of Bukkur. Sooltan Mahmood, governor of the fort,

laid waste the surrounding country, anchored the boats under the walls

of the fort, and prepared for a vigorous defence. Humayun summoned

him to surrender, but he refused ; the Padshah’s servants, however, ma-

naged to trifle with Mahmoud ; and he sent 500 khirwars of grain to

Humayun’s camp. This latter finding his army suffer much for

want of supplies, wrote in friendly terms to Mirza Shah Hussein to

come to him at Bukkur ; but after waiting for five or six months in

expectation of seeing him, he was disappointed, for Shah Hussein

evaded the interview, and cut off all supplies from the Padshah’s

camp. ‘This, coupled with the swells of the river, occasioned great

suffering amongst his troops, and desertions became frequent. He pro-

Appoints Yad Gar ceeded to Seeoostan, leaving the siege of Bukkur in

Nasir to Bukkur. the hands of Yad Gar Nasir, who took the fort.

At this period, Mirza Shah Hussein wrote to Yad Gar Nasir, offer-

ing terms of friendship, promising him his daughter in marriage, and

Brings Yod Gar to to secure him the kingdom of Sindh after his

his interests. ( Shah Hussein’s) death; enticed by these promises

Yad Gar Nasir threw off his allegiance to the Padshah Humayun.

Humayun on hearing this, immediately returned to the neighbour-

hood of Bukkur, where he summoned Yad Gar to his presence—he

obeyed the order.

Through the intervention of Benam Khan, who came from Gogjrat

Peace “ae Ay to the service of the Padshah, peace was declared

“Shah Hussein. between him and Mirza Shah Hussein.

| Humayun agreed to leave Sindh, on condition of receiving 100,000

mishals in money, and all the necessaries for his army to Kandahar,

300 horses, 300 camels, &c. This demand was acceded to, and with

great rejoicings and promises of friendship, the Sindhzans witnessed

‘the passage of the river by the Padshah’s army, at a place called Joon,

\Humayun leaves where a bridge had been erected on the 7th of the

‘Sindh, 91 w. 1544

“A. D. month Rubeh ul Uwul, in the year 951 n. 1544 a. p.

278 Of the early History of Sindh. [No. 112.

Shah Hussein after this, evaded the promise of giving his daughter

Yad Gar quits in marriage to Yad Gar Nasir, who left the coun-

Senter try; and the power in Sindh reverted solely to

Hussein. Mirza Shah Hussein, who apRrint Meer Shah

Mahmoud Urghoon governor of Bukkur.

Kamran Mirza being in rebellion with Humayun Padshah, son of

Baber Shah, fled to Sindh, and sought protection

from Mirza Shah Hussein, whose daughter, Joirjok

Begum, he had previously married. Shah Hussein appointed him

for a residence the place called Shuhperlah, on the river to the west

Kamran Mirza.

of Bukkur, with the purgunnah of Butthoora for the expences inci-

dental to his household. But Kamran Mirza determined to make a

pilgrimage to Mecca, and there end his days. Shah Hussein tried to

prevent his daughter accompanying him; but her conjugal affec-

tion resisted all his persuasions to effect a separation. She observed to

her father: ‘that he had given her to Kamran Mirza for wife when

the latter was a powerful prince, and now that misfortunes had assail-

ed him, he wished to separate them; but that while they lived she

would never desert her husband.” Shah Hussein finding threats and

intreaties alike unavailing, gave them every necessary for their jour-

His death 96441, ney, and Kamran Mirza died at Mecca in the year q

1596 a. D. 964 uw. 1556 a. pv. His faithful wife only survived

him a few months.

Mirza Shah Hussein in the latter days of his life became very

infirm, and suffered much from palsy, from which disease he sought — |

relief in intoxication, and dissipated men began to assume an ascen-

dancy at his court. The men of Urghoon and Tirkhan being dissatis-

fied, collected round Mirza Eessan Tirkhan, governor of Tattah, and

in the year 962 uw. 1554 a. D. broke into open insurrection. Shah

Hussein sent Mahmoud, governor of Bukkur, to quell this rebellion ;

but he privately made terms with Mirza Eessan Tirkan, by which

after the death of Shah Hussein, (an event they plainly saw was fast

approaching,) they should divide the government of Sindh between

them. ;

Mirza Shah Hussein died on Monday on the 15th of Rubeh-ul-

Pea eed Uwul in the above year, being on his road to

aoe Seeoostan, (where, by the advice of his physician, he

1841. | | Of the early History of Sindh. 279

was proceeding,) at a place called Alhpootreh. He reigned 34 years,

and his remains were conveyed to Mecca, where they were buried

near those of his father, Shah Beg. His death closed the dynasty of

Urghoon.

CHAPTER VIII.

Mirza Eessan Tirkhan—dissensions between him and Mahmoud Khan ot

Bukkur—Tattah fired and pillaged by the Portuguese—peace concluded be-

tween Mirza Eessan and Mahmoud Khan—brief history of the former dis-

sensions between his sons—death of Mirza Eessan—succeeded by his son

_ Mirza Mahomed Bakee—at enmity with Mahmoud Khan—origin of the lat-

ter—Mahomed Bakee—opposed by his brother, Khan Baber—is murdered

by Mahomed Bakee—Akbar Padshah sends Mohib Ally Khan to besiege Buk-

kur—Mahomed Bakee’s a submission to the Shah—death of Mahmoud Khan—

Bukkur becomes. a jahgeer of the kingdom of Delhi—Mirza Mahomed

Bakee destroys himself.

Mriza Eessan Tirkhan.

A year after the death of. Shah Hussein, rivalry and dissension arose

963 H, 1550 A. D. between Mirza Eessan Tirkhan, governor of Tatiah,

Dissensions with.

Sooltan Mahmoud. and Sooltan Mahmoud, governor of Bukkur; the

pretensions of the former being favoured by the men of Urghoon and

Tirkhan. Mirza Eessan marched to attack Bukkur, in which

fort Mahmoud entrenched himself, and was besieged for 15 days ; but at

this time intelligence reached the former, that the Portuguese merce-

naries, whom he had left at Tattah, had set fire

Tattah fired and pillag-

ed by the Portuguese. to, and pillaged that city, he immediately raised

the siege, and returned to Zattah. Mahmoud pursued him as far as

Seeoostan, the country in the vicinity of which he laid waste. On his

| arrival at Tatiah, Mirza Hessan learnt that the Portuguese hearing

of his approach, had decamped ; he repaired the walls of the city, and

‘built a small fort to command the creek. After other engagements

‘between Mirza Eessan and Mahmoud, peace was concluded be-

tween them ; the forces of the Mirza returning to

‘Peace concluded be-

tween Mirza Eessan Tattah, and those of Mahmoud to Bukkur, which

‘and Mahmoud Khan.

places they occupied, and continued to divide the

government of the country between them. Mirza Hessan Tirkhan

History of Mirza is described as having been educated by Shah Beg,

: . in whose service and that of his son, he attained the

280 Of the early History of Sindh. [No. 112.

rank of ameer, and on the death of the latter, succeeded to the go-

vernment of Zattah. He was a good and merciful man, noted for his

courage and energy. Two of his sons, Mirza Mahmoud Bakee, and

Mirza Mahomed Taleb were at enmity; the latter being favoured by

his father, defeated Mahomed Bakee, who fled to Bukkur and sought

protection from Mahmoud. Mahomed Saleh was shortly afterwards

murdered by a Beloochee, who had sworn not to wear his turban, until

he had revenged himself for some injury committed upon his father

and family.

Mahmoud interceded with Mirza Eessan for the forgiveness of Maho-

med Bakee who returned to Yattah, and was kindly received; but

Death of Mirza Hes. (irza Hessan before his death, which happened in

san. the year 974 u. 1566, a. D. wished to settle the suc-

cession upon his youngest son, Khan Baber, ashe considered Maho-

med Bakee of too tyrannical a disposition to rule.

Mirza Mahomed Bakee Tirkhan

succeeded his father, Mirza Hessan Tirkhan as governor of Tattah,

and like him continued alternately at peace and war with Mahmoud

Khan, governor of Bukkur. A brief account of the career of this

man, who for nineteen years divided the government of Sindh, with

two of the rulers of Zirkhan, will not be out of place in this part of

the history.

Mahmoud Khan was the son of Meer Fazil Kukultash, in the ser-

vice of Meer Zulnoon ; his forefathers were residents

Origin as doles of Ispahan. Meer Fazil had five wives, by each of

whom he had a son. Mahmoud’s mother was an Af-

ghaun. At the early age of fourteen he gave promise of great courage,

and attracted the attention of Shah Beg, who took him into his ser-

vice ; he accompanied him in the Sindh campaign, where he distinguish-

ed himself above all the nobles of Shah Beg’s army ; he subsequently be-

came a governor of Bukkur during the time of Mirza Shah Hussein,

whom he faithfully served, until he leagued with Mirza Eessan Tir-

khan to divide the government of the country between them after

Shah Hussein’s death. The history of these proceedings, and the feuds

and jealousies which arose between these chiefs, have been related, till

the accession of Mirza Bakee.

1841. ] Of the early History of Sindh. 281

Mirza Mahomed Bakee was opposed by his youngest brother, Khan

_ Baber, who aspired to the government of the coun-

Becca by hie ‘tro. tty. He procured assistance from Mahmoud Khan,

ther Khan Baber. ond attempted an attack upon Yadtah, in which he

failed ; he was afterwards treacherously murdered by his brother, who

proved himself, as his father had predicted, a great tyrant. Hearing

that Akbar Padshah had arrived at Lahore, and

Akbar Padshoh =~ had dispatched Mohib Ally Khan and Mujahid

conquer Bukkur. § Khan to Bukkur, where they besieged Mahmoud

Khan, and fearing for the safety of his own possessions at Tattah,

he sent letters, acknowledging his fealty to Akbar, and according to

some historians, even sent his daughter, for the service of the king’s

harem.

Mahmoud Khan endured a close and harassing siege, during which

the garrison suffered from pestilence and famine. In the year 982 u.

1574 a. p., he began to suffer from dropsy, and wrote

982 u. 1574 a.p. :

4 aie to the Padshah to send some one to whom he might

deliver over the fort of Bukkur, which Mohib Ally Khan had not yet

taken. The Padshah Akbar dispatched Kessoo Khan ; but Mahmoud

Death of Mahmoug “ed before his arrival at Bukkur, on Saturday the

Khan. 8th of the month Sufur in the above year.

From this date Bukkur became a jahgeer of the power at Delhi,

and various rulers were sent to govern it. Mirza Mahomed Bakee be-

came insane; at least the deeds of cruelty he committed were so

enormous, that they can only be ascribed to madness. The loss of a

Mirza Mahomed Ba-12¥oUtite son, (Shah Rookh,) increased his malady,

kee destroys himself, and he destroyed himself by rushing on his own

993 H. 1585 a.p. sword. He died in the year 993 n. 1583 a. p. after a

rule of 19 years. His eldest son, Pabundah Beg, inheriting the malady

of the father, was declared incapable of governing, and the power des-

cended to the son of Pahbundeh and grandson of Mirza Bakee.

282 Of the early History of Sindh. : [No.- ais

CHAPTER IX.

Mirza Janee Beg Tirkhan—Akbar sends Khan Khanan to Sindh—siege of

Schwan—defeat of the war boats—siege of Bohurry—destruction of Tat-

tah—Janee Beg treats for peace—peace concluded—Janee Beg accompanies

Khan Khanan to the presence—Akbar Padshah honours Janee Beg—death

of Janee Beg—Sindh becomes a dependency of the throne of Delhi—

Mirza Ghaxie Beg Tirkhan—revolt of Abul Cassim—the Padshah sends for

Ghazee Beg—he proceeds to 4gra—additional power—repairs to Kandahar,

where he is murdered—his generosity—rulers deputed by the Delhi

sovereigns ofthe family of Zimoor until the accession of the Kalonas—their

rule—accession of the Talpooras.

Mirza Janee Beg Tirkhan.

His first act was to punish with studied cruelty, the accused mur-

derers of the late Mirza. His uncle Muzuffir Khan disgusted at his

conduct, collected a force to attack Tattah ; but was defeated. Bukkur,

as was before mentioned, after the death of Mahmoud Khan, became a

dog) Hodes dependency of the kingdom of Delhi, in the year

ee i eecim 999 u. 1590 a. p. Akbar Shah gave it as a jahgeer

to Khan Khanan, with orders to reduce the governor

of Tattah (Janee Beg,) also to his authority.

The Shah had previously written to Janee Beg to come to the pre-

sence, and proffer allegiance, a performance of which order the latter

evaded. Khan Khanan first determined to take the fort of Seh-

ran, as it commanded the passage of the river, and then march to

attack Zattah. He had, however, scarcely commenced the siege, when

intelligence reached him of the march of Janee Beg, with a countless

army, to the relief of the fort. Ahan Khanan raised the siege of Seh-

wan, and proceeded to meet Janee Beg, who at a place called Bohurry.

(higher up than Mussurpoor,) had thrown up a fort, and strengthened his

position. When Khan Khanan arrived within six koss of that place,

he learnt that Janee Beg had 300 war boats with him, commanded by

Khusroo Khan and other nobles.

Khan Khanan threw up five or six small mud forts, which he

mounted with guns, on the bank of the river, commanding the passage

of the boats. On a night of the month Shuwal, 999. uw. 1590 a. D. the

action commenced, the shot striking the Szndhian

Ascent of the war

boats. boats, threw them into confusion; eight or nine were

1841. | Of the early History of Sindh. 283

captured and their crews slaughtered. In the morning the boats of

Mirza Janee, commanded by Khusroo Khan, finding the passage

of the river in the face of the guns impracticable, retreated, but

were pursued by the Khan’s boats, and although Khusroo Khan

behaved well, and shewed good generalship, many of his fleet were ta-

ken, and the Portuguese mercenaries and other soldiers slaughtered.

In short, Janee Beg was defeated and retreated to Bohurry, where he

was invested by Khan Khanan. From this place he

eee aation of wrote to his son at Tattah to destroy that city ; it

was fired in various places, and in a month was a

complete ruin, and the country laid waste: this was done with the in-

tention of annoying the invaders. Repeated engagements ensued, in

which Janee Beg’s forces were always worsted ; he was driven from one

stronghold to another, his last stand being at Oonurpoor. Here Khan

Khanan came himself, and Janee Beg was closely besieged ; finding

his soldiers suffer, and all his efforts to repel the

Be” treats Khan’s army unavailing, he at last sued for peace,

promising to surrender thirty boats and the fort

of Sehwan, intreating permission at the same time, to be allowed to

proceed to Yattah, where he would see Khan Khanan, and settle

other preliminaries. This indulgence was granted by the Khan con-

trary to the advice of his nobles, who represented that Janee Beg

wished only to gain time in order to collect fresh

troops; but Khan Khanan confident in his power

to crush Janee Beg, and anxious to avoid the useless waste of life,

Peace concluded.

which a protraction of the war would occasion, acceded to the terms

offered by the Mirza. The two chiefs afterwards met at a place call-

ed Futtebagh, where they displayed every mark of friendship and

consideration towards each other. Khan Khanan proceeded to Tat-

tah, the affairs of which place he settled, leaving Dowlut Khan and

Khawgeh Mukim to preserve the Shah’s authority. Khan Khanan

having expressed a desire to behold the sea, embarked with Janee Beg

Accompanies Khan t the port of Lahurry ; after a short excursion they

onan to 4gra. —_ returned, and in obedience to orders, proceeded to

the presence of Akbar Shah, where they arrived in the month of Juma-

eS 1502 a.p. dee-ul-Sanee, in the year of the H. 1001, a. p. 1592.

Akbar Padshah honoured Janee Beg, making him

284 Of the early History of Sindh. [ No. 112. #

a commander of five thousand, and styling him Khusroo Shah; he *

treated him with every demonstration of kindness. —

In the year 1008 n. 1599 a. p. when the king march- _

ed to the Deccan, and took the forts of Ahmednuggur, Ookleh, and 3

Asserghur, Mirza Janee Beg died of phrenzy. He

1008 u. 1599 a. b.

Dies, and Sindh

ceases to be aninde- was buried at Zattah, and his son Mirza Ghazee

Palas beta 8 succeeded him in the government of the country. —

From this date, the whole of the country of Sindh became a de- ,

pendency of the kingdom of Delhi, and ceased to be an indepen- ~

dent government. The rule of the tribe of Z%rkhan* embraces a pe- —

riod of 39 years.

Mirza Ghazee Beg Tirkhan

after the death of his father, by order of the Padshah, succeeded

to the government of the country of Sindh. He was young, but at the

beginning of his rule shewed all the vigour and ability of riper years. |

He replenished the treasury and resources of the country, which during

his father’s reign had been squandered and allowed to go to ruin.

Revolt of Aboot Abool Cassim, son of Shah Cassim Khan Urghoon, .

Casa (who for years possessed Nussurpore and during the

life of Mirza Janee also had Neirunkote,) rose in rebellion against

Mirza Ghazee Beg, and having plundered some merchants who were

travelling from Tattah, the Mirza wrote to him for an explanation of

the outrage, to which he received an offensive reply. Ghazee Beg”

thereupon marched a force to Nusserpore, but by the intervention of

the father, (Shah Casstm Khan,) peace was concluded between his”

son and Ghazee Beg. The latter being afraid of the power of Adool

Cassim, caught him by stratagem, put out his eyes, and made him

prisoner. At this time, ambassadors arrived from Akbar Padshah,

The Padshah sends '© Summon Ghazee Beg to his presence; but he

for Ghazee Beg. excused himself, as the affairs of the country yet

required much of his attention. In two years after his father’s death

things were in a prosperous state. The unfortunate Abool Cassim, —

aided by Jaffer Khan, attempted to escape, but was recaptured, and i

the latter killed. Again intelligence was received at Tattah that the ;

Padshah being impatient, had dispatched the Nuwab Syud Khan, —

* 7. e. As independent governors.

1841. ] Of the early History of Sindh. 285

_ with orders to bring the Mirza to the presence; some of the nobles

expressed a desire to rebel against the Padshah’s authority, and only

| regretted their want of means to assemble a force for that purpose.

Ghazee Beg’s prudence, however, silenced their ambitious projects,

Proceeds to Agra and before the arrival of Syud Khan, he started

| for Agra, and met the latter at Bukker, from whence they proceeded

_ together, and arrived at Agra in the year 1013 u., 1604 a. p.

| Mirza Ghazee was honoured* and treated with the same consider-

ation which marked his father’s stay at the royal court. The country

_ of Sindh was declared to be a jahgeer, and bestowed upon him. On

_the accession of Shah Jahangir, 1014 n. 1605 a. pv. the government

of the country of Kandahar, part of Mooltan, and the fort of Sehwan

Additional power. were added to his authority, with additional rank.

_ The affairs of Kandahar requiring his attention, he proceeded to that

Repairs to Kanda- country, appointing Khusroo Khan, governor of

| ae Tattah during his absence. This man appropriated

the revenues to his private purposes, which being reported to Ghazee

_ Beg, he sent Hindoo Khan to supersede him, and to take the manage-

‘ment of affairs in his stead. Mirza Ghazee in the very height of

FP eyecod 102) his fame and prosperity was murdered by a slave

iw. 1612 a. D. of his own household, named Abool Lutteef, in the

| year 1021 u. 1612 a. p. He left a great name behind him for gene-

-rosity and bravery, and in his praise, is the following couplet :—

| ‘¢ Alas! a rose has been scattered by a slave.”

| It is reported of him that he gave all his money to his subjects, and

a i although he had the revenues of Sindh, Kandahar

is generosity. “

| and part of Mooltan, he was always poor. His mi-

nister of finance once represented to him that his accounts, which

had not been inspected for six months, were in confusion, and that

he had not the means of providing for the Mirza’s household expen-

| ces. Ghazee Beg tore the paper which was presented in pieces, say-

ing: “that for himself God would provide him with food; but the

public money was alone the property of the subject.”

i Jahangir even asked him his advice as to the measures he might pursue with

| his son Khusroo, then in rebellion; this is mentioned as a proof of the esteem in which

the Emperor held him.

286 Of the early History of Sindh. [No. 112.3%

His remains were brought to Yattah, and interred near those of his —

father. After his death the Delhi kings, from the time of Jahangir —

until the accession of the Kaloras, sent various nobles as deputies to —

rule in that country.

Mirza Rustum d

was deputed by Jahangir, after the death of Ghazee Beg, to pro- |

Baecaenniedie ceed to Tattah as governor of Sindh ; he had before ©

the Delhi sovereigns been governor of Zumeendarwar and Mooltan during

of the family of Zi-

moor, untilthe acces- the time of Akbar Padshah. It is said that Jahangir —

Ae seal Ma sent with him 5,000 horse, and two lacs of rupees

to assist him in replenishing the treasury, and settling the affairs of

the country; but he proved himself unfit to govern, and was dismiss- ¢

ed. He was succeeded by Moosty Khan, also dismissed ; he by Meer

Bayeozzeed, 1028 w.1618 a. v., who had been formerly Fowdar of

1028 H.1618.a.p. Bukkur. After him Nuwab Shurf-ul-Mulk, in the —

year 1035 u. 1625 a. p. During his time, the son of Jahangir* being

in rebellion, came to Tattah, where he wished to reside, but Shurf-ul-

Mulk opposed him and some conflicts ensued. |

Mirza Eessan Tirkhan, son of Khan Baber, and grandson of the :

former governor of the same name. 7

He was concerned with Abool Cassim, in the revolt against Mirza

Ghazee Beg, and after the capture of the former, entered the service —

of Jahangir, who honoured him; and in reward for various services”

performed, made him a commander of 4,000 horse, and in the year

1037 u. 1627 4. D., (the last of the reign and life of Jahangir,) he

was appointed governor of Zattah, in which situation he died, during {

the reign of Shah Jehan.

Nuwab Ameer Khan.

In the beginning of his rule he had some differences with the zu- _

meendars, but he settled the affairs of the country, and was a good and —

just man. So little of interest is recorded in the histories of the

succeeding governors, that it will be sufficient to mention them in —

chronological order :— |

* Probably Khurrum Khan, afterwards Shak Jehan, who rebelled against his

father in 1624 a. pv.

1841.]

Of the early History of Sindh.

287

Date of Accession.

6th. Murab Muzuffar Khan, not known.

7th. Syud Ibrahim,

8th. Jafur Khan,

9th. Kabad Khan,

10th.

11th.

12th.

138th.

‘4th.

15th.

16th.

17th.

18th.

Ghuzunfur Khan,

Syud Izut Khan,

Abool Nusrut Khan,

Sahadut Khan,

Syud Izut Khan,

Khan Zad Khan,

Sirdar Khan,

Mureed Khan,

19th. Zaburdust Khan,

20th. Aboo Nusrut Khan,

21st. Ifuz Ali Khan,

22d. Saheed Khan,

23d. Ameer-ud-deen Khan, ...

24th. Yuzuf Khan,

25th. Ahmed Yar Khan,

26th. Nuwab Saheed Khan, ...

27th. Nuwab Moheen Khan, ...

28th. Nuwab Maheen Khan ..

29th. Nuwab Shakir Khan, ...

30th. Khwaja Kulleel Khan, ...

3lst. Attar Khan,

32nd. Lootuf Ali Khan,

33rd. Shoojat Ali Khan,

Nuwab Lashkar Khan, ...

1057 #.

1063 H.

1069 4H.

1071 4.

1075 u.

1080 u.

1082 H.

bP)

1084 H.

1090 H.

1095 H.

1099 u.

1101 x.

1103 u.

1113 4.

1114 8.

1115 uw.

1116 H.

1119 un.

1121 4H.

1123 4u.

~ During this

rule Aurung-

zebe mounted

the throne.

1647 a. D

1652 a. D.

1658 a. D.

1660 a. D.

1664 a. D.

1669 a. bD.

1671 a. D.

1673 A. D.

1679 a. D.

1683 a. D.

1687 a. D.

1689 a. D.

1691 a. D.

1701 a. D.

1702 a. D.

1708 a. pb.

( During this

rule Alumgeer

d died, 1118 u.

*}] and was suc-

| ceeded by Ba-

Lhadur Shah.

1707 a. D.

1709 a. p.

jie eels os

1704 a. D

Bahadoor

1124 n. 1712 a. D. | Si died

1124 #.

not known.

288 Of the early History of Sindh. [ No. 112.

34th. Nuwab Azim Khan, ... 1128 gm. 1715 4. D.

35th. Mohabut Khan,... sees ¢ LIZ2 ATG ia. De

36th. Sooltan Mahomoud Khan, not known.

37th. Serf Ullah Khan, EY: i ee

38th. Dileerdil Khan,... indy bb a 17S0 ae:

39th. Himmut Dileer Khan, ... = fe

The above appear to have been Sobadhars who farmed the revenue,

at the same time exercising all the functions of governors. The last

of these mentioned as preceding the Kaloras, is Sadik Alli Khan,

who abandoned his contract from inability to perform it, and it was

taken up by Noor Mahomed Ubbaseer Kalora, son of

Noor Mahomed Yar Mahomed in the year 1149n. 1736 a. p. He was

Kalora, \st of the i ‘

family who ruled the first of the family invested with power as a ruler

TIO ATSB yar 0: in Sindh, and although in his father’s time the Kaloras

were of some importance as zwmeendars, their jahgeer was at Futtehpoor.

This family trace their origin to Abbas, the uncle of the prophet, :

Grain of the Sta: whence it descends through various generations to

loras. Adam Shah of Beelooch extraction, a Sheikh of

great repute, who possessed many disciples in Sindh, and who was the

founder of the prosperity and power which afterwards attended the

Kaloras in that country.

Noor Mahomed Kalora.

The beginning of his government was attended with constant feuds

and strife with the tribes of Burhoee and Dawood

Pootreh, (Belooches,) the cause of dispute being

boundary of territory. About the year 1150 u.

1737 a.p. Nadir Shah when he visited Sindh, took Noor Mahomed

Nadir Shah mulcts PYiSoner; but on his paying a crore of rupees to

oy crore of ru- the emperor, he was released and restored to his

possessions, with the additional title of Kullie Khan.

After this he became firmly settled in the government of the country.

After the assassination of Nadir Shah, Sindh became subject to

Sindh. subieat 40 Ahmed Shah Afghan Sudoozie, king of Cabool.

Cabool. Noor Mahomed was succeeded by his son Murad

Yab Khan, who only ruled however for a short time, and was succeed-

Ghullam Shah. ed by his brother Ghullam Shah.

Siege of Noor Ma-

homed.

1841. | Of the early History of Sindh. 289

In the commencement of his reign he was employed in putting down

an insurrection under his brother Uttur Khan ; but having settled the

dissensions and civil discords in Sindh, he made an incursion upon

Cutch, rendered remarkable for the great battle of

[apes Jharra, which was fought with Rao Gore upon the

occasion. He died after a rule of 17 years. His brother Uttur Khan

seized the reins of government, but only retained them for a short time,

and was succeeded by Surafraz Khan, son of Ghul-

lam Shah.

Shortly after coming to power, he allowed his mind to be poisoned

by one Rajah Leckie against a chief of distinction in his service,

Surafraz Khan.

named Byram Khan Talpoor. Byram being informed of the threatened

evil, took counsel with his sons Sobhdar and Bejur

Murders Byram

and hisson Sobhdar. to avert it; but Surafraz put both Byram and his

son Sobhdar to death; Bejur fled to Mecca.

Futteh Alli Khan, the son of Sobhdar raised an insurrection to

Futteh Ali Khan Tevenge his father’s death, and Surafraz Khan fled

drives outSurafraz. tg the fort of Hyderabad, where he was imprisoned.

His brother Mahomed Khan succeeded him for a short time; but was

deposed by Ghullam Nubbee, brother of Ghullam Shah. Bejur

Khan Talpoor, son of Byram, at this time arrived from Mecca at

Neirunkote, and Ghullam Nubbee sought an opportunity to destroy

Death of Guilam him. Beur having collected followers an engagement

Nubee. ensued, in which Ghullam Nubbee was killed, and

Abdul Nubbee Bejur Khan became master of Sindh, putting Abdul

placed in power. Nubbee, the brother of Ghullam Nubbee, in his bro-

ther’s place, as governor of the country. Abdul Nubbee’s first act was

to destroy Surafraz Khan, Mahomed Khan, Uttur Khan, and Meer

Mahomed, at Hyderabad, where they were imprisoned.* His next,

to send jut Khan with a force to attack Bejyur Khan; the former

Murders Bejur was defeated. Abdul Nubbee afterwards murdered

ae Rac ead Bejur Khan, when the Talpoors drove out Abdul

of the Kaloras, &¢. Nybbee, putting the affairs of the country in the hands

of Futteh Alli Khan Talpoor, son of Sobhdar and grandson of Byram,

in which Zimoor Shah confirmed him. He gave a share of his power

* This wholesale system of putting princes out of the world, is vouched for in the

“* Futteh Nameh.”’

290 Of the early History of Sindh. [No. 112.

to each of his brothers, Ghullam Ali, Kurm Ali, and Murad Ali.

Futteh Ali Khan and Ghullam died; the former in 1801 a. p. 1216

H., and the latter in 1811 a. p. 1226 4. Futteh Ali left a son, ( Sob-

dhar,) and Ghullam also (Mahomed, ) who with their uncles, Murad

Ali and Kurum Ali, share the government of Sindh, with the title of

Ameers.

Note.—It is impossible to add to the already very luminous and interest-

ing history given by Dr. J. Burnes in his visit to the Court of Sindh,

of the rulers of the families of the Kaloras and Talpuras ; as my paper

would not however have been complete without some notice of their

dynasties; I have compressed them into a close and small space, leaving

out most of those incidents which have been so graphically described by.

Dr. Burnes. TPs

Notes on the Manners and Habits of the Torkoman Tribes, mith

some Geographical Notices of the Country they occupy.—By

EpwWaARD STIRLING, Esq. B. C. S.

The khonat of Khiva has been described by Mr. M. Mouraviev,

who was sent by Russia as an envoy to the Khan, at great length,

and he has given considerable interest in the deplorable tale of his

sufferings. A barbarous nation, in the lowest state of civilization, can

have very few objects to engage much attention ; and if we except

their peculiar manners and customs, and mode of warfare, they are

entirely destitute of attractions to the inhabitant of a more refined

atmosphere. Without antiquities, edifices, laws, learning, science, arts,

and commerce, they have little to.satisfy or create curiosity.

The Torkomans bear the greatest resemblance of all other nations

to the Arabians ; but they are not decorated with their antiquity of

origin ; their celebrity, as conquerors, as legislators, and as fanatics ;

their learning, and their reputed science. While the Arabian Khaliffs

ruled as the vicegerents of Mahomed, the Torkomans were reckoned

among the number of their slaves. Their manners are similar ; they

are equally the children of the Desert, inured to fatigue; pride them-

selves on their horses and mares ; infest the high roads for the purpose

of plunder, and enslaving their victims; war among themselves ;

1841. | Manners and Habits of the Torkoman Tribes. 291

manufacture their own tents, clothes, and horse furniture ; tend large

flocks of cattle ; move from place to place; cultivate small portions

of land ; eat horse and camel flesh ; and make distant excursions.

They differ from the Arabs yet in several points; they are more

wealthy ; they have less respect for their ancestors; they have not

that romantic sort of love for the other sex ; they do not hold the

rights of hospitality to be so essentially incumbent upon them ; they

are not so strongly impressed with the obligation of the law of

lex talionis ; they frequently stain their predatory attacks with mur-

der, which the Arabs always, if possible, avoid ; they are less subject

to the vicissitudes of season, as they live in a more temperate climate ;

they have a less defensible country, and have been frequently con-

quered ; they make captures for the purpose of selling them, and

this forms their chief article of commerce with Bokhara. In their

enterprizes they are bold, bloody, desperate, and cruel; from their

enemy they do not expect, and give no quarter, unless to make a slave

of their adversary, for the purpose of disposing of him at the best

market ; they murder the old men and women, and only take away

with them such as may bring a good price, and reimburse them for

their trouble; they are more sordid, less hospitable and generous,

and inferior in magnanimity to the Arab; they have larger forms,

fuller faces, broader and more expansive foreheads, smaller eyes, and

are more ugly and cunning than the Arab; they shew a few hairs

where we expect to see beard ; large mouths, strong teeth, and moder-

ate sized lips. Their cap distinguishes them from the Persian ; from

bottom to top it is large and circular, of the same diameter, and not

conical as that of the Kassilbash cut; it is placed on an enormous

head, seated on a short but thick neck, and this pillar is supported by

a pair of broad shoulders, which gives the outline of a large and ex-

panded body and a full chest. Their food consists of bread, soup, and

pillao, diversified with cheese, milk, and fruits.

They generally eat twice a day ; their breakfast is light, composed

of bread with fruit or syrup. Their dinner is more substantial,

meat under some form always forming the chief portion of it.

The Torkomans are divided into a great many tribes independent

of each other, who have their respective chiefs and white beards,

(suffed resh. )

292 Manners and Habits of the Torkoman Tribes. [No. 112. |

The country of the Torkomans may be considered, generally speak- ‘ |

ing, bounded on the north by the river Ammoo, and on the south

by the river Tedjen ; but these rivers wind very much, and perhaps

it may be better to state the southern boundary of the country to

be the Parapamisan range, and from thence north it extends as

far as the Ammoo river. On the east, it approaches the confines 0

Balk and the towns of Aukooree, Seripool, Shiberghan, on the bor- |

ders of the Desert. On the west the limit is distinct, it is the Cas- :

pian sea. |

Khiva is the capital of a portion of this extensive country ; but the

more distant Torkoman tribes hold themselves, generally speaking,

separate and independent of its rulers. Orgunge is the general appella-_

tion of this state on the north of Khorassan, and among the Torko-

mans of Shurraks. In ancient times this wild, desert, and inhospita

ble country would appear to have been inhabited by the tribes or

races denominated the Dahe, the Getes, and Massagetes, and the

Mimuncent. :

They have always been noted for their turbulent character and

predatory habits, and for rearing that superb horse, which enables |

them to perform the most extraordinary journeys. The Sultans of

Kharizm are famous in history. Malek Shah is represented as a noble, _

high-minded, and liberal sovereign ; and the bearing and courage of |

Jillaladeen, the last sovereign of the Seljukan race, excited the enthusi- a

astic praises even of Genjhis Khan, while he viewed him swimming

his horse across the rapid current of the Indus, still continuing to let i |

fly his arrows at him whilst landing on the bank of the stream, ad-—

miring his intrepidity. A king of Kharizm is mentioned by the histo- i

rian Arrian, but he makes his residence west of the Caspian, next the —

country of the Amazons: this locality seems in my opinion evidently a —

mistake of the copyist.

The brave resistance and the frequent revolts of this people are 4

mentioned by Arrian and Quintus Curtius. +

The people of these countries, together with the Sogdians and Scythi- ‘ .

ans, appear to have been the first who checked Alexander's career.

The above-quoted historians allow that his detachments were often

surprised and defeated ; his campaign in this country would seem to

have been very harassing, the labour and sufferings of his soldiers d

+1841. ] Manners and Habits of the Torkoman Tribes. 293

very great. It is scarcely to be expected from posthumous historians

that in relating the transactions which occurred in a distant and

nearly unknown country, where a different language prevailed, that

the correctness of their geographical information should be such as to

enable us to trace with minuteness the various cities and petty king-

doms which they have occasion to mention at the distance of two

thousand years.* It is with difficulty we can even guess at the

principal places reported by these historians of Alexander the Great

‘to have been subdued by him.

_ One of the most interesting places to inquire the situation of, it

appears to me to be the hill fort, which seems to have been occupied

by the Sogdians. This I imagine is no other than the Kéllat Nadir,t

which very accurately corresponds with the description given of it by

Arrian and Quintus Curtius. The names of nations and cities are very

‘much confounded together, and this would appear to be the case with

the Sogdians, Scythians, and Bactrians.{ This rock may perhaps be

thought likewise to answer to that of Aornas, since travellers have

in vain inquired for it on the banks of the Indus; for Arrian says,

that Alexander leaving Herat (Aria) went to the cities of Aornas

and Bactria. Killat Nadir is situated on the borders of the Desert,

* With reference to the above, the following are submitted ; ; some of them I

have endeavoured to settle: —

| Drapsaca? Budukshan.

_ Margiana. Marghina, the valley of the Moorgab river and the territory adjoining.

Nantaca? Sogdiana.

Drange ? People inhabiting one of the mountain ranges of the Parapamisan spine.

| They are characterized by Quintus Curtius as “ Bellecosa Natione.”’

| Dai. The Cashgar people inhabiting the Western hills as far as Darwas. These

hills are called the ‘‘ Beeloor Tay’’ I believe.

_ Meotis. The lake Aral.

| Paratucas ?

_ Choriensis Petra ? This is perhaps the present Kellati Nadir in Khorassan.

| Nicza sacro ?

| Thyrceas ?

| Ara Sacos? This may be conceived a place of worship of the Sac, who were a

| tribe of Scythians.

_ Jenippa? Is represented a vastly rich and populous country, which attracted, by its

eae settlers from all parts. This territory was situated on the borders of

Scythia and would correspond to the present Fergana.

| + Vide B. Frazer. It is situated north of Meshid, on the borders of the Desert.

| { These are described as all horsemen who exercise the profession of plunderers

| even in the time of peace. The Torkomans of the present day are now more bar-

{

_ barous in their cruelties, if possible, in quiet times, than during war.

| ~

294 . Manners and Habits of the Torkoman Tribes. [No. 112.

north of Meshid ; it is perhaps as strong as any hill fort defended by f

natural works can possibly be. It has all the advantages of scarped

rocks, which form an invincible barrier to an enemy, and must be

nearly impregnable to a force destitute of shells. It has, moreover, ex-

tensive pasturages and cultivated fields, together with water in great

abundance, which probably would never fail. Of all natural defences

this is the strongest situated within or near the Torkoman Desert.

In this stronghold an army of many thousands might remain secure

against every attack of their enemies. It has three gates, one on the

north, another on the east, and the last on the south; by these alone it _

can be entered.

The same mode of warfare, and the same manners of these wild

tribes exactly tally with those given by Arrian and Quintus Curtius.

Omnes equites, etiam in pace latrociniis assueti, tam ferocia ingenia non

bellum modo sed etiam venie desperantes asservant.* Their perfidy,

villany, and barbarity, are as conspicuous now as in the days of Alex-

ander. ‘The Torkomans and the Usbecks are guided by the same —

principles and sentiments ; are the same lawless, restless, and ungovern-

able race as the Sogdians, the Dahe, the Massagetes, and the Scythians. —

The introduction of the religion of Mahomed has wrought little change

in their morals, manners, customs, and socialities. Attached to no prin-

ciples of moral rectitude themselves, they cannot conceive the existence

of them in others. From their infancy accustomed to wander and to

change their abodes ; habituated to scenes of violence and bloodshed,

in the perpetration of which no justifiable reason can be assigned,

and restrained by no sense of order, reason, and humanity, they

aspire to independence, and shun all subjection, whether of a moral or

physical nature. Self-defence and preservation are their first consi-

deration ; self-aggrandisement and self-exaltation, the next; and in

pursuit of this latter object, any and every means, even unto parricide,

fratricide, infanticide, and regicide; but even the magnitude of such

crimes are exceeded, frequently in the extermination of whole commu-

nities of people and extirpation of nations.

The Oxus is a river of considerable magnitude ; it has a course of

upwards of nine hundred miles from its source ; its width and depth

have not been exactly ascertained, it is however considered unford-

* Quintus Curtius, p. 231.

1841. | Manners and Habits of the Torkoman Tribes. 295

able, and has no bridges. The latest traveller, Mr. Moorcroft, found no

| difficulty in passing it; but unfortunately he omits to state in what

manner his passage was effected. The main stream of the Ozus is

formed of two branches. The right branch is called the Ping Dirda,

and the left branch, which comes from Baduckshan, is joined in its

course from the Hindoo Cosh by several streams, and unites with the

_ Ping river near Hazerut Imam.

Generally the Ammoo or Oxus is represented asa muddy, rapid,

deep, dirty and sand-bearing river, and to travellers from Persia the

_largeness of the stream, and the quantity of water, is considered as

somewhat wonderful, and they can only compare it with the T2g77s or

Euphrates. Mr. Moorcroft thinks it might be rendered navigable* from

lake Aral to Baduckshan ; in support of this supposition it is said,

that Nadir Shah directed a thousand boats to be made and prepared

for transporting his troops from Baduckshan, (or rather Khundooz,)

to Bokhara and Kharism. According to Mr. Moorcroft, boats might

be towed up by horses ; that horses for draught might be easily obtain-

ed at a small expence; but before this could be put into execution,

some knowledge of the banks on either side seems to be requisite.

Alexander found it a difficult matter to cross: he could get no

materials of which to construct a bridge, and was obliged to

adopt (¢hen as it is now in many parts) the practice used in the

country, of making rafts by means of blown skins, the buoyancy of

which had the desired effect ; several rafts thus constructed were suffi-

cient to enable his army to pass this river in the course of five or six

days. The Torkomans and the Allemaneesyt are in the habit of swim-

ming their horses across. The subsidiary branches are frequently

crossed by individuals on cows, where the stream is very rapid. There

are various contrivances for passing it in different parts of its course,

to which the natives are habituated. The Cadool river is passed by

* The Ammoo has never been navigated ; but as far as I can judge from personal

observation, there exists not a single obstacle formidable to its navigation. In respect

to barks of large burden especially, if conducted by a steam apparatus, and if objec-

tions not foreseen should apply to its agency, I can discover no more against tracking

than apply to the Ganges, with a superior advantage of the command of as many

horses as would possibly be required for that purpose, at a very low price.—Mr. Moor-

crofi’s MS. letter from Bokhara.

¢ The name of the gangs that go out forays,

296 Manners and Habits of the Torkoman Tribes. {LNo. 112.

means of blown cow or buffaloe skins, which are fastened to a slight

raft of twigs. These rafts are called jallahs ; they are very troublesome

to manage, and dangerous, and accidents often happen. While the bag-

gage and owners are thus ferried across, the cattle following each other

swim to the opposite side. The Oxus is frequently frozen over; when this

is the case, it can be crossed upon the ice. It abounds in fish, but we

do not know that fishing is an occupation much followed by those

who reside on its banks. Before it reaches the Aral it would seem to

be divided into several streams, besides those canals which have been

cut for the purpose of being conducted to remote spots of cultivation :

the principal towns situated on these divided streams are Oorgunge,

Khiva, Toorbat, Suggur, and Sulughan ;* but these are probably

little better than large encampments, except Khiva and Oorgunge,

which are walled, and have ditches ; but these defences are very mi-

serable even in the opinion of the people of Bokhara. The southern

bank of the river, and perhaps the other likewise, is covered for a con-

siderable distance from the river with lofty reeds, which form a kind

of forest, in which the Torkomans pitch their tents and feed their cattle ;

and I rather suspect that wild beasts also exist in these masses of

reeds. Whence the ancients called this river the Ozus, as it bears no

resemblance to the modern names, the Ammoo and the Jehoon has

not yet been ascertained. Mr. Moorcroft has offered a supposition, that

that it is derived from the Turkish word aksoo; this appears to

me a happy etymology, as it characterizes the river, the word signify-

ing a white river.

The banks of this stream are much frequented by the Torko-

mans; they annually cultivate small patches to supply themselves

with grain on this side of the river; the best and most approved

horses are bred, especially the Karrabay, reared by the Torkomans.

It is one of the finest castes which is procurable. The government

of the Torkoman resembles that of a father over his family ; each head

of a family exercises absolute authority over its members ; these

consist of his wives, his children, his slaves, and such dependents

* At Oorgunge my informant left the banks of the Oxus, situated eight coss from the

main channel. From this he travelled to the N. N. W. passing the towns of Toorbal,

Suggar, and Sulughan on to the city of Khiva, situated on the banks of a large river

called the Heelem, nearly as large as the Ovus.—Lieut. Macartney’s Memoirs, see

Appendix to Elphinstone’s Cabool, page 648.

(

ee kee

}

1841.] Manners and Habits of the Torkoman Tribes. 297

who are too weak or too poor to have separate establishments, submit

themselves to his authority, and live under his protection. These de-

pendents are frequently relations, or somehow connected by near

or more distant ties of blood. The orphans and relations of

other chiefs, who have died without leaving any heir of sufficient

years to provide for their families, are also united to them by a re-

membrance of the friendship which subsisted between the two chiefs

before one of them died ; and so long as they are treated with con-

sideration, they seldom think of separating from the chief who has

shewn them kindness and assisted them in their difficulties. Several

heads of families form an o/, who unite themselves, and in conjunction

make their annual peregrinations for the sake of pasturing their flocks,

or for the purpose of proceeding to a distant spot near some river or

stream, to rear their crops to supply them with grain. These migra-

tions generally commence about the beginning of spring, upon the

breaking up of the winter, when the snow melts and the weather

becomes warmer ; at this period of the year, pasturage for the cattle

is plentiful every where, and water is abundant. This is a season

in which the Torkoman delights, and his flocks and beasts sympathise

with him. They yield him their young, and a vast quantity of milk ;

they become fat and sleek, and travel with alacrity to new pastures.

It is at this time that parties are made up to go on forays; one of

these gangs generally consists of from twenty to sixty horsemen,

well mounted and armed with swords and spears, and not seldom

with matchlocks and pistols. Before hand, the object of their expedi-

tion is settled, which is generally to way-lay a kajfila, or body of

travellers; on some occasions very large bodies are united to make

expeditions on particular points of attack—such as on the frontier of

Persia. Meshtd was an instance of this a short time before my arrival

in 1828. The Torkomans on this occasion joined several bodies of

Hazerahs and Jumshidies, to ensure the success of the expedition ; a

quantity of booty was obtained, such as horses, mules, and slaves of

different sexes. The attack having been made shortly after sunrise,

when the cattle of the city had left it for the purpose of grazing, they

_ found no opposition in driving them away, together with the captives.

The dress of the Torkomans in general consists of a pair of pijam-

mahs or shelnars, which are fastened at the ancle ; over these they wear

298 Manners and Habits of the Torkoman Tribes. [No. 112.

a pair of high boots, which reach to the knee, commonly made of red

Russian leather; for a shirt they wear next their skin a perahan,

(tunic); over the pzjammahs and perahan, they wear a chogha or cloak

with sleeves, which is fastened by a slender kummarbund made of

cloth or leather, to which is attached two knives in a case and a

small purse. Above the under chogha they often put on a second,

which is allowed to remain loose pending from the shoulders. On

their head they have a black lamb-skin cap, with the wool of a jet

colour and naturally curled.

The shape of this cap is not of a conical form as that of the Persians.

Its diameter is the same at the top as at the part which immediately

encircles the head.

They always wear a sword, (shumsheer,) which is either carried

in the hand or fastened to the waist. ‘They seldom wear a peshkubz.

Their choghas are made of some blue cloth in the warm months, and

of coarse woollen cloth in the cold season ; the latter are either grey

camel hair, coloured or black. The women are remarkable for wear-

ing lofty turbans ; they are fond of silks and splendid colours for

their dresses. When young, their hair is allowed to grow long and

unconfined, divided into plaits, to which are fastened behind small

pieces of silver ; some tribes wear their hair loose and exposed, others

conceal it by turbans having loose locks hanging down. Their appear-

ance has a certain rudeness, but not without something striking and

interesting. ‘The occupations of the men are predatory attacks ;

the chase ; the breeding and the care, exercise, and instruction of

their horses ; tending their cattle; supervision of their slaves and

their women, who are employed in making carpets, musnuds, (or

felts,) loose furniture ; overlooking their fields, and directing agri-

cultural employments, and ploughing, sowing, and reaping ; the setting

up, taking down, and loading their tents. They are more accustomed

to command than to obey. They exact implicit obedience from

their wives, children, and dependents of all kinds. Their amuse-

ments are few. They like music, warlike anecdotes, breaking

in their horses, exercising themselves in the use of the sword and

the lance, and sometimes in using the matchlock. They delight in

feasts and the pleasures of the table. They chace deer with an ex-

eellent breed of grey-hounds. Their women are employed in house-

}

_ nn

1841. | Manners and Habits of the Torkoman Tribes. 299

hold duties, often have separate tents ; subject to them are female

slaves, who act under their orders ; they prepare the ordinary food

of the family, wash the linen, make up clothes for their husbands

and themselves ; churn and make the coagulated milk and cheese ;

bake the bread, and bring the water from the rivulet or fountain ;

they assist in erecting the tents, in laying down the nwmmud, and

cleaning the floor. They do not cover their faces with that scrupulo-

sity that is practised in Persia; they do not hide their faces except

from newly-arrived strangers; their manners are free and uncon-

strained; their duties compel them to be much exposed to the climate.

They are fond of singing and sometimes dance, particularly at marri-

ages. I found them kind in supplying my wants; both the men

and the women are much given to pass their time in idleness and

listlessness, and require much excitement to rouse them to action. In

physical appearance the Torkomans are very muscular, large-bodied

men; they have very thick short necks, enormous heads with a broad

front ; they have scanty beards which seldom exceed a few straggling

hairs upon the chin. In their manners they are rude; in their eating

dirty and uncleanly; their victuals are often imperfectly dressed by

fire; they are fond of animal food; eat goat’s flesh, and that of any

animal which they can obtain.

These notes, (written in 1830,) were kindly placed at my disposal by Mr.

Stirling, and are the result of that gentleman’s personal observations

during his travels in a part of Asia, little known in 1828. He has also

obliged me with papers on Bokhara and Kothan, which will appear in

their course.

300

Discovery of Coal ina new site. By W. Dunpar, Esq. Assistant

Surgeon, 5th Irregular Cavalry.

Camp Burree,

22 miles from Hazareebaugh,

In marching about a week ago from Dorunda to Hazareebaugh, 1

halted one day at Bullea, a very considerable village about fourteen

miles to the south of the latter station. Having heard reports that there —

was coal to be found in the vicinity, I requested the Kotwal, a very in-

telligent and obliging man, to show me where it was, we proceeded a _

mile up the banks of a considerable nullah, called the Haharoo. The

soil appeared to be mostly alluvial, containing in some places a good

a 2

deal of kanker. The greater part was cut into rice khets. On the ~

banks of the Suncherade, a small nullah running into the Haharoo,

I first saw the coal in a bed about three feet in thickness, with a

gentle dip or inclination to the west. It was splintery, very black, lying

below a friable sandstone, and alluvium containing kanker. The

bed seemed to be of great extent, and I have no doubt that any quan

tity of coal can be procured at this place. I brought some specimens

with me to my tent, and found that those from near the surface did

not burn well; in fact it was with some difficulty I ceuld get them to.

ignite at all. The others burned very well indeed, without a great deal ‘

of smoke, and leaving an inconsiderable quantity of ashes. The coal

bed seemed to have been never worked, and I had some trouble ine

clearing away the grass and bushes, to procure the specimens which —

I took with me. I have some of these still in my possession, and regret |

that I have no opportunity of forwarding them to you at present, for

the opinion of better judges than myself.

At Bullea there are large and very extensive iron works, employing —

a great many persons, and yet strange to say, though most of the inha-

bitants are aware of the existence of this extensive coal bed, they never

use it for their furnaces; but are at great expense in transporting wood

and charcoal from the forest, several miles distant. I endeavored to im-

press upon some of the workmen how advantageous it would be, and ,

what a saving would accrue to them, were they to use this coal ; but by

1841. ] Discovery of Coal in a new site. 301

their answers, they evinced their utter indifference to the subject, and

their determination to adhere to the customs of their fathers. The

coal bed is not above a mile distant from the works.

The village of Bullea is very prettily situated, and the view from

it in every direction very picturesque. Towards the N. W. and at

a distance of three or four miles, is a semicircular range of hills called

| the Mahoodee Pahar, very much resembling, though scarcely equalling

) in altitude the Salisbury Crags, at Edinburgh ; that is to say, there is a

steep dalus (formed in a great measure to all appearance from debris,

which have fallen from above) of 200 or 300 feet elevation, and then

| you come on a steep precipice, which it appears impossible to scale. The

| Haharoo Nuddee winds in beautiful meanderings along the base of

| this highrange. Hilly ranges of considerable altitude surround the plain

on which Bullea is situated, and I regretted much that I had no time

| to examine their formation, or even to visit the Mahoodee Pahar, which

was not very far distant from my camp. Ina commercial point of

view, little or no importance can be attached to the discovery of coal at

‘Bullea, at least in the present day. It is near no navigable river; no

public works of any importance are in its vicinity, excepting the iron

works above alluded to, and it will require more than persuasion I am

afraid, to induce the natives to abandon the use of wood and charcoal,

for a cheaper and more useful material. The roads passing over steep

and rocky ghauts, are by no means in a good state, though it is to be ex-

| pected, owing to the exertions of Major Ousely, Governor General’s

‘Agent, that they will soon be much improved.

_ [This paper was communicated immediately on its receipt to Government, but having

been subsequently mislaid, has not appeared at an early date as it should have done. |

002

Succinct Review of the Observations of the Tides in the Indian Archi-

pelago, made during the year 1839, by order of his Eacellency

the Governor General, of his Netherlandish Majesty’s possessions,

20th October, 1838. No. 3.

[This interesting report was transmitted to the Asiatic Society by the —

Society of Arts at Batavia. It has been translated for the Journal from _

the original Dutch, by my friend Dr. Roer, the translator of Lassen’s i

Points of History.] ir t

The tides have been observed at Pulo Chinco on the West coast of 1

Sumatra to the southward of Padang, from the 10th February 1839 ~

to the first of January 1840, being ten months and three quarters, by a

the naval lieutenants of the second class, G. J. Fabricius and J. de

Hoon. {

At Muntock on Bornea, from the 15th January 1839 to the first of

January 1840, being eleven months and a half, by the naval lieutenant

of the second class, P. C. Reuchenius.

On the Island Onrust near Batavia, from the Ist January 1839 to 7

the 1st January 1840, being twelve months, by the naval lieutenant

of the first class, Director of Onrust, J. Sigtorel.

At Fagol, on the north coast of,Java, from the Ist January 1839 to :

the Ist January 1840, being twelve months, by the naval lieutenant

of the second class, F. J. E. Van Goreum.

At Klampsis, on the north coast of Madura, from the 10th February —

1839 to the 1st January 1840, being eleven months and three quarters, |

by the naval lieutenants of the second class, J. A. K. Van Hasfelt and —

J. Van Gool.

At Filatjap, on the north coast of Java, from the Ist of January |

1839 to the 1st January 1840, being twelve months, by the naval lieu-

tenant of the second class, J. A. G. Rictoeld.

To these have been added some less complete observations on

Amboyna, from the 23rd March 1839 to the Ist January 1840, being

nine months and a quarter, by the master, J. Kecutebol, and the naval

lieutenants of the second class, J. A. Ricffer and J. A. W. High.

At Taparo, from the commencement of May 1889 to the close of

December 1839, by the assistant resident of Tapora, Winkelman.

1841.] Succinct Review of the Observations of the Tides, §c. 308

Also on the Coriman Islands, from the 18th July 1838 to April

1839, by deputy of the civil service, Michalosske.

These two latter observations were forwarded by the favour of the

Batavian Society of Arts and Sciences, which had already previously

made (at the request of Prof. Whewell, Trinity College, Cambridge)

some communications with regard to the tides in this Archipelago, to

the Asiatic Society in Calcutta ; besides these, there were some obser-

vations made at Macassar in the year 1840, by the master in the navy,

E. Lagto, after they had been finished at the other stations.

These observations furnish the following results concerning the

respective stations :—

At Pulo Chinco off Fjinks, West coast of Sumatra. The course of

the flood tide and the rise of the water on the coast was observed

to run from N. E. to S. W., closely following the direction of the coast.

The ebb tide ran in the opposite direction, and though both tides

were very trifling, not exceeding a quarter of a mile, yet the force of the

ebb generally exceeded that of the flood, though neither were sensibly

influenced by the wind.

The tides were, however, very regular. The mean duration was

about six hours and a quarter, so that as usual, there were two tides

in a day.

At new and full moon the high water was generally between 5h. 30m.

and 6h. 30m. viz. Atnew moon. a. M. at 6h. 24m.

p.M.at6 380

At full moon. a.mM.at5 28

P.M.atd 35

average time about 6—00, and the time of flood tide during the

other days, followed the common rule, dependant upon the moon’s

passing the meridian, according to which, though not always with the

same regularity the tide came in every day generally about three

quarters of an hour later, or rather in the course of a fortnight the

variation amounted to twelve hours. If then six hours be supposed as

mean number, it was almost always flood tide when the moon was

in the horizon. |

From the time of high water to the time when it again turns to ebb,

as is here noticed, we may be allowed to fix 5h. 30m. as the mean

number.

304 Succinct Review of the Observations of [ No. 112.

The mean rise and fall was about ebb, ress wil} Oy 8

The greatest ditto ditto, ie ae oly 49

The smallest ditto ditto, Ma he tO 4.6

The difference in the elevation of the succeeding tides is remarkable,

viz. a greater rise and a smaller one were perceived to take place

alternately, and in the same manner also the ebb tides.* This alter-

nation of flow and ebb which is very regular may hereafter be shown to

be in connection with the moon’s decrease, though perhaps more so at

this place than at the other stations of the Archipelago.

The greatest difference between high and low water, as well as

the highest rise, occurred in October and November, and generally

in the months when the West monsoon prevails.

—==

At Filitjap, South coast of Java.

On the south coast of Java the tides were most regular in all respects,

consequently the observations made upon them are best adapted to

furnish a general rule.

The course of the flood tide was to the West into the outlet, and

followed the direction of its shore. The ebb tide ran in an oppo-

site course. In the westerly passage or creek of Segara Anakon,

the tides had a course quite the reverse; here the streams met

consequently the rise and fall took place without stream. In gene-

ral the stream appears to run, at least in the East monsoon, along

the coast to the East, at the rate of half a mile in four hours. In

the straits of Filitjap in the West monsoon, the ebb and flood tides

ran at the rate of two and three miles, and in the East monsoon at

five and five and ahalf miles. The tides evidently follow here, as well

as at Pulo Chinco, the common rule. The mean duration of rise and

fall was about six hours and a half, and this took place with much re-

gularity, two tides in one day; but also smaller rises and falls between

the usual ones have been sometimes noticed, amounting to 0-20 ebb.

The duration of still water is here very regular for ten or fifteen minutes

after high and low water. The ebbs and floods are about equal in

force and duration. At new and full moon the mean time of the flood

tide was between eight and nine hours, viz.

* Nore.—A nautical friend has pointed out that night tides are generally

the highest, thus giving an alternation. yoy

i _ls =S—S . 7

;

184f. | the Tides in the Indian Archipelago. 305

At new moon at. 9h. 18m. P. M.

andat8 0453 a. M.

At full moon at 8 45 P.M.

andat8 19 a. M.

Average of the time 8 48

and therefore as the time of flood tide is noticed to the moment when

the water again commences to decrease, we may fix here, as mean

number, 8h. 30m., considering that here also the period of the flood

tide during the fortnight passed the space of 12h.

At this station was observed the same remarkable fact as at Pulo

Chinco, that at new moon it was high water an hour later than at

full moon.

The mean rise and fall of the water was 1. 25 ebb.

the greatest 2. 42

the smallest 0. 10.

The greatest difference in the rise and fall of the tide took place some

days after the new and full moon, not however exceeding 2.63 ebb.

The highest water mark was observed in the East monsoon.

The difference of the rise and fall of the succeeding tides is here

very notable, and appears more than elsewhere to be in connection with

the decrease of the moon. The morning and evening tides are different,

especially at the decrease of the moon, while they were about equal at

the time of the moon’s passing the Equator.

At Amboyna.

Although the streams in the bay are not strong, and sometimes only

run from two miles to two and a half, and the turns of the tide very

irregularly take place, we may state that the stream of the flood tide in

the East monsoon runs into the bay along the northern coast to the E.

and runs out along the southern coast to the S. W. The opposite

course takes place in the West monsoon, while in the middle of the

bay little or no stream is observed.

The duration of the rise and fall of the water is here very regular,

about six hours and a quarter, so that the flood occurs about twice a

day, and in a fortnight looses about twelve hours.

306 Suceinct Review of the Observations of [No. 112.

At new moon the mean time of high water was about

a. M. Oh. 34m.

p. M.O 46.

At full moon a. Mm. O 06.

p. M. O 38.

Average of time 0. 30. or 33m.

The month of December makes an exception to this, and might en-

courage the supposition of another mean number during the West

monsoon, unless the observations made in that month exhibited a want

of accuracy, on account of which they are not be relied on.

At new moon here also, as well as at Filitjap and Pulo Chinco, the

flood tide appears to come in always later than at full moon ; the mean

rise and fall was about _.... in 1. 14. ebb.

The greatest ditto Gitto / 7... | 2. 2. OU; Ebb.

The smallest rise observed at several places was scarcely perceptible.

A small rise was alternately taking place with a great one, and the

same occurred with the fall. The difference of the succeeding rises

and falls is here likewise deserving notice. The greatest difference

between high and low water took place in April and July.

The highest water mark was in April, November, and December.

These remarks are made on observations taken during the period from

April to December, and especially during the East monsoon.

At Klampsis, on the Northern coast of Madura.

It appears from the observations that were made, that there was no

flood or ebb stream perceptible during the East monsoon, and in the

month of May the stream had always during the day a Westerly direc-

tion, with the velocity from two miles to two and a half; while at night

little or no stream was observed ; it sometimes likewise ran to the East.

The month of July forming the only exception to this, when in the night

also the stream ran to the West, with a force of about two to three miles.

In this monsoon the water is generally falling during the day and the

stream then strongest, while during the night the water is generally

rising ; the stream however has little force.

These facts suggest the inference, that if ebb and flood tide here ac-

tually exist, the ebb tide has a Westerly direction, while the flood runs

1841.] | the Tides in the Indian Archipelago. 307

to the East ; this latter, however, is almost annihilated by Easterly winds.

In the West monsoons, the stream runs to the East with little force, and

the water rises during the day; the flood stream should accordingly

run in this season to the Kast ; but then at night scarcely any stream is

perceived, and the ebb tide which then runs, was observed to be anni-

hilated by the Westerly winds.

East Monsoon. West Monsoon.

<— Wind E. —> Wind W.

Stream during Stream during

During the day fallg. —-_— the day or ebb. During day ——> the day flood

Stream during Stream during

Night rising —-—______._ the night or flood. Night falling —— >> the night ebb.

The mean duration of the rise and fall of the water is during the

whole year eleven and half to twelve and half, so that here ebb and flood

occur only once in the same day; nevertheless it appears that here

often little rises and falls, or those called short tides, have obtain-

ed alternately with them. It is worth noticing, that during a certain

period the flood tide always took place before noon, and during the

remainder of the year in the evening; namely, in May, June, and July

the time of flood tide was daily in the morning about nine o’clock,

and one o'clock in the afternoon, without regular yet constant retarda-

tion ; this period from time to time suddenly shifting to an interval of six

hours. In the first half of August, this period occurred between half-past

seven and half-past eleven a.m, In the latter part of the same month,

between half-past five and eleven a.m. In September between one

oclock and half-past ten a.m. In October between midnight and six

oclock a.m. In the latter days of November between nine o’clock

A.M. and midnight. In February between three, half-past three,

: and half-past eleven o’clock Pp. M.; and so on, until in May this period

_ again occurred before noon.

| Thus it can be proved that in the EK. monsoon, the flood tide

took place always before noon, and therefore the fall of the water

| and also the ebb was during the day ; and in the West monsoon after

noon, so that the fall of the water and also the ebb were in the night,

| while the Opposite was observed with regard to high water and the

flood tide, as the mean interval from the period of the one flood tide

308 Succinct Review of the Observations of [ No. 112:

to that of the next was about twelve or thirteen. The succeeding tides,

or the duration of that of the rise and fall generally decreased in an

inverted arithmetical progression from between nine to fifteen hours ;

the difference between the rise and the succeeding fall of the water was

most remarkable at new and full moon. There has been a single in-

stance, in which the duration of the fall did not exceed an hour, while

again a rising of three-quarters of an hour has been observed.

The sum of the two succeeding tides, or the duration of the rise of

the water and the succeeding fall, always amounted to somewhat

more than twenty-four hours.

This was not the case as regards the height of the tide and of the

succeeding fall, which was almost constantly equal.

Here also, as elsewhere, it is notable, that a great rise and fall occurs

alternately with a small one, and the difference in the rise and fall

decreases till no longer perceptible, when it again increases, which

phenomenon must (at least at the first glance) be accounted for as

the effect of a powerful cause; as for instance, the decrease of the

moon as has been already done.

The common rules are here also not sufficient to calculate the time

of high water. It also deserves notice, that at new and full moon the

flood tide generally, excepting some instances in October and April,

came in between eight and ten o'clock, viz. the morning, when the afore-

said periods in which, according to the season of the year, the flood

tide must take place, corresponded with the morning, that is in the

East monsoon, and in the evening, when the converse took place, that

is in the West monsoon.

The flood of eight or ten o’clock, whether in the morning or in the

evening, took place in almost all periods, as above mentioned.

The period of the flood tide at new and full moon cannot, however,

be averaged or used to calculate the mean time of high water for

another day.

The mean rise and fall of the water was,... 1° 12 ebb.

The greatest, eae es aes are ae

The smallest, am my es sical Oba bi

The greatest difference between high and low water occurred in May,

June, and December, after new and full moon, though this by no means

was always the case.

bal

ie,

1841. | the Tides in the Indian Archipelago. 309

The highest water-mark was likewise observed about this period.

At Fagol, on the north coast of Java.

It appears that here also, as at Klampsis, no streams of ebb and

flood, strictly speaking, are to be found, the tides generally being very

irregular, and the streams, which seem to be dependent on the wind, at

most amounting to a quarter or half a mile.

The duration of the rise and fall has a singular course. In January

it is sometimes six hours, so that there accordingly flood and ebb tides

occur generally twice in a day; and only one rise and fall of much

longer duration than ordinarily is perceived at new and full moon.

In the succeeding months, these longer tides repeatedly occur after

new and full moon, so that at this period, for several succeeding

days, the flood tide comes in but once a day, and thus also the ebb,

and the duration of the rise and fall of the water is respectively twelve

hours. In May, about new and full moon, they continue for eight days,

and likewise the whole month of June the duration of the ebb and

flood tide is respectively twelve hours ; so that there is but one flood and

ebb tide during the day.

Then again in July, at new and full moon, there are tides of about

six hours’ duration, so that two tides again occur in a day.

In August and September, the number of days when short tides

are perceived, is increasing. In October, the duration of all tides is

about six hours, and in November and December, at new and full

moon, they again come in some long rises and falls.

At the period of the change from these common or short tides (of

about six hours) to the long ones (of about twelve, ) a great rise and fall

generally is alternate with a small one, and it is a remarkable fact,

) that these smaller rises and falls gradually decrease until they entirely

| disappear, and only one rise and fall takes place in the twenty-four hours.

The reverse was the case on the change from long tides to the

| common or shorter ones.

The same also appears to happen as regards the time of rise and

| fall, though in a less striking degree.

The time of flood and ebb tide is here likewise very uncertain. It may,

| however, be stated, that at new and full moon, the ebb tide comes in

about three o’clock in the morning, while it is more regular with regard to

310 Succinct Review of the Observations of [ No. 112.

the flood tide, and it is therefore impossible to calculate with exactness,

the other days re-appearance of ebb and flood tide at Fagol.

The mean rise and fali during the year was, ne O- 50 ebb.

The greatest, se At ie Hep Me 0:97

The smallest, by nA Ae ee as 0: 04

The greatest difference between high and low water was observed

in the West monsoon, and scarcely ever at new or full moon; so that

there accordingly existed no real spring tide: it never exceeded the

fall by 1°03 ebb.

The highest water-mark, on the other hand, was in the East monsoon,

especially in the months of May and June.

The difference in the rise and fall of the succeeding tides is here,

as well as at the other stations, deserving notice ; and though the

equality of the succeeding rise and falls evidently depends upon cer-

tain rules, yet it is not to be traced, at the first glance at least, to the —

decrease of the moon. ;

The monsoons, and likewise the stand of the sun’s solstice probably,

exercise a more than common influence on these tides at Onrust near _

Batavia. No stream of ebb and flood, properly speaking, was observed :

any more than at Fagol or Klampsis, the stream which runs cannot be yo

subjected to any certain rule, nor does the rise and’ fall of the water a

proceed with regularity. The stream in all directions is much influen- q ;

ced by the wind, and is very trifling, seldom exceeding one mile to one

mile and a half. 3

According to the observations that have been made, the duration of the r .

rise and fall of the water in December, January, and February, was about

twelve hours ; so that there is in one day, only once high water and 4 :

once low ; sometimes, however, the water is longer flowing than ebbing. 4

In March for some succeeding days, smaller tides were observed be- ; |

tween them, which being of very unequal duration ordinarily, were al-

ternating in a short rise, succeeding a long one and vice versa. The m

recurrence of these small tides which first appeared twice or thrice in —

the month, may perhaps be brought into connexion with the age of .

the moon ; the number of days they continued decreased about July 7 |

and August, though sometimes a short tide of one or two hours a

occurred; with these exceptions, there was high and low water only

once in twenty-four hours.

1841. | the Tides in the Indian Archipelago. 311

In the latter days of August, the number of days when the short

tide comes in, it increases so that almost the whole month, as well as in

September, two tides took place in the same days, though of a very irre-

gular duration; then the number of days when the short tides were

observed again decreased, occurring only twice or thrice in the month ;

till in December long tides almost always return, so that in this month

there is only one ebb tide each day.

However, supposing in January and February the short tides have

been overlooked, which is not impossible, as the character of these

was not known at the commencement of the observations, or we should

be able to assign a reason, that in July and December long tides, and

in September and February short tides take place, as well as between

these months, the number of days when short tides obtain, decreases and

increases ; something similar to this has been observed at Fagol; but

the period of long and short tides does not correspond.

There is no peculiarity concerning the difference of the succeeding

tides ; but we must not omit to notice, that there, as well as at Klampsis,

in December, January, and February, flood tide always comes in before

noon, and this period is successively retarded ; the flood tide being ob-

served during May in the night ; during June in the evening; during

July and August in the afternoon ; in September before and after noon ;

in October and November in those days where only one tide in one day

took place before noon. It is evident from these facts, that during the

East monsoon the flood-tide comes in the afternoon, and in the

evening ; while during the West monsoon it was before noon, and in

the morning just the reverse of what has been observed at Klampsis.

The period of the flood tide at new and full moon, however irregu-

lar it may be in the interval between them, is always about ten o’clock,

(or between 9h. 30m. and 10h. 45m.) Pp. m. from March to December,

that is in the East monsoon; and at a. mM. from September to March

in the West monsoon, a singular correspondence with the observations

at Klampsis. It is evident that on account of the regularity of the

tides, this period cannot be used as a mean number, to calculate the

period of the flood tide for other days.

The mean rise and fall was, a 1 MONCT ebb:

The greatest, eae ee Bete coe EP" 32

The smallest, ve des a ie? OFO2

312 Succinct Review of the Observations of [ No. 112.

The greatest difference between high and low water took place in

the West monsoon, and then especially at new and full moon, in the

other parts of the year. The position of the moon was not observed

having any reference to the water-mark. The highest water-mark

was also in the W. monsoon, and especially in December.

At Muntok in the Straits of Borneo.

At this place, a decided stream of ebb and flood took place, and the

observations seem therefore most fit to establish on them a general

rule for the tides within the Archipelago, and the short or middle

tides. The flood stream at Muntok runs six or eight hours in a day to

the S. E. with a velocity of quarter, half, and sometimes of one and a half

mile, while the ebb stream runs sixteen or eighteen hours every day,

at the rate of one or two miles to W. by N. and W.N. W. The

turn of the streams was not regular, nor to be brought into connexion

with the rise and fall of the tide. In August, an ebb was even observed

lasting more than thirty-eight hours, while the water in the mean time

rises twice.

After the monsoons, the common duration of the rise generally

is ten hours, and that of the fall 14-80; afterwards at the first and

last quarters of the moon, ebbs and floods, or the so-called short tides

take place in one day, which last about six hours, or rather the mean

duration of two rises is about 11-30, and that of two falls 12-35.

The short tides ordinarily appear at a certain suspension of the

fall or rise in the ebb and flood tide, called by the natives passing

ketjil. _ Should these tides amount to two ebbs and two floods

in a day, they are called by the natives, ‘passing onok ;” while ebb

and flood, which run for a longer time, and precede the common tides

of ebb and flood of twenty-four hours duration, bear the name of

“* passing ma.”

On the contrary, during the change of the monsoons, that is during

April, May, October, and November, these middle tides run at new

and full moon; and here also as at Onrust, flood tide occurs during the

West monsoon, in the afternoon and in the evening, and at new and

full moon at 8h. 30m.

1841. | the Tides in the Indian Archipelago. 318

During these months, when at new and full moon short tides

were running, the high water generally came in about 6h. 50m. in the

morning, and at about 7h. 10m. in the evening. However, these numbers

cannot exhibit a mean number, nor give a direction to calculate the

high water of the other days, although the time of the flood tide, however

irregular, seems daily to come in later, being retarded twelve hours in

a fortnight, while this time on the appearance of the short tides has a

most irregular course.

The natives foretell sometimes very exactly the return of the small

and the short tides.

The greatest rise and fall was, ... .- 4° 26 ebb.

The smallest, a shi on Liseswniht Vad 9 Fi

The mean, in Hee ae an A

The greatest difference between high ‘and low water was at full moon

in December, in June, and May, and in general when the monsoons

| had passed; while the difference during the months, while the monsoons

changed, was less perceptible.

_ The greatest rises and falls often took place at new and full moon,

_ though by no means always.

' The highest water-mark was also observed when the monsoons were

in their fullforce. Besides it deserves notice, that during the period

| when flood and ebb tide came in only once a day, that is during the

common long tides, the rises and falls following each other successively

| increase and decrease; while when two tides or middle tides occur in

-aday, the succeeding rises are alternately great and small, and thus

also the falls, while the difference in the quantum of two succeeding

rises, probably depends on the decrease of the moon.

At Corimon, Java.

_ An ebb and flood tide is here even less perceptible than at other

stations. It appears, however, from the observations that were made,

that here, as at Klampsis on the North coast of Madura, the stream runs

especially with the rising water to the East, and with the falling water

to the West ; in the East monsoon in the night, in the West monsoon in

fee day time.

}

314 Succinct Review of the Observations of [No. 112.

The tides are very irregular ; there being only once in a day flood and

ebb tide, and sometimes of the duration from nine to fifteen hours.

The period of the flood tide has here, as at Klampsis and Onrust, a

general though irregular retardation, viz. in the East monsoon, as at

Klampsis, the high water comes in before noon and in the morning ; in

September early in the morning ; in October, November, and December,

in the night; during the West monsoon in the night and in the even-

ing; in April in the afternoon ; while this period is most irregular during

the turning months.

The mean rise and fall was, _... 23 1: 25 ebb.

The greatest, ... oes 2° 03

The highest water mark is in ean an generally the 21st and 22nd

of the month.

At Tapara.

No ebb and flood stream properly speaking, and the whole course

of the tides very irregular. With the rising water, a stream was gene-

rally observed having an easterly direction; high water only once

in the same day. Here also the period of the flood tide appears —

to undergo a general, though indefinite annual retardation, viz. the flood —

tides during the month of May and June take place after noon and

at noon; the ebb-tide in the morning and about midnight.

In July, August, and September, they take place successively earlier,

so that the high water comes in October about half-past five o’clock

in the morning ; in December about half-past one in the morning ; and ©

during the W. monsoon in the night and in the evening ; and consecu- —

tively the flood-tides again occur in the afternoon. The period of ebb

and flood tides at new and full moon is very irregular.

The mean rise and fall is, ... vole Jeo cio DD:

The greatest, A ae a seine Cer ae

The highest water-mark was observed in October.

At Macassar. |

According to some observations of a later date transmitted to us,

viz. during the three first months of 1840, the tides are very irregular ;

having a close correspondence with the tides on the Javanese sea.

1841. ] the Tides in the Indian Archipelago. 315

The flood-tide, though with little force, runs to the N. E. and N.N.E.

the ebb-tide to the S. W. and S. S. W. either stream much dependent

on the wind.

During the full strength of the monsoons, there appears long tides

to prevail, being only one flood and one ebb tide in twenty-four hours,

and as at Muntok and Onrust, during the change of the monsoons pe-

riodically, returning short tides took place twice in a day ; and during

this period they were all short tides of about six hours. At new and

full moon, the flood-tide comes in at about 6h. 20m. There is no daily

retardation of the flood-tide. It appears, as at Klampsis, on the

north coast of Madura, that during the W. monsoon the high water

takes place in the afternoon, and most likely the converse during the E.

monsoon.

A mean number cannot be obtained here.

The highest rise was during the 3 first months of 1840, 1. 60 ebb.

The mean, vie nas fez ia or aes 10e (0

If we then compare the course of the tides at the different stations,

there is evidently observed a sensible difference of the tides without

the Archipelago, viz. of those on the West coast of Sumatra and

on the South coast of Java and of Amboyna, from those within the

Javanese sea. Here we are able to fix a certain mean number, by

means of which the time of high water is to be calculated, totally

different from the course of the tides within the Javanese sea.

The former it appears follow the well known rules of the tides ;

there is twice in the day ebb and twice flood tide, and two tides take

place in the space of somewhat more than twenty-four hours in

the whole, depending on the moon’s passing the meridian.

_ Here we are able to fix a certain mean number, by means of which

the time of high water is to be calculated beforehand, totally different

from the course of the tides within the Javanese sea, which cannot

be traced to the common rules; they rather are governed by the locali-

_ ty, the position of the sun, and the monsoons dependent on it.

_ We may however state, that in the Javanese sea high water is

Baty once a day, and that besides these, long tides, or rather rises

| and falls, which of more or less duration last together somewhat more

than twenty-four hours. Small or short tides prevail, whose very

regular return depends on several causes, especially on the monsoons

316 Succinct Review of the Observations of the Tides, &c. [No. 112. :

and the sun’s solstice. They may perhaps be subjected to a certain .

rule; because the natives of this Archipelago are able often to foretell

with great exactness the return of the small tides. q

Although (notwithstanding the irregular return of the hour of high :

water) at new and full moon at the same place, the tides generally

return at the same hour ; yet these cannot be fixed a mean number for —

the different stations upon this sea. :

In general annual (although irregular) retardation of the daily period

of the high water, which appears also to depend on the sun’s solstice _

like the short or middle tides, is a singular character of the Javanese —

sea, or perhaps of all seas situated within an Archipelago.

Besides, it must be noticed, that the streams are still more irregular

than the rise and fall of the water, and much depends on the prevailing {

winds. ;

Order.

E. Lucas,

Rear Admiral, Commander of H. M. Navy

in Last India, and Inspector of the Navy.

By order of the Rear Admiral, Commander of His

Majesty's Navy in East India, and Inspector of the Navy,

W. De Constant Resecaur,

Adjutant and Naval Lieutenant,

| in the year 1839. 317

Remarks.

Ae ee pe

The tides regularly lose 12 hours in a fortnight,

the flood along the coast runs to N. W., the ebb to

SE.

a .

The tides regularly lose 12 hours in a fortnight ;

Filatj apast. 23 to 03. the stream along the coast runs to the East during

the East monsoon.

—$ | | 2 —— ———

q. mon-

ENE The tides regularly lose 12 hours in a fortnight ;

Bort, Ve Neh. Little to 23. {ebb and flood run in an opposite direction along

Amt- Ww. the North coast of the Bay. :

During the East monsoon it is always high

water at 2 Pp. M. or in the evening; during the W.

monsoon a. M. or in the morning.

16h. or 9

= Se

During the East monsoon it is always high

Onrust. q flood tide stream. water at Pp. M. or in the evening; during the West

| monsoon at a. M. or in the morning.

ce ae SS A ee Ee aan

aes

| During the East monsoon it is flood tide always

Klamp: P in the morning, and in the West monsoon in the

Pon the rise, and Westward evening. ;

5 | During the E. monsoon the flood tide comes in

Tapara.y, but it is very irregular.|the morning, and in the W. monsoon in the evening.

During the East monsoon the flood tide comes

Crim and on the fall Westerly. a ta ; during the West monsoon in the

———

ye of the greatest rise and fall of every month be taken, it is somewhat less. If

the ave

Orviral of the Navy in East India, and Inspector of the Navy,

W. DE CONSTANT REBECQUE,

Adjutant and Naval Lieutenant.

General Table of the Tides in the East Indian Archipelago, on Observations taken in the year 1839.

long

= = = 5 317

= er {| Duration of the rise and fall of the water] Greatest rise and/Mean rise and fall Foon. 7

‘ Klos cio: lor of the ebb and flood-tide. {fall of the water.| of the water, Direction. Velocity. Direction Bae Velocity Remarks.

Station: 2 — i= —— a eee : é

|_—_—_—__ i i flood- rT SS — es

——| Om. Os. ‘Two tides in 24 hours, that is twice Ebb. Ebb. 5 To the S.W. ee

—— oa mn tide and twice ebb, flood and ebb-tide about| 150 0.78 Mile. } Wis.W. Mile 4 The tides regularly lose 12 hours in a fortni ht,

Palo Chine: Meany Os.” (6 hours. ee atta, South. Great, the flood along’ the coast runs to N.W., the eUbite

_ Sam | Tro tides in 24 hours, that is twice food} -|—————__|____ ye} : ue eae

| Mean number, tide and. twice eb; Head andiebbiabout 6 2.63 1-25 w. 24 to 43. ‘To the East, YW took, —_|the strese ars ev lary Lose 12 hours in a fortnight,

r } j s UTS. on . AUS

Filatjap. | sh. 30m. Sen |oh ees aes As theleast aes e coast runs to the East during

See a ides in 24 hours, viz. twice flood and) In the E. mon- mine! — ———=

i Oh. 33m. Os. Two tides 10 9 tw ni , -mon- ;

rot Vietoria at Mean number, {twice ebb tide; flood and ebb tide about 63 2.50 Il thes ite BENG Little to 2g. (£000, 10 i NIE! Tithe to.2y Louis reaulacly lose 12 hours in a fortnight ;

‘Amboyna. Uh 30m, Os. eee | soon to the N.. conta the SW. * like North eanatl ie Bee direction

— [=== |j—— = = Bu :

$4 During the power of the monsoons genc- | ore wer

| rally one tide in 24 hours, viz. the rise of the

water 14h. 30m. and the fall 10h. ; two tides|

After the monsoons), 94 hours during the months when the

(Sh. 30m, inthe months .onsoons change ; between both on the re- 4-27 2-16 During Gh. or 8h. 1 told During 6h. or . During the East monsoon it is always high

Muntoh when the monsoons!) of certain periods; whether at quarter, | B.S. E. * : 18h. W.N.W. 2 Water at 2 p. m. or in the evening; during the

change about 7h. —_Jor. at full moons the oppositecourse took place, | | monsoon A. M. or in the morning. E ;

land especially at the change from the long}

| jtides to short ones and vice versa.

=m During the full power of the monsoons| — = —

In the East mon-/generally one tide in 24 hours; the rise and

soon about J0h. P. M.,|fall about 12h. two bass in 24) i the anon

_ the evening in|when the monsoons change ; between both) 39 4 During the anos

Onrust. oom ae eee eEoutlon the return of certain periods, whether at! 1-32 0.67 Properly speaking, there is no ebb and flood tide stream. water ate. ite aie ea : ees wet

10h. a. M. or in the new and full or at quarter, the agate course) monsoon at A. a1, or in the sae ing the West

morning. |took place at the ehanies from the long tides} : ig.

|to the short, and vice versa.

nae | | Generally one tide in 24hs. during the B, a a es == — = ee

\monsoons ; two tides in 24hs. during the W-

{monsoons; between both at certain periods; at }

Pagal. | Very irregular. new and full moon, the opposite course took 1.03 0-50 IpEm

| jplace; especially atthe change from the long} |

\tides to the short ones, and vice versa: that 15) .

| jin the months when the monsoons change.

East monsoons 9h. ms = a = ————— —_—

to 10h. a.m. or in the! One tide in 24 hours, ebb and flood tide IpEM

Klampsis. moming, pe i eet ea 9 to 15 Hoag there were no exact ob-' 2-13 | Lp : Ponte the East monsoon itis flood tide aber

= monsoons 9h. to 10h.|servations made concerning the existence of) = - The str in the morning, and in the West monsoon in tl

ra ee acithalavenclchort tides, be ie Bera generally runs to the Eastward onthe rise, and Westward evening. Bi in the

| en — — — —

Tapara. Very irregular. | One tide in 24 hours, from 8h. to 16 hours; 2-00 1-31 EM. During the E. monsoon the flood tide comes i

(ees iae were not observed In the rise the stream generally runs Easterly, but it is very irregular.|the morning, and inthe W. monsoon in the acai

East monsoons 8h.| aoa, Sa ae ar a) ela ar oa Sa —

Crimon, Java. |& ™ in the West) One tide in 24 hours, from 9h. tol5h., 2.03 1-23 aa During the East monsoon the flood tide comes

fmonsoons /about Bb.léhort tides were not observed. | ; ‘ On the rise the stream generally runs Easterly, and on the fall Westerly. eae rerenne 3 during the West monsoon in the

N. B.—The mean rise and fall are here the average of the extremes, and thi al nd fall m ken i ab: 0 i

, e test i I k ist

the average of the mean rise and{fall of every month be taken, it becomes co Orgel rise and fall must be so taken in an absolute sense. If, however, the average of the greatest rise and fall of every month be taken, it is somewhat less. If

Order.

E, LUCAS,

Rear Admiral, Commander of the Navy in East India,

and Inspector of the Navy.

By order of the Admiral of the Navy in East India, and Inspector of the Navy,

W. DE CONSTANT REBECQUE,

Adjutant and Naval Lieutenant.

319

Journal kept while Travelling in Seistan. By the late Capt. Evwarp

Conou.uy.

I left Herat on the 11th of August 1839 in progress to Seistan. All

the papers and credentials with which I had been

furnished by H. M. Shah Shooja and Mr. Macnagh-

ten having been stolen from me near Herat, Major Todd wrote out

anew list of instructions for my guidance, and

Leave Herat.

Papers stolen.

Appendix 1. procured letters of introduction to the chiefs, through

whose country I should pass, from H. M. Shah Kamraun and his

tiers of intro- Vuzeer Yar Mahomed Khan. He also gave me

duction. letters from himself to the several chiefs.

The vuzeer appointed two persons of influence and respectability

to accompany me into Seistan, or as far as I might judge con-

venient; they were to receive no fixed salary ; but I promised to

reward them according to their services and utility.

Both were accompanied by a few horsemen.

I had also as an escort, an Ishaukzye, named Sultan Khan, with

six horsemen, who had been made over to me at Candahar by H. M.

Shah Shooja.

The vuzeer sent me before I started a handsome horse, and what

was more valuable, one of the five mules which were captured from the

Persians during the siege. This animal was worth at even Herat 360 Rs.

We reached Subzawar on the evening of the 15th; when about a mile

from the town, we were met by a messenger from the governor

(Syed Mahomed, a son of the vuzeer Yar Mahomed

Khan,) who conducted us to a garden house, which

had been prepared for our reception. On reaching this, we found

seated, waiting for us, a Persian gentleman, a sort of mentor to the

young lord ; the Sheeghaussee, and several other well dressed persons,

| Who repeated “You are welcome, you are very welcome,” a hundred

times ; a zeafut followed of forty sheep, and attah, barley and ghee suffi-

cient for my whole camp for six days. Till late at night, message after

message came from the sirdar to inquire if I was tired, if my brains

were clear.

Escort.

Subzawar.

Ve ——

320 Journal kept while travelling in Seistan. [No. 112.

16th.—This morning I was hardly up, before the sirdar visited me,

with a long train of followers; he sat a fatiguingly

The Governor. 3 . :

long time, talking nothings. He talks so fast, that

his servants even confess that they only understand half he says, and

as he mingles a large proportion of Pushtoo with his Persian, I found

some difficulty in following him: he has a pleasing appearance and

manner.

I rode out in the evening ; the town is a poor collection of huts, but

in the fort are some twenty houses of Hindoos, who

are perhaps the most contented of Shah Kamraun’s

subjects; not that they are better treated than the —

rest, but that the oppression to which they are subjected seems less,

and tolerable in comparison with what they dread from Sheah intoler-

Description of the

Town.

ance, should the Persians gain the ascendant.

On my return home I sent my head Mirza, Mahomed Juher, to

the newly-discovered Prince, with respectful messages, and an apology

for not calling, on the plea of my being a traveller, having nothing

fit to present, &c. The fact was, my tosha khaneh was not large, and —

it was necessary to husband my resources.

The prince at Subzawar is the youngest son of Shah Kamraun, and

is named Zemaun. One of these princes is attached —

neice a every government under the rule of Shah Kam-.

Condition of the Taun, to assist in the administration of justice, since |

ee ge no one but a Puddozye could execute a criminal with- ~

out fear of retaliation. When the real governor wishes to punish an

offender, he sends him to the prince, who, dressed all in black, in the —

robes of punishment, poshaki gauzub, himself superintends the execu- ~

tion; besides the more usual punishment of cutting —

off the ears and lips, slitting the nose, &c. tortures —

of several kinds have been common.

Syud Mahomed paid me another visit in the afternoon, as I had

announced my intention of pursuing my journey to-morrow. He shewed

me a letter from his father, begging that I would ’

Totter from Yar permit one Hubeeboollah Khan to accompany me to

Seistan, that he might through my influence pur-

chase grain, which at present he said, from Shah Pusund Khan’s being j

unfriendly to him, he could not do. He also requested, that I would —

Torture.

_ Killah Duchter.

Runaway Slave.

1841. ] Journal kept while travelling in Seistan. 321

make over any grain, I could buy on the public account to the same.

To the first proposition I made no objection. Hubeeboollah I knew

to be a man of character and respectability ; he is an Ishaukzye, and

son of the Mir Akbar of Shah Zemaun ; and as he was well acquainted

with Seistan, where he had lived for more than a year as the agent of

the Herat government, I thought he might prove useful.

On taking leave of the governor I presented him with a pistol of

small value, and a shawl, apologizing for the poor-

Eresent to Syud ness of the gift by repeating, what 1 had been re-

peating, since I arrived but without much effect, that

I was travelling as a mere private individual, and uninvested with

political authority. Syud Mahomed expressed himself quite satisfied

with the offering, and sent me two sorry horses in return ; he also

pressed a few more horsemen on me, as the road between Subzawar

and Turrah was not accounted safe. As I was mounting my horse, a

person slipped a letter into my hand and slunk away ; it was from

the prince, begging me to mediate with Major Todd, that his allow-

ance might be increased, and wishing me a pros-

perous journey. Our road lay on the banks of the

river Adrascund, which shewed traces of having been

once richly cultivated ; but at present they are covered with grass and

weeds, on which large numbers of sheep, camels,

horses, and cows were feeding. We made a detour to

visit the Killah Duchter, celebrated in the traditions of this part

of the country; but were not repaid for our trouble. The Killah

Letter from the

Prince.

Leave Subzawar.

_ Duchter is a small ruined fort on the left bank of the Adrascund,

where that river turns the hills, and on the extreme

edge of these hills is built, just opposite the other

fort a wall and parapet, now in ruins, with a high tower in tolerable

preservation, and which is seen for miles. This last is the Killah

Pisur, and the son and daughter used to nurse each other with

mutual sieges. While we were sitting on the tower of the Killah Pisur,

_ which commands a fine view of the plain below, we perceived a horse-

man trotting towards us from the town. It appeared that a boy, the

slave of some person about the sirdar, had ran away

and had taken service with one of my followers. The

| moment the horseman approached, the poor boy went without saying a

322 Journal kept while travelling in Seistan. (No. 112.

word towards him, and jumped up behind him; the man not even halt-

ing, turned his horse, and trotted back again to Subzawar with his

reclaimed property; for there was no time to interfere if even I had

the will to do so.

From Subzawar to Imanet, the villages are inhabited by mixed

ah tribes of Duranees; but between Imarut and Jaigee,

the population is entirely composed of Goorazye

Moorzye. We met on the road a pleasing sight,—some few Kheils re-

turning from the south to re-settle in their old lands in Subzawar. The

Dlehikzye Kheil, with whom I was so near being ob-

liged to fight at Ahinuk, as related in a former re-

port, had also just returned to their ancient habitations, laded it was

said with spoils, of which a part was the Company’s camels. I re-

ported this last circumstance to Major Todd, not thinking the present

a prudent time for me to stir in the matter.

Jaya.

At Jaya two gentlemen, who were travelling towards Laush on their

private affairs, requested leave to accompany my party. One was the

son of the old Moorzye lord, so well described by Mr. Elphinstone, ~

Ahmed Khan; the other was a relation, Dost Mahomed Populzye,a —

person well known in the modern history of Herat; they both shared 4

in the general ruin which has fallen on all men of rank under the

rule of Yar Mahomed Khan, whose policy it has always been to allow

the clans subject to Herat, to be without a head ; so that there should —

eae neha: be no one of influence in the country but himself and

ranee gentlemen. his immediate adherents. Though I could not but

fear that the two nobles came to beg, it was diffi- —

cult to refuse giving them the protection they asked for, particularly ~

as a few miles from Jaya we had a few hours before met two different —

parties who had been robbed by the lawless inhabitants of the hills. 5

Their followers did not consist of more than eight horsemen, so we bid _

them all welcome, and assigned them their station in the camp, they

agreeing to share in the fatigue of keeping watch at night, in which q

every person with me, of whatever class he might be, took his part. Our _

watches were not indeed kept with the silent decorum of a European

camp, though perhaps in a manner equally effectual. Several parties

of twos and threes sat round fires in different quar-

Night watch. ;

ters, and kept themselves awake by singing songs,

1841. | Journal kept while travelling in Seistan. 323

verses of which were taken up by one party from the other; and by

calling out to each other at the top of their voices, hoshear, “ be watch-

ful,” every five minutes.

You leave the valley of Jaya by a narrow pass, which runs at right

angles to it, and enter a barren plain called Baboor; as you approach

the Bobehi Barran hills, you find the whole country

covered with a beautiful grass, so that you may sup-

pose it a meadow in England. But this grass, which is called keertah,

has some property noxious to cattle, and is therefore useless. After

this, you come upon the valley of the Purrah road, which was, and

should be, one mass of cultivation; the banks of the river presented

a lively appearance of green gardens, of villages, and fields.

We now crossed through miles of ruined walls, and did not meet one

Its desolate ap- inhabitant till we were quite close to the town. When

pearance: the Candahar sirdars retired, and the present governor,

Futteh Khan, was sent to occupy the fort, a scene of desolation presented

itself to him, which I cannot describe better than in his own words :—

_ “JT went to the top of the castle, from whence there is an uninter-

| _ruptea view for miles ; through all the wide space below me, I could not

_ perceive one human being or the smoke of a single fire.” The few peo-

ple he had with him actually lived on the grapes, which were the only

things the Candaharees had not destroyed. They dried and made sugar

from them, and sent them to Baudan and other places around, getting

grain in exchange. We halted on the evening of the 21st on the banks

nf the river, about two miles from the town; the next morning Futteh

Mahomed Khan, who the evening before had been

amusing himself with the munzud bauzee at a village

‘some eight miles off, but who the moment he heard of my arrival left

his betrothed to come and meet me, rode up with a few followers, and

escorted me to a wretched mud house in the fort, which I afterwards

‘learnt was his own residence, which he had vacated for me. After in-

ducting me into my quarters he took his leave, and shortly afterwards

baw me whole maunds of delicious grapes, a mule load of melons, and

provision for four days for my party. People came in to know whether

this was sufficient, that more would be sent, &. A respectable person

was left to attend on my wants, who every half hour

brought. in a cup of tea and a kullion. In the even-

Approach Furrah.

The Governor.

Reception.

324 Journal kept while travelling in Seistan, No. 112.

ing the governor called again, accompanied by the heads of all the

Kheils around, who apologized for not having come out to meet me, as

they had not expected me so soon. I disclaimed all title to such honors,

but this they evidently considered as mere words of course. The

room was so small that it was with difficulty all my guests could

squeeze in. I had heard reports of Khyrmun Meerza having encamped

outside Subzawar, and of his having sent to Shah Pussund Khan to

desire him to get ready 60,000 khurwars of grain, as he was coming

with an army. “I have written,” said Futteh Khan to Shah Pussund to

say, ‘“ that if he does any thing of the kind he shall repent of it.” This

flourish was amusing enough to me, who knew the relative situation of

the parties. There was much talk of the Beloochee chuppaoing, —

Beloochee plunder- 40d Juma Khan, the brother of the Ex-Candahar /

Aer sirdar, was reported to have been stripped.

The many stories I heard of the boldness and strength of these

plundering bands, and the assertion of several people, who pretended to

have been well informed on the subject, that there was no grain procur-

able at Jorodine, determined me to leave eighty camels, (which I had

ya ter te brought from Herat with me for Major Todd to load —

camels brought for with grain for the use of the mission,) at Furrah. —

grain at Furrah. : ’ ; :

This measure, too, might disarm any jealousy Shah

Pussund Khan might have perceived by my bringing these camels,

which he might suppose were sent by his rival the vuzeer, and it would —

serve to counteract the prevailing notion of my being laden with ©

gold, which caused all the beggars to collect around me from far ~

and near. I was much annoyed with people rushing into my room —

with a large tray, perhaps containing one melon, or getting introduced

on the plea of business, and then presenting a pair of gloves, or some such —

trifle, and begging for shufkut, which literally means _

honor, and really money. As all the heads of Kheils —

had sent me presents of fruits, we had more grapes and melons than ~

we could have consumed for several days. I asked Futteh Khan how to ~

get rid of the nuisance, and if it was the “ custom” for travellers to

Expensive presents.

be thus taxed; he said it was all imposition, and mentioned as an —

example, that when the king of Persia rides out an order is given ~

that no one should make an offering, I of course profited by the lesson.

Beggars of this kind are sometimes very impertinent and exacting, and

1841. | Journal kept while travelling in Seistan. 325

will return the contra-donation, unless they think it sufficiently large. A

villager brought a sheep to Shah Pussund Khan’s father : ‘ Give the man

a choghu,’ said the chief to his Nazir. The Nazir took off his own cloak

and gave it. It was old andtorn. The villager looked at it, turned

it over, and putting it down at the Khan’s feet, said, “‘ Here, take your

old choghu, and give me back my sheep.”

23rd.—I called on the prince Saudut-ool-Moolk, Futteh Khan having

Prince Saudut-ool hinted to me that a present was not required. He

sa was seated in a small room in the citadel, and made

_ me sit down beside him, without any attempt at formality. He was

_ coarsely dressed, and had just the air of a Buniah. He is fat, short, and

_ jolly looking, and talked much with a loud voice, smiling all the while,

| and this good humoured personage has lately seated himself on the road

_ between Furrah and Girishk, and in company with his brother of Ghore

| amuses himself with plundering passengers. From the prince I went to

the governor, whose house was more wretched than

| my own. We walked out together to visit the pits,

where they were making saltpetre, with which the whole plain of

_ Furrah is encrusted.

The process of extracting it is simple; a platform of wood and

branches is thrown across a pit, and covered with

| earth scraped from the surface: this is wetted, and

the saltpetre drips through into a reservoir below, from which it is

ladled out into bowls, when it is boiled, and left to crystallize. The

crystals are as clear and shining as amber. Any quantity may be made

| here; but at present they only collect enough for their own consump-

tion, from some foolish idea of its being dangerous to sell it to their

neighbours, who are, or may be, enemies, chiefly from the general lan-

gour of commerce in this part of the country. When Shumsoodeen

Khan was governor of Furrah, he is said to have exported it with much

advantage to his revenues, Seistan for example affording a ready market.

Nothing but common salt having as yet been found there, a little is still

sent annually to that country from the pits. We ascended to the top of

‘the citadel, and a more melancholy prospect it would be difficult to

View from the ci- imagine; of the fort I have sent a plan to Major

ie el. Todd. The walls are of considerable thickness,

‘except in the S. W. face; the inside of the fort contains only some

Governor’s house.

Saltpetre.

;

326 Journal kept while travelling in Seistan. [No. 112.

twenty houses with domed roofs built of mud, with the exception of

perhaps three rather larger places, such as the one I lived in.

In the centre is a pond of stagnant water, which the inhabitants have

not energy enough to drain off, though it is the

Unhealthiness of i

Furrah. cause of much unhealthiness, and numbers of people

fall victims to fever and ague when the plain is

inhabited. The rest of the fort is occupied by the mounds raised for

salt-pits ; some in use, others deserted. Round two or three sides of the

fort were the ruins of the town, now containing no inhabitants, nearly —

all of them having fled to Laush. There were no Hindoos, no shops. You —

could not have purchased a rupee’s worth of grain. 5

24th.—The sirdar proposed a pic nic to a celebrated Hindoo place —

of pilgrimage, called the Bebehi (a corruption per- —

haps of Bebe) Baran, of the raining lady, in the hills

N. of the town, or and about twelve miles off. A spring from the heights

Bebehi Baran.

above is discharged upon a large table rock, projecting from the side —

of the hill, through which the water filtrates, dropping like rain for a_

space of about fifty feet. The effect is very beautiful. Onasmall level —

space just above the dripping rock, a Hindoo fakeer had stationed himself, —

and supported by numerous pilgrims, who flocked to him, had lived 4

there fourteen years. His visiters built him a very comfortable house 7

of two rooms, and outside was a clear place for bathing, a space set _

apart for his cooking, and even a little garden. The Bebehi Baran is

situated at the end of a gorge, which on the Persians raising the siege of

Herat, the Furrahees fortified against the Candaharees, who had posses-

sion of their fort. The soldiers annoyed the hermit, or perhaps the

earthen vessels for grain which are remarked round his chamber were

not filled so regularly in those troubled times—he left his retreat. |

I afterwards met him in Seistan; he was a young man still, not forty. .

He came to me, as a brother Hindoo, to beg the gift

of five rupees, to take him back again to his old —

house, where he says he intends to pass the remainder of his days. I

gave him what he wanted, and I afterwards learnt that he has once ©

more taken possession of his house on the Bebehi Baran. ;

25th.—The two nobles who had accompanied me from Jaujer, sent

Dismiss my two to say, that if I would only feed them, they would —

guests.

Hindoo Fakeer.

follow me into Seistan; there were reasons for not —

1841. ] Journal kept while travelling in Seistan. 327

| acceding to this ; one of which I may mention, that Ahmed Khan’s son

had some demand to make on Shah Pussund Khan, and he thought

_ that his being in my suite, would ensure its being granted. I therefore

declined the offer, on the plea of wishing to be as private as possible,

and not to incommode my generous hosts with a larger camp than

was necessary. I had been sending them a few sheep and grain and

fruit out of the superfluity which Futteh Khan and others had forced

upon me, and through Mahomed Taher, had intimated to them, that I

had only money sufficient for the expences of the road. _I now sent a

| parting present of food for two or three days, and consigned Ahem

in the Afghan fashion, to God.

_ Mahomed Seddie Khan, one of the persons sent with me by Yar

Mahomed Khan, had been since our arrival at his

RN ag home, a village not far from Furrah. _ I learnt to-day

by chance, that this man had a blood feud with the

: chief of Toojk, a place we have to pass on our road to Laush. I im-

mediately dispatched a letter to Mahomed Seddie, telling him that he

| must take his leave of me here, and requesting him to send me some ser-

| vant, or to come himself, for his khzllut. The Cosssid brought back a

reply, that Mahomed Seddie was coming in person to answer my letter.

(This evening we heard from a traveller of the flight of Dost Ma-

homed, and the occupation of Caubul.

| The governor called to wish me good bye, as I was to start for

Laush in the morning. I gave him some gay pieces of cloth, which I

heard would be acceptable to him, for the lady he was courting; he

‘sent me a horse worth about fifty rupees. Before he took leave, he

ordered his attendants out of the room, and‘ begged me to intercede

with Major Todd in his favour, that he may not be turned out of his

government. “TI have no heart now,” he said, “to make any improve-

ments ; for the moment I have made the appointment worth holding, that

villian Dyn Mahomed Khan, who has the ear of the vuzeer, will be

‘sent to supercede me.” Futteh Mahomed Khan is a relation of vuzeer

Yar Mahomed Khan, and is known to us as the envoy who was sent

from Herat to Teheran. He is a thin, yellow complexioned, insignificant

looking personage, with a very timid manner, indica-

tive of his character, as it was the boorj he de-

fended, upon which the Persian assault was made at

the siege of Herat. He has since enjoyed, and makes the most of a

|Character of Futteh

Khan,

328 Journal kept while travelling in Seistan. [No. 112.

reputation for bravery ; but it is said that on the day of the storm he

was actually running away, when a young Furrahi seized him by the

arm, and unconsciously making use of a famous expression, said, ‘“‘ The

enemy are not there.”

Futteh Khan is, however, a very pleasant companion ; any timidity of

manner soon wears off, and he has all the polish and address of a

Persian. His kindness and polite attentions to myself, (not to mention

the profuse hospitality, for which however the vuzeer of Herat, and not

Futteh Khan, is to be thanked,) I must confess somewhat blinded me

as to his real character, which I only discovered at Joroaine, when I

was thrown among the exiled Furrahees. They perhaps exaggerated his

demerits ; but it would appear that on his assuming the government of

Furrah, he persecuted the few inhabitants that still remained in the —

district, on the plea of their having joined the enemy, and thus con-

tributed as much as the Candaharees themselves, to the desolation of

the province.

26th.— We were hardly outside the walls of Furrah, when a letter was

brought from Shah Pussund Khan to say, that on

Letterfrom Futteh account of the danger of the road, he had sent out

Khan.

some twenty or thirty horse and foot to meet me at

his frontier, and that he had prepared a room for me in his house. We —

were catching fish with coculus indicus in the river at Barunduk,

where as the name implies, there is a water-fall, and a deep pool famous —

for its fish, when we were disturbed by a mounted party. This was the —

escort sent by Shah Pussund Khan, headed, by a person called the ©

Shaughoussee, (because he had formerly served in that capacity to some —

prince at Turrah, Thenazis, and other respectable people.) The Shau- —

ghoussee apologized for the absence of the Khan’s grandson and for

the paucity of the horsemen; the young Khan and all the horse they

could muster, having gone only a few days before to take possession of

Killah Rab. As we approached Toojk, we could have counted its very

inhabitants, for I suppose there was hardly a male who had not come

out to see the first real Feringee who had ever visited them. Vi-

kovitch they consider, what he called himself, a Cossack. We marched

Toojk. into the town in a ludicrous sort of procession ; nu-

merous old women kept throwing water at me, as

a symbol of welcome; and to keep off the evil eye, beggars burnt in-

1841. ] Journal kept while travelling in Seistan. 329

cense under my horse’s belly ; little boys with long sticks in their hands

were continually crying, ‘“‘ Remember the poor scholars,” talib ul-

ilm; and a testy fakeer walked just before me, and made my horse

jump every minute by calling out, ya huk. The custom of throwing

water I saw in no other place but in the Laush territories; it re-

sembles the presenting the “ rwdlus” of Rajpootanna. They have ano-

ther mode of welcome peculiar to Laush. When a new governor arrives,

they tie a cow to a platform, which is carried on men’s shoulders a

few miles on the road ; while the chief is coming a man, stands on the

: platfrom with a knife in his. hand, calling out “ Shall I kill, shall I

kill?” Ifthe governor says, “ Kill,” they prophecy he will be a tyrant. If

_he spares the animal, they escort him with great joy and acclamation to

| his house. The governor of Toojk, Khan Ishaukzye, named Jaun Ma-

| homed Khan, met him before we reached the town; we sat on a carpet

under a tree while the tents were pitching; all the house tops and

| branches of the trees around us being crowded with people eagerly gaz-

_ ing at us, and bursting into laughter every now and then, at the strange

| dress of myself and the sergeant. Jaun Mahomed, a singularly good-

| humoured-looking and talking person, began the conversation by saying,

that he had been a rebel for twelve years, and he evidently prided

himself no little upon it. But said he, “‘ Yar Mahomed and I are now

| fast friends, and he has just sent me two horses.”

_ He was very anxious to know, how we could govern Mussulmans.

_“For instance,” he said, “‘suppose you had taken Candahar for your-

selves, instead of Shah Shooja.” After disclaiming the possibility of such

_an event as our taking Candahar for ourselves, I endeavoured to explain,

that in India we governed Mussulmans according to their own laws,

with some limitations; and mentioned as an example the prohibition of

blood feuds, &c. ‘‘ That may be all very good,” he said,

‘‘ but I should like to see any law that would prevent

Blood feuds.

| me killing a man who had killed one of mine.” Hoping to get a litle

quiet, we retired to our tents; but the curiosity of the people could not

| be repressed; a large crowd squatted themselves around the doors, trying

| to peer through the chick to see what we were doing, and every now

‘and then some beggar would poke his head in, and whine out,

Ai berae khoda ! “ Ah for God’s sake.” Night only relieved us from this

persecution; I became rather alarmed after what Jaun Mahomed had

— ee

330 Journal kept while travelling in Seistan. [ No. 112.

said regarding blood feuds, that Mahomed Siddie, who had not yet come

in or sent his man, might, trusting to my protection join me here, and

some unpleasant fray might ensue, in which my name would be mixed

up. Sultan Khan reassured me, “ that Mahomed Siddie was much too

knowing to trust himself within the reach of his enemy; that the

quarrel was nearly extinct, and propositions for settling it by a marri-

age had been sent in; and that as it had lasted 30 years, about an equal

number of lives on each side had cooled it; they would be unwilling to

renew the affair by fresh blood ; but of course,” he added “ if they meet,

they will attack each other.” The two Douranee chiefs who had join-

ed me at Jarja were halting for a few days at Toojk, having come on

from Furrah a day or two before me. They were in great distress ; two

of their horses having been stolen, and one having died. I thought this

; a good opportunity of doing a civil thing at a cheap

a anon: rate, I therefore sent them one of the horses which

Syud Mahomed Khan had given me. It was a worthless beast, not

worth its feed ; but I heard that the gift was much appreciated. We staid

one night at Toojk, which has about one hundred and twenty houses.

The inhabitants were of the same tribe (Tylshih) as their master,

Hyderzye Ishaukzyes. There were also a few of other

ras tribes, emigrants, and half adozen chiefs, and altoge- —

ther there was an air of comfort about the place remarkable after the

general misery of the country we had been passing through. It has lately

been made over to Shah Pussund. Jaun Mahomed Khan, who had been ~

a most liberal host, insisted on riding out some miles with me. He

was accompanied by his son, a young man of about 20, and some five

or six other people, all his relations; and all well mounted on horses |

which Yar Mahomed had given the chief on his coming in. We took |

a parting pipe. I threw a choga over his shoulders, and we shook

hands.

“That we might get into Laush in good time the next morning, we

stepped on the banks of the Furrah river, where there was water in —

small pools at Kurawan Keze, about eight miles from the fort. We —

reached our ground at midnight, and after cooking a rude dinner in the

Afghan manner, on the ramrods of matchlocks, lay down to sleep. —

When I awoke in the morning, a man was sitting shivering by

my bed. To my question, ‘‘ Who are you?” he could only answer

1841.] Journal kept while travelling in Seistan. 331

‘«‘ They have killed him; they have killed him.” “Killed whom?” I said,

starting up in alarm. ‘‘ Mahomed Siddie.” As soon

as we were able to re-assure the trembling wretch

sufficiently to allow of his giving a connected account of what had

occurred, we learned that Mahomed Siddie, who was desirous of com-

ing on with me, had determined to rejoin us by making a detour to

avoid Toojk; and striking into the road a few miles below, he had

just reached the road, when he was met face to face by Jaun Mahomed’s

party returning home; He had but two more with him, his nephew and a

servant, the man who had come to me. Jaun Mahomed’s brother, the

moment he saw his enemy jumped off his horse and fired his match-

lock, but missed. Jaun Mahomed called out to let the other party alone;

but just at this moment Mahomed Siddie’s nephew fired, on which Jaun

Mahomed’s son galloping up, killed him before he could remount, with

one blow of his sword. The other two fled, and Jaun Mahomed and the

rest coming up, all dug their swords into the dead body. The last

circumstance we learnt afterwards; and such is always the custom in

similar cases. Somewhat relieved at finding that Mahomed Siddie

was not himself killed, (the servant’s fright alone having caused him to

: mention his name, ) we now consulted how to secure his servant’s safety ;

for he was clinging to me for protection, and declaring that he should be

murdered by the Ishaukzyes. ‘The Shaughoussee swore that no harm

should happen to him while he remained with me, and then the man

_ consented to accompany us as far as Laush, when he would get a

| present and khillut for his master. As we were riding along; I asked

| the Shaughoussee, ‘‘Is the feud now quenched ; do

: you want any more lives?” He answered by holding

out two fingers. Some sixteen lives have been lost in this quarrel.

| We were met at about 200 yards from the fort gate by the Khan,

pimself mounted, and his attendants on foot, for all the horsemen were

| either with me or at Killah Rab; we dismounted and joined hands, and

as every one with me had to place his hands between those of the

Khan, I thought we should never have mounted again. The room

_ selected for me was nearly at the top of the castle, and the same in

which Vikovitch had lived. It was small, not very clean, and but

poorly furnished ; but to compensate these disadvantages, it commanded

| a view of the plain below, of which we were never tired The fort

Mahomed Siddie.

| Shah Pussund Khan.

332 Journal kept while travelling in Seistan. LNo. 112.

of Jorroaine is about two miles from the rich valley, dotted with villages,

and the river running close under the walls. From the exaggerated

accounts of the Heratees, who always speak of Laush as an impregnable

place, I had expected to find it at least a strong fort. It is in fact no-

thing but a castle, and could soon be reduced by shells, or even storm-

ed, for it has one weak side.

The appearance of the fort could only be understood by a drawing,

and unfortunately my views of this and of some

other places have been, by mistake, left at Canda-

har. It will be sufficient to mention here, that as the name ‘ Laush”

implies, the fort is built on the edge of a high “ cliff,” immediately

under which flows the Furrah river; on the East face it has the

perpendicular cliff, over which are erected buildings to a height of

perhaps 400 feet; a great part of these wil], I suspect, fall down

the precipice in another year, for the water in the spring cuts below,

weakening of course the upper bank, and already several ominous

cracks may be observed. I pointed this out to the Khan, and recom-

mended his turning the stream by a bank from immediate contact with

the base of his castle; but he will doubtless forget the advice he pro-

mised to follow, till half his family are overwhelmed by the fall of

his house. The N. and W. faces are detached from the high plain

beyond them by a deep ravine ; but the S. side offers but little obstruc-

Laush.

tion to a regular army. Laush is an ancient place, though I do not

remember its name mentioned in history. The cliff on which it stands

has many caves cut in it, and there are said to be subterranean pas-

sages, to which perhaps the women of the garrison could retire in case

of its being attempted to shell the fort; but most of these passages

have neither fallen in, nor have been stopped up. In case it should be

necessary to take the place, a mine led under only a small part of

the E. cliff, would I suspect on exploding, bring down half the castle.

Laush and its territories belonged to the Vuzeer Shah Wallee ; it was

destroyed by Timoor Shah, and remained desolate till taken possession

of and rebuilt by Shah Pussund Khan, on whom it was bestowed by

Mahmood, when he returned from Teheran. The life of Shah Pussund

Khan would occupy a volume. A sketch of it will not be in appropri-

ate here, as his actions and character have frequently been misrepre-

sented. There are three principal families among the Ishaukzyes,

—_

—-:1841.] Journal kept while travelling in Setstan. 333

which will be best understood by a diagram. This diagram will

also serve, to explain much of the ensuing narative :—

Ishaukzyes have four principal divisions.

HawaZYEs. TEROZYEs. MUuUNDURZYES. IpzYEs.

Shudoonzyes. ZLadinzyes. Ahmedzyes.

: Shah Pussund Khan; Muddut Khan; Meer Af- Kohun Dil Khan;

_Ahmed Shah’s Gene- zul Khan; Dila Sar Hadgi; Selah Mahomed Khan,

ral, his family in po- Dost Mahomed Khan; Wull (vulgarly calledSauloo)

'verty at Candahar. Mahomed, present head. side of Shah Pussund

derived from Shah Ma-

homed Goolzar Khan,

governor of Feraria, at

Candahar.

| Russool Khan, with Abdool Hu- Abdool Ma- Mahomed _ Siddick

King of Persia; Ah- beeb, blindat jeet, service Khan, a child; Maho-

}med Khan, governor Laush. of Shah med Hussein,a child; a

of Killah Rab; his Shooja at mother; a daughter of

mother, a daughter Candahar. Khan Jehan Khan.

Ahmed Shah, when after the fashion of the Ghilzees he portioned

out the offices of his household among the Douranees, and made them

}

‘hereditary in particular families, assigned four appointments to the

‘Ishaukzyes : Mir Aspaha, master of the horse ; Purawal, leader of the van ;

‘Darogha of camels; and Mir Shikar, chief huntsman. The grandfather

of Shah Pussund Khan, (Rumal Khan,) was Mir Aspaha of Timoor

‘Shah, as was Ruheem Dil Khan of Shah Mahomed. Saleh Khan

followed Mahmood in his wanderings in Tartary ; but alarmed at the

murder of his clansman, Meer Alum, went over to Shah Shooja, as

related in Conolly’s Travels, vol. ii. p. 362.

334 Journal kept while travelling in Seistan. [No. Fez

Mahmood understanding, doubtless, the true motive for his deser-

tion, wrote him a letter to the following effect :—‘‘ I have made

you; if you will not remain with me, do not at least join my enemies.”

Saleh Khan on receipt of this, determined to stand neuter, and went off

to his fort at Laush.

Hadgi Feroze wishing to get Jorraine and its dependencies for him-

self, sent Dost Mahomed Khan Populzye with an army to take it, and ~

Shah Pussund, who had no stores laid in to enable him to stand a siege

gave up Jorraine, on consideration of being allowed to keep Laush.

Dost Mahomed soon after, desirous of returning to Herat, insisted on

Saleh Khan’s leaving the neighbourhood, and that Khan, who had no ©

power to refuse, went off to Kamraun, who was now governor of Can- —

dahar. The prince received him kindly, and kept him six months ; after-

wards quarrelling with his manager, (Gool Mahomed Khan Populzye, )

he gave Shah Pussund his place. In this situation he continued for nine

or ten years, and Laush and Jorraine had again come into his possession,

the garrison having ejected the governor left at the latter by Dost Ma-

homed, and given the place to the Ishaukzyes.

At the seizure of Shah Pussund Khan at Herat (Conolly, vol. ii. p. 408) | }

he led a most eventful life, till the death of Mustapha Khan (Ibid, 413 ;)

during that period he wandered from place to place perpetually and i

with much success plotting against Kamraun ; making friends at differ-

ent times with the rulers of Khaff, Toorbuk, Meshed, &c. He even nm

visited Teheran, and was well received by the king of Persia.

more than once gained and lost Jorraine, Turrah, Anardurch, vad i

Killah Rab ; but he failed to get possession of Laush. 4

He was now Kamraun’s minister at Herat; the prince gave him

Furrah and Jorraine ; but still with jealous care guarded Laush for him- —

self only. At the request, often repeated, of Saleh Khan, he consented |

to sign a paper, purporting that that fort was the Khan’s, who pretend-

ed that his reason for demanding such a document, was to save his _

» oe

Cg ee, A ee ee

honour in the eyes of his tribe.

A year had elapsed, Kamraun had forgotten the paper, when all of a |

sudden a messenger of Shah Pussund’s arrived at Laush with a letter |

to the governor from the Khan, enclosing the document sealed and

attested by the Shahzadah, and requesting the delivery of the fort, ac-

cording to the tenor of the enclosure to a person of his appointing. The

1841. | Journal kept while travelling in Seistan. 335

governor was completely taken in; the fort was given up, and Shah

Pussund immediately fled to it; turned yaghee, (rebel,) and has since

successfully resisted every effort to reduce him seven or eight times ;

and twice in person Kamraun has blockaded Jorraine and Laush. These

repeated attacks have impoverished the rich valley; but a few years of

quiet under Shah Pussund’s rule, which is very popular, will render the

district more fertile and populous than it has been since the days of

Nowsherwan. The lord of Hak, (for such is the proper name of the

district, ) is now about sixty years old; in his person he retains none of

that beauty for which he was remarkable in his younger days, and to

which, if we may believe scandal, he was indebted for the title to the

king’s favourite. He is very

lame, which was originally oc-

casioned by a bullet wound in

the thigh in the battle of Khoo-

skh-i- Nukhood, near Candahar ;

but principally from his having

been subjected to the torture of

the thanah when he was seized

at Herat. In this torture, the

victim’s foot is fastened to a

‘thick wooden pin (driven into the ewan by cords drawn as tight

‘as possible over the ankle, a wedge is then hammered into the pin,

peausing by the tightening of the string extreme suffering. It is said

‘that the ankle is broken, and that blood, (but this seems false) starts

out at the toes.

: The address of Shah Pussund is by no means prepossessing, and

there i is a considerable awkwardness and formality in his manner, which

however wears off, particularly if he has become excited in argument,

when he speaks with great earnestness, using much gesticulation.

‘Though he has been so much among Persians, and speaks Persian flu-

ently, he appeared alway to avoid talking, if possible, anything but

Pushtoo. This seems a trifle; but it is one of those trifles which has

‘contributed not a little to his popularity among his countrymen. An-

‘other now palpable cause of this popularity is, the simplicity and plain-

“ness, which is the principal feature in his character. He despises show.

336 Journal kept while travelling in Seistun. [No. 112. 7

When minister at Candahar, though lame from his wound, he would

never get into a tukhtrewan, because he said, he was no better than

any other Douranee. His dress is always plain ; sometimes coarse ; he |

has never since reaching to manhood dined but in public, and the poorest

persons share his dinner, which is usually composed of only mutton

broth and bread, but plenty of it. My Meerzas felt much flattered the —

first night of our arrival by an invitation to dine with the Khan; but

on seeing the fare spread for them, they could not taste it, and always

afterwards avoided as much as possible the honour.

This simplicity of life, as I have before observed; these unaffected —

manners ; but above all his hospitality, have gained Shah Pussund Khan, |

the heart of the Douranees. A Douranee in my presence asked an-—

other what made Futteh Khan, the vuzeer, so popular? “He was a rob-

ber, a liar, a tyrant, and addicted to abominable vices.” “One thing

more,” replied the other, “his bread, his hospitality.”

The hospitality of Shah Pussund is the theme of praise in all the

countries bordering on Herat, and what renders it

Hospitality. ; : :

the more remarkable is, that he is not esteemed rich ;_

nor can he be so, as Kamraun extorted a good deal of money from him

and his country; for the constant warfare it has been exposed to, can

have yielded but little. During my stay in his house—which circum-—

stances protracted to fifteen days—lI could not, though I more than once

urged him, with all the arguments in my power, induce him to abandon

the expensive kindness of feeding the whole of my establishment. His’

very mode of bestowing his bounty enhances the value of it. There is no

waste, no profusion, every thing is appropriate, and ample. To mea

dinner was always served up from the anduroon, and every day different

sweetmeats were sent in with the compliments of his son. ‘The’

Hindus had their grain, ghee, &c. the Mussulmans sheep,—so much

apportioned to each man; even the straw for the horses, for it was a

scarce article, and was served out by weight. Besides my party, there

were several others, who were all entertained in the same style. There

were the servants of Alladad Khan, who accompanied Vikovitch to ‘

Teheran and died there, who were conducting the ¢aboat to Candahar. 4 |

They had been robbed in Seistan, and had fled to Laush for assistance 4

and redress. There was the family of Jooma Khan, brother of the —

1841. | Journal kept while travelling in Seastan. 337

-Candahar sirdar, who had been robbed while returning from Beerjund;

“and whose family Shah Pussund sheltered, having sent out a party toe

bring them in as a friend. The son of Ahmed Khan had also ar-

rived, and an elchee from Meshed, and several others of less conse-

quence, not to speak of some lady guests, who were dependent, was evi-

dently an every day matter. It did not create the least bustle or confu-

sion. My host used always to visit me morning and evening, sitting for

about an hour, always in one position, (which like Baber’s uncles*

he never changes, ) that called the dayanu. He was generally accom-

panied by a crowd and by a pet child, whose mother—a daughter of

Khan Jehan Khan—had died a few days before I arrived. He had been

much attached to her, and frequently spoke to me of his loss. I took an

early opportunity of offering him, on the part of the envoy and minister,

a diamond ring, and a shawl, and of presenting my credentials and let-

ters from Major Todd. Shah Kamraun’s introduction I thought might

as well be in my desk, nor did I through my journey find it politic to

present any of those I had received from him or‘from Yar Mahomed Khan.

Saleh Khan at once acceded to my request of procuring grain for

Major Todd, and in a few days the camels were brought from Furrah ;

and with some more hired ones were sent to Herat, loaded with

wheat and barley, which was however procured with much difficulty,

and had to be scraped together by seers at a time. In a (acknow-

ledged) letter to Major Todd, I have detailed all the conversations I

held with the Khan on political matters, and the earnestness with

which he expressed his good will-towards the Shah of Cabul, and the

English government, and explained the necessity which had forced

him to have recourse to the alliance of Persia. I need here, therefore,

say no more on this subject, and will again continue my interrupted

Journal.

August 30th.—The Khan this morning brought in a small bag, and

told me he had a favour to ask of me. He had been over-looking the

property left by his wife above mentioned, that he might lock up any

thing of value for the after-use of her son, and had

Snake stone. ‘ 4 ‘

discovered, he said, a bag of precious stones. ‘‘ She

got them, poor thing, probably after some chuppao: what the greater

* See Baber’s Memoirs, p. 20.

338 Journal kept while travelling in Seistan. [No. 112.

number are I donot know ;” added he, “but one of them is I am con-

vinced a puzur, preserver from stings, or snake-stone ; now just tell me

what they are all worth?” The bag on being opened, was found to

contain nothing but a parcel of agates, cut into different shapes, and

what evidently once formed the stock of some itinerant seal-cutter.

He had been so long opening the strings of the bag, that my curiosity

had been warmed, and on perceiving the contents, I perhaps rather too

bluntly exclaimed, that they were not worth a rupee. Saleh Khan

seemed much disappointed, and only half-convinced ; he carefully put

the stones into the bag again one by one, only reserving one red one, the

puzur ; “And this ?” said, he, holding it out (‘“ for God’s sake” whisper-

ed Mahomed Tuher, “say it is something curious;”) but I thought

it wisest to speak truth, and told him, that snake-stones were now

found to be mere fallacies. He replied, “ That is all nonsene; that the

puzur cures snake bites is a well attested fact. It was found in the belly

of a deer, and why should it be there if it was of no use? Besides you

can easily see if this is a puzur or not, for if it is the real stone it will

sweat on being put into the sun.” A plate was actuallysent for, and the

agate placed in it, and exposed to the sun, and the Khan, though soon ~

doubtful of this identical stone being the puzur, believes as firmly as

ever in the real one. He now put into my hands a small box, which I

found contained the watch which had been sent tohim by Mr. Macnaghten

three months before. “I would not open this,” he said, ‘ though they were

very curious up there” (pointing to the Zenana, which is on the highest

part of the castle,) “to see what was in it, for fear of spoiling it, and asI

knew you were coming”. He was much pleased when he had learned

to open and wind it up; the last of which he would, all I could say, do

every half hour, and then send the watch to me, saying it would not wind.

The ignorance displayed on this occasion by Shah Pussund Khan at

first surprized me. I had expected from his intercourse with Persians,

that he would have been better informed on European matters than his

countrymen ; but the little of our science he has picked up in his travels,

half-learnt and half-understood, has only served to confuse, and not to

improve.

He thought (and it is a popular belief in Khorassan,) that all the

Russian gold money was found ready coined every Christmas-day at

the bottom of a well, which is previously filled with baser metal. Some-

1841.] Journal kept while travelling in Seistan. 339

body having tried to make him understand the extraction of sugar from

beet root, he has impressed his whole neighbourhood with the notion,

‘that Russian sugar, which they always see in loaves, grows in its pri-

-meval shape like a carrot. One of my most acceptable visitors was

the blind son of my host. He is not yet thirty, and has been blind

‘some 12 or 13 years; one eye has been entirely destroyed by the lancet

| of some Candahar practitioners; from the other he can see a little,

and it might I think be cured by couching. I wish indeed to bring him

with me to Caubul, that some of our occulists might look at his eyes; but

having thought of trying to cross the Ghore mountains, I feared his

| helplessness in such a region, and only pressed him therefore to go at

once to Herat and take the advice of the doctors there. Like the most

educated blind persons, he has a mild placid address, and a very reten-

tive memory, and it was from him that I learnt the greater part of his

father’s history. He asked me to dinner, and the Khan, for once in his

life, consented to be of the party. The host on this occasion would not

sit down with us, but stood at the door, superintending the relays of

‘dishes till we had all finished.

I mentioned to Shah Pussund my desire of paying my respects to

the governor of Jorraine ; he evidently was unwilling that I should go

! there, but did not well know how to put me off. He sent one or two

persons privately to persuade me that the visit would look odd; that

Goolzar Khan was a mere cypher, and of course there was a ready

answer to such arguments. I have a letter to present, and must go.

‘He was, I believe, fearful lest old Goolzar Khan, who is not on very

good terms with his nephew, and who had all the garrulity of age,

might speak to his disadvantage, or perhaps let out things he might not

\wish me to know. At last, however, I set out. I was met as usual by

a large crowd, and by an istikbal of three or four of the old man’s sons,

and Goolzar Khan himself came down from the fort

on foot to receive me, though he cannot walk with-

Jorraine.

‘out difficulty. He evidently was delighted to see me his guest; he

began to fear that I should pass him by, and his honour was concerned

in the matter. Somebody had also told him, that I would not make

myself understood in Persian; but when he found that I enjoyed his

stories of the old times, he told them with all the pleasure one receives

from finding a new auditor to an old tale. He is a fine old gentle-

340 Journal kept while travelling in Seistan. [No. 112.7

man, of about eighty, and his whole life has been a series of adven-

tures. He was very funny and amusing: “There, bring the Sahiba —

kullion. I suppose you smoke well. In my younger days not one of us —

smoked, but those Persians have infected us ; very well, and how

is my friend the vuzeer? May his house be blasted! Look at my feet,

this is his doing.” He held up his feet, of which all the toes had grown ~

as it were into one. A very few years ago, Yar Mahomed Khan wrote

to him addressing him as his father, as the whole hope of the Douranees,

and sending him a Koran in pledge of his sincerity, and pressed him to ©

come to Herat, where he should be treated with every distinction. —

The old Khan trusted him and went; he was seized and brought before —

Jorraine, where they beat the soles of his feet to a jelly with sticks, to

make him write to his son to give up the fort.

I spent a very agreeable day, and returned in the afternoon to Laush.

Jorraine is still a virgin fort, and could always, if well defended, keep

out any Asiatic force. The walls, which may be about 200 yards in

length, are very thick and high. The balls of the Heratees made hardly

any impression on them. It has but one gateway, which is on the

north face, and would be difficult to be forced. The base of the fort ~

is elevated above the surrounding plain. Its weakest point is, that it |

is surrounded on all sides by buildings, so that it can be securely

approached. The few measurements we were able to get by stealth, are :

mentioned in the Military Memoir. There is a dry ditch, but it is now

half filled up. It was, when we were there, the most populous place I ~

had seen since Candahar. All the Furrahees were settled round the

walls in huts or black tents; their tlocks were feeding in the plain; }

their cows had been sent off to the Humoon. There was hardly a yard

of ground within the fort not covered with buildings. I do not —

exactly understand the relative situation of the governor of this fort —

and of Shah Pussund Khan. The latter is the real head ; but he seems _

to interfere little with the affairs of the fort, and when Goolzar Khan

dies, it is an understood thing that his son is to succeed to the lands

immediately belonging to the fort, which yields only some 80 hkhur- |

wars. Shah Pussund has three parts and Goolzar two. |

341

! Memoir on the Coal found at Kotah, &c. with a Note on the Anthra-

cite of Duntimnapilly, (H. H. the Nizam’s Dominions. )—By

W. Waker, Esa. 24th April, 184.

Nortez.---In submitting the accompanying Memoir, I have purposely ab-

stained from giving any opinion either as to the quality of the Coal, the

_ practicability of mining, or the likelihood of a large supply of the mineral

_ being procurable at Kotah.

Destitute at this remote place of all means of forming any estimate on a

| subject on which I must in a certain degree be one-sided and prejudiced, I

leave to others the decision of the intrinsic worth of the article, and both

the other points. I refer to the practical engineer and miner, who alone,

_after survey, &c. are capable of forming a correct judgment.

_ Yet, I may be permitted to give it as my opinion, that the river merely

touches the edge of the Coal basin, and to this I am led by the fact of no

-carboniferous limestone appearing on the other side, or on any of the

| shallows to the right: the dip too of the stratum to the N. E. would appear

‘to be favorable to boring on the left bank. The alluvion there, as noticed

in the Memoir, is about forty-five feet deep, and is a loose soil containing

few pebbles. I may also observe as favorable to mining operations, that

the general complaint of the inhabitants along the river is the great

depth they are obliged to go before water is reached ; this is particularly

the case in the fort of Seronge, five miles below Kotah. On account of

this difficulty of obtaining well water, the inhabitants are compelled to

use that of the river, much against their inclination ; as at certain seasons

it is deemed by them very unwholesome.

At Madhapore, there were brought to me some minerals from the

bed of the Godavery at that place, which it required little discrimi-

nation to decide were of the nature of slate coal. Upon inquiry I

found, that after the monsoon at the Dassara festival, persons employ-

ed themselves in gathering these minerals to be vended as medicines ;

and more particularly as charms to keep off the all-dreaded Evil eye,

for which purpose they were burnt, incantations being said over them

while inflamed. Their Tellugoo name is assoorpoory, and it is believed

by some of the natives, that they were the weapons with which the

2uU

342 Coal found at Kotah. [ No. 112.

gods contended ; while other maintained the opinions, that they annu-

ally grew and were thrown off the river’s bed, or sprung like the Cythe-

rean goddess from the water foam; but all agreed that it was: the

Pundeetah river that supplied them. I lost no time in proceeding to

the Sungum of the rivers Godavery and Pundeetah, and upon receiv-

ing, what I conceived from specimens shewn me, correct intelligence

of their origin, I ascended the river to a place called Kotah, a small

Goand village on its banks, about ten miles from the Sungum, and

twenty miles N. E. of Chinnore; a space of about eighty yards in

length, and thirty in breadth was pointed out at the edge of the left

bank of the river, the alluvial covering of which could not be much

under forty-five feet, and this I was told was the original seat of the

coal. Upon examination, I found that limestone, more or less argil-

laceous, occupied this space ; the upper strata were completely dislocated,

and deranged by the force of the current ; the inferior, however, appear-

ed more compact and hard, and as far as could be ascertained, dipped

to the N. E. at a low angle. Seeing that the water must have com-

pletely denuded these limestones of any shale or coal that may ever

have accompanied them, I thought of searching a little higher up in

the bed of the river, and observing a small rock of the same argilla-

ceous limestone just above the water, search was made there, when

coal along with its accompanying shale and bituminous shale was bro-

ken off from the sides of the rock: this left no doubt as to the existence

and position of a coal measure. The rock formation in which it is to

be supposed this coal measure exists, is that where the mineral is usu-

ally found all over the world, and in India without any exception. Ac- —

cording to the report of the Calcutta Coal Committee, the depth of the

alluvium, and the circumstance of the outcrop being in the river’s bed,

precluded all possibility of ascertaining the relative position of the —

several strata ; but as sandstone is found on all sides, and towards the

north at the short distance of two or three hundred yards, it is more

than probable that here there is no deviation from the arrangement of

rock commonly found to exist in such cases. As to the sandstone

itself, I cannot give a better description than in the words of the late

Dr. Voysey, who travelled over a great part of this country, and must

have been perfectly familiar with the sandstone formation of the Go-

davery :—

1841.) Coal found at Kotah. 343

*« The sandstone varies considerably in composition and colour. Its

variations however, occur principally in the neighbourhood of its junc-

_ tion with the other rocks. Its most common cement is lithomarge,

which is also found in it in nests and beds of various sizes, and of

colour both white and reddish white ;” and he might have added, yellow.

But I am aware any description I can give of the locality and

of the accompanying strata, will be deemed deficient by the geologist,

without specimens illustrative of both. I therefore proceed to give a

brief description of those sent.

Box No. 1.—Contains specimens of shale, more or less bituminous,

which were broken off the rock along with the coal.

Box No. 2.—Contains specimens of shale found in the same situation.

Box No. 3.—Contains specimens of the argillaceous limestone, com-

posing the dislocated and disturbed strata formerly

described. Some of these blocks are from a foot toa

foot and a half in thickness, with a surface twenty to

thirty square feet.

Box No. 4.—Contains specimens broken off from the compact and hard

limestone, that has resisted displacement by the current.

One of these will be observed to be water-worn.

Box No. 5.—Contains specimens of sandstone in the vicinity of the

coal measure.

Box No. 6.—Contains specimens from a neighbouring hill.

The river at Kotah is one hundred and fifty yards wide, is propor-

tionably deep, and is always turbid. It contains, at this season at least,

more water than the Godavery. The country around is jungly ; Kotah

itself is the first Goand village on that side of the Chinnore Sircar, and

is a miserable little place. I sent a party several miles up the river to

discover, if possible, any sign of another coal deposit ; but they returned

without a mineral of any description. About eight miles up the river,

among the hills at the village of Yenkatapore, there is found brown

clay iron ore among the sandstone. I did not hear of this until I had

reached Chinnore, and an opportunity was thus denied me of visiting

the locality. I send specimens procured from the place in box No. 7.

| This ore was formerly smelted ; but the works have been abandoned ;

the natives give a good character of the iron produced. The specific

gravity is above 3.

344 Note on Anthracite. [No. 112.

Note on the Anthracite that formed the subject of my Letter of the

28th ultimo.

An intelligent Mootsuddy, with a couple of peons, were despatched

to the Jungaum purgannah, where the village of Duntimnapilly is situ-

ated, the nearest to the spot where the anthracite was said to be procured.

On arriving at Chinnore, he proceeded in a north-westerly direction by

Tandoor and Jungaum to Duntimnapilly, which is distant twenty

miles from the last mentioned town.* The country between Jungaum

and Duntimnapilly is described as particularly wild, with Goands for

inhabitants. According to his account, the bed of anthracite is situated

on the bank of a nullah among hills, (I regret that not having a large

map I can indicate the situation no better,) that it is three feet at its

greatest breadth, and that it extends upwards of two hundred feet in

length. I give these numbers with some confidence in their being

accurate, as he brought a piece of bamboo with him by which the

stratum was measured.

Box No. 8.—Contains a carbonaceous sandstone, through which the

anthracite was said to pass into the micaceous sandstone,

both above and below. A specimen of the latter is in

Box No. 9.—I send also further specimens of the coal

itself. The rock above the mineral was said to be fif-

teen feet in thickness. It may be added, that this coal

is esteemed of great value in the United States, where

seven hundred and fifty thousand bushels were sent

to Philadelphia alone in one year, (Ure’s Dictionary.)

It is there burned in peculiar grates adapted toits diffi-

cult combustion. It is used also in South Wales for

smelting iron.

CurinnorE, 24th April, 1841.

* Jungaum is 65 miles to the West of Chinnore.

Note—I have used the general term sandstone, although there can be

no doubt from its position, known connexion, extent, &c. that it is the old

red sandstone; for the same reason, to avoid all theoretical views, I have

designated limestone by its mineralogical character. It would have been

easy to have given more learned terms, but my chief object—perspicuity-

might have been compromised by having done so.

—

345

Extract from Proceedings of the Numismatic Society of London, 1837-

1838, on the comparative status of circulating media at different

periods, under the Bactrian and Indo- Scythian Kings.

The number of coins in the different metals, quoted for each reign

by Mionnet, are affixed in the corrected series, together with that

of those given by Professor Wilson from the Masson Collection, in the

three annexed plates. Of the former, the total number is 166, and of

the latter, 35 ; which, aided by Professor Wilson’s remarks, are enough

for general conclusions regarding the circulating media of the several

periods, and thus far elucidating the satistics of this portion of history.

It will be evident that, under the Greek line in Bactria and India,

silver and copper formed the commercial medium by which the treasury

was replenished. A single gold coin, and another of potin, are the

only exceptions to this remark in a series of 105.

Then follow ninety-six coins of the barbarous successors of the

Greeks ; displaying a remarkable decrease of silver, and nearly as

notable an increase of gold. The whole are distributed in the following

proportions :

Gold , Silver pore Potin

—

—_—_——

Greco-Bactrian kings, to Eucratidas I. in-

clusively. s.c. 255—125. Monoling. 1 26 5

Greeco-Indian kings, from Eucratidas II.

to Hermeus. s.c. 125—0. Bilingual. ne 14 34 1

1 40 39 1

Greco-Indian kings of the collateral line,

from Heliocles to Mayes. s.c. 125—

em UOO. Meiline val. ....0assscsssceseeseone ee 9 15

1 49 54 1

Indo-Scythian kings, who followed the

line of Eucratidas II. a. pv. O—125. Bi. 7 sis 35

Barbarous princes, who appear to have

followed the collateral Greek line. a. p. |

100—225. Mostly Bilingual ............... Bon ste oy |

Indo-Parthian kings, who probably follow-

ed the Indo-Scythians, and gave place

to the Sassanians. a.p. 125—225. Bi. Lee 6 41 2

Goldasn.: 8 55 135 3

Silver...... Bg

Copper ... 135

Potin?.s.-: 3

346 Numismatic Society of London. [ No. 112.

By this statement it would appear, that the proportion of silver (the

standard medium of Asiatic commerce in the age of Bactrian independ-

ence, as at present) materially diminished under the Greco-Indians,

until a substitution of potin, probably to make up the deficiency of

the former, appears in the coinage of Hermeeus, the last of the Greek

Soters; while the silver bears scarcely any proportion to the copper

under the Indo-Scythians and Indo-Parthians, and, at first, altogether

disappears ; whereas, the potin (which was used in great extent in the con-

temporary coinage of Parthia), is continued: and this may account for

the silver drachms of Menander and Apollodotus being then in circulation.

The deficiency of silver seems, however, to have been compensated

by an extensive issue of gold, under the first Indo-Scythic princes; of

which there are, likewise, many fine unpublished examples in the col-

lection of the East India Company.

The conclusion seems forced on us, that the progressive decrease of

silver under the Greek rulers, indicates a decrease in commercial pros-

perity, arising from the Scythian occupation, first of Bactria, and after-

wards of Bactrian-India ; while this appears to be contradicted by the

gold issue of the conquerors.

But, as the latter have left no known remains of a coinage anterior

to their occupation of Bactrian-India, we may infer, first, that the

mintage of the line of Euthydemus continued in circulation under the

Bactro-Scythians, as did that of the line of Menander under the Indo-

Scythians ; and, secondly, that plunder (of the temples? in connexion

with the introduction of the Parthian worship, as above), rather than ©

commerce, was the source of the sudden riches evinced by the mintage

of the latter.

This view will, besides, afford an additional and weighty reason for ~

referring the issuers of the gold coinage—the probable invaders and ~

plunderers of the Greek provinces—to the head of the dynasty, as the f

immediate successors of the line of Menander; to which position they :

are equally referred by their imitations of the mintage of Hermeus,

found with the coins of that prince, and by the usurped title of 2wrno.

In agreement with the above, the Indo-Scythic issue would appear

greatly to have degenerated under the latter princes of the dynasty,

when their exhausted dominions probably no longer afforded materials

for an issue in the precious metals.

= Se ee

= t2.> all

——

ee ae te

1841. | Numismatic Society of London. 347

The poor mintage of the Indo-Parthians might have either been a

continuation of the latter, or of that of the later Greek princes. It

presents no sudden alteration of currency, like that just alluded to;

and, in either case, has the character of a peaceful revolution, or

change of dynasty. But as we cannot doubt that the paramount

Greek domination in India, as well as in Bactria, was annihilated by

conquest, it seems to follow that the change in question has no con-

nexion with that revolution, but was a natural one, from a Scythian to

a Parthian dynasty, as inferred in a former note. Such, at least is the

conclusion forced on us by the present data, which, we may hope

that the continued researches of Professor Wilson, with whose invita-

tion to inquiry the present analysis is an imperfect attempt at com-

pliance, will either confirm or correct. That there were Parthian

as well as Scythian rulers in India in the Roman age, is evident

from the names preserved by contemporary writers (see Table I.)

They are not those of the Indo-Parthians of the coins, and may have

preceded them.

JOURNAL

OF THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY.

Report on the Island of Chedooba.—By Epwarp P. Hausteap, Esa.

Commander of her Majesty's Sloop ‘ Childers.’

Division. 1. General Appearance, History, and Division,...... Page

. 2. Population, Revenue, Poltce,.........cceee weaee 5

3. Soil and Productions, cultivated and natural ; Waste

TONS § 0 oie o's EG ne Be oe Rear ra Mate Lalas ois els ”

RE PO TOL CR ST Se ee Lin Sas Mae aie © eas woke Bedelia bes ,,

5. Manners and Customs, Education, Language, and

CCU COM dey... Nie: cdueter teste oldie). ozebe Btn hedohcusciias<]9 oie 39

Ore GLO SY, 55 0:52:00 3's BEES eciOEEE NM Bais oye teeta er Sieersioun ass

[For much of the information under the head of History, Police, Revenue, Manners

and Customs, I have been indebted to the kindness, and long residence in the country

of Captain D, Williams, Senior Assistant Commissioner at Ramree. }

Diviston I.

General Appearance, History and Division.

The Island of Chedooba measures 154 miles in length, viz. from 18°

40’ to 18° 55’ 30” N. Latitude, and 17 miles in width, viz. from 93° 30’ to

93° 47’ KE. Longitude, and shews on the map as a square the S. W.

angle of which has been reduced. With its dependency of Flat Island on

the South Coast, it covers an area of about 200 square miles. Its general

appearance and character is that of a fertile well wooded Island of mo-

derate height, and irregular outline. A band of level plain, but little

raised above the sea, extends around its coasts, of far greater width on

the East than on the West; within this lies, irregular, low, undulating

No. 113. New Senties, No. 26. 2X

350 Report on the Island of Chedooba. [No. 113.

hills, varying in height from 50 to 500 feet, enclosing several higher

detached mounds of steep well wooded sides, the loftiest of which, near

the south part of the Island, rises nearly 1,400 feet.

The view from the top of these higher summits, presents, immediately

below a scattered irregular mass of hills, confined principally to the west-

ern part of the Island, covered with jungle, interspersed with grass plains

of more or less extent. To the Eastward a broad flat plain intersected

with patches of jungle; and surrounding all, lie the cultivated rice

fields with the different villages on their verge nearest the sea, the coast

of which to the Westward is every where strewed with broken and de-

tached masses of rock jutting far out.

The History of this Island is involved in all the obscurity which at

present surrounds that of the neighbouring Continent. Under the name

of Inaon it constituted in the time of the Mug Rajahs, one of four

divisions of a province known collectively with the other three, Arracan,

Ramree, and Sandoway by the name of ‘ Preegree.’

The head authority in each division was then called ‘ Jah,’ and was

nominated every three years, to preventany attempt at independence of

the supreme power by the Rajah of the Province, a matter not difficult

in time of oppression, confusion, and general disorder.

On the conquest of the Province by the Burmese in 1784. its divisions

were still retained, but their names, as well as that of the collective

Province were all changed. The latter took the name of ‘ Lemroo,’ in-

stead of ‘ Preegree,’ while the name of Chedooba itself was changed

from Juaon to ‘ Mekawuddee,’ and its revenue assigned to the support of

the King’s eldest sister, condemned to perpetual celibacy, as being unable

to obtain a helpmate for her.

The alteration in the names of the Province and its divisions wags

acompanied by a change in those of the authorities. The provincial Go-

vernor was called ‘ Lemroowrain’ or Governor of four countries, a title

still given to our Commissioner, while ‘ Juoroowan’ took the place of

‘ Jah,’ as designating the head of each division, and is now applied by the

inhabitants to the assistant commissioners.

The division of the Districts into Pergunnahs was also left undisturbed

by the Burmese, and the head man of each, under the Mug Raj continued

to be called ‘ Soogree.’

Of these Pergunnahs or circles with their Soogerees, Chedooba is di-

vided into seven, viz: Kamman, Krae-rone, Inrooma, Ineubreng, Kyouk-

tan, Tang-roa, and Ree-yueng, the latter its dependency of Flat Island,

on its southern coast.

1841.] Report on the Island of Chedooba. 301

Of these circles, Kammaa and Tang-roa, which divide the whole western,

southern, and part of the northern portions of the Islands, are the most

extensive, but least populous, Kyouktan the smallest in extent. The

other three the most productive and populous, and Ree-qyueng the best

cultivated.

Division II.

Population— Revenue— Police.

The population of Chedooba may perhaps, comparatively with the

neighbouring countries, be looked on as large, by the census of 1839-40

amounting to 8,534, and when it is considered that this population is

confined to the strip of cultivated land surrounding the Island, at least

that portion of the Island will be esteemed to havea fair share of inha-

bitants. No great increase from census to census is at present observed,

but as I was informed that formerly the Island possessed a far denser

population, evidence of which was afforded in the amount of land now

waste, which had formerly been cultivated. I have no doubt that the

effect of its present state of comfort and peace must soon develope itself

ina large increase of inhabitants, who I was informed by one party were

so numerous before the Burmese invasion that famine was sometimes the

consequence of the inability of the Islands tosupport them, a statement

I think not to be entirely depended on. Asthere is but little influx or

efflux of strangers, the census from year to year, if correctly taken,

presents the changes occurring among the actual Islanders. But from

what I saw, and from a portion of the revenue being derived from a poll

tax, l incline to think it is greater than the returns shew.

With exception of a very small community of Burmahs lately estab-

lished on one of the eastern villages the whole population is \'ug. Their

account of themselves is that they are descendants of parties who

originally used to cross tothe Island from the mainland and Ramree to

cut wood, and who eventually and slowly settled on it.

For sometime subsequent to the English possession of the country,

considerable complication prevailed in the district, and partially in

Chedooba owing to the mutual ignorance of the governors and governed,

The mistaken Revenue system introduced in 1827 and 1828, have been

replaced by an equitable and judicions taxation: its present result is

content, happiness,and peace, its future in all probability an increase in all

these, in addition to opulence and prosperity. The revenue is raised from

352 Report on the Islund of Chedooba. [No. 113.

the produce of the land, and from a light poll tax. There are no

difficulties found in its collection, nor oppression resorted to; about 25

‘per cent. is absorbed by the payment of the collectors, the ordinary

native authorities. The Soogree of each circle receives 20 per cent. on

his collection, the Ruagon or head villager, 4 per cent., and the Rua-

charee or Village clerk, assistant to the Ruagon,1 percent. These are

also exempted from all taxes.

Besides the above, there are two or more officers in each village called

Leedo-gongs, or heads of men, whose negative payment consists in ex-

emption from taxation.

There is a native Police taken from among the people. Their duty

consists in maintaining peace and quiet among the villagers, for which

purpose some shady tree or bamboo clump is selected in the centre

of each village, supplied with a bench and sort of small hut, where day

and night, the Leedo-gong sleeps his watch. In fact in Chedooba his

office is a sinecure, theft or plunder are not known, the men are too

good humoured to quarrel, and I was told that the only call ever made

on him, was one only occasionally to settle the few little amiable dif-

ferences sometimes occurring among the ladies of his jurisdiction.

At the Town of Chedooba there is a small Sepoy Police, their business

is tokeep up communication with Ramree the provincial capital, and

act as letter-men in the conveyance of orders, from the assistant com-

missioner there, to the different Soogrees.

I subjoin the official Statistics of Chedooba, for 1839-40 or Mug

era 1202.—

is 2 $ = >s

> PoruLaTIon. ee Are |e ae aS

= oe (83/51 888

Names of Circles. | ® 3 ji es ah Sais 8

Se S S2. | 180) seule

hy iia S ¢ | € | §= | F5] oR] oss

2.8 S 3 S Es | Se |] sO1 SES

eS ee ee eS ee eee

Rs. | Doons

Maoun,,. cesses] 5 541 | 469 | 446] 404 | 3,243] 520] 545 160

Moubreng, +++++++-] 7 531 | 461] 417 | 377 | 4,033] 675 | 208 226

Kreroo, .+ esss++-| 4 | 361 | 315] 245 | 2451 1,892] 547] 187 84

Kyoukiam,++.+---.| 4 | 995 | 276] 2781 22212102] 407] 2) 104

Requin, . seeeee-| 2 124} 120] 106] 110] 1,219] 659 : 75

Joungroa, ssccses. 3 418 | 353] 317 |] 285 | 2,347; 794 13 115

Kama, . . 20%. -] (3 240 | 209] 190] 179 | 1,429]. 287] 59 76

Totaly 2 0h 2 2,510 | 2,203 |1,999 | 1,822 |16,269 | 3,889 | 1,133 844

Total GE Boule OO 7 Te Tom TT as

otal of Souls, 8,535

pcceeneeneeneteteneeininsientemmnentntessnee eeeees

avy

gee oe a

ss -<

1841. ] Report on the Island of Chedooba. 303

Diviston III.

Soil and Productions, cultivated and natural,—Waste Lands.

Soil and Produce of Cultivated Lands.—The general character of the

soil of Cheedooba, is that of a light greyish coloured clay, mixed more

or less with vegetable mould and on the low eastern parts of the Island,

this admixture again modified with a large proportion of fine sand.

The cultivated lands do not generally extend quite to the present beach

of the Island; between them and it there exists, throughout its circum-

ference a slip of land varying from 3 or 4 miles on the eastern parts of the

Island, to sometimes less than a furlong on the western, which about

90 years since was upraised from the sea during our earthquakes.

This new land is not yet in general cultivation. On the east-north,

and north-west it is so in part; on the west it is so thickly strewn over

with stones as to make it probable it never will be. Throughout the cir-

cumference of the Island, the old beach line which is distinctly trace,

able, forms the interior limits of the upraised lands. On the eastern

parts of the Island, where the soil is sandy, a difference between the older

and newer is scarce traceable. But on the western and northern, the purer

quality of the clay in the new lands distinctly marks off their soil from

that of the older.

Throughout the soils of Chedooba is a large admixture of stones, with

exception of those of the sandy plains eastward. They are generally

small angular fragments of a soft greenish sand stone, and present no

obstacle to cultivation, (except where large and numerous, as noticed

above) the effectsof exposure to climate evidently breaking them down

into rapid composition with the soil

Large quantities of Coral and Juadreepore are distributed over all the

upraised lands. The clayey nature of the soils makes them very

tenacious of the rains, for which reason they are well adapted for the

construction of tanks, either for irrigation or for the supply of the

inhabitants. No water for the former purpose is at present required,

for the latter, sufficient is found during the dry season, in the holes

of the aullahs, and other natural reservoirs, and in the few springs

which exist on the Island. The clay base of the Chedooba soils

contributes much to endue them witha great permanence of productions,

They arenot manured for cultivation though under yearly tillage, no,

is a change of produce, as arelief tothe soil, any part of the system of agri_

culture pursued, nor is the plan of exhausting the soil, and then allowing

354 Report on the Island of Chedooba. [No. 113.

it to be fallow for a season, in practice, year by year the same land yields its

single crop in due season; the amount which is exacted from it, and to

which it is fully equal. Lands in fallow are observable, sometimes exten-

tively ; but on enquiry the account always given of them was either that

they had fallen out of cultivation from decrease of population, consequent

on long continued political disturbance, or that they were lands cultivated

for a season by settlers, who had after a time returned to the commu-

nities whence they had issued.

From natural causes connected with the character of the soil, and from

a practice in use among the people, all the cultivated lands are strictly

speaking subjected to an annual process if not of manuring, yet of an

addition into the body of the soil of that which must greatly tend to the

same effect. The heat of the dry season covers the face of the land with

a tissue of deep cracks, in these the decay of leaves, grass, &c. during that

geason, makes a considerable deposit of vegetable matter.

It is also customary with the natives to burn their paddy stubble, and

grass lands immediately previous to the monsoon, whose first rains be-

fore closing the fissures, wash into them the ashes thus formed—with

regard to the grasslands they are burnt expressly with the view of im-

proving the future crop, andthe same benefit is doubtless effected tothe

rice land by the practice.

Its effect is particularly beneficial to the upraised plains, by assisting

greatly the decomposition and dispersion of the calcareous matter upon

their surface, and which must contribute largely to bring them into a

cultivable state. To illustrate the gradual effect produced by the above

means on these particular lands; it was stated tome by aneye witness

that the upraised plain of the N. W. part of the Island was 15 years in

acquiring its first clothing of grass, not only is it now covered deeply by

that production, but many parts have for years yielded crops of rice, and

all might doso. Jungle also is fast forming over it. Some parts of the

low lands, both new and old, presented a sort of peat soil, still moist in the

middle ofthe dry season, and affording luxuriant and green pasture.

These grassy patches were most observable in the Krae-rone circle,

which divides, on the north face of the Island, the more clayey soils of

the west, from the more sandy ones of the east.

Rice is the staple produce of Chedooba, It is grown on all the level

lands which form a land of more or less width around the Island, to

which at present all cultivation with slight exception is limited. The

yearly amount of this necessary produce varies, more through the fitfulness

of temper of the people, than from any irregularity of the seasons. The

lng na a Ee BN ge mS en ae ae ee

=. a

1841.] Report on the Island of Chedooba. 309

revenue claims must be defrayed with the proceeds of a portion, with

another portion the family is to be sustained, the overplus purchases the

necessaries of the family, and with no people is the list of these a smaller

one.

From the more populous Eastern circles of Krae-rone, Inrooma, and

Jueng-breng, a large quantity of rice is annually exported, partly in na-

tive vessels, which come for it from Akyab, and from the western parts

of the Bay of Bengal, and partly in native boats, which come for it from

Ramree, Sandoway, Gara, and sometimes from Bassein. The vessels

from the westward, and the boats from the eastward generally purchase

on their own account, the former bartering some few country goods. It

is common for native merchants, or their agents to visit the Island from

Akyab, or Chittagong at the season of gathering in the crop, and

purchase it up from the different villages, giving a certain amount of

earnest money, when it is subsequently collected at a convenient spot

for shipment, and vessels sent to take it off. I was very anxiously en-

quired of by two parties, one from Akyab, the other from Ramree, thus

engaged, as to the prices of the grain’s market at Singapore, whither

both were bound with their venture, A small barter traffic with rice is

also carried on by the Islanders with their neighbours of Ramree mainly

for fowls.

The western and less populous villages of the Island are also annually

visited to see if they have grain topart with, a circumstance depending

entirely on the above peculiar temperament of the people.

But independently of the superior advantage to the eastern inhabi-

tants afforded them for a larger rice produce, in the greater extent of

their plains, they enjoy also the great benefit of having those plains

intersected by deep creeks, generally with a bar at the mouth re-

quiring the assistance of the tide to pass over, but of considerable

depth within, where country boats of the largest size, may in perfect

security take in their cargo, in the manner pleasing to both parties,

quite at leisure. For large vessels also, especially native ones, the

anchorage in the straits is safer than that on the western coast, on

which although there is anchorage every where, practicable and safe, in

the fine season, for such purposes, yet the want of creeks wherein to

keep them safe in the monsoon, at present prevents the inhabitants on this

part from having any boats for shipment of cargo, which must therefore

be taken off at the risk of the purchasers in their own. The rice of Che-

dooba is considered of very fine quality ; a considerable quantity was

purchased for the use of the crew of the ‘Childers,’ and the native

356 Report on the Island of Chedooba. [No. 113.

boats employed with her; the price given was I rupee for a basket anda

half or 90 lbs., this was cleaned ; grain paddy was at a much cheaper rate.

Both with regard to soil and produce, what has been hitherto stated

of Chedooba stands also true, of Ree-queng or Flat Island, its dependency,

and close to its southern shore,

The adaptation of the lands of Chedooda to the culture of rice, over

those parts where it is now grown, is so clearly shewn by the quantity

and quality produced, that it would seem hardly to warrant any expecta-

tion of benefit to be derived from change of produce to be made on

them, and those of like character. To such a change also the preoccu-

pation of the present lands in this produce, aud the necessity (if prac-

ticable) of instructing the natives in the village of any new one in its

place, present obstacles difficult to encounter, if not insurmountable.

In considering therefore for any general improvement in the agricultural

walue of the Island, as connected with the grain in question, regard can

only be had to the extension of its culture where practicable, or to an

improvement in the method of it, if necessary. On this latter point I am

not competent to speak. Onthe subject of its extension [ may say, that

by observation made in passing through the country, from four to six

times, the extent at present under tillage exists as waste land, applicable

for rice. Limiting its cultivation to those flat plains where alone it

can be extensively carried on, so that, assuming all rice land to be most

profitably occupied in this production.

That the method of tillage does not admit of material improvement,

and also, that of this grain no second crop can be produced in one year,

and the above estimate would form the greatest probable increase of

annual value derivable from this source. It might indeed be increased

if a second crop of other produce could be procurable from the grounds,

but even for their full occupation in the staple produce, European energy,

intelligence and capital must supply the means.

Tobacco forms the next principal produce of Chedooba. In general

its cultivation is confined to small gardens of about a rood each, in the

immediate vicinity of the villages.

The gardens are all clearly kept, and a lighter mould with more vege-

table matter in it, is preferred for their soil, The plants were much

closer together than I have observed them to be cultivated in Syria,

and the Levant, and [ think must want light and air in ripening the

leaf, as well perhaps as room for arriving at full size.

I found but one spot on the Island where its cultivation was at all

extensive; this was in asmall valley about a quarter mile in width, in the

1841.] Report on the Island of Chedooba. 357

interior of the Island, situated high, and near to the large volcano of

Ineng-brew, though in the Inrooma circle. The soil was an alluvial one

with a large proportion of clay. A stream ran through the valley.

Here were from 8 to 10 acres of tobacco gardens, the plants with much

more room given to them, and this spot I was told produced the finest on

the Island.

The Tobacco of Chedooba is highly prized, and deservedly so. I pro-

cured a quantity of it to be made up into cigars for my own use, and was

both surprized and gratified to find among these, several of as high and

delicate flavour as any from the Havannah which I had ever tasted, and

for the best of which, but for the manufacture, they might have been mis-

taken by any one, not knowing whence they came. The Tobacco of which

they were made was grown in the neighbourhood of the South Hill, and

on examining those which gave such satisfaction, they appeared to be

made from leaves larger and riper than most.

The native, though never without a cigar from the time even before he

ean speak, does not smoke pure tobacco ; the stems and roots of the plant

are cut up into shreds, and with a small proportion of the leaf, enrolled

with the leaves of a plant supplied from the jungle, in a wrapper of To-

bacco. Hecannot therefore be considered a judge of the quality of his

own produce, by those who use the purer article. The leaf when gather-

ed, is dried in the sun, and when dry, strung through the stem upon slight

skewers of bamboo near two feet in length ; these again are woven together

with one or two strips of the same material into bundles of between 2 and

3lbs. which sell for our rupee each. This is the preparation of the larger

leaves, and is for sale, the refuse supplies the family stock.

The whole of this produce which, from what has been said, will not be

concluded to be extensive, is disposed of from time to time along the

neighbouring coast, and the Island of Ramree, some of course finding its

way further, but at present with exception of the larger cultivation

mentioned, it is grown in sufficient quantity only by each family, to

be kept instead. of ready money, wherewith to supply the different

wants or wishes of its owners, its quantity and estimation always making

it an article of ready sale or barter.

Tobacco was always found growing on ground perfectly flat. It may

_be that the heavy rains of the monsoon oblige this, in order to prevent the

_ plant, if ona slope, from being washed away, though this was never assign

ed as a reason, but simply convenience. Should the above supposition have

weight, it would of course tend to limit the cultivation of a plant which

_ mecessarily standing very open, is therefore much exposed to such peril

| Dg

308 Report on the Island of Chedooba. [No. 113.

Still there exists throughout every part of the Island, waste lands whose

soil would be found applicable to the cultivation of tobacco toa very

large extent, even if subject to such limitation, and I am strongly im

pressed with the opinion that such cultivation would prove one of, if not

the most valuable to which the unoccupied lands (not being rise grounds)

could be applied. The present extent in which this plant is grown

over all parts of the Island, [ incline to look on in the light of a experi-

ment only, but one truly valuable, at once for its extent, and its success,

and therefore affording data under prudent precaution of similarity of

soil, &c., on which to found expectation of great profit to be derived

from its extension, in which case the present experience of the inhabi-

tants in its culture, even when necessarily modified with view to im-

provement, would be found a valuable co-operation. It may be that my

own estimate of the flavour of the tobacco I have spoken of above, has

been erroneous, but even if so, the general mildness of all Chedooba

tobacco, when improved by greater attention to its culture and prepa-

ration, would give it an extensive preference over the strong Manilla;

whereas should it be found practicable to grow extensively a leaf of the

flavour and quantity which I think to have found in the above specimens,

Chedooba would become a formidable rival to the Spanish settlement.

The employment to be given by the manufacture of the leaf, if exten-

sively grown and saleable, would add another source of benefit to be de-

rived from such a step.

Cotton—Is grown in several parts of Chedooba; generally spots in

the jungle are selected and cleared for its cultivation, which is however

very limited, not affording employment by its manufacture for the women

throughout the year. The surplus required to keep the looms fof which

almost every family possesses at least one) at work, being imported from

the main land.

Excepting a few plants in the gardens of the villages, I found no

cotton in growth, though land were being cleared for it in several parts,

and some of them extensive. Thosefew plants appeared to thrive well,

but from the shortness of the staple of that which I found in use, whe-

ther of the Island produce, or the Mainland, I conclude that what is

at present grown is as inferior in quality as limited in amount. It was

however very clean and white, the articles manufactured from it, a few

coarse cloths for the person. The soils on which the best Cottons of

India are grown, I have understood to consists generally of a rich deep

mould; if such be the case, and necessarily so, for the perfection of this

plant, I fear that Chedooba holds out no prospect of benefit from any

1841. ] Report on the Island of Chedooba. 399

extensive culture of it. That soils exist in the Island, where it may be

grown with advantage to greater extent, and of better quality than at

present, I doubt not, but I think that the advantage to the Island would

be limited to the production of a supply of it sufficient to give fuller

employment to the native looms, as at present wrought for domestic pur-

poses, without recourse to importation.

In the gardens of every village Sugar Cane in small patches is to be

found ; it is mostly of a red kind, small, and woody in stem, with short

joints. In the Eastern parts of the Island it is grown to extent sufficient

for the production of a few maunds of jaghery; but in the Western

parts, where it is of more recent introduction, a sweetmeat for children

is the highest object of its growth.

As with the Cotton, and for the same reason, I incline to the opinion

that Chedooba does not hold out the prospect of any extensive growth

of the Sugar Cane.

The only place where] have seen this valuable produce flourishing

in this part of the world has been in the Amherst Province of Tenasserim,

where it was luxuriating in a soil very different from any which were

found, or are I think to be found, in Chedooba, a dark rich vegetable

mould. Inthe neighbouring Island of Ramree it thrives well, and it

is fair also to state that not only is the Chedooba plant one of very

inferior quality, but that not the slightest trouble in the way of cultivation

is taken with it; portions of the cane being merely put into the ground

in the month of May, and left to nature to bring to perfection. That

therefore as with the cotton it might be both improved in quality and

increased in quantity, admits of reasonable expectation. But there seem

to be insurmountable obstacles to Chedooba ever becoming of importance

as a Sugar Island, arising from the unsuitableness of the soil in general,

and, (under the supposition of the occupation of all rice grounds in the

cultivation of that staple,) the too limited extent of surface for such

purpose, clear of steep hill sides, which would remain. In passing

through the jungle on one occasion a cleared spot of some 4 or 5 acres

was found occupied half with hemp, and half with indigo,

This was a speculation of anative, and the unusual enterprize it dis-

covered promised to bring its reward, as both crops appeared healthy

and flourishing. The planting of Indigo is very limited, the plant of an

inferior quality, and its preparation a very clumsy operation. It is

not grown for export, but sold in the different villages to dye the produce

of the native looms.

360 Report on the Island of Chedooba. [No. 113.

I could not learn that the Hemp was a more common production than

the other; in fact itis grown in small quantity only on the Island, to

whose inhabitants it supplies material for the few nets they possess,

I had no meansof judging of its quality, other than from the healthy

appearance of the plant, which at least seemed suited to its soil, and

therefore to afford prospect that this produce might with success be

more extensively cultivated in portions of that district of the waste

lands which lie between the available rice plains and the steeper hills.

In conclusion of this notice of its agricultural produce, and in contem-

plation of plans for the future improvement of the Island in this regard.

the general impression resulting from examinations of its soils, and

consideration of the character of its inhabitants, was that such object

would be effected in the best and readiest manner by increased care

and attention given to extension and improvement of crops already

grown on the Island, rather than by attempts to introduce on it exten-

sively any new produce.

A good supply of cattle exists on the Island. The buffalo gives his

strength for the more arduous agricultural labours. The lighter cattle

draft the produce in hackeries with which the Eastern villages are well

_ supplied. The breed is small, but strong, and supplies very sweet meat.

Labour in connection with agriculture is however the only demand

made on them by their masters.

Fruits are not very numerous on the Island, unless the multifarious

produce of the jungle, familiar alone to a Mug appetite, is to be honored

with the name. In the struggles of past times between the Mug and the

Burmah, Cheedooba had its share, and from one of the measures adopted

during those times in connection with this head, viz., the destruction of

all its cocoa-nut trees, that they might afford no sustenance to an

invader, it still suffers. Of this valuable fruit therefore there are com-

paratively few, mostly young trees, but they thrive luxuriantly, and

afew years more if attention be paid to their increase, would see the

Island supplied with them in quantity sufficient for more valuable pur-

poses, than that for which alone it is now esteemed—the means of making

complimentary presents. ;

The plaintain flourishes well; but is not much cultivated, and is

generally an inferior sort, containing a large hard seed.

The pappa is common, and large in all the village gardens.

The tamarind flourishes in great luxuriance and grows toa large size.

This tree almost universally supplies shelter and shade to the villages.

1841.] Report on the Island of Chedooba. 361

Its fruit is not much used by the natives. It is found growing indige-

nously on the second or old beach, but was observed nowhere else ;

with scarce an exception, this being also the situation of the villages.

The mangoe grows wild to a great size. I have measured some of

more than 4 feet diameter—its fruit is very inferior, nor is it attempted

to be improved.

Both the lime and the orange are found in many of the villages, and

thrive well.

The orange isof that sort named elsewhere the sweet lime, and if ex-

tensively cultivated would forma very grateful addition to the luxuries

supplied to the capital.

Vegetables as fruits, are also of small amount. But here again as with

his orchard, the Mug looks to the jungle to make up the deficiency of

his garden produce.

Yams are good and large, but plentiful only in the eastern parts.

Many species of pumpkins and gourds are grown in almost every

garden; brinjals are very fine but not in plenty.

A small shalot is grown in the gardens generally, and some fine onions,

which I was taking with me for my own use, were both so much admired

and demanded for seed, that this improvement to the Kitchen Garden,

will probably in due time become general.

Chillies of all sorts are in every day demand for the curry.

In introducing to notice the more natural productions of the Island, in

the vegetable kingdom, it may be well as before first to speak of the soil

in which they are found.

This is with little exception of one character, a loose friable earth of

light yellow colour, having the general clay base much modified with de-

cayed vegetable matter, the angular fragments of soft sand-stone hay-

ing passed from a greenish into a dirty nehow colour, and being in a state

of rapid decomposition.

The exceptions to this were found in a few spots to consist of a soil

bearing more of the character of mould. The above soil extends through-

out the interior parts of the Island, embracing all the hills higher and

lower down to those flatter lands which have been noticed as applicable

for the extension of rice cultivation, and constitutes that of the jungles,

which are co-extensive with it. |

These in their general character are open, consisting much of detached

clumps of bamboo or of trees from 1 foot to 18 inches in diameter,

well separated below, but in their branches having creepers thickly

entwined. Throughout the lower jungles, open spaces, some deserving

362 Report on the Island of Chedooba. [No. 113.

the character of small plains, are of very frequent occurrence. On the

higher hills, the trees are closest of growth and largest of size, but still

clear of understuff. Throughout therefore, no serious obstacle is present-

ed in the task of clearing the land for cultivation—a Mug, with a good

dah felling the trees over half an acre a day, and a footman may pene-

trate without obstruction in any direction.

The tops of the highest hills were visited with ease, save from the

steepness of ascent, parts being traversed, which the superstitious fear

of the Mug would never have permitted his voluntary approach to.

Timber of great size, and some of valuable quality, is to be found, but

it is confined to the very summits of the highest hills, and is therefore

partly inaccessible, nor would its amount ever remunerate the labour of

constructing roads for its transport. The soil in which these grow is of

the same nature as that described above, but within a few hundred feet of

the summits, all of which are very steep, itis piled up in the loosest

possible manner. The stroke of an axe or dah on an extensive hiil top,

would so shake it for a space of 150 yards around, as to make observation

in the quicksilver of an artificial horizon impossible.

Precisely at the spot where this loose texture commences—commences

the growth of the large timber, increasing in size thence to the summits,

and from the trees not being deciduous (or at least not so at the same

season) a most marked line of separation is thus traced out between these

and the smaller leafless jungle below.

The wood oil tree was the most conspicuous in growth and size, of the

larger trees of these summits.

One was felled on the west hill, which measured in diameter at the res-

pective ends, of a 60 feet length, 4 feet 6 inches, and 3 feet 6 inches, and

another is left standing asa mark, on the summit, which measures 21 feet

4 inches in girt at 6 feet from the ground. The wood of this tree will

not, I fear, be found valuable as timber, but its produce, the wood oil, has

yet to be better appreciated than at present. This substanceis produced

by cutting a hole into the body of the tree,* and kindlinga fire init; the

flat floor as it were, of the hole, has a groove cut in it, which receives the

oilas it crudes from the wound, and whence a split bamboo conducts it

to the pots placed for its reception ; the quantity thus yielded from a-large

tree is surprizingly great. In felling the above mentioned individual the

oil ran ina stream from it, and it must have contained even tons. The

strict propriety of designating it an oil may be doubted. It has always

* See Dr. Spry’s Visit to Arracan, No. 110.—Ep,

1841.] Report on the Island of Chedooba. 353

seemed tome more like a varnish; it speedily forms a highly polished

surface on wood work, and has a fine aromatic scent, not unlike that of

cedar; mixed with reeds and dried, it makes a brilliant and fragrant torch.

The colour of the wood is a dull pink.

In the course of clearing these summits for observations connected with

the survey, many other trees were felled exhibiting characters apparently

valuable as timber. Among the natives there were differences of opinion

about their names, and waiving even this obstacle to any description of

them, the remark already made of the difficulty opposed to their being

brought down, renders such attempt unnecessary. The oil trees would

be found most valuable as a source of supply for that material, and per-

haps many of their neighbours also would be found more useful living

than dead, by the produce they may be found to yield One of these, of

large size, and with a bark similar to cork, was found to produce caout-

chouc in great abundance. On cutting through the outer rough coat, a

soft inner one, nearly aninch thick, is found closely attached to the more

solid wood; on wounding this, the caoutchouc exudes freely, of a consis-

tency and colour like thick milk. The tree was much avoided by the

natives on account of the noxious quality of this milk, which if by accident

entering the eye, on the tree being struck, so as to wound it, was said to

produce certain blindness.

Another tree of very large leaf but moderate size, was also much avoided,

and great care taken in felling it, to prevent its juice from touching the

skin, which it was said to blister and poison. The adhesive quality of

this substance was therefore more taken for granted than proved.

A plant, with the appearance of a cactus, but growing to the height and

size of a tree, and known perhaps generally under the name of Sisso

(not the timber tree of that name) yielded the caoutchoue in the greatest

abundance. On severing a leaf, it ran forth ina small stream like milk.

Many of the creepers also contained it in large qualities, and in one spot

of the jungle of the Krae-rone Circle, I found the Caoutchouc tree of

South America, affording prospect that as European intelligence and

enterprize became more attracted towards the products of India, that

continent may some day find its exclusive trade in this every day in-

creasingly valuable article, formidably disputed. ‘The wild cotton tree

grows to a great size, and at the time seen was covered with a mass of

its beautiful crimson flowers and flocks of birds. Its wool is sometimes

used for stuffing pillows or beds.

The Gamboge tree was found of large size, and in considerable quantity,

in clearing the jungle from the summit of the N. W. Peak; it was well

364 Report on the Island of Chedooba. [No. 113.

known to the natives; but no use is made of its beautiful gum, which co-

vered the stems in considerable quantities. It lives in the higher jungles.

It is not doubtless the only tree in these wilds yielding a valuable

gum, but want of acquaintance with botanical science prevented re-

searches of that kind, which might have led to useful discovery. The

safety and facility, and even enjoyment with which such researches may

be carried on in the fine season, in the woods of Chedooba, seem however.

to point them out asa spot very eligible for the careful examination of

an able botanist, unless indeed they be considered too limited in extent

to exhibit a sample of the general character of the jungles of this coast.

A very brilliant crimson gum was found to flow in great quantity from

a large creeper (Tallee-medzou-nowy) which is very common. If dried

speedily in the sun, becoming very brittle, but retaining its color, it is

of very astringent quality, and is used in some diseases as a medicine by

the native quacks.

I may not fail to mention another creeper, whose properties are as

valuable as interesting, and not the less so from its being found every

where, both high and low. It is truly a traveller’s friend, and the

wandering Mug well appreciates is value. With his dih he cuts off a junk

and quenches his thirst with its contents, a pure, tasteless, cool water, of

which it contains as much as its large numerous pores will hold, and

which are immediately emptied by holding the piece perpendicular. A

piece about 2 feet in length, and as thick as a small wrist, gave rather

more than half a pint of water. In the rainy season it would have

given double that quantity.

In travelling through the jungles, the liquid of this water creeper

(Jabroon nony) is the constant beverage of the natives, when not other-

wise supplied with that necessary, and its universal presence makes him

very independent in his choice of road.

The rattan is every where found in the jungles, and performs all the

ordinary duties of rope ; it grows to a great size; two were taken from the

West Hill measuring 114 feet in length, and 12 inch diameter.

Although Chedooba may not be loeked to for supplying valuable timber

to other parts, yet for its own consumption, and most, if not all domestic

puposes, it possesses amply sufficient to meet any demand. For such

purposes plank may easily be brought down from the hill, whence the

whole tree must be immoveable. The lower jungles contain woods, per-

fectly adapted to such uses, and in those of the Eastern Plains was found

the Thew-gaan growing plentifully, some of the trees between 2 and3

feet in diameter, and which itself would supply material for almost all

1841.] Report on the Island of Chedooba. 365

purposes. The wood of this tree is hard and close grained, of a yellow

colour and most durable. In the Southern Provinces of Tenasserim it

grows to an immense size, and also in the Sandoway district; hereafter

its qualities may be appreciated by other than the Natives, with whom its

durability has given rise to the proverb that ‘a Cemoe of Thew-gaan

lasts 99 years.’

It has been thus seen that the soils of Chedooba to the very summit of

the Hills, and even there more so, are both productive and easily wrought.

That therefore in any future agricultural improvement of the Island, man’s

industry will lay claim toa very large portion of that extent, now entirely

in a state of nature, there can be no doubt; and over the face of all the

lower hills, crops of various produce take the place of the jungles, which

now occupy them. Such cultivation, even though limited to the extension

to the greatest amount practicable of those products which are now

but so partially grown on the Island, would therefore leave but a narrow

space to be provided for, below those steeper, almost precipitous hills,

which must always be given over to nature whereon to maintain supplies

of timber and fuel. What such a space might be most profitably occu-

pied with, it is perhaps attempting to look too far into the probable

future, to make it other than presumption to speculate on. Yet in con-

sidering the nature of the soil, and comparing it with that of the spice

gardens of Penang and Singapore,it has seemed at times likely that a similar

produce might be found practicable here. For taking into consideration

the very great disparity in the mode of the distribution of moisture

between the two localities, still the pepper vine flourished at Sandoway,

and at Mergiu, if not Moulmein ; places all subjected to the same pecu-

liarities of season. The growth of the Nutmeg, Cloves, and Coffee, are

not yet despaired of.

Of the productions of the animal kingdom, the Island exhibits but a

limited variety—under the head of agricultural produce it has been

already mentioned, that large cattle thrive, and are plentiful and might

be no doubt much improved—not only at present are they not killed

for food, but even their milk is not used, and authority was obliged to be

exerted in order to procure this luxury in the midst of herds.

The use to which they are applied has in the same place been already

noticed, and beside them there are none.

One pony lives on the Island, the property of the Soogrees, and two

goats are claimed, as belonging to the party of police, which is stationed

at the chief village of Chedooba.

366 Report on the Island of Chedooba. [No. 113.

Of wild animals, the deer is the largest and most plentiful; they are

very numerous throughout the Island, though I never either heard or

saw but one species, that which is generally known asthe ‘barking deer.’

The natives run them down with dogs; they have no means of shooting

them. The flesh was found less dry and unflavored than was expected.

Next in size and number to the deer, is the wild hog, the only species

on the Island. They are not large, but numerous, especially in the jungles

which lie closest to the rice lands, on which they commit heavy depreda-

tions, and our assistance was frequently invoked todestroy at least some

of the enemy. But in general the labour of the day was deemed enough

for our party without trenching on the hours of rest, which was necessary

in order to comply with the request.

Jungle cats are found but are not numerous, but one was ever seen by

any of our party.

Squirrels are plentiful, and of large size, though of but one species; a

dark brown in colour throughout, with exception of the throat, and a nar-

row stripe along the belly of yellowish white. One was shot of the size

of a full grown rabbit; it was a male, his lady in company was of mcre de-

licate size. .

Monkeys we heard of, but] much doubt their existence on the Island,

at least it is strange that in so long and extensive a traverse of it, such an

animal was neither seen nor heard.

The freedom from any formidable wild beast is a circumstance of advan-

tage in these countries, which may not be passed over without remarks ; it

contributed largely to the comfort and freedom with which we were enabled

to penetrate throughout the Chedooba, forming a source of congratulation

when obliged to take up a night’s lodging, or a day’s journey in the jungle.

The Natives state that a tiger did once attempt a landing on the

Island, but fortunately being seen while yet swimming towards the shore

time was afforded to the inhabitants of the nearest village to prepare for

his welcome, and before he could gain footing, either for attack or escape,

he was cut in pieces with their dahs, since which, his example has never

been followed.

I know not how far the swimming qualities of a tiger may bear witness

to the truth of this story, but the feat in an opposite direction was

safely performed by one of the elephants which were placed at our ser-

vice, which after breaking from his ropes, swam the straits, and landed

safely on the opposite coast of Ramree, a distance of seven miles at the

xeast, where he was recaptured and sent back.

1841.] Report on the Island of Chedooba. 367

Of reptiles, one snake was seen, and a few lizards and insects, the most

numerous and beautiful are the butterflies, which were found even on the

highest peaks. Bees are plentiful, but the jungles alone supply the

honey, which is very sweet and good, and serves throughout the Island

in the place of sugar.

Fish forms a very important part of the diet of the Mug, and mainly

in this view, are the villages of Chedooba formed around the shores. It

is very plentiful though not of any great variety. The most common is

a species of bonetea, a muscular fish of rapid motion, and great strength,

though seldom arriving at a weight of 4ibs. It has a very thick smooth

skin, without scale, and is of silvery white, longitudinally spotted with

blue. On the western coast in the sandy bays, they are very numerous,

and are taken in great plenty with hook and line.

The bamboo supplies the fishing rod, andin the evening, when most

readily taken, the shore may be seen with 20 natives in aline from the

nearest village, as close together as they can stand, up to their middles

in the water, with their baskets slung on their backs, and casting their

lines as rapidly as if fly fishing, laughing and joking at their suc-

cess, without the least fear of driving their prey away, though they

must be among theirlegs. The flesh of these fish is very firm and

nutritious.

Very great quantities of a tiny little fish, most similar to, if not in fact,

the Anchovy ora small Sardine, are taken on the same coast. They are

- dried in the sun without any preparation, a day or two’s exposure being

sufficient for the purpose, and exported in great quantities to Ramree

and the neighbouring coast; each family also of the western villages

where it is taken keeps a large supply, and demand is extensively made

for them by theless fortunate communities eastward, so that they form

_avaluable adjunct to the resources of that portion of the inhabitants in

_ whose neighbourhood they are common. The method of taking them is

_ perhaps peculiar, and forms an interesting and lively scene. The morn-

ing is the time of the best ‘take,’ at which time, and when near high

_ water, young and old assemble on the sand in groups, with flat open

_ mouthed baskets of bamboo work, awaiting the opportunity for a catch.

_ This occurs when the shoals of tiny fish are driven for supposed safety

_ close into the beach by their larger, persecuting, and ravenous brethren.

_ Then away dashes the nearest group of expectants into the water to the

_ back of the surf, which is constantly, though not heavily rolling in on the

_ coast, and driving back the original pursuers, face round in shore and

place the flat mouths of their baskets in line together, just outside the

368 Report on the Island of Chedooba. [No. 113.

retiring wave, receiving from it, its finny contents. Sometimes more than

a gallon will be thus deposited in a single basket.

The uncertainty as to where the shoal will come in, and the rapidity

and ability with which the fortunate group take advantage of their oppor-

tunity, afford all the excitement and amusement to these cheerful people

of a game of chance, and cannot be looked on by a stranger without in-

terest. Flocks of cranes, crows, kites, and gulls of many sizes, colours, and

voices, looking out for the stragglers on the sand, who have escaped the

mouths of the fishes and the baskets, form an addition to the scene.

The grey mullet of good size and flavour is got from the creeks of

the east side of the Island. Rock fish are plentiful, but not easily taken ;

when intended to be preserved, they are split into quarters, kept together

at either end, and then opened by strips of bamboo, and the whole hung

up todry inthe sun, Skate were frequently seen, but none caught, they

were often observed to make very high, though clumsy leaps, a feat not

often I believe, practised by flat fish. A fish of considerable size from 12 to

20 lbs. weight apparently, and in form resembling the salmon, was fre-

quently seen of an evening performing very astonishing leaps. They were

always quite perpendicular, and therefore appeared as a gambol, more than

an effort to take prey, and sometimes extended to a height of 30 feet.

Of shell fish we found craw fish and prawns, the latter of great size and

very delicious ; they are limited to the creeks of the east side of the Island,

where also the one in the neighbourhood of the Meug-breng village,

possesses truly fine oysters, They are large, but of a flavour as delicate ;

asour own Colchester luxury. They were in high condition when we

visited their neighbourhood, and it may be lamented that they are not

more generally known, and attempts made to grow them elsewhere.

They have been transported to Kyouk Phyoo, and do well there.

Turtle are common, and are taken by the natives on the sand islands.

and bays. They are of large size and of good species, but I can make no

mention of their quality as food.

Many beautiful and valuable species of shells are to be found on the

flats off the North Point of the Island, where however but little leisure

or opportunity of dredging for them was afforded.

Fowls are plentiful on the Island, and supply the most solid food to

which the natives are accustomed. The demand for them by our people

raised the price latterly from 18 to 13 forthe rupee. They are of good

size, and good flavour.

Of wild birds, the Sarus is perhaps the largest on the Island, and is

plentiful. They are common in other parts of India, and are, [ believe,

1841. ] Report on the Island of Chedooba. 369

good eating. There area great many varieties of the Crane, some of

very beautiful plumage and great size. These constitute the greatest

portion of the feathered inhabitants, and would supply perhaps some

new and valuable varieties if not species; Doves are very numerous; a

small green Parrot is found, and some few green Pigeons were seen.

But in general, other than have been mentioned, the birds are of those

species most commonly met with in these climates. The jungles are

however scantily peopled, though I may not omit to notice one which,

with its sweet and soft note late in the evening, often gratified us, and

was deemed not an unworthy brother songster of the Nightingale.

The Mineral Kingdom—Though bare of much value, exhibits speci-

mens of some interest.

Nodules of Iron ore of rich quality, are, on search, to be found generally

either embedded in the greenish sandstone, or having been detached

from it.

In the former state they were found most numerous, on one of the

reefs of the North West Point called the ‘ Saw reef,’ and in the latter on

the Nortk beach. But in neither case in quantity sufficient to make them

valuable for other objects than those connected with science.

Specimens of copper ore, and some few of silver, were found on care-

ful search, lying on the barren surfaces of the different volcanoes. They

are all of very small size, and their amount limited as those of iron, and

like them give no indication of the existence of the ore to any greater

extent. A piece as large as two eggs was recorded as the largest ever

found.

Petroleum is found on the Island, and might be extensively produced.

Two wells sufficiently near each other to afford the conclusion of their

possessing one common source, exist in the Krae-rone circle, yielding an-

nually about 60 pots each. A third is found in the ‘ Mroomce’ circle, but

it has been destroyed by fire, and yields nothing, being the property at

present of no one in particular, the soil around it, is, however, full of the

oil. The fourth and most extensive is in the Fangroa circle, and yields

near 200 pots in the year. 3

The method of collecting it is simple; the earth is turned up to adepth

of two feet, and a bank of soil raised round a square of about 20 yards,

thus disturbed, so as to form it during the rains intoa shallow pond of

about the above depth. The surface of this pond is in a constant state

of ebullition from the escape of gas, with which comes up the Petro-

leum.

370 Report on the Island of Chedooba. [No. 113.

It collects on the surface in three different forms. A green fluid oil

first spreads itself over the spot where the gas is bubbling up; as it ex-

tends, its edges exhibit a brown curdled substance resembling half con-

gealed dripping, and amongst this, as it becomes thicker, is seen gathering

in spots, a dark brown substance of the color and consistency of molasses.

This latter is used to preserve wood, to saturate paper for umbrellas, and

is sometimes burnt. But the fluid of green color, is that mostly used to

supply lamps. The curdled substance is used with the dark in the coarser

purposes to which it is applied. This is the least valuable, and sells at 5

pots for arupee. The other two at 3 pots for 2 rupees.

A bamboo is used to skim the surface of the ponds, and bring the sub-

stance to the bank, it is scooped up with a cocoa-nut shell and put into

the pot. It floats so lightly on the water that this process is quickly and

effectually performed. The break of day is the time chosen for the opera-

tion as from the cooler temperature, it is then of harder consistence on

the water, and easier and cleaner skimmed. In the heat of the day it

becomes so fluid as to make it difficult to collect without a large proportion

of the water.

In the months of March and April the pond gradually dries up, and

the oil can then be no longer collected from out the soil. The pond is

then dug, and the whole soil in it as much disturbed as possible; on this

operation depends the quantity to be yielded during the next season, and

the deeper it is dug, the larger will be the produce; while on the other

hand, if it be neglected, which is most commonly the case, the quantity

of oil to be collected will be very materially diminished. A sort of super-

stitious fear is attached to these ponds, and on no account woulda native

dip his foot in its water, though he will not hesitate to dig the soil when

dry, nor to handle its produce, to which no sort of deleterious property is

attached. The state of ebullition without apparent heat may occasion

this feeling among them.

The ponds are surrounded by a rough hedge of stout sticks, to preserve

them from the intrusion of buffaloe or deer. Insects were seen in them.

I had no means of collecting any of the escaping gas, which I should

otherwise have done, but no heat perceptible at the surface is em-

ployed for its extensive developement. The Thermometer where the

greatest ebullition was going forward shewing but two degrees more than

the atmosphere, viz. 74°. |

No doubt this mineral produce, might with ease, and little expense,

be increased to a very large amount, and the oil has yet perhaps to be

1841.) Report on the Island of Chedooba. 371

better known, and better appreciated than now, when its value will in all

probability be much increased.

I know not whether it has ever been thoroughly analyzed, but the

almost pungency of its scent seems to proclaim the presence of a large

portion of Naphtha.

In composition it differs from the tar produced from the wells of Zante,

or the pitch of the Lake of Trinidad, partaking in all probability the cha-

racter of the oil, which is found in the wells of the Irrawaddy. The

material from these is in considerable use in our Tenasserim Provinces, and

its native country, as a preservative of wood from the attack of the white

ant, which it effectually prevents, and it is in considerable demand in the

construction and preservation of the wooden houses of those countries ;

affording reason to believe that this, its well known and well tried pro-

perty, might,with benefit, be more extensively made use of in other places.

In a dwelling house perhaps an objection against the painting of the

beams with petroleum might be supposed to lie in its scent; though

this may prove but a supposition, and at any rate it can form no objection

to its use in stores and godowns, and other buildings of that nature,

whether public or private. The expense annually incurred in Calcutta

for repairs, called for, from the above cause of destruction, where it is

necessary to examine, if not renew timber once in 3 years, seems at once

to point out an extensive sphere for the application of this, its valuable

property, in connection with which is also its employment in the pre-

servation of spars for shipping.

The extension of the wells which are all situated in the jungles, and

an increase of their depth so as to hold water throughout the year, are

simple means by which this produce of Chedooba might be at once

largely increased to meet such extended demand, at present I believe

the use of the petroleum to be almost entirely confined to the limited

_ application it finds among the natives. The only other mineral produc-

tion it remains to notice is coal. This, or a lignite, was found about a

mile within the western beach in the Circle of ‘lang-roa.

It had been known for 2 years, and had been dug into, to a depth of

perhaps 5 feet without exhibiting any improvement over the sur-

face specimens. It was found shewing itself for a distance of 20 yards

| in an east and west direction. Its situation, a little above the water

_ mark of a dry creek, formed by the first and second lines of Hills, and its

dip an angle of 45 into the body of the latter, which rose 800 or 1,000

feet above the spot where it was shewing. In formation it consisted of

_aseries of layers varying from ,!, of an inch to 3 inches in thickness, se-

372 Report on the Island of Chedooba. [No. 112.

parated from one another by their lamince of ferruginous sand. It was

very brittle, with a dull fracture, and smouldered, but would not ignite.

Neither from its situation nor its quality does it promise to become of

any value.

Division 4,

Clamate.—Chedooba, in common with the Arracan coast, has been gener-

ally considered as possessing aclimate peculiarly fatal to Europeans, and

the mortality of the Troops who occupied it during the Burmese War has

given but too painful cause for the opinion.

Nevertheless I cannot but think that its insular situation, and its free-

dom from that extent of muddy creek, and Mangrove swamp, which pe-

culiarly characterizes the coast of the mainland, together with the greater

openness of its jungles, must be the occasion of some difference between

them, and that in favour of the Island.

Its seasons are those of the adjoming countries, and may be divided

into wet and dry; the rain commences its visit in the beginning of May,

with variable winds and intermittent showers, which, increasing in fre-

quency and duration, introduce the deluge which pours down incessantly

from the middle of June to that of September, during which period 250

inches of water fall. Thence to the month of November is occupied with

the gradual taking off of the rains, which from that month cease till the

following May brings them round again.

In every country subject to such periodical rains there are two seasons

when the sickness, which is the peculiar one of the climate, prevails, viz.

at the commencement and taking off of these rains. Even in those coun.

tries which, but more partiality, are subject to a wet and dry season, as

Italy, the Levant, and southern shores of the Mediterranean, the same ef-

fect is produced, and spring and autumn there, bring with them, their

ever accompanying miasma fever. Under the effect therefore of a tropi-

cal climate, where the change at this time, in operation throughout the

whole vegetable kingdom, is so much more extensive and violent,

the effect of the greater developement of noxious vapour, must be neces-

sarily looked for; and accordingly these periods are found to be the sickly

seasons of Chedooba, and the coast around, and their regular return

calls for great care and prudence on the partof the European, for whom,

occupation of mind and body, as active and full as regard to unnecessary

exposure will permit, may be strongly recommended then, as perhaps at

all times, as a valuable addition to other precautions ; as it has frequently

been found that our sailors and soldiers, have suffered less from the

1841.] Repart on the Island of Chedocba. 373

effects of climate when under the exposure, than when mind and body

have alike been unoccupied and unenlivened.

Exposure to the direct heat of the sun of Chedooba, and its neigh-

bourhood, is at all times of the year to be carefully avoided, and such

imprudence will be the almost certain occasion of illness to an European,

to whom the simple remedy of achattah is always at hand; some pe-

culiarity in the atmosphere appearing to make its rays more than com-

monly obnoxious at all times to his constitution; but this is more parti-

cularly the ease in the months of March, April, and May, when the natives

themselves are much concerned to avoid the intenseness of its heat. The

mornings and evenings however, even at this time afford 4 or 5 hours,

when all out door duties may be performed.

The above months constitute the hottest season of the year. The Ther-

mometer inthe day ranging at times to above 90°, but falling, from towards

evening till before sunrise, down to a temperature, which is pleasantly

cool throughout the night, a benefit enjoyed all the year round. On the

main land, the nights at this season are frequently accompanied by a

dense mist almost amounting to a rain, arising in all probability from the

condensation of moisture, attracted from the large extent of water surface

exposed by the numerous creeks.

Chedooba, with nights equally cool, and more healthy, is free from this

peculiarity. But with the mainland, is, during the day, at this season,

subject to a dry haze, at times to thick as so hide the view of the land; at

a very few miles distant,

The heat at this time is greatly attempered by the fresh sea breeze con-

stantly blowing, which gradually veering from south-west to north-west,

with only a decrease of strength during the night, takes the place, at this

latter point, and time, of the direct land breeze, which blows during the

night in the cool season.

This cool season, the most enjoyable, and the healthiest time of the

year, extends from the setting in of the north-east monsoon, towards the

—endof October, to the middle of March, during which time the climate is

very delightful, the temperature seldom rising, excepting as the season

closes to that of the summer heat of our own country. But thesun at

midday is still very powerful, and direct exposure to it, to be avoided.

_ This was the season during which I traversed the Island, and though coi -

_stantly in the thickest jungles, sometimes by night as well as by day, I do

| not remember to have suffered a headache.

| The sea breeze at this time sets in at 10 a.m., and falls with the sun,

shortly after which a cool land breeze from the eastward takes its place, till

No. 113. New Serres, No. 26. 3 A

374 Report on the Island of Chedooba. [No. 113.

about 9 4.M., when an hour’s calm is again succeeded by a breeze from the

nort-west. The change of temperature was found very great during this

season, between day and night, with the exercise of walking, the lightest

clothing was found most suitable during the day, but about two hours be-

fore sun set the temperature falls rapidly, and at night with the land

breeze blowing, two blankets and a counterpane were not too much to pre-

vent actual cold. This change must always be carefully met, by dressing

in woollen, a precaution which should never be omitted.

The same peculiarity of atmosphere, which produces such ill effects

from exposure to the sun, may also be the occasion of a greater amount

of exhaustion (not fatigue) under the exercise of walking, which I expe-

rienced more in going over this Island, than I had ever previously found,

in the few other parts of India yet visited. A remedy for this feeling was

always found by application to the contents of a haversack, and the pre-

caution was always taken of not setting out on the day’s journey without

the regular meal. It is not altogether from personal experience in this

particular, during so limited a time, that I would express the opinion, that

bodily exercise of any sort in this climate, requires for its support, at

least by the European constitution, a generous diet. In its corrobora-

tion, I was informed, that during the time of service, on this coast, of the

65th Regiment Native Infantry, a very fearful mortality took place

among the Sepoys, rot so much from the actual violence of the prevalent

disease, the well known Arracan fever, as from the consequence of its

debilitating nature, from which the constitution of the Native would not

allow him to rally, though always assisted by liberality administering

strengthening medicine and means; while to this mortality among the

privates, a strong contrast was exhibited in the constant good health of

all the officers, throughout the whole period of nearly two years, a con-

trast attributed by the medical, and other officers of the regiment to the

difference of diet of the two parties. During the exposure to which the

crew of the ‘Childers’ were necessarily subjected in the execution of a

survey on the coast, many cases of the same fever occurred, at the present

time amounting to upwards of 60 in number, but of the parties so suffer-

ing there were but few who were not perfectly recovered, and at duty

again in 8 days, a circumstance which [ incline to attribute mainly, not

only to the usual liberal allowance supplied to Her Majesty’s seamen, but

also to the endeavours (fully appreciated) to supply the crew with as much,

and as great changes of good food as were, under circumstances, procurable.

There must not be left out of view the great value of the facility of an

immediate application, on first symptoms, to a medical adviser afforded in

1841.] Report on the Island of Chedooba. 375

aman-of-war. Nor again that of the precaution which the service pro-

vides under such circumstances, by the administering of wine and qui-

nine to all likely to be exposed. This latter was found of great use, and

is much to be recommended, while in regard to the other consideration

it is right to notice, as tending to deprive this fever, of something of its

formidable character, that in many cases, a simple dose of medecine, ad-

ministered on first symptoms, has sufficed to drive it entirely away. One

case only proved fatal, and with it were connected peculiar circum-

stances.

The climate during the period of the heavy rains is not an unhealthy

one, it will be one necessarily of great confinement to the European,

which is perhaps unfavourable, being inclined to attribute much value to

personal exercise, but occupation by all who know its value, would not

even at such time be found impracticable even for the body, much less for

the mind.

The temperature during this season is cool, though the moisture of the

atmosphere is very destructive to every thing but stone and metal. It is

the time for the growth of the crops which we put into the ground just

previous, and it is now that nature puts on her rich clothing of verdure ;

and vegetation is most rapid. It is accompanied by a constant breeze

from the south-west. The natives enjoy this time as muchas their Bur-

mah brethren, and with their smallest children, like frogs, delight most

in exposure to the heaviest falls.

Great importance as a preservative of health in this climate is to be at-

tached to a very careful watch over the due performance of the digestive

functions; both speaking from personal experience, and also by observa-

tion of our sick generally, it being found that inattention to this particular

was not so much the occasion of dysenteric disease, as that it rendered the

party liable to the prevailing fever, which was found to them a very inti-

mate connexion with the state of the stomach, any derangement with the

regular functions of which, if not a certain occasion, being at least a strong

predisposing cause to taking the disease, and being found in all cases

more than ordinarily its accompaniment.

My acquaintance with the climate of Chedooba is but small, and was

limited to that of the best season of the year. I therefore would speak on

the subject with every deference to the opinions of others of more practi-

cal knowledge, and extended experience. But as the result of what I

have found and heard of it; I am strongly impressed with the opinion,

that, employment for body and mind—to avoid direct exposure to the

-sun;—good (not intemperate) living; accommodation of clothing to

376 Report on the Island of Chedooba. [No. 113.

changes of temperature; careful attention to the state of the stomach;

with due observation of these precautions, in aid of asound constitution,

the climate of Chedooba, would be found not only healthy, but at some

seasons most delightful to the European.

The eastern parts do not enjoy so temperate a climate in the hot season

as the western, being less exposed to the fresh sea breeze; and the im-

mediate neighbourhood of the creeks would be found situations prudently

avoided. The fine pulverulent soil inthe east, by the quantity and pene-

trating nature of the dust it creates, is also at that season a very great

annoyance; notwithstanding therefore the greater exposure during the

monsoon, and that it is at present farless populous than the eastern. I

consider the N. W. portion of the Island, as that which, at all seasons,

would be found the most congenial to the European constitution.

While speaking of the climate of their Island, itis fair to notice its

effect upon the natives themselves, as well as upon Europeans, and it was

found that they also are subject, though but inconsiderably, to occasional

attacks of the fever. '

All the able-bodied men on the Island were employed with me on one

occasion for a fortnight together, ‘and therefore came under my direct

notice, and though at hard work all day, and sleeping in the jungle at

night, it came to my knowledge that fever had been taken by only one

individual throughout that time, an old man verging on 80 years, and

who ought not to have been present.

In traversing the Island throughout, I believe not to have omitted visiting

any of its villages; and whatever sick were in them, always made appli-

cation for relief, either personally, or by their friends. These cases

amounted in all to four of fever, one of small-pox, one of dropsy, one of

paralysis, one of blindness, and one of deformed limb, three cases of

fever occurred also with our Bengallee attendants. The native popu-

lation therefore seemed to exhibit no signs of a pestilential climate.

While on the contrary, throughout the Island, they afforded the clearest

and most extensive evidence of its healthiness, and suitableness to their

constitutions, in the great number of old men and women, to be found in

every village.

As mere old age entitles to the respect and deference of the whole com-

munity, the old people, as elders and leaders, always come forth to meet

us ; and with few exceptions even to the age of 106 years were found hale,

if not vigorous in mind and body, much interesting information being

gotten from parties 80 and 90 years old, with memories as fresh appa-

rently, and minds as clear as they ever had been, men even of that age tak-

1841.] Memoranda on ¢ the Chulchulheera’ of the Hills. 377

ing their share in almost hard work. Although this is a double testimony

in its favor, it is as impossible, nevertheless to deny, as it is painful to

acknowledge, that hitherto, these coasts have proved most fatal to

Europeans, that sailors, soldiers, and civilians, have alike fallen victims

to its fever, and on Chedooba an ample share. nor may there be a doubt

thrown on the attention and ability of those medical officers whose exer-

tions have yet hitherto failed in all attempts to stop its fatal progress.

Whether therefore this country is one from which the European is to be

ever thus excluded, or whether in the progress of all other improvements,

and also if the character of his treatment by himself or by others may be

found hereafter to enable him to make here also his temporary home, and

introduce, with his wealth, his intelligence, his energy, and above all his

religion, their attendant blessings, must apparently be left for the future

to shew. But giving to the facts, which constitute this favorable evidence,

no more than the weight, they are strictly entitled to—and others may

be found perhaps to entertain with me, even more than the hope, that

some such improvement may eventually render the climate of Chedooba,

and also that of Arracan, no longer so fatal a bar as hitherto, to the

advance in these provinces of the Civilization of Europe.

(To be continued.)

Memoranda on the ‘ Chulchulheera’ of the Hills, and on some Lic-

hens from the Himalayas in the Collection of the Asiatic Society,

By Henry Pippineron, Offg. Curator, Mus. Asiatic Society.

My attention having been directed to this subject by our President,

I took the opportunity, when examining the ‘ Chulchulheera,’ to test also

some lichens sent to the Asiatic Society from Simlah, in 1838, by Mrs.

Siddons, which I found in the Museum. I have thought it worth while to

make known the results of my work, and to add a few remarks which

have occured to me, inthe hope of drawing attention to this very inter-

esting though neglected subject.

I subjected the ‘ Chulchulheera’ to the common ammoniacal test,

and found that it yieldeda tolerably bright red brown liquid, though

not the violet red described by Hellot; I did not succeed in pro-

‘ducing any substantive dye with it, though using several mordants,

I essayed to manufacture some kind of Cudbear from it also, but

did not succeed. The preparation of Cudbear however depends upon two

378 Memoranda on the * Chulchulheera’ of the Hills. [No. 113,

fermenting processes, the first of which is the preparation. of fermented

urine, and then a sort of fermentation of the lichen with the prepared

urine and lime. Iam very doubtful whether, at the temperature usually

prevailing here, we can obtain the fermented urine at all, in the state in

which it is used in Europe, from its passing so rapidly to the incipient

putrid state. It may moreover be doubted whether the heat is not also

too great for the fermentation of the lichen. Hence, and because all fer-

mentative processes depend so much on heat, and often on the quantity

of material used, nothing can be predicted of this failure.

Lichens from the Himalaya.

These are, as above stated, a box sent down by Mrs. Siddons in 1838,

I have arranged herewith a box of specimens of them, and one of bottles

of the liquids produced. I subjoin a note of the colours as they appear

when fresh, and I have marked their differences when seen by transmitted

or by reflected light, for this appears worth noticing. To be seen properly

they must be examined in a bright sunshine. 1 observe that some of the

colours change a little, or become uuller, in a few days.

Nos. By transmitted Light. By reflected Light.

L. (Crimegn red. 02. oats Lighted and duller.

2. Rich bright Crimson.......... Deeper but very brilliant.

3. Thin, poor, white-wine colour . The same.

4, Deep maroon brown ...... ... A fine clove, or red brown.

5. Dull red... ... euvtohe ste ole « Keke The same.

6. Very rich port-wine red..... ... The same.

sal aueauy Caen

8. Crimson brown .............. The same.

9. Oranpe e¥imson soi). ue. we The same.

10. Crimson ........ eGrek. eon’ Crimson brown.

11. Deep crimson...... HONOR ue. ae Browns

12. Deep crimson ..... we ees . Bright red.

13, 14, 15; much like No. 7, but I had but very small quantities to

use for testing :-—

16. A poor dirty orange brown.... The same.

17. A brilliant crimson...... .... The same.

18. A golden brown............ Clove brown.

Tshould think, from the richness and intensity of the colours, that most

of these, excepting perhaps, Nos. 3, 7, 5, 13, 14, 15 and 16 are worth

attention; and it should not be forgotten that they have been certainly

1841.] Memoranda on the * Chulchulheera’ of the Hills. 379

three, and perhaps four years since they were collected. I proceed now

to set down such remarks as occur to me.

There must be in all countries a season at which lichens and mosses,

like all other vegetable productions, possess the largest quantities of

colouring matter. At what time this occurs for Indian lichens, we at

present know not: for those of the Himalayas’ it is probably the autumn,

and in other parts the driest seasons.

Judging from the under surfaces, some of these which I have tested

are tree, and others rock-lichens; but there must be great numbers more

of both kinds in those extensive regions. The rock lichens of cold

countries are usually the best, as far as our knowledge yet goes.

We know nothing hitherto of the forest-mosses and lichens of the

vast jungles of India, from Assam to Goandwana, and from the Terai of

Nepaul to the Sunderbunds, the forests of the Southern Ghats, and those

of Ceylon, Arracan, and Tenasserim ! It is true that it is, as yet, supposed

that the lichens of hot and humid climates are little productive of co-

Jouring matters ; but I know not on what this notion is founded. There

would seem to be as many probabilities the other way.

And when all the lichens, above alluded to, are examined, we have

other vast fields and these of great promise. I mean the great volcanic

plateau of Central India, from the basaltic rocks of Bundlecund to the

Toombuddra; the points where, as at Vizagapatam and Cape Comorin,

the granite meets the sea; those where, as in some parts of Malabar,

the trap rocks from the coast ; and the whole of the range of coast and

islands, of every formation, which form the eastern shores of the Bay.

We may in fact, from the infinitely varied condition of climate, rock, and

soil, which I can only hint at here, except every possible variety of moss

and lichen; and that many of these must be new and valuable.

Provided a lichen yields a strong and bright colour, we may always

hope that it may be turned to account. It will be noted, that all these,

which I have now examined, give colours which lie on the yellow side

of the red, and not on the blue side of it, which would produce the vio-

lets. I mention this, because there seems a notion abroad, that only those

which yield at once the violet-reds to the ammoniacal test are of any

value. In the instructions for Capt. Beechey, on his voyage to the Straits

of Magellan, this is indeed pretty nearly said in direct words. Now we

know that, from Lapland to the Mediteranean, the rocks of Europe

have been pretty nearly stripped of their lichens, by agents sent out from

the great silk and cotton-printing establishments, for much of the work

of which the rich Canary lichens are unsuitable, and far too dear. We may

hope to find some equal to, or indentical with these, but we may be

well content with the goodly supply of the secondary sorts, with our great

extent of territory must insure us when they are known. In no trade is

there so much competition and so many secrets as in the dying and print-

ing of silks and cottons; and I take it that none of the published notices

give any distinct idea of any thing, as to the value and kinds of lichens,

Leyond what is already well known in the business: the secrets are far

too valuable to be givenaway. The colouring principle moreover is not

the only part of the lichens to be turned to account, gummy matter,

extracted from them by Lord Dundonald’s process, supplies the place

of the costly gums in many printing processes.

There is an omission in all the printed notices which I have yet seen,

which in many cases might mislead persons testing lichens. An impor-

tant process—that of crushing or even pounding the moss or lichen to

powder—is wholly omitted ? A chemist would of course think of this ;

and Hellot, the inventor of the ammoniacal test, from whose writings all

have subsequently copied, mentions it ; but the usual directions lead

people to suppose that the lichen is merely to be broken to pieces and

infused, which may often be insufficient to develope the colour properly,

and thus lead to a wrong conclusion.

The single lichen Rocella has been a mine of wealth tothe Canaries

and Capede Verd islands. We have at least a fair chance that India

may produce one, if not more, of these productions of a valuable kind, but

nothing can be properly ascertained on the subject unless a considerable

quantity—say a maund or two of each promising sort—be sent home,

In the hands of European dyers and chemists, with their extensive re-

sources, great experience, and ample leisure, it is quite possible that results

may be obtained, which, our petty means, and want of experience and

leisure, are quite unequal to develope. I have, for example. strong reason

to believe that some of these lichens contain the ‘ Erythrine,’ or violet-red

principle of Heeren and Nees Von Esenbeck; but the research is one

of those in speculative chemistry, which I have neither means nor titne

to undertake, I shall nevertheless be happy at all times to contribute

my mite of aid, whenever it can be useful in the search for good dying

lichens.

LATE

on is

n the

nd in

than

ving

they

arely

some

time

1 by

thod

hing

rat

ipty,

ina

ined

‘ther

» the

1eeus

box,

cen-

box

ner

Brey,

7 of

ate=

auli

s of

lics

ith

ifli-

Guat A ertirer heamedla 3 2 In

Bhuchy: 50 4an

Leghh 3 0 In

42 Dughth 0G

Queastdstecteim Aametir /.$8

Yhectiness 0. Z

Caves of “Babirabad

West Face

Jublalatad PR.

Caves and. Tope of Bahratad

Southern Lace

Jiickl agit bal

Cre bt eFi

wa Wo

Found,

£3.

[ 3881 ]

On the Topes of Darounta, and Caves of Bahrabad.—By THE LATE

Licur. Picou, (Engineers.)

At a distance of six miles from Jullalabad in an easterly direction is

situated the village of Darounta, at the foot of the Koh-i-Surrukh on the

right bank of the Jullalabad river ; scattered through the village, and in

its environs are eleven topes, of various sizes, but all much smaller than

the tope of Manikyala: on some of these are evidences of their having

once borne external ornaments similar to those found on that tope; they

are built of stone and slate, cemented with mortar,and in some cases merely

with mud ; all of them possess a chamber from 4 to 8 feet square, and some

of them have in addition a shaft running down the centre; at the time

of my visiting them, six of the largest had already been opened by

Messrs. Masson and Honigberger; in opening the others, the method

pursued was, to cut, as it were, a slice from the lip to the bottom, reaching

tothe centre by this meams both the centrical shaft, and the chamber at

the bottom were laid open; out of the four thus opened, one was empty,

the contents of the other three were as follows :

Box No.1, was taken from the Tope-i-kutchera; it was found in a

chamber about six feet below the level of the ground; it was contained

in a rough case made of four slates (about a foot square) stuck together

with clay; these fell aside on being touched. Within the box were the

three coins, and a peice of rock crystal; the coins belong (2) to Ermeus

IIT. (2?) and one to Azos,

Box No. 2, was found in the Tope-i-fasl, it contained a small gold box,

in which were placed several pearls, with holes drilled through the cen-

tre, and some small peices of what appeared to be bone; the gold box

with its contents has been stolen from me.

Box No. 3, was found in the Tope-i-Hosen-amanat, covered in a manner

similar to Box No. 1, it contained a mixture of light red earth, and grey

ashes, and three coins, all of Azos.

There can be little doubt but that these topes were built in memory of

the illustrious dead; without reasoning from analogy founded on the state-

ments of a late traveller in the crimea, regarding the sepulchral tumuli

discovered in the vicinity of the ancient Panticapeum, the metropolis of

the famous Mithridates Entapor, the evidence furnished by the relics

found in the topes, would irresistibly lead to such a conclusion ; with

regard to the era when these topes were constructed, it is more diffi-

382 Onthe Topes of Darounta, and Caves of Bahrabad. [No. 113.

cult to give a rational conjecture, but it is at least worthy of remark,

that more of the coins formed in them, are of later date than the Bac-

trian kings.

Opposite to the village of Darounta, and overhanging the left bank of

the Jullalabad river, are the caves of Bahrabad ;—these have been ex-

cavated on the plan of a town, but on a smaller scale, there is a charson

or meeting of four roads ; that running to the north is the longest, and

from it, five chambers open, these receive light from apertures imme-

diately overhanging the river, which runs about 100 feet below them ;

the passage running to the south leads to a Dallan or Hall, which also

opens over theriver, the passage to the west leads to the river, while

that to the east is the general instance to the whole plan. The chambers

are all lofty, airy, and well lighted, but the passages are very low and

narrow. The cave mentioned by Honigberger as the Fil-kbana, is a little

tothe east, and separated from the principal set of caves. The only

ant iquity discovered in them, was a small slab of rough reddish marble,

about 5 inches square ; on this slab was executed in demi-relievo, a pair

of human feet, the toes, &c. being all distinctly marked ; round the feet,

are four Lotuses, one at each angle of the slab executed in bas-relievo.

It is said that similar slabs have been found in Ceylon, if so, a presump-

tion may be drawn, that if the caves of Bahrabad do not owe their origin

to the Buddhists, they were at least at one time inhabited by them.

R. P.

Notr.—The objects given inthe annexed plate were presented to the

Asiatic Society, with the above memoir by the late Lt. Pigou of the

Engineers, through our late V. P. Col. Macleod, in his letter to whom

Lt. Pigou writes as follows of the gold box (unfortunately lost,) which

was the most valuable in all respects of the remains discovered at

Darounta.

‘I have the pleasure herewith to forward two boxes, and some coins

taken from the Jullalabad topes; the three boxes, I had previously pro-

mised to Dr. Athinem to whom it is now made over, it was similar in shape

to the box No. I, but not quite so large. I regret that the small gold box,

with its contents, has been stolen, as it was the greatest curiosity of all,

but the precious metal excited the cupidity of my servants, who have

made away withit. The marble slab is too heavy to send down by dak,

and I have not got it with me; indeed I am not sure that it has not been

lost, but it is possible that it may have been left in my hut at Jullalabad.

Talso send youa rough sketch of the Bahrabad caves, which will give -

1841.] On the Topes of Darounta, and Caves of Bahrabad. 383

an idea of the place, Iam sorry I have not time to make a more elaborate

drawing, but must forward it rough, just as it was sketched.”

*The death of the writer of the above, by the premature explosion of a

fuse, which he had with equal coolness, and gallantry laid to the gate of a

fort in the Bajowur territory, during the recent employment there of

Col. Shelton’s brigade, has destroyed all hope of the recovery of even the

slab. The presence on it, however, of the most unequivocal of Boodhist

emblems, obviates all doubt as to the nature of the caves, were there not

ample reason for coming tothe same conclusion on other grounds, I

alluded (As. Soc. Journ. No. 109, p. 97) to the Darounta and Bahrabad

discoveries, with reference to those recently made at Kanari by Dr. Bird ;

the caves of Kanari we know, from the most authentic sources (Travels of

the “ Chinese Boodhist Priest Ka—Hian.” A.D. 399. M. Remusat’s

Translation) to have been a favorite place of Boodhist pilgrimage; the

Boodhist character of those at Bahrabad, is proved by the presence in

them of emblem peculiar to Boodh ; the topes at Kanari yield an inscribed

plate which records the dedication of the place ‘in honor of the most

powerful, very wise, and superior Bhagavana Sakya Muni, while ‘copper

urns, a ruby, a pearl, small pieces of gold, and a small gold box, a

silver box, and some ashes’ were also found there: at Bahrabad no

inscription is discovered, but ‘the copper coins, and the rock crystal’

(types of the wealth of a poorer people) the ‘small gold box in which

were placed several pearls with holes drilled through the centre, and

some small pieces of what appeared to be bone,’ all go to prove that the

races, which at points so far apart, have left these traces of their usages,

and their religion were equally Boodhist, although the constructors of

the Darounta tope would appear to be the ruder, and less wealthy of

the two, They are able it is true to deposit gold, but more sparingly ;

ruby is replaced by common crystal ; a stone vase, is used in place of

the copper urn, and copper coins supply the bullion of the Kanari tope.

The mausolea are evidently those of persons of inferior means, although

in the character, and nature of the deposits, we trace an intimate con-

nection with the more gorgeous relics of Manikyala. Mr, Piddington

has obliged me, with the following notice of the Darounta vases, and

their contents.

‘Both the vases are turned out of a fine-grained potstone, and have

the marks of the tool (particularly inside) as fresh upon them as if

. ™ Three of my correspondents and contributors in Affyhanistan, and among them,

not the least valued, Captain E. Conolly, P. B,, Lord and Lt, Pigou, were killed in

action within the short space of 8 months.

384 On the Topes of Darounta, and Caves of Bahrabad. [No. 113.

made yesterday! The larger one has, beneath its foot, the oblong

mortise by which it was secured on the lathe. Their dimensions are as

follows :

Height, Greatest ex- Thickness,

Inches. terior dia- about Ins.

meter, Ins.

No. 1, Large Vase..... » nc Othet 3°0 3°2 0°4

Sniall, Vasew:;; iaaat valde 0:9 1°45 02

The state of the coins is curious: three of them, Nos. 4, 5, and 6 of the

drawing, are completely encrusted with crystalised carbonate of copper,

with a few detached scales of a whitish oxide, which may be owing to an

arsenical or zinc alloy in the copper? or to carbonate of lime having

penetrated to the coins? though this last seems nearly impossible ; they

are in very minute quantity, and it would not be worth while to disfigure

the relics by picking any off for examination.

The remaining three coins Nos. 1, 2, 3, are marked as having been

‘found in the box,’ and they look so clean that we are inclined to suppose

they have been really cleaned; especially, as the metal is much eaten

and worn. No. 2, has still traces of the carbonate of copper on its face.

No. 3, is the only one which we can suspect of having undergone the

action of fire. but the boxes bear no trace of this, and I am inclined to

think, that they have not been subjected to it. The rock-crystal orna-

‘ment requires no particular remark’,—-beyond, I may add, the peculiar

trouble, which has been taken in perforating it; it resembles exactly in

size, form, and mode of perforation, the uncut emerald, now universally

worn, by native chiefs and gentlemen of rank. appended like a drop to the

surpéch, or head jewel. The people who could have bestowed so much

labour upon so common an object, must have been singularly ignorant

of the more precious stones, and I might point to this slight index, as

affording some proof that the deposit at Darounta, was made by the first

leaders of a new race of conquerors, who subsequently left monuments of —

their rule, then a more polished, and a wealthier people, in the noble

works at Manikyala. There too (As. Soc. Jour., vol. III. p. 563) we see,

as on a smaller scale at Kanari, the practice of placing inscriptions in

the tope obtained, showing perhaps the progress of science in conjunction

' with that of wealth.

An examination of the coins before us will lead to the ascertainment,

with tolerable accuracy, of the date at which the Darounta Topes were

constructed. The coins are, No. 1 of Azes: No. 2 is similar to No. 12 (As.

Soc. Jour. Vol, HI. Pl. X XXIII.) of those found in the Manikyalan

—

1841.] Onihe Topes of Darounta, and Caves of Bahrabad. 385

Tope by Mons. Court, in so far at least as the figure and attitude of Her-

cules is concerned ; the head on the obverse of the coin is too indistinct

to admit of very accurate identification, but Iam convinced that the two

are similar; Mr. James Prinsep remarked on the difference obtaining

between this coin, and the rest of those found with it at Manikyala, and

(As. Soc. Jour. Vol. VII. p. 646) he afterwards observes of this coin ;

‘on the reverse of the coins of the second Hermaios (or perhaps the

third) having a Hercules for the reverse, commences another series of

native names following what we have designated the Kadphises, or Ka-

daphes Group.’ It is in faet a coin of Kadaphes, who invading, and sub-

duing the country of the last Hermaios, adopted in part, according to the

wont of the barbarians, the effigy of his coins, affording a strong contrast in

its classicality, when placed, as at Manikyala, in juxta-position with the

peculiar coinage of the Kadphesis and Kanerkis, by whom the types of Gre-

cian domination were foregone. The presence at Darounta of this coin,

(or coins, for No. 3 seems to be a duplicate though indistinct) with those

of Azes, goes directly to support the truth of Professor Lassen’s Chrono-

logical Deductions as respects that King, and his immediate predecessor.

‘The coins of Azes,’ he observes, ‘are so closely connected with Greek

types, that he must undoubtedly bea proximate successor of the Greek

Kings, * * * * * *; he must be considered as a cotemporary of Her-

maios.’ (Lassen on Bactrian History, As. Soc. Jour. Vol. IX. p. 662.)

But Mr. James Prinsep connects Kadaphes with Hermaios; when there-

fore we find their coins together, as in the instance now before us, the

advent of the Saces under Kadaphes, to the destruction of the remains

Greco-Bactrian power, and the succession of Azes shortly afterwards,

(who founded the great empire of that people) may the more readily be

admitted. Professor Lassen gives the following dates, about which we

may assign the period of the construction of the Darounta Tope.

The Grecian Empire of Hermaios subdued by Kadaphes about. 120 B.C.

Great Empire of the Saces, under Azes about............. wpb de..C.

miemees Succeeds him about ys: a: ietiojalatc sisle.0)"Sidrela du Se ee 90 B.C.

I need hardly add that to Kadhpises (a Parthian) Professor Lassen

assigns a reign about 100. A. D. subsequent to the expulsion by Vikra-

maditya of Malwa of the Saces, from the countries along the Indus, A. D.

56, and a re-invasion of the land by new hordes of conquerors.

The coin No, 4 is so much disfigured by oxidation, that the artist, who,

in the plate before us, tried for the first time the difficult task of delineat-

ing on paper the semi-defaced design of a coin utterly new to him, has

386 Report on Productions and Manufactures. [No. 113.

been a little misled. It is simply, like Nos. 5 and 6, the ordinary mounted

horseman with outstretched arm to the left, and fillets depending from

the head. The only coin in tolerable preservation is No, 1.

Report on Productions and Manufactures in the dis!rict of Hunum-

koondah, in the dominion of H. H. the Nizam of Hyderabad. By

A. M. Wacker Esq. M. D., Assistant Surgeon. Communicated

from the Political Secretariat,Government of India.

On the 12th instant, I had the honor of reporting my arrival at

Hunumkoondah, since that time I have been employed in observing

and noting the most important facts in reference to the object for which

I am employed, and particularly in making inquiries respecting the

production and manufactures in this part of the Nizam’s dominions.

As far asI could, I have trusted little to mere oral information, but

have endeavoured to authenticate by actual observation, whatever appeared

to me interesting or useful in nature or in art.

The face of the country in this neighbourhood presents a striking

similarity to that in the vicinity of Hyderabad. Here are the same

rounded, dark colored, herbless eminences, solitary, or in groups of con-

siderable range, rising to the height of three or four hundred feet with

the same ruinous appearance of the lower hills, and the fantastic piling

of one boulder of rock on another.

The tank, with its mound of earth or masonry and the sheet of verdure

which it nourishes and maintains, serve to complete the resemblance of

general form and outline, nor does amore minute examination detect

many decrepancies. The surface rock, throughout, is granite, usually of

a greyish colour, but varying from a dingey white toa reddish and more

rarely to a blackish hue, according to the colour and predominance of

each of its constituent parts, quartz, felspar and hornblende. Where

quartz is prevalent, the rock is close grained and compact, with little

tendency to wear, while on the other hand the most superficial examina-

tion will shew that the excess of the two last, and more par a of

the felspar, is the certain cause of decay.

In one locality in the village of Nagwazum, five miles to the north of

this, so abundant is the homblende and felspar, to the exclusion of quartz

in several specimens of the rocks, that they might be called sienitic

1841.] Report on Productions and Manufactures. 387

greenstone. I have nowhere seen mica take the place of the hornblende,

hence the whole formation might be more properly termed sienitic than

granite, particularly if the latter term is to be restricted to a determinate

compound, Sienitic granite, however, a compromise between the two,

would appear the better and most intelligible term for the rock as it

exists here.

In a spur of hills running north south near the vilage, of Erapully ten

miles to the west of Hunumkoondah, I remarked that the granite becomes

stratified or in other words passes Into gneiss.

At the foot of these hills the iron ore, afterwards to be described, is

found.

I have not met with lime-stone yet, but from its being very commonly

employed by the natives, I shouid supp ‘se that it existed in considerable

quantity. From their account it would appear to form nests in the granite;

the soil is of four descriptions, first the Chilka, a red gritty soil little

fitted, from the coarseness of its particles, for the purpose of agriculture.

2nd. Lalzumeen, a soil also of a reddish hue, and evidently the former

jn a more comminuted state; thisis put beyond doubt by the ant hills

formed on the Chilka soil being composed of this earth.

We thus see that these insects, usually looked on as troublesome and

destructive pests, are not without their use in a grand natural operation.

The peculiar acid, the formic, which is their chief agent, acts on the

alkali and lime and most probably on the silica of the rockdebris, pul-

verizing it, and facilitating in all probability fresh combinations ; the soil

when manured is fitted for the reception of all kinds of crops without

reference to season.

3rd. The Regur soil. As far as I have yet observed, this soil is of less

frequent occurrence than the two last mentioned ; as elsewere it is parti-

cularly adapted for cotton cultivation, and is generally esteemed the

richest of soils. It requires little or no manure: yet the ryots are in the

habit, previous to cropping, to let sheep loose upon it, it being supposed

that their urine is very advantageous to its fertility: this is exceedingly

probable as the salts which the urine contains, and the compounds they

form, must be very efficacious in loosening the soil, and preventing the

formation of clods, the common drawback of argillaceous soils.

4th. The Talao-ka-jumeen. The black soil found in the bottom of

tanks. This is little esteemed, being a stiff clay, little permeable by mois-

ture; it abounds in fresh water shells and at the beginning of the dry sea-

son, its surface is incrusted with carbonate of soda, of which mineral large

| quantities are collected for soap making. A property, common to all

388 Report on Productions and Manufactures. No. 113.

these soils. is, that they effervesce with acids, thereby indicating the pre-

sence of carbonate of lime.

As far as our geological knowledge can lead us, the presumption is, that

these soils in all their varieties are nothing more than the decomposed

sienitic rock, and considering the number of simple bodies, of which this

is composed, viz. Oxygen, Silica, Aluminium, Calcium, Potassium, Sodium

Iron, and perhaps Manganese, and the ever varying proportions of its more

immediate ingredients, we cannot wonder at, although we may fail to ex-

plain their striking diversity. Our notions of what may be termed the

chemistry of nature are yet very vague and unsatisfactory, for an appeal

to the crucible, electrophorus, and the whole machinery and reagents of the

laboratory, has not always been successful in elucidating natural pheno-

mena strictly chemical. Let us rest on the negative evidence of the im-

possibility of discovering, with our present lights, any other source for

these soils than the rocks subjacent or in their vicinity,until strong proofs

be afforded of their origin elsewhere. We cannot class among these the

opinion, well nigh become an axiom with certain Indian naturalists, that

the Regur, soil is always due to the disintegration of basalt; as for this

purpose we must bring the Kishna or Godavery over heights and ravines,

that existed periods of time anterior to a secondary trap rock being

thrown up.

When the ground is left uncultivated, even for the short space of a

year or two, it never fails to be covered with a low jungle, composed

chiefly of the Cassia auriculata and Zizyphus microphylla, the former

plant is hardy and luxuriant, and isin every respect the peculiar enemy

of the cultivator, who certainly does not take the most effectual means to

rid his fields of it, contenting himself with burning it or cutting it down

to the level of the soil instead of rooting it up. Of the jungle trees by

far the most common is the Butea frondosa, now in full blossom, which

with the Bombax heptaphyllum, and the Erythrina Indica stand out as

the most garish of the forest trees. The Garuga pinnata, Hyperanthera

Moringa, Cassia fistula, Annona reticulata, Melia Azedirachta, Bauhinia

parviflora, Capparis trifoliata, Ficus Indica, Ficus religiosa, Bombax

gossipinum, a species with yellow flowers, Feronia Elephantum, with

four or five species of Acacia make up the list of the more common jungle

trees. The Borassus flabelliformis, (the Palengra tree) is every where

seen, which with the Phonix sylvestris, also common, yields in great.

abundance the well known Toddy. Of the common jungle creepers two or

three species of Asclepias, and Capparis, and the Combretum rotundifolium,

are at this season, the most conspicuous.

1841.] of Hunumkoonda. 389

The Mango and Tamarind trees are common about villages.

The grain chiefly cultivated is rice, of which no fewer than eight va-

rieties are sown. Of these the beetee wadroo is the most cultivated,

being both a rain and a dry weather crop, it is a middle sized grain with

a husk of a light brown colour; two of the other kinds are much

smaller grains with white husks, the other five differ in size, colour of

husks, &c.

Little of the rice raised is consumed by the inhabitants, but sent to

Hydrabad forming the principal export ; in the districts its consumption

is limited to the richer Mahomedans, Hindoo Zemindars, Brahmins, &c. ;

the poorer classes chiefly derive their subsistence from the rain or

punass crops.

The principal punass or khureef crops, are as follows :—of grains, An-

dropogon Sorghum (two varieties of jooarry, red and white; the first

only properly a punass crop, Andropogon Sacharatum), Bajree, Paspa-

lum scrobiculatum ; Triticum wheat, a red sort sparingly cultivated; Pa-

nicum Italicum, Italian millet; Cynosurus Corocanus (Raggy), and Zea-

Mays. Of oil plants, Sesamum orientale, black and white, Ricinus commu-

nis, two kinds,

Of Legumes, Dolichos Lablab, Dolichos gladiatus, Dolichos fabefor-

mis, Phaseolus mungo, Hibiscus cannabinus (Umbarah), a hemp plant,

(leaves used by the natives as greens) and a variety of cotton called

Salkapas. The rubbee crop consists of white jowarree, Cicer arietinum,

Phaseolus mungo (a black variety), Crotolaria juncea (the sunn plant),

and cotton, sugar, and paun. Piper betel is also cultivated to a limited

extent, and also tobacco of an inferior quality. It is remarked that

tobacco irrigated from a well of brackish water is superior in flavor to

that irrigated from sweet water.

This can be easily understood, as a common means with fraudulent

tobacconists of heightening the flavor of their tobacco is by dipping it

in a saline solution. The garden produce consists of red pepper, brinjals,

onions, garlic, carrots, radish, sweet potatoes, dill, coriander and bishop’s-

| weed seeds, mustard seed for oil, fenugreek and some speices of amaran-

thus for greens, they use also the flowers of the aeschynomone grandiflora

as a potherb.

Melons, cucumbers, and gourds, as in other parts of India, forma con-

siderable article of diet, particularly in the dry season.

The village cattle are small, and at this season of the year far from

well flavoured, but is said that a stout breed of bullocks is not to be met

390 Report on Productions and Manufactures. [No. 118.

with in the neighbourhood. Flocks of sheep, black and white, are every

where seen.

The breed of horses, small, ill-shaped ponies, is very indifferent.

Wool meets a ready market in the districts being brought up for the

carpet weaving of Warungal, and the manufacture of Kumlees; a small

quantity is sent to Chandah in the Nagpore territory, its price at present

is nine seers (the seer of 82 Halle Siccas) a rupee, white wool is 25 per

cent. more valuable than black.

Hides were formerly exported, their price varies from twelve annas to

(2) two rupees each. The ceasing of the export of hides within the last

few years, is a favourable index of the extention of agriculture, as leather

is employed in a certain quantity in almost every implement of farming.

The iron ore is found at the foot of a range of hills running N. and

S. about ten miles to the west of Hunumkoonda.

It exists in the form of fragments, often of a rhomboidal shape

imbedded in a red clay, and accompanied by pieces of gueiss and quartz.

It is evident that the neighbouring hill is the source from whence it is

derived, and I have little doubt that a skilful miner with some trouble

(for the gueiss hill, unlike the granite, is clad with a pretty deep alluvion)

might come upon the original bed of ore, of which these are mere detached

portions ; as it is, the demand for metal is sufficiently met by collecting

and smelting these fragments. It is said that the Iron tract occupies a

space of ten begahs, the greater part of which is covered by a woody jungle.

The shafts are of various depths from 10 to 30 feet ; into these the miner

descends, and detaches by means of a small pickaxe whatever mineral he

meets with from the red clay containing them, he determines by their

weight whether they contain ore or not, and thus fills his basket. He

can gather during the day six or eight small baskets full, one hundred

and twenty of which are sold to the smelter for arupee. The ore is

reduced in the adjacent villages in the usual rude way so well known.

It occupies six men for two days to turn out a maund (12 seers) of metal.

The Iron is brought up by Bunyas, for exportation, for R. 14 a maund,

and is sold to other customers for two or three annas more. The ore

is of that kind usually called magnetic iron ore, and black iron ore being

a compound of protoxide and peroxide of iron; it possesses the magne-

tic power but slightly. 1 have made a number of trials, and have found

no specimen with magnetism enough to pick upa small needle. The

circumstance too of the cutlers here having in their possession pieces of

magnetic iron ore, as heir looms and talismans, sufficiently prove that this

1841.] of Hunumkoonda. 391

virtue in a high degree must be rare indeed. The Sp. gr. ranges

from 4-3 to 4-8, which would give nearly an average of 4,5. From this

I am inclined to think, that malgre the deficiency of attractive power,

the ore is a tolerable rich one ; I may add that of all iron ores the black

is the richest ; by possessing it Sweden is still able to surpass great

Britain in the manufacture of the metal.

Besides the morinda citrifolia the wool dye, which is cultivated on the

regur soil, the Oldenlandia umbellata (Cherwell or chay root) grows wild

here in great plenty. A man and his wife can easily gather forty bundles

in a day, which they sell to the dyer for 4 annas; it is employed

to dye cotton of a red and orange colour. The Oldenlandia is cultivated

on the Coromandel Coast. It is very probable that the dying properties

of the wild, excel that of the cultivated, for dyes often follow the same

law which renders the smell and taste of the wild plant, growing in a

state of nature, stronger than those carefully attended.

The dying process is very tedious, occupying forty days and upwards.

_ Five or six pieces of Indigofera are met with here, but one species only,

_ the Indigofera czrulea, is used for the preparation of Indigo. It is col-

| lected in the rains when the dye iscommonly made, the method of prepar-

| ing which is sufficiently simple. A strong decoction is made of the plant,

| leaves, flowers, pods and twigs, being all indiscriminately thrust into a

}

_gurrah; when this is hot an infusion of Eugenia jambolana (rose apple

| tree) the indigo is immediately precipitated and the superincumbent water

_ being drawn off, is dried in the sun.

_ The native plan of mounting the indigo vat merits attention: a potash

ley is prepared from the ashes of the Euphorbia Tirucalli (milk bush

hedge) and lime Jey, mixing them together and then filtering. In this

ley seeds of the Trigonella fanum-grecum and Cassia Tora are boiled,

and the liquor being strained, is poured into the water drawn off, after the

precipitation of the Indigo, and the Indigo itself is then put in and some

‘more potash ley is added,

ln three or four hours the fermentation is perfected, and the vat fitted

for the purposes of the dyer. The theory of this vat is very obvious, ex-

tractive matter derived from the liquor in which the Indigo was first

boiled, with the sugar, starch, and mucilage, of the two leguminous seeds,

‘cause a fermentation by which the Indigo is rendered soluble in the

alkaline solution.

The process is more simple than that usually followed by dyers in

Europe, and is in perfect accordance with every rule of practical chemis-

)

392 Report on Preductions and Manufactures, ge. [No. 113.

try. There is no superfluity, and no waste ; and on the whole it is a most

favorable specimen of native ingenuity and skill.

Indigo from Masulipatam, the produce of Bengal, finds its way to this

place, and is sold for the same price as the Indigo manufactured here.

The carpet manufacture for which Warungal or rather the villages,

Muswarrah, &c., in its close vicinity are celebrated, does not appear to

be an indigenous art.

A distinct tradition exists of its introduction, and also the method of

preparing and drying the materials that compose it, being due to the

Mahometans, facts countenanced, if not substantiated, by the present

weavers and dyers being uniformly of that religious persuasion.

The carpet loom is nothing more than the common native loom placed

vertically instead of horizontally. The waft is of thick strong cotton

twist, being arranged by no wafting mill, but by one of the workmen

going round and round two stakes fixed in the ground and dropping the

thread at each, as he passes; in the loom it is kept on the stretch by

two strong billets of wood, the threads being approached by separate

loops of cotton fixed to a bamboo, which is elevated or depressed at the

will of the weaver. The worsted is held in the left hand, and a crescent

shaped knife in the right, the fingers of both being left free; the inner

thread of the waft is then seized, the worsted wound round the outer,

crossed on itself, and the extremity drawn out, by which it is made to

descend in the form of an open figure of eight to be snipped by

the curved knife. It is superfluous to say that this is the work of an

instant; when the pattern is new or difficult, the order and position

of the worsted threads is changed by a coryphoeus in a kind of rhyme.

On a row being completed, the warp, in the shape of a cotton thread dyed

dark brown by the bark of the Swietenia Febrifuga, is forced down by

means of an iron toothed comb, in form something like an adze; the

whole is completed by cutting the worsted to its proper length by a large

scissors held steadily against the waft. It would rejoice a Manchester

or Glasgow manufacturer to learn that infant labour is employed and pre-

ferred in Warungal carpet weaving, it being averred that their more limber

finger joints are best fitted for the finer parts of the work, but cupidity all

over the world is ingenious in finding excuses, and is ever ready to con-

found the expedient with the right. Dried springs of Toolsee (ocymum

sanctum) and bunches of Lepidigathis Indica are attached to the loom

frames; the workmen say that they make their labour go on more clever-

ly. Twelve different worsteds are employed.

1841.] Roree in Khyrpoor. 393

The blue is produced from Indigo, the yellow, the sulphur yellow,

from boiling the sulphur yellow in water impregnated with carbonate of

soda, in which alittle turmeric has been mixed, the deepest yellow is

produced by dipping the same in potash ley. The reds are all produced

by lac dye dissolved by tamarind juice, with sulphate of alumina and

potash asa mordant. The depth of colour depends in 3 cases upon the

original black, brown, or white colour of the wool; in the fourth on the

length of time the last description of wool was allowed to remain in the

dye. The greens are produced by immersion in Indigo, and then in polas

or turmeric, their degrees also depend onthe original colour of the wool.

Bengal Indigo is always preferred to the home-manufactured by the worst-

ed dyers, cotton carpeting is also prepared in the same way as the woollen.

The carpet weavers are described as given up to indolence and dissipa-

tion, to both of which they appeared on a late occasion most anxious to

minister by endeavouring to establish a monopoly. There are at present

two hundred looms working ; at the village of Hoosun-purti, five miles

from this, a good many looms are employed in weaving tusser or jungle

silk. As this letter is already too long! shall defer till another occasion

the description of this manufacture, and the rearing of the insects producing

the raw material. I cannot conclude this without mentioning an import

to this place, viz. English cotton yarn, of an orange colour, which comes

from Masulipatam to be used by the cotton weavers in the borders of saries,

punchees, &c.; the reason they assign for its employment is the quick

fading of their native yellows; in all probability the English thread is

dyed with fustic wood (Morus Tinctoria) the most lasting of yellow dyes.

Be this as it may, its use bodes ought but good to the Indian manufac-

turer.

Roree in Khyrpoor; its Population and Manufactures.—By

Caprain G.E. WestmMacort, 37th Regiment, Bengal N. I.

Roree or more correctly Lohuree, the ancient Lohurkot, is a town of

considerable antiquity, and said to have been founded with Bukur, about

the middle of the 7th century of the Hejira. Itis built on asteep lime-

stone ridge that sweeps in a crescent form along the east bank of the

Indus. The strata of the rock is horizontal, and exhibits marks every-

| where of the the action of the river, which must have risen formerly at

least fifty feet above its present level in the season of floods, and washed

the foundation of the houses. Inthe sandy bays, creeks, and hollows aban-

394 Roree in Khyrpoor. [No. 113.

doned by the stream, date and peepul trees grow luxuriantly, and rocks

worn by the water, and shattered and broken into gigantic masses, were

submerged at no very remote period. Along the base of the hills, on both

banks of the river, the land bears the appearance of having been under

water. The remains of a stone and brick wall, or quarry, built evidently

to oppose the encroachments of the river, runs along the edge of the

precipitous ridge which supports the town, and under it is an extensive

cavern. Clay buttresses shore up the houses, which rise to four and five

stories, and being composed of frail materials and badly built, threaten

momentarily to topple over into the great road leading to the watering

place, which is usually thronged with people.

The inhabitants affirm that the periodical rains have failed the last

twenty years, and that the river rises less annually. An old Bunneah

pointed to a spot, which he recollects to have seen covered by the river,

and is now removed at least six feet above its level in the floods. To

this cause partly, the people attribute the decline of the prosperity of

Sind, and the extortions of the Talpoor Beloochees and the large ex-

pense incurred in digging canals and cuts for irrigation, swallow up

the entire produce of their industry.

The Bunneah remembers upwards of fifty houses in Roree, being

washed down about twenty years since by rain, and I can easily fancy

the havoc a storm would make among the frail and ruined tenements in

the town. The Indus rose, within his recollection, ten or twelve feet

higher than it does now; for the last four years scarcely any rain has

fallen, and grain has become progressively dearer, but there was a plenti-

ful supply in 1839, compared with the quantity that fell in the preceding

seasons.

The lime ridge behind Roree is without a blade of vegetation, it

swells into peaks and eminences, and stretches several miles inland, and

along the river, to the south. Some of the hills are isolated,—and inter-

sected by little valleys, and some are capped by tombs, shrines, and other

buildings in ruins. These parched and arid hills are in powerful con-

trast with the deep verdure of date groves and bajree fields that are

scattered in rich luxuriance over the low grounds towards the capital of

the principality. The l/edgah of Roree is about five hundred feet above

the river, and few spots in the Eastern world surpass the view from it in

beauty, and present a greater variety of objects. In front of the spectator

are two picturesque little islands; the one covered with date palms, the

other with tombs and mausolea, shooting up into innumerable pointed

spires of glazed porcelain. The fort of Bukur, beyond it, embraces a

1841.] Roree in Khyrpoor. 399

vast oval rock in the midst of the Indus, and exhibits on this face twenty-

three bastions of different forms resting on the edge of the stream; and

date and peepul trees spring from the naked rock, and fix their roots in

the foundation of the embattled curtain. On an elevated citadel in the

middle of Bukur, floats the small blood-red flag of the Meer of Khyrpoor,

emblazoned with the national emblem of a rampant tiger, and near it on

a loftier staff, the more gorgeous standard of Britain, fourfold the size

of the banner of the Meer; above and below the fort, are small wooded

islands, inhabited by holy beggars, who are fed and attended by votaries

from both sides of the water. The eye delights to rest on fertile groves of

lofty date trees, mixed with vineyards and mango trees, and the Indus is

seen meandering, far away in the distance, in snaky folds, through a per-

fectly flat and verdant country. The heights of Sukhur are a prominent

feature in the landscape, and every hill crowned with a tent, a tomb, or a

ruin. A battery of seven guns is in the midst of the British camp, and

to the west of it the decayed mosque, the sainted shrine and minaret of

Meer Masoom. The living objects in the foreground of the picture com-

municated to it, at the time of my visit, additional interest and anima-

tion ; an encampment of several hundred camels occupied a small valley

leading to the river, and their drivers had tents of black goat and camels

hair raised on sticks. Belooch horsemen, with flowing beards, each in

his national cap of coloured cotton and accoutred with sword, shield, and

matchlocks, roce slowly among the hills, and asses heavily laden with

grass and wood for the citizens, wound up the steep rocky ascent into

the town. The monotonous song of the washerman filled the air as he

beat garments of many colours upon planks, and troops of Hindoo and

-Moosulman women bathed at the different ghats, each of the former, on

_ her way home, carried a vessel of river water to lave, with pious reverence

“the roots of a peepul tree, and the emblem of Muhadeva which stood

beneath it.

) Most of the houses in Roree rise to three and four floors, and some

have five, and standing on elevated ground they assume an appearance

of great vastness to the eye. They have no ventilators or towers on the

roofs, to catch the wind like the houses in Lower Sind and Arabia ;

‘but the walls of the upper chambers are pierced with small windows with-

out regard to symmetry. They are not glazed, but some of them in

‘the harems of the principal residents, are filled with fine gratings of wood

or mortar; some are open, and others furnished like the doors

with folding shutters, which close badly, and are secured on the

outside with a hasp and padlock; they are not painted any more than

396 Roree in Khyrpoor. — [No. 113.

the doors. The roofs are surrounded by a light rail or ballustrade, and

have spouts to carry off water. The upper story has sometimes a wooden

balcony, supported on frail posts, and the houses of the rich are con-

tained in a walled court, along with buildings and sheds for servants.

The rooms have pannelled ceilings tastefully carved, as are the window-

frames and door posts. It forms the only ornament, and there is scarcely

any furniture ; coarse woollen carpets, and mats, supply the place of

tables and chairs; some houses are constructed of burnt brick plas-

tered with clay; when sun-dried bricks are used, they are not laid

horizontally, but in a sloping or diagonal direction, (v. Fig. 1,) and the

upper walls, which are extremely thin, are any kind of timber placed

without regard to regularity, with tamarisk twigs between them, and

plastered with clay, and chopped straw. Lime abounds every where ;

but it is not the custom in Roree nor other parts of Sind to white-wash

the outer and inner walls of houses, and they have a dingy uncomfort-

able appearance. The upright posts are chiefly tamarisk, fixed into

horizontal beams of the same, and set ina stone foundation to preserve

them from the depredations of white ants. Roofs are flat, and built of

slight timbers, covered with reeds, and when reeds are not procurable,

mats are substituted. The frame work is acacia, date, a whitish co-

loured wood called Bank or Buhan, and any other kind of timber; the

acacia is scarce at Roree and Sukhur, and the date never used for door

posts and pillars. The people put on the rafters a layer of */eer,. then

tchupree, and thirdly a kind of reed called Gondnee (Typha), upon which

they spread a coat of fat’ yellowish clay (peela mutiee) mixed with

chopped straw and the sweepings of houses. Those who can afford it

mix wheat chaff with the clay, and when itis dry lay over it a compost

of cowdung and clay, to fill up crevices. Dry cowdung is sometimes —

put on the reeds, and covered with chopped straw and clay ; a roof thus

formed is about acubit thick ; the wood and reeds occupy eight inches,

cowdung the same, andclay two inches. ‘The people assured me, that

a roof properly constructed will endure half a century, and resist for

twenty years the small quantity of rain which falls in Sind; a roof

commonly stands ten years without requiring repairs, but the mats are

soon rotted by wet. The cost of building a good shop, of burnt brick

on the ground floor in Roree, is 400 or 500 Rs., and double the sum if

a story be added to it; a large shop may be constructed of sun-dried

* The upper stem of moonj grass called in India Sirkee.

+ The thick part of the stem of moonj grass called in India Surkunday

1841.] Roree in Khypoor. 397

brick for 300 Rs., and a small one for 50 or 100 Rs; most of the houses

in Roree are calcined brick. To prevent insects penetrating the floors

of warehouses, which are intended to receive grain and goods, they are

sometimes paved with blocks of stone which may be procured in any

quantity in the neighbourhood; the stones are covered with clay, and

plastered with cowdung, and a thick coat of coarse salt strewed over it.

Houses above one story, belong to, and are occupied by one family, and

when the children marry, they remove to another dwelling; all houses

of this description, were built by wealthy merchants and bankers, before

the reign of the Talpooras, and through their oppression many have

been deserted by the proprietors Families occupy the lower floors in

the cold months, and remove above in summer; they cook and light

fires, above and below, and there are no chimnies for the smcke to escape.

The great height of the houses, and narrow streets and lanes, exclude the

sun’s rays, and the heat in the lower stories is quite insupportable to

an European in summer. A single narrow door gives admittance to a

gloomy and dirty parlour, which is not furnished with windows nor any

aperture for light and air; to get atthe door you mount an earthen stair

with a narrow terrace at top. Poor people rarely use bedsteads,* and

have neither pillows nor sheets; they spread their mats at night on

the house tops, or terrace in front of their doors, and cover themselves

with a blue cotton cloth, which serves them for a garment in the day

time. Others lock up their goods in a back chamber, and sleep in their

shops, which are open towards the street.

: The principal thoroughfare leading up from the Indus is paved with

bricks laid edge ways, and some of the lanes and passages in the town,

are as narrow and dirty as the closes in the old city of Edinburgh. The

_bazars are covered in with mats like those of Arabia and Egypt, to

Keep off the sun’s rays, but so much neglected that they are a public

| nuisance, rather than acomfort, and a horseman cannot ride under them

without coming in contact with sticks and cotton straw, which cover

him with dust. The interior of houses, is extremely dirty ; dunghills

‘fill the open spaces and suburbs of the town, and it presents altogether

-ascene of vreat squalidness and filth: here are neither swine, vultures,

nor storks to devour the offal as in Indian villages, but loathsome, mangy,

| and half-starved dogs are numerous, and almost the only scavengers.

' * A common bedstead, laced with a string of moonj grass, costs eight or ten annas

(12 or 16 pence).

“Dp

398 Roree in Khypoor. [No. 115.

Roree contains about forty mosques, where prayers are recited, and

more than double the number ruined and deserted. The great mosque

stands on an elevated platform in the N. K. quarter of the town, and

was built, according to a Persian inscription on the front, in the year 992

of the Hejira, or 265 years ago, by Futteh Khan Lieutenant of the

Emperor Akbur. It is asolid, heavy looking pile of red brick, covered

by three domes, and faced with porcelain tiles, and on the east or front

face, are a paved court and cloisters, where travellers formerly lodged,

but now in ruin. When I entered the court, a traveller was just arrived

from a long journey, and stretched at length upon his back on the pave-

ment, while a monjawur, or attendant of the mosque, trampled upon his

thighs to give relief, I was told, to his weary limbs.

Near the mosque, in the Hindoo quarter of the town, the Mose Moo-

baruk, a hair of Mahomed’s beard is preserved in a shrine covered

with ill painted arabesques. The Sindees say there are only 24 of these

precious hairs to be found in the world; the one at Roree, one at Dilhee,

and the remaining half in Persia; the relic, it is believed, was brought

to Bukur four generations ago and is enshrined in amber, in a gold case

set with rubies and emeralds. The gold case is kept in a golden box;

shaped like the pen-holders used by Asiatics, and wrapped in silk, plain

and worked, with gold and silver flowers, and again enclosed in a wooden

box clamped with silver. The hair is exhibited to pilgrims, and said

to change colour like a camelion before their admiring eyes; a num-

ber of Moojawar or custodians, are attached to the shrine, and four of the

principal families receive among them a daily allowance from Govern-

ment of 12 rupee.

Roree has two great bazars, one filled exclusively by grain-seller’s

stores, and the other with shops of cloth merchants, fruiterers, fish-

mongers, ef cetera; people of a trade reside together, and Hindoos

occupy quarters of the town distinct from Moosulmans. In the east

quarter are the remains of a mosque and serai of noble proportions,

which might be restored and made habitable at a, moderate outlay, and

would be a great benefit to the town, and convenience to travellers, who

still lodge under the broken arcades which surround the ample court.

The town contains a number of shops, where tnrquoises are set and

polished, it isa favourite gem but the specimens shown me were small,

and of bad colour. People who cannot afford to purchase real stones

wear false Ones set in rings, and women adorn their toes with blue ena-

meiled buckles or clasps, and their nose with a very unbecoming gold

ornament, one half circular, and the other half moulded in form of a

1841.] Roree in Khypoor. 399

crescent. Silver anklets are common, and females who are too poor to

buy ivory bangles wear bone , poverty often prevents their appearing in

gay coloured raiment, which is nearly confined to the public women, but

they display their fondness for trinkets, by frequent visits to pedlar’s

shops, where mirrors, combs, leaden rings set with false stones, and other

female ornaments, are sold. These shops are crowded with the wives and

daughters of tradesmen, who pass much time turning over and trying on

baubles, and I observed many sorrowful faces when. they relinquished a

favourite trinket from inability to pay for it.

In the fish market, a number of women congregate round people who

sell Singhara, a fish like a shark considered to be very unwholesome

eating, but preferred for its cheapness. The fish is cut in pieces, and

the women go provided with small bowls to receive any quantity they

require for their families.

Roree is divided into 46 Muhullas or quarters, and I adda list, and

the description of inhabitants in each, which may be received, I think,

as a close approximation to truth.

1,—Kanoongo,* Government Officers, Kardars, Moonshees, Putwarees,

&c.

2.—Wutchoowaree, goldsmiths, &c.

3.—Suthdura, M. polishers and setters of stones, silk-weavers.

4.—Thushar (the name of a tribe of Moosulmans), M. cotton weavers,

agriculturists, &c.

5.--Arain Khudwala, M. gardeners and fruiterers.

6.—Tukkur (a hill), H. Bahmuns, about 22 families of Hindoo shop-

keepers.

7.-—Musund, name of a tribe of Hindoo Gooroos.

8.—Arain (2d) Dulewala, name of a tribe of Moosulmans, M. farmers

and agriculturists. }

9.—Arain (3d) Ootradee, name of atribe of Moosulmans, M. Farmers

and agriculturists.

10.—Durgah, M. “oojawars, shopkeepers, cloth sellers, and labourers.

11.—Chyn Rae (name of a wealthy Hindoo living), H. shopkeepers

and others.

12.—Chubootru, H. shopkeepers.

13.—Suyud Yakoob Khan Bazar, M. singers and musicians, H. shop-

keepers, &c.

* H, denotes that the Muhulla is inhabited by Hindoos and M. by Moosulmans.

400 Roree in Khypoor. [No. 113.

14.—Gujwanee name of a tribe of Moosulmans.

15.—Suyud Jan Shah (name of aSuyud living), inhabited exclusively

by Suyuds; they are all Sheeas and permit no other class of people to

reside in the Muhulla with them.

16.—Suyud Ghoun Sulee Shah (name of a Suyud living), mhabited

exclusively by Suyuds.

17.—Suyud Ghoolam Shah (name of a Suyud living), inhabited exclu-

sively by Suyuds.

18.—Moonda Kube (Moonda name of a deceased Fukeer), M. cotton-

spinners, H. shopkeepers and labonrers.

19.—Kazee Ghoolam Mahomed (name of a Kazee living), M. 15

houses of Hukeems (physicians).

'20.—Moohur Kundee, M. stone and seal cutters.

21.—Kussab, M. butchers.

22.—Jiya Shah (name of a deceased Suyud), M. husbandmen.

23.—Kazee Purel (name of the chief Kazee of Roree), inhabited by his

family and dependents. I may observe that the names of Muhullas which

are derived from inhabitants of note are often changed on their decease

to that of their successors.

24.—Bokharee Shah (name of a peer or holy man living), M, mat, fan,

and basket makers.

25.—Mootrib, M. singers and musicians.

26.—Boola (name of a deceased Shuekh, a tailor), M. tailors.

27.—Kazee Wudha, inhabited by the family and dependents of Wadha

Kazee aud Hukeem.

28.—Satee, name of a tribe of fish-sellers, Soonee Moosulmans.

29.—Puba, name of a tribe of fishermen who float on the Indus on

earthen vessels, Soonee Moosulmans.

30.—Tukurwala Puba, fishermen, Soonee, Moosulmans.

31.—Suyud Gholam Ulee Shah, (name of the Moorshid or spiritual

guide of Meer Roostum of Khyrpoor,) all Suyuds.

32.—Bahmun, all Bahmuns,

33.—Buzzaz, H. cloth sellers.

34.—Wudweerhye Kurmoollah, the name of a Shykh of the Wudwee-

hya tribe, in the service of meer Nuseer Khan.

35.—Shykh Hydur Ulee, M. Moollas, husbandmen, &c.

36.—Churkh durwazee, M. tailors, H. labourers.

37.—Dhoora-wala, (from Dhoora a valley. The Muhulla being placed

between two hills,) H. shopkeepers and labourers.

38.—Moondur, (name of a tribe of Moosulmans) milk-sellers.

1841. | Roree in Khypoor. AOL

39.-—-Ruseewut, Moosulmans who make string of wan or moonj grass to

lace bedsteads, &c.

40.—Tuwelee, so called because it held formerly many stables. It was

inhabited exclusively by Moguls, and devastated by the Tulpooras on

their accession. It is now almost deserted being occupied only by about

twenty families of Hindoos and Moosulman silk weavers.

41.—Khuchurpoor (name of a tribe of Moosulmans), H. M. coolies,

labourers, and poor people.

42.—Mumnanee (name ofa tribe of Moosulmans), M. dyers.

43.—Miyanee, inhabited by a tribe of Moosulman boatmen so called.

44.—Peer Bodla, M. shoemakers, leather cutters, and husbandmen.

45.—Mudtur, Moosulman soldiers of the Kuheeree tribe in the service of

of Meer Roostum.

46.—Khanpoor, formerly inhabited by Pushans, and now deserted ex-

cept by three or four Hindoo families.

I ascertained the number of houses to be 2,130, at 53 inhabitants to a

house, which is I think a low average, this will give a population of 11,715

souls.

The shop-taxes (mutkee) of Roree, are called twice a year, and each

trade nominates a khulatree or chief, and pays him a per centage on their

profits, to gather the Government dues. The people assert that the

Moghul emperors of India did not levy the tax, and that it was introduced

by the Kathoras, but this is doubtful. All trades are conducted by Moo-

sulmans; they are ironsmiths, carpenters, shoemakers, leather cutters,

tinners, stone-cutters, tailors, dyers, weavers, fishermen, and fishmongers.

The Hindoos work in gold and silver and are not prohibited following

ing other trades, but it is considered a crime by their own people, and those

who break the rules are accused of a tendency to Islamism. I took consi-

derable pains to ascertain the amount of tax levied from different trades

but am not sure that the following schedule is correct ; the tax is subject

to alteration, and some shopkeepers who are supported by chiefs and nobles

are exempted from the cess.

Cloth merchants (Buzzaz), Rs. 6 per annum.

Cotton cleaners, Rs. 9 per annum.

Weavers of cotton cloth, (Koree)—cutters. polishers, and setters of tur-

quoises and other stones (Weenjur); barbers and washermen, Rs. 2 per

annum.

Venders of brass, copper, and pewter ware, carpenters, slipper makers,

and leather cutters, Rs. 4 per annum.

Jronsmiths, each person, 32 per annum.

402 Roree in Khypoor. [No. 113.

Bankers and money changers, Rs. 8 per annum (some of them are ex-

empted from the cess.)

Goldsmiths and jewellers, 13 Rs. per annum.

Dyers of silk and cotton stuffs (Khombatee), Rs. 5 per annum.

Cleaners and polishers of swords, matchlocks, &c, (Tewura,) Rs. 10

per annum.

Dealers in pedlery (muharee furosh), such as combs, pictures, rings,

mirrors, beads, boxes, and glass bangles. Wholesale’ fishmongers, and

steersmen of boats, Rs. 3 per annum.

One distiller (a Hindoo), Rs. 3 per annum.

Tailors and tinkers, Rupee each person per annum,

Ox Butchers, (2 persons) each, 17 Rs. per annum.

Manufacturers of Indigo (2 persons), 18 Rs. per annum.

160 silk. looms, 900 Rs per annum.

Fishermen, without reference to the form of their nets and mode of

fishing, together 100 Rs. per annum. I have noticed the manner of levy-

ing the cess in the Journ. As. Soc., No.

Retail fishmongers, five fish per basket.

Wood cutters, together Rs. 100 per annum.

Goat butchers, together Rs. 95 per annum.

Roree contains seven families of tailors and four of ironsmiths, all of

whom deserted their homes in 1839, for the British bazar at Sukhur to es-

cape the shop tax, other tradesmen and artisans threatened to follow their

example, and Meer Roostum was obliged to suspend the obnoxious tax, but

continues to levy it in Khyrpoor.

There are no brass and copper smiths in the town, nor makers of

blankets, canvass sacks and bags, and leather vessels for oil. The two

last are made in Khyrpoor and Shikarpoor.

There is one tinner of copper vessels, and four polishers and cleaners

of five arms, anda Kular-khanu, kept by a Hindoo of the Bhata caste,

who distils liquor from dates both dry and fresh.

The number of water bearers (Panee bhurne-wala) amounts to ten

families, and before the arrival of the British they sold dillas or earthen.

vessels, each containing about twenty seers of river water, in Roree,

for a copper pys. Now they only give seven dil/as, and earn about four

pys* a day.

_™ In 1839 the Sohrab rupee was equal to 51 copper pysor about two shillings

English Currency.

1841.] Roree in Khypoor. 403

The same individual works as carpenter and bricklayer; a clever

fellow carns one rupee a day, and an indifferent workman four anas and

his food, or two anas in lieu of food: the common hire is 4, 8, and 10

anas a day and food, but those who receive 12 anas and 1 rupee find their

own. These wages equal what is paid in Savoy, where a carpenter or

wheelwright has two francs or Is. 8d.a day. There is no Mirkh or

price current fixed by the state; every carpenter pay two pys of his

daily earnings to the khulatree or head of his trade, who is chosen for

superior ability. The Governor sometimes confirms the appointment,

but it is not necessary to render it valid, and the khulatree is exempted

from the shop tax which is levied on other carpenters; the tax is taken

irregularly, and the amount uncertain. The rich and the young generally

pay more than the poor and infirm, and the cess varies throughout the

country under different Princes and Jalgeerdars.

A labouring carpenter with small business requires the following tools :—

RAS hE:

An iron adge weighing 13 seer,.. ..... Nees eter oe ON 0

A small hand-saw weighing } ofa seer(G or8 anas) O 8 O

Mremeel weichinig:2 aseeroy M0 0.6 2078 2. iS. O

A gimlet or borer, turned as in India with a bow and

feather ithon gid Gali Ae SUED HCl 2? SON an O

A small hammer weighing } of a seer,....... Ae me. an O

Aplane) sie... Be See Centre oie eh nae ste AO. ce, sO

A file weighing } of a seer,........ B inh iyn tok O's)" 0

LCP a (Gnesi 0)

A man, with extensive business, who keeps a shop, has four or five saws

which cost together 5o0r6 rupees. A two handed saw weighing 2 ofa

seer costs 2 rupees, and he has other tools in the like proportion but of

bad iron, and not better made nor more expensive than the tools of the

poorest carpenter,

Labourers, porters, coolies, grasscutters, gare-walas, who mix mud for

building and plaster walls, earn 8 and !0 pysa day fiom the British, and

5 pys from shopkeepers and husbandmen, if employed at hard work, but

the Governor and principal officers of Roree give 4 pys, and the prince

3 pys.

Sun dried bricks are formed in wooden moulds, and the makers earned

in 1838, 4 anas a day and double the sum in 1839; two more are required

for the process, and will prepare two thousand ina day at the cost of

1 rupee; in 1838, they sold double the quantity for the same sum.

404 ~— Roree in Khypoor. [No. 113.

There are very few builders in Roree, and in 1839, there was a great

advance in the price of labour, consequent on the number of public works

in progress, and the formation of a new cantonment at Sukhur, and private

individuals were obliged to procure workmen from Shikarpoor.

The washermen of Roree and Sukhur call themselves soomrae and

do not wash by contract; they charge so much per piece and more for

fine garments than coarse ones. Their charges are :—

Moras: lOONBCG 2 ec ereetee eter sas .-»- 4o0r5 Pys.

For a turban, and drawers of soosee, ... ...... 2 .s

For a bochun, loongee, and woman’s mantle,.. .. 13 “

For a shirt, sheet, and petticoat of coarse cotton, 1 9

Poraboddice, .. 30... omit Bs ak Sanaa et eke BPR oe

Rich and poor pay alike; children’s clothes are charged the same as

adults, and a double charge made for washing new clothes. The princi-

pal suyuds, merchants, and bankers, change their clothes four times a

month, and sleep in their drawers, but put off their shirts and bochuns.

Tradesmen, shopkeepers, and peasants, change their clothes twice, and

sometimes only once a month; they consider dirt of no moment and

wear their clothes till they are offensive, and Moosulmans and Hindoos

are alike neglectful of their persons, and filthy in their habits.

After the washerman has collected the foul linen from different houses,

he mixes a quantity of camel dung with water in a Jarge and strong

earthen pan, throws the clothes into it and rubs them forcibly against the

dung; he then srinces them, carries them to a river, and dips them

into a vessel of water mixed with khar (alkali) obtained from a wild

plant called Jana which yields impure carbonate of soda, and is burnt

to obtain the alkali. He beats the clothes on a plank cut into sharp ribs

until the dirt and dung are washed out, dipping them occasionally into

the alkali and water; he then srinces the clothes, and steams them

twenty-four hours over a large earthen vessel built into the wall of his

house, to purify them and take out stains, and on the following morning

carries them back to the river and washes them as before. He then takes

them home, and squirts some water with his mouth on each cloth to

moisten it, and folds four or five pieces one upon the other on a table,

He next beats them with astout wooden roller about twelve inches thick

and eighteen inches long, which he uses with both hands, instead of a

smoothing iron, to flatten them, and they are ready for use. Neither

starch or indigo are used as in India; a few washermen have copper

vessels but they are scarce.

1841.] Roree in Khypoor. 405

Common soap is compounded of mustard oil with lime and khar

(alkali}, pulverized and imbued with water in the following proportions :—

Lime 48

Alkali 12

Oil 27

Water 12

Four seers of lime are mixed with one seer of alkali, and three

quarters of a seer of oil; the stuff is strained four or give times through

coarse cotton rag into earthen vessels, one and a half seer of oil is

added to lignify it, and it is exposed to the sun in an earthen vessel for

two days, and stirred with a ladle until it combines; the paste is not

run into moulds, but set on stones in the shade to cool and harden, and

is cut into small square cakes with a knife. Soap is not made in

Roree, but there are four or five manufacturers in Khyrpoor, three of

whom came from Bauwulpoor, and the rest from Mooltan, and I believe

the Scindians are not acquainted with the art. The price of soap in

Roree in 1839, was 4 seers the rupee, and 5 and 53 seers in the preced-

ing year.

The process of tanning and curing leather is generally inferior to

the mode adopted in India; the leather workers of Larkhanu are how-

ever famous, and produce the best shoes, sword-belts, and water-skins in

Sind. Good water-skins (chhagul) are made also at Shikarpoor and

Kurachee, of bull’s and buffaloe’s hide, capable of holding about six

quarts, and a traveller always provides himself with one, ora tanned goat’s

or sheep’s skin, before he starts on a journey. The native soldiers of the

Bengal army felt severely the want of water, when the army crossed

the desert between Shikarpoor and Bolan Pass in March 1839, and feel-

ings of caste would not allow many of them to drink from leather. The

Bombay Sipahis furnished themselves with water bags, and suffered com-

paratively little annoyance from thirst.

The form is graceful, and itis usually about eighteen inches long and

fourteen inches wide, and sewn neatly at the edges with thongs ; it keeps

water very cool and costs about 2 rupees. The leather braces at the sides

are to suspend the chhagul to a bush, or tent pole on ajourney. (v. Fig. 2.)

A sack of sheep or goat’s skin is used to carry water across the sandy

deserts of Sind as the country does not possess the tanks, wells, and reser-

viors which pious men have constructed in India, in uninhabited spots,

and are a blessing to the way-farer and his beast. When the traveller

arrives on the bank of a river, he empties the skin, blows it up, and binds

it on his belly and floats buoyantly over the liquid element. On touching

3 E

406 Roree in Khypoor. [No. 113.

land he lets out the air from the sack, replenishes it with water and

resumes his journey. He fixes the goat skin with loops to the upper part

of his thighs and binds it lengthwise on his stomach with the legs of the

beast uppermost, taking care that his head is exactly between them. It

is a-delicate task to preserve the balance. If the traveller shifts a little

to either side the skin it turns him on his back and it would be a miracle

if he escape drowning. He is instructed to make short and regular strokes

with his hands and feet and preserve his presence of mind. Two native

soldiers of the British army, attempted in my presence to swim the Indus

at Sukhur on skins with their clothes tied upon their heads, and did not

accomplish a dozen yards before they where thrown on their backs in

the manner described, and but for the assistance of some Sindees, who

swam with them in expectation of the accident, they would have been

drowned.

The following is a description of the rude process of tanning and curing

leather in Khyrpoor. After the skin of an animal has been well] rubbed

on both sides for a day, with a solution of lime to remove the hair and

cellular fibre, it is left twenty-four hours, after which the lime is washed

off and the hide soaked in water for the same period. When removed

from the water it is rubbed over on both sides with thick gruel of wheat

and rice flour for another day and night, and dried four hours. It is

then well rubbed with goor (molasses) and linseed oil and rolled up very

tight. It is suspended next day to a wooden triangle and stuffed full of

the bark of acacia and *khyr trees which contains the vegetable principle

called tannin. Water is poured into it three days and the tan liquor that

falls into a vessel placed underneath to receive it, is poured again and

again into the hide which acquires a reddish brown hue in about the

period mentioned. The hide being withdrawn from the infusion of bark,

is drained and dried by turning it in the sun twenty-four hours. Some

finely pounded salt is sprinkled upon it and it is well rubbed inside and

out with linseed oil. It is then subjected to heavy pressure with stones

for a day, and afterwards rubbed dry with cloths which concludes the

tanning process. The hide ofa Bull, Cow, or Buffaloe costs 14 annas

(9 pence) tanning and curing, of which six annas are expended on the

materials and eight annas on labour. The sale price is 23} rupees

(5 shillings.)

One of the principal confectioners of Roree gave me the following list

* Mimosa Chadira. The Catechu (terra Japonica) is obtained from this tree.

1841.] Roree in Khypoor. 407

of articles in his shop, which were, he said, necessary to carry on the

business, and estimated the value at sixty rupees.

4.—Kurahee, Flat iron vessels with handles in which sweetmeats are

boiled or fried.

2.—Khoorpu, Iron instruments for scraping off sweetmeats from pans

and dressers.

2.—Chutee, Iron ladles perforated like a colander through which sweet-

meats are forced with the wrist to give them a shape.

2.—Khooruchnes, a large scoop or iron shovel with a spout.

2.—Chumchu, large circular iron ladles.

2.—JShara chumuch, one large ladle, and one flat spoon, both of iron and

perforated like a colander, for making /uddvo, a species of round comfits.

10.—Brassplatters ( Shalee. )

10.—Wooden platter (Khooncha.)

2.—Julebee ke turve, an iron oven with a hole in the middle for making

the sweetmeat called Julebee.

2.—Large brass bowls (Kutorah) with bamboo ladles attached to them.

2.—Small brass bowls.

2.—Doa, Wooden spades for rubbing and mixing sweetmeats.

2.—Belna Rolling pins.

4.—Dressers or tables on which sweetmeats are laminated.

2.—Table cloths on which Butasa, a kind of sweetmeat of a light

spongy texture, is made.

2.—Sackcloth bags on which sweetmeats are laid in the shop.

-. 1.—Wooden stool.

: 1.—Pair large scales.

1.—Pair small ditto.

_ Suyuds Ghoolam Shah, Yakoob Khan, and Ulee Ukbur Shah are wealthy,

| possess landed property, and keep domestics who live in their house; and

there are also three Suhokar (great merchants) in Roree, who keep ser-

_vants to fetch wood and water and cook their victuals. They get 3 or 4

_rupeesa month, and food once a day from their employers’ mess. None

_of the otlier merchants and tradesmen keep servants, and journeymen who

| work for their masters in the day time return totheir own dwellings at

“night.

_ Madhoo Rae Chhutree, formerly Moonshee of the deceased Prince

Meer Sohrab, resides in Roree. He received a stipend of 120 rupeesa

year and 8 khurwars of grains, but on the death of his patron, his son and

| successor, Meer Roostum, threw the Chhutree into prison and extorted from

him the sum of 3,000 rupees under pretext that he was guilty ef peculation

408 Roree in Khypoor. [No. 113,

in office. The accusation was, I believe, partly true, but his enemies ex-

aggerated his offence.

Hindoos do not hire barbers permanently, and give thema pys for each

visit. Suyuds and wealthy Moosulmans have barbers on their establish-

ments, who live, however, in the bazar, and practise their vocation else-

where during their leisure hours. ‘They yet 8 or 10 rupees and clothes

every six months. The barber cooks the meat, rice, and sweetmeats for

a marriage feast among Moosulmans, and receives for his services 4 rupees,

a complete suit of caste off cloths including turban and slippers, and food

during the period he isemployed. Healso shaves, washes, and decorates

the bridegroom. He nets usually four or five rupees at a wedding, but

it quite depends on the means of the family. The prince gives him 40 or

50 rupees. The barber carries the torch at Hindoo bridals (burat) which

Jast from one to four days, according to the wealth and means of the bride-

groom. For this service he gets a present of three rupees, and four pys

from each family of the bridegroom’s friends. He is an important mem-

ber of a household, and Solyman, the prince’s barber, is I believe, the only

person allowed to serve him with water to drink.

There are eight families of M/ootrzb (Moosulmans singers and musi-

cians,) who come from Sehwan, and attend marriages. The men are

admitted to the bridegroom’s apartments and their women to those of the

bride. The men sing and beat the dhol and nuggaru (kettle drum). The

women sing and beat the dhol only. The bridegroom and his friends give

a few pys to each Mooitrib on the days they attend.

The Chokro or cleaner of privies eats carrion, and his occupation is dis-

tinct from that of the shekhree or sweeper, whois more choice in his

diet. Families give the Chokro from five to eight pys a month and food

on the days he attends, whichis not oftener than once a week at some

houses, and morning and evening at others. Healso frequently receives

a cast off suit of clothes once a year. <A respectable land owner of Suk-

hur of my acquaintance, gives the Chokro who attends at his house morn-

ing and evening, two rupees a month and food consisting of a seer of

wheat or joowaree, and two pys instead of bor. Some people give grain

at the end of a month (30 seers and 60 pys.) The Chokro employs his

leisure hours in making screens or tatties of Surkund, a reed, and earns

by both occupations about 23 annas or 4 pence a day.

Shekhree or sweepers, are not kept on an establishment as servants, but

go round the city daily, and get from one to four pys for cleaning and

sweeping a house, and earn thus from eight to fourteen pys a day. Shop-

keepers usually sweep their own shops, and the part of the street im-

1841. ] Roree in Khypoor. 409

mediately opposite to them. Theland owner mentioned above, gives the

Shekhree who attends every morning to sweep his house, one rupee a

month, and he earns altogether about four rupees a month, There are

no sweepers or other public servants maintained at the charge of the city,

but four or ten shopkeepers have a watchman between them to guard their

property at night, and each pays him two annas (three pence) a month.

The guard is not, I should suppose, very active, as he usually labours

all day at another vocation.

Bankers and merchants live out of the Bazar in another quarter of the

town and take with them sufficient money for their daily transactions,

and lock up their shops at night, and carry away their money bags.

There are two great Suhokar or merchants. Khooba, who has four

Gomushtus, and Jeo. Both are inhabitants of Roree, and Hindoos of the

Bhata caste from Marwar, Exch is said to be worth two lacks of rupees.

The principal bankers (shurraf) are Tara, Koondun, and Tikyn also

Bhatas. Tara is reputed to be worth two or three lacks of rupees,

Koondun about two lacks, and Tikyn between three and four lacks of

rupees. Tara has the most business and his credit and respectability

stand high in the estimation of his countrymen and foreigners.

The Bunneahs of Roree deal in grain, tobacco, oil, groceries, spices,

sugar, and fruit, and realise larger profits than any other class of trades-

men. Their daily receipts average from ten to twenty rupees and some

in the British camp take as much as forty rupees. Grain and other

articles brought from the country, are weighed before they are offered

for sale by the Mookhee or chief of the trade, who is entitled toa seer

in every mun.

The Bunneahs choose the Mookhee from their body by a majority of

votes, and he is not precluded carrying on business on his own account

in the usual way. They treat him with respect and submit all important

questions for his decision. Instances have occurred of the towns-

people ill-treating the Mookhee, and the Bunneahs closed their shops

and refused to sell grain until the culprit was brought to trial and

punished. He usually regulates the price current of grain, but the

Bunneahs can alter it without his concurrence. He transacts a good deal

of business for them and they reward him liberally. The Mookhee beats

with a shoe or stick a Bunneah convicted of cheating, using false weights,

or taking from acustomer more than the market price of grain, but

he may undersell his neighbours if he pleases. If a case of fraud is

brought before the Governor, he levies a fine (wuir) of the delinquent

and places it at the credit of government. When a respectable Bunneah

410 Roree in Khypoor. [No. 113.

is imprisoned fora breach of the law, the Mookhee not unfrequently

becomes his surety, or furnishes security in a sum of money for his ap-

pearing to answer the charges. The Mookhee also investigates debts

and pecuniary transactions between Bunneahs, and adjudicates between

them.

The readiness with which shopkeepers disposed of their goods to our

troops at Sukhur and realized payment, the absence of imposts and the

security afforded them against oppression, induced numbers to pass

from Roree to the west bank of the Indus. Settlers came from all parts

of Khyrpoor, Shikarpoor, and Larkhanu. They were principally

bunneahs, cloth-merchants and confectioners, and there rose up in a

short time, an extensive, bustling, and populous bazar which excited the

wonder of the Sindees, who, familiar only with the sight of towns in

decay anda decreasing population, flocked from distant parts to visit

amarket where a few short months, before there was nothing buta

Golgotha and a wilderness. I counted npwards of one hundred shops

in the bazar six months after the arrival of our troops. The readiness

with which the people drew to Sukhur was the more remarkable because

they entertained considerable doubts if we should occupy Sind perma-

nently, and felt reluctant to incur expense in erecting even temporary

sheds to receive their goods. It might have taught Meer Roostum, if

he had sense to profit by the lesson, how much could be accomplished

in ashort period under a just system, towards restoring the prosperity

of a town, which enjoyed in time past, a high reputation for wealth

and magnificence. There is little doubt if the British continue at Sukhur

and the Prince persists in levying the present exorbitant duties and

taxes on merchandise in transitu that Sukhur will encrease rapidly in

importance and become the great emporium of the commerce of the

Indus for which its situation admirably fits it. The merchants and

bankers of Shikarpoor, Khyrpoor, and Roree who bury their wealth

from the fear of robbers, will find a secure asylum within its walls,

and those towns, being deprived of the chief source of their prosperity

will share the fate of Thatta and fall away gradually in importance.

There are eight descriptions of officers and servants employed by

government in the revenue, police, and customs, and paid once in six

months. The officers and dependents of the Prince’s household usually

receive jaegeers and assignments of land in lieu of money.

1841.] Roree in Khypoor. 411

The public officers and servants are :—

The Kardar or Governor.

Darogha.

Izardar or Revenue Farmer.

Masool or Karao.

Dhurwaee, or Weighman.

Kotwal or Watchman.

Muhta.

Moohurrir,

The Kardar is the Magistrate of Police. Lattu Nimbhun, the present

incumbent, is a Chhutree of Thatta and usually resides at the capital,

and deputes his brother, Mool Ram, to administer the functions of office

in Roree. He has held the situation two years, and has considerable pro-

perty in land. He is frequently bribed by offenders against the law to

remit their punishment, bunt enjoys on the whole a fair share of popu-

larity. His stipend is 40 rupees a month.

Lattu Deeper, the Izardar, resides in Roree. The Darogha exercises

a general surveillance over the Izardar or Revenue Farmer, and checks

his accounts, and assists the Kardar to control the Police.

The Masool is invariably a Moosulman and under the Kardar. He

receives a seer of flour and two pys per diem, and a Khurwar of grain

every six months. It is his duty to guard the crops and to see that no

one cuts and injures them.

A Dhurwaee is nominated to every town and considerable village in

Khyrpoor and Mogherlee, and his duties correspond in some respects

with those of the Dundeedar Dundiya who collects the market duties

in India. He weighs grain, oil, spices, drugs, &c. sold in the town,

and receives from the dealer two pys on a mun of ghee and oil, and

a double hand full of each rupee’s worth of wheat, rice, joowaree, bajra,

and other grain. No grain can be sold of a mun weight and upwards

without his attending to weigh it. He usually helps himself to a great

deal more than the quantity he can legally claim. Without waiting to

_ see the grain weighed he thrust his hands into the heap and scoops up

| a couple of double hands full. This is so much the custom of these

_ officers that shopkeepers almost regard it as their right, and do not utter

| aremonstrance unless the Dhurwaee is more greedy than usual,

Since the British camp was established at Sukhur, the Bunneahs had

| such extensive dealings with their brethren of Roree, that to facilitate

_ business, they found it necessary to have a weighman of their own, and

appointed a Sindee to the office by consent of the Bunneahs of Roree.

412 Roree in Khypoor. [No. 113.

Meer Roostum had no voice in his appointment and his transactions are

confined to the town and cantonment. The proximity of a large military

force to Roree, infused such bustle and activity into the heretofore quiet

town that the Government Dhurwaee did not find his receipts diminished

by the interloper. The regulations framed by the Bunneahs of the

British cantonment do not oblige them to employ the Weighman, nor

do they avail themselves of his services in their transactions with the

country-people, but they are valuable in-other ways, and they fixed his

remuneration at two pys in every sora and company’s rupee worth of

grain, vegetables, and fruit they purchased in the town of Roree.

The Kotwal fulfills the same duty in this country as the chowkeedar

or watchman in India. There are five in Roree, who receive each 2

rupees a month, and one is nominated to each of the chousool or beats

into which the great bazaris divided. The grain market, and other

quarters of the town are without public watchmen and the inhabitants

protect themselves. The Kotwals remain during the day with the Kardar

from whom they receive orders. They collect oil from the shop-keepers

of the great bazar to feed a lamp which is burnt at night in each watch

house, and they usually get small presentsof money and food from the

citizens on occasion of a marriage, and are sometimes invited to the nup-

tial feast.

The Moohurrir or writeris either a Moosulman or Hindoo and one is

appointed to each town. His stipend at Roree is 12 rupees a month.

There are several muhtas attached to the offices of Kardar and Izardar

to keep the accounts of revenue and commerce and record offences against

the law. Thereare also ten soldiers under the Kardar’s orders ready to

proceed to any quarter of the town which may require their presence.

They are an indolent half-armed band much addicted to the use of bhung

or hemp juice, and each receives a stipend of from 2 to 10 rupeesa month.

The mortar of the oil mill used in Roree is the trunk of a tree seven feet

in circumference, hollowed to the depth of eighteen inches and terminating

in a cylinder. ‘The diameter of the cavity at top is twelve inches,

and it is calculated to hold a naree, or nine seers of seed. The mill is set

in motion by a single camel or bullock which is changed at noon, and the

quantity of oil that two camels or bullocks worked alternately, can express

ina day, is abont twelve seers, the produce of four narees of seed. Nine

seer of seed yield by pressure about one-third oil, very rarely a fourth.

Mustard seed (surshuf) sold in the Roree bazar in 18,9 at 4 rupees the

mun, or 60 rupees the khurwar of fifteen muns, and the same price in the

country. After a bad harvest the price rises to five rupees a mun. In the

AH pega Bete

Re ees He

er tis

ee (aeee

ty Te Sb

Date Beam

\4 Stipyuer frarmished wood Geriches

B Tix spout $ inches long

f C Leather leops ancl braces

j \

1841. ] Roree in Khypoor. 413

autumn of 1839, 3¢ or 34 seers of oil sold for one rupee and 30 seers of cake

(khur) for the same money. Oil cake is given to cattle with chopped

grain stalks (khurbee,) and is not converted to any other use.

Bullocks employed in a mill wear acloth over their eyes, and camels

small blinkers of basket work to prevent their shying. The pestle which

revolves in the mortar has some times a pointed stick attached to it

which throws back, of itself, the seeds and cake which fall over the

month of the mortar as the pestle passes round. Sometimes a servant

sits on the edge of the cavity and performs this office with a rumba, a

sort of blunt iron chisel weighing about two pounds.

The lever E (see Fg. 2) is a piece of timber fastened to the Regulator

D. with cords, and pierced by holes furnished with adjusting pins for the

purpose of lengthening or shortening it when it is required to increase or

diminish the obliquity of the pestle. At the extremity of the horizontal

beam C., is a lump of clay modelled in the shape of a basket and bound

together with sicks and date ropes. Some heavy stones are piled on the

top and form a rude seat for the camel driver, and the camel is yoked to

the end of the beam by ropes.

A camel for turning a mill costs 40 or 50 rupees, a bullock 25 or 30

rupees, and a press complete 30 or 40 rupees. The cost of two mills

I examined was as follows :— Rs. As.

Mortar of ghana wood A........... om sfiiup, lneetiapeems oe « . 20 0

Four square beams that surrounded the mortar B.. ....... 4 0

The pestle, lever E, and horizontal beam C. all round.... .. 3 0

SN 200 foi 20 ins ‘niu 452 fais ha a ihabete eh sh es 101d “Vaho'ey Sling el alinioiahs efsiars 0 8

| Four earthen pots for oil, each holding three seers.......... 0 8

The carpenter who shapes the wood gets 5 rupees, and a

meal a day for as many days as he is employed. It takes

him about ten days to make a press....... ..00 seeeeees 3 0

PoamOr carpenter s FOOU,, SAY... .6.:)0[b so: %eveterw » [28 ee Soler os 1 0

Rs. 34 0

Three men are required for a mil]. One drives the camel and feeds the

_ mill, and receives 5 rupees a month and food from his master’s kitchen.

| He is expected to extract four narees of oil when his labour terminates

_ for the day. The second domestic cleans the camels or bullocks and pre-

| pares their food, and receives 3 rupees a month; and the third domestic

| brings water from the Indus for the use of his master’s household and

cattle and gets 2 rupees a month. All the servants are expected to assist

occasionally in house work.

3 F

414 Roree in Khypoor. [No. 113.

Oodoo, the proprietor of the mills I am describing, is the principal oil-

maker in Roree, and has two mills worked by camels and bullocks, and

three servants for each mill. He is a bunneah; and the produce of a

naree of oil seed is carried away in an earthen receiver as soon as expressed

to his shop for sale. He lets out his mill on hire by the day, or to press

any quantity of oil, atthe following rates, which include the services of

domestics and camels.

Rs. As

For pressing a naree of mustard seed (surshuf, )*....-...ece0ee O 2

Hire of mill per diem for ditto,....... Cheats ce lee ie ee pods bas

For pressing a naree of linseed,t khus grass, and safflowers, .... 0 23

Hire/of mill ‘per diem for'ditto; i. fs cere ccs sesomaeeer O20

For pressing a naree of cocoanuts, ...... Mate A Sebeeeic!. ee Oe

Hire of mill per diem for ditto,,........ Wine was ye cue teteernate OO fee

The cost of feeding a vamel and a bullock in the town of Roree is the

same or about 3? rupeesa month, but a camel is more easily nourished in

the jungle about Roree which does not produce grass and herbage for cat-

tle. The oilman assigned another reason fot prefering the camel, that

he could, when not employed in the mill, make him more generally use-

ful than a bullock, in bringing oil seed, grain, and fodder from the coun-

try.

Oil seed is measured with a pinkee, a wooden measure of fourteen {

‘anas weight, and ten pinkees go to a naree of nine seers.

By far the largest quantity of oil comsumed in Khyrpoor is obtained

from mustard seed (surshuf). But the following are also subject to

pressure, linseed § (koonjuck ), khus safflowers (puwaree), and cocoa-

nuts. Twelve seers of the best linseed yield half the quantity of oil.||

The average return is from four to six seers and never less than a

fourth. A small quantity not exceeding one or two seers is extracted at

atime for medicinal purposes. The seed sell at 5 Rs. the mun of 40

seers, and oil at 32 Rs. the mun.

Khus seed sells at 4 Rs. the mun, and oil at 13 Rs. the mun. Ten seers

of seed yield from 23 to 33 seers of oil.

* Sinapis dichotoma. Roxb.

Andropogon muricatum.

+ The ana is a weight equal to 6 shorabee rupees or the sixteenth part of a seer.

§ Linum usitatissimum.

{ This is about the return in the district of Etayuh, 73 seers of linseed, castor,

and mustard, give about 5 of oil, and the man who works the press is paid in grain.

1841.] Report of the Curator. 415

The return of oil from a naree of safflower seeds, if good, is 1 or 13 seer

but sometimes they yield nothing. The price of seed is] R. 11 As. per

mun and oil 20 Rs. per mun.

There is no demand in the town for cocoa-nut oil. The nuts are nets

to the press across the desert from Jeysulmeer chiefly by the Rajah of

that principality and are worth 18 Rs. the mun. If good, they yield half

their weight of oil ; the average return is one-third or a half.

(To be continued. )

Report of the Curator (Henry Prippineton Esa.) of the

Society’s Museum for May.

For the month of May, I have to report as follows :—

Geological, Minerological, and Palcontological Departments.

—We continue to catalogue and arrange in these depart-

ments. Ihave been able, by the kindness of Mr. Prinsep,

to recover three more of Dr. Voysey’s note books amongst the

papers of Mr. J. Prinsep, making in all 5 books of notes, from

which I trust we shall be able to extract much valuable inform-

ation relative to our collections ; and it is only thus, by collect-

ing slowly, putting together piece by piece, and collecting all

with the series of specimens, that we shall be able to establish

any thing like order, I regret deeply to state that I can obtain

no trace of Captain Herbert’s catalogue of his Himalaya spe-

cimens.

Ornithological and Mammalogical, &c.—Nothing new.

Osteological.—We have been able to acquire here two

Samurs anda Neelghye for the trifling sum of 78 Rs.; both

are desiderate in our collection. The Neelghye is killed for

_ the purpose of obtaining its skeleton.

Botanical.—I have been fortunate enough to discover a box

_ of Himalaya mosses, sent down from Simla in 1838, by Mrs.

_Siddons. Upon testing these, I find that, of 18 sorts, at least

a dozen give very fine, and some of them brilliant colours

_(crimsons and crimson browns), so that they are thus of them-

_ selves of much promise as dying lichens ; and will I hope give

416 Report of the Curator, [No. 113.

rise to a spirit of enquiry to this hitherto neglected branch

of the resources of India ; specimens of the lichens and a box of

the test liquors are on the table. I have embodied my

remarks in a paper for the Journal, of which spare copies are

also available, and now on the table. I beg to suggest its early

communication to the Agricultural Society, with a set of

specimens for their information.

Museum of Economic Geology.—From not being able yet

to procure our cases from the native mistry we have not been

able to finish our arrangements. We have obtained several

valuable additions to this department, which I notice in the

donation, amongst which are an excellent series, from the

iron ore of Burdwan to the forged metal, by Mr. Wm. Prinsep ;

American lead ores from Mr. Tregear, with ores and speci-

mens of various kinds from Ajmeer, by Captain Thoresby, and

the Nizam’s territory from D. Walker (M.A.). A very valu-

able, though not a showy contribution, is one of a specimen of

fire-brick from Futtyghur; presented by Dr. Angus on the

part of Dr. Hunter.

We have been able to make a very interesting discovery in

this department. In some soils brought from Chedooba by

Captain Halstead of H.M.S. ‘ Childers,’ and referred to me for

reporting upon, I recognised one resembling the curious Sea-

Island Cotton soil of Georgia, which looks like a mixture of sand

and charcoal (specimens of both are upon the table.) Upon a

careful analysis they prove to be identically the same, and a

special report has been made on the subject to Government.

It is highly satisfactory, that, almost at its very outset, the

Museum of Economic Geology should thus have given the

most practical proof possible of its utility, by doing full justice

to this valuable discovery of Captain Halstead’s; for I need

not remark that this soil was hitherto considered unique in the

world, and thus was supposed to give the Americans a natural

monopoly of the production of Sea-Island Cotton. We now

1841.] Report of the Curator. A417

know that it exist in a country where cotton is a regular crop ;

and almost at our doors !

The additions to the Museum during the present month have

been as follows :

Conchology.—A shell called by the Chi- Catia Rare.

nese Shew-cha from Chu- Beng. Vols.

SA HMR or dis owe wo. oe

(Pollicesses cornucopia,) ..

Osteology.—2 Samurs,.... ..-+ seoees

i Weelohye, Wise. <.s. -

Miscellaneous.—2 Neptune’s Cups, ... ..

1 Coil Assam Rope, ........ \ W. Prinsep, Esq.

A set of the coloured li-)

quids obtained by the am-

; Purchased.

moniacal test from 18 |

Curator.

specimens of Himalaya

Lichens in the Society’s |

Collection; esis <ilew oes as 2

Museum of Economic Geology.—Soil )

and minerals from Che- >From Goverment

GOOUds vase So's ss EO aa as \

Fire-brick from Futtyghur,. Dr. Hunter.

Ore, flux, slag and manufac-

tured iron ; from the Bard Prinsep, Esq.

wan Jron-mines,..........

Lead ores, from the Grossic

mine, United States, ..... ice Tregear, Esq.

Copper and other ores and Captain Thoresby,

specimens from Ajmere,.. O. R. Agent.

J. Walker, Esq.

M.D.

Iron ores and other speci-

mens from Hunumkoondah

in the Nizam’s territory,..

Museum, \st June, 1841.

Norg.—I insert this report in this No. with reference to a further notice on Che-

dooba soils which will appear in No, 114, and to which the above remarks are inductive.

; ‘

“ .

, ‘ =

y PERT

! ?

} 4 ‘

’

; /

’

‘

sera

in ’

¥ ~

{ . }

" te |

+ R

° ~ 1¥

. ; r

‘ or

‘ 4 Z \

‘

~ \

® org

l /

, 4

» -

t Vie

} .

4 P -

756

—_

ste Silky Sigs

a, oe

{ eal

Very Shoal — Gererce wn three fathom

tty less ther St

Sry

Square Rock

“

Soa

2 AQ2 Oa

J as BR

il nee

Hertha Rou

j wae

Seay SM,

Y AM!

Off ais

x a

the VES

ey} The yellows

Powis istodces ufrom

loved. ground, (stheluned.

1g between ithe Teresernd. and

A Mroighout ture reuboafthy.

# but riot Severed. loin tof id,

oO Paras

fey 5 Qe .

ae WaT

Asses of coral hk oth,

Vite 2 feta, te

d feefz which: wery

‘ Me carte yop coast) has tio

Penner lisres, the

other 2b feet bone

the present one. O) denicter aVolcang

Petr Nissen, well, )

Sorte pct thire Marked co

hasbeen found,

contre port ig vndilat, 19. A the, Caster, Or had rer rest He

tthe Yoleano, (Ansetg hich: thetine Cast lines rrecrly ‘

Unites) ig YY Uneven, Wet? fa. lise draw North, Prom

Magus Nagle Vile

e real of he groveried. ‘pret fuctly —

1 Witty thich, ,

JOURNAL

OF THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY.

Report on the Island of Chedooba.—By Epwarp P. Hatstep, Ese.

Commander of her Majesty’s Sloop ‘ Childers.’

(Continued from page 377.)

Division V.

Manners and Customs, Education, Language, and Religion.

The population of Chedooba is, with few, and trifling exceptions, entirely

Mug, and from their isolated position, its inhabitants afford perhaps a

truer exhibition of the character of these people than their brethren of

the main land, or of Ramree, whose intercourse with their fellow subjects

of different parts of the Peninsula, has by no means been attended with

benefit to their original and national character. The Mugs of Chedooba,

are a simple, moral, and inoffensive race, of frank open manner, cheer-

ful, and forgiving disposition ; exhibiting much independence of feeling,

the consequence of a thorough contentment with their lot; respectful to

their superiors, though perfect strangers to the crouching servility of the

-Hindoo ; throughout their character, exhibiting those traits, which are

- most readily appreciated, and admired by ourselves, some which might

even be copied with advantage, and which, if duly fostered and encouraged,

offer with his freedom from all the obstacles of caste a ground work whereon

to elevate the Mug high, if not the highest, in all the benefits of European

civilization of all the natives of the East, subjected to our rule, from

whom in almost every point of character, as in appearance he differs

most widely ; in the last particular less to his advantage, than in the

No. 114, New Series, No, 27. *¢

420 Report on the Island of Chedooba. [No. 114.

former, as his features proclaim him a Tartar, and are but rarely found

modified with the more regular ones of the people on whose border he

has so long inhabited.

The only custom among them, (other than the idolatrous ones of their

worship of Gaudma) which appear at all repugnant to our own feelings,

is that of a plurality of wives, which is permitted; but is a permission

seldom taken an advantage of, especially in Chedooba.

The most notorious case met with, was in that of the Soogree of Meng-

bieng ; a fine intelligent man of 45 with 3 wives, anda family of 18 child-

ren, from 24 years old to 6 months, all living in the most perfect harmony

and peace under the same roof. Although in every respect bona fide

wives, yet the two younger observed a dutiful attention and submission

to the first and eldest, who was considered as the governess of the

household, the others in regard to her, conducting themselves more as

daughters. It was acurions and not uninteresting family scene, and I

spent near two hours with them, enquiring, without the slightest offence

to husband, wives, or children, into the peculiarities, and relative duties,

and stations of a style of family partnership I had never before witnessed

so extensively, and was answered with the greatest frankness and

good nature, our remarks often causing a general laugh. The elder wife

had supplied her share of the family circle, not sothe two younger, and

at least in this case, polygamy does not threaten a cause of depopulation

to Chedooba.

Marriage is merely a civil contract unmixed with any religious cere-

mony or sanction, and is the result of mutual preference, as well as of the

interposition of friends and parents. Those of the would be bridegroom

proceed with fruits, flowers, wearing apparel, and ornaments to the

parents of the bride, and seek her formally in marriage. If granted, the

presents are left for the bride, to whose house the bridegroom proceeds in

the evening, and where he resides and serves his father-in-law, not as a

servant, but as a partner or a son for an indefinite period.

As with mutual consent the ceremony is performed, so with the same

is it annulled, and though this privilege is not unfrequently acted on in

the more populous towns of Ramree, and the Main, yet it is merely so in

Chedooba, and three cases came under observation, where, although sepa-

ration took place on the side of one of the parties, the other denied all

acquiescence in the transaction, and with the community in general

esteemed it a desertion. One was on an interesting case, arising from the

conversion of the husband to Christianity; to all attempts at recon-

ciliation on the part of himself and others, an obstinate denial was

en ee ee

1841.] Report on the Island of Chedooba. 421

returned by the wife, while he persisted on his part, on keeping and edu-

cating his children, two sons.

On Flat Island, the Soogree and his dame, had been man and wife up-

wards of half a century. They were both verging towards 80 years of

age, and their direct progeny on the Island, with themselves, amounted

to 50 souls.

In the case of mutual consent, both parties are at liberty to form a

new connexion, and there are no such matters as family names, whereby

such intermixture of families may be perceived. Not the slightest rela-

tion exists between the names of children and parents. All appellations

have a meaning, the males generally of some enviable moral or personal

quality, or happy anticipation of the future. The females of some tree

or flavour, or feminine Mug grace.

Marriage generally takes place early in life; as soon as marriageable,

the females assume a particular dress, a species of jacket, which is

changed on that happy event toa larger covering over the upper parts

of the body. The lower garment, both before and after entering on that

state, admitting perhaps of improvement on the score of ampleness ; on

widowhood, the maiden dress is again assumed. An ample cloth around

the middle, and a fellow one, thrown over the shoulders when cold, con-

stitute the covering of the younger males, who as bachelors live in a

distinct part of the village. The elders wear a white jacket shorter or

longer; an article of this sort, made of dark coloured glazed cotton,

slightly padded with the same material is frequently used by the elder

_ males in the cold or fine season, and is brought from Ava, which also

supplies a gaudy silk cloth of curiously interwoven colors, but coarse

workmanship, which is used as a waist cloth on high occasions by all

who can afford it. The common cloth is a cotton plaid of blue shades,

and of home manufacture. A finer cloth or turban of white is used by

the men, and interwoven with the hair, which, in both sexes, is of a

beautiful glossy black, and great length and luxuriance,*it occasions

with both the only labour of the toilette, and they are very proud of this

natural ornament. With the females, it is simply formed into a roll or

knot at the back of the head, being parted for that purpose in front, and

brought along the side of the head in a manner not uncommon in England ;

much good taste is sometimes displayed by the simple addition, as orna-

ment, of some favourite flowers. Children of both sexes are frequently

ornamented with silver rings on the wrists and ancles, and a string of

silver coins around the neck; these are usually heirlooms in a family,

and in turn, grace all the young olive branches as they shoot forth.

422 Report on the Island of Chedooba. [No, 114.

Infants are slightly, if at all clad, and there is no custom among these

people tending to produce any deformity of limbs, which from the

birth are allowed free developement, nor is any care taken to prevent

exposure to either sun or rain. Infants are seen in the houses of all the

villages crawling about alone, and as soon as old enough to get down

the, so called, stairs of the raised floors, they are to be found in groups

amusing themselves without any controul, and naked as when born. The

girls clothe when 5 or 6, the boys seldom submit to the restraint till 8 or

9 years old. This freedom enables them to exhibit in youth well made

persons, tends to much personal activity, and inures them to subsequent

exposure, without any fear of ill consequences. The government of their

children is mild and affectionate, and is repaid by duty and atten-

tion in after life, and there is little evidence to be derived from their

noise of crying, of the number of children who flourish in a Cheedooba

Village.

Though well proportioned, and exhibiting a good share of muscle

especially on the lower limbs, they are a small people, and of moderate

stature, the tallest among them not attaining a height of 5 feet 10 inches ;

5 feet 4 or 5 inches may be the average; the females less.

Though with decided Tarter features, all search for any thing approach-

ing to what constitutes in our ideas, beauty, must be in vain, yet there is

an open expression of frankness and good humour, in the countenances of

many of both sexes, and very commonly so in age, which with us must

be allowed to pass in its stead, and among themselves constitutes that -

envied distinction. But truth compels to the avowal that this is found

oftener with the males than females. The colour of the skin is not a

black but that of a mulattoe.

Of ornament, when grown up, neither sex have any; but a practice

designed for such purpose in all other countries, is here transferred into

one of every day usefulness ; with both, the lobe of the ear is perforated,

and the large hole fully occupied with the ever accompanying cigar.

A roll of paper fills its place, when not present, in order that the capacity

of this natural cigar case may not be diminished by contraction; where

it can be afforded, silver is used instead of paper, and sometimes the white

pith of a particular wood is used. When about to make a journey, the

dimensions of the cigar are greatly increased, and itis then as thick as

the fore-finger, and from a foot to 15 inches in length; a party on the

road with both ears thus mounted, looks not a little singular. Neither

the practice of smoking, nor the method of carrying the cigar is confined

to the men, and from infancy both sexes are accustomed to the indulgence ;

1841.] Report on the Island of Chedooba. 423

but as before noted it is of a most mild quality, and made principally from

a leaf found in a jungle, with but little tobacco. It is the only one of an

excitable nature in use, if indeed the mild mixture they smoke, isso at all.

The only beverage is water, and though the licensing of shops for liquor

and opium, is, in the more populous towns of Ramree, and the mainland,

gradually tending to deprive their neighbours and countrymen of those

parts, of the invaluable inheritance of national sobriety, Chedooba is as

yet clear of the infection.

The acquirements of education are the result of the labours of the

priesthood, who thus repay the maintenance allotted them by the public.

All classes receive alike attention, the extent of which goes to the learning

to read and write; of this benefit however, the children alone of the more

populous villages of Chedooba principally partake, they alone being large

enough to maintain continually an establishment of the sort, though every

village has attached to it, a Riong or Church, and a School room,

to which occasional visits are paid by itinerant priests. Spinning cot-

ton, and the use of the loom are branches of domestic education,

learnt by the females at home; while as soon as he is old enough to

bear its weight, the boy sallies forth with his parent, and his dah, to assist

in clearing the jungle for cultivation, or in felling it for fuel.

The skill in the use of this weapon, thus learnt, is very great; in shape

it resembles our bill-hook, with the sharp edge along the outer or convex

side, but it is without the crook, longer and heavier, the largest in this

latter particular fully equalling that of one of our own axes, witha blade

nearly two feet long, and about 4 inches in width. With this weapon,

the ease and rapidity with which the largest trees are felled is very great,

and the Mug is perhaps as dexterous a woodsman as the Kentucky

man himself; the facility with which acres of large trees were felled on

the hill tops, to clear them for Theodolite observation, gave ample oppor-

| tunity to note and appreciate his ability in this point, as from it was

reaped a most valuable and correct means of effecting a survey, which

without it would have been greatly increased in labour and sources of

_ error, as well as occupation of time.

The tree is not felled so low down as with the axe, but breast high,

_ which raises an objection to felling with it for timber, though not in mere

| clearing for cultivation. Every man in the Island has his dah, which is

| his constant companion, and is in constant use, to fell his timber, to make

his cart, his house, his canoe, his baskets for fishing or other purposes,

and last not least to chop up his curry. A Mug without a dah might as

_ well be without a right hand.

A2Q4 Report on the Island of Chedooba. [No. 114.

In felling trees of very large diameter, an axe is made use of, it is a sort

of thick chisel, with about a two inch blade, inserted into a handle knobbed

at the end for its reception, where it is further secured by a seizing of

rattan. This is a formidable weapon ina Mug’s hand, and he fells his

tree with it quickly and clean.

With a disposition greatly averse to any continued or fixed labour, the

Mug yet is always on the move, either at work, or half amusement

with his dah in the jungles, or wandering through them from village to

village ; this constant out door exercise and use of limb, gives a supple-

ness, and developement of muscle to their legs and thighs particularly,

which constitute him an untiring walker, and is very perceptible even in

very old age, rendering him to the last independent of all other means of

progression, and able still to indulge his love of rambling with those

he was born with. )

I found to my astonishment that the oldest man on the Island, number-

ing 106 years, had walked from his own village, a distance of 13 or 14

miles, in order to meet me at another, and walked back again on being

disappointed. Tie subsequently came two miles from his own village to

where we did meet, and during our interview, [ could not but be much

struck with the exhibition he made in illustration of the above remarks,

While on his body the skin lay quite loose, and was perfectly festooned

with wrinkles, his legs and thighs exhibited as much plumpness, and ful-

ness of flesh and muscle, as they could have done, when they had performed

but half their over century of work, and though in other cases I found old

men, whose faculties had broken down under years, I never heard of one

whose limbs had given way, or who was bedridden; a staff was all

the assistance the above old gentleman required.

Beside the above out door duties and amusements all the heavier la-

bours of agriculture fall to the share of the man; but the cleaning of

the rice for ordinary consumption after it is brought in, is done by the

women, with the instrument in common use for this purpose in other

parts of India. This falls to her lot as one of the household duties

which are assigned to her; but in none any more than in her general

treatment and place in society, has she ought to complain of. Besides her

household affairs, she goes to market, and prepares the family meal, at

which she invariably eats out of the same dish with her husband. No

restraint is imposed on her liberty, and she may attend all places of

amusement and religion, unaccompanied by her husband. In the per-

formance of religious duties, the women are more punctual and attentive,

than the men. But she is restricted during her monthly state from

1841.] Report on the Island of Chedooba. 425

having any connexion with them; to this restraint is added, that she may

not touch her husband’s head, save for the purpose of cleansing it, when

she makes obeisance before commencing work; that she may not touch

the sacred books nor the consecrated image of Gaudma, nor pass over

the shadow of a temple or any place containing the said image, but on

foot and barefooted.

The villages of the western circles are, strange to say, in better condi-

tion, and cleaner than the eastern ones, and the houses display more

neatness and attention to repair.

In erecting his hut, the Mug has only to purchase materials, the neigh-

bours assemble as soon as these are prepared, and his house is estab-

lished in a very short space of time. They are all constructed on the

same plan, raised on poles from the ground several feet ; the flooring

and walls are of bamboo matting, wove in a neat pattern; the roof

of the Ahtup leaf neatly covered with a frame work of bamboo to prevent

its being injured by the monsoon winds.

All apartments whether sleeping, sitting, cooking, bathing, or private,

are on this raised floor, through which all refuse finds its way underneath,

where what is left by dogs and vermin, serves as manure for the garden

attached to each house. Shelter is also afforded underneath to the

poultry, of which they have much, and sometimes to the smaller kine.

The kitchen range is formed by around tray of moist clay about 3 feet

in diameter, and 5 or 6 inches thick, leaving three small projections or

columns on its centre, whereon to rest the cooking pot, when dried in

the sun, it is fit for employment, and effectually protects the combustible

floor; the furniture consists of a few reed mats, and each member

possesses a wooden pillow, these are the whole amount. The rice for

the family meal is served up ina wooden bowl, around which the whole

party squat; the fish, flesh, fowl or vegetables are served in small

coarse China tea cups, the right hand, and the mouth are always washed

before, and after the meal; water is the only beverage at the meal,

and when it is over, pawn is in use, and the cigar lit. Two meals suffice

during the day, the one at 7 in the morning, the other at sun down,

and both are very soon despatched. On taking a journey the meal is

carried in a few leaves bound up with a rattan; on such occasions they

have also a practice of cooking rice, which { believe to be peculiar; it

is partly boiled, and then pressed with force into a bamboo, with

a further portion of water, and when full, the bamboo is put into

the fire, and roasted. The rice within, when dressed, thus keeps for

“many days, and a bundle of these bamboos is the simplest

426 Report on the Island of Chedooba. [No. 114.

manner of carrying more than a day’s provisions through the jungle.

When to be eaten, it is split with the dah ; the rice is formed into a kind

of semi transparent jelly of strong consistency with the soft inner lining

of the bamboo firmly attached to it, which is eaten with it. When

baked with milk instead of water, and with the addition of a little flour,

rice cooked in this manner, is described as quitea luxury.

As in the construction of his hut, so in all other labours and necessities,

the readiest assistance is rendered by every one to all; hospitality is

universal, and the last grain of rice will be cheerfully shared with

the stranger; every village has its traveller’s house, and he who occu-

pies it is the general guest. Besides being too independent to beg when

able to work, amongst a people so disposed charity has no place, or

rather the universal hospitality is exalted into that virtue. At a late

period when the whole province suffered from the visitation of cholera,

hundreds of children were orphaned, but neither were they sold as is

common in India, nor was the assistance of Government called in

charitable aid for their support ; all were adopted at once into families of

neighbours or relations, and treated as their own sons and daughters,

No part of the revenue was sought to be remitted, on account of the

general calamity, but all was paid.

The Mug of Chedooba is strictly honest, no such thing as theft is known

among them, and even inthe more populous towns, it is most rare, if

known, fora Mug to be brought into court on sucha charge. In their

dealings with one another but one price is asked, though the simplicity

and honesty of such a custom is giving way before the worse example of

the Bengallee in the larger towns; but no Mug will degrade himself by

a charge of ‘customs’ on the purchaser, for the benefit of his servant.

To this may be added that in all my experience of them, I do not know

to have had occasion to entertain even suspicion of their word. The Mug

will not bear the restraint on his time, or his will, necessary to qualify him

as a servant ; and though hard labour, when imposed, is submitted to with

his universal cheerfulness, it is never freely chosen. Their respect and

esteem of Europeans is very great,and any services in their power, were

cheerfully performed for our party with no object beyond that of

giving satisfaction. On many occasions I have found it necessary to

despatch a messenger to the ship, both to take, and to bring communica-

tions or supplies; the parties were always punctual to the time they would

appoint for their return, but would never take a pice ‘in remuneration,

seeming hurt even at the offer, and whatever return was made them

was ulways obliged to be given strietly as a present, and as a pledge of

‘

1841.] Report on the Island of Chedooba. 427

approbation and kindly feeling. When engaged in the endeavour to

bring down from the West Hill a large tree, which I was anxious to

obtain, nothing could exceed the cheerfulness with which the labour was

undertaken, in fact so much so as to give it more the character of an

amusement; with the exertion of all the able bodied men of the Island,

amounting to about 1,200 they were yet unable to move it after many days

trial; and they requested assistance from us. With a party of twelve men,

and purchases we joined them, and with this assistance the ease with which

the tree was moved, astonished and delighted them; the labour was

subsequently given up as occupying too much time, but up to the time

of their dismissal to their villages, nothing but cheerfulness and good

humour prevailed.

Not the slighest inconvenience was occasioned during their stay of 14

days in the neighbourhood of the village, which was our head quarters ;

parties were sent for their provisions from their own houses, and not a

grain of rice or a fowl was demanded from the village, which was just

as quiet, with the close neighbourhood of a body of men, as if

no one had been there, the jungles affording shelter by night. A

dinner was given to all who would remain to partake of it, on their giving

up the work, the only return which could be made in approbation of

their cheerful and efficient labour, and a promise was afterwards procured

for the remission of a portion of the annual taxation, to those villages

who were called on to render the greatest assistance in the labour of the

Survey.

In the case of one of our Bengallee attendants who had struck a Mug,

of which complaint was made to me, was afforded an evidence of their

forgiving and unrevengeful disposition. The man though much hurt with

the blow of a stick, and indignant at it, expressly requested on the offer

being made, that no punishment might be awarded, all he required was that

such treatment might not again be repeated. They are very fond of

‘public amusements, which are generally given in honor of the exertion of

some work of public utility, at these, plays, dancing, and wrestling take

place; of the former two, not much may be said; of the latter, the most

remarkable feature exhibited, appeared the total absence of all angry

feeling on the part of. the antagonist. Boxing is also at such times

another exhibition.

Old age is treated with great respect, and the elders of a village, even

when not officials, are consulted and listened to in all matters of debate

relative to the interests of the community. When addressed they are

called ‘ Appogee,’ a title of respect.

425 Report on the Island of Chedooba. [No. 114.

From his frequent indulgence in bathing, the Mug may be inferred to

be partial to cleanliness, but it is more with the idea of cooling his body

that so much water is used, his head being seldom wetted, and on this

score there isroom for improvement in his character, as relates to person

and to clothing, but especially with regard to children, whose great free-

dom from any confinement, calls perhaps for the greater recourse to means

of cleanliness in their case.

The language of the Mug is with slight difference, the same as that

of his neighbour the Burmah, of which it would seem to be a mere pro-

vincialism, and the similarity in this, in feature, religion, and all leading

customs, and points of character, proclaim them hoth to. be the offspring

of one common stock. A difference in the pronunciation of certain of

the letters, constitutes the principal distinctions between the two lan-

guages, and of these distinctions, that affecting the Y and the R stands

first; the Y with the Burmese is always changed into an R by the Mug.

The language in general use sounds uncouth and indistinct, but when

properly spoken is said to be otherwise; it is difficult to acquire by

Iuropeans.

The character again is the same as that of the Burmese, so that these

people have all the benefit of the productions of the Moulmein press, |

which are printed in that character, and amongst these that of a trans-

lation of the whole Bible into their vernacular. Their own books which .

treat principally of religious or philosophical subjects are impressed

with a style on dried leaves stitched together, and rubbed with the finer

produce of the Petroleum wells to preserve them; paper is only used by

the district officers of different grades. The religion of the Mug is

that of Boodh, and in Chedooba I believe, the only exception to this, is to

be found in the Christian convert, who has been before mentioned; in

Ramree and the main coast, Mug Mussulmans are not uncommon.

How far the character of the Mug has been moulded by his religion,

or how far it is the result of mere natural constitution, is a speculation

well omitted here. But in the mild morality inculcated in the code, and

practised in the conduct of its professor, at least an adaptation of the

one to the character of the other is observable, beyond the common case

in these matters, and is both pleasing in itself, and betokens wisdom if

not goodness inthe framer of the system; this much may be truly said

in its praise, but to this is all favorable opinion I think to be limited.

The sanction by which its observances are enforced are absurd, and

unworthy the attention of a reasonable being. Its history a most childish

invention, and is comparatively commendable again in its freedom

1841.] Report on the Island of Chedooba. 429

from the obscenity which stigmatizes other religions around it. It

stands also peculiarly marked off from them, based on its principles of per-

fect selfishness, in not even acknowledging fear or respect fora Supreme

Being. :

Annihilation is the goal to be attained, not participation in the perfec-

tions, nor reward atthe hands of deity; in reference to whose anger or

approbation, not an action to be perfomed has the slight regard, even if

his very existence be at all admitted. A certain amount of good deeds

registered in the sacred books are to be performed, in order to entitle you to

a happier state of existence for another life, which is again to be a scene

of endeavour to the same purpose, and this gradual improvement in succes-

sive periods and states of existence (if merited) is to continue progres-

sing till a certain point of goodness is attained, when as he can then

become no better, existence itself is of no further use, and as the reward

of all this labour, in the attainment of perfection, the fortunate being is

annihilated; a consummation to which their object of worship, Gaudma,

arrived in the most limited number of existences ever yet run through.

On the other hand the usual terrors of transmigration are held out, and a

fish or a dog, or some less reprobate animal, is to be the lot of those whose

misdeeds prevail against their good ones. Some infractions of the law,

indeed are of themselves sufficient to ensure such punishment, and I was

gravely assured by the principal man on the Island, who was ordered to

attend me throughout it, that if unluckily I did shoot a wild pig, here-

after I should meet my desert, in not only being turned into, but actually

shot by one myself.

This person, the Soogree of Chedooba, was otherwise a very intelligent

young man, and though the most zealous adherent of Boodhism on

the Island, yet he seemed but half pleased with it, and was fond of

bringing its merits into discussion, and never shewed the slightest

symptom of annoyance at the laugh which a relation of its absurdi-

ties sometimes called forth, and which his better reason told him was

well deserved. He had been at school at Ramree studying English,

when called away to succeed his father in the Soogreeship 4 years

since; and he had then built a King or Church, a work which had

| fairly committed him to as strict observance of all other good works,

_ saving celibacy, as ifa priest. In observing the prohibition to eat of any

_ thing which had ever enjoyed life, in order not to encourage its destruc-

tion, he would not touch of food wherein were eggs or milk; but in the

list of the protected the poor fish are not included, and he laughed

heartily while taking advantage of his privilege, and making a sound

430 Report on the Island of Chedooba. [No. 114.

meal of some delicious oysters all alive. When on board the ‘ Childers,’

he reconciled his conscience to the indulgence of eating salt pork with

the reflexion, that as it had been killed so long, and so far off, it was

impossible it could have been killed for him.

The observance of this prohibition is the only one generally practised

in the Island, and that more through habit, than with a sense of

its religious necessity. In short, their religion sits but lightly on them,

maintaining its supremacy more because it is unopposed by any other,

than from any attachment of the people to its precepts or practice, and

when discussing, and ridiculing its absurdities, as brought forward by

our friend its advocate, the laugh and joke was fully participated in by

all the hearers, who appeared much to enjoy and even promote such a

scene.

All the Pagodas are in a state of ruin or decay, or rapidly approaching to

it, and broken fragments of the image of Gaudma lie strewn about, with-

out any one attempting the restoration of him or his temple. The old

Christian before mentioned, had taken forth his god years ago, and both

broken, and deserted him on the high road side, where his remains were

pointed out to us without either mark or expression as to any impro-

priety in such conduct, but contrariwise, the forlorn state of the poor

idol excited laughter instead of commiseration. On a remarkable hill

in the centre of the Island stands the principal Pagoda in the common

ruinous state ; no pious hand, had for many a year attempted to anni-

hilate himself by its restoration ; but whether in waggery or not, its

chief ornament consisted of acut glass decanter, turned bottom up, on

a bamboo stuck into its pinnacle, and excited the laughter of our native

party, as much as our own.

The Mugs are superstitious, and though by no means more deficient

in personal courage than their Burmah neighbours, yet exhibit in some

points a weakness, which might cause adoubt on this point. No Mug

will travel alone in the dark, nor even on moonlight nights, for fear of

evil spirits or Naths; but when together ‘three Mugs will face the

devil.’ Nothing but positive order and accompaniment by us would

induce them to trespass on many of the hill tops, which were inhabited,

they said, by these demons, but with us not only would they advance

fearlessly, but did not hesitate to fell the trees, though the blame of such

sacrilege was always laid on us, in direct apostrophe to the supposed

injured inhabitants. On felling any very large tree one of the party at

work on it, was always ready prepared with a green sprig, which he ran

and placed in the centre of the stump, the instant the tree fell, as a

mains of the political quarrels and dissensions of the Mug Raj, and are

1841. | Report on the Island of Chedooba. 431

propitiation to its spirit which had been dislodged so roughly, pleading

at the same time the orders of the strangers for the work. In clearing the

top of the South Hill, the Chupprassie, whom I had sent to see it

done, though attended to the summit with the labourers all ready pre-

pared, was forced to take a ddh, and fell the first tree himself, before a

Mug would make a stroke, and was considered to bear all the odium of

the work with the disturbed spirits, till our arrival relieved him of the

burden. On such occasions, with their customary cheerfulness, the

whole body would join in the laugh at the folly of their own superstitious

fears, of which they latterly seemed half ashamed, Several of the circles

are without any priest at all, and and those who are found on the Island

do not suffice for the instruction of the children, a subject complained of,

and offering an opening of favour to these simple people, which has only

to be afforded in order to be appreciated and embraced. Any person of

any religion has only to assume the dress and followthe observances of

the sacred book, and he is at once acknowledged a bona fide priest.

At Meugbreng an old priest paid me a visit, and begged alms, the only

case I ever met with, and not only unnational, but most unpriestly ; he

avoided the prohibition to touch money by taking it through his yellow

gown, and then handed it to an attendant pupil; he had been a Soogree

in one adjoining circle, and gave up his office in order to get worshipped

as he said. He was nearly 80 years old. No distinction of: caste is re-

cognized by their religion, and the priest both eats, and will accept the

offering of all and every class. There exists however on the Mainland,

some distinction of this sort, observed among the laity; they are the re-

fast wearing out. They consist in feelings of prejudice against the

eating and drinking with those who are descendants from the captives of

former wars, to whom the most menial offices were assigned ; they have

“no existence on Chedooba, nor will have shortly elsewhere among the

| Mugs. The priests are forbidden even to look at women, even their eyes

-may not wander above a limited distance beyond their feet, lest they

should light on the forbidden image; he may not eat after midday, when

his second meal is taken, his first having preceded it about 6 hours.

The dead are burnt, the bodies of priests with great pomp and cere-

mony, after being preserved a considerable time, and the bodies of all

with decency ; this constitutes a very meritorious deed when performed

o. . -

_with the remains of a stranger.

_ Checooba as observed, has not many strict votaries of Boodhism ; but

its effect in the neighbouring countries where acted on in strictness, is

432 Report on the Island of Chedocba. _ [No. 114,

curious in some particulars. It has a direct tendency to destroy all feel-

ing of gratitude, the real favor conferred being on the part of the re-

ceiver, in the opportunity afforded by him to the giver of performing a

meritorious act. Robbery and even murder have been committed for

the sake of the means of erecting a church, or constructing a road, ora

tank, and the end has consecrated the means. These good works are

performed in Chedooba as elsewhere among Boodhism, but I was inclined

to think with motives more pure, and that the general character of its

inhabitants would justify the opinion, that the reward outwardly and

inwardly reaped by the performance of such public benefactions, is in-

ducement enough to their execution there.

The construction of such as above, of wells, traveller’s houses, or the

keeping of any of these in repair, renames the party undertaking them,

and he is thenceforth only known by the honorable title of the ‘well

digger,’ the ‘road maker,’ the ‘ house builder,’ &c.

The old Christian above mentioned, is the only one on the Island, and

isasincere, and pious old man, deeply interested in the improvement,

social and religious, of his Island countryman. He is intelligent and

well informed for his means, of the mildest manners, and benevolent

appearance; though between 75 and 76. His pittance is small, 5 rupees

a month from the American Baptist Mission, of which he is an assistant ;

he is listened to with great attention and curiosity, but, unsupported

as he is, and with but little encouragement, his success is small.

Ramree, the chief town of the Province, enjoys the privilege of a

School, where English is taught, and Chedooba, as a part of the province,

is entitled to send its quota of pupils. But the habits of the people, and

even the regulations of the school, deprive its inhabitants of making

almost any use of it. Payment is required; there may be no friends at

Ramree to take charge of the children, and the Chedoobans are attached

to their Island too much to allow willingly even their children to leave

it for any length of time, very few parents, therefore, and those chiefly

the Island authorities, give their children the benefit of the advantage

offered by the provincial school. But the payment which is begrudged

to the Ramree establishment, would be willingly made even in higher

amount to one at home; both children and parents in Chedooba are all

common friends, and mutually known; and such an establishment, which

the deficiency of priests, for educational purposes, points out as wanted,

would soon meet with that most grateful appreciation of the boon, a large

attendance, nor in other respects would it be without reward to its

founders. Not a whit behind his Ramree brother in intelligence and

1841.] Report on the Island of Chedooba. 433

desire to improve, and especial desire to learn English, the simpler,

and more honest and moral character of the Chedooba scholar, would

give to him the preference, for filling those grades of employment in

the public offices open to him; while the grateful reflection would not

be wanting, of affording a valuable means at once of improvement, and of

the maintenance in fact from contamination, of a character high and rare,

to perhaps the most interesting community under the Government of

British India.

Division VI.

Geology.

The Geology of Chedooba presents characters of so much general in-

terest, that any report on this Island might be looked on as imperfect,

in which the subject was wholly omitted.

But as it is intended in a separate notice to give such details, accom-

panied with specimens, as may render the subject capable of investiga-

tion, by those able and interested in the science ; the present one will

be here confined to a mere statement of the general features exhibited.

| The elevation, out of the sea, of large tracts of land by effect of volcanic

| action, has in more modern times been noted as occurring on the coast of

Chili in South America, and in the territory of Cutch in this country. In

the former case some doubt has been thrown both on the fact itself, as

well as its amount; and the circumstance of a similar phenomenon

| having taken place within the memory of man, not only throughout the

coasts of Chedooba, but extending over all the shoals and islands from

the Terribles, off the north end of Ramree, to Foul Island, will be held a

‘not unwelcome addition to the evidence yet gleaned of the occurrence of

such extensive changes of level in the present day. The above are the

‘limits of the survey on which the ‘ Childers’ has been employed, over every

| part of which the evidences of this elevation were seen, and in many

‘Places accurately measured, and it includes the whole of that irregular

collection of Islands and shoals, which, projecting far into the Bay of Ben-

gal, yet maintain the general direction of the main land coast near it.

_ But these limits are not to be taken as those which bound the elevation,

which, with little doubt, from similarity of formation, will be found to

extend north and south and east, over all these parts of Arracan, so

peculiarly marked by the intersection of deep narrow, salt water creeks,

from Akyab, even perhaps as far south as Cape Negrais.

| The line which was under observation is about 100 miles in length

varying from 20 miles in width, to that ofa mere patch, according as

434 Report on the Island of Chedooba. [No. 114.

opportunity of notice was afforded by the existence of rocks or islets

above water, and its general direction is from N. W. b. N. to S. E, b. S.

The elevation has been greatest towards the centre of the line examined;

at the Terribles about 13 feet, on various parts of the N. W. reef of Che-

dooba 22 feet, at the north point of the Island 16 feet, at the centre of

the Island on the west coast 13 feet, at the southern end 12, and at the

Islands south of it, as far as Foul Island from that to 9 feet.

It would also seem to have been greater on the western limit of Chedooba,

than on the eastern, a fact not however ascertained from the extensive

level plains which exist on this side, whereas on that, measurement was

easily made on the sides of perpendicular rocks. This elevation occurred

about 90 years ago, and there is, now living, a party 106 years old, who

was then 15 years of age, and had been accustomed to fish over a portion

of the now upraised land. On the coasts of Chedooba, its traces are in

most parts as clear as could be wished, bounding the natural jungle with

a bank of greater or less height, composed of sand or of shingle—the

plain beyond being thickly strewed with coral and shells, such as are

now growing on the shore. The natives are all perfectly aware of the

bank having formerly been the limit of their Island, and even the young-

est would point it out, if asked to do so.

The old man above mentioned was not in Chedooba, but at Ava, when

the event happened, he had gone thither that year, and experienced at

that place the violent earthquake which accompanied the elevation. From

other natives of great age, I received information of the occurrence, not

direct, but traditionally from their parents.

The earthquake was very violent, the sea washed to and for scraul

times with great fury, and then retired from the grounds, leaving an im-

mense quantity of fish ; the feasting on which isa favorite story through-

out the Island; no lives were lost, no rents in the earth occurred, nor

fire from the volcanoes of the Island.

The above is not the only event of the sort traditionally known, another

occurred a century previous to it, and these elevations are considered

periodical by the inhabitants, occurring every 100 years, and the next one

is even expected in the course of a few years, and would excite but little

surprize. Traces of a third beach line were several times thought to be

found, before this information was given; but on the western eoast, about

half way down, an evidence of its truth was afforded; a remarkable

column or rock, about 40 feet high, standing on the beach shewed the re-

mains of a second line of rock. Oysters adhering to it, at an equal ele-

vation of 13 feet above the first, as it was again, above the one, which on

1841. | Report on the Island of Chedcoba. 435

all the rocks of the western coast distinctly points out the limit of the

present high water, On Flat Island was subsequently found three dis-

tinct beaches, and the coral found onthe different extents of the Island

clearly proclaimed in their relative states of decomposition, the difference

of their periods of exposure.

The external and more apparent means by which these great changes

are effected, are as yet known, I believe, quite peculiar, and exhibit features

which may be valuable in assisting investigation into the immediate

causes of volcanic violence.

Every one of the mud volcanoes of Chedooba were visited, and examined

as well as those of the neighbouring Islands, south of it, and on none with

strictest search could be found any traces of direct fire, or of those peculiar

formations produced by that agent, gas alone seems to be the one imme-

diately occasioning these strange exceptions to the general character of

voicanoes, It is no doubt inflammable gas, and the light given by some of

them in activity has been so great as to enable a book to be read by it

ata distance of 9 miles, as was credibly related to me as having occurred

at the last eruption of the large Volcano of Meugbreng, the largest on the

Island: that heat is present in the more recent ones, I found it myself

to be the case, in one examined on Ramree, where the mud brought up ona

bamboo from, 17 feet in depth, shewed a temperature of 92° 20’ above that

of the atmosphere. Buta white stone like chalk found on all the large

volcanoes, which was considered as the common greenish sandstone

discolored by heat, was the only substance found, which exhibited a

trace of no intense heat, and in this case the abstraction of color alone

was effected without the least change of composition or form. The

large volcanoes of Chedooba are four in number, they are detached

- mounds rather than cones, varying from 100 to 1,000 feet above the level

of the sea, composed of a stiff grey clay with large quantities of singu-

dar fragments of stone, their sides much cut up by the effects of rain,

| their summits quite bare, and from 240 to 50 yards in diameter; on these

: are disposed cones of stiff clay from a few inches to 4 feet in height,

and the same variety of dimensions, in diameter. These are hard on the

| outside, but filled half way up with a thick well mixed mud, which every

- now and then exudes from a hole at the sides or summit*, at the bursting

; of abubble of gas which occurs every 3 or 4 minutes. There are two

other volcanoes of small dimensions, and but little elevated above the

| plains where they are found to exist; they are composed of the same

a Tn

* The readers of the Journal will be struck with the similarity of the description to

- that of the mud pools at Hinglaj,—As, Soc. Jour, No. 94.

| 3]

436 Report on the Island of Chedooba. [No. 114.

soil of mud, emitting large bubbles of gas; and besides these there are two

spots whence water alone is brought up by the gas. In all these the

water or mud is salt, and their number with the four Petroleum wells

which are in constant ebullition with gaseous exhalation, seem to ex-

hibit this agent as powerfully, and extensively at work, throughout the

Island. The minor volcanic vents seldom exhibit any change; the larger

ones when in eruption, which generally takes place during the rains,

either throw forth to a considerable height accompanied with flame,

fluid mud, which spreads over a certain extent, or the surface effected

boils with the escapement of gas, bring too consistent to flow or be

thrown up. The angular fragments of stone mixed with the mud are

clearly torn from the strata, through which the vent is forced, and small

portions of copper ore are found attached to some.

Besides the volcanoes seen, one was described as existing under water

on what is nowa reef N. W. of Fiat Island, and which a few years since

gave forth flame when in eruption. But independent of such direct evi-

dence a mere examination of many of the reefs would convince of the fact

of the bed of the sea being equally affected with the surface of the land.

I conclude with the observation that the clearness of the jungle of

Chedooba, the healthiness of its climate, and the late clearing of the

principal hill tops for purposes connected with its survey, afford for the

ensuing fine season a most interesting ground whereon to examine, more

minutely than either time or ability would enable me to do, the peculiar

geological features thus briefly noticed.

Examination and analysis of a soil brought from the Island of

Chedooba by Capt. Hatstean, of H. M. 8. * Childers,’ by Henry

Pippineton, Offg. Curator Museum Asiatic Society.

This soil was sent with a collection of soils and minerals from Chedooba,

for the Museum of Economie Geology, with a request that a report

might be made upon them. I was immediately struck with its resem-

blance to the finest Georgia Sea Island cotton soil which I analysed in

1838, and which has such a peculiar appearance—resembling a mixture

of sand and charcoal—that it immediately attracts attention; I thought

it well worth while to ascertain their identity. To show how nearly they

are like I set down in parallel columns the results of my examination of

the Chedooba soils and of the American one; the last abridged from my

paper on the cotton soils of America, India, Mauritius &c. in vol. VI.

of the Transactions Agrl, Soc. of India, p. 198.

1841.]

Report on the Island of Chedooba.

APPEARANCES.

American Soil.

1. When sifted, like fine dark-

Chedooba Soil.

grey sand and charcoal dust, arti- ¢ The same.

ficially mixed.

2. The sifting coarse sand, frag-

ments of sandstone and shells with

pieces of dried and charcoal wood,

or charcoal in all states from char-

coal to soft lignite.

The same, but no shells, and the

sandstone in very minute frag-

ments—perhaps owing to the spe-

cimen being in very small quan-

tity.

With cold water.

3. When agitated settles in a

coarse greenish-grey sand, with athe same,

layer of black matter above it.

water is tinged of a pale yellowish

colour.

4. When left fora day or two

bre same.

Heated in the Mairass.

5. Smokes and gives out a

The same.

The silver leaf I think

we pay Odea shi tea more discoloured ; the litmus pa-

and litmus paper are discoloured | eg! eal meas diatel I

and a brown smoky-tasted oil is ¥ op

Gees irediin the tube. other respects the same.

Analysis gave

Saline matter, Mur. of Saline matter Mur. of

lime and soda, but no pot 0.20] lime and sulphur of sas, ¢

TASS... 1... peewee ec cvene DUE NO MOLASS 5.6 anos a ces

Vegetable matter: most-

ly lignite or peaty powder ¢ 3.20 Phe same. CP IOs 2.00

with a little water. ......

Tron, protoxide. \. 0.1.2... 1.00} Protox. (and peroxide in ‘ L75

small quantity ?) ........

@arot., of lime’... ... 3. Zi OF MCR ote meee, ce 3.00

ot a ra eee SUSCOMe AMUMn setae eee cee 0.40

DEMME iis se cass oe eee we STOOP VC FEAF END Oa 91.65

99.15 99.05

438 Report on the Island of Chedooba. [No. 114.

Remarks.

Silex is mostly in coarse glitter-

ing grains like pounded loaf sugar,

shewing that it is mostly from disin-

tigrated and not decomposed rock.

N. B.—The smell of Petroleum is owing to a bottle of it having been

sent in the box.

For all agricultural purposes these soils may be pronounced so nearly

the same, that, in the same climate, the difference would only lie in the

amount of produce being a little more or lesson the one than on the

other, The Chedooba soil contains but one ingredient, Sulphate of Soda,

not found in the American, but this is in extremely minute quantity,

and moreover seems favourable to the growth of cotton, for the soil of

the Tinnevelly district, which produces the Madras, Bourbon cotton, con-

contains it, as does also tliat of Singapore, on which very fine Bourbon

The same, but grains of silex

duller and more powdery, silex

rah them.

cotton is grown.

Captain Halstead’s remarks on this soil are as follows.

‘No. 11, represents the more sandy soil of the eastern circles. It was

taken from the neighbourhood of Meugbreng. The circle of that name

with the one just noticed (Mrooma) are the most populous on the island,

the greatest quantity of exports being produced in these, and chiefly

on this soil—a more productive one than its appearance would seem to

warrant.’

The importance of this curious soil to America we well know. It may

be hoped that ours may be ere long turned to account and that many

other spots on the islands and coast, from Akyab to Sandoway, may be

found to possess it. From difference of climate, as far as this may

affect the cotton, there will be, I trust, little to fear, for we know that

the dry months allow time enough for the production of all kinds of

cotton, some of very fine quality, on the main land of Arracan ; and it

is mentioned as a product of Chedooba by Captain Halstead. Very fine

Sea Island has been produced on Saugor Island, and the late Mr. Kydd

gave me a very beautiful sample of it, which he said was grown there

‘upon a sort of black sandy soil’ but I could not obtain a specimen of it.

I venture to suggest that if asmall quantity of the Sea Island seed was

sent down to the Commissioner, accompanied with a brief notice, to be

translated into the Mug language, and distributed with the seed, stating

what it was, its great value when carefully picked, and that no sort of

extra rent or claim would be made for this kind of cultivation, we might

hear of it again? Small prizes might be offered to those who preduced

the best samples. Henry PipDINGTON.

1841. Report on the Island of Chedooba. 439

List of Soils and from whence taken.

Clay of upraised plain, near the N. W. point of the Island.

. From Rua Tanghee inside the above plain.

From the N. W. peak.

. From the West Hill.

. From interior of Krae-roue circle.

. From Eastern part of Krae-roue circle.

. From Petroleum well of Krae-roue.

From West part of Inrooma circle.

. From central valley of Inland (Inrooma circle.)

. From Petroleum well of Inrooma circle.

. From village of Meugbreng.

. From interior of Meugbreng circle.

. From Tang-roa circle near Rua Sekkea,

. From the summit of Pagoa Hill.

From Ree-giung (Flat Island).

. Iron ore from North beach of Chedooba.

. Copper ore from different voleanoes of Chedooba.

. Coal or lignite from Tang-roa circle.

. Petroleum of Krae-roue.

SHON SOR & wD

a— eet edt eet

WON AOR WD =

It appeared advisable to attach to the accompanying selection of the

soils of Chedooba, the few following observations on the subject in

addition to the mere list of places whence each was procured.

In making the selection, which was done during a progress on the

greater part of the Island, high and low, jungle and cultivated, and mostly

on foot, from the Ist of January to the beginning of March, care was

taken to choose soils which should represent those of the greatest extent

to be found on the Island, and where specimens have been taken of soils

less general, they have still existed over extents ample enough to afford

room for the cu'tivation of that produce, for which they might be consi-

dered most applicable. But here it may be at once observed, that no

material difference or contrast was found to exist in the soils of Chedooba;

aclay of light brown or grey colour, more or less modified, as it had

been subjected a longer or shorter period to the effects of tillage or na-

tural vegetation, constituting the bases ofall. This clay base being again

on the eastern parts of the Island found witha large admixture of fine

sand. This clay base seemed to give throughout a permanence to the

productiveness of the soil, which must constitute a very valuable quality,

440 Report on the Island of Chedocba. [No. 114.

placing it on a par with those which if more fertile or sooner exhausted,

from generation to generation the same lands being yearly cultivated

without manure; traces of lands lying fallow it is true, were discoverable

in many parts, and sometimes extensively, but on enquiry they proved

to be those which had fallen out of cultivation from the decrease of

population attendant on the disturbed state of all these countries for

many tens of years previous to our occupation of them, and not from

exhaustion of the productiveness of the soil. But the clayey nature of

the soil appears to make it liable to yearly improvement by a process of

manuring of natural occurrence, and which is most effective where most

needed, in the newer soils of the lately upraised lands.

During the dry weather the surface of the soil becomes cracked in every

direction to a considerable depth, but mostly so in the above lands, where

a stiffer clay is found, and into these cracks dried leaves and grass at such

times fall in considerable quantity.

A custom is also prevalent of burning the dry grass, stubble, &c., every

year at the close of the dry season, the ashes from which are therefore

all ready to be washed deep into the body of the soil, by the first heavy

rains of the monsoon, which do not close the large openings for some

time. The large quantities of Coral and Madrepore distributed over the

surface of the new plains, is also by this practice of annually burning very

much aided in its decomposition.

I was informed by a native that the extensive new plain of the N. W.

part of the Island, which was raised out of the sea about 90 years ago,

was only then acquiring its first covering of grass when visited by him

15 years after its elevation. That produce now covers most parts of it

high and luxuriant enough to screen a buffaloe from sight, while other

parts yield ample crops of rice, and where not otherwise claimed, the jun-

gle is fast taking possession of it, especially over those more rocky portions

which have on them the greatest amount of Coral.

The clay soil of this plain is shewn in No. 1, compartment. Embosomed

in trees on the old N. W. point of Chedooba, and therefore just within

the border of the above plain, stands the village of Tanghee, the soil of

its neighbourhood includes a larger amount of vegetable mould, than is

to be found in that of the plain so low as will be seen by the specimen of

itin No. 2.

This soil may be taken as representing all the cultivated soils of the

western part of the Island which lie within the limits of the old beach

time. It amply repays all labour bestowed on it, though such labour 1s at

present small, owing to the smaller amount of population to be found in

1841.] Report on the Island of Chedooba. 444

the two circles of Kam-mad, and Tang-wa, which enclose this side of the

Island, than in any of the others with one exception; this want of

population arises from other causes than any connected with want of

productiveness in the soil.

Chedooba was originally peopled from the eastward, and has never been

so thickly inhabited, as to oblige the cultivation of the western lands,

which have therefore been hitherto visited, more than inhabited, the

want of gratification for his social habits always driving the western

settler, after a certain period of sojourn back again to his more thickly

populated native village to the eastward. The present Rua-gong of the

village of Kammaa was formerly Soogree over but seven houses, in a

district where his own village now numbers 300.

The extent of plain between the hills and the sea, half way down the

west side of the Island is small, but I here saw one of the largest and

richest gardens of plaintains in the whole Island, while as the general

produce of the above soil along the limits mentioned. I observed, rice

(the staple) tobacco, sugar cane, some cotton, hemp, and indigo (in

cleared spots in the jungle); of fruits and vegetables, the cocoanut,

plantain, orange, lime, tamarind, yam, bringals, and other garden pro-

duce of these climates.

The specimens in 3 and 4, represent the soil found generally in the

hilly, and jungly parts of the Island. The largest and most luxuriant

trees in the Island are found in the loose friable soil which is found on

all the hill tops, in that of No. 4 were flourishing perhaps the very

largest on the Island. An oil tree felled measured for a length of 60

feet, 4 feet 6 inches, and 3 feet 6 inches in diameter at its respective ends,

and a like tree left as a beacon, on the summit of the hill, measured 21

feet 4 inches in girt, as high as the arm could reach.

In mentioning however the size of these trees, it isnot to be inferred

that valuable timber is to be looked for as a produce of Chedooba. The

largest trees are almost exclusively confined to the hill tops, where

they are difficult of access, and of no very valuable quantity, enough

however, and of sufficient size, and good quality for all domestic pur-

poses, is every where to be found, nor do | doubt that woods, affording

valuable produce of different kinds, would on examination be found

among the jungles. The wood-oil tree as has been observed, was found

in Juxuriance on the west hill, where was also the gamboge, and many

trees large and small yielding caoutchouc, some ia great profusion. |]

would here mention while on the subject of the jungles, that no part, in

the many miles of it, travelled through, appeared to offer any serious ob-

443 Report on the Island of Chedooba. [No. 114,

stacle to clearing for cultivation; there are few parts where a Mug with

a good dih would not fell in one day the trees over half an acre; much

of it consists of open clamps of bamboo, and throughout the lower part,

open plains of grass of more or less extent are very frequent; in no part

which was seen would a person on foot find any obstruction in walking

which way he would, and this is stated from experiment, having been over

many parts where no native ever before penetrated, not from inability

but from superstitious fear.

No. 5 and 6 represent generally the soil of the Krae-roue circle, the

Northern one of the Island of which parts are more sandy than others,

but the whole very productive. I found the betel in this circle first,

and in its jungle, of which it has a due share, the caoutchouc plant of

South America ; a good deal of Rice for export is here grown.

No. 7 is a soil taken from the neighbourhood of two Petroleum wells,

which lie close to one another in this circle, having no doubt one common

source of supply. This article, as may be seen, is surely a produce of the

soil, which by simplest means might greatly be increased ; at present these

two wells yield about half of the 300 pots, which constitutes the yearly

produce of the four petroleum wells of Chedooba.

No. 8 is a soil taken from the next adjoining circle, eastward to that of

‘Inrooma.’ Its principal village (Chedooba) boasting to be the capital

of the Island. Thespecimen, and No. 5 may be taken to represent the

interior and more clayey soils of all the Eastern circles, including those

of Inrooma, Meugbreng, Kyouk-tair, and the eastern part of Tang-rua,

While No, 9 taken from a spot in the same circle, is, I apprehend of more

limited extent. )

Near the centre of the Island, and not far from the large Volcanoes of

Meng-breng we came ona small level valley with a stream running

through it, on either hand overlooked by wooded hills. This valley

whence No. 9 is taken, was the best cultivated spot I had yet found, being

one continued tobacco garden and were the best of that plant on the Island

is produced. While speaking of this article, I venture to express by belief

that parts of Chedooba would produce with proper care and attention, as

good tobacco as perhaps any in the world; and here I speak also from

experience. My own stock of Cigars having been expended, | procured

some to be made for meon the Island, out of native tobacco, many of

which to my gratification and surprize I found of as high and as delicate

a flavour as any which I had ever tasted direct from the Havanna. But

the leaves of which these were formed, appeared to be accidentally larger

and more ripe than they are generally gathered. Though as it is at

present planted and prepared. Chedooba tobacco is highly prized.

1841. ] Report on the Island of Chedooba. 443

No. 10, shews the soil from the neighbourhood of a petroleum well in

this circle (Inrooma). Some time since it was destroyed by fire, since

which the public claim it, but its produce is therefore nothing, though the

soil is full of the oil.

No. 11, represents the more sandy soil of the eastern circles. It was

taken from the neighbourhood of Mengbreng. The circle of that name,

with the one just noticed (Inrooma) are the most populous on the Island

the greatest quantity of export rice being produced in these, and chiefly in

_ this soil,—a more productive one than appearances would seem to warrant.

No. 12, is also a soil of the Mengbreng circle, and taken from a spot

about 3 miles W. S. W. of the village of that name, and amid the jungle.

_ It may not be put forward as a representative, though in the neighbourhood

_ whence taken, it may be extensive. The largest trees were found on the

lower grounds principally ; the wild mangoe were found growing in

this soil. !

No. 13, from the Tangee, a circle and neighbourhood of the village of

| Tekkea, at the foot of the south peak, is again a soil peculiar as far as was

observed. East and west of it the cultivated soils are represented by No.

2, while Nos. 3 and 4, perform the same office for the soils of the hills

_which are highest in this the southern circle of the Island.

No. 14, is a specimen of the most peculiar soil on Chedooba, taken from

its only barren spot, the higher parts of its central hill.

No. 15, is not of Chedooba at all, but from its sort of dependency, Flat

Island, separated from it by a narrow strait. It has been added from its

! great similarity to the stiff clay of No.1, whose productive properties

it may serve perhaps to illustrate.

It was taken from the centre of the Island where it had been under

constant cultivation for more than one century, yielding an ample annual

‘return. Every patch of available land on this Island is fully tilled, its

centre, one continued rice ground.

Nodules of Iron ore, as in No. 16, will on search be found generally

over the Island, either embedded in the vreenish sandstone, or having

been detached from it. Though often very rich, they are not in sufficient

_quantities to amount to valuable, nor am I of opinion that the ore in con-

tinuous beds will by any search be discovered.

No. 17, shews some fragments of copper ore, a few also of silver may

be found, but both are confined to the surface of the volcanoes in the

Island, and have been ejected by them from beneath. Even on these sites

‘astrict search is necessary to detect them. TIonly heard of one piece of

‘the size of two eggs having ever been found,

444 Report on the Island of Chedooba. [No. 114,

The 18th compartment shews specimens of a coal or lignite found

in the northern parts of Tang-wa circle, and not a mile distant from

the beach. It lies a few feet above the level of the watercourse formed

between the first and second lines of hills, dipping deeply under the latter,

which rise 800 or 1,000 feet above it. Its site is therefore I fear a very

bad one; perhaps a matter of no great moment as its qualities I also

fear partake of the same character. It is traceable in an east and west

direction about 20 yards, the vein, 3 feet and a half thick, is a series of

small layers from the 16th part of an inch to 3 inches in thickness, |

separated by their lamine of ferruginous sand. It has been dug into by

the natives, and perhaps two tons of it excavated, from which the speci-

mens shewn were selected. On the spot, I could not make it ignite, it

only smouldered.

No. 19, shews a specimen of the Petroleum of the wells of Krae-roue. |

As it may not be considered a matter very foreign to the subject under |

notice, and is inserted in furtherance of the same view, that of, it may be,

usefulness to any concerned. I yenture to conclude with a slight notice

of what I experienced of the climate of Chedooba in traversing it, through-

out all parts from the beginning of January to the middle of March, 1841;

a period which no doubt constituted, with the previous month of December,

the healthiest time on the Arracan Coast, or at least when exposure to

weather may best be borne by the European. As is the case in all coun-

tries subiect to periodical rains, the time of commencement, and taking

off of these, will also here be doubtless found the most unhealthy.

But previous to the arrival of the Monsoon, I think that, to all Eu-

ropeans, exposure to the direct rays of the sun, (often done incautiously

or unnecessarily) would be found almost a certain cause of illness, and

this more particularly during the months of March, April, and May,

when its heat is most violent. But exposure of the above sort must

at all times, 1 think, be deemed highly imprudent, especially when the

remedy of a chattah is soeasily procured.

This effect may be constitutional and peculiar, but I am inclined to

think, that any exercise in the climate of these parts requires for its

support good generous food. Inthe 65th Regiment N.I., while on the

coast for nearly two years, mortality from fever among the troops was

fearful in amount, among the officers no case of fever occurred. I do

attribute the contrast to the difference of living, in which the statemeut

made to me by the Medical Officers and others of that Regiment seems to

bear me out, viz., that the troops died from the consequences, more than

the fever itself, that in spite of all cordial and strengthening food, and

1841.] Report on the Island of Chedooba. 445

medicines liberally administered, there was not stamina in their constitue

tion to enable them torally from the debilitatiny effects of the disease,

In the course of our duty in surveying along the coast, considerable

exposure was necessarily made of the crew of the ‘ Childers.’ On all such

occasions it was as much as possible endeavoured to give the people extra

food, and quinine was also administered, in fact, throughout the service,

every exertion was made to procure as much and as great chan es of diet

as circumstances would permit. Up to this date, March 24th, twenty-seven

cases of fever have occurred; (12th of May, 63) cases on board, all of the

same debilitating nature; but, with the exception of one, under peculiar

circumstances, which proved fatal, all were recovered, and in general at

duty again in7 days.

I believe that my own experience of the shore climate was far greater

than that of any one elseamongus. But I have reason to be thankful that,

though occasionally unwell, I did not suffer froma headache throughout

my whole visit.

Next to the two precautions which may be inferred from what has been

said, viz. those of keeping from direct exposure to the sun; and a generous

not intemperate—diet. I would mention the necessity of watching and

_ preparing for the great changes of temperature to which the climate is

liable; while by day the lightest clothing was too heavy, by night it has

been chill under two blankets and acounterpane, An hour before sunset

_ this change takes place, andshould always be met by a change to woollen

| clothing; last, not least, I mention the necessity of keeping a careful watch

_ over the due and regular performance of the digestive functions. . Under

employment for mind and body, with the above cautions, viz. avoiding

undue exposure ; good—but temperate living ; accommodation to changes

_of temperature; attention to regularity of digestion, Lincline to think that

_Chedooba, if not Arracan generally, would be found not so fatal a climate

_ to Europeans as has been hitherto supposed.

_ With regard to the effect of climate on the natives, I would observe first-

ly, that in the course of their employment for objects connected with the

survey, there are few of the able bodied males on the Island whom I had

| not under personal observation. A small, but well made, active, intelligent

race, most cheerful and enduring of fatigue (when obliged to it). In my

journeying through the Island, at every village (and few if any were not

| visited) all ailments were made subjects of application for advice or medi-

cine. These cases amounted totwo of fever, one of dropsy, one of paralysis,

one of blindness, and one of deformity of limbs. Three cases of fever also

occurred among the native (Bengallee) attendants who were with me,

446 Report on the Island of Chedocba. [No. 114.

But it may be fair perhaps to increase the apparently small list, by the

admission that there exists a disease to a considerable extent, to which the

inhabitants of Chedooba are subject, and under which at every village we

found perhaps many sufferers, women as well as men, but chiefly the latter ;

nor in any case though always coming forth to meet us, didit seem to be

looked on by either the parties themselves, or their friends as a case on

which to apply for commiseration or relief.

‘Old age’ is very prevalent on the Is!and, and but few of the villages of

Chedooba but can produce more than one, often several, of their inhabitants

labouring under the affection of four score years or upwards ; many under

such burthen, hale, almost vi_orous, in mind and body. The party who

informed me of the period taken for the clothing of the N. W. plain

with verdure, and who had till 15 years old been in the habit of fishing

over it, when under the Sea, with his father by name Pallaree, and living

in the Inrooma circle, is generally looked on as the senior amongst these

‘Appogee’ (a respectful term of address to old people). He claimed to

have run through 106 years, at which age he walked 12 or 13 miles in

order to meet us, and on being disappointed then walked back again (not

I believe the same day); when we did meet, it was after a walk of nearly

two miles, when he was certainly in body, rather shakey, but after a

short rest he recovered himself perfectly. His mind and memory were

perfectly sound, as also his hearing, and sight, his speech very slow,

but clear and distinct ; not atooth in his head was gone or apparently

inclined to depart, and he was not only cheerful, but joking with all

around. He ridiculed my not being so old as his great-grandson, who

accompanied him, said that he had left off eating animal food but two

years since, and when questioned as to what had been his customary food

in ages by-gone, answered readily ‘any thing even a part of aman if I

had wanted it,’ a confession which he only modified, to the laughter and

remark of the party around, by adding ‘ if it had been given as medicine,’

I know not whether it may be taken as evidence of the existence, to any

considerable extent, of another interesting disease in Chedooba, to add

that Pallaree, entered into the bonds of matrimony with his last wife

2 years ago.

(Sd.) C. P. Hatsrep,

Commander.

[ 447 ] “

Report onthe Soils brought from Chedooba, by H.M.S. ‘Cuttpers.’

By the Officiating Curator, Mus. As. Sco.

The box of Soils and Minerals, brought by Capt. Halsted, having

been referred to me for report, I take leave to subjoin the following

remarks to Captain Halsted’s very able notes. He has, most unfortu-

nately, omitted to bring us specimens, of the different rocks as well as_ of

the soils. It would have been highly desirable to have had a complete

series of these, from the beach lines to the highest point, and in various

directions, with as many shells and other organic remains, as could be

found, and measurements of elevation; especially those of the ‘old

beach lines ’ alluded to by Captain Halsted. Such a series if it can be

still obtained, would be of the greatest interest, for we have there an

active volcano in the centre of an Island, upheavements going on on

the Coast within the memory of man, and coal found; all within the

space of a few miles! I need not say how valuable rocks and organic

remains would be to illustrate all this.

In the absence of any geological datathen my remarks must be mostly

agronomical, as regards the soils, and mineralogical in regard to the

minerals. 1 take them in the order in which Captain Halsted has

numbered them.

No. 1. Of this little or nothing can be said in addition to Captain

Halsted’s remarks. The process of natural manuring, to which he

alludes is not however, | should think, the sole cause of the fertility of

the soils. It will be seen upon close inspection, particularly with a

magnifier, that minute particles of carbonaceous matter are dispersed

throughout the mass as if they had been originally deposited with the

soil, by whatever process this was formed; the one described by Captain

Halsted would scarcely we may suppose have distributed it so evenly,

| but a more extended examination on the spot, could alone entitle us to

argue safely on the subject which is one of much importance. No 15,

is a soil of the same kind, and it has also some, though a smaller, mixture

of carbonaceous matter dispersed through it: both appear to be surface

soils only.

No. 2 and 3, are more sandy. No. 3, seems to contain some carbo-

naceous matter also.

No. 4. Remarkably assimilates to the tea soils of Assam and China,

in appearance ! and like those of Assam this also occupies the higher

spots. As the climate and population of Chedooba probably place tea out

438 Report on the Soils brought from Chedooba, [No. 114.

of the question, as a product, I have not thought it worth while, to

institute any closer examination.

No. 5. Contains, apparently, a portion of carbonaceous matter.

No. 6. Does not shew any trace of it.

No. 7. Isa very curious soil, if of any extent, on account of its

locality in the neighbourhood of the petroleum wells. Captain Hal-

sted does not say if these soils are fertile or barren, which it would be

of interest to know; vegetable matter, in the shape of leaves and roots,

abound inthe specimen. As No. 14, is said to be * the only barren spot’

so that we may suppose this was not wanting in fertility. Nos, 10 and

12, much resemble No. 7. in appearance, though they are not so strongly

impregnated with petroleum.

Nos. 8 and 9. As tobacco soils probably owe their superiority to the

free peroxide of iron dispersed through them in veins and spots.

No. 11. Is identical with the best Georgian Sea Island cotton soil.

I must refer here to my special report on this soil :

No. 13. Is remarkable as being the only soil which offers any sensible

proportion of free calcareous matter in the shape of debris of shells ;

and here again we have to regret the want of the rocks, for these would

have assisted us in forming a judgment as to whether the soils have been

formed from their decomposition, or in horizontal beds and raised up

with the Island. We have here a succession of strata through which

the voleana may have forced its way withvut much disturbance ? or

which may have been raised up so as to shew its edges in overlying

beds? Which should then correspond round the volcanic centre; or

which may have been formed by the eruptions ? All these are curious

questions for investigation, and it is to be hoped wili not long be left

unexamined. :

No. 14. ‘The only barren spot on the Island’ says Capt. Halsted

‘ being the highest part of the central hill,’ I could not on examination

detect any saline or acid impregnation in this soil, and I should take its

barrenness, in the absence of any gaseous exhalations, which are no where

noticed in the report, to be owing to the great quantity of peroxide of

iron which it contains, so much indeed that it is almost a red ochre.

No. 15. I have already referred to above.

Minerals.

No. 16. Issentasiron ore. It is merely composed of masses of

amorphous iron pyrites, and wholly useless as an ore of iron.

Sia ee

Blo ~

UDP]

AMNPeOL? POL)

Se as SN SoM ut ZZ] a)

LVSC

’

up Represents thre beach of the land s ud seq ently rateed;thius

5 RrLoUnd From which tssiu08 pw quantily of pretroliam ; The

hich, surrounds tt and alsothe one further Southward were

rote rrasses of coral and of other rock; they comp lelely COVE

, with the exception of a slight s prinkling near the streanlct.

Yes eNy sooth)

Wika

KS -

PY US

th PG WIE

C227,

\ se9) SS .

weyour Lb

HTT

San

M ribet

is)! . 2)

pie ST Leas

Ne@re” j ~

oa Affe | & K

i) ; rf

; EXPLANATIONS.

Vavoleano near ds corndre, loud Ifiet above the Sea as

_ Represents the leach of the land subsequently ratsedsthia

and. South* atthe point Oofthe (beach. bis a very sinall voleanic mount. from which issucenu quantily of petrol. The

¢ Was a small tslet before the last eruption;the dotted line which surrounds tt and alaothe one further Southard were

Tie marks + + denote rnasses of coral and, of other rock; they compldaly cover

with the exception of a slight sprinkling near the streamlct.

_..- Shews the beach ofthe original Island.

aption commences North atthe points a- Lb.

ter portion of the Island. was ratsed about 50 years 190

gparently sard banks. O Denotes a well, a... Salt-miarshes ec... Former stecamdl ets,

L outer, or Last formation; the 2 formation has but wfeu here and there; andthe original Island ts perfectly clear of them

dite northern pont. Thy land last raised is quite uncultivated,the remainder of the Island is ore large paddy field

iA Js one of several rocks on the last raised land which exhihdt a waterline ofthe same height asthat of the 27 formation :

Imwhole Island consists of three perfeck levels different iy 6 or 8feet iv hetght, the inner one hauing ad ita contre w Volcano about ON feet above the sear

Tw water is very shoal tothe Northward, and: also or the Bustern side uf Reqguain. L Landing place.

D Specimens of the soil taken frome spot thus marked.

1841.] Illustrations of the Genera of the Bovine. 449

No. 17. Is also unfortunately not copper ore, bnt cubical iron pyrites,

containing no trace of copper, and quite valueless, unless it be abundant

enough to smelt for its sulphur where fuel and labour are cheap. The

mass of silver ore alluded to by Capt. H. was probably a lump of the

white kind of pyrites.

The coal I should think promises well, judging from these specimens

at the out-crop of a seam. ‘dt is bituminous, though not highly so, and

J found also its Sp. Grav: to be 1-31, which is that of the best

Burdwan coal. Its appearance and the fracture of some of the specimens

are also in its favour, but any opinion would be premature till we have

samples from a greater depth.

The petroleum does not call for any remark.

H. PIppINGTon.

Illustrations of the Genera of the Bovine.—Part I. Skeletons of

Bos, Bibos and Bison, the individuals examined being the

Common Bull of Nepal, the Gowri Gao of Nepal and the Yak.

Bos and Bibos, resemble one another in the general formation of the

trunk, and in having each 13 pairs of ribs, ani 6 Lumbar vertebra. In

both, the ribs, from the 5th pair inclusive, bulge outwards gradually to

the 13th which are the farthest apart. In Bisonus, on the contrary, all

the ribs are much straighter; the first 6 pairs diverging very little more

from the perpendicular than ina horse; from the 7th to the 10th pair

inclusive, the bulging is greatest; the latter pair being the farthest

apart, whence to the 14th they rather approximate, the last pair being

nearer one another than the intermediate ones. This gives a cervine

character to the trunk of Bisonus. In Bisonus 14 pairs of ribs, and only

5 Lumbar Vertebre, making an equal numberof Vertebre, in all 3

animals.

The differences between Bos and Bibos, are as follows. The spinous

process of the Dorsal Vertebree in Bibos from the 3d to the 5th inclusive

are of equal length, with avery gradual shortening of the others to the

10th which is 2 inches longer than the 11th, and the 12th is two inches

shorter than the 11th. The droop towards the loins from the greatly

elevated spinal crest of Bibos is so sudden, that in one specimen in which

the spinous process of the 10th vertebra measured 103 inches, that of

the 13th was only 5 inches. In Bos, the 3d spinous process is the longest

whence the droop commences, the dorsal spines gradually shortening

until the 10th, whence to the 13th they are not longer than those of the

450 Illustrations of the Genera of the Bovine. [No. 114,

Lumbar vertebre. The Humerus in Bos, compared with the fore arm

is somewhat shorter than in Bibos. The carpus and canon united,

compared with the fore arm is shorter in Bibos than in Bos.

The following comparative peculiarities in all these animals present

themselves :—

The skull and horns are greatly heavier in Bibos than in Bos or

Bisonus. The forehead of Bibos is at first Sight hollow, but is actually

flat ; the concave appearance being derived from a great transverse arch

of bone which surmounts the face; projecting forwards in some

degree, but its direction taken along the convexity parallel with the

centre of the horns’ cores. The orbit in Bibos projects more than in

Bos, or Bisonus: the nasal bones are most arched (transversly) in

Bibos, least so in Bos. The face—from anterior margin of orbits

to muzzle—longest in Bisonus, about equal in Bos and Bibos. In

Bisonus the forehead above the orbits, is transversly arched, in Bos it is

quite flat. In Bos, placing the muzzle on the ground, the parieto-frontal

junction is flush with the superior aspect of roots of the horns’ cores, In

Bisonus, placing the skull similarly—the superior portion of the frontal

bones is, for about an inch and a half on each side, on a line with superior

aspect of roots of horn cores; the medial portions and frontals are con-

siderably elevated, forming a central truncated cone between the two

portions already noted as being on a line with superior aspect of root

of horn cores. In Bibos again, the skull disposed as above, alarge bony

arch protruding so as to overhang the forehead runs across from horn to

horn, the arch commencing at once from their roots. Viewing the three

skulls from the superior margin of the intercornual space, (skulls placed

as before with muzzles on the ground) to the foramina magna, the follow-

ing differences appear so remarkable in Bibos, as to be alone eminently

fitted for at once distinguishing it from the others. In Bos, the entire

space from the superior margin of the foramen magnum, to the inter-

cornual crest of the frontals, is occupied by the insertions of the nuchal

muscles, and it is nearly square (trapezium.) In Bisonus, the same space

is an equilateral triangle, and divided into two separate parts. Ist. The

truly occipital portion, into the whole of which the nuchal muscles are

inserted, formed anteriorly (the muzzle on the ground) by aslightly arched

line drawn between the posterior margins of the bases of the horn

cores; and posteriorly by the superior margin of tke foramen magnum.

Qnd. The parieto-frontal portion, of a triangular shape, free from mus-

cular insertions, only tth the extent of the Ist portion, and forming the

apex of the larger triangle.

In Bibos, the same space (or posteal aspect of the skull) is of a

spheroidal shape, deeply indented about its centre by the temporal fosse,

thus dividing it into two nearly equal hemispherical portions, viz., the

anterior and larger one formed entirely by the great: intercornual crest,

and free from the insertions of nuchal muscles and ligaments, and the

posterior or truly occipital portion, occupied wholly by the insertions of

the neck muscles. The size of the intercornual crest in Bibos is so

great that the posteal aspect of the skull equals in extent the anteal

one, bounding the latter inferiorly by a line drawn across the face from

the centre of the orbits. Leaving the skulls, the following are the com-

parative differences in the trunk of these three animals.

The great developement both in elevation and extent of the spinous

ridge in Bibos, at once distinguishes this animal from Bos and Bisonus.

In Bos the greatest elevation, much inferior in height, is confined to the

spinous process of one vertebra (the 3rd) whence the declension is

uniform to the 10th. In Bibos the extreme elevation is extended to three

of the spinous processes (the 3rd, 4th and 5th), and considerable elevation

prolonged tothe 11th. In Bisonus again, which occupies a middle station

between Bos and Bibos in regard to extensive developement of the spines,

the extreme elevation, great in height as compared with Bos, is confined

to one spine, whence the declension is more sudden than in Bibos, but

less so than in Bos. These differences in the skeletons are manifested in

the living animal thus: in Bos the rise from the neck to the greatest

elevation of the spinous processes is most gradual, the highest point

being between the scapula, with declension thence gradual and uniform.

In Bibos the rise from the neck is more abrupt than in Bos, and the

declension very gradual until near the loins (at 10th Vertebra), whence to

level of loins very sndden indeed, giving the animal an appearance of

disproportioned smallness in its hinder extremities. In Bisonus the rise

from the neck is most abrupt, and confined as in Bos to the shoulders, or

rather entirely to the withers, whence the droop is more gradual and

uniform than in Bibos, but less so than in Bos.

In detail these appearances arise from the following state of spinous

process. In Bos the first spinous process is only 2-3ds the length of the

2nd. In Bibos the Ist spine is to 2nd as7 to 8. In Bisonus the Ist

spine (dorsal) is of extraordinary length and only perceptibly shorter

than 2nd one, which is the longest of all, whereas in Bos and Bibos the

3rd is the longest.

Summary of Osteological Characters as noted above.

Bos.—Dorsal Vertebre and Ribs 13; Lumbar Vertebre 6; Ribs laterally

bulging from the sixth pair giving great expansion of costal region;

452 Illustrations of the Genera of the Bovine. [No. 114.

transverse processes of Lumbar Vertebre long and strong, spinous process

of this not specially developed: the 3rd Dorsal Vertebra the longest,

whence a gradual and uniform shortening of spinous processes to 10th,

which is not longer than those of Lumbars, Metacarpal bone (Canon)

long, ditto Metatarsus, forehead flat, nasal bones obtusely arched ; facial

portion of skull (all below the orbits) longer than in Bibos, shorter than

in Bisonus, or Bubalus, in which longest of all. Intercornual space

scarcely arched; skull less massive than in Bibos, more so than in

Bisonus ; Posteal aspect of skull square and smaller compared to fore-

head (all above orbits) than in Bisonus, greatly so than in Bibos.

Bibos.—Skull deep, broad, and very massive, an elevated massive and

protruding intercornual crest, overhanging the forehead nasal bones,

longitudinally arched (especially in the male), giving along with the

protruding intercornual crest, a hollow appearance to the forehead.

Posteal aspect of skull as extensive as the forehead. Horns of great

thickness, short and invested over their intermediate crest. Ribs and

Dorsal Vertebree 13; Lumbars 6; lateral processes of Lumbars, less

developed than in Bos, more so than in Bisonus. Ribs laterally bulging

as in Bos—if any difference less so. Metacarpus (Canon bone) and

Metatarsus shorter than in Bos, longer than in Bisonus. Spinous ridge

greatly developed both in altitude and in extent—the processes conti-

nuing of great length to the llth. They exceed those in Bos, even in

a greater degree, than the massiveness of skull and horns would in-

dicate.

Bisonus.—Dorsal Vertebree and Ribs 14—Lumbars 5—Ribs straight,

and costal cavity compressed and cervine compared with Bos and Bibos.

Spinous ridge greatly developed anteriorly, but less protracted in extent

and declining (from 3d spinous process) more abruptly than in Bibos.

Skull less massive than in Bos or Bibos, facial portion longer and more

finely tapering. Superior portion of forehead transversely arched. In-

tercornual space centrally elevated, viewed anteriorly, this portion is a

truncated cone, posteal aspect of skull triangular, more extensive than

in Bos, but greatly less sothan in Bibos. Metatarsus and Metacarpus,

shorter than in Bibos or Bos. .

Remarks.—The character of the limbs in Bos, indicate the greatest

degree of locomotive speed, and the developement of the Lumbar region,

promises the greatest burden-bearing power. The cervine character

of costal region in Bisonus may, in locomotive energy compensate the

longer canon bone, and Metatarsus of Bos, nor is it improbable, that

the additional pair of ribs in the same animal, by adding to his length

of barrel and shortness of loins, may compensate to him the greater

indications of strength in the Lumbar region of Bos,

1841.] Illustrations of the Genera of the Bovine. 453

P. S.—Since writing the above I have seen the sculls of a male and

female Gayal from Sylhet. The face is flat, the intercornual space is flush

as in Bos ; the horns are somewhat triangular at their base, tapering to

-a sharp point, dark green, about 43 feet apart at the apices, and laterally

diverging from their base. The Gayal, Mr. Hodgson informs me, has

13 Ribs: its head it indisputably Bovine, much more so than in Bibos.

A, C.*

Part II. Craniology of Bibos, Bison and Bubalus, the subjects

of examination being the Gouri Gao, the Gayal, the Yak and the

Arna —

Adverting to the annexed table of admeasurements, I proceed to re-

mark upon the several sculls :

Dimensions and weight of the sculls and horns of Bibos Cavifrons (1), Bos Gaveus

(2), Bisonus Poephagus or the Yak (3), and Bubalus Arna (4), Common Domestic

Bull of Mepal (5), 6, 7 fem of 1 and 2.

max: to crown of fore-

head, eeeoeooeveaee eoeeeeenes

Greatest height;....>........| lL 3

Greatest width of frontals 11

between the orbits, ....

Least ditto ditto,..........0 0 8

Greatest width of frontals,

between anteal and infe-

rior bases of horns, ....

Height or length of posteal

plane of scull from lower

edge of foram : condyles

to crest of forehead, ....

Length of frontals from

line drawn through mid rion

orbits to crest of fore- 2

head, @eeereeGeeoreeee ooo

Length of Nasals, ....... Pe tie eee ea

Greatest breadth at Muzzle

(aniermaxall :)\5 i460

Diameter of orbits,.......... Or egg

Symphysis of intermaxill :

to inferior edge of the

orbits,..... Bhisjss Savoia

Thence to bases of horn,....

Basal circuit of the horns, . 5

Terminal interval of horns,.. 0

Greatest interval of ditto, 0

Length of horns greatest by 10 8

Outer CUIVE, ......cccee °

—

Length fromSymph: inter-

—

Cw)

Oo HK © DH

SS = SE

too =

i—)

i=)

<=)

f=)

niet

ie}

i=)

re)

(ee)

(i=)

i=)

for)

i=)

(o2)

bho

bist

oooF

Sean = ad

Co @® vk @ Ne

oooco

I naseo a A

Rin Di NR OH LUO

ooor

= anoce ow oS

ce ee ee

ooors

KH amon oe

co ow fh S&S ve

(=)

—

(<=)

Oo oo fe de

os WH Ww a

om ww BH dH

oy ON NIK

nw Ww CO

win ce C89

—

)

—y

NK Ov ©

fo oS) Me

KH DEH O SO

ee WWF O i=) oo &

eee OoOo fF OC S&

— le)

= OK & f=} (Se (Sy SS

on WOE

S vk OCH (=)

Oo COOCSCfH RH DM fy DA

1 3

Ibs. |103 Ibs.

010 000 0000

SO SO SAP CDH

DS © SPHDEDH

oaooced (—}

Weight of sculls and horns,..|30 lbs. 8 0z.}|17

Length of face fromSymph:

intermaxill: to lower edge 0. TL) zs 40

DOOEOTESE YS. cididc cu cle ele eave

Length of forehead from

lower edge of orbits to 0-179 3 |0 9 QO 7%

crown of frontals,

94 lbs.

—_

nD Oo, COHN YW WKF S

rs)

—

_—

bho

eocceee

09 3108000 000

* These initials indicate the work of Dr. Campbell of Darjeeling, formerly my assist«

ant, and who was kind enough to afford me his aid on this, as on various other

occasions.

A54 Illustrations of the Genera of the’ Bovine. [No. 114,

The prime characteristics of No. 1, or the scull of the Gouri, are

enormous size, (above a third greater than that of the ox); more than

proportionate massiveness or weight (being treble that of the ox); and

lastly, great breadth, without marked deficiency of correspondent height

or length. The greatest width of the frontals, between the extreme

bases of the horns, is to the length as 14 to 93; but the greatest width

between the extreme margins of the orbits is to the length only as 11 to

2, At first sight the frontals, exclusive of their crest, look flat; but they

are really somewhat concave, and that, as well across between the very

salient orbits, as longitudinally between the arched nasals, and the com-

mencement of their own crest. That crest is most remarkable: it

occupies the whole breadth of the bases of the horns and ascends nearly

2 inches above them, in a bold transverse arch. From the plane of the

forehead it rises with a slight declination backwards, has a round edge

on the crest, and thence falls perpendicularly upon the parallel plane of

the occiput of which it constitutes (with the entirely merged parietes)

above one half. The posteal plate of the scull thus becomes of an

extreme size, being in depth to the lower edge of the condyles of the

great foramen, longer or deeper, than the anteal plane of the frontals,

great as the latter is, Another feature of the posteal plane is the very

deep indentation of the temporal fosse, which cut half in two the

superior, pseudo-occipital or cristate, and the inferior or truly occipital

portions of the posteal plane.

}. Of the trigonal ridge, which, in the Bisons, bounds superiorly the

parietals, there is no trace, and very little of the true transverse ridge of

the occiput which commonly limits the parietes inferiorly. With regard to

shape, the occipital plane is neither square or semi-circular, but rather! if

you exclude the interruption made by the temporal fossz, spheroidal between

the incurved salient alee of the condyles below, and the bold transverse ar-

cuation of the crest above ; and if you include that interruption, bi-elliptic

or composed of two oblate rounded figures of an ovoid or elliptical out-

line, and lying, one above the other, transversely to the scull, the upper

or pseudo-occipital portion being the larger. The facial portion of the

scull is equal in length to the frontal portion : the orbits are very salient

and cervine, with rapid contraction of the head’s breadth before them

towards the nasals, which are of ample length and exhibit an arched

form both lengthwise and across. The breadth of the intermaxillaries

is moderate, in the position of the muzzle, which in the living animal

is small; and though the nasals are produced much to the front, yet

the lateral solution of continuity in the bones towards the malars

1841.] Illustrations of the Genera of the Bovine. 455

(the intermaxillaries not reaching the bones of the nose at all) is ample;

and this, with the convexity of those bones, leaves abundant space for the

olfactory apparatus. Other peculiarities of this scull, are, that the rami

of the lower jaws are but slightly bent in comparison to those of Bos;

and that their condyles as well as those of the foramen magnum have a

lower than ordinary position. The horns, of very moderate length, and

gradually attenuated from a very thick base, occupy the extreme ends

of the frontal crest, filling its breadth but not ascending within two inches

of its greatest height. Their direction is towards the sides with a slight

uniform ascending and retiring curve, which brings the points back about

half way to the bases with a direction suited to their junction over the

neck, though, in males especially, the distance between the points always

remains great. The horns are upon the whole rounded, but with consi-

derable oblique depression towards the massive bases, so that their breadth

is greater by 4 than their depth, and the anterior surface sharper or

narrower than the posterior one, the greatest surfaces being (in a_ hori-

zontal position of the scull) towards the zenith and nadir. The result

is a subtrigonal or ovoid section at the base, where in old animals there

are externally several heavy wrinkles: the colour is horn green with

black tips. -

No. 2, which is the half reclaimed stock of Gavceus vel Bos sylhetanus,

is likewise a large scull, not above a 6th less than the preceding in

dimensions of extent, but scarcely exceeding half of the weight of it, the

bones being far less massive and also smooth on the surface. Here again

we have signal length and breadth in the frontal region, both rapidly

diminishing in the relatively contracted facial, so that the distance

between the small fine muzzle and the eyes exceeds not that between

the latter point and the summit of the head. In the precedent scull,

the same proportion was observed. But in the profile of the pre-

sent there are none of the curved lines, so noticeable in the last

—no frontal crest, no saliency in the orbits, and no arcuation in the

length of the nasals, which are, besides, as well comparatively as posi-

tively short, whence the interval, between their points, and those of

the intermaxillaries is much greater than in the last; though, as in it,

these bones are entirely disconnected by the intervention of the

malars.. The greatest width of the frontals, at the two points before

indicated, is to their length as 13 and 10 to 84. These are dimensions

and proportions pretty similar to the last, and exhibit a comparative

breadth not found in the common types of Bos, with which however the

present scull agrees in the perfect flatness and rectilinearity of its frontals,

456 Illustrations of the Genera of the Bovine. (No. 114.

owing tothe non-saliency of the orbits and to the straightness of the

culmenal line drawn between the bases of the horns. There isa further

essential agreement with Bos and disagreement with the last, in the

circumstance of the horns being inserted on the summit of the frontals,

which however, asin the last are carried high up between the horns

and thence dropt perpendicularly upon the parallel plane of the occiput,

of which they constitute with the entirely merged parietes, not indeed

a half as in Bos, but a very material portion, almost 2th. The posteal

plane of the scull is consequently of dimensions inferior only to those

of the last but superior to those of the occipital surface in Bos or Buba-

lus or Bisonus. In the present subject its depth or length is not far from

equal to that of the frontal plane, large as the latter is ; and as in the

last temporal fossee make a deep indentation upon it, though not so deep

as in Bibos nor so centrally placed in respect to the height or depth of

the plane. This indentation in both sculls marks by its position the

extent of the false and true portions of the occipital plane, or that com-

posed of the frontals and the parietals, and that composed of the occi-

pital bones inclusive of those of the foramen and its condyles. In Bibos

the former portion is equal, and more than equal to the latter, and the

indentation is consequently central; in the present animal the propor-

tions of the two parts are as 2 to 3 and consequently the indentation

is supercentral. This indentation likewise, as already noted is much

less deeply cut, though more so than in the more ordinary types of Bos ;

in which latter, however, the false occiput, so characteristic of these 2

sculls (Gouri and Gayal), cannot be said to exist; nor is there in Bos

proper any sign of the trigonal ridge defining the course of the parietes

supertorly in the Bisons and in them only, The transverse ridge bound-

ing the parietes inferzorly is defined in this scull (Gayal) about as dis-

tinctly as in Bibos and in Bos. In point of shape the posteal plane of

the present subject represents in its upper portion a vague transversely

laid parallelogram, and in its lower, an oblate sphere—of which two the

proportionate size has been already stated as 2 to 3. But, if we take no

heed of the indentation of the temporal fosse and moreover consider

(as Cuvier always does) the base of the plane as recitlinear, the figure of

the plane may be called square. In the common Ox this indentation is

really almost obsolete: but in both Ox and Yak, as in the Bibos also, the

basal line is arched downwards. The culmenal line is arched, (upwards)

only in the Gouri or Bibos and in the Bisontine Yak. The angle formed

by the posteal with the anteal plane of the scull of the Gayal is very acute

and in facta right angle as in Bos and Bibos. The non-saliency of the

1841.] Illustrations of the Genera of the Bovine. 457

orbits and the straightness, longitudinally viewed, of the nasals, have

been already noticed. In these respects, as in the lesser compression of

the lachrymal and malar bones, the present scull agrees with that of the

common Ox ; but the intermaxillaries are narrower at their extremity, and

the nasal bones are shorter in proportion to them, and to all the other

dimensions indeed, than in the common Ox. [In the narrowness of the

muzzle (intermax:) there is a point of affinity with Bibos ; and with regard

to the bend of the rami of the lower jaws and to the position (high or low)

of their condyles, as well as those of the foramen magnum, the scull ex-

hibits a mixed character composed half of Bibos and of Bos. Duvancel

erroneously I think stated to Cuvier that the Gayal species in the wild state

have no proper dorsal ridge. Dr. Buchanon, however, asserted, of the

reclaimed race, that the true ridge is present but short in extent, not ex-

tending over more than a third of the back. I cannot decide that essential

point: but [ know that the Cayal has only 13 pairs of ribs; and from the

characters of the scull, I deduce a confirmation of H. Smith’s opinion that

the animal isan osculent species, as I should say of Bos or of Bibos ac-

cording as it has, or has not the true dorsal ridge. The horns are placed

at the ends of the highest part of the frontals, a large portion of which on

both surfaces of the scull they cover or flank rather with their thick bases.

Towards the bases they exhibit several wrinkles, but are smooth upwards

and rapidly attenuated to the blunt points; as in Bibos the horns are

subtrigonal and depressed the broadest faces (in the horizontal position of

the head) being the superior and inferior, the next so, the posteal. and

least broad, the anteal. The depression is even more distinct than in

Bibos, but still the section is, upon the whole, ovoid. The horns are

directed outwards with a slight inclination backward and upward, and

hardly any curvature so that their divergency is exteme. The colour is

wholly black, and this as well as the very moderate curve of the horns,

and their position upon the summit of the perfectly flat frontals, may be

used as decisive criterea to distinguish the spoils from those of Bibos or

No. 1. In the females of Bibos the frontal crest, though less conspicuous

than in the males, is ever present, and may be marked at once by the arched

_ line passing between the highest bases of the horns, which it transcends in

the middle—and by the depression of the frontals between their lowest

bases. The sculls too of Govceus are from a half toa third smaller, taking

weight and dimensions together. In the females of Bibos the horns are so

much bent that the tips are as near as the bases, and pointed directly at

each other just behind be nape. I proceed now to No. 3 or the Chowry

Ball of Tibet which has 14 pairs of ribs and a strong dorsal ridge, though

458 Illustrations of the Genera of the Bovine. [No. 114,

limited in extent to the withers ; and which is therefore justly consi-

dered to belong to the Bisontine group, though it be perhaps an aberrant

or osculant species more connected by some of the characters of its scull

with the Bubalines than with the Taurines. The distinctive characters

of this scull are moderate size and weight, dimensions of length more

preponderant (from increase in the facial region) over those of breadth,

and more specially of height, than in either of the foregone or even in

the common Ox; and, lastly, frontals distinctly though trivially convex

in the upper part, whence they pass with a somewhat obtuse angle into a

semi-circular or rather trigonal occipital plane of very moderate size,

The excess in length of the facial over the frontal portion of the scull is

as ll to 7. The greatest width of the frontals at the two points before

named is to their length as 10 and 9 respectively to 63: but as, owing to

the higher position of the orbits, the nasals do not really extend upwards

beyond a line drawn across anfeal the edge of the orbits, the proper pro-

portion of length to breadth of frontals is really about 73to93. This is

an excess of proportionate width by no means exceeding that of the preced-

ing examples, nay rather falling short of their proportionate breadth,

It, however, exceeds the proportion inthe common Ox, whose frontals,

measured in the way just suggested and for the same reasons, are only as

broad as long, and that equally whether we take the breadth between the

orbits or between the bases of the horns. At first sight the frontals seem

flat, owing to the elevation of the orbits; but they are effectually, and

especially in the upper part, arched, as well across as longwise, so as to

lessen the angle made with the occipital plane which is of moderate size,

and composed entirely of the true occipital and parietal bones. These

bones, elimited by a continuous ridge, whose apex constitutes at once the

summit of the frontal crest and of the occipital plane, constitute the

latter aright angled triangle, defined laterally (below the parietals) by

the temporal fossee and lambdoid crest, and basally by an imaginary

straight line drawn transversely throuvh the condyles of the foramen

magnum. Theindentation of the temporal fosse upon the occipital plane,

though larger than in the domestic Ox, is far less than in either of the

preceding species; and, as itis drawn much upwards close under the

horns, the occipital trigon is uninterrupted ; as, for a similar reason, is the

occipital square of the Ox, whose parietes, however, are merged, as in the

Gouri and Gayal, though placed as high as in the Yak. Owing to this

merging and tothe absence of transverse arcuration in the frontal ridge

line, the occipital plane in the Ox becomes square; whereas, owing to

the boldly defined and pointed parietal ridge, and to the rounding off of

1841.] Illustrations of the Genera of the Bovine. 459

the frontals on either side of it, the same plane in the Yak becomes trigo-

nal—or where the parietal ridge is more obscure and the rounded off and

transversely arched ridge line of the frontais is made to define the occipi-

tal plane superiorly—semicircular; the base being always considered a

straight line. There is a strong tendency, no doubt towards the Bubaline

scullin the Yak, and not merely in the round and sloped off frontals as

as above noticed, but also in the great extent of the facial portion of the

scull, and in the very small curve of the rami of the lower jaw. Towards

Bibos again there is an inclination in the transverse intercornual arch

though it be vague, in the salient orbits, and in the longitudinal arcua-

tion of the nasals, as well as in the large lateral vacuity towards the

molars. The intermaxillaries cease considerably short of the nasals and

the two sets of bones are consequently wholly unconneeted, more so even

than in the Gouri or Gayal. The nasals are no way deficient in length ;

yet is the interval between their anteal extremities and those of the in

termaxillaries more signal than in the Gouri, the Gayal, or even the Arna

in which last the nasals are at a maximum of developement so as to be

connected with the intermaxillaries for a considerable extent—a circum-

stance sometimes observable to a less extent in the scullsof the common

Ox. Inthe living Bison or Yak the muzzle is small as in Bibos, but I

cannot say I clearly trace the symptoms of this in any unusually narrow-

ness of the intermaxillaries at their symphysis. Upon the whole the scull

of the Yak as compared with that of the common Ox, is larger in propor-

tion to the size of the animals, and exceeds the Bovine scullas much in

breadth as it falls short of it in depth or height. These are characters of

depression and are no where else so noticeable as in Bibos (excluding the

crest) whence the sculls of both come further to agree in the common in-

clination towards straight lower jaws lowly articulated. But in the

length of the facial portion of the scull as compared to the frontal

and consequent high position of the orbits, and in the tendency of

the rounded frontals to slope off easily towards the occipital plane,

the Yak’s scull differs antipodally from that of Bibos, approaching

in the same degree to the Bubaline cranium. Of all the sculls now

before us the position of the orbits is highest (longitudinally viewed)

in the Arnaor wild buffale, and lowest in the wild Gouri or Bibos;

in the Yak its position is most analogous to that it holds in the common

Ox. In regard to saliency of the orbits, there is the strongest resem-

blance between the Bison and. Bibos—none of the others showing the

least tendency that way. The horns of the yak, of moderate size, jetty

black, rounded and smooth occupy, as usual, the ends of the frontal

460 Illustrations of the Genera of the Bovine. [WNo. 114,

apex having the frontal bones somewhat arched between them as well

transveysedly as lengthwise, though the evenness of the arcuation both

ways be somewhat broken by the saliency of the apex of the parietes,

which apex shows itself palpably on the central point of the crown of

the forehead sometimes rising a little above and in rear of the cases of

the horns. The horns are directed at first outwards, and then reverted

upwards and backwards with a bold curve, which often leaves the points

not remoter than the bases, in which case. the points will tend towards

the crown of the withers, or if less curved, directly backwards and

parallelly.

I proceed now to No. 4 or the Bubaline scull, the most signal charac-

ters of which are elongation or preponderance of length over both

width and depth, the very large proportion of that length borne by the

facial portion in comparison of the frontal or cerebral, and the easy

rounded slope by which the clearly convex frontals pass into the occi-

pital plane. In regard however to the last named characters there is

considerable diversity of degree found in different sculls, those which

have the horns directed most backwards from and at their bases being

most signal for the confluent rotundity of the frontals and parietals (in

some almost as noticeable as in our own heads) and those which have

the horns directly least backwards, being least so. Massiveness and

size are no doubt further characteristics of the Bubaline scull; but

characters in which it will bear no comparison, at least in regard to

weight with that of Bibos, though the vast size of the Arna’s horns will

sometimes approximate the weight of both scull and horns to that of

the sculland horns of Bibos. The Arna or type of Bubalus has 13

pair of ribs and no trace of the dorsal ridge of Bibos and of Bison, the

ridge line being perfectly straight in the living animal from the nape

to the root of the tail, The Arna is one third larger than the finest

domestic breeds of buffaloe, and, like the wild type of Bibos, is distinguished

fora short tail reaching only to the hocks. The limbs are much less

fine than in the other Bovines, the body longer in proportion to its height,

and the habits quite different, leading the animals perpetually to wallow

in mud and water. Mais revenons a nos ossements. The length of the

facial portion of the seull compared with that of the frontal is as 15 to 10

nearly. The greatest width of the frontals at the two points before

indicated is to their length as 10 and 83 respectively to73. The frontals

in fact are both short and narrow, and they are invariably more or less,

and generally markedly, convex, as well transversely between the unsa-

lient orbits as lengthwise from vehind the orbits to the occiput. The

1841. | Mlustrations of the Genera of the Bovine. — 461

more arched the forehead the obtuser the angle formed with the occipital

plane andthe more distinctly do a portion of the frontals and all the

parietal go to froma part of that plane. In such cases the pseudo-

occipital portion of the posteal plane is very noticeable constituting

nearly one half of its whole depth and representing a transverse ovoid

figure or oblate spheroid bounded above by the vaguely defined crown

of the frontals, and below by the rather deep indentations of the temporal

fossee connected by any imaginary line. But usually, and whenever

the frontals are not very much curved in their length, the pseudo-occipital

portion of the posteal plane of the scull is trivial in depth, and defined

above by a nearly straight line between the ends of the horns—the rest

of the posteal plane constituting a second and less depressed sphere,

defined above by the course of the true occipitalr idge, and nearly exclud-

ing the parietal trigon so strongly marked in the last or the Bison of

Tibet, but here wholly unmarked, the bone itself being utterly merged in-

the frontals.

In point of size the posteal plane of the scull, though moderate on the

whole, is yet usually larger than in the Ox or in the Yak, but far inferior

in extent to what is seen in Bibos—most nearly resembling the propor-

tion and figure too in the Gayal. The nasals, molars and intermaxil-

laries are extremely developed longitudinally, so that the orbits are

nearly twice as far from the symphysis intermaxill. as from the crown

of the frontals. These bones have no proportionate breadth so that the

face is narrow as well as long, except at the symphysis of the intermaxil-

laries where the dilation of the bones clearly indicates the broad massive

muzzle of the live animal. The intermaxillaries intervene between the

molars and nasals for 2 to 3 inches: the nasals are not at all arched and

are well produeed to the front so that the nasal cavity is upon the whole

small, though somewhat increased by the lateral dilatation of the intermax-

illaries in the region of the muzzle. The deficient width of the scull

is indicated by the close position of the rami of the lower jaw, and

its moderate height or depth, by their small curvature, though in the

last particulars of deficient depth and consequent straightness of the

lower jaws, the Yak’s scull is pre-eminent. The horns of the Arna

are signally remarkable for size, for horizontality, and for depression :

their thickness is not so remarkable as their length and their tendency

backwards parallelly to the plane of the face with bold lateral single

curves (to the sides neither sinking nor rising) and more or less of

divergency. Their length is sometimes enormous and there is a clear

distinction between the breeds with the longer and less divergent, and

462 Illustrations of the Genera of the Bovine. [No. 114.

those with the shorter and more divergent horns. The horns are

inserted typically at the ends of the frontal line which usually lies evenly

between them, but is sometimes arched. They are so much depressed

that the width is more than double of the depth, and the depression

being at the same time oblique, the outer or anteal side presents a consid-

erable flat surface, while the inner or posteal one shows an edge only.

The horns are therefore strictly triangular and that invariably so, 4 or 5

inches only at the points being rounded, and there only the horns are

smooth, the rest of the surface being covered with close transverse wrin-

kles or rugae.

With regard to the sculls of the domestic Ox and those of the females

of the Gouri and the Gayal, I will not fatigue the reader by any separate

remarks onthem. They have been sufficiently mentioned incidentally.

General dimensions, aspect and external characters of the Gouri Gao,

the Arna and the Yak.

(1) Gouri Gao, (2) Arna or wild Buffaloe.

(1) (2)

Nape to root tail, straight............ a: TGA 7st 6

Height at shoulder ditto.............. 51 S900 5 4 4

Ditto at croup ditto..... FEES. Hk,» ott 5 0 0 5s) Geos

Depthiof chest alitton: . 2) acueioaect . ates 3.0 4

Girth behind shoulder ......., ...... 8 7 0 8 6 0

Fore leg to line of Chest ...... ...... 2%°30 0 2 4 0

Tatlonly oz. 2o.ais¢t gma aha 3s. 1430: Ri Bis 29a 0

Tailant tuk 92it.eninoi bal eidae.e 2200 23 19-00 211 0

Head, length from nape to snout along

the curve bo 2 ene 6s

Diito straight, snout to crown forehead. 110 3 L162 3

Ditto ditto Snout to foreangleofeye.. 1 0 0 |

Thence to nearest base of horn...... 0 5 2 0 4 4

Depth of head, greatest from crest of

forehead to edge jaw........ ... : 3 L4ua LE, -Aia®

Breadth of forehead, greatest above Room

BUS 35. 21058 2... MEL ese. Wine ona

Length of ditto from line of upper edge

2 orbits to crest of head . ‘i : 3° Mog 08 3

Lengthioleatsnd. siz 47a Ani. Ja. f 010 O11 4

Greatest: width O£3. [3,218.3 208. 20s 2h 0 6 43 0 0 0

Length of fore hoof ...... Boe 06 0 0 7

Greatest breadth of ditto.....0.....00 0 4 2 0 «F720

1841.] Illustrations of the Genera of the Bovine. 4G3

Length of hind hoof...... ...... BHA (OWS a0 06 2

Greatest breadth of ditto.............. 0 4 0 0 5 ¢

Horns length outside curoge.... ..... 192.9910 4 6 0

Terminal interval of tips........ .. FapL enQse0 | sfioe

Nearest basal interval posteal ........ 0 7 O ant — 6 0

Remotest basal interval anteal ........ Lboes post: hy: 0" 0

Weight of scull and horns............ 32 Ibs 30 Ibs.

Girth of horns:at base ...... . ...... Fe gieg Hi 890

Character of the heads with their integuments.

Gouri Gav. The head is large and massive with great breadth and depth

rapidly diminishng towards the gape where the ample lips and muzzle cause

it to swell again : the straightness of facial line is slightly interrupted by

the arcuation of the chaffron, even before you reach that light point where

the frontals commence to make their huge curved sweep towards the occi-

put. The crest of this sweep is about 14 inch above the horns ; its anteal

base 53, and its posteal, 24 above the proximate planes, fore and aft.

Its form is almost cylindric between the bases of the horns which occupy

its ends entirely, and pass behind it on the dorsal surface; muzzle of

small size for a taurine animal and somewhat indented curvately on

superior edge instead of running straight across between tops of nares;

nares broad, lunate and oblique: upper lip full, laxly applied to head,

and falling over lower lip which has a small beard : both lips near the

gape have large soft pointed and recurved papille. The 8 incisors below,

which are ranged ina small arch with broad nearly level crowns, are

quite moveable in the gums: the chaffron is of medial length and boldly

convexed lengthwise and across: the forehead is long, broad and flat,

till the arched sweep between the horns commences at.7 inches from

the extreme anteal base of forehead or a line drawn across the anteal

points of orbits : From ihzs line to the crest of forehead there is a length

exactly equal to the greatest breadth between the orbits, which is at

‘their posteal salient angles. From the great length and bread the of

forehead result the low position and great separation of the eyes.

|The interval between them across the top of the chaffron is one foot by

the natural curve; and the distance from their anterior canthurs to the

'mearest base of the horn is 53 inches. In the Arna the same interval is

but 83; and the same distauce, but 3. The ears are of ample size and

! spread greatly towards the tips, the shape being somewhat ovoid; from

anterior edge of helix proceed some long hairs, and the lower margin

is indented by short striz of closer hairs which run all round its edge:

A464 Iilustrations of the Genera of the Bovine. [No. 114.

the rest of the interior is nude ; the auditory orifice is at the very bot-

tom of the ears, small and round, and protected on the anteal side by a

process equivalent to the tragus, but wholly internal above this a short

transverse bilobate process defining the upper line of the small and

vague concha, and having a deep inclination above it answering to the

lower ridge of the antihelix and seapha respectively.

The eyes are rather small, oblique, full with oblong oblique pupil and

large soft lashes to upper lid. The horns are very remote, short thick,

directed nearly outwards and a little backwards with the tips recurved

inwards and backwards. They have avery broad base passing gradually

into skin and posteally secreting and nude. They are depressed and

subtriangular, the broadest faces being the superior and inferior, and the

third of the triangle, the posteal face: the anteal is reduced to an ob-

tusely rounded edge merely: the trigonal form gradually gives way

upwards, and the recurves are conic, ending ina sharp point: two or

three heavy rug near base: rest of horn very smooth and glossy: colour

pale green with black points. As already noted, the horns lie 13 inch

below the crest of the forehead; but a portion of their base passes a

good way behind that crest, which ends on the occipital surface of the

head in a small segment of a circle, below which the plane of the occi-

put is quite and falls perpendicularly on the nape with aclear dip of se-

veral inches wholly unoccupied by the muscular attachments of the neck.

The hoofs in the living animal are not spread, but rather compressed,

with the flat sides of the cleft nearly touching. The sole is flat, roanded,

softish, and ascending posteallywards the false hoofs which are con-

siderably developed and conical, the fore hoofs larger than the hind:

the neck short thick, and sunk between the frontal and dorsal crests the

shoulders and trunk very massive and deep, being surmounted by an

elevated dorsal ridge conterminous with the ribs: the hind limbs and

croup lower and feebler; the barrel tapering ventrally towards the

hind legs : limbs low, stout, fine ; tail hardly reaching the hocks, slender,

cylindeco-tapered, closely haired and ending ina full tuft. The hide is

exceedingly thick: the hair close, glossy and of one sort only, though

the specimen be a mature male killed in mid winter. On the forehead,

on the chin, and thence to the thest (along the abdominal aspect of neck)

and on the fronts of the limbs below the central flexures, and there

only, is the hair a little elongated and slightly waved or curled; but

only slightly and every where else the coat is short, straight and ap-

plied. The hairs of the tail tuft also are course, a little elongated.

There are 4 teats plainly developed and running in two lines on either

;

1841.] Illustrations of the Genera of the Bovine. 465

side the scrotum before it begins to depend : a fifth is bastard and irre-

gular. The colour of the animal is black: but the forehead, the whole

limbs below the central flexures, the edge of the upper lip and the chin

are dirty yellow white: the scrotum, and insides of thighs near it, tan

colour: insides of fore legs near body, or sides of chest, also paled and

yellow grey: internal nude parts of lip and palate, fleshy white: in-

sides of ears, ruddy fleshy.

BuFFALOE WILD. The head is as long as the Gouri’s but not so massive.

Its entire facial line is straight: the forehead is much shorter and nar-

rower and convexed across. By reason of the shortness of the frontal

bones, the eyes are more raised and much nearer to the horns. In _ pro-

portion as the frontals are shortened, the nasals (or chaffron) are

elongated, giving the head a narrower longer look. The frontals are

not raised above the superior edge of the horns, and they pass witha

gentle curve tothe occiput: Kars larger, narrower and more pointed:

muzzle larger and squared between superior edges of the nostrils, which

have a longitudinal direction not obliquely across, as in the Gouri.

The whole animal is clearly in make longer than the Gouri but not more

massive on the whole, more so in the hind quarters, less so in the

fore. The back is quite straight without osseous crest or fleshy

hump, and the neck and head are in line withit: the tail as short

as in the Gouri: skin nearly as thick. The Gouri has more massive-

ness in the head and shoulders, and its chest is quite as deep or

deeper, but the barrel and croup both follow much behind. As the

Gouri stands at ease, the crown of his forehead is as high as the

crest of his shoulders ; but there is a deep fall between the two, and

the back has a long and pretty equable slope from the withers to

the croup where there is a sudden droop. The limbs are shorter

but as strong though less gross than in Arna,and the hoofs are smal-

ler and less spread : tail similar in both: Ears shorter broader and less

drooped in the Gouri Gau. The Arna islonger and higher on the whole;

is equally strong fore and aft ; and the line of the back is quite straight

from the head to the tail. Both have the knees and forehead tufted : but

the Gouri is uniformly and fully clad in short Bovine soft hair, while the

Arna has its head, neck, chest, shoulders and greater part of its body

above, scantly dressed in bristly hair, and the rest of the skin, more or

less denuded.

June 1.—Farus in UrEero oF Gourt Gav. Snout to rump 16 inches.

Height at shoulder 1", at croup 93. Head (straight) from snout to fron-

tial ridge, 5. Tail 4, is probably not above 3 months old, nude, fleshy

466 Illustrations of the Genera of the Bovine. [No. 114.

red, with yellow hoops; isa female. 13 Pairs of ribs, 7 true and 6

false per side: dorsal vertebre 13: Lumbar 6: (Ilium in foetus joined

only to one sacral vertebra) alias, ossa ilu jointed with Ist sacral verte-

bra only. Hollow of sacrum formed of three. In all 4 sacral: caudal

16: cervical 7: Spinous process of the 7th but moderately raised,

process of Ist dorsal twice as long as 2nd and 3rd dorsals, gradually

increasing : 4th to 8th nearly equal and longest: 9th 10th about length

of 23: 1lto13 gradually falling off; spinous process of lumbars not

noticeably larger but broader than those of dorsal. Dorsals: Dorsal

vertebra 13: Spine of dentale vertebre rather large. The general

contour of the head from nose to occiput presents an equable arch in all

its length, the frontals having no transverse dip, and, but a moderate

crest passing backwards with a broad quiet swell: frontals 2, divided

longitudinally : 2 parietals occupying the sides of the head, contributing

to the full uniform swell of superior surface and indented posteally in a

triangular shape, which indentation is filled by the anteal portion of the

occipital, and is still on superior surface of the scull. This triangular

occipital bone is bounded below, by the transverse suture, and here the

fall towards the posteal surface of the cranium begins. The second, or

true occipital bone, bearing the crest is shaped differently. The others

are two for the codyles, and one for the cuneiform process.

This young is a female, and probably therefore as well as on account

of its imperfect state, the head shews nothing of the transverse depres-

sion or of the huge crest, characterising the frontals of mature male.

Kidneys, as in Bos, oblong and multilobular, Intestines 20 feet, of thin

uniform diameter. Ccecum 13 inch long, and 36 inches from end; its

diameter and that of gut below it, rather plus that of the small guts.

Stomach 8 inches long; length between orifices, 5—from Cardiac to

funders, 3; peculiar formation vaguely traceable ; great paunch largest ;

next solvent, rather less.

June 20.—MoTHER OF ABOVE, FROM SAUL FOREST. Snout to rump nine

feet. Height before 5 feet. ‘Tail 2 feet one inch. All essential characters

and the aspect, of mas, but smaller considerably and dorsal and frontal

crests less developed. Colours identical.

Yak, Bisonus Pephagus, male, mature, July 12.

Nape lo root tail "(stranomty, sc. . en. ot ae » celina b 5 6 0

Heieht: at shoulder, os seme atc dae seca ee nee te ee cat 3 4 2 0

Ditto at croup, .'....: ae wee neh RN etc 10 yee emir . Koeee ig

1841.] Iilustrations of the Genera of the Bovine. 467

Depth of chest,...... La Reite ti eueieet ad oh Shoat Bantmiatity, 2 6 0

Bere nehandsshouldergnpydid thisisle. aaiceles oi talislemcadaware £2 Di bOx OD

Foreleg from rest to elbow, ....., Lbaeiai ete ineteiats ap lenstion Lael Orr

Hindleg from ditto to true knee, .......... shefeweets a gueists = ld Serie fan

POI rats g's) Solas wie wis voli scaie, Lisle wibeate Aa a Ree Bre 13 2

Pea ePIC gE 6 gv lo cbves as valaidaslthe lovers i sioiaueteys reyansfenmaitricees. « 210 O

Head, from nape to snout (curve), ........ ....-06 eee 111 0

Ditto from snout to top frontals (straight), ...... ...... 1 8 0

Snout to fore angle of eye, ...... aiapirale, std eeho th abba ates Site bedi

Mhhenes\to nearest-base Horny): 66. <j). iyi euis | ole piers ober ejsyors« 0 4 i

Greatest depth of head frontal crest to loweredge of jaw, O11 O

Ditto width. ditto, \ 6/0 6s sjj.4:;0: ahah Me abroad is bad Wor cust oputag teal Chuo Dit ys Dyna

Mar Silene thy).y2...:. hi msjepeiaye.s oteie shake!) atailetel aya clehe: <dah-puie 05 i

Ditto maximum width, ..... Le I ee tas Sa, 02 2

Length of fore hoof (rest),....... .... Bis Sea ees see on 0 4 2

PMeeAL OLEOG EOL MILbOs! b ojéia:oiayey sym oyodacsrm witais sin tincsiaye «> & 03 2

ame TE ANTE QUEL O75 02050), opaitebois iss iis hye a) spsiennFaye wie ye: 0 4 0

Greatest, breadth of ditto, ........0+ jjeneos oles steh ac debra 03 4

4 teats narrowing wedgwise backwards. Whole of perineum,

scrotum, inside thighs and hypogastric region, from anus to prepuce,

nude; skin, white. Hair along superior edge of whole of above nudity

forming a long fringe with a very definite margin: nudity carried partz-

ally forward from prepuce to end of sternum with accompanying fringe;

and armpits quite bare.

Head largish: facial line straight: muzzle vague and small: nares ob-

‘lique; eye medial and with brown iris: ears small, oval, horizontal:

Dorsal ridge true, elevate, abrupt, confined to withers: limbs very short,

sufficiently fine. Barrel deep and compressed. Tail (true) very short,

tapered, reaching only to mid buttock. Hoofs and false hoofs much

scooped below: the latter, also large. The small guts are 107 feet, mean

diameter, 14 inch: diameter for 19 inches from pylorus, 2 inches: cecum

2 feet 3 inches, not sacced: max. diam. 4 inches. Ditto at entrance of

small gut, 3 ditto at blind end,2: Large gut 33 feet 4 inches: mean

diam. 2 inches; for 18 inches from ccecum, diameter 3 inches, diam. of

rectum, 2: spleen 22 inch by 4,of uniform diam.; ends rounded, weight

13 lb. ; kidneys lobulated greatly ; 63 long by 22 of equable diam: weight

of each 10 0z. Liver one great lobe, with 9 small lobuli on lower surface,

white without, gamboge when cut into, and full of tubercles: gall-bladder

5 inch. by 4, of uniform width, attached to costal margin of liver which is

7 1b. weight.

468 Illustrations of the Genera of the Bovine, [No. 114.

Length of .4th stomach 1-10 shape of a bottle with a neck of 4 inches

long and 23 in diameter; above which. is an oval dilatation 5 inch in

diameter, coursely rugose internally, and with glandular looking bodies

between its inner and outer coats, diameter of: pyloric orifice itself, 13

inch; basal width of 4th stomach, 10 inch: 3d stomach, round, 10 inch of

diameter: 2d: stomach sporran-shaped or hemispheroidal, 10 inch long

by 73 of diameter: Ist stomach, quite round, 27 inch in diameter. Blad-

der, as spread, |3 by 7 inch. Depth of sternal cavity, or thorax, 20 inch:

from ensiform to spine, width between. Ilth pair of ribs, 203. Lungs—

right 4 divisions and much the largest, one is the lowest of them—left, 3 ;

lowest largest : another central one from the right, under apex of heart,

very small—8 lobes in all. Larynx ringed only in front. Heart 11 inch

by 63 of greatest diameter. Diameter of larynx at branchial division, 3

inches. Thoracic viscera, 14 lbs. Heart with pericardium, 3 lbs. 3 oz.

Another Yak, alive, head large with round forehead and straight facial

line; eye full; muzzle moderate; ears small and rounded; body full;

limbs low; large, abrupt, sloping ridge occupying the hind 3 of the neck

and fore 4 of back, Dewlap none.

Nape fo'rump,. .:4. 2.7200. 08 Sa ON. 6 1

Height afore, ...... oan es SG teas eBid 4 3

Ditto a hind,...... Weer ecioks ott SR AR. eats Nailin

Fore leg (from body),.......... MIRNA 1 5

Tongue white and strongly aculeated, processes corneous, pointed and

inclined back in fore part, flatted and level and larger towards root of

organ.

In concluding these tedious, but in the present state of science, indis-

pensable ‘details, we may be permitted to enquire whether they suggest

or lead to any general principles or facts? Whether, for instance, they

justify our separation of the Gouri Gao as a distinct type among the Bovi-

ne? and whether, as well with reference to the introduction of this new

form as to the obvious vagueness characterising the extant definitions of

the other forms, these details suggest no feasible improvements upon

those definitions ?

Both these questions may I think’ be fairly and usefully answered in

the affirmative and I shall terminate this paper with the following im-

proved indications of the principal Genera or groups of the Bovine.

Bos. Cranium moderate, proportional or without excess in the cere-

bral or facial region: frontals shorter than the face, flat and not broader

than long. Occipital plane of the scull quadrangular, never arched along

the culmenal line, nor indented by the temporal fossee; smaller much

1841.] Illustrations of the Genera of the Bovine. 469

than the frontal plane and forming an acute angle therewith: Horns

attached to the highest line of the forehead, rounded, moderate, curved up

or down or forward: 13 pairs of ribs: no true dorsal ridge, but sometimes

a fleshy hump: dewlap and muzzle large and square.

Type. Bos domesticus.

Bibos. Cranium large, massive, exhibiting preponderance of the fron-

tal and cerebral portions over the facial: frontals as long as the face,

concave, broader than long, and surmounted by a large salient crest ascend-

ing above the highest bases of the horns. Occipital plane of the scull

spheroidal, very large, larger than the frontal plane, deeply indented in

its centre by the temporal fosse and forming an acute angle with the fron-

tal plane. Horns attached below the highest line of the frontals, massive

but short, ovoid or subtrigonal, and curving ascendantly : 13 pairs of ribs:

a true dorsal ridge coextensive with the ribs and terminating abruptly:

Dewlap and muzzle small; period of gestation longer than in Bos,

Type, Bibos Cavifrons.

N. B. Gaveeus an aberrant species leading to Bos ?

Bison. Cranium moderate, depressed, inclining to Bubaline forms in

the excess of the facial portion over the frontal, and in the rounding off

of the frontals into the occiput: frontals decidedly broader than long,

more or less convex, and forming an obtuse angle with the semicircular

or trigonal occipital plane, which is strongly ridged by the parietes at its

summit, issmaller than the the frontal plane, and moderately indented.

Horns attached rather in advance of the parietal apex of the Cranium,

small, rounded, curving ascendantly, or out of the horizontal: 14 (or 15)

pairs of ribs; a true dorsal ridge but confined to the withers and terminat-

ing posteally in a gradual slope: Dewlap and muzzle small.

Types, B. Americ anus, et Poephagus.

Bubalus. Cranium large, elongate compressed or narrow, dispropor-

tional exhibiting great excess (a 3d) of the facial over the frontal or ce-

rebral portion: frontals short, narrow, convex, usually forming an obtuse

angle with the occipital plane, which is large and circular in proportion to

the obtuseness of that angle and to the consequent arcuation of the cul-

menal line of separation: Parietals merged, not ridged as in the last, nor

culmenal. Horns attached to the ends of the highest line of the scull, al-

ways exceeding in length that of the Cranium, and usually greatly so

depressed, strictly trigonal and neither ascending nor descending but di-

rected horizontally backwards: thirteen pairs of ribs: no true dorsal

ridge nor fleshy hunch: muzzle large and square: Dewlap medial.

Type Bubalus Arna, fem, Arnee.

470 Illustrations of the Genera of the Bovine. [No. 114.

Cuvier first divided the Bovine into subordinate groups, as usual with

him employing only craniological characters. H. Smith has since added to

Cuvier’s the osteological characters of the carcase—the number of ribs and

the all important dorsal ridge. I have only more consistently and thoroughly

applied these principles at the same time rejecting several palpably false

or trivial diagnostics ; and having said thus much for my suggested defi-

nitions I now leave them to the discretion of the expert. Though I have

thought it expedieut for the present to consider the Bos Gaveus vel Syl-

hetanus (Gayal) as an aberrant speries rather than as the type of a new

form, I have not failed to remark how singularly, were it regarded in the

former light, the entire series might be made to exemplify the quinary

and circular system. If we dispose the five supposed types thus. Bibos,

Bison, Bubalus, Bos, Gavceus, we shall find the circularity of the series

in many respects very curious and complete. ‘Thus, looking to the cranea

alone, Bibos is connected with Bison by broad frontals, salient orbits, and

other quasi cervine attributes. Bison, with Bubalus by the prolongation

of the facial part of the scull, and the easy rotund transition from the

frontal to the occipital plane. Bubalus with Bos by comparatively nar-

row frontals and broad square muzzle. Bos with Gavoeus by flatness of

frontals and the acute angle they form with the occipital plane. Gaveeus

with Bibos by great width of frontals and increased extent, and peculiar

characters of the occipital plane as well as by contraction of the muzzle ;

the acute angle of the two planes of the scull being still maintained.

If again we pass from a consideration of the cranea to that of that osteo-

logical carcases, in regard to that most important feature the osseous dorsal

ridge, we shall find this ridge at its maximum of development in height

and extent in Bibos; next diminished in extent in Bison, but not in

height ; lost in Bubalus ; tending to reappear in Bos ; and clearly resumed

(as is alleged) in Gaveeus, and in that peculiar shape too which is so

highly develoded in Bibos.

The above indications of circularity in a complete series of five forms

are at all events curious and calculated to stimulate further observation.

‘They have therefore been thus mentioned and should future inquiry tend

to confirm the conjectured importance of Gaveus, it will be but the work

of a few minutes to characterise this species as a distinct type.

B. H. Hopeson.

Valley of Nepal, April, 1841.

, a wieur of the Gate; te byall Se lhe on Bus: AUCH) 5 i . ; Aef al, ‘ » }

0 lest anifrona ag Gab peed > Biome lags. agile — Gog ; 3

S Ballin ka

PLS

1 ge cnr EABE errerr

Daler bts beth

Bubalus Arna, The Aina or Wild Buffatee of luda.

“metas. ast

VO ee ig

Se Fine mes,

fear ei

ow sete

Mv AZaNaca pone,

aeons

Siang sae

Areas pense

DU ETI i ec PIE Aid HAASE RM LLIN ID

ete

Dallin bo :beth:

BallinvG Lith

Bibos (a vifre ns The Court Gaocr Wild Bull ofihe Indian Ferests

On the Geology, &c. &c. of Hunumkoondah (H. H. the Nizam’s

Territory) by DR. Waker, Madras Army, continued.

The route from Hunumkoondah to Pakhall, lies almost due east. The

intervening country is on the whole less hilly than that left behind as

far as this place, when a chain of low flattened hills, covered with trees,

and shrubs, is observed to extend in a direction from N to S, and is lost

in the horizon at both points. The black soil becomes more abundant,

no longer occupying mere patches, but forming tracts of considerable

extent, and here it may be noted that to an eye‘at all accustomed to

observe this country with reference to its vegetation, an open treeless

plain suggests at once the prevalence of the regur soil; for with the

exception of the Butea Frondosa (Palas), which here, and there appears,

there is scarce a tree that affects it, while on the red soils care and

industry can alone prevent high jungle from springing up. The granite

continues the only surface rock until Sarapore, near which there is an

out cropping of sandstone, granite however, re-appears, and may be

observed near the road leading from that village to the lake at the

crossing of the first stream, but in this neighbourhood it is soon lost in

sandstone, which as far as I have remarked forms the masses composing

the hills abovementioned. This rock is of various degrees of hardness ;

it is sometimes of such a dense crystalline structure, as to possess the

qualities and appearance of quartz rock; at others the arenaceous form

is distinctly visible; the stratification also is of great variety ; at certain

points the layers are so thick, massive, and irregular, as to resemble un-

stratified rock ; at others the strataare not thicker than a quarter of an

inch, and are disposed in parallel layers. This last appearance is par-

ticularly well marked atthe Chubootra of Shetab Khan, where the rock

looks more like a schist than a sandstone. No specimen I have yet met

with of the rock effervesces with acids, and the only earthy minerals

that it appears tocontain are fragments of red jasper, and chalcedony

approaching to flint. I have not seen these in situs, but think it

probable that they form with the rock a conglomerate. Dr. Voysey

speaking of the sandstone rock of the Nizam’s territory states ‘in no

instance have I seen the sandstone stratified,’ by which it is clear he

- could not have been at this place; it is likely that beds of oxydulous

- iron are to be met with here; I draw this conclusion from the fact of the

_ sandstone being in some cases distinctly encrusted with thin layers of

_ this mineral, and also from the point of junction of two rocks being the

_ locality where metallic minerals are most frequently met with. This

472 On the Geology, &c. &c. [No. 114

Pakhall tank (for the name of lake, is scarcely in accordance with its

artificial embankment) is a fine sheet of water, and takes precedence

of all the tanks in Telingana, both as to depth and extent of surface.

It is at least thirty miles in circuit when quite full, and besides affording

a deep and copious stream for the purposes of irrigation, sends a

tributary to the Kistnah, which even at this season of the year

merits the name of a small river; it is bounded on three sides by

low hills covered with wood, and although the vegetation is now, par-

ched and burnt up, picturesque beauty is by no means wanting to the

landscape; immediately after the rains it is quite conceivable that it may

vie in scenery with the better known and much lauded Italian Lakes ;

considering its extent, its value is small, for its whole circumference to

some depth is occupied by adense jungle, and fifteen hundred bigahs

under cultivation from its irrigation are but slender tribute to the chief of

tanks ; the situation is said to be unhealthy, for at least eight months of

the year, which may account in part for its thinly peopled neighbour-

hood.

The draught and carriage bullocks met with appear strong and hardy ;

they are not equal in symmetry or size to those of Guzerat, or the

Ellichpore part of Berar, ut very similar to the Malwah animal, to the

strength and vigour of which they probably come up ; they are usually of

a white colour, and are much sought after by the Bunjarries. The method

of breeding and rearing these animals would be deemed singularly judici-

ous, did not the necessity of the care, which forces the proprietors into

the best mode of management, take from it all merit. The cows

from which they are bred are allowed to roam about the jungles in a half

wild state, with a few keepers nearly as wild as themselves to tend and

occasionally milk them. These possess many of the habits of the wild

cattle of South America, and also of the remnants of that aboriginal

race still kept in a few British preserves, such as combining for mutual

defence, and attacking by the whole herd rushing on ina body ; they

guide rather than follow their herdsmen, who wisely enough suffer them

to choose their pasture ground by that instinct which domestication blunts

without annihilating. In a dry year they congregate in great numbers

around this tank, from all parts of the country, during the months of

April and May, forthe pasturage which at that period in the less exten-

sive jungles fails them.

It is evident that no better means could be devised for keeping upa

vigorous and serviceable race of bullocks than this treatment of the

cOWS.

1841. | On the Geology, &c. &c. 473

In addition to the cultivated plants mentioned in my first letter a small

quantity of sugar-cane has been lately added to the list, and with some

success ; it is unnecessary to say that the expression and boiling of the

juice are conducted in the same manner that these operations are perform-

ed throughout India from the Himalaya to the Cape Comorin, and that the

compound of sugar, molasses, earthy matter and other impurities,’ called

goor is the result. A Sugar Mill, wood, carpenter’s work and all costs

from five to six rupers. The fixed state of the industry of Asiatics

cannot find a more fit illustration than in the management of their Sugar

Cane. For at least two thousand years, for of that period we have record,

that the same rough process has been gone through, the same amount of

labour wasted rather than expended, and the step beyond their rude and

economical preparation of sugar-candy (in which they have been com-

pletely distanced by the Chinese), has never been thought of. A fol-

lower of the School of Madame de Stael, who apportioned invention and

suggestion to certain parallels of latitude, and improvement, and perfection

without discovery to others, would point to the history of the manufacture

of this necessary springing up in the South, but perfected by Northern

skill as proof of their theory : but another estimate would refer this back-

wardness to improvement on the part of the Asiatic to that ever enduring

insecurity of property which has taken from capital nearly all its power

to stimulate or reward industry, from combination all its force, and from

skill every disposition to suggest, far less improve.

It would be wandering far from the subject to enquire how this inse-

curity arose, and how it has been perpetuated, but deficiency of moral,

much rather than intellectual energy has been at its root and accom-

panied its growth.

A very common plant grows on the black soil, chiefly in the jowarrie

fields, the Croton plicatum mistaken by Burman, for the Croton tinctorium

of the South of Europe, which plant it greatly resembles in proper-

ties and appearance. The Croton tinctorium, is cultivated in the South

of France for its dye, the litmus or turnsole as it used to be called. Drs.

Ainslie and Roxburgh have both suggested the employment of the Croton

plicatum for this purpose ; acting on their opinion, I have extracted, by

asimple infusion from the capsules of the plant, a dye having the peculiar

properties of litmus, but have failed in purifying it from the extraneous

substances contained in the aqueous solution. This is commonly done in

Europe by fermentation and by admixture of some alkali, or alkaline

earth, by which the blue violet, its peculiar colour, is maintained, but

| ' ;

these means will not answer in a tropical country, where the great heat

474. On the Geology, &e. Ke. [No. 114.

causes the infusion to pass almost at once to the putrefactive fermenta-

tion, whereby the colour is vitiated or altogether discharged, a thing not

likely to occur in the more temperate climate of Europe. I see that the

same vitiation of colour of the Himalaya Archil, a litmus lichen, is

complained of in the transactions of the last meeting of the Agri-

Horticultural Society of Bengal, and I would recommend that a sufficient

quantity of capsules of this plant (which I can readily supply) be sent

to England there to be tested by superior Art, and under the more advan-

tageous circumstance of a cooler temperature. The natives regard the

plant as completely useless, and are even ignorant that the juice of the

capsules gives a blue stain to cloth; I shall now give some account of the

more useful trees and shrubs, all of which are found growing in the

neighbouring jungles.

Caryota Urens. This stately palm is indigenous to these jungles, but

from all I could hear is not to be met with in great abundance.

The soil would appear to suit it well, as one specimen I saw grew at

least to the height of 60 feet. This is the sago palm of the interior as

the other species which yield that article are either insular, or coast

productions, which would in all probability perish if transplanted from

the soil and climate they most affect. To those who have witnessed

or even heard of the dreadful and unavoidable calamity of famine to

which every well peopled tropical region is subject, any suggestion

by which the horrors of that scourge may be averted or even mitiga-

ted must prove acceptable; a feasible means of doing this would ap-

pear to exist in propagating and carefully preserving these sago trees,

and I cannot conceive a fitter purpose for the almost useless waters of

this splendid tank, than their contributing to the inestimable end; for a

preserve ofthese palms in its neighbourhood would not only be secured

in a never failing supply of water, but the tree jungle with which it is

surrounded would afford shade to the young plants, which, from the si-

tuation that they are found wild in, would seem requisite. Far be from

me the wish to see a race of men palmivorous, for lotophagi and anthropo-

phagi notwithstanding all that the poets have sung of the golden age, may

on most occasions be made convertible terms without any violation of

the truth, but the very nature of things precludes the supposition of the

natives of India ever becoming so, as much asit does our painting our-

selves with wood or worshipping the mistletoe. As to the fitness of the

food for the support of life during famine, I subjoin the statement of Dr.

Roxburgh, who must have been an eye witness of the facts related. ‘The

pith or farinaceous part of the trunk of old trees, is said to be equal to the

1841.] On the Geology, &c. &c. A475

best sago, the natives make it into bread and boil it into thick gruel; these

forma great part of the diet of those people, and during the late famines

they suffered little, while those trees lasted. I have reason to believe this

substance to be highly nutritious. I have eaten the gruel, and think it

fully as palatable as that made from the sago we get from the Malay coun-

tries.’

The fronds make a better cordage than those of the Elate sylvestris

commonly used by the Coonbies.

The worst property of this palm is the only one with which the natives

are familiar, the inexhaustible supply of Toddy which it yields.

Butea Frondosa (Palas) Butea Superba.

Both these, and especially the last, which is a magnificent climber with

a trunk of the thickness of a man’s body, yield the palas gum or East

India kino as it has been called; of this a specimen is sent. Dr. Royle has

lately estimated the quantity of tannin, which this gum yields at no less

than 50 per cent, two per cent more than that yielded by the Catechu of

Bengal. |

Tannin is the substance which, by combining with the gelatine of hides

forms leather, and is that which gives to oak bark, Aleppo galls, Valonia,

’ &c. their high commercial value. Although every second tree in this

part of Telingana is the Palas, there is not one ounce of gum collected,

being reckoned wholly useless and unprofitable by the natives.

I cannot help thinking that this production will soon be looked on as

very valuable in the arts, should this happen, they will not be wanting a

supply from Telingana, where both Buteas are so common.

Rohuna tree—Swietenia Febrifuga.

The bark of this tree is the well known febrifuge—On the authority of

Dr. Ainslie, certainly very respectable—Dr. Lindley, in his valuable works

has stated that given in large doses it is apt to produce nervous symptoms

and hence objects to its use—does not the very same objection apply to

Cinchona ?

Besides the evidence of any one physician on the febrifuge properties

of a medicine is wholly insufficient, for what is so common as head affec-

tions in tropical fevers. With the permission of the resident, I shall send

a parcel of the bark to the medical store-keeper of H. H. the Nizam’s

Army, that it may be sent to Britain for trial in the less bulky form of an

extract.

Wrightea Antidysenterica.

The bark of this small tree is the once celebrated Conessi bark, ‘it is

said to have got into disuse from other inert barks being substituted for

A76 Note and Tabular Siatement N. W. F. Trade. [No. 114

it. I shall sendalsoa parcel of this bark to the medical store-keeper.

Sterculia Urens. It is said this tree yields a gum similar to the gum

Tragacanth of commerce (Royle).

Buchanania Latifolia Chironge tree. The nut is used for all the pur-

poses of the Almond by the natives, it would in all probability produce

as good an oil as the almond.

Chloroxylon Swietenia, juice said to give a yellow dye. Of other

useful trees here are Nauclea Cordifolia, Mimosa Xylocarpa, Mimosa

Serissa, Allangium Hexapetalum, Pentapteracoriacea, Dalbergia, Lati-

folia; Hibiscus populneus Terminalia Bellerica, Strychnos Nux

Vomica, and a species of Gmelinu Ulmus integrifolia, well adapted for

furniture building, &c. all are in great abundance. The Teek Tectona

grandis is stunted and worthless in these jungles, and the Diospyrus

Melanoxylon—Black ebony, grows to no great size. Of the less useful trees

are Careya Arborea, Barringtoona acutangula Ixora parviflora, Ficus Co-

moga, Erythrina Suberosa, &c. ‘The principal shrubs consisted of the

Ochna squarrosa, Grewea orientalis, Symphorema involucrata, Gardenia

Latifolia, with fragrant beautiful flowers, Trophis Aspera and Premna

Tomentosa. The climbing plants are chiefly the Sifonia Nutans, Com-

bretum Ovalifolium, the Ventilago Madraspatana and the Olax.

The Cissus Cornosa and Dalbergia Scandens were also seen. The most

common parasite was the Loranthus scurrula the Bassia Latifolia, Mowah

tree was comparatively rare. Some trees were so utterly without leaf, or

flower, that their names or value could not be conjectured but these were

in no great number. The Herbaceous vegetation was completely burnt

up.

Note and Tabular Statement N. W. Frontier.

The annexed statement (No. I.) will shew the enormous increase

which has taken place in the Export trade to Cabool during the past

year, aggregating on the three descriptions of produce no less than

38,08,373 rupees as compared with the preceding year.

Of the three denominations of exports, one only, being Country pro-

duce is prepared from Official records (chokie registers). No Account

being taken at the customs chokies of free goods, I have been obliged to

refer to the Merchants themselves for information as regards them, and

they have obligingly allowed me access to their ledgers, from whence the

amount of exports under the heads of ‘ British Manufactures and Pro-

ductions,’ and Sea Importations, has been ascertained, not in exact details, .

but sufficiently accurate to meet the object in view.

ly 1840 to 30th Apri idl.

Increase injlucrease an

Invoice value as | value as REMARKS.

compared | compared

value. with wth

1838-39. 1839-40,

re ee et , Se em eee,

0 eee eee

3,00,000 | 2,35,000 | 258,000 Unbleached Long Cloth is preferred to the bleached as it is more

420.000 | 3’80 000 | 4.02,009 | aurable and admits more readily of being dyed blue, the favorite

? ? a 2 ° 7 T

aay colour of the North. i

3,95,000 | 3,40,000 | 3,55,000 klowered Muslins in high demand.

3,36,00U | 2,96,000 | 3,04,000 The finest quality prized.

2,90,000 | 2,142,000 | 2,70,000 Scotch Cambrics eagerly bought up.

This includes Coarse Cnintzes also, which.from the durability of

, 2,52;000 | 2,16,000 | 2,25,000 ike colour, are valued. b

' 2,20,000 1,85,000 1,97,750 Used chiefly for ‘Purbans.

5,87,000 | 5,06,000 | 5,338,000 Coarse quality and sombre colours preferred.

. Very little used in Affghanistan proper, but great demand for Balks

0 q i = p 3 g

60,000 60,000 60,000 Bokliers, Khorassan and Labreez markets.

28,000 23.000 94 500 British Metals, not only from the original superiority of the ore,

77,U00 67000 70.000 | 9 cut from the superior method of smelting, are in great demand

: ; ; throughout Asia.

7,000 6,000 6,400

2,03,350 | 1,74,300 | 1,75,475 British Hardware next to cloth is so much prized that it is expected

29,750 25,500 27,425 it will comprize one of the Chief Staples of commerce.

10,250 10,250 10,250

20,317 Bought up at Cabool and exported to Herat, Balk, Bokhara, &c. but.

oer apn Oh dst scnrggesie tty hes

ee eee

Trom ist May 1838 (0 SUM

April 1839,

#rom ist May 1839 (0 30th April 1840.

}

Statement of Goods Exported vid Delhi across the N. W. F. to Cabool, from 1st May 1838 to 30th April 1841.

rom ist May 1840 to 80th April isa.

Tncreuse in

Lucrease 1

REMARKS,

Unbleached Long Cloth is preferred to the bleached as it is more

durable and adwits more readily of being dyed blue, the favorite

zolour of the North,

lowered Muslins in high demand,

‘Lhe finest quility prized.

Scutch Cuuibrics eagerly bought up.

‘This icludes Coarse Chintaes also, which

the colour, are valued,

Used chiefly for Lurbans.

Course quility and sombre colours preferred.

Very little used in Affghauistan proper, but great demand for Balke

Bokhura, Khorassan aud Vabreez murkets,

British Metals, not ouly trom the original superiority of the ore,

but from the superior method of smelting, are i great demaud

from the durability of

_ British Hardware next to cloth is so much prizeil that it is expected

it will comprize one of the Chief Staples of commerce,

Bought up at Cabool and exported to Herat, Balk, Bokhara, &c, but

) These are bought to Delhi from Bombay vit Palee. They are

§ originally imported from the Persian Gulph.

§ The rich stuffs of India are very much admired, and the coarse

linen cloths are preferred to tlhiose of the north, in consequence of their

bein woven with country and English yarn.

(Indigo is the only article of commerce which is not conveyed di-

rectly by the Cabool merchants. It is, in the first instance, consigned

| by the Delhi merchants to Bewamie and Amritsir, and from thence is

exported to Cubool where it meets witha ready market. The quan-

| tities herein exhibited are nota tithe of what are actually exported

4 from India, as within the last few years immense quantities have been

raised West of the Jumna, epecially at Munny majra in Sirhind, the

whole of which aré carried to the northern marts; there is no possibi-

lity of ascertaining quantities correctly, but 5,000 mds. are assumed

as the annual supply seut to Cabool ; Indigo manufacured after the

| native manner is preferred to that produced by Europeans, both from

(cheapness and the facility of applying it to purposes of dying.

Spurious gold and silver lace and tissues used, formerly, to be ims

ported into Cabool from Russia, but these haye now given place to the

rich aud beautiful manufactures of India.

NAMES OF GOODS, Invoice Q 2 Invoice | Increase | Decrease Invoice value as | value as

2 a Quantity. ‘ wantitys ‘ tn in Quantity. ; compared | compared

= value, walien | vate, \\ ualite: eb, THA ae

1838-39. | 1830-40,

BRITISH MANUFACTURES AND |

PRODUCTIONS. 5

bleached, } 5,000 pieces 65,000] 3,500 pieces 42,000 on 23,000 | 25,000 pieces 3,00,000 | »,35,000 | 2,58,000

i 5 4,340 ditto 40,000} 2,400 ditto 18,000 . 22,000 45,000 «itto 4,20,000 | 3,580,000 | 4,02,000

11,000 ditto 55,000) 8,000 ditto 40,000 Git} 15,000 | 77,000 ditto 3,95,000 | 3,40,000 | 3,55,000

A 6,000 ditto 40,000} 4,000 ditto 32,000 oa 8,000 | 42,000 ditto 3,386,000 | 2,9u,000 | 3,04,000

a 5,400 ditto 4=,000] 2,000 ditto 20,000 a 28,000 | 28,000 ditto 2,00,000 | 2,412,000 | 2,70,000

5 4,000 ditto 36,000] 3,000 ditto 27,000 oe 9,000 } 28,000 ditto | 2,52,000 | 2,16,000 | 2,25,000 ;

> 2,000 ditto 35,000) 1.500 ditto 22,250 On 12,750 | 14,000 ditto 2,20,000 | 185,000 | 1,97,750

. 3,000 ditto $1,000} 2,000 ditto 54,000 Ag 27,000 | 21,000 ditto 9,87,000 | 5,00,000 | 5,348,000

‘ i a . a5 one on 400 ditto | 60,000 60,000 | 60,000 :

.|50 mds. & 200 sheets] 5,000)30 mds. & 100 sheets} 3,500 va i 350 mds, & 1,400 sts 2a,000 23,000 24,500

25 ics 5 pig: 7,000 ,000 4,750 000 )

250 pigs 10,000) 175 pigs 1750 pigs Oe | meee of aE Asin,

leo 4 < . .| 1,000 1,000) 600 600 400 7,000 7,000 6,000 6,400

serene eesti, é 581 mds. 29,050] 5574 mds. 27,875 |. 1,175 | 4,067 mds. 2,038,350 | 1,74,300 | 1,75,475

s, Si Aaa 20$ gross 2,450) 11 gross 2325] .. 1,925 145} gross 29,750 | 45,500 | 27495

zs Bah O50 . ae 512 mds, 10,250 10,250 10,250

4 5 9 wife oD 800 scores 20,317 20,317 20,317 E \

0,00 i chiefly to Persia,

5 5 5 rts 3 whe a0 a6 5,111 gross 10,000 10,000 10,000

: 40 ae 5 os fro 1,660 mds. 25,000 25,000 25,000

Total, =. 4,49,300 50 2,96,550 + [152,750 “ 32, 70,667 29,74, 117

a ImporTaTions ri@ CALCUTTA AND

Bomar.

Drags, &e., - . 25 mds. 700 18 mds, 450 é 250} 3,500 mds. 74,300 74,550

5 . J 324 ditto 224 on . c 2e4 2,400 ditto 22,776 23,000

. . 6 a whe Bye 3 . oe 530 ditto 8,480 8,480

. . . a8 + a6 ob aire oa 30 ditto 5,000 5,000

ts, . . = 54 mds. 68 5 op 5 68 500 ditto 23,032 24,000

Woods, . . . 4.8 oa si a oe os 320 ditto 4,800 4,800

ts, : G - .| 10,000 mds. 50,000} 600 mds. 3,000 oo 47,00 | 70,000 ditto 3,00,000 | 3,47,000

apStone, + . . 4 we os we . Od on 2 mis. 2,000 2,000 |?

or Rosary Beads, . S i 50 a oe 9° ue 28,000 strings 3,500 3,500

Total, = ae! 50,992) ae 3,450 oe 4,44,788 | 4,92,330

(eotsy (Isprax) Propvcrions aNp . ec ee

MANUFACTURES.

and Benares Dooputtas, . Ty | 49,226 pieces 502) 28,923 pieees 82,628 . 2,874 | 1,60,832 pieces 2,78,501 | 1,92,999 | 1,95,873

5 ° . = 1,500 mds. 1,65,000) 1,143 mds. oa 39,237 2,405 mds. 2,63, 641 98,641 | 1,37,878

- = 5. 4 934 pairs 545] 1,713 pairs 905 360 oe 4,408 pairs 2,182 1,637 1,277

> . . | 14 mds. 282) me 5D : 282 8 mds. 283 1 283 §

Soiah Kenarie Gold and Silver, —. mae ‘

Barner ; ; oy a F ots . x Pi 1,074 tolahs , 2,511 2511 |)

Embroidered Goods, “ C os 4 we we oie 4 72 pieces 821 821 821

Mirzapore Carpets, a A i =5 * AG 50 on ofa 255 868 868 868

Beetlenuts, . : : 16 seers 1) . : : 12 263 mds, 215 203 215

Cocoanut Oil, . . ° «° oo .- aie o. 28 20° ditto 280 280 280

Hides, Raw and Tanoed, - . 144 $5) as Oe ao 65 585 434 369 434

Leather Stockings, . . “* ce oan a Big oa 100 pairs 300 300 300

Wax Candles, . 2 oe . di ae M g 7h mds. 580 580 | 580

Verdigrease, . . : - oa ae an Oo se 35 seers 96 96 | 96

= Z e Z , a B a oe ne ae 5 43° toluhs 129 129 129

Cocoanuts, > a 5 | 4 oe ne 10 ae oar 3,300 132 132 132

Wrought Iron, 4 . . +| . oe oe me 4 584 mds. 190 190 190

Brown Sugar, - : . | . Fe o. ve on . 52 ditto 46 46 | 46

Oil Seeds, - 4 z 5 BI + os sie oir Fir 5 314 ditto 63 63 63

Hookeh Snakes, . : . | oe ae oe a4 ch on 2 20 20 20

Old Brass, - . p ° | AO a ae ye oH cis 2} mds, 101 101 | 10!

Spikenard, - : - ss “ ve ou Ong 1 ditto 10 10 | 10

Pigments, . a O . . ve oe AO ate Cu ve, 306 seers 48 48 48

Sandal Wood, . - 6 . 35 alte! nile) ate He 11 ditto 2 2| 2

Brimstone, . . A az ae “4 ae cin D6 ad 124 ditto 13 13 | 13

Gum, 5 2 , 7 4 . a oO one ae rir 194 mds. 137 137 | 137

Isory, , 2 2, ‘ a : a0 Aes an a 35 seers 88 88 | 88

- : 7 . : este os ae ae ne og mds, 23 23 | 2)

Tobscco, . @ 5 . oie) ‘4 o° 4a eal 14 ditto 8 8 8

Total, . , 2,51,405} Me 2,09, 296 360 | 42,470 an 5,51,722 ) 3,00,316 | 3,429,426

Grand Total, oe 1,51, 008 Ae 5,09,206 | 360 |2,42,762 on 43,18,169 | 35,66,471 38,08,873

360

2,42,402

Nore. —This statement being compiled from Official Returns

‘ Bona fide BaporTrade with Cabool is o1

‘The great decrease in the exports of 1899-10 is attributed to the unsettled gtate of the North during the period,

y 2 that with Caboo!

SS eee

4; and the Ledgers of the Delhi Merchants, as wel) a those of the Cabool Trader's Agents in Delhi, is considered to be tolerably correct, but, as much time would be taken up in calculating small numberss

"the quantities and values of British Goods and sea Zssorta Lone are given In the rough, care being taken—to keep below the mark, to the end that no exaggerated idea of the extent of the Trade might be conve

The y embraced in this statement, and no account is taken of the goods exported from Delhi and Jugyadree to Bahwulpore, Scinde and the Punjab, the export

ed. tr

‘Trade with which is reported to haye increased in the same

1841.] Note and Tabular Statement N. W. F. Trade. 477

I may ag well mention, that previous to the occujiation of Affghanistan

by our Troops in 1838-39, the Exports from these Frovinces were trifling

to a degree, the returns for the Imports being for the most part sent back

in specie. Within the last year or two, however, the demand for our

Exports has so greatly increased, that instead of taking back specie,

Hoondies to a very large amount are sent to Delhi from Cabool, to mzet

the deficit caused by the excess of Exports from these Provinces, over

the Imports from Affghanistan. Some time last year one merchant sent

us a single remittance, Hoondies on Delhi from Cabool for no less a sum

than forty thousand rupees, to be invested in the purchase of British

goods.

_ Formerly the whole of the Export trade with Cabool, was carried on

by the fruit merchants, who merely took back a small portion of their

returns in British manufactures. There are now, several highly respect-

able merchants wholly unconnected with these traders, who confine their

operations to exporting, from our Provinces goods for which, at present,

they are unable to find a return in kind.

As it shews how anxious they are to establish a return trade, I will

mention, that more than one instance has been reported to me of Russian

goods (principally hardware and spurious gold tissue) having been,

brought across my frontier line, the packages having Moscow marked

on them, these goods were however of so inferior a description as to be

rejected by the natives whenever offered for sale. Indeed the cutlery was

inferior to that made at Monghyr and in the Delhi Bazar.

In reply to your second question, as to whether J can do nothing to help

the Cabool Merchants, I can only state, that I have done and am doing

all in my power to encourage this enterprizing and deserving class of

men, in every way possible.

In the mean time, I would suggest that the first object of Government

should be toopen the route for trade, through the Khyber Pass, by

obtaining from the intermediate states, some modification of their present

system of duties, which press so hard on the merchant, as to drive him

round by the circuitous route now taken, where they are subjected to

exactions it is true, though less oppressive and vexatious in their

nature than those in force in the Seik states.

P. S.—To shew the enterprizing disposition of the Cabool Merchants,

I will mention that a short time ago I gave one of them anote to Mr.

Clarke, to aid him in his endeavour to take an investment of Indigo,

Jewellery, Gold Lace, &c. to Yarkund.

[dB]

On the ‘ Electro-type” —By Cuartes Hurrnaa ie, Esa.

REFERENCES TO THE PLATE.

1. Wooden cell. 5. Copper plate, on which coin is

2. Glass cylinder. placed.

3. Brass binding-screw. 6. Zinc plate on acid liquid.

4. Shelf perforated in the 7. Crystals of sulphate of copper to

centre. keep up a saturated solution.

My Dear Torrens,—I felt gratified, at our last meeting, to find you

were also much pleased with the fac-simile of my coin of ‘ Alexander’ by

process, for which, and also for the successful result of the experiment,

I am indebted to my talented friend Professor O’Shaughnessy. I believe

detailed accounts have already appeared in print, but this mode of copy-

ing coins and medals is so exceedingly simple—the result so surprising

and satisfactory, and it is so fully in the power of every body disposed to

devote the slightest attention to it—that We cannot make it too widely

known.

Ist. You must provide yourself with a wooden cell 8 or 10 inches

Square—with an inside coating of sealing wax—or other cement to ren-

der it water tight. This box should be 3 inches deep, with a ledge | inch

from the top to support a wooden shelf.

Affix to the edge of the box a brass binding-piece, formed of square

brass, perforated with two holes and furnished with binding-screws.

2d. A glass cylinder open at both ends, to the lower end of which a

piece of mozst bladder must be secured with a wazed cord, and the diameter

of this cylinder must correspond with the perforation in the shelf fitted

to the square box. ,

3rd. Plates of sheet zinc amalgamated by mercury; i. e., by rubbing a

few globules of mercury over the zinc, after dipping it into a mixture, of

one part of sulphuric acid and one of water, must also be provided; and

these plates corresponding in length and breadth to the size of the cylin-

der, must be attached to a copper wire 6 or 8 inches long.

4th. A plate of copper 3 or 4 inches square with a copper wire 6 inches

long.

5th. Supplies of sulphate of copper in crystals, and concentrated sul-

phuric acid. |

When you proceed to use the apparatus, prepare a saturated solution of

the blue salt, in soft hot water, strain it off turbid and allow it to cool—

WS t77c/tes

firSumnenm,

Shei

a |

ha)

7 i *y

A ’ , pew hs -

1* >

ap ¥ mn :

, es Ninlaer a Mo ret

. x

nee ‘ La

. ~ » ‘f aaat

m Dip nee ee P ‘ vig aver rad Al

‘ a _

4 . ae 8

\ -

: ~

‘

¥ 1

{

a 1

. f

Ma ‘ ‘ ‘

; .

1841.] Roree in Khypoor. 479

prepare a dilute acid with one part of concentrated sulphuric acid and a

pint of water.

Brighten the copper plate and place the coin to be copied thereon, then

apply a coating of bees-wax over all parts of this plate and wire, allowing

the surface of the medal you wish to copy, to be the only surface ex-

posed.

Place the plate so that it shall rest flat upon the bottom of the cell—

fill this with the solution of sulphate of copper to within half an inch of

the top—fix in the shelf, and over the perforation place the cylinder,

charged with the dilute acid. Into the acid introduce the zinc plate, and

now let the wire of this as well as that of the plate of copper be inserted

into the brass ‘ binding-piece.’

[The coin should be previously warmed—wax rubbed over the side we

wish to copy and then the wax while warm rubbed off carefully with a

_ soft rag. Lumps of sulphate of copper must also be placed upon the shelf

in order to keep the solution in a saturated state. ]

In twenty-four hours a reverse impression of your coin will be deposited,

to remove which, take the coin from the copper plate, and warm it over

a spirit lamp for a few seconds, then introduce the edge of an ivory

knife, and you will be able to detach the copper deposit with ease. You

have now only to substitute ¢hzs mould as in the first step for the coin, and

you will have your ‘ fac-simile.’

Here then you have the account you wished for, in which, recollect, I

don’t claim the least oraginality.

Yours very truly,

CHaRLES HUFFNAGLE,

9th June, 1841.

Roree in Khyrpoor; its Population and Manufactures.—By Cart.

G. E. Westmacott, 37th Regiment Bengal N. I.

(Continued from page 415.)

There were four paper factories in the townof Roree in 1839, worked

alternately by men who had learnt the craft from their master Jhoora,

the principal manufacturer, who receives two anas a day from each ap-

prentice. The finest paper he produces is inferior in quality to that of

Delhi and Agra; it is made entirely of old hempen rope and string,

brought from Hyderabad in lower Sind, and sells in Roree at 63 rupees

a mun; the consumption is very limited and it forms no part of the regu-

480 Roree in Khypoor. [No. 114.

lar imports of Roree. The manufacturer draws his supplies from time

to time from Motoo, a suhokar of Noushuhra, who also supplies the facto-

ries of Khyrpoor and Shikarpoor. The suhokar is exempted by govern-

ment from taxation, in consequence of services rendered by his ancestor

to the Talpoor family of Khyrpoor, who resided, I believe, at the town of

Noushuhra belonging to Meer Roostum, before they acquired sovereign

power ; this of course enables the suhokar to sell hemp at a cheap rate

and gives him almost a monopoly of the trade. :

The hemp is chopped ona plank, witha knife, int» small pieces, and.

thrown into a washing vat one yard square, and half the depth, coated

with mortar. It holds three seers of lime and two of khar (impure alkali),

with water contained in five or six earthen pots; the manufacturer does

not measure the water and is ignorant of the quantity required, but a pot

contains usually ten seers, and when very foul and sandy it is purified

with alum.

The hempis washed, bleached, and macerated in the vat, and after

being shaped into cakes and masses of all sizes, is put in the sun to dry ;

it is thrown afterwards into a pit to reduce it to pulp. The pit is five

feet long, four feet broad, and three feet deep, paved with large

stones and half of it nearest the bottom lined with stone. The tow is

pounded half as long again in winter as it is in summer; in the latter

season the shreds are more easily divided and macerated. Two or three

men work the machine by placing one foot on a lever (F.) nine feet long,

connected with a hammer (EK) (see plate Fig. 4, No. 113) half the length,

and the other foot on a bank of earth (B.) along side it, four feet long and

eight inches high. They support themselves on a transverse rest six feet

long (A.), or by grasping loops of ropes suspended from the timbers of the

shop roof. The lever is kept in its place by stakes anda groove, anda

transverse beam seven feet long (C.) prevents it rising above a certain

level. The labour of working the pedal is extremely fatiguing in the hot

months; a man sits in the pit (D.) during the operation of pounding the

tow, toseparate and moisten it occasionally with water, and pushes it

under the hammer; this is usually done by the master; twelve hours

labour are required to reduce to pulp a seer of tow, but a larger quantity

is generally prepared at onetime. The tow is taken from the pit in

flat cakes and masses of the pulp weighing fifteen or sixteen pounds, and

piled on stones in the sun to dry; afterwards it is thrown into another

vat four feet square and two feet deep, lined throughout with mortar,

and, after being diluted to a proper consistency with water, is separated

with the hand and stirred two hours, and left about nine hours in the

1841. ] Roree in Khypoor. ‘ 48]

vat. It isthen dipped up by the workman on a light wooden frame

or mould of seven bars, on which a mat (boora) is laid of the size of the

intended sheets, made of sur (the stem of moonj grass) split into ex-

tremely fine pieces and united with horse hair.

The man sits on the edge of the vat, and is often provided witha pipe

with a long tube, to which he applies his mouth from time to time without

staying his work. Heregulates the number of dips of the mould accord-

ingly as he wishes to give consistency to the paper, always taking care to

to stir the liquor well before he raises it. He transfers the sheet, as soon

as formed, to another frame of fine reed, which is placed upon one of sirkee

(the upper stem of moonj grass,) carefully laying sheet upon sheet as he

takes them from the vat, without the interposition of cloth of any kind,

and leaves them about nine hours to drain; the sheets are then pressed

under a plank, upon which two men stand for an hour. Those made dur-

ing the day are pasted at night against a mud wall made smooth with

clay and cow dung, and the men use for the purpose soft brushes of moonj

grass ten inches long, which they prepare themselves. The paper is re-

moved in the morning toa plank or board, where it is rubbed witha cotton

cloth dipped in wheat flour, and suspended on hempen strings raised on

sticks in a yard for twelve hours until perféctly dry; it is then carried

back to the board and put into the hands of the polisher, who does not

belong to the factory : he rubs it with a large smooth stone to give it a

glaze or polish. Some of the stones are black basalt from Khorasan,

and appear to have been rounded by the torrents; and smooth pieces of lime-

stone and white marble are also used. On the completion of this process,

the rough edges of the paper are cut with large scissors, like those used

-by tailors, and it is now ready for sale in the bazar.

On my second visit to this factory [ found the work stopped in conse-

quence of the men having gone to the British camp at Sukur, where

they were employed in other labour at eight pys (four pence) a day.

Until the establishment of our camp, there was a small consumption of

paper, and it is by no means a profitable occupation; Jhoora could not

afford toemploy men above half a day ata time, and their Jabour in the

factory was more severe than that exacted from them in the cantonment.

The manufacturer (Jhoora) employs four men (Moosulmans), at ten pys

(42) each per diem, to sweep the building, chop hemp, bring water from

the Indus, and conduct the whole process of manufacture. He estimated

the cost of his shop and machinery at 100 rupees, and the pit in which

| the tow is beaten at half the sum, but was not positive as his father built it,

It is a large sum, but I do not question his veracity, as he did not over-

482 . Roree in Khypoor. [No. 114. *

value other parts of the machinery; the large stone at the bottom of

the pit took twenty men to lift it, and this, and other large stones at the

bottom and sides of the pit, were brought from a long distance.

Rs. A. P

Pity i sta itiwhi aid wih Sa BG > Ee Re fie. wide SN Ole 50 00

Two vats lined and terraced at the edges with two muns of

mioPtary. ds eet ois LG tlh ae oa Sie gh) nae .- 10 0 0

Wooden lever (Talee F. ) and hammer, E.............. 00% 10 0 0

This is exclusive of seven seers of iron fastened to the attain

of the: hammer. whiehiicést;! .)2 ee’ Secu Paes Oe nae as 2!)

Transverse beam (C.) and supports, ............00-- gerkiase 2 00

The beam (A.) and its two supports, .........ccsee ee eeeeee 1 00

The shop which holds the three vats and machinery,...... 5 00

The shop was akind of shed, open at the sides and measured

twenty-four feet in length and eleven in width. Two sides

were walled in with boughs of the date tree,and the roof was

mat and reeds upheld by wooden posts. Neither mud nor

bricks were used in the construction.

Six frames or moulds of fir wood measuring 23 inches in

length and 20 in width, for raising the stuff from the cistern,

at6 alas each cf Ras ae i lo ae 2 40

Three fine mats of split reed 23 inches long bound together

by horse hair to place on the frames, at 6 anas each, ...... B20

Sirkee mat to receive the sheets,... ...........0 0 cecceves 0 02

Board on which the paper is polished, ......... .......0.. 0 40

Polishing ishome cates. Gk al PVG iis Gs 4 Sie) BAS test ta td aha aa 0 20

* Karth pot (muttee) to contain a mun of water,....... ents MOL @

Two earth pots (dillee) containing each ten seers,.......... 0 04

Thirty strings to hang paper on,...............- 2 Jwivictesa eo OD

Pair of seissars forseutting-paperss.iv.. etna ds Seas 1 00

Chopper (koolharee) to chop hemp, containing half a seer of

ROOM, |. eB AUS 5nd PA Biches. Sete oe bieeARie wietcddas 1 00

Rs. 91. 5.0

I need hardly observe the fine texture of paper depends on the hemp

being well beaten, and the number of dippings required to form a sheet

depends a good deal on the vatman’s dexterity in raising the stuff; some-

times five and six dippings are necessary. Hemp is pounded four days

* Earth pots are dear at Roree, and there are only two potters in the town,

1841.] Roree in Khypoor. 483

to form fine paper, and three days to forma coarse kind, 18 or 20 days

are required to convert a mun of hemp rope into paper, which gives sixty

large quires of twenty four sheets toa quire, each measuring 22 inches

by 18; or one hundred small quires measuring 20 inches by 12; supposing

the assertion of the manufacturer to be true, that to convert a mun of rope

into paper costs him twenty rupees, he derives a profit of 25 rupees.

Rs. A. P.

One mun of hempen rope to make paper of the best quality,.. 6 80

eee NMOTKIMED 210) ace ia «fs tisrw's,« id ompedy suena tae namreye 9 890

PME At SO'SEERS PET TUPEC sje :05 su 4 6 aw inpeig shi orm seie opie eiorahone la veut (0

Two seers of khar (alkali) at 1 pys per seer,.. ....0....000- 0 02

Polishing 60 quires at l ana per quire, .. .......656 sence . 3120

BOIL slots, asic sie see 3 Well te sent barabe cya voltae dopa ete ar auc ceri: aight ..( 0; 1,0

| Rs. 19 142

| The manufacturer sells a quire of large paper of the best quality when

polished at 12 anas, and unpolished at 10 anas; sixty quires at 12 anas

| per quire give Rs. 45.

Five quires of paper made in another factory, sold for a rupee, and were

the produce of three and four layers of stuff; the machinery and ap-

paratus were similar to those I have described, but not so expensive, and

the manufacturer had less capital than his neighbour. The pounding

pit had a single stone at the bottom over the spot where the hammer

descended, the rest of it was covered with planks to prevent the stuff

_ mixing with earth, and the sides faced with brick; the pounding pit,

_ hammer, and shed, cost together 80 rupees.

There was only one reservoir lined with mortar measuring neatly two

feet square and 27 feet deep, into which the stuff was thrown aftcr it wag

| removed from the beating pit ;

Rs. A. P,

LN iste ereraivasiiscig te aoiwwn ob. OG)

The branch frame for taking up hey stuff He toi tauele eure ks” 0 80

Fine mat to place upon the frame, ...... SESS a Sunak ». 0 40

Board on which the paper is polished, ......... APNG? 5 0 60

mmersnopewhich held the vat, .......5 -eccsses civic euce.. 32 00

Lever, Hammer, and supports, ...... .... PN ee 21 00

MEE o'. o ua las s oberg Co as te, Sy be, J OVO

Polishing stone, earth pots, and strings,....... SO EERT ore 0 80

PGS ROESAMECCHOPPCT, ince a Saicag se4b6 bets sk vatines cn as 2 00

Rs. 79 10 0

484 Roree in Khypoor. [No. 114.

The shop measured eleven feet in length and seven in width. The

walls were sun baked brick, and timber interlaced with tamarisk boughs,

the interstices filled with mud, and the roof of timber covered with

reeds and clay.

The factor paid four workmen from six to ten pys a day (three pence or

five pence), but did not employ them regularly ; the vat man who raised

the pulp worked only half the day, as his labour is very constant and

tiresome, and received two anas (three pence.) The factor does not

weigh the tow as he considers it would bring ill-success on his work,

and throws into the pit any quantity that is cut.

Roree receives silk from Persia, and from Bokhara and other parts

of Toorkistan. During the war between Shah Shoojah and Dost Mahomed

Khan in 1833, the supply was stopped six or eight months and the wea-

vers out of employ. The invasion of Affghanistan by the British eight

years afterwards, interrupted commerce by the route of Kandahar and

the Bolan Pass, but did not interfere with the supply of silk from Cabool

which was, on the contrary, in excess of the quantity imported the pre-

ceding years, and came as usual, on camels vid Peshawur, Dera Ismail,

Mooltan, and Bahawulpoor. :

A single hand silk loom can be established in Roree for 4 rupees, or

about 8 shillings English. I annex a list of tools and their cost :

; RA. Be

A Spinning Wiheel, uts hh ways, ouorin! . Gueh. ta als aus SE 1 40

Rods of Surkunda reed passed through the warp to preserve

the shape or lease, cut in the wilds.

The pit or workshop, three feet long, two feet wide, and two

feet deep, dug by the weavers.

The cloth-beam or breast roll, a square beam of talee wood

three feet long, placed over the pit and to which the ends of

the warp are fastened, ...........00 micas bala ifn Colic alee ~~ 0 8g

Kite. Two upright posts six inches high which support the

breast roll and-in which it revolves, §.....,....-+-+ceees . 0 04

Handle (phirnee) to turn the breast rool,........ Dodie tin cal she 0 O01

Sundulee. Two sticks attached to the breast-roll to which the

WAPPS ire REM, 5. A Reha alee ccna nuns eis 0 aishewie maar age Keniets 002

HHuthas 2 The lay cap Dt Feet Long, «soit epiccs smyeucteiecenere «tate =,» 0 80

Phunee. ‘The reed’ a sort of comb of split Surkunda reed

- between which the warp passes, .......5--a wes ce ++ eee 010

Dootna. Two painted and varnished rollers forming part of

the heddles to which the loom is fixed and suspended from

the shop roof, ....... a gidgiinte, ste eeaTere pete arias a) il . 0 OF

1841.] Roree.in Khypoor. 485

Ruchee. Four thin sticks set upright and connected by cot-

ton threads and forming part of the heddles, ........... 0 40

Cotton threads to form the heddles for suspending the ruchee,

amigamcap tothe shop £00f,. «. .j.jej..<jrieisie na sik oan J iaeie ws 0 20

Ponsur. Two round sticks attached to the ruchee aud sus-

Wa ee PAN LING, PUG 0 se ail oid lars ia! bla orm drahaial dade bere biet ote arent. 0 02

MAG OMEN TFEAGI ES, 04 10\8)-:0 1010 48% we alerbed Se ge ih HAM Scie 0 02

Duna. Horizontal beam or yard roll on which the ends of

MMAR DR ATe WOUNGS | iis fini oeioye we 5 alae De hie te oh SK 0 01

Post to which the yard roll is fastened by a rope, .......... 0 04

Perea ANAL sleAVES)) 1:6 i. ..0 dtamisjoy «wedge dew suited saad 0 06

Nar or shuttle of taree wood, the only part of the machine

Mee IS OUMCANEALLY 5. sleeve, « sadainns'e elsiwid lel) fed seed ie Wates. VOLS 0

Re OT MCECOL Gy So akist'. whi basi tpiclarrne's « Gis bh cio bodyeveid ee Sabie OMmOns

Stpee. A thin plate of blunt iron 23 inches long and 13

inches wide for scraping the wool,....i....0.siee. Boeke: 0 20

Buhla. A piece of leather paid with the hand under the

woof wheu itis scraped, ;.......... Miaetewietive ite peers 0 04

Iron pincer to pick off rough threads from the surface of the

ake rh Balin." iue, “Memes Oe lh ae 58 NO 12

. Rs. 3 140

A weaver earns four anas (six pence) a day, and will finish a piece of

silk 24 yards long and 11 inches wide ina month, The manufacturer’s

profit is from 3 to 5 rupees.

A piece of Duryaee 24 yards long and 11 inches wide manufactured of

Shalbafee or Nuwabee silk from Toorkistan, costs :—

Orange colour 12 rupees or 8 annas a yard.

Blue 11) do... or,./5 do. do.

Yellow and green 10 do, or 6 do. do.

Raw undyed silk thread imported from Persia and T'oorkistau sells in

the bazar at 16 or 17 rupees the seer, and 3 or ¢ ofa seer are required to

weave a piece 96 yards long and !1 inches wide. The import duty on

undyed silk thread is | rupee per seer and 17 ana extra on thread dyed at

| Shikarpoor or elsewhere in Sind.

_ The dyer’s charges are :—

For reddish-brown or orange colour, formed by safflower (the dried

flowers of the Carthamus Tinctorius), 25 seers per rupee.

| For blue, formed by Indigo, 1 seer per 24 rupees.

For green, formed by Indigo with gooljuleel (mettilet,) 3 seers per rupee

For yellow, formed by gooljulee], 3 seers per rupee.

486 Roree in Khypoor. [No, 114,

They are the only colours used in Roree by silk-dyers, and the weavers

are ignorant how to produce any pattern or design.

When the weaver receives thread from the dyer he smears ghee over it

to give it strength and flexibility, and applies wheat starch occasionally

to the woof with the point of a stick enveloped in cotton rag.

As far as I could ascertain there are 160 silk looms in Roree which pay

a yearly tax of 900 rupees, which is-200 rupees less than the sum realized

in the time of the late Meer Sohrab. I visited several loom-shops and

found them all in a state of wretchedness and discomfort. Theshop from

which the description is taken, measured eight feet in length and twelve

feet in width, and cost ten Shorabee rupees; it had a pent roof of reeds,

mats, and date leaves in bad repair; the ends rested on square pillars of

sun baked bricks and the middle on posts, and alow door was built in a

wall of tamarisk boughs kept together with posts set on end and sticks

tied across them. It was no protection from thieves. Work-shops are

not, however, built with a view to secure property, and tradesmen and

mechanics rarely sleep in them; they return home at night and carry with

them any articles and machinery likely to tempt the cupidity of a thief.

Cotton weavers have a loom of the same description as silk weavers,

and worth 3 rupees:

ie, Az P.

The spinning: whicelyy ig. GLE. ve om slerew areas tis ols « éslan thas 1 00

Ahi): Mavi whee yo. hin bailelare cyuph S oun eysecvan ess aaa, sone st eee 003

(This is worked by a female whose hire is included in her

husband’s wages of two anas (3d. a day), ...... Meee 1 03

30 lease rods of Surkunda reed cut in the wilds.

The pit in which the weaver sits dug by the weavers.

The cloth-beam or breast-roll 4% feet in length,. .......... 0 8 3

Two posts in which the cloth beam revolves, ........... swag) Oe

The lay enp: Sitect Tome, feces ss i's wey visiasiste bs ee ceia 0 80

Dooina and Sundulee, part of the heddles, ............. io pO Oe

Two Ruchee part of the heddles,.......... Ste AP ses gin tate 0 60

The ‘ Reed,’ of split Surkunda reeds, ........ 2 oy sieya mse ciety «a Cas

TROP ONSUR, Go wate 315) We utes eis ens Gack TAPED, Na Pe ree em (2 A.

Two treadiess) S00" Gael Mla. cp saee pale eae a, Cm inanes

Duna, or horizontal beam,....... er Pn eee St 2 0 0!

Goats’ hair rope to which the end of the warp is fastened,.. 0 05

Shuttle of kundee wood, and iron reel or needle,........... . O 4 &

Cotton threads and horizontal sticks firming the heddle or

harness for suspending the loom to the shop-roof, made in

the shop. ——_—_——---

1841.] — Roree in Khypoor. 487

In 1839, coarse cotton thread fetched in the Roree market from four to

sixteen anas a seer, and fine thread four rupees aseer. A weaver works

a piece of cloth 12 yards long and 3 a yard wide in a day, 4 seer of thread

is sufficient for a piece this size which sells for 14+ rupee. A piece of

coarser texture which consumes a seer of thread sellsat 2 rupee. A

weaver in Roree earns 2 anas (3 pence) a day, which is a half-penny more

than is paid in the hest cotton factories at Boulac (Cairo), The master’s

labour is calculated to be worth double, and he prepares the most difficult

part of the work.

The shop | visited held two looms and a female spinner. It measured

15 feet long and 9 feet’ wide and cost 5 rupees, three of which went for

labour; two sides of it-were fenced with tamarisk twigs unplastered and

kept together with sticks laid across them; the third side was open, and

the fourth joined a mud wall of another house: the shop had a low wooden

door anda broken roof of mats and reeds propped on posts, and this

is a fair description of by far the greatest number of shops belonging to

mechanics and artizans in Roree.

Cotton cloths were among the few articles which became cheaper at

Roree after the arrival of the British. This was owing to the large quan-

tity imported by merchants from the Punjab and Bhawulpoor: they

took advautage of the diminution of duties and increased facilities of

navigating the Indus.

The process of printing and dyeing calico is usually conducted by one

person, and the proprietor of the shop I am to describe, had no assistants,

and performed the whole work himself. Working dyers receive 2 anas a

day, and food morning and evening, consisting each time of half a seer of

wheat flour. The dyer had.a walled court ten yards long and six yards

wide which enclosed two sheds. The one he occupied himself measured

twelve feet in length and ten in width, and he let the other to a cotton

spinner.

To prepare cloth for the print and dye, it is immersed four hours in an

earthen pan of alum and water mixed in the proportion of 1 to 16, and

care must be taken if it be intended to give thé piece a uniform tinge from

the dye, that this substance, technically called mordant, is universally

applied over the whole—otherwise it is applied only in parts; it is then

withdrawn from the alum mordant, drained, and washed. A piece of cloth,

24 cubits long and | cubit wide, requires an ana’s* weight of alum and five

seers water. The dyer afterwards grinds some tamarisk flowers (sak oor)

* An anais a Sind weight equal to 6 Shorabee rupees.

488 Roree in Khypoor. [No. 114.

in a common stone hand mill and mixes one part flour with sixteen of

water. Cloth impregnated with this fluid acquires a yellowish hue, and

the immersion is repeated before it is consigned to the colouring vat.

Black spots are left on a white ground of cloth by applying to these

points a paste, composed of acetate of iron, gum (cheer ), and fuller’s earth.

The dyer forms the acetate from old nails or any rusty iron which he throws

into an earthen pot with wheat starch and water, in the proportion of one |

of iron, two of water, and one fifth wheat starch, and exposes it in the

sun four days in summer, and eight in winter as the iron is then longer

dissolving. The stuff is transferred to another vessel and fullers’ earth

melted with it in no fixed proportion until it becomes a thick paste, and

to every five seers he adds an ana’s* weight of gum.

The dyer pours the stuff into a shallow box of baked clay, glazed inside

and out, and measuring eight inches square and three inches deep. A

frame five inches square formed of twelve small bars of sirkee reed, bound

together at the ends by transverse wooden bars and twine, is set on the

paste, and over it a piece of coarse wool on which the dyer presses the block

to avoid taking a superabundance of the stuff which would happen if he

plunged the block directly into it. The dyer had twenty blocks or en-

gravings in relief, of different designs, made at Shikarpore of tamarisk

and tamarind wood, and measuring four and five inches each way. The

stuff which accumulates from time to time in the engravings, is removed

at intervals by small brushes made of boar’s bristles.

Madder (munjeeth) is the dye stuff used for producing red colour,

and the best kind sells at 2} seers per rupee; it is not a product of

Khyrpoor and imported from Khorasan and India, and through the

sea port of Korachee. The stuffis obtained by boiling one part madder

in thirty parts water in a copper vessei, till the colour is thoroughly

extracted from the root, which takes about four hours. The

root is then withdrawn from the pot and thrown away. Eight pieces

of cloth each 24 cubits long and 1 cubit wide, are sometimes dyed at

- once, and boiled two hours in four seers of madder. The cloth is taken

from the colouring bath to a,river, and beaten on a plank cut in furrows,

like the one used by washermen, to deprive it of superficial colouring

maker. It isrubbed an hour with cowdung and left all night to dry,

and in the morning washed again in the river in the manner noticed, and

spread in the suntodry. The dyer renders the colouring matter a more

decided red by mixing khar (alkali, with water,) and sprinkles it upon the

ne ee ee a Rs

* An ana is a Sind weight equal to 6 Shorabee rupees,

1841.] Roree in Khypoor. 189

cloth. Two ana’s weight of alkali are sufficient to moisten a piece of

cloth 24 cubits long. He washes the cloth a third time in the river,

carries it home, and, after folding it, beats it into a smooth even surface

with a wooden roller which terminates the process. Four days are required

to print and dye a piece of cloth 24 cubits long and 1 cubit wide of any

pattern. Fine calico absorbs a larger quantity of fluid than a coarse

kind. The man charges one rupee for printing and dyeing a piece this

size of the best pattern, and half the money for an inferior pattern. In

both instances the charge for printing amounts to one fourth of the whole

sum. The man does not use any other colour than madder, and he was

the only dyer in Roree in 1839. The dyers-of green and yellow cloths

had fled to Khyrpoor to escape the exactions of the Governor, and the dyer

of blue cloths had removed his shop for the same reason to the British

camp.

The Roree cotton printer had :—

Rs. As.

Ten wooden blocks (chemba) 4 inches long and 23 inches

which cost 5 anas each,............. BP chins Sy usiepeusa! cs si apes 2% 2

Ten wooden blocks 4 inches square at 4 anas each,........ S lui

Two small brushes of hog’s bristles for cleaning the blocks, 0 5

Two boxes (dubkee) of baked clay, 2 anas each, ....... Pe arin, | TNO,

Bench 44 feet long and 2 feet wide raised on legs to hold the

GUERIN OE VTLTINGS ls Bice, fe Aiea lah is miei o nie eyeiviisre eso shetane nthe 1 Oo

Mat-of date leaves). 66.6.0. .cee eee miei eve Witten aivyiaeeee cis ee |

Large earthen pan,...... She soak Nokes: Sues ital pal to oko "<4, ote EAE ope 0 8

Pie PaPiNeN: POtS, ..-.2: ho sible oe ee 3 nalts 7a 09 cramanaley 6 Be UR ais

Rs. 7 15

The price of ingredients he requires to carry on his business is stated’

below :— :

Rs. As. Ps.

Madder root 23 seers, ....... Apeoat abi <c053 etbiell, pls oie B20

Tamarisk flowers (sakoor) brought from the Glas per

eS EE ee TY EET Oe, es ahsy ecesiis ois 00 8

SRRCRGCT.) DET SECT) oo ieia.o cnmiaye ¢ 9 9 mcieisldpaits » eaten, nO a0

A ealan( hiner ) Per SCCL, nae wenres: seviemeiiadeges seer aie OO: eal

NRE PCT SSOP Rss cena yo oie aiin'te Hume ey pel tele Heys Rye, ia els, of 0 6 O

The road duties, and octroz or barrier duties, levied on four-footed ani-

mals is ruinously high, and of course affects their hire. For instance be~

tween Roree and Kyrpoor, a horseman pays :—

490 Roree in Khypoor. [No. 114.

Pys.

At the gate of Roree,............ COST wane oe

Halfway; re... Le PU dS meee eae errs 4 3

At the gate of Kyrpoor,...... ... «. wee

The distance between these places is only 8 kos. :

Between Roree and Shikarpore, 16 kos, he pays :—

Pys.

AE RROTCES Co eas vane chee tee. setts Jy eis! 2

nds ferry, er Se. Mt Te ca ee ‘emi: 3

At Sullhar coe R Se eee 9

Village of Driha 4 kos from chines 4

Barrier of Shikarpore, ..... ... OYE AST, 5

or nearly one shilling English. These heavy charges are the consequence

of Roree, Sukhur, and Shikarpore being under separate Governors.

Hire of cattle from Roree to Shikarpore, and Khyrpoor.

Rs. As. Rs. As.

Of'a Camehsar sessed. Maer bh ee 1 O

Of a Horse or Pony, ... .. . O 12 or 16 0 8or9

Of a Miblese!s di 23. kG 0 10 0 8

Of amr ess scr 2 hee Pane tunel ee Ovi eg

Hindoo merchants and Bankers exact 24, and sometimes 36 per cent.

for money borrowed by zumeendars and persons in needy circumstances,

and collect it monthly. But in money transactions with each other they

only take 6 per cent. No moosulman practices usury.

Ferries are little frequented except on the line of commercial intercourse,

and the roads leading directly to large towns: in other situations they

do not give regular employ to the boatmen. Flying bridges of a single

rope fixed to stakes on the banks, are thrown across canals and streams

cut fromthe Indus, anda man pulls the passenger across ina_ boat.

The charge for crossing the Indus is, one pys a_ head for foot passengers

double for an ass, and quadruple for a cow or buffalloe, and on small

rivers like the Anul and Nuhra, half these respective amounts.

Boats proceeding up and down the Indus before the treaty of 1839,

which established the free navigation of the river, paid a toll of one rupee

1841.] Roree in Khypoor. 491

at Bukur without reference to their tonnage, and tolls at Iurdehee and

- Thatta. They were searched at Hydurabad, Sehwan, Chilka on the

Arrut, Khyrpoor on the Nuhra, and at Roree. An attempt to conceal

goods not entered in the bill of lading, condemned the cargo to confisca-

tion and the owner to fine and imprisonment. He must exhibit the

merchant’s accounts of whom he purchased the goods and a certificate of

the custom house officer of the place where they were embarked, without

which they are stopped. Grain landed at Roree is charged about 43 per

cent. duty regulated by the price current of the town.

The natives of Sind, with the exception of a few high caste Hindoos who

abstain from fish, subsist on fish, milk, and wheat or joowara, or rice where

it is cultivated, and a variety of vegetables which grow in plenty, From

motives of economy they eat wheat during the rubbee or spring harvest

and Joowara or maize in the Khureef or autumnal harvest. The price

of rice has risen considerably since 1838, and is now beyond the means

of the lower orders except in districts where itis the staple. Rice is the

red kind and people clean it by pounding it in large wooden mortars with

salt in the proportion of one part salt to six of rice. It is sifted from the

salt and something less than a poundof wheat flour added to bleach it.

Every boat on the Indus is provided with a deep wooden mortar formed

of the hollow trunk of a tree. The boatmen buy grain in the husk

because it is cheap and beat it in the mortar witha club to separate the

chaff.

Meer Roostum obliged the milkmen of Roree to dispose of milk at

23 pys a seer, but on their threatening to go over to our camp, allowed

them to sell itat3 pys. At Sukhur the price formerly was 2 pys a seer,

and doubled in 1839. Curds ( Duhee) continued at the old rate of 2

pys. Ox and Cow beef sold formerly at 2 pysa seer in Roree, and

latterly at 24, and goat’s flesh rose from 5 to6 pys. The beef and mutton

_ killed in camp for the troops, was extremely lean and tough, and hardly

eatable, when cooked in a common way, nor was this surprising as the

_ Sind butchers feed their sheep and cattle on the refuse of stables, and

do not give them grain and very rarely Kurbee (the stalk of joowara

and bujra.)

Labourers and other poor people, eat twice a day, in the morning and

evening, and consume ? of a seer of wheat or joowara flour, and one pys

- worth of bor, a condiment made of fish, spinach, or pulse. To prepare

bor the fish is cut in pieces and thrown into boiling water, and onions,

black pepper, coriander seed, turmeric, and pomegranate seeds, are added

as seasoning. At present (1839) 7 of a seer of wheat or joowara flour costs

3 Q

492 Roree in Khypoor. [No. 114.

3 pys, so that including the price of bor, a poor man consumes two pence

aday. Labourers earned high wages in our camp and could afford to

purchase comforts, but they had been so little accustomed to possess

cash beyond their daily and pressing wants that they spent the surplus

improvidently. After working a few days they absented themselves,

without leave, for a week, and squandered their earnings on hemp juice

and tobacco. They returned to ask their employer’s forgiveness and

to resume their labours, but followed again the same improvident course

when they amassed a little money.

The food of a Moosulman of the better class costs about a rupee a day,

and consists of :

Pys.

TAD, Rhi@eycn oc hc ache ase deade dao. wad. Tee 3

1Jb. Wheat Flour, ...... hel Wapeeee Reid peie eee eats BO. ae 23

b ibyGoat(s Flesh}, rs... 2024s ee ns hele bade 4

1 Ib.-Ghee or Clarified Butter,’ cx wo. od eens doe bee aoe 8

2 lb. Butter Milk, 2 At). weiner stow ae sess atweneaeeae 4

2 Ih. Batasha,’s . . soc «tenant aetetets chaj's ardistvgsier ee eae eons 14

254

The family eat half about sunrise and the other half at noon, and a third

meal, consisting of the same quantity, at the first watch of the night.

A Zumeendar of Sunkhur of my acquaintance, spends = of a rupee a day

on food, and his servants eat what is left. Hindoos live more frugally.

Poor people eat with their food a large quantity of chillies which they

pound in a mortar with an equal quantity of coarse salt,;and add some

oil to diminish their fiery taste. Three pys weight of whole chillies

are sold for a copper pys, and half the quantity pounded for use. Fish

is dressed with linseed oil and a variety of spices, and the lower onde

grill the entrails on wood ashes and eat them with salt.

There is little in Sindian cookery to tempt an epicure who has tasted

the delicacies of a Parisien restaurateur, or the royal kitchens of Dilhee

and Lucknow. I shall give the reader an idea of their cookery by des-

cribing a banquet at Sukhur in 1839 to which about two hundred guests

were invited. Sher Moohummud, a great savant of Roree, gave the

dinner to the principal tax gatherer of Khyrpoor, who sent a nuzzur,

exceeding the expense of the entertainment, which cost about eighty or

ninety rupees. He and she goats were cut in pieces and stewed to rags

in large copper cauldrons; and salt, garlic, turmeric, blackpepper,

cocoanuts, onions, and the seeds of black cummin, coriander, and anise

1841.] Roree in Khypoor. 493

were pounded and mixed with the meat and some ghee added after it

was removed from the fire.

Another dish consisted of rice served in the water in which it was

boiled, and seasoned with salt, ghee, and lime juice.

A third dish, called I think Rukia, was made of white pumkin cut in

small slices, parboiled, and thrown into about eighty pounds of duhee or

coagulated milk, and served with cayenne pepper, salt, onions, and garlic.

Every one was helped to a small cup of ruhkta. The rice was thrown

into large earthen platters each capacious enough to allow eight or nine

persons to sit round it, and the meat was heaped on the rice and a little

ruhta poured over it. The Company dined in the open air and were

much scattered. Some sat on mats and blankets they brought with

them, and the greatest number on the bare earth. It would have been

prononnced a shabby banquet in India. According to a Sindian

custom, each groupe before they drew to the platters, looked cautiously

round, to ascertain if an enemy not bidden to the feast, was watching them.

They devoured the meat in unseemly haste and it was over in about

an hour,

The Belooch, Puthans, Moghuls, and other northern tribes, settled in

Sind, are tall and well made, and the upper classes have dark brilliant

eyes and expressive features. They as much surpass the inhabitants of

Oude and the Delhi Territory in bulk and stature, as the latter do the

tribes of Bombay, Bengal and the Konkan. In complexion, they are

fairer than the Bengalees but less so than the Moosulmans of Northern

India. They let their beards grow to a great length regarding a well

covered chin as a handsome and becoming ornament of the face. Asiatic

monarchs, like the early French Kings (the Franks,) never allow the

scissors to touch their beards, and regard the beard as a mark of freedom

and illustrious birth, and cultivate and prize it exceedingly. The

Belooch also permit the hair of their heads to grow in wild profusion

which I need not observe, is expressly prohibited by the Koran, for a

Moosulman is enjoined to leave only a small tuff of hair on the crown

of the head to afford Moohummud a_ hold in lifting him to Paradise.

The beards of the Belooch, like those of other Asiatic faces, are mostly

black and the practice of staining them as they turn grey, is almost

universal. An extract from the leaves of fina (lawsonia inermis) and

indigo are used for the purpose, and if not renewed at proper intervals,

changes the beard of a fierry red or deep orange colour. It is much the

custom, among the Persians and Afghans, and they assist the operation

by the vapour bath.

494 Roree in Khypoor. [No. 114.

Alina leaves are ground ina mortar or stone hand-mills and immersed

an hour in warm water until they acquire the consistency of thin paste.

Women mix it with the paste and apply it to their riuglets to conceal the

¥avage which time has made with them, and it gives their hair a dis-

agreeable smell.

The hina paste is strained and applied to the beard with paper and

cotton cloth which are passed under the chin and over the head, and a

warm situation, particularly a hot bath, favours this troublesome opera-

tion. Itis left on four or five hours to produce a good colour. After-

wards the beard is thoroughly washed with warm water, combed clean

and dried, and covered with a decoction of indigo leaves made into paste

like hina and tied on the beard for double the period. It is generally

put on at night and washed offin the morning, and the beard combed

and cleaned. The dye should be applied once a week, to procure the

colour, but is not usually renewed oftener than the tenth day.

The national head-dress isa circular cap called Shuhzadpooree. It

is about eight inches in height and made of silk or cotton thread of seve-

ral colours according to the prevailing fashion and taste of the wearer.

Scarlet was the favourite colour at Hydurabad in 1839. The crown is

flat with a sharp projecting rim, andofa different colour from the rest

of the cap, and sometimes covered with brocade. A gay coloured band,

the depth of the cap, goes round it with the exception of two inches in

the front which is of another pattern. Caps are made upon very small

blocks, and worn on the brows so that they just cover the crown of the

head. They cost from six annas to five rupees, and common people

wear one, three months, or until the threads fall in pieces, and are dis-

coloured from dirt and grease.

Many Puthans, Moghuls and other foreigners, who have settled in Sind,

adopt the Belooch cap, and dress to identify themselves with the con-

querors of the country and to procure respect and security from oppres-

sion, and even Hindoos, in Government employ, wear it. ‘The Ameer

occasionally presents his servants with a cap or a dress, and they could

not neglect his gifts without giving offence. |

Suyads sometimes wear a three-cornered cap made of rich crimson

silk sprigged with flowers, or covered with gold brocade, anda handsome

one may be purchased at Shatta for 4 or 5 rupees. They are stiffened

with paste or buckram and fold up like an English cocked hat.

A few Belooch have adopted the turban, but they usually prefer the

national cap. Poor Sindees have cotton turbans either white or dyed

1841.] Roree in Khypoor. 495

blue with indigo. They take from six to twenty yards of cloth about

sixteen inches wide, and cost from 6 annas to 2 rupees.

Slippers are of brown leather made of a peculiar form, and the soles

stitched together with cotton thread. They cost half a rupee per pair,

and an inferior kind six and sevenannas. Poor tradesmen and manu-

facturers change their shoes every six months and sometimes twelve

months.

The upper garment (cholo) of the Sindees, is.a loose shirt of white

cotton similar to the smock of an English ploughman: it has alow collar

fastened over the right breast and reaches below the knee, and takes six or

eight yards of cloth. The pastoral tribes of the desert and poor farmers,

usually dye the frock blue, and other classes a sort of yellowish brown

colour with extract of turmeric and pomegranate shells. Some wear a

loose waistcoat with a cotton sheet (bochun) twisted over it, containing

from six to twenty yards of cloth according to the means, and taste of

the wearer.

Their trousers or drawers are of course cotton stuff usually dyed blue,

made very full, low in the seat, and rather tight above the instep. Some

reach only to the small of the leg and are fastened at the loins with a

running string. Tradesmen and manufacturers allow themselves four

or six suits of clothes in the year.

The higher ranks wear round the waist a loongee made at Thatta of

mixed silk and cotton threads of gay colours. The middle ranks have

loongees of white cotton with blue cross bars six or seven cubits long with

a border of crimson silk and cotton mixed, and the poor gird their loins

with a bit of coarse cotton cloth.

Some women of the lower class wear drawers (Sootun), but ladies who

are behind the curtainand do not quit their chamber, wear petticoats

confined at the waist withastring. Cotton drawers are sometimes striped

_ red, made full to the knee, and tight below it, leaving an opening scarcely

wide enough to admit the foot, and falling under the heels.

Their body is casedin a sort of spencer or boddice with short tight

sleeves : it reaches to the waist and is tied above and below the bosom

with strings, leaving the back exposed. The spencer is dyed brown,

red, or dark blue, and sometimes prettily worked and spotted with

coloured silks and covered with tale spangles fixed on their leaden me-

| dallsion, which are also used to decorate mantles and petticoats. They

are put on with gum and other adhesive substances.

The following list exhibits the wearing apparel and its cost, of a land-

holder of the middle class, and of Government officers, in Khbyrpoor.

496 Roree in Khypoor. [No. 114.

Cholo or Shirt of coarse cotton called ‘ Udhotur’ of

Khyrpoor manufacture, 20 cubits, at 28 cubits per rupee . 0

Bochun or mantle of the same material 28 cubits long 1

Sootun or Drawers 11 cubits at 9 cubits per rupee 1

Loongee of striped cotton : : : : » 2

Shahzadpooree cap of yellow silk a crown of red pyinak 1

Pair of Shoes . = OL! ROSANA TEM e - 0 hl BD

Rs. 6

The three first articles on the list are sewn at home, and

the usual allowance is six suits in a year which cost ovr jal

Six Caps <fathtinen tice dikcia oS west < welt win

Four pair of Shoes : : 2 : aie ove ergenegh as

Total cost of a dress annually about £ 2-11. Rs. 25

About 4s. 6d. are sufficient to provide a poor person such

as stone-cutters, silk and cotton weavers, washermen, lea-

ther cutters &c., with a suit of wearing apparel, and women

of this class may be clothed for 4 or 5 shillings.

A man requires :—

A cotton chola 12 cubits 6 annas, sewing IZ anna. °

A cotton Bochun 18 cubits 9 annas, sewing lanna . . O

Drawers, of cotton cloth 10 cubits long 14 cubit wide 5

annas, sewing I anna . : - Po

Cap 6 annas; or cotton nee 12 se oe the same

valuse . oy berchalitbre SM We ae SH Acer hie

Shoes 7 annas per pair. . . - ; - Best)

Rs. As. Pys

113 0

0 0

33 0

8 0

0 0

8 0

15; 0

113 0

0 0

113 0

10 0

6 0

7 0

Rs. 2 42 0

Chola 4 perannum,atannas7$ each... : 1 14 0

Bochun 4 per annum, at anas 10 each Praga gre 2° Se

Drawers 4 perannum, atannas Geach . . . . 1 80

Cap 4per annum,atannasGeach . . =i 1 8 0

Shoes 2 pair per annum at annas 7 each : . 0 14 0

About 16s. 6d. per annum, Rs. 8 4 O

1941.] Roree in Khypoor. 497

A woman requires :— Rs, As. Pys.

A cotton petticoat (puro), 24

cubits golong and 2 cubits wide

l rupee, sewing 2 pys. . . 1 0 O Four per annum 4 3 2

A Boddice (Choolee) of cot-

ton cloth 4 cubits long and 13

cubit wide, 2 annas,sewing2as. 0 4 0 ditto 1’ 200

1 4 2

A mantle or sheet (Chuddur)

20 cubits long. It is thrown

over the head, envelopes the

figure, and descends to the

heels, cost 12 annas, sewing 1

anna SHER ue sieht ee - O13 O Four per annum.

Shoes 7 annas per pair . . O 7 O Two per annum. 0 14 O

2.3 2 Dey HU B

(sv)

Drawers take about 9 cubits

of cotton cloth, 14 cubit wide

and cost 8 annas and 1 anna

sewing . - ; ; :

Clothes are generally made

by the females of a family.

Women sometimes wind a cloth

or mantle round the body and

veil their features like Indian

women.

The Ameer’s dress costs about

£7 10, and he is said to allow

himself four suits a month.

The cast off suits he gives to

0 9 O Four per annum. 2 4 O

his servants : Lamas

A Chola costs ; : a a

Drawers i “ ste LO

Moemeee 8. : - 50

Roomal or Handkerchief . 1

Cap “\. : - ° . 10

ORE oe ; ‘ jy) oak

Rs. 75

oa} oo fe oc S

Solileos oo 8

498 Roree in Khypoor. [No. 114.

The dress of ladies of the Ameer’s Haram costs about the same, and

they wear also a silk Uorungshahee of Persian or Toorkish manufacture,

worth 30 or 40 rupees. The best Uorungshahee are usually red and

studded with emeralds, pearls, and other precious stones arranged in pat-

terns. There are some in the Palace valued at 2,000 rupees, and Meers

Roostum and Ali Morad haveeach one said tobe worth 5,000 or 6,000

rupees. ;

So strong is the women’s passion for jewels and ornaments, that even the

poorest lay by a trifle out of their scanty earnings to gratify it, and [

recollect seeing a female at work in a field at Sukkur covered with filthy

amulet of silver round her neck cost alone six rupees.

The gold and silver ornaments worn in Khyrpoor and Moghulee, are

more remarkable for their weight and number than delicacy of finish.

The Chotee Phoolisa medallion for the back of the head.

Tiko. A large oval forehead ornament of gold or silver, painted three

or four colours usually red, green, and yellow. A similar ornament is

worn in India by shop-keepers wives and prostitutes, but not by peasants.

The peasant women of Sind wear the tiko at feasts and holidays,

and fix it on the middle of the forehead by gold or silver chains (daonree),

which are brought across the forehead and fastened with hooks behind

the ears, or to the crown of the head. A gold éko cost 32 rupees and a

silver one 1; rupee.

Punra from seven to sixteen ornaments worn in the rim of the ear with

pearls or silver beads.

Nusbee worn near the orifice of each ear.

Joomuk suspended before the ear to cover the orifice.

Chupla gold or silver wires set with about a hundred small turquoise

stones worn in the middle of the rim of the ear.

Boolu a small ring set with pearls worn through the cartilage that

divides the nostrils.

Nut ring generally set with three pearls worn in the right nostril. Ie

is always gold, and the lowest half swells intoa crescent form. The gold

costs from 5 to9 rupees. A poor woman will have a nose ring worth ten

rupees of which the gold costs five anda pair of pearls five. Country

people have a cumbrous description of nose ornament resembling in shape

and size the two handed instrument used in India to cut betel nut.

Kundhee necklace of gold or silver beads strung on silk threads and

falling below the bosom and fastened to an angular barrel-shaped orna-

ment (pootlo.)

— 1841.) Roree in Khypoor. 499

Taweez, three square amulets of gold or silver, sometimes coloured

green or red, suspended round the neck by silk threads,

Sookree, an oval ornament suspended round the neck and below the

bosom.

Zunjeeree, a double chain which is passed over the neck and across the

loins and attached behind and before to oval medallions, and falls below

the bosom.

Chelkee, a waist chain.

Dorhir, armlet of three barrel shaped ornaments like the pootlo,

worn below the elbow.

Banhee, long bangles of embossed gold or silver, worn from the wrist

to the shoulder leaving only asmall opening at the elbow joint, so that.

the arm is in fact cased in metal. Ivory armlets are turned on a lathe

and sold by weight, and a sufficient number to reach from the wrist to

the shoulder may be purchased for 25 rupees. They have a clumsy and

disagreeable effect on the sable skins of the women.

Moree, pointed bangle of gold or silver fastened with silk threads on

the wrist.

Wadolu, Mungloo, and Kungur, three kinds of bangle for the wrist.

Moondree, seal rings worn on the fingers. A chain (wung) is attach-

ed to the ring on the middle finger, carried round the thumb and fasten-

ed to the bracelet.

Wehr, ring worn on the fore finger of the right hand.

Aeenu, Mirror ring worn on the thumb.

Kuriyon, heavy silver anklets each weighing from 40 to 100 rupees.

Ghinguroon, anklet worn lelow the Auriyon and fastened with an orna-

ment (xoora.)

Paeenzeb, silver anklet worn below the ghinguroon.

Ungoothee, angular medallions fastened on the toes by rings and some-

times ornamented with blue enamel.

Men of the middle class wear a gold or silver finger ring with a white.

or red cornelian or other coloured stone, set init. If set in gold it costs

8 or 9 rupees and 8 or Yannas insilver, The stone costs a rupee.

Boys wear a ring (walee) through the lobe of the ear; an ornament

(Kewatee) in the rim of the ear ; or Kungna or bracelet on the wrist, and

sometimes seal rings (moondree) on the fingers.

[ 500 ]

Proceedings of the Asiatic Society, Wednesday Evening,

2d June, 1841.

THe Hon’sie Sir E. Ryan In THe Cuair.

Mr. 8S. G. T. Heatly was proposed a Member by Dr. J. T. Pearson,

seconded by the Secretary.

Books recewed for the Library of the Asiatie Society, 2d June, 1841,

Annals and Magazine of Natural History, Nos. 37 to 40, December,

1840 to February, 1841,............ ecccee «hie 0 Sees atleatemee wry o&

The Calcutta Monthly Journal, for April, 1841, 3d Series, No. 77, . Il

The London, Edinburgh and Dublin Philosophical Magazine, 3d

Series, vol. 17, Nos. 112 and 113 and vol. 18 No. 114, London,

bS4028I)), lias dine. totoalngt oaitian go. lilo Bs ale arth. clay Geen eo

Yarrell’s History of British Birds, January 1841, part 22, ...... gaacn 5

Ouchterlony’s Mineralogical Heport, Madras, 1841,............... eae |

Dollard’s General and Medical Topograghy of Kalee Kemaoon and

~Stiore Valley Calcutta, Sak, . vodnics. sce sian dehipbice 0:4 > aap ener eae l

Cuvier, Histoire Naturelle des Poissons Tome 15, et Planches, Nos.

$89: 6 QD jicrciaivie OM, LO QRL OLS Ay sivsrilt ue al 5. male eriiaey ae cele SWS

Journal des Savants, Septembre, Oct. et Nov. 1840, ............2 3

Tassy, Doctrines et Devoirs de la Religion Musulmane, tires du

-Coran Paris, 1840...... AR oI OAY wade logue ae ¢ «lela; bp yee.

Antiquitates Americane, Hafnie, I837, (in Danish and Latin,) 4to,.. 1

Samlede Afhandlinger of R. K. Rash Kobenhavn, 1838, Fredil del,

Buea Dike aye ih 259). S21) eos Mss 1 Geils meal eare «4:5 Lstennleminhaann a |

List of Mammalia, Contained in the Museum of the East India Com-

pany, (for distribution,), ..........0.00¢ ee wenn alienware

Pamphlets in Chinese Characters, ......c:es00cessecceensees pe ep?

Read the Report submitted by the Officiating Curator for the month

of May last already published in the body of the Journal.

1841.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 501

Read Letter, from Mr. E. Blyth, dated, London, 30th March, 1841, ap-

prising conclusion of an arrangement for his passage to India per

¢ Larkins,’ and expressing obligations for conferring upon him the ap-

pointment of Curator to the museum of the Asiatic Society of Bengal,

also forwarding abstract of a memoir on the wild sheep.

Read the following correspondence with Professor Wilson.

East Inpra House, 31st Marcu, 1841,

The Secretary of the Asiatic Society of Bengal.

Sir,

{ have the satisfaction toinform the Asiatic Society, that at last the

travels of Messrs. Moorcroft and Trebeck have been given to the public.

The society is no doubt aware that the work was printed, and even

reviewed three years ago, at which period it was expected by the pub-

lisher that the map would have been completed. The unaccountable

and unjustifiable tardiness of Mr. Arrowsmith in the preparation of the

map has been the sole cause of the delay.

The Society was apprised as soon as Mr. Murray engaged to publish

the work of the nature of the arrangement, which had been entered into

with him. It was stipulated that the Society would guarantee him

against loss in case the book should not meet with a ready sale, either

by payment of the deficiency or by paying for such copies as they might

desire to possess. Ifthe book were sold, a certain number of copies

(40) should be placed at the disposal of the Society. Mr. Murray has

sold all the copies except the 40 thus reserved. They have been handed

overtome. A promise was given to Mr. Trebeck, the brother of the

traveller, that of the copies so received by the society, 12, should be

made over to him. As he was recently in town the 12 sets have been

delivered to him. Of the remaining, 10 have been sent to the Society

on board the Tamerlane. I have distributed six others in the following

manner :

To the Royal Society.

To the Royal Asiatic Society.

the Royal Society of Edinburgh.

To the Asiatic Society of Paris.

To the University of Bonn,

1 To the Royal Geographical Society.

They have been presented in the name of the Society. There thus

remain 12 copies to the appropriation of which by myself I trust the

— et

502 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 114.

Society will not object, as I had much trouble in preparing the book for

publication, having been obliged indeed to re-write the whole of it.

Of these 12 copies, several will be presented to public Libraries. Of

those sent to India, I take the liberty of suggesting that a copy should

.be sent to the son, and another to the daughter of Mr. Moorcroft. They

are both in India. The son is, I believe, in the Madras Army, the

daughter is married to an officer in the Bengal army. I am not able to

furnish more particular directions as I omitted to ask Mr. Trebeck when

I saw him, and I do not know where to apply to him; but it will probably

not be difficult to obtain the necessary information in Bengal, from per-

sons connected with the houses of Palmer and Co. and Cruttenden and ~

Co. with whom Mr. Moorcroft was in correspondence.

Mr. Blyth has taken his passage in a ship that is to sail at the end of

this month, I am in hopes that the arrival of the mail will bring the

Society’s approbation of the measure of making him an advance for

outfit and passage, as without it, he could not have joined the museum.

I believe I have already acknowledged the receipt of the Bill for

£200, for Mr. Prinsep’s bust. The charge is 200 guineas or £210, the

difference can be remitted hereafter. In the case of my own bust I paid

it myself. The Society may do as it pleases about the repayment. Mr.

Prinsep’s bust has been modelled, and will I hope be as_good a likeness

as can be expected under the circumstances under which it is made ; it

will no doubt be worthy of the reputation of the Artist.

I am, &c.

(Signed) H. H. Witson.

Professor Wilson.

Sir,

The Hon’ble the President and Committee of Papers of the Asiatic

Society of Bengal desire me, in reply to your letter of 3lst March last,

to state that they have duly received from Mr. Blyth himself notice of

his embarkation for Bengal to assume the office of their Curator. The

Local Government have called upon the Society to reimburse the Court

of Directors in the sum of £150 advanced to that gentleman. The

Society, I am desired to observe, was not consulted before this advance

was made, but the local Government have consented that payment shall

be deferred until Mr, Blyth arrives.

1841.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 503

Notice has been given to our Agents, Allen, Parbury and Co. to pay to

your order £10 being the balance due on account of your bust, and we

regret that your should have been called on to advance this sum on

account of the Society. The Society is happy to say that the funds

available for that of Mr. James Prinsep are ample; its members desire

me to return you their thanks for the continued interest which you have

evinced on this subject.

The Society observes with satisfaction that the travels of Messrs. Moor-

croft and Trebeck, ably edited by yourself, have met with so ready a

sale. The period of three years however, which elapsed between the

printing and publication of the work might, in the opinion of the Society

have allowed of adefinite reference 40 Copies of Moorcroft’s Travels due to

to it on the subject of the disposal

of the 40 Copies to which by the

terms of an ample and hazardous

guarantee it was entitled. The So-

ciety anxious to improve its con-

nections with scientific bodies on

the continent of Europe, would

have availed itself with readiness

of the occasion thus offered, of

making presentations on its own

immediate account of a work pub-

lished only by its interposition.

Asiatic Society of Bengal.

12 Given under promise (of the Society ?)

to Mr. Trebeck’s Brother.

2 Intended for Mr. Trebeck’s son and

daughter.

6 Presented by Professor Wilson to learned

bodies.

12 Taken by Professor Wilson.

——

8 For the Asiatic Society of Bengal.

—=_

The receipt of the 8 copies sent to the Society will be acknowledged

in due course.

Asiatic Society's Rooms,

Calcutta,

The 8th June, 1841.

I have, &c.

(Signed) H. Torrens.

Secy. to the Asiatic Society.

(mmmenmmereae

The Secretary presented to the Society a valuable collection of coins,

consisting of the following :

List of the Coins ; presented to the Asiatic Society, by H.W. Torrens, Esq.

I, Greek and Carthagerian Coins in 5 packets :

1$ Ptolemy (copper)

2. Ptolemy (copper)

3. Two coins of Melite (Malta)

4, Five coins (copper) of Carthage.

5. Silver coin of Carthage.

504 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 114.

II. Bad Roman copper coins :

One packet, containing 35 various coins.

III, Roman Copper coins in 14 packets :

1. Minimus. 8. Carus.

2. Tiberius. 9. Maximianus.

3. Antoninus. 10. Licinius.

4, Faustina, ll. Constantinus. M., (11)

5. Lucilla, 12, Constantius (6)

6. Gordianus (2) 13. Magrentius.

7. Alexander. 14. Decentius-

IV. Copper coins of 12 Rajahs of Cashmere in 12 packets,

1. Taga Deva. 7. Kalasa Rajah.

2. Sangrama. 8. Sankara Vermma.

3. Sassala. 9. Ananta Rajah.

4. Didda Rani. 10. Taya Sinha.

5. Kshéma Gupta. 1]. Kersha Rajah.

6. Gopala Vermma. 12. Sugandha Rani.

V. Copper coins of some of the Mussulman Kings of Dehli.

. Three coins, Julal Shah, A.H. 841, (scarce.)

. Four coins, Naser ood deen Mahmood, I.A.H. 643 to 644.

. One coin, Noosrut Shah (usurper,) A.H. 790 to 800, (very scarce.)

. Four coins, Mahomed Tughlaks, A.H. 725 to 752.

. Four coins, Tughlak, A.H. 721 to 725.

. Four coins, Kutbood deen Moobaruk, A.H. 717 to 721.

. Four coins, Feroz 3rd, A.H. 742 to 790. :

. Four coins, Shums ood deen Iltumsh, A.H. 607 to 633.

. Three coins, Aboobukr, A.H. 791 to 793, (very scarce.)

. Four coins, Mahomed, A.H. 837 to 850.

. Four coins, Mahomed Adil, A.H. 960 to 962.

. Four coins, Islam Soor, 952 to 960.

. Four coins Ala ood deen Masagood, A.H. 640 to 643.

. Four coins, Naser ood deen Mahomed, 2d A.H. 796 to S16.

15. One coin, Sikander Humayun, A.H. 796, (extremely scarce.)

. Four coins, Bhatool, A-H. 854 to 894.

. Four coins, Mubaruk, 2d A.H. 824 to 837, (very scarce.)

. Four coins, Naser ood deen Mahomed, A.H. 793 to 796.

. Four coins, Ghias ood deen Bulbun, A.H. 664 to 685.

20. Four coins, Moaz ood deen Kai-Kob4d, A.H. 685 to 688,

21. Four coins, Ala ood deen Mahomed, A.H. 695 to 716,

SOO MANOakh Wd &

hom

p—

a a)

m OO bo

Se lll lil aad

OoaAN SD

1841.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 905

22. Four coins, Shahab ood deen Mahomed bin Sam, A.H. 588 to 602.

23. Four coins, Sheer Shah Soor, A.H. 947 to 952.

24. Four coins, Jelal ood deen Feroz, A.H. 688 to 695.

A beautiful set of casts of coins by V. Tregear Esq. was also presented.

Read the following List of Silver Coins of the Mehomedan Kings of

Delhi purchased from Lieut. A. Cunningham by the Society.

Silver Coins of the Mahummudan Kings of Delhi.

PUTHANS.

Price.

A.H. A. D. } Size. R.A.P. Remarks.

Type.

588. 1192, Shahabood deen Mahummud, 1 Rupee 10 0 0 Unique & unpublished.

643. 1245, Naser ood deen Mahmood, .1 do. Common.

664, 1265, Ghias ood deen Bullum,

685. 1286. Moozood deen, . - . « .

688. 1289. Jelal ood deen Feroz, . ..

I Rare.

L .

695. 1295. Alaoodeen Mahummud, . .1 do.

0 Very rare.

0 Rare.

0 Very Common.

O Very rare.

0 Common.

0 Rare.

Type.

0 Unique & unpublished.

0 Common.

717, 1317, Kutt ood deen Moobaruk, . .

CCS UE a

721, 1321. Ghias ood deen Tughlak, ..

Heads 4H ow

eeceooceocoeo

725. 1324. Muhummud Tughlak, . . . 11 Rupee 10 0

Oe tele Vectra rely «a bie dow) 10

947. 1540. Sheer Shah, Fareed ooddeen, 1 Rupee 2 0

952. 1545, Islam or Suleem Shah, . .1 do 20

13 at Rs. 5700

Very Common.

Common.

Mocuts.

963. 1556. Akber, Roundjul julaleh,. . Rupee 280

: Ditto, Squarejul julaleh, .. do. 280

pe, Char yareh rupee, , do. 280

1014, 1605. Ichaugir Square, in beauti- 7

ful eet wcgn, “fis Be do. 28.0

Ditto, ound. 2 3 ee do. 280

103%,’ 3628. ‘Shah Jehan, «. . . 2... do. 280

TOO aS oe aie Sener meme ae do. 280

i0es.71008. “Murad Buksh,. 2. 2). do. 5 0 0 Extremely scarce.

iiss. '6a5, Aurunezeb; . .« ss ks do. 280

ate O71. Behadur Shah, | ....: «2 « do. 280

1924, "743. Jehandar Shah, .. +... do. 4 0 0 Very scarce,

yoda. Berokhser, ..... 0 0: 0 ss do. 280

et ALG eG nd. dariAty: ois in ee) de: 10.0 0 ea i extremes

PGi. '749.- Ahmed'Shah,- 7.0 eo: ...wus do. 200

mot, tit. Stumpir Sam, . 1 6 |) do. 200

1173. 1759, Shah Jehan Sain, .. .. do. 1500

1173. 1759. Shah Alum, e e e e e e do. 1 8 0

1221. 1806. Akber Sain, oe ip | bis he do. 180

18 Coins, 66 0 0

13 57 0 0

31 123 0 0

N. B.—The Mogul rupees are all in the most perfect preservation, having been

selected out of 200 Coins at Delhi, at 2 Rupees each.

506 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 114.

The Secretary submitted a sample of the Tooloot paper presented by

Mr. John S. Torrens. In forwarding it that Gentleman writes, ‘1 was

‘reminded of it the other right on hearing the Curator speak of the

‘inconvenience caused by the rapid destruction of the labels, on the

‘ various specimens in the Society House. This paper is prepared at

‘ Nuddea, where it has long been made use of by the Brahmin’s in their

‘writings. It is proof against insects, and I am afraid to say the age

‘of some writings on it, which have been produced before me in a perfect

‘state of preservation. I am also told that moderately sized boxes,

‘lined with it will secure papers deposited in them from the attacks of

‘insects ; and from some experiments, 1 have myself made, I should think

‘the paper would be of much use in. libraries by merely pasting a slip

‘of it down the backs of books between the leather, another stitching.

‘In records in public offices, it would doubtless be of use.’

‘It may be as well to mention that it is impregnated with Sulphate

of Arsenic.’

Dr. H. H. Spry presented on behalf of Mr. R. N. C. Hamilton, Com-

missioner at Agra, a beautiful specimen of the musk deer of the Hima-

lya.

Mr. Hamilton in sending it, writes, ‘I have sent to you a skin of a

musk deer, quite perfect, the head is good, but from having been badly

packed in the hills beyond Almorah, it is crumpled up. I know not whe-

ther it will be acceptable to the museum of the Asiatic Society, but if so,

will you present it ? ’

The Hon’ble H. T. Prinsep Esq. presented several Chinese pictures

and books brought round in one of Aga Kurboloi Mahomed’s Ships,

which had been engaged in going to the northward for cattle for the

China expedition.

Read letter of 16th April, 1838, from Mr. C. C. Rafer, Secy. Royal So-

ciety of Northern Antiquities, Copenhagen, ‘offering the establishment

of a connexion between that institution and the Society of Bengal, and

with this view presenting a copy of the‘ Antiquities of America before

the time of Columbus.’ a Ste

Ordered that the civility be reciprocated by the presentation of a copy

of the Transactions of the Asiatic Society, and that Mr. Rafer be request-

ed to enroll the Society as subscriber to the publication.

Read the following letter from Mr. Acsoma Korosi of 22d May, 184].

1841.) Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 507

To H. W. Torrens, Esq,

Secretary to the Asiatic Society of Bengal.

Sir,—I beg to acknowledge the receipt of your letter dated on the

15th instant, acquainting me with the resolution of the Committee of pa-

pers, in answer to my letter to you.

I feel greatly obliged by the Asiatic Society’s kindness, generosity and

liberality towards me, in having acceped my resignation, in having de-

clined to accept the money, which I most willingly and respectfully offer-

ed to repay, and in having permitted me to remain at this place until my

departure from Calcutta, granting me in the same timea monthly allow,

ance of 50 rupees for which [I return herewith my respectful thanks,

and beg to be kindly excused from accepting the offered monthly salary ;

since I cannot employ the money. Should I be successful on my in-

tended journey to Tibet, to findan opportunity for improving myself in

the language and literature of that country, and to procure some interest-

ing works, I shall then take the liberty to apply to the Asiatic Society.

I sincerely declare herewith that, if not hindered by death, I intend to

return again to Calcutta, and to acquaint the Society with the result of

my peregrination.

I beg to remain with great respect,

Sir,

Your obliged and obedient servant,

A. Csoma Korést.

As. Society’s Rooms,

Calcutta,

22d May, 1841.

This letter having been read, the Hon’ble the President observed that

that eminent scholar was not less remarkable for the high and gentlemanly

feeling which he had always manifested in his intercourse with the So-

ciety than for his great erudition, perseverance and enterprize. The

expedition Mr. Csoma now meditated to Lassa would be undertaken

wholly on his own resources, its object being the noble and laudable

one of furthering the ends of Philological and Historical enquiry. The

President trusted that should Mr. Csoma find himself in a position dur-

ing his expedition into Thibet, to require aid, he would not fail to consi-

der the Asiatic Society of Bengal as gratified by being able to lend

their assistance to so esteemed a co-adjutor.

508 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 114.

The Asoka stone bearing the Palee Inscription, forwarded by Major

Thoresby. The mass of granite bearing the Asoka Inscription, fac-simile

and translation of which was published in No. 95 of the Asiatic Jour-

nal, was laid in the Society’s rooms for the inspection of the meeting,

having arrived only four days previously. This the most ancient (B.

C. 250) and one of the most valuable of the relics of Indian Antiquity in

the possession of the Society, was inspected with extreme interest by all

the Members present.

It is inadmirable preservation, and the characters are cut with dis-

tinctness and elegance. A careful comparison with the published fac-

simile shewing that it is perfectly correct. The Society have now by

the intervention of that zealous antiquarian Capt. Burt, and the obliging

kindness of Major Thoresby, been placed in possession of an Original

Edict of Asoka. It is the decyphering of the character in which the

Edicts of that Monarch are written, and the interesting and important

historical results deduced from the-interpretation of them, which have so

greatly contributed to raise the reputation of the Society among learned

bodies in Europe, the credit and the merit of the discovery being wholly

due to the late Mr. James Prinsep.

eS It was suggested that on receipt of the bust of tuat lamented and dis-

tinguished man, the inscription now before the meeting, could not be bet-

ter placed in the museum of the Society that at the foot of the sdasuiiety

which is to bear his effigy.

For the presentations and contributions, the thanks of the Society were

| accorded.